PIC18LF26 27 45 46 47 55 56 57K42 Data Sheet 40001919E PDF

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
28/40/44/48-Pin, Low-Power High-Performance

Microcontrollers with XLP Technology
Description
The PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 microcontrollers are available in 28/40/44/48-pin devices. These devices
feature a 12-bit ADC with Computation (ADC2) automating Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) techniques for advanced
touch sensing, averaging, filtering, oversampling and threshold comparison, Temperature Sensor, Vectored Interrupt
Controller with fixed latency for handling interrupts, System Bus Arbiter, Direct Memory Access capabilities, UART with
support for Asynchronous, DMX, DALI and LIN transmissions, SPI, I2C, memory features like Memory Access Partition
(MAP) to support customers in data protection and bootloader applications, and Device Information Area (DIA) which
stores factory calibration values to help improve temperature sensor accuracy.
Core Features Memory

• C Compiler Optimized RISC Architecture • Up to 128 KB Flash Program Memory
• Operating Speed: • Up to 8 KB Data SRAM Memory
- Up to 64 MHz clock input • Up to 1 KB Data EEPROM
• Memory Access Partition (MAP)
- 62.5 ns minimum instruction cycle
- Configurable boot and app region sizes with
• Two Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controllers individual write-protections
- Data transfers to SFR/GPR spaces from • Programmable Code Protection
either Program Flash Memory, Data • Device Information Area (DIA) stores:
EEPROM or SFR/GPR spaces - Unique IDs and Device IDs
- User-programmable source and destination - Temp Sensor factory-calibrated data
sizes - Fixed Voltage Reference calibrated data
- Hardware and software-triggered data • Device Configuration Information (DCI) stores:
transfers - Erase row size
• System Bus Arbiter with User-Configurable - Number of write latches per row
Priorities for Scanner and DMA1/DMA2 with - Number of user rows
respect to the main line and interrupt execution - Data EEPROM memory size
• Vectored Interrupt Capability - Pin count
- Selectable high/low priority
- Fixed interrupt latency Operating Characteristics
- Programmable vector table base address
• 31-Level Deep Hardware Stack • Operating Voltage Range:
• Low-Current Power-on Reset (POR) - 1.8V to 3.6V (PIC18LF26/27/45/46/55/56/
• Configurable Power-up Timer (PWRT) 57K42)
• Brown-Out Reset (BOR) - 2.3V to 5.5V (PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/
• Low-Power BOR (LPBOR) Option 57K42)
• Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT) • Temperature Range:
- Variable prescaler selection - Industrial: -40°C to 85°C
- Variable window size selection - Extended: -40°C to 125°C
- Configurable in hardware or software
Power-Saving Functionality
• Doze mode: Ability to run CPU core slower than
the system clock
• Idle mode: Ability to halt CPU core while internal
peripherals continue operating
• Sleep mode: Lowest power consumption
• Peripheral Module Disable (PMD):
- Ability to disable unused peripherals to
minimize power consumption
 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc. DS40001919E-page 1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
eXtreme Low-Power (XLP) Features • One SPI module:
- Configurable length bytes
• Sleep mode: 60 nA @ 1.8V, typical - Configurable length data packets
• Windowed Watchdog Timer: 720 nA @ 1.8V, - Receive-without-transmit option
typical - Transmit-without-receive option
• Secondary Oscillator: 580 nA @ 32 kHz - Transfer byte counter
• Operating Current: - Separate Transmit and Receive Buffers with
- 5 uA @ 32 kHz, 1.8V, typical 2-byte FIFO and DMA capabilities
- 65 uA/MHz @ 1.8V, typical • Two I2C modules, SMBus, PMBus™ compatible:
- Supports Standard-mode (100 kHz), Fast-
Digital Peripherals mode (400 kHz) and Fast-mode plus (1 MHz)
modes of operation
• Three 8-Bit Timers (TMR2/4/6) with Hardware
- Dedicated Address, Transmit and Receive
Limit Timer (HLT)
buffers
- Hardware monitoring and Fault detection
- Bus Collision Detection with arbitration
• Four 16-Bit Timers (TMR0/1/3/5)
- Bus time-out detection and handling
• Four Configurable Logic Cell (CLC):
- Multi-Master mode
- Integrated combinational and sequential logic
- Separate Transmit and Receive Buffers with
• Three Complementary Waveform Generators
2-byte FIFO and DMA capabilities
(CWGs):
- I2C, SMBus 2.0 and SMBus 3.0, and 1.8V
- Rising and falling edge dead-band control
input level selections
- Full-bridge, half-bridge, 1-channel drive
• Device I/O Port Features:
- Multiple signal sources
- 24 I/O pins (PIC18(L)F2xK42)
- Programmable dead band
- Fault-shutdown input
• Four Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) modules
- One input-only pin (RE3)
• Four 10-bit Pulse-Width Modulators (PWMs)
- Individually programmable I/O direction,
• Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO):
open-drain, slew rate, weak pull-up control
- Generates true linear frequency control
- Interrupt-on-change (on up to 25 I/O pins)
- High resolution using 20-bit accumulator and
- Three External Interrupt Pins
20-bit increment values
• Peripheral Pin Select (PPS):
• DSM: Data Signal Modulator
- Enables pin mapping of digital I/O
- Multiplex two carrier clocks, with glitch
• Signal Measurement Timer (SMT):
prevention feature
- 24-bit timer/counter with prescaler
- Multiple sources for each carrier
• Programmable CRC with Memory Scan:
- Reliable data/program memory monitoring for
fail-safe operation (e.g., Class B)
- Calculate CRC over any portion of program
memory or data EEPROM
• Two UART Modules:
- Modules are asynchronous and compatible
with RS-232 and RS-485
- One of the UART modules supports LIN
Master and Slave, DMX-512 mode, DALI
Gear and Device protocols
- Automatic and user-timed BREAK period
generation
- DMA Compatible
- Automatic checksums
- Programmable 1, 1.5, and 2 Stop bits
- Wake-up on BREAK reception

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Analog Peripherals Flexible Oscillator Structure
• Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation • High-Precision Internal Oscillator
(ADC2): - Selectable frequency range up to 64 MHz
- 12-bit with up to 35 external channels - ±1% at calibration (nominal)
- Automated post-processing • Low-Power Internal 32 kHz Oscillator
- Automated math functions on input signals: (LFINTOSC)
averaging, filter calculations, oversampling • External 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (SOSC)
and threshold comparison • External Oscillator Block with:
- Operates in Sleep - x4 PLL with external sources
- Integrated charge pump for improved low- - Three crystal/resonator modes up to 20 MHz
voltage operation - Three external clock modes up to 20 MHz
• Hardware Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD): • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor
- Automates touch sampling and reduces • Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)
software size and CPU usage when touch or - Ensures stability of crystal oscillator sources
proximity sensing is required
- Adjustable sample and hold capacitor array
- Two guard ring output drives
• Temperature Sensor
- Internal connection to ADC
- Can be calibrated for improved accuracy
• Two Comparators:
- Low-Power/High-Speed mode
- Fixed Voltage Reference at noninverting
input(s)
- Comparator outputs externally accessible
• 5-bit Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC):
- 5-bit resolution, rail-to-rail
- Positive Reference Selection
- Unbuffered I/O pin output
- Internal connections to ADCs and
comparators
• Voltage Reference
- Fixed Voltage Reference with 1.024V, 2.048V
and 4.096V output levels

PIC18(L)F2X/4X/5XK42 FAMILY TYPES
 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc.
8-bit/ (with HLT) /16-bit Timer
Direct Memory Access (DMA)

Program Flash Memory (KB)
Peripheral Module Disable

Signal Measurement Timer
Memory Access Partition

Window Watchdog Timer
Peripheral Pin Select

Vectored Interrupts
Data SRAM (bytes)
Zero-Cross Detect
Data EEPROM (B)
Data Sheet Index
CCP/10-bit PWM
Comparator
12-bit ADC2
5-bit DAC
Debug (1)
(WWDT)
I/O Pins
I2C/SPI
(SMT)
UART
CWG
NCO
CLC
(ch)
(ch)
Device
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
PIC18(L)F24K42 A 16 256 1024 25 24 1 2 3/4 Y Y 4/4 3 1 4 Y 2 Y Y 2 2/1 Y Y I
PIC18(L)F25K42 A 32 256 2048 25 24 1 2 3/4 Y Y 4/4 3 1 4 Y 2 Y Y 2 2/1 Y Y I
PIC18(L)F26K42 B 64 1024 4096 25 24 1 2 3/4 Y Y 4/4 3 1 4 Y 2 Y Y 2 2/1 Y Y I
Note 1: I – Debugging integrated on chip.
Data Sheet Index:
Shaded devices are not described in this document.
A: DS40001869 PIC18(L)F24/25K42 Data Sheet, 28-Pin
B: DS40001919 PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Data Sheet, 28/40/44/48-Pin
DS40001919E-page 4
Note: For other small form-factor package availability and marking information, visit
http://www.microchip.com/packaging or contact your local sales office.
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Pin Diagrams
28-pin SPDIP, SOIC, SSOP
VPP/MCLR/RE3 1 28 RB7/ICSPDAT
RA0 2 27 RB6/ICSPCLK
RA1 3 26 RB5
RA2 4 25 RB4
RA3 5 24 RB3
PIC18(L)F2XK42
RA4 6 23 RB2
RA5 7 22 RB1
VSS 8 21 RB0
RA7 9 20 VDD
RA6 10 19 VSS
RC0 11 18 RC7
RC1 12 17 RC6
RC2 13 16 RC5
RC3 14 15 RC4
Note: See Table 1 for location of all peripheral functions.
28-pin QFN (6x6x0.9mm), UQFN (6x6x0.5mm)

RE3/MCLR/VPP
RB6/ICSPCLK
RB7/ICSPDAT
RA0
RB5
RB4
RA1
28 27 26 25 24 23 22
RA2 1 21 RB3
RA3 2 20 RB2
RA4 3 19 RB1
RA5 4 PIC18(L)F2XK42 18 RB0
VSS 5 17 VDD
RA7 6 16 VSS
RA6 7 15 RC7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
RC5
RC0
RC6
RC2
RC3
RC4
RC1
Note 1: See Table 1 for location of all peripheral functions.

2: It is recommended that the exposed bottom pad be connected to VSS, however it must not be the
only VSS connection to the device.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
40-pin PDIP
VPP/MCLR/RE3 1 40 RB7/ICSPDAT
RA0 2 39 RB6/ICSPCLK
RA1 3 38 RB5
RA2 4 37 RB4
RA3 5 36 RB3
RA4 6 35 RB2
RA5 7 34 RB1
PIC18(L)F4XK42
RE0 8 33 RB0
RE1 9 32 VDD
RE2 10 31 VSS
VDD 11 30 RD7
VSS 12 29 RD6
RA7 13 28 RD5
RA6 14 27 RD4
RC0 15 26 RC7
RC1 16 25 RC6
RC2 17 24 RC5
RC3 18 23 RC4
RD0 19 22 RD3
RD1 20 21 RD2
40-pin UQFN (5x5x0.5mm)

RC5
RC6
RC4
RD3
RD2
RD1
RD0
RC3
RC2
RC1
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
RC7 1
RD4 2 30 RC0
RD5 3 29 RA6
RD6 4 28 RA7
RD7 5 27 VSS
VSS 6 PIC18(L)F4XK42 26 VDD
VDD 7 25 RE2
RB0 8 24 RE1
RB1 9 23 RE0
RB2 10 22 RA5
21 RA4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
RB3
RA1
RA2
RA3
RB4
RB5
VPP/MCLR/RE3
RA0
ICSPCLK/RB6
ICSPDAT/RB7

2: It is recommended that the exposed bottom pad be connected to VSS, however it must not be the only
VSS connection to the device.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
44-pin QFN (8x8x0.9mm)
RC6
RC5
RC4
RD3
RD2
RD1
RD0
RC3
RC2
RC1
RC0
43
42
41
40
39
37
36
35
34
44
38
RC7 1 33 RA6
RD4 2 32 RA7
RD5 3 31 NC
RD6 4 30 VSS
RD7 5 29 NC
VSS 6 PIC18(L)F4XK42 28 VDD
VDD 7 27 RE2
NC 8 26 RE1
RB0 9 25 RE0
RB1 10 24 RA5
RB2 11 23 RA4
22
21
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ICSPCLK/RB6
ICSPDAT/RB7
RB3
RB4
RB5
RA0
RA2
VPP/MCLR/RE3
RA1
NC
RA3
2: It is recommended that the exposed bottom pad be connected to VSS, however it must not be the
only VSS connection to the device.
44-pin TQFP (10x10x1mm)

RC5
RC6
RC4
RD3
RD2
RD1
RD0
RC3
RC2
RC1
NC
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
RC7 1 33 NC
RD4 2 32 RC0
RD5 3 31 RA6
4 30 RA7
RD6
RD7 5 29 VSS
6 PIC18(L)F4XK42 28 VDD
VSS
VDD 7 27 RE2
RB0 8 26 RE1
RB1 9 25 RE0
RB2 10 24 RA5
23 RA4
RB3 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
RA2
RA3
RB4
RB5
ICSPDAT/RB7
VPP/MCLR/RE3
RA0
RA1
ICSPCLK/RB6
NC
NC

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
48-pin TQFP (7x7x1mm)/
RC5
RC6
RC4
RD3
RD2
RD1
RD0
RC3
RC2
RF3
RF2
RF1
48-pin UQFN (6x6x0.5mm)
45
44
43
41
40
39
37
46
48
47
38
42
RC7 1 36 RF0
RD4 2 35 RC1
RD5 3
34 RC0
RD6 4 RA6
33
RD7 5 32 RA7
VSS 6 31 VSS
PIC18(L)F5XK42
VDD 7 30 VDD
RB0 8 29 RE2
RB1 9 28 RE1
RB2 10 27 RE0
RB3 11 26 RA5
RF4 12 25 RA4
24
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
VPP/MCLR/RE3
RF5
RF6
RF7
RB4
RB5
RA0
RA1
RA2
RA3
ICSPCLK/RB6
ICSPDAT/RB7

Pin Allocation Tables
TABLE 1: 28-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE (PIC18(L)F2XK42)

28-Pin SPDIP/SOIC/SSOP
Clock Reference (CLKR)
Interrupt-on-Change
Voltage Reference
Zero Cross Detect
CCP and PWM

28-Pin (U)QFN
Comparators
Timers/SMT
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
UART
Basic
ADC2
CWG
DSM
NCO
DAC
CLC
SPI
I2C
I/O
RA0 2 27 ANA0 — — C1IN0- — — — — — — — — CLCIN0(1) — — IOCA0 —

C2IN0-
C2IN1-
RA2 4 1 ANA2 VREF- DAC1OUT1 C1IN0+ — — — — — — — — — — — IOCA2 —
C2IN0+
RA3 5 2 ANA3 VREF+ — C1IN1+ — — — — MDCARL(1) — — — — — — IOCA3 —
RA4 6 3 ANA4 — — — — — — — MDCARH(1) T0CKI(1) — — — — — IOCA4 —
RA5 7 4 ANA5 — — — — — SS1(1) — MDSRC(1) — — — — — — IOCA5 —
RA6 10 7 ANA6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — IOCA6 OSC2
CLKOUT
RA7 9 6 ANA7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — IOCA7 OSC1
CLKIN
RB0 21 18 ANB0 — — C2IN1+ ZCD — — — — — CCP4(1) CWG1IN(1) — — — INT0(1) —
IOCB0
RB1 22 19 ANB1 — — C1IN3- — SCL2(3,4) — — — — — CWG2IN(1) — — — INT1(1) —
C2IN3- IOCB1
RB2 23 20 ANB2 — — — — SDA2(3,4) — — — — — CWG3IN(1) — — — INT2(1) —
IOCB2
RB3 24 21 ANB3 — — C1IN2- — — — — — — — — — — — IOCB3 —
C2IN2-
RB4 25 22 ANB4 — — — — — — — — T5G(1) — — — — — IOCB4 —
ADCACT(1)
RB5 26 23 ANB5 — — — — — — — — T1G(1) CCP3(1) — — — — IOCB5 —
RB6 27 24 ANB6 — — — — — — CTS2(1) — — — — CLCIN2(1) — — IOCB6 ICSPCLK
DS40001919E-page 9
RB7 28 25 ANB7 — DAC1OUT2 — — — — RX2(1) — T6IN(1) — — CLCIN3(1) — — IOCB7 ICSPDAT

Note 1: This is a PPS remappable input signal. The input function may be moved from the default location shown to one of several other PORTx pins.
2: All output signals shown in this row are PPS remappable.
3: This is a bidirectional signal. For normal module operation, the firmware should map this signal to the same pin in both the PPS input and PPS output registers.
4: These pins can be configured for I2C and SMB™ 3.0/2.0 logic levels; The SCLx/SDAx signals may be assigned to any of the RB1/RB2/RC3/RC4 pins. PPS assignments to the other pins (e.g., RA5) will operate, but input logic levels
will be standard TTL/ST as selected by the INLVL register, instead of the I2C specific or SMBUS input buffer thresholds.
TABLE 1: 28-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE (PIC18(L)F2XK42) (CONTINUED)
28-Pin SPDIP/SOIC/SSOP
Interrupt-on-Change
Voltage Reference
Zero Cross Detect
CCP and PWM

28-Pin (U)QFN
Comparators
Timers/SMT
UART
Basic
ADC2
CWG
DSM
NCO
DAC
CLC
SPI
I2C
I/O
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
RC0 11 8 ANC0 — — — — — — — — T1CKI(1) — — — — — IOCC0 SOSCO
T3CKI(1)
T3G(1)
SMTWIN1(1)
RC1 12 9 ANC1 — — — — — — — — SMTSIG1(1) CCP2(1) — — — — IOCC1 SOSCI
RC2 13 10 ANC2 — — — — — — — — T5CKI(1) CCP1(1) — — — — IOCC2 —
RC3 14 11 ANC3 — — — — SCL1(3,4) SCK1(1) — — T2IN(1) — — — — — IOCC3 —
RC4 15 12 ANC4 — — — — SDA1(3,4) SDI1(1) — — — — — — — — IOCC4 —
RC5 16 13 ANC5 — — — — — — — — T4IN(1) — — — — — IOCC5 —
RC6 17 14 ANC6 — — — — — — CTS1(1) — — — — — — — IOCC6 —
RC7 18 15 ANC7 — — — — — — RX1(1) — — — — — — — IOCC7 —
RE3 1 26 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — IOCE3 MCLR
VPP
VDD 20 17 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
VSS 8, 5, — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
19 16
OUT(2) — — ADGRDA — — C1OUT — SDA1 SS1 DTR1 DSM TMR0 CCP1 CWG1A CLC1OUT NCO CLKR — —
ADGRDB C2OUT SCL1 SCK1 RTS1 CCP2 CWG1B CLC2OUT
SDA2 SDO1 TX1 CCP3 CWG1C CLC3OUT
SCL2 DTR2 CCP4 CWG1D CLC4OUT
RTS2 PWM5OUT CWG2A
TX2 PWM6OUT CWG2B
PWM7OUT CWG2C
PWM8OUT CWG2D
CWG3A
CWG3B
CWG3C
CWG3D
DS40001919E-page 10

4: These pins can be configured for I2C and SMB™ 3.0/2.0 logic levels; The SCLx/SDAx signals may be assigned to any of the RB1/RB2/RC3/RC4 pins. PPS assignments to the other pins (e.g., RA5) will operate, but input logic levels
will be standard TTL/ST as selected by the INLVL register, instead of the I2C specific or SMBUS input buffer thresholds.
TABLE 2: 40/44-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE FOR PIC18(L)F4XK42
Interrupt-on-Change
Voltage Reference
Zero Cross Detect
CCP and PWM

Comparators
40-Pin UQFN
44-Pin TQFP
Timers/SMT
40-Pin PDIP
44-Pin QFN
UART
Basic
ADC2
CWG
DSM
NCO
DAC
CLC
SPI
I2C
I/O
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
RA0 2 19 17 19 ANA0 — — C1IN0- — — — — — — — — CLCIN0(1) — — IOCA0 —
C2IN0-
RA1 3 20 18 20 ANA1 — — C1IN1- — — — — — — — — CLCIN1(1) — — IOCA1 —
C2IN1-
RA2 4 21 19 21 ANA2 VREF- DAC1OUT1 C1IN0+ — — — — — — — — — — — IOCA2 —
C2IN0+
RA3 5 22 20 22 ANA3 VREF+ — C1IN1+ — — — — MDCARL(1) — — — — — — IOCA3 —
RA4 6 23 21 23 ANA4 — — — — — — — MDCARH(1) T0CKI(1) — — — — — IOCA4 —
RA5 7 24 22 24 ANA5 — — — — — SS1(1) — MDSRC(1) — — — — — — IOCA5 —
RA6 14 31 29 33 ANA6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — IOCA6 OSC2
CLKOUT
RA7 13 30 28 32 ANA7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — IOCA7 OSC1
CLKIN
RB0 33 8 8 9 ANB0 — — C2IN1+ ZCD — — — — — CCP4(1) CWG1IN(1) — — — INT0(1) —
IOCB0
RB1 34 9 9 10 ANB1 — — C1IN3- — SCL2(3,4) — — — — — CWG2IN(1) — — — INT1(1) —
C2IN3- IOCB1
RB2 35 10 10 11 ANB2 — — — — SDA2(3,4) — — — — — CWG3IN(1) — — — INT2(1) —
IOCB2
RB3 36 11 11 12 ANB3 — — C1IN2- — — — — — — — — — — — IOCB3 —
C2IN2-
RB4 37 14 12 14 ANB4 — — — — — — — — T5G(1) — — — — — IOCB4 —
ADCACT(1)
RB5 38 15 13 15 ANB5 — — — — — — — — T1G(1) CCP3(1) — — — — IOCB5 —
RB6 39 16 14 16 ANB6 — — — — — — CTS2(1) — - — — CLCIN2(1) — — IOCB6 ICSPCLK
RB7 40 17 15 17 ANB7 — DAC1OUT2 — — — — RX2(1) — T6IN(1) — — CLCIN3(1) — — IOCB7 ICSPDAT
RC0 15 32 30 34 ANC0 — — — — — — — — T1CKI(1) — — — — — IOCC0 SOSCO
T3CKI(1)
T3G(1)
DS40001919E-page 11
SMTWIN1(1)
RC1 16 35 31 35 ANC1 — — — — — — — — SMTSIG1(1) CCP2(1) — — — — IOCC1 SOSCI
RC2 17 36 32 36 ANC2 — — — — — — — — T5CKI(1) CCP1(1) — — — — IOCC2 —
4: These pins can be configured for I2C and SMB™ 3.0/2.0 logic levels; The SCLx/SDAx signals may be assigned to any of the RB1/RB2/RC3/RC4/RD0/RD1 pins. PPS assignments to the other pins (e.g., RA5) will operate, but input
logic levels will be standard TTL/ST as selected by the INLVL register, instead of the I2C specific or SMBus input buffer thresholds.
TABLE 2: 40/44-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE FOR PIC18(L)F4XK42 (CONTINUED)
Interrupt-on-Change
Voltage Reference
Zero Cross Detect
CCP and PWM

Comparators
40-Pin UQFN
44-Pin TQFP
Timers/SMT
40-Pin PDIP
44-Pin QFN
UART
Basic
ADC2
CWG
DSM
NCO
DAC
CLC
SPI
I2C
I/O
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
RC3 18 37 33 37 ANC3 — — — — SCL1(3,4) SCK1(1) — — T2IN(1) — — — — — IOCC3 —
RC4 23 42 38 42 ANC4 — — — — SDA1(3,4) SDI1(1) — — — — — — — — IOCC4 —
RC5 24 43 39 43 ANC5 — — — — — — — — T4IN(1) — — — — — IOCC5 —
RC6 25 44 40 44 ANC6 — — — — — — CTS1(1) — — — — — — — IOCC6 —
RC7 26 1 1 1 ANC7 — — — — — — RX1(1) — — — — — — — IOCC7 —
RD0 19 38 34 38 AND0 — — — — —(4) — — — — — — — — — — —
RD1 20 39 35 39 AND1 — — — — —(4) — — — — — — — — — — —
RD2 21 40 36 40 AND2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD3 22 41 37 41 AND3 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD4 27 2 2 2 AND4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD5 28 3 3 3 AND5 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD6 29 4 4 4 AND6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD7 30 5 5 5 AND7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RE0 8 25 23 25 ANE0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RE1 9 26 24 26 ANE1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RE2 10 27 25 27 ANE2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RE3 1 18 16 18 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — IOCE3 MCLR
VPP
VDD 11, 7, 7, 7, — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
32 28 26 28
VSS 12, 6, 6, 6, — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
31 29 27 30
DS40001919E-page 12
TABLE 2: 40/44-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE FOR PIC18(L)F4XK42 (CONTINUED)
Interrupt-on-Change
Voltage Reference
Zero Cross Detect
CCP and PWM

Comparators
40-Pin UQFN
44-Pin TQFP
Timers/SMT
40-Pin PDIP
44-Pin QFN
UART
Basic
ADC2
CWG
DSM
NCO
DAC
CLC
SPI
I2C
I/O
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
OUT(2) — — — — ADGRDA — — C1OUT — SDA1 SS1 DTR1 DSM TMR0 CCP1 CWG1A CLC1OUT NCO CLKR — —
RTS2 PWM5OUT CWG2A
TX2 PWM6OUT CWG2B
PWM7OUT CWG2C
PWM8OUT CWG2D
CWG3A
CWG3B
CWG3C
CWG3D
DS40001919E-page 13
TABLE 3: 48-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE FOR PIC18(L)F5XK42
Interrupt-on-Change
Voltage Reference
Zero Cross Detect
CCP and PWM

Comparators
48-Pin UQFN
48-Pin TQFP
Timers/SMT
UART
Basic
ADC2
CWG
DSM
NCO
DAC
CLC
SPI
I2C
I/O
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
C2IN0-
C2IN1-
RA2 23 23 ANA2 VREF- DAC1OUT1 C1IN0+ — — — — — — — — — — — IOCA2 —
C2IN0+
RA3 24 24 ANA3 VREF+ — C1IN1+ — — — — MDCARL(1) - — — — — — IOCA3 —
RA4 25 25 ANA4 — — — — — — — MDCARH(1) T0CKI(1) — — — — — IOCA4 —
RA5 26 26 ANA5 — — — — — SS1(1) — MDSRC(1) — — — — — — IOCA5 —
RA6 33 33 ANA6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — IOCA6 OSC2
CLKOUT
RA7 32 32 ANA7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — IOCA7 OSC1
CLKIN
RB0 8 8 ANB0 — — C2IN1+ ZCD — — — — — CCP4(1) CWG1IN(1) — — — INT0(1) —
IOCB0
RB1 9 9 ANB1 — — C1IN3- — SCL2(3,4) — — — — — CWG2IN(1) — — — INT1(1) —
C2IN3- IOCB1
RB2 10 10 ANB2 — — — — SDA2(3,4) — — — — — CWG3IN(1) — — — INT2(1) —
IOCB2
RB3 11 11 ANB3 — — C1IN2- — — — — — — — — — — — IOCB3 —
C2IN2-
RB4 16 16 ANB4 — — — — — — — — T5G(1) — — — — — IOCB4 —
ADCACT(1)
RB5 17 17 ANB5 — — — — — — — — T1G(1) CCP3(1) - — — — IOCB5 —
RB6 18 18 ANB6 — — — — — — CTS2(1) — — — — CLCIN2(1) — — IOCB6 ICSPCLK
RB7 19 19 ANB7 — DAC1OUT2 — — — — RX2(1) — T6IN(1) — — CLCIN3(1) — — IOCB7 ICSPDAT
DS40001919E-page 14
RC0 34 34 ANC0 — — — — — — — — T1CKI(1) — — — — — IOCC0 SOSCO

T3CKI(1)
T3G(1)
SMTWIN1(1)
TABLE 3: 48-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE FOR PIC18(L)F5XK42 (CONTINUED)
Interrupt-on-Change
Voltage Reference
Zero Cross Detect
CCP and PWM

Comparators
48-Pin UQFN
48-Pin TQFP
Timers/SMT
UART
Basic
ADC2
CWG
DSM
NCO
DAC
CLC
SPI
I2C
I/O
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
RC1 35 35 ANC1 — - — — — — — — SMTSIG1(1) CCP2(1) — — — — IOCC1 SOSCI
RC2 40 40 ANC2 — - — — — — — — T5CKI(1) CCP1(1) — — — — IOCC2 —
RC3 41 41 ANC3 — - — — SCL1(3,4) SCK1(1) — — T2IN(1) - — — — — IOCC3 —
RC4 46 46 ANC4 — — — — SDA1(3,4) SDI1(1) — — — — — — — — IOCC4 —
RC5 47 47 ANC5 — — — — — — — — T4IN(1) — — — — — IOCC5 —
(1)
RC6 48 48 ANC6 — — — — — — CTS1 — — — — — — — IOCC6 —
RC7 1 1 ANC7 — — — — — — RX1(1) — — — — — — — IOCC7 —
RD0 42 42 AND0 — — — — —(4) — — — — — — — — — — —
RD1 43 43 AND1 — — — — —(4) — — — — — — — — — — —
RD2 44 44 AND2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD3 45 45 AND3 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD4 2 2 AND4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD5 3 3 AND5 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD6 4 4 AND6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RD7 5 5 AND7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RE0 27 27 ANE0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RE1 28 28 ANE1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RE2 29 29 ANE2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RE3 20 20 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — IOCE3 MCLR
VPP
RF0 36 36 ANF0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RF1 37 37 ANF1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RF2 38 38 ANF2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RF3 39 39 ANF3 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RF4 12 12 ANF4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
DS40001919E-page 15
RF5 13 13 ANF5 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RF6 14 14 ANF6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
RF7 15 15 ANF7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
TABLE 3: 48-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE FOR PIC18(L)F5XK42 (CONTINUED)
Interrupt-on-Change
Voltage Reference
Zero Cross Detect
CCP and PWM

Comparators
48-Pin UQFN
48-Pin TQFP
Timers/SMT
UART
Basic
ADC2
CWG
DSM
NCO
DAC
CLC
SPI
I2C
I/O
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
VDD 7, 7, — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
30 30
VSS 6, 6, — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
31 31
OUT(2) — — ADGRDA — — C1OUT — SDA1 SS1 DTR1 DSM TMR0 CCP1 CWG1A CLC1OUT NCO CLKR — —
RTS2 PWM5OUT CWG2A
TX2 PWM6OUT CWG2B
PWM7OUT CWG2C
PWM8OUT CWG2D
CWG3A
CWG3B
CWG3C
CWG3D
DS40001919E-page 16
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Table of Contents
1.0 Device Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 19
2.0 Guidelines for Getting Started with PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Microcontrollers ................................................... 23
3.0 PIC18 CPU................................................................................................................................................................................. 26
4.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 33
5.0 Device Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 65
6.0 Resets ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 81
7.0 Oscillator Module (with Fail-Safe Clock Monitor) ....................................................................................................................... 92
8.0 Reference Clock Output Module .............................................................................................................................................. 111
9.0 Interrupt Controller ................................................................................................................................................................... 115
10.0 Power-Saving Operation Modes .............................................................................................................................................. 170
11.0 Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT) ...................................................................................................................................... 178
12.0 8x8 Hardware Multiplier............................................................................................................................................................ 187
13.0 Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) Control.......................................................................................................................................... 189
14.0 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner............................................................................................ 213
15.0 Direct Memory Access (DMA) .................................................................................................................................................. 228
16.0 I/O Ports ................................................................................................................................................................................... 260
17.0 Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) Module ........................................................................................................................................ 275
18.0 Interrupt-on-Change ................................................................................................................................................................. 286
19.0 Peripheral Module Disable (PMD)............................................................................................................................................ 290
20.0 Timer0 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 299
21.0 Timer1/3/5 Module with Gate Control....................................................................................................................................... 305
22.0 Timer2/4/6 Module ................................................................................................................................................................... 320
23.0 Capture/Compare/PWM Module .............................................................................................................................................. 342
24.0 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) ............................................................................................................................................... 355
25.0 Signal Measurement Timer (SMT) ........................................................................................................................................... 362
26.0 Complementary Waveform Generator (CWG) Module ............................................................................................................ 406
27.0 Configurable Logic Cell (CLC).................................................................................................................................................. 434
28.0 Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) Module ..................................................................................................................... 449
29.0 Zero-Cross Detection (ZCD) Module........................................................................................................................................ 459
30.0 Data Signal Modulator (DSM) Module...................................................................................................................................... 464
31.0 Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (UART) With Protocol Support ....................................................................... 475
32.0 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Module.................................................................................................................................. 513
33.0 I2C Module ............................................................................................................................................................................... 545
34.0 Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) .............................................................................................................................................. 598
35.0 Temperature Indicator Module ................................................................................................................................................. 600
36.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation (ADC2) Module ............................................................................................... 602
37.0 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module...................................................................................................................... 640
38.0 Comparator Module ................................................................................................................................................................. 644
39.0 High/Low-Voltage Detect (HLVD)............................................................................................................................................. 653
40.0 In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) ............................................................................................................................... 661
41.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 663
42.0 Register Summary.................................................................................................................................................................... 717
43.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 734
44.0 Electrical Specifications............................................................................................................................................................ 738
45.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Charts ....................................................................................................................... 770
46.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 798
The Microchip WebSite ..................................................................................................................................................................... 831
Customer Change Notification Service ............................................................................................................................................. 831
Customer Support ............................................................................................................................................................................. 831
Product Identification System ........................................................................................................................................................... 832

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS

It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip
products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and
enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced.
If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via
E-mail at docerrors@microchip.com. We welcome your feedback.
Most Current Data Sheet

To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Website at:
http://www.microchip.com
You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page.
The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000000A is version A of document DS30000000).
Errata
An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current
devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision
of silicon and revision of document to which it applies.
To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following:
• Microchip’s Worldwide Website; http://www.microchip.com
• Your local Microchip sales office (see last page)
When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are
using.
Customer Notification System

Register on our website at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW • Serial Peripheral Interface: The Serial
Peripheral Interface (SPI) module is a
This document contains device specific information for synchronous serial data communication bus that
the following devices: operates in Full-Duplex mode. Devices
• PIC18F26K42 • PIC18LF26K42 communicate in a master/slave environment
where the master device initiates the
• PIC18F27K42 • PIC18LF27K42 communication. A slave device is controlled
• PIC18F45K42 • PIC18LF45K42 through a Chip Select known as Slave Select.
• PIC18F46K42 • PIC18LF46K42 Example slave devices include serial EEPROMs,
shift registers, display drivers, A/D converters, or
• PIC18F47K42 • PIC18LF47K42
another PIC.
• PIC18F55K42 • PIC18LF55K42
• I2C Module: The I2C module provides a
• PIC18F56K42 • PIC18LF56K42 synchronous interface between the
• PIC18F57K42 • PIC18LF57K42 microcontroller and other I2C-compatible devices
using the two-wire I2C serial bus. Devices
• This family offers the advantages of all PIC18
communicate in a master/slave environment. The
microcontrollers – namely, high computational
I2C bus specifies two signal connections - Serial
performance at an economical price – with the
Clock (SCL) and Serial Data (SDA). Both the SCL
addition of high-endurance Program Flash Mem-
and SDA connections are bidirectional open-drain
ory, Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmit-
lines, each requiring pull-up resistors to the
ter (UART), Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI),
supply voltage.
Inter-integrated Circuit (I2C), Direct Memory
Access (DMA), Configurable Logic Cells (CLC), • 12-bit A/D Converter with Computation: This
Signal Measurement Timer (SMT), Numerically module incorporates programmable acquisition
Controlled Oscillator (NCO), and Analog-to-Digital time, allowing for a channel to be selected and a
Converter with Computation (ADC2). conversion to be initiated without waiting for a
sampling period and thus, reduces code
overhead. It has a new module called ADC2 with
1.1 New Features computation features, which provides a digital
• Direct Memory Access Controller: The Direct filter and threshold interrupt functions.
Memory Access (DMA) Controller is designed to
service data transfers between different memory 1.2 Details on Individual Family
regions directly without intervention from the Members
CPU. By eliminating the need for CPU-intensive
Devices in the PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
management of handling interrupts intended for
family are available in 28-pin and 40/44/48-pin
data transfers, the CPU now can spend more time
packages. The block diagram for this device is shown
on other tasks.
in Figure 3-1.
• Vectored Interrupt Controller: The Vectored
Interrupt Controller module reduces the numerous The similarities and differences among the devices are
peripheral interrupt request signals to a single listed in the PIC18(L)F2X/4X/5XK42 Family Types
interrupt request signal to the CPU. It assembles Table (page 4). The pinouts for all devices are listed in
all of the interrupt request signals and resolves Table 1.
the interrupts based on both a fixed natural order
priority and a user-assigned priority, thereby
eliminating scanning of interrupt sources.
• Universal Asynchronous Receiver
Transmitter: The Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter (UART) module is a serial
I/O communications peripheral. It contains all the
clock generators, shift registers and data buffers
necessary to perform an input or output serial
data transfer, independent of device program
execution. The UART can be configured as a full-
duplex asynchronous system or one of several
automated protocols. Full-Duplex mode is useful
for communications with peripheral systems, with
DMX/DALI/LIN support.

TABLE 1-1: DEVICE FEATURES

Features PIC18(L)F26K42 PIC18(L)F27K42 PIC18(L)F45K42 PIC18(L)F46K42 PIC18(L)F47K42 PIC18(L)F55K42 PIC18(L)F56K42 PIC18(L)F57K42
Program Memory
65536 131072 32768 65536 131072 32768 65536 131072
(Bytes)
Program Memory
32768 65536 16384 32768 65536 16384 32768 65536
(Instructions)
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Data Memory (Bytes) 4096 8192 2048 4096 8192 2048 4096 8192
Data EEPROM
1024 1024 256 1024 1024 256 1024 1024
Memory (Bytes)
28-pin SPDIP 28-pin SPDIP
40-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP
28-pin SOIC 28-pin SOIC
40-pin UQFN 40-pin UQFN 40-pin UQFN 48-pin TQFP 48-pin TQFP 48-pin TQFP
Packages 28-pin SSOP 28-pin SSOP
44-pin TQFP 44-pin TQFP 44-pin TQFP 48-pin UQFN 48-pin UQFN 48-pin UQFN
28-pin QFN 28-pin QFN
44-pin QFN 44-pin QFN 44-pin QFN
28-pin UQFN 28-pin UQFN
I/O Ports A,B,C,E(1) A,B,C,E(1) A,B,C,D, E(1) A,B,C,D, E(1) A,B,C,D, E(1) A,B,C,D, E(1), F A,B,C,D, E(1), F A,B,C,D, E(1), F
12-Bit Analog-to-Digital
Conversion Module
5 internal 5 internal 5 internal 5 internal 5 internal 5 internal 5 internal 5 internal
(ADC2) with
24 external 24 external 35 external 35 external 35 external 43 external 43 external 43 external
Computation
Accelerator
Capture/Compare/
4
PWM Modules (CCP)
10-Bit Pulse-Width
4
Modulator (PWM)
Timers (16-/8-bit) 4/3
Serial Communications 1 UART, 1 UART with DMX/DALI/LIN, 2 I2C, 1 SPI
Complementary
Waveform Generator 3
(CWG)
Zero-Cross Detect
1
(ZCD)
Data Signal Modulator
1
DS40001919E-page 20
(DSM)
Signal Measurement
1
Timer (SMT)
5-bit Digital to Analog
1
Converter (DAC)
Numerically Controlled
1
Oscillator (NCO)
TABLE 1-1: DEVICE FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Features PIC18(L)F26K42 PIC18(L)F27K42 PIC18(L)F45K42 PIC18(L)F46K42 PIC18(L)F47K42 PIC18(L)F55K42 PIC18(L)F56K42 PIC18(L)F57K42

Comparator Module 2
Direct Memory Access
2
(DMA)
Configurable Logic Cell
4
(CLC)
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Peripheral Pin Select
Yes
(PPS)
Peripheral Module
Yes
Disable (PMD)
16-bit CRC with
Yes
Scanner
Programmable High/
Low-Voltage Detect Yes
(HLVD)
POR, Programmable BOR,
RESET Instruction,
Stack Overflow,
Resets (and Delays)
Stack Underflow
(PWRT, OST),
MCLR, WDT, MEMV
81 Instructions;
Instruction Set
87 with Extended Instruction Set enabled
Maximum Operating
64 MHz
Frequency
Note 1: PORTE is partially implemented. Pin RE3 is an input-only pin on 28/40/44/48-pin variants. In addition to that, on 40/44/48-pin variants, PORTE also
consists of RE0, RE1 and RE2 pins.
DS40001919E-page 21
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1.3 Register and Bit naming 1.3.2.3 Bit Fields
conventions Bit fields are two or more adjacent bits in the same
register. For example, the four Least Significant bits of
1.3.1 REGISTER NAMES the T0CON0 register contain the output prescaler
When there are multiple instances of the same select bits. The short name for this field is OUTPS and
peripheral in a device, the peripheral control registers the long name is T0OUTPS. Bit field access is only
will be depicted as the concatenation of a peripheral possible in C programs. The following example
identifier, peripheral instance, and control identifier. demonstrates a C program instruction for setting the
The control registers section will show just one Timer0 output prescaler to the 1:6 Postscaler:
instance of all the register names with an ‘x’ in the place T0CON0bits.OUTPS = 0x5;
of the peripheral instance number. This naming
Individual bits in a bit field can also be accessed with
convention may also be applied to peripherals when
long and short bit names. Each bit is the field name
there is only one instance of that peripheral in the
appended with the number of the bit position within the
device to maintain compatibility with other devices in
field. For example, the Most Significant mode bit has
the family that contain more than one.
the short bit name OUTPS3. The following two exam-
1.3.2 BIT NAMES ples demonstrate assembly program sequences for
setting the Timer0 output prescaler to 1:6 Postscaler:
There are two variants for bit names:
Example 1:
• Short name: Bit function abbreviation
MOVLW ~(1<<OUTPS3 | 1<<OUTPS1)
• Long name: Peripheral abbreviation + short name ANDWF T0CON0,F
MOVLW 1<<OUTPS2 | 1<<OUTPS0
1.3.2.1 Short Bit Names IORWF T0CON0,F
Short bit names are an abbreviation for the bit function. Example 2:
For example, some peripherals are enabled with the
BCF T0CON0,OUTPS3
EN bit. The bit names shown in the registers are the BSF T0CON0,OUTPS2
short name variant. BCF T0CON0,OUTPS1
Short bit names are useful when accessing bits in C BSF T0CON0,OUTPS0
programs. The general format for accessing bits by the
short name is RegisterNamebits.ShortName. For 1.3.3 REGISTER AND BIT NAMING
example, the enable bit, EN, in the T0CON0 register EXCEPTIONS
can be set in C programs with the instruction
T0CON0bits.EN = 1. 1.3.3.1 Status, Interrupt, and Mirror Bits
Short names are generally not useful in assembly Status, interrupt enables, interrupt flags, and mirror bits
programs because the same name may be used by are contained in registers that span more than one
different peripherals in different bit positions. When this peripheral. In these cases, the bit name shown is
occurs, during the include file generation, all instances unique so there is no prefix or short name variant.
of that short bit name are appended with an underscore
plus the name of the register in which the bit resides to
avoid naming contentions.
1.3.2.2 Long Bit Names

Long bit names are constructed by adding a peripheral
abbreviation prefix to the short name. The prefix is
unique to the peripheral thereby making every long bit
name unique. The long bit name for the Timer0 enable
bit is the Timer0 prefix, T0, appended with the enable
bit short name, EN, resulting in the unique bit name
T0EN.
Long bit names are useful in both C and assembly
programs. For example, in C the T0CON0 enable bit
can be set with the T0EN = 1 instruction. In assembly,
this bit can be set with the BSF T0CON0,T0EN
instruction.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
2.0 GUIDELINES FOR GETTING 2.2 Power Supply Pins
STARTED WITH PIC18(L)F26/
2.2.1 DECOUPLING CAPACITORS
27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
The use of decoupling capacitors on every pair of
MICROCONTROLLERS power supply pins (VDD and VSS) is required.
Consider the following criteria when using decoupling
2.1 Basic Connection Requirements
capacitors:
Getting started with the PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/ • Value and type of capacitor: A 0.1 F (100 nF),
56/57K42 family of 8-bit microcontrollers requires 10-20V capacitor is recommended. The capacitor
attention to a minimal set of device pin connections should be a low-ESR device, with a resonance
before proceeding with development. frequency in the range of 200 MHz and higher.
The following pins must always be connected: Ceramic capacitors are recommended.
• All VDD and VSS pins (see Section 2.2 “Power • Placement on the printed circuit board: The
Supply Pins”) decoupling capacitors should be placed as close
to the pins as possible. It is recommended to
• MCLR pin (see Section 2.3 “Master Clear (MCLR)
place the capacitors on the same side of the
Pin”)
board as the device. If space is constricted, the
These pins must also be connected if they are being capacitor can be placed on another layer on the
used in the end application: PCB using a via; however, make sure that the
• ICSPCLK/ICSPDAT pins used for In-Circuit Serial trace length from the pin to the capacitor is no
Programming™ (ICSP™) and debugging purposes greater than 0.25 inch (6 mm).
(see Section 2.4 “ICSP™ Pins”) • Handling high-frequency noise: If the board is
• OSCI and OSCO pins when an external oscillator experiencing high-frequency noise (upward of
source is used (see Section 2.5 “External tens of MHz), add a second ceramic type
Oscillator Pins”) capacitor in parallel to the above described
decoupling capacitor. The value of the second
Additionally, the following pins may be required:
capacitor can be in the range of 0.01 F to
• VREF+/VREF- pins are used when external voltage 0.001 F. Place this second capacitor next to
reference for analog modules is implemented each primary decoupling capacitor. In high-speed
The minimum mandatory connections are shown in circuit designs, consider implementing a decade
Figure 2-1. pair of capacitances as close to the power and
ground pins as possible (e.g., 0.1 F in parallel
with 0.001 F).
FIGURE 2-1: RECOMMENDED
MINIMUM CONNECTIONS • Maximizing performance: On the board layout
from the power supply circuit, run the power and
return traces to the decoupling capacitors first,
Rev. 10-000249A
9/1/2015
VDD C2 and then to the device pins. This ensures that the
decoupling capacitors are first in the power chain.
R1
Equally important is to keep the trace length
VDD
Vss
R2
MCLR between the capacitor and the power pins to a
C1 minimum, thereby reducing PCB trace
inductance.
PIC18(L)Fxxxxx
Vss 2.2.2 TANK CAPACITORS
On boards with power traces running longer than
six inches in length, it is suggested to use a tank
Key (all values are recommendations): capacitor for integrated circuits, including
C1 and C2 : 0.1 PF, 20V ceramic microcontrollers, to supply a local power source. The
R1: 10 kΩ value of the tank capacitor should be determined based
R2: 100Ω to 470Ω on the trace resistance that connects the power supply
source to the device, and the maximum current drawn
by the device in the application. In other words, select
the tank capacitor so that it meets the acceptable
voltage sag at the device. Typical values range from
4.7 F to 47 F.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
2.3 Master Clear (MCLR) Pin 2.4 ICSP™ Pins
The MCLR pin provides two specific device The ICSPCLK and ICSPDAT pins are used for In-
functions: Device Reset, and Device Programming Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) and debugging
and Debugging. If programming and debugging are purposes. It is recommended to keep the trace length
not required in the end application, a direct between the ICSP connector and the ICSP pins on the
connection to VDD may be all that is required. The device as short as possible. If the ICSP connector is
addition of other components, to help increase the expected to experience an ESD event, a series resistor
application’s resistance to spurious Resets from is recommended, with the value in the range of a few
voltage sags, may be beneficial. A typical tens of ohms, not to exceed 100Ω.
configuration is shown in Figure 2-1. Other circuit Pull-up resistors, series diodes and capacitors on the
designs may be implemented, depending on the ICSPCLK and ICSPDAT pins are not recommended as
application requirements. they will interfere with the programmer/debugger
During programming and debugging, the resistance communications to the device. If such discrete
and capacitance that can be added to the pin must components are an application requirement, they
be considered. Device programmers and debuggers should be removed from the circuit during
drive the MCLR pin. Consequently, specific voltage programming and debugging. Alternatively, refer to the
levels (VIH and VIL) and fast signal transitions must AC/DC characteristics and timing requirements
not be adversely affected. Therefore, specific values information in the respective device Flash
of R1 and C1 will need to be adjusted based on the programming specification for information on
application and PCB requirements. For example, it is capacitive loading limits, and pin input voltage high
recommended that the capacitor, C1, be isolated (VIH) and input low (VIL) requirements.
from the MCLR pin during programming and For device emulation, ensure that the “Communication
debugging operations by using a jumper (Figure 2-2). Channel Select” (i.e., ICSPCLK/ICSPDAT pins),
The jumper is replaced for normal run-time programmed into the device, matches the physical
operations. connections for the ICSP to the Microchip debugger/
Any components associated with the MCLR pin emulator tool.
should be placed within 0.25 inch (6 mm) of the pin. For more information on available Microchip
development tools connection requirements, refer to
FIGURE 2-2: EXAMPLE OF MCLR PIN Section 43.0 “Development Support”.
CONNECTIONS
VDD
R1
R2
MCLR
PIC18(L)Fxxxxx
JP
C1
Note 1: R1  10 k is recommended. A suggested

starting value is 10 k. Ensure that the
MCLR pin VIH and VIL specifications are met.
2: R2  470 will limit any current flowing into
MCLR from the external capacitor, C1, in the
event of MCLR pin breakdown, due to
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or Electrical
Overstress (EOS). Ensure that the MCLR pin
VIH and VIL specifications are met.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
2.5 External Oscillator Pins 2.6 Unused I/Os
Many microcontrollers have options for at least two Unused I/O pins should be configured as outputs and
oscillators: a high-frequency primary oscillator and a driven to a logic low state. Alternatively, connect a 1 kΩ
low-frequency secondary oscillator (refer to Section to 10 kΩ resistor to VSS on unused pins and drive the
7.0 “Oscillator Module (with Fail-Safe Clock output to logic low.
Monitor)” for details).
The oscillator circuit should be placed on the same FIGURE 2-3: SUGGESTED
side of the board as the device. Place the oscillator PLACEMENT OF THE
circuit close to the respective oscillator pins with no OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
more than 0.5 inch (12 mm) between the circuit
Single-Sided and In-Line Layouts:
components and the pins. The load capacitors should
be placed next to the oscillator itself, on the same side Copper Pour Primary Oscillator
of the board. (tied to ground) Crystal
Use a grounded copper pour around the oscillator DEVICE PINS

circuit to isolate it from surrounding circuits. The
grounded copper pour should be routed directly to the
MCU ground. Do not run any signal traces or power
Primary OSC1
traces inside the ground pour. Also, if using a two-sided Oscillator
board, avoid any traces on the other side of the board C1 ` OSC2
where the crystal is placed.
C2 GND
Layout suggestions are shown in Figure 2-3. In-line `
packages may be handled with a single-sided layout
SOSCO
that completely encompasses the oscillator pins. With
fine-pitch packages, it is not always possible to com- SOSCI
Secondary Oscillator
pletely surround the pins and components. A suitable (SOSC)
solution is to tie the broken guard sections to a mirrored Crystal `
ground layer. In all cases, the guard trace(s) must be
returned to ground.
SOSC: C1 SOSC: C2
In planning the application’s routing and I/O
assignments, ensure that adjacent port pins, and other
signals in close proximity to the oscillator, are benign
(i.e., free of high frequencies, short rise and fall times, Fine-Pitch (Dual-Sided) Layouts:
and other similar noise). Top Layer Copper Pour
(tied to ground)
For additional information and design guidance on
oscillator circuits, refer to these Microchip application
notes, available at the corporate website Bottom Layer
Copper Pour
(www.microchip.com): (tied to ground)
• AN826, “Crystal Oscillator Basics and Crystal
Selection for rfPIC™ and PICmicro® Devices” OSCO
• AN849, “Basic PICmicro® Oscillator Design”

C2
• AN943, “Practical PICmicro® Oscillator Analysis
Oscillator
and Design” GND Crystal
• AN949, “Making Your Oscillator Work”
C1
OSCI
DEVICE PINS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3.0 PIC18 CPU
This family of devices contains a PIC18 8-bit CPU core
based on the modified Harvard architecture. The PIC18
CPU supports:
• System Arbitration, which decides memory
access allocation depending on user priorities
• Vectored Interrupt capability with automatic two
level deep context saving
• 31-level deep hardware stack with overflow and
underflow reset capabilities
• Support Direct, Indirect, and Relative Addressing
modes
• 8x8 Hardware Multiplier

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 3-1: PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 FAMILY BLOCK DIAGRAM
Data Bus[8]
Table Pointer[21]
8 8 Data Latch
inc/dec logic
Data Memory
21 PCLATU PCLATH
20 Address Latch Ports
PCU PCH PCL
Program Counter 12
Data Address[12]
31-Level Stack
Address Latch 6 14 4
BSR FSR0 Access
Program Memory STKPTR Bank
(8/16/32/64 Kbytes) FSR1
FSR2 12 Peripherals
Data Latch
inc/dec
8 logic
Table Latch
ROM Latch Address

Instruction Bus [16] Decode
Data
IR EEPROM
8
Instruction State machine
Decode and control signals
Control
PRODH PRODL
8x8 Multiply
3 8
BITOP W
8 8 8
OSC1(2) Internal
Oscillator Power-up
Timer 8 8
Block
(2) Oscillator
OSC2 ALU[8]
LFINTOSC Start-up Timer
SOSCI Oscillator Power-on 8
Reset
64 MHz
SOSCO Oscillator WWDT
Precision
Single-Supply Brown-out Band Gap
MCLR(1) Reset
Programming Reference
In-Circuit Fail-Safe
Debugger Clock Monitor
Note 1: RE3 is only available when MCLR functionality is disabled.

2: OSC1/CLKIN and OSC2/CLKOUT are only available in select oscillator modes and when these pins are not being used as digital I/O.
Refer to Section 7.0, Oscillator Module (with Fail-Safe Clock Monitor) for additional information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3.1 System Arbitration
The System Arbiter resolves memory access between
the System Level Selections (i.e., Main, Interrupt
Service Routine) and Peripheral Selection (i.e., DMA
and Scanner) based on user-assigned priorities. Each
of the system level and peripheral selections has its
own priority selection registers. Memory access priority
is resolved using the number written to the
corresponding Priority registers, 0 being the highest
priority and 4 the lowest. The default priorities are listed
in Table 3-1.
In case the user wants to change priorities, ensure
each Priority register is written with a unique value from
0 to 4.
TABLE 3-1: DEFAULT PRIORITIES

Priority register
Selection
Reset value
System Level ISR 0
MAIN 1
Peripheral DMA1 2
DMA2 3
SCANNER 4
FIGURE 3-2: SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT

Rev. 20-000318A
11/2/2016
Memory Access
CPU Scanner DMA 1 DMA 2
NVMCON
Priority System Arbiter
Program Flash SFR/GPR

Data EEPROM
Memory SRAM Data
Legend
Program Flash Memory Data
Data EEPROM Data
SFR/GPR Data

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3.1.1 PRIORITY LOCK 3.2 Memory Access Scheme
The System arbiter grants memory access to the The user can assign priorities to both system level and
peripheral selections (DMAx, Scanner) when the peripheral selections based on which the system
PRLOCKED bit (PRLOCK Register) is set. arbiter grants memory access. Let us consider the
Priority selections are locked by setting the following priority scenarios between ISR, MAIN, and
PRLOCKED bit of the PRLOCK register. Setting and Peripherals.
clearing this bit requires a special sequence as an extra
precaution against inadvertent changes. Examples of
setting and clearing the PRLOCKED bit are shown in Note: It is always required that the ISR priority
Example 3-1 and Example 3-2. be higher than Main priority.
EXAMPLE 3-1: PRIORITY LOCK 3.2.1 ISR PRIORITY > MAIN PRIORITY >
SEQUENCE PERIPHERAL PRIORITY
; Disable interrupts When the Peripheral Priority (DMAx, Scanner) is lower
BCF INTCON0,GIE than ISR and MAIN Priority, and the peripheral
requires:
; Bank to PRLOCK register 1. Access to the Program Flash Memory, then the
BANKSEL PRLOCK peripheral waits for an instruction cycle in which
MOVLW 55h the CPU does not need to access the PFM
(such as a branch instruction) and uses that
; Required sequence, next 4 cycle to do its own Program Flash Memory
instructions access, unless a PFM Read/Write operation is
MOVWF PRLOCK in progress.
MOVLW AAh
2. Access to the SFR/GPR, then the peripheral
MOVWF PRLOCK
waits for an instruction cycle in which the CPU
; Set PRLOCKED bit to grant memory
does not need to access the SFR/GPR (such as
access to peripherals
MOVLW, CALL, NOP) and uses that cycle to do its
BSF PRLOCK,0
own SFR/GPR access.
; Enable Interrupts 3. Access to the Data EEPROM, then the
BSF INTCON0,GIE peripheral has access to Data EEPROM unless
a Data EEPROM Read/Write operation is being
performed.
EXAMPLE 3-2: PRIORITY UNLOCK This results in the lowest throughput for the peripheral
SEQUENCE to access the memory, and does so without any impact
; Disable interrupts on execution times.
BCF INTCON0,GIE
3.2.2 PERIPHERAL PRIORITY > ISR
; Bank to PRLOCK register PRIORITY > MAIN PRIORITY
BANKSEL PRLOCK
When the Peripheral Priority (DMAx, Scanner) is higher
MOVLW 55h
than ISR and MAIN Priority, the CPU operation is
stalled when the peripheral requests memory.
; Required sequence, next 4
instructions The CPU is held in its current state until the peripheral
MOVWF PRLOCK completes its operation. Since the peripheral requests
MOVLW AAh access to the bus, the peripheral cannot be disabled
MOVWF PRLOCK until it completes its operation.
; Clear PRLOCKED bit to allow changing This results in the highest throughput for the peripheral
priority settings to access the memory, but has the cost of stalling other
BCF PRLOCK,0 execution while it occurs.
; Enable Interrupts
BSF INTCON0,GIE

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3.2.3 ISR PRIORITY > PERIPHERAL 3.2.4 PERIPHERAL 1 PRIORITY > ISR
PRIORITY > MAIN PRIORITY PRIORITY > MAIN PRIORITY >
In this case, interrupt routines and peripheral operation PERIPHERAL 2 PRIORITY
(DMAx, Scanner) will stall the CPU. Interrupt will In this case, the Peripheral 1 will stall the execution of
preempt peripheral operation. This results in lowest the CPU. However, Peripheral 2 can access the
interrupt latency and highest throughput for the memory in cycles unused by Peripheral 1.
peripheral to access the memory.
The operation of the System Arbiter is controlled
through the following registers:
REGISTER 3-1: ISRPR: INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE PRIORITY REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — ISRPR[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Bit is unchanged x = Bit is unknown -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets
1 = bit is set 0 = bit is cleared HS = Hardware set
bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’

bit 2-0 ISRPR[2:0]: Interrupt Service Routine Priority Selection bits
REGISTER 3-2: MAINPR: MAIN ROUTINE PRIORITY REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1
— — — — — MAINPR[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 MAINPR[2:0]: Main Routine Priority Selection bits
REGISTER 3-3: DMA1PR: DMA1 PRIORITY REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1 R/W-0/0
— — — — — DMA1PR[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 DMA1PR[2:0]: DMA1 Priority Selection bits

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 3-4: DMA2PR: DMA2 PRIORITY REGISTER
U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1
— — — — — DMA2PR[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 DMA2PR[2:0]: DMA2 Priority Selection bits
REGISTER 3-5: SCANPR: SCANNER PRIORITY REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1/1 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — SCANPR[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 SCANPR[2:0]: Scanner Priority Selection bits
REGISTER 3-6: PRLOCK: PRIORITY LOCK REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — — PRLOCKED
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 0 PRLOCKED: PR Register Lock bit(1, 2)
0 = Priority Registers can be modified by write operations; Peripherals do not have access to the
memory
1 = Priority Registers are locked and cannot be written; Peripherals have access to the memory
Note 1: The PRLOCKED bit can only be set or cleared after the unlock sequence.
2: If PR1WAY = 1, the PRLOCKED bit cannot be cleared after it has been set. A device Reset will clear the
bit and allow one more set.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 3-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CPU

Register on
Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
page
ISRPR — — — — — ISRPR2 ISRPR1 ISRPR0 30

MAINPR — — — — — MAINPR2 MAINPR1 MAINPR0 30
DMA1PR — — — — — DMA1PR2 DMA1PR1 DMA1PR0 30
DMA2PR — — — — — DMA2PR2 DMA2PR1 DMA2PR0 31
SCANPR — — — — — SCANPR2 SCANPR1 SCANPR0 31
PRLOCK — — — — — — — PRLOCKED 31
Legend: — = Unimplemented location, read as ‘0’.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION 4.2 Memory Access Partition (MAP)
There are three types of memory in PIC18 Program Flash memory is partitioned into:
microcontroller devices: • Application Block
• Program Flash Memory • Boot Block, and
• Data RAM • Storage Area Flash (SAF) Block
• Data EEPROM
4.2.1 APPLICATION BLOCK
As Harvard architecture devices, the data and program
memories use separate buses; this allows for Application block is where the user’s program resides
concurrent access of the two memory spaces. The data by default. Default settings of the configuration bits
EEPROM, for practical purposes, can be regarded as (BBEN = 1 and SAFEN = 1) assign all memory in the
a peripheral device, since it is addressed and accessed program Flash memory area to the application block.
through a set of control registers. The WRTAPP configuration bit is used to protect the
Additional detailed information on the operation of the application block.
Program Flash Memory and Data EEPROM Memory is
provided in Section 13.0 “Nonvolatile Memory 4.2.2 BOOT BLOCK
(NVM) Control”.
Boot block is an area in program memory that is ideal
for storing bootloader code. Code placed in this area
4.1 Program Flash Memory can be executed by the CPU. The boot block can be
Organization write-protected, independent of the main application
PIC18 microcontrollers implement a 21-bit program block. The Boot Block is enabled by the BBEN bit and
counter, which is capable of addressing a 2 Mbyte size is based on the value of the BBSIZE bits of
program memory space. Accessing any Configuration word (Register 5-7), see Table 5-1 for
unimplemented memory will return all ‘0’s (a NOP boot block sizes. The WRTB Configuration bit is used
instruction). to write-protect the Boot Block.
These devices contain the following:
4.2.3 STORAGE AREA FLASH
• PIC18(L)F45/46K42: 32 Kbytes of Flash memory,
up to 16,384 single-word instructions Storage Area Flash (SAF) is the area in program
• PIC18(L)F26/46/56K42: 64 Kbytes of Flash memory that can be used as data storage. SAF is
memory, up to 32,768 single-word instructions enabled by the SAFEN bit of the Configuration word in
• PIC18(L)F27/47/57K42: 128 Kbytes of Flash Register 5-7. If enabled, the code placed in this area
memory, up to 65,536 single-word instructions cannot be executed by the CPU. The SAF block is
The Reset vector for the device is at address 000000h. placed at the end of memory and spans 128 Words.
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 devices The WRTSAF Configuration bit is used to write-protect
feature a vectored interrupt controller with a dedicated the Storage Area Flash.
interrupt vector table in the program memory, see
Section 9.0 “Interrupt Controller”. Note: If write-protected locations are written to,
memory is not changed and the WRERR
Note: For memory information on this family of bit defined in Register 13-1 is set.
devices, see Table 4-1 and Table 4-3.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 4-1: PROGRAM AND DATA EEPROM MEMORY MAP
PIC18(L)F45/46K42 PIC18(L)F26/46/56K42 PIC18(L)F27/47/57K42

PC[21:0] PC[21:0] PC[21:0]
Note 1 Stack (31 levels) Stack (31 levels) Stack (31 levels) Note 1
00 0000h Reset Vector Reset Vector Reset Vector 00 0000h

••• ••• ••• ••• •••
00 0008h Interrupt Vector High(2) Interrupt Vector High(2) Interrupt Vector High(2) 00 0008h
••• ••• ••• ••• •••
00 0018h Interrupt Vector Low(2) Interrupt Vector Low(2) Interrupt Vector Low(2) 00 0018h
00 001Ah 00 001Ah
Program Flash Memory (16
• •
KW)(3)
00 7FFFh Program Flash Memory (32 00 7FFFh
00 8000h KW)(3) 00 8000h
Program Flash Memory (64
• KW)(3) •
00 FFFFh 00 FFFFh
01 0000h Reserved(4) 01 0000h
01 FFFFh Reserved(4) 01 FFFFh
02 0000h 02 0000h
1F FFFFh Reserved(4) 1F FFFFh
20 0000 20 0000h
••• User IDs (8 Words)(5) •••
20 000Fh 20 000Fh
20 0010h 20 0010h
••• Reserved •••
2F FFFFh 2F FFFFh
30 0000h 30 0000h
••• Configuration Words (5 Words)(5) •••
30 0009h 30 0009h
30 000Ah 30 000Ah
30 FFFFh 30 FFFFh
31 0000h 31 0000h
••• Data EEPROM (256 Bytes) •••
31 00FFh 31 00FFh
Data EEPROM (1024Bytes)
31 0100h 31 0100h
••• •••
31 03FFh 31 03FFh
Reserved
31 0400h 31 0400h
3E FFFFh 3E FFFFh
3F 0000h 3F 0000h
••• Device Information Area(5),(7) •••
3F 003Fh 3F 003Fh
3F0040h 3F0040h
3F FEFFh 3F FEFFh
3F FF00h 3F FF00h
••• Device Configuration Information (5 Words)(5),(6),(7) •••
3F FF09h 3F FF09h
3F FF0Ah 3F FF0Ah
3F FFFBh 3F FFFBh
3F FFFCh 3F FFFCh
••• Revision ID (1 Word)(5),(6),(7) •••
3F FFFDh 3F FFFDh
3F FFFEh 3F FFFEh
••• Device ID (1 Word)(5),(6),(7) •••
3F FFFFh 3F FFFFh
Note 1: The stack is a separate SRAM panel, apart from all user memory panels.
2: 00 0008h location is used as the reset default for the IVTBASE register, the vector table can be relocated in the
memory by programming the IVTBASE register.
3: Storage area Flash is implemented as the last 128 Words of user Flash.
4: The addresses do not roll over. The region is read as ‘0’.
5: Not code-protected.
6: Hard-coded in silicon.
7: This region cannot be written by the user and it’s not affected by a Bulk Erase.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 4-2: PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY PARTITION

Partition(3)
Region Address BBEN = 1 BBEN = 1 BBEN = 0 BBEN = 0
SAFEN = 1 SAFEN = 0 SAFEN = 1 SAFEN = 0
00 0000h
• • • BOOT BOOT
Last Boot Block Memory BLOCK BLOCK
Address
APPLICATION
Last Boot Block Memory BLOCK
Address(1) + 1
Program APPLICATION
• • • APPLICATION
Flash BLOCK
Last Program Memory BLOCK
Memory
Address(2) - 100h APPLICATION
Last Program Memory BLOCK
Address(2) - FEh(4) STORAGE STORAGE
• • • AREA AREA
Last Program Memory FLASH FLASH
Address(2)
Note 1: Last Boot Block Memory Address is based on BBSIZE[2:0], see Table 5-1.
2: For Last Program Memory Address, see Table 4-1.
3: Refer to Register 5-7: Configuration Word 4L for BBEN and SAFEN definitions.
4: Storage area Flash is implemented as the last 128 Words of User Flash.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.2.4 PROGRAM COUNTER 4.2.5 RETURN ADDRESS STACK
The Program Counter (PC) specifies the address of the The return address stack allows any combination of up
instruction to fetch for execution. The PC is 21-bit wide to 31 program calls and interrupts to occur. The PC is
and is contained in three separate 8-bit registers. The pushed onto the stack when a CALL or RCALL
low byte, known as the PCL register, is both readable instruction is executed or an interrupt is acknowledged.
and writable. The high byte, or PCH register, contains The PC value is pulled off the stack on a RETURN,
the PC[15:8] bits; it is not directly readable or writable. RETLW or a RETFIE instruction. PCLATU and PCLATH
Updates to the PCH register are performed through the are not affected by any of the RETURN or CALL
PCLATH register. The upper byte is called PCU. This instructions.
register contains the PC[20:16] bits; it is also not The stack operates as a 31-word by 21-bit RAM and a
directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCU 5-bit Stack Pointer. The stack space is not part of either
register are performed through the PCLATU register. program or data space. The Stack Pointer is readable
The contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are transferred and writable and the address on the top of the stack is
to the program counter by any operation that writes readable and writable through the Top-of-Stack (TOS)
PCL. Similarly, the upper two bytes of the program Special File Registers. Data can also be pushed to, or
counter are transferred to PCLATH and PCLATU by popped from the stack, using these registers.
any operation that reads PCL. This is useful for A CALL, CALLW or RCALL instruction causes a push
computed offsets to the PC (see Section onto the stack; the Stack Pointer is first incremented
4.3.2.1 “Computed GOTO”). and the location pointed to by the Stack Pointer is
The PC addresses bytes in the program memory. To written with the contents of the PC (already pointing to
prevent the PC from becoming misaligned with word the instruction following the CALL). A RETURN type
instructions, the Least Significant bit of PCL is fixed to instruction causes a pop from the stack; the contents of
a value of ‘0’. The PC increments by two to address the location pointed to by the STKPTR are transferred
sequential instructions in the program memory. to the PC and then the Stack Pointer is decremented.
The CALL, RCALL, GOTO and program branch The Stack Pointer is initialized to ‘00000’ after all
instructions write to the program counter directly. For Resets. There is no RAM associated with the location
these instructions, the contents of PCLATH and corresponding to a Stack Pointer value of ‘00000’; this
PCLATU are not transferred to the program counter. is only a Reset value. Status bits in the PCON0 register
indicate if the stack has overflowed or underflowed.
4.2.5.1 Top-of-Stack Access

Only the top of the return address stack (TOS) is readable
and writable. A set of three registers, TOSU:TOSH:TOSL,
holds the contents of the stack location pointed to by the
STKPTR register (Figure 4-1). This allows users to
implement a software stack, if necessary. After a CALL,
RCALL or interrupt, the software can read the pushed
value by reading the TOSU:TOSH:TOSL registers. These
values can be placed on a user-defined software stack. At
return time, the software can return these values to
TOSU:TOSH:TOSL and do a return.
The user must disable the Global Interrupt Enable (GIE)
bits while accessing the stack to prevent inadvertent
stack corruption.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 4-1: RETURN ADDRESS STACK AND ASSOCIATED REGISTERS
Return Address Stack [20:0]
11111
11110
Top-of-Stack Registers 11101 Stack Pointer
TOSU TOSH TOSL STKPTR[4:0]

00h 1Ah 34h 00010
00011
Top-of-Stack 001A34h 00010
000D58h 00001
00000
4.2.5.2 Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) If STVREN is set (default) and the stack has been
popped enough times to unload the stack, the next pop
The STKPTR register (Register 4-4) contains the Stack
will return a value of zero to the PC, it will set the
Pointer value. The STKOVF (Stack Overflow) Status bit
STKUNF bit and a Reset will be generated. This
and the STKUNF (Stack Underflow) Status bit can be
condition can be generated by the RETURN, RETLW and
accessed using the PCON0 register. The value of the
RETFIE instructions.
Stack Pointer can be 0 through 31. On Reset, the Stack
Pointer value will be zero. The user may read and write When STVREN = 0, STKUNF will be set but no Reset
the Stack Pointer value. This feature can be used by a will occur.
Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) for stack mainte-
nance. After the PC is pushed onto the stack 32 times
(without popping any values off the stack), the Note: Returning a value of zero to the PC on an
STKOVF bit is set. The STKOVF bit is cleared by soft- underflow has the effect of vectoring the
ware or by a POR. The action that takes place when the program to the Reset vector, where the
stack becomes full depends on the state of the stack conditions can be verified and
STVREN (Stack Overflow Reset Enable) Configuration appropriate actions can be taken. This is
bit. (Refer to Section 5.1 “Configuration Words” for not the same as a Reset, as the contents
a description of the device Configuration bits.) of the SFRs are not affected.
If STVREN is set (default), a Reset will be generated 4.2.5.3 PUSH and POP Instructions
and a Stack Overflow will be indicated by the STKOVF
bit when the 32nd push is initiated. This includes CALL Since the Top-of-Stack is readable and writable, the
and CALLW instructions, as well as stacking the return ability to push values onto the stack and pull values off
address during an interrupt response. The STKOVF bit the stack without disturbing normal program execution
will remain set and the Stack Pointer will be set to zero. is a desirable feature. The PIC18 instruction set
includes two instructions, PUSH and POP, that permit
If STVREN is cleared, the STKOVF bit will be set on the the TOS to be manipulated under software control.
32nd push and the Stack Pointer will remain at 31 but TOSU, TOSH and TOSL can be modified to place data
no Reset will occur. Any additional pushes will or a return address on the stack.
overwrite the 31st push but the STKPTR will remain at
31. The PUSH instruction places the current PC value onto
the stack. This increments the Stack Pointer and loads
Setting STKOVF = 1 in software will change the bit, but the current PC value onto the stack.
will not generate a Reset.
The POP instruction discards the current TOS by
The STKUNF bit is set when a stack pop returns a decrementing the Stack Pointer. The previous value
value of zero. The STKUNF bit is cleared by software pushed onto the stack then becomes the TOS value.
or by POR. The action that takes place when the stack
becomes full depends on the state of the STVREN
(Stack Overflow Reset Enable) Configuration bit.
(Refer to Section 5.1 “Configuration Words” for a
description of the device Configuration bits).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.3 Register Definitions: Stack Pointer
REGISTER 4-1: TOSU: TOP OF STACK UPPER BYTE
U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — TOS[20:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented C = Clearable only bit
-n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown

bit 4-0 TOS[20:16]: Top of Stack Location bits
REGISTER 4-2: TOSH: TOP OF STACK HIGH BYTE

R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
TOS[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
REGISTER 4-3: TOSL: TOP OF STACK LOW BYTE

TOS[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 4-4: STKPTR: STACK POINTER REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — STKPTR[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 STKPTR[4:0]: Stack Pointer Location bits
4.3.1 FAST REGISTER STACK

There are three levels of fast stack registers available -
one for CALL type instructions and two for interrupts. A
fast register stack is provided for the STATUS, WREG
and BSR registers, to provide a “fast return” option for
interrupts. It is loaded with the current value of the cor-
responding register when the processor vectors for an
interrupt. All interrupt sources will push values into the
stack registers. The values in the registers are then
loaded back into their associated registers if the
RETFIE, FAST instruction is used to return from the
interrupt. Refer to Section 4.5.6 “Call Shadow Regis-
ter” for interrupt call shadow registers.
Example 4-1 shows a source code example that uses
the fast register stack during a subroutine call and
return.
EXAMPLE 4-1: FAST REGISTER STACK

CODE EXAMPLE
CALL SUB1, FAST ;STATUS, WREG, BSR
;SAVED IN FAST REGISTER
;STACK


SUB1 

RETURN, FAST ;RESTORE VALUES SAVED
;IN FAST REGISTER STACK

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.3.2 LOOK-UP TABLES IN PROGRAM
MEMORY
There may be programming situations that require the
creation of data structures, or look-up tables, in
program memory. For PIC18 devices, look-up tables
can be implemented in two ways:
• Computed GOTO
• Table Reads
4.3.2.1 Computed GOTO

A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset
to the program counter. An example is shown in
Example 4-2.
A look-up table can be formed with an ADDWF PCL
instruction and a group of RETLW nn instructions. The
W register is loaded with an offset into the table before
executing a call to that table. The first instruction of the
called routine is the ADDWF PCL instruction. The next
instruction executed will be one of the RETLW nn
instructions that returns the value ‘nn’ to the calling
function.
The offset value (in WREG) specifies the number of
bytes that the program counter should advance and
should be multiples of two (LSb = 0).
In this method, only one data byte may be stored in
each instruction location and room on the return
address stack is required.
EXAMPLE 4-2: COMPUTED GOTO USING

AN OFFSET VALUE
MOVF OFFSET, W
CALL TABLE
ORG nn00h
TABLE ADDWF PCL
RETLW nnh
RETLW nnh
RETLW nnh
.
.
.
4.3.2.2 Table Reads and Table Writes

A better method of storing data in program memory
allows two bytes of data to be stored in each instruction
location.
Look-up table data may be stored two bytes per
program word by using table reads and writes. The
Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register specifies the byte
address and the Table Latch (TABLAT) register
contains the data that is read from or written to program
memory.
Table read and table write operations are discussed
further in Section 13.1.1 “Table Reads and Table
Writes”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.4 PIC18 Instruction Cycle A fetch cycle begins with the Program Counter (PC)
incrementing followed by the execution cycle.
4.4.1 INSTRUCTION FLOW/PIPELINING In the execution cycle, the fetched instruction is latched
An “Instruction Cycle” consists of four cycles of the into the Instruction Register (IR). This instruction is
oscillator clock. The instruction fetch and execute are then decoded and executed during the next few
pipelined in such a manner that a fetch takes one oscillator clock cycles. Data memory is read (operand
instruction cycle, while the decode and execute take read) and written (destination write) during the
another instruction cycle. However, due to the execution cycle as well.
pipelining, each instruction effectively executes in one
cycle. If an instruction causes the program counter to
change (e.g., GOTO), then two cycles are required to
complete the instruction (Example 4-3).
EXAMPLE 4-3: INSTRUCTION PIPELINE FLOW
TCY0 TCY1 TCY2 TCY3 TCY4 TCY5

1. MOVLW 55h Fetch 1 Execute 1
2. MOVWF PORTB Fetch 2 Execute 2
3. BRA SUB_1 Fetch 3 Execute 3
4. BSF PORTA, BIT3 (Forced NOP) Fetch 4 Flush (NOP)
5. Instruction @ address SUB_1 Fetch SUB_1 Execute SUB_1
Note: There are some instructions that take multiple cycles to execute. Refer to Section 41.0 “Instruction Set
Summary” for details.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.4.2 INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM 4.4.3 MULTI-WORD INSTRUCTIONS
MEMORY The standard PIC18 instruction set has four two-word
The program memory is addressed in bytes. instructions: CALL, MOVFF, GOTO and LFSR and two
Instructions are stored as either two bytes or four bytes three-word instructions: MOVFFL and MOVSFL. In all
in program memory. The Least Significant Byte of an cases, the second and the third word of the instruction
instruction word is always stored in a program memory always has ‘1111’ as its four Most Significant bits; the
location with an even address (LSb = 0). To maintain other 12 bits are literal data, usually a data memory
alignment with instruction boundaries, the PC address.
increments in steps of two and the LSb will always read The use of ‘1111’ in the four MSbs of an instruction
‘0’ (see Section 4.2.4 “Program Counter”). specifies a special form of NOP. If the instruction is
Figure 4-2 shows an example of how instruction words executed in proper sequence – immediately after the
are stored in the program memory. first word – the data in the second word is accessed
and used by the instruction sequence. If the first word
The CALL and GOTO instructions have the absolute
is skipped for some reason and the second or third
program memory address embedded into the
word is executed by itself, a NOP is executed instead.
instruction. Since instructions are always stored on word
This is necessary for cases when the multi-word
boundaries, the data contained in the instruction is a
instruction is preceded by a conditional instruction that
word address. The word address is written to PC[20:1],
changes the PC. Example 4-4 shows how this works.
which accesses the desired byte address in program
memory. Instruction #2 in Figure 4-2 shows how the
instruction GOTO 0006h is encoded in the program
memory. Program branch instructions, which encode a
relative address offset, operate in the same manner. The
offset value stored in a branch instruction represents the
number of single-word instructions that the PC will be
offset by. Section 41.0 “Instruction Set Summary”
provides further details of the instruction set.
FIGURE 4-2: INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY

Word Address
LSB = 1 LSB = 0 
Program Memory 000000h
Byte Locations  000002h
000004h
000006h
Instruction 1: MOVLW 055h 0Fh 55h 000008h
Instruction 2: GOTO 0006h EFh 03h 00000Ah
F0h 00h 00000Ch
Instruction 3: MOVFF 123h, 456h C1h 23h 00000Eh
F4h 56h 000010h
Instruction 4: MOVFFL 123h, 456h 00h 60h 000012h
F4h 8Ch 000014h
F4h 56h 000016h
000018h
00001Ah

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
EXAMPLE 4-4: TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS
CASE 1:
Object Code Source Code
0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 ; is RAM location 0?
1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; Yes, skip this word
1111 0100 0101 0110 ; Execute this word as a NOP
0010 0100 0000 0000 ADDWF REG3 ; continue code
CASE 2:
1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; No, execute this word
1111 0100 0101 0110 ; 2nd word of instruction
EXAMPLE 4-5: THREE-WORD INSTRUCTIONS

CASE 1:
0000 0000 0110 0000 MOVFFL REG1, REG2 ; Yes, skip this word
CASE 2:
0000 0000 0110 0000 MOVFFL REG1, REG2 ; No, execute this word
1111 0100 1000 1100 ; 2nd word of instruction
1111 0100 0101 0110 ; 3rd word of instruction

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.5 Data Memory Organization 4.5.1 BANK SELECT REGISTER (BSR)
Data memory in PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Large areas of data memory require an efficient
devices is implemented as static RAM. Each register in addressing scheme to make rapid access to any
the data memory has a 14-bit address, allowing up to address possible. Ideally, this means that an entire
16384 bytes of data memory. The memory space is address does not need to be provided for each read or
divided into 64 banks that contain 256 bytes each. write operation. For PIC18 devices, this is accom-
Figure 4-3 shows the data memory organization for the plished with a RAM banking scheme. This divides the
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 devices in this memory space into 64 contiguous banks of 256 bytes.
data sheet. Depending on the instruction, each location can be
addressed directly by its full 14-bit address, or an 8-bit
The data memory contains Special Function Registers low-order address and a 6-bit Bank Select Register.
(SFRs) and General Purpose Registers (GPRs). The
SFRs are used for control and status of the controller This SFR holds the six Most Significant bits of a
and peripheral functions, while GPRs are used for data location address; the instruction itself includes the
storage and scratchpad operations in the user’s eight Least Significant bits. Only the six lower bits of the
application. Any read of an unimplemented location will BSR are implemented (BSR[5:0]). The upper two bits
read as ‘0’s. are unused; they will always read ‘0’ and cannot be
written to. The BSR can be loaded directly by using the
The instruction set and architecture allow operations MOVLB instruction.
across all banks. The entire data memory may be
accessed by Direct, Indirect or Indexed Addressing The value of the BSR indicates the bank in data
modes. Addressing modes are discussed later in this memory; the eight bits in the instruction show the
subsection. location in the bank and can be thought of as an offset
from the bank’s lower boundary. The relationship
To ensure that commonly used registers (select SFRs between the BSR’s value and the bank division in data
and GPRs) can be accessed in a single cycle, PIC18 memory is shown in Figure 4-3.
devices implement an Access Bank. This is a 256-byte
memory space that provides fast access to some SFRs Since up to 64 registers may share the same low-order
and the lower portion of GPR Bank 0 without using the address, the user must always be careful to ensure that
Bank Select Register (BSR). Section 4.5.4 “Access the proper bank is selected before performing a data
Bank” provides a detailed description of the Access read or write. For example, writing what should be
RAM. program data to an 8-bit address of F9h while the BSR
is 3Fh will end up corrupting the program counter.
While any bank can be selected, only those banks that
are actually implemented can be read or written to.
Writes to unimplemented banks are ignored, while
reads from unimplemented banks will return ‘0’s. Even
so, the STATUS register will still be affected as if the
operation was successful. The data memory maps in
Figure 4-3 indicate which banks are implemented.

FIGURE 4-4: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 DEVICES
Bank BSR[5:0] Address PIC18(L)F26K42 PIC18(L)F27K42 Address

PIC18(L)F45K42
addr[7:0] PIC18(L)F46K42 PIC18(L)F47K42 addr[13:0]
PIC18(L)F55K42
PIC18(L)F56K42 PIC18(L)F57K42
00h Access RAM Access RAM Access RAM 0000h
005Fh
Bank 0 00 0000
GPR GPR GPR 0060h
FFh 00FFh
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Bank 1 00 0001 00h 0100h
FFh ·
Bank 2 00 0010 00h ·
FFh ·
GPR GPR GPR ·
00h ·
· ·
Bank 3 · ·
00 0011 · Virtual Bank
03FFh
FFh
00h 0400h
00 0100 · · Access RAM 00h
Banks - · GPR GPR GPR ·
4 to 7 5Fh
00 0111 · ·
FFh 07FFh SFR 60h
00h 0800h FFh
00 1000 · ·
Banks · GPR ·
8 to 15 -
00 1111 · ·
FFh 0FFFh
00h GPR 1000h
Banks 01 0000 · ·
· Unimplemented ·
16 to 31 -
01 1111 · ·
FFh Unimplemented 1FFFh
00h 2000h
Banks 10 0000 · ·
· Unimplemented ·
32 to 55 - · ·
11 0111 FFh 37FFh
00h 3800h
11 1000 · ·
Banks · SFR SFR SFR ·
56 to 62 -
11 1110 · ·
FFh 3EFFh
00h 3800h
11 1111 · SFR SFR SFR 3EFFh
Bank 63 · 3F60h
· 3FFFh
FFh
DS40001919E-page 45
FIGURE 4-5: USE OF THE BANK SELECT REGISTER (DIRECT ADDRESSING)
BSR(1) Data Memory From Opcode

7 0 0000h 00h 7 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Bank 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FFh
0100h 00h
Bank 1
Bank Select(2) 0200h FFh
00h
Bank 2
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
0300h FFh
00h
Bank 3
through
Bank 61
FFh
3E00h
00h
Bank 62
3F00h FFh
00h
Bank 63
3FFFh FFh
Note 1: The Access RAM bit of the instruction can be used to force an override of the selected bank (BSR[5:0]) to the registers of the Access Bank.
DS40001919E-page 46
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.5.2 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER 4.5.4 ACCESS BANK
FILE To streamline access for the most commonly used data
General Purpose RAM is available starting Bank 0 of memory locations, the data memory is configured with
data memory. GPRs are not initialized by a Power-on an Access Bank, which allows users to access a
Reset and are unchanged on all other Resets. mapped block of memory without specifying a BSR.
The Access Bank consists of the first 96 bytes of
4.5.3 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS memory (00h-5Fh) in Bank 0 and the last 160 bytes of
The Special Function Registers (SFRs) are registers memory (60h-FFh) in Bank 63. The lower half is known
used by the CPU and peripheral modules for controlling as the “Access RAM” and is composed of GPRs. This
the desired operation of the device. These registers are upper half is also where some of the SFRs of the device
implemented as static RAM. SFRs start at the top of are mapped. These two areas are mapped
data memory (3FFFh) and extend downward to occupy contiguously in the Access Bank and can be addressed
Bank 56 through 63 (3800h to 3FFFh). A list of these linearly by an 8-bit address (Figure 4-4).
registers is given in Table 4-3 to Table 4-11. A bitwise The Access Bank is used by core PIC18 instructions
summary of these registers can be found in that include the Access RAM bit (the ‘a’ parameter in
Section 42.0 “Register Summary”. the instruction). When ‘a’ is equal to ‘1’, the instruction
uses the BSR and the 8-bit address included in the
opcode for the data memory address. When ‘a’ is ‘0’,
however, the instruction uses the Access Bank address
map; the current value of the BSR is ignored.
Using this “forced” addressing allows the instruction to
operate on a data address in a single cycle, without
updating the BSR first. For 8-bit addresses of 60h and
above, this means that users can evaluate and operate
on SFRs more efficiently. The Access RAM below 60h
is a good place for data values that the user might need
to access rapidly, such as immediate computational
results or common program variables. Access RAM
also allows for faster and more code efficient and
switching of variables.
The mapping of the Access Bank is slightly different
when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST
Configuration bit = 1). This is discussed in more detail
in Section 4.8.3 “Mapping the Access Bank in
Indexed Literal Offset Mode”.

TABLE 4-3: SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP FOR PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 DEVICES (DMA ACCESS ONLY)
40FFh — 40DFh — 40BFh — 409Fh — 407Fh — 405Fh — 403Fh — 401Fh —

40FEh — 40DEh — 40BEh — 409Eh — 407Eh — 405Eh — 403Eh — 401Eh —
40FDh — 40DDh T6PR_M2 40BDh ADRESH_M2 409Dh — 407Dh — 405Dh — 403Dh — 401Dh —
40FCh — 40DCh PWM5DCH_M2 40BCh ADRESL_M2 409Ch — 407Ch — 405Ch — 403Ch — 401Ch —
40FBh TMR5H_M1 40DBh PWM5DCL_M2 40BBh ADPCH_M2 409Bh — 407Bh — 405Bh — 403Bh — 401Bh —
40FAh TMR5L_M1 40DAh T6PR_M1 40BAh ADCLK_M1 409Ah — 407Ah — 405Ah — 403Ah — 401Ah —
40F9h TMR3H_M1 40D9h CCPR1H_M2 40B9h ADACT_M1 4099h — 4079h — 4059h — 4039h — 4019h —
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
40F8h TMR3L_M1 40D8h CCPR1L_M2 40B8h ADREF_M1 4098h — 4078h — 4058h — 4038h — 4018h —
40F7h TMR1H_M1 40D7h T4PR_M4 40B7h ADCON3_M1 4097h — 4077h — 4057h — 4037h — 4017h —
40F6h TMR1L_M1 40D6h PWM8DCH_M1 40B6h ADCON2_M1 4096h ADRESH_M1 4076h — 4056h — 4036h — 4016h —
40F5h — 40D5h PWM8DCL_M1 40B5h ADCON1_M1 4095h ADRESL_M1 4075h — 4055h — 4035h — 4015h —
40F4h — 40D4h T4PR_M3 40B4h ADCON0_M1 4094h ADPCH_M1 4074h — 4054h — 4034h — 4014h —
40F3h — 40D3h PWM7DCH_M1 40B3h ADCAP_M2 4093h ADCAP_M1 4073h — 4053h — 4033h — 4013h —
40F2h — 40D2h PWM7DCL_M1 40B2h ADACQH_M2 4092h ADACQH_M1 4072h — 4052h — 4032h — 4012h —
40F1h — 40D1h T4PR_M2 40B1h ADACQL_M2 4091h ADACQL_M1 4071h — 4051h — 4031h — 4011h —
40F0h — 40D0h CCPR4H_M1 40B0h ADPREVH_M2 4090h ADPREVH_M1 4070h — 4050h — 4030h — 4010h —
40EFh PWM8DCH_M2 40CFh CCPR4L_M1 40AFh ADPREVL_M2 408Fh ADPREVL_M1 406Fh — 404Fh — 402Fh — 400Fh —
40EEh PWM8DCL_M2 40CEh T4PR_M1 40AEh ADRPT_M2 408Eh ADRPT_M1 406Eh — 404Eh — 402Eh — 400Eh —
40EDh PWM7DCH_M2 40CDh CCPR3H_M1 40ADh ADCNT_M2 408Dh ADCNT_M1 406Dh — 404Dh — 402Dh — 400Dh —
40ECh PWM7DCL_M2 40CCh CCPR3L_M1 40ACh ADACCU_M2 408Ch ADACCU_M1 406Ch — 404Ch — 402Ch — 400Ch —
40EBh PWM6DCH_M2 40CBh T2PR_M3 40ABh ADACCH_M2 408Bh ADACCH_M1 406Bh — 404Bh — 402Bh — 400Bh —
40EAh PWM6DCL_M2 40CAh PWM6DCH_M1 40AAh ADACCL_M2 408Ah ADACCL_M1 406Ah — 404Ah — 402Ah — 400Ah —
40E9h PWM5DCH_M3 40C9h PWM6DCL_M1 40A9h ADFLTRH_M2 4089h ADFLTRH_M1 4069h — 4049h — 4029h — 4009h —
40E8h PWM5DCL_M3 40C8h T2PR_M2 40A8h ADFLTRL_M2 4088h ADFLTRL_M1 4068h — 4048h — 4028h — 4008h —
40E7h CCPR4H_M2 40C7h PWM5DCH_M1 40A7h ADSTPTH_M2 4087h ADSTPTH_M1 4067h — 4047h — 4027h — 4007h —
40E6h CCPR4L_M2 40C6h PWM5DCL_M1 40A6h ADSTPTL_M2 4086h ADSTPTL_M1 4066h — 4046h — 4026h — 4006h —
40E5h CCPR3H_M2 40C5h T2PR_M2 40A5h ADERRH_M2 4085h ADERRH_M1 4065h — 4045h — 4025h — 4005h —
40E4h CCPR3L_M2 40C4h CCPR2H_M1 40A4h ADERRL_M2 4084h ADERRL_M1 4064h — 4044h — 4024h — 4004h —
40E3h CCPR2H_M2 40C3h CCPR2L_M1 40A3h ADUTHH_M2 4083h ADUTHH_M1 4063h IOCEF_M1 4043h — 4023h — 4003h —
40E2h CCPR2L_M2 40C2h T2PR_M1 40A2h ADUTHL_M2 4082h ADUTHL_M1 4062h IOCCF_M1 4042h — 4022h — 4002h —
40E1h CCPR1H_M3 40C1h CCPR1H_M1 40A1h ADLTHH_M2 4081h ADLTHH_M1 4061h IOCBF_M1 4041h — 4021h — 4001h —
40E0h CCPR1L_M3 40C0h CCPR1L_M1 40A0h ADLTHL_M2 4080h ADLTHL_M1 4060h IOCAF_M1 4040h — 4020h — 4000h —
Note 1: Addresses in this table are accessible ONLY through DMA Source and Destination Address Registers. CPU does not have access to these registers.
DS40001919E-page 48
TABLE 4-4: SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP FOR PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 DEVICES BANK 63
3FFFh TOSU 3FDFh INDF2 3FBFh LATF(3) 3F9Fh T4PR 3F7Fh CCP1CAP 3F5Fh CCPTMRS1 3F3Fh NCO1CLK 3F1Fh SMT1CON1
3FFEh TOSH 3FDEh POSTINC2 3FBEh LATE(2) 3F9Eh T4TMR 3F7Eh CCP1CON 3F5Eh CCPTMRS0 3F3Eh NCO1CON 3F1Eh SMT1CON0
3FFDh TOSL 3FDDh POSTDEC2 3FBDh LATD(2) 3F9Dh T5CLK 3F7Dh CCPR1H 3F5Dh — 3F3Dh NCO1INCU 3F1Dh SMT1PRU
3FFCh STKPTR 3FDCh PRECIN2 3FBCh LATC 3F9Ch T5GATE 3F7Ch CCPR1L 3F5Ch — 3F3Ch NCO1INCH 3F1Ch SMT1PRH
3FFBh PCLATU 3FDBh PLUSW2 3FBBh LATB 3F9Bh T5GCON 3F7Bh CCP2CAP 3F5Bh — 3F3Bh NCO1INCL 3F1Bh SMT1PRL
3FFAh PCLATH 3FDAh FSR2H 3FBAh LATA 3F9Ah T5CON 3F7Ah CCP2CON 3F5Ah CWG1STR 3F3Ah NCO1ACCU 3F1Ah SMT1CPWU
3FF9h PCL 3FD9h FSR2L 3FB9h T0CON1 3F99h TMR5H 3F79h CCPR2H 3F59h CWG1AS1 3F39h NCO1ACCH 3F19h SMT1CPWH
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3FF8h TBLPRTU 3FD8h STATUS 3FB8h T0CON0 3F98h TMR5L 3F78h CCPR2L 3F58h CWG1AS0 3F38h NCO1ACCL 3F18h SMT1CPWL
3FF7h TBLPTRH 3FD7h IVTBASEU 3FB7h TMR0H 3F97h T6RST 3F77h CCP3CAP 3F57h CWG1CON1 3F37h — 3F17h SMT1CPRU
3FF6h TBLPTRL 3FD6h IVTBASEH 3FB6h TMR0L 3F96h T6CLK 3F76h CCP3CON 3F56h CWG1CON0 3F36h — 3F16h SMT1CPRH
3FF5h TABLAT 3FD5h IVTBASEL 3FB5h T1CLK 3F95h T6HLT 3F75h CCPR3H 3F55h CWG1DBF 3F35h — 3F15h SMT1CPRL
3FF4h PRODH 3FD4h IVTLOCK 3FB4h T1GATE 3F94h T6CON 3F74h CCPR3L 3F54h CWG1DBR 3F34h — 3F14h SMT1TMRU
3FF3h PRODL 3FD3h INTCON1 3FB3h T1GCON 3F93h T6PR 3F73h CCP4CAP 3F53h CWG1ISM 3F33h — 3F13h SMT1TMRH
3FF2h — 3FD2h INTCON0 3FB2h T1CON 3F92h T6TMR 3F72h CCP4CON 3F52h CWG1CLK 3F32h — 3F12h SMT1TMRL
3FF1h PCON1 3FD1h — 3FB1h TMR1H 3F91h — 3F71h CCPR4H 3F51h CWG2STR 3F31h — 3F11h —
3FF0h PCON0 3FD0h — 3FB0h TMR1L 3F90h — 3F70h CCPR4L 3F50h CWG2AS1 3F30h — 3F10h —
3FEFh INDF0 3FCFh PORTF(3) 3FAFh T2RST 3F8Fh — 3F6Fh — 3F4Fh CWG2AS0 3F2Fh — 3F0Fh —
3FEEh POSTINC0 3FCEh PORTE 3FAEh T2CLK 3F8Eh — 3F6Eh PWM5CON 3F4Eh CWG2CON1 3F2Eh — 3F0Eh —
3FEDh POSTDEC0 3FCDh PORTD(2) 3FADh T2HLT 3F8Dh — 3F6Dh PWM5DCH 3F4Dh CWG2CON0 3F2Dh — 3F0Dh —
3FECh PRECIN0 3FCCh PORTC 3FACh T2CON 3F8Ch — 3F6Ch PWM5DCL 3F4Ch CWG2DBF 3F2Ch — 3F0Ch —
3FEBh PLUSW0 3FCBh PORTB 3FABh T2PR 3F8Bh — 3F6Bh — 3F4Bh CWG2DBR 3F2Bh — 3F0Bh —
3FEAh FSR0H 3FCAh PORTA 3FAAh T2TMR 3F8Ah — 3F6Ah PWM6CON 3F4Ah CWG2ISM 3F2Ah — 3F0Ah —
3FE9h FSR0L 3FC9h — 3FA9h T3CLK 3F89h — 3F69h PWM6DCH 3F49h CWG2CLK 3F29h — 3F09h —
3FE8h WREG 3FC8h — 3FA8h T3GATE 3F88h — 3F68h PWM6DCL 3F48h CWG3STR 3F28h — 3F08h —
(3)
3FE7h INDF1 3FC7h TRISF 3FA7h T3GCON 3F87h — 3F67h — 3F47h CWG3AS1 3F27h — 3F07h —
3FE6h POSTINC1 3FC6h TRISE(2) 3FA6h T3CON 3F86h — 3F66h PWM7CON 3F46h CWG3AS0 3F26h — 3F06h —
3FE5h POSTDEC1 3FC5h TRISD(2) 3FA5h TMR3H 3F85h — 3F65h PWM7DCH 3F45h CWG3CON1 3F25h — 3F05h —
3FE4h PRECIN1 3FC4h TRISC 3FA4h TMR3L 3F84h — 3F64h PWM7DCL 3F44h CWG3CON0 3F24h — 3F04h —
3FE3h PLUSW1 3FC3h TRISB 3FA3h T4RST 3F83h — 3F63h — 3F43h CWG3DBF 3F23h SMT1WIN 3F03h —
3FE2h FSR1H 3FC2h TRISA 3FA2h T4CLK 3F82h — 3F62h PWM8CON 3F42h CWG3DBR 3F22h SMT1SIG 3F02h —
3FE1h FSR1L 3FC1h — 3FA1h T4HLT 3F81h — 3F61h PWM8DCH 3F41h CWG3ISM 3F21h SMT1CLK 3F01h —
3FE0h BSR 3FC0h — 3FA0h T4CON 3F80h — 3F60h PWM8DCL 3F40h CWG3CLK 3F20h SMT1STAT 3F00h —
Legend: Unimplemented data memory locations and registers, read as ‘0’.
Note 1: Unimplemented in LF devices.
2: Unimplemented in PIC18(L)F26/27K42.
3: Unimplemented in PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47K42.
DS40001919E-page 49
3EFFh ADCLK 3EDFh ADLTHH 3EBFh CM1PCH 3E9Fh — 3E7Fh — 3E5Fh — 3E3Fh — 3E1Fh —
3EFEh ADACT 3EDEh ADLTHL 3EBEh CM1NCH 3E9Eh DAC1CON0 3E7Eh — 3E5Eh — 3E3Eh — 3E1Eh —
3EFDh ADREF 3EDDh — 3EBDh CM1CON1 3E9Dh — 3E7Dh — 3E5Dh — 3E3Dh — 3E1Dh —
3EFCh ADSTAT 3EDCh — 3EBCh CM1CON0 3E9Ch DAC1CON1 3E7Ch — 3E5Ch — 3E3Ch — 3E1Ch —
3EFBh ADCON3 3EDBh — 3EBBh CM2PCH 3E9Bh — 3E7Bh — 3E5Bh — 3E3Bh — 3E1Bh —
3EFAh ADCON2 3EDAh — 3EBAh CM2NCH 3E9Ah — 3E7Ah — 3E5Ah — 3E3Ah — 3E1Ah —
— — — — — —
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3EF9h ADCON1 3ED9h 3EB9h CM2CON1 3E99h 3E79h 3E59h 3E39h 3E19h
3EF8h ADCON0 3ED8h — 3EB8h CM2CON0 3E98h — 3E78h — 3E58h — 3E38h — 3E18h —
3EF7h ADPREH 3ED7h ADCP 3EB7h — 3E97h — 3E77h — 3E57h — 3E37h — 3E17h —
3EF6h ADPREL 3ED6h — 3EB6h — 3E96h — 3E76h — 3E56h — 3E36h — 3E16h —
3EF5h ADCAP 3ED5h — 3EB5h — 3E95h — 3E75h — 3E55h — 3E35h — 3E15h —
3EF4h ADACQH 3ED4h — 3EB4h — 3E94h — 3E74h — 3E54h — 3E34h — 3E14h —
3EF3h ADACQL 3ED3h — 3EB3h — 3E93h — 3E73h — 3E53h — 3E33h — 3E13h —
2EF2h — 3ED2h — 3EB2h — 3E92h — 3E72h — 3E52h — 3E32h — 3E12h —
3EF1h ADPCH 3ED1h — 3EB1h — 3E91h — 3E71h — 3E51h — 3E31h — 3E11h —
3EF0h ADRESH 3ED0h — 3EB0h — 3E90h — 3E70h — 3E50h — 3E30h — 3E10h —
3EEFh ADRESL 3ECFh — 3EAFh — 3E8Fh — 3E6Fh — 3E4Fh — 3E2Fh — 3E0Fh —
3EEEh ADPREVH 3ECEh — 3EAEh — 3E8Eh — 3E6Eh — 3E4Eh — 3E2Eh — 3E0Eh —
3EEDh ADPREVL 3ECDh — 3EADh — 3E8Dh — 3E6Dh — 3E4Dh — 3E2Dh — 3E0Dh —
3EECh ADRPT 3ECCh — 3EACh — 3E8Ch — 3E6Ch — 3E4Ch — 3E2Ch — 3E0Ch —
3EEBh ADCNT 3ECBh — 3EABh — 3E8Bh — 3E6Bh — 3E4Bh — 3E2Bh — 3E0Bh —
3EEAh ADACCU 3ECAh HLVDCON1 3EAAh — 3E8Ah — 3E6Ah — 3E4Ah — 3E2Ah — 3E0Ah —
3EE9h ADACCH 3EC9h HLVDCON0 3EA9h — 3E89h — 3E69h — 3E49h — 3E29h — 3E09h —
3EE8h ADACCL 3EC8h — 3EA8h — 3E88h — 3E68h — 3E48h — 3E28h — 3E08h —
3EE7h ADFLTRH 3EC7h — 3EA7h — 3E87h — 3E67h — 3E47h — 3E27h — 3E07h —
3EE6h ADFLTRL 3EC6h — 3EA6h — 3E86h — 3E66h — 3E46h — 3E26h — 3E06h —
3EE5h ADSTPTH 3EC5h — 3EA5h — 3E85h — 3E65h — 3E45h — 3E25h — 3E05h —
3EE4h ADSTPTL 3EC4h — 3EA4h — 3E84h — 3E64h — 3E44h — 3E24h — 3E04h —
3EE3h ADERRH 3EC3h ZCDCON 3EA3h — 3E83h — 3E63h — 3E43h — 3E23h — 3E03h —
3EE2h ADERRL 3EC2h — 3EA2h — 3E82h — 3E62h — 3E42h — 3E22h — 3E02h —
3EE1h ADUTHH 3EC1h FVRCON 3EA1h — 3E81h — 3E61h — 3E41h — 3E21h — 3E01h —
3EE0h ADUTHL 3EC0h CMOUT 3EA0h — 3E80h — 3E60h — 3E40h — 3E20h — 3E00h —
DS40001919E-page 50
3DFFh — 3DDFh U2FIFO 3DBFh — 3D9Fh — 3D7Fh — 3D5Fh I2C2CON2 3D3Fh — 3D1Fh —
3DFEh — 3DDEh U2BRGH 3DBEh — 3D9Eh — 3D7Eh — 3D5Eh I2C2CON1 3D3Eh — 3D1Eh —
3DFDh — 3DDDh U2BRGL 3DBDh — 3D9Dh — 3D7Dh — 3D5Dh I2C2CON0 3D3Dh — 3D1Dh —
3DFCh — 3DDCh U2CON2 3DBCh — 3D9Ch — 3D7Ch I2C1BTO 3D5Ch I2C2ADR3 3D3Ch — 3D1Ch SPI1CLK
3DFBh — 3DDBh U2CON1 3DBBh — 3D9Bh — 3D7Bh I2C1CLK 3D5Bh I2C2ADR2 3D3Bh — 3D1Bh SPI1INTE
3DFAh U1ERRIE 3DDAh U2CON0 3DBAh — 3D9Ah — 3D7Ah I2C1PIE 3D5Ah I2C2ADR1 3D3Ah — 3D1Ah SPI1INTF
3DF9h U1ERRIR 3DD9h — 3DB9h — 3D99h — 3D79h I2C1PIR 3D59h I2C2ADR0 3D39h — 3D19h SPI1BAUD
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3DF8h U1UIR 3DD8h U2P3L 3DB8h — 3D98h — 3D78h I2C1STAT1 3D58h I2C2ADB1 3D38h — 3D18h SPI1TWIDTH
3DF7h U1FIFO 3DD7h — 3DB7h — 3D97h — 3D77h I2C1STAT0 3D57h I2C2ADB0 3D37h — 3D17h SPI1STATUS
3DF6h U1BRGH 3DD6h U2P2L 3DB6h — 3D96h — 3D76h I2C1ERR 3D56h I2C2CNT 3D36h — 3D16h SPI1CON2
3DF5h U1BRGL 3DD5h — 3DB5h — 3D95h — 3D75h I2C1CON2 3D55h I2C2TXB 3D35h — 3D15h SPI1CON1
3DF4h U1CON2 3DD4h U2P1L 3DB4h — 3D94h — 3D74h I2C1CON1 3D54h I2C2RXB 3D34h — 3D14h SPI1CON0
3DF3h U1CON1 3DD3h — 3DB3h — 3D93h — 3D73h I2C1CON0 3D53h — 3D33h — 3D13h SPI1TCNTH
3DF2h U1CON0 3DD2h U2TXB 3DB2h — 3D92h — 3D72h I2C1ADR3 3D52h — 3D32h — 3D12h SPI1TCNTL
3DF1h U1P3H 3DD1h — 3DB1h — 3D91h — 3D71h I2C1ADR2 3D51h — 3D31h — 3D11h SPI1TXB
3DF0h U1P3L 3DD0h U2RXB 3DB0h — 3D90h — 3D70h I2C1ADR1 3D50h — 3D30h — 3D10h SPI1RXB
3DEFh U1P2H 3DCFh — 3DAFh — 3D8Fh — 3D6Fh I2C1ADR0 3D4Fh — 3D2Fh — 3D0Fh —
3DEEh U1P2L 3DCEh — 3DAEh — 3D8Eh — 3D6Eh I2C1ADB1 3D4Eh — 3D2Eh — 3D0Eh —
3DEDh U1P1H 3DCDh — 3DADh — 3D8Dh — 3D6Dh I2C1ADB0 3D4Dh — 3D2Dh — 3D0Dh —
3DECh U1P1L 3DCCh — 3DACh — 3D8Ch — 3D6Ch I2C1CNT 3D4Ch — 3D2Ch — 3D0Ch —
3DEBh U1TXCHK 3DCBh — 3DABh — 3D8Bh — 3D6Bh I2C1TXB 3D4Bh — 3D2Bh — 3D0Bh —
3DEAh U1TXB 3DCAh — 3DAAh — 3D8Ah — 3D6Ah I2C1RXB 3D4Ah — 3D2Ah — 3D0Ah —
3DE9h U1RXCHK 3DC9h — 3DA9h — 3D89h — 3D69h — 3D49h — 3D29h — 3D09h —
3DE8h U1RXB 3DC8h — 3DA8h — 3D88h — 3D68h — 3D48h — 3D28h — 3D08h —
3DE7h — 3DC7h — 3DA7h — 3D87h — 3D67h — 3D47h — 3D27h — 3D07h —
3DE6h — 3DC6h — 3DA6h — 3D86h — 3D66h I2C2BTO 3D46h — 3D26h — 3D06h —
3DE5h — 3DC5h — 3DA5h — 3D85h — 3D65h I2C2CLK 3D45h — 3D25h — 3D05h —
3DE4h — 3DC4h — 3DA4h — 3D84h — 3D64h I2C2PIE 3D44h — 3D24h — 3D04h —
3DE3h — 3DC3h — 3DA3h — 3D83h — 3D63h I2C2PIR 3D43h — 3D23h — 3D03h —
3DE2h U2ERRIE 3DC2h — 3DA2h — 3D82h — 3D62h I2C2STAT1 3D42h — 3D22h — 3D02h —
3DE1h U2ERRIR 3DC1h — 3DA1h — 3D81h — 3D61h I2C2STAT0 3D41h — 3D21h — 3D01h —
3DE0h U2UIR 3DC0h — 3DA0h — 3D80h — 3D60h I2C2ERR 3D40h — 3D20h — 3D00h —
DS40001919E-page 51
3CFFh — 3CDFh — 3CBFh — 3C9Fh — 3C7Fh — 3C5Fh CLC4GLS3 3C3Fh — 3C1Fh —

3CFEh MD1CARH 3CDEh — 3CBEh — 3C9Eh — 3C7Eh CLCDATA0 3C5Eh CLC4GLS2 3C3Eh — 3C1Eh —
3CFDh MD1CARL 3CDDh — 3CBDh — 3C9Dh — 3C7Dh CLC1GLS3 3C5Dh CLC4GLS1 3C3Dh — 3C1Dh —
3CFCh MD1SRC 3CDCh — 3CBCh — 3C9Ch — 3C7Ch CLC1GLS2 3C5Ch CLC4GLS0 3C3Ch — 3C1Ch —
3CFBh MD1CON1 3CDBh — 3CBBh — 3C9Bh — 3C7Bh CLC1GLS1 3C5Bh CLC4SEL3 3C3Bh — 3C1Bh —
3CFAh MD1CON0 3CDAh — 3CBAh — 3C9Ah — 3C7Ah CLC1GLS0 3C5Ah CLC4SEL2 3C3Ah — 3C1Ah —
3CF9h — 3CD9h — 3CB9h — 3C99h — 3C79h CLC1SEL3 3C59h CLC4SEL1 3C39h — 3C19h —
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3CF8h — 3CD8h — 3CB8h — 3C98h — 3C78h CLC1SEL2 3C58h CLC4SEL0 3C38h — 3C18h —
3CF7h — 3CD7h — 3CB7h — 3C97h — 3C77h CLC1SEL1 3C57h CLC4POL 3C37h — 3C17h —
3CF6h — 3CD6h — 3CB6h — 3C96h — 3C76h CLC1SEL0 3C56h CLC4CON 3C36h — 3C16h —
3CF5h — 3CD5h — 3CB5h — 3C95h — 3C75h CLC1POL 3C55h — 3C35h — 3C15h —
3CF4h — 3CD4h — 3CB4h — 3C94h — 3C74h CLC1CON 3C54h — 3C34h — 3C14h —
3CF3h — 3CD3h — 3CB3h — 3C93h — 3C73h CLC2GLS3 3C53h — 3C33h — 3C13h —
3CEFh — 3CCFh — 3CAFh — 3C8Fh — 3C6Fh CLC2SEL3 3C4Fh — 3C2Fh — 3C0Fh —
3CEEh — 3CCEh — 3CAEh — 3C8Eh — 3C6Eh CLC2SEL2 3C4Eh — 3C2Eh — 3C0Eh —
3CEDh — 3CCDh — 3CADh — 3C8Dh — 3C6Dh CLC2SEL1 3C4Dh — 3C2Dh — 3C0Dh —
3CECh — 3CCCh — 3CACh — 3C8Ch — 3C6Ch CLC2SEL0 3C4Ch — 3C2Ch — 3C0Ch —
3CEBh — 3CCBh — 3CABh — 3C8Bh — 3C6Bh CLC2POL 3C4Bh — 3C2Bh — 3C0Bh —
3CEAh — 3CCAh — 3CAAh — 3C8Ah — 3C6Ah CLC2CON 3C4Ah — 3C2Ah — 3C0Ah —
3CE9h — 3CC9h — 3CA9h — 3C89h — 3C69h CLC3GLS3 3C49h — 3C29h — 3C09h —
3CE6h CLKRCLK 3CC6h — 3CA6h — 3C86h — 3C66h CLC3GLS0 3C46h — 3C26h — 3C06h —
3CE5h CLKRCON 3CC5h — 3CA5h — 3C85h — 3C65h CLC3SEL3 3C45h — 3C25h — 3C05h —
3CE4h — 3CC4h — 3CA4h — 3C84h — 3C64h CLC3SEL2 3C44h — 3C24h — 3C04h —
3CE1h — 3CC1h — 3CA1h — 3C81h — 3C61h CLC3POL 3C41h — 3C21h — 3C01h —
3CE0h — 3CC0h — 3CA0h — 3C80h — 3C60h CLC3CON 3C40h — 3C20h — 3C00h —
DS40001919E-page 52
3BFFh DMA1SIRQ 3BDFh DMA2SIRQ 3BBFh — 3B9Fh — 3B7Fh — 3B5Fh — 3B3Fh — 3B1Fh —
3BFEh DMA1AIRQ 3BDEh DMA2AIRQ 3BBEh — 3B9Eh — 3B7Eh — 3B5Eh — 3B3Eh — 3B1Eh —
3BFDh DMA1CON1 3BDDh DMA2CON1 3BBDh — 3B9Dh — 3B7Dh — 3B5Dh — 3B3Dh — 3B1Dh —
3BFCh DMA1CON0 3BDCh DMA2CON0 3BBCh — 3B9Ch — 3B7Ch — 3B5Ch — 3B3Ch — 3B1Ch —
3BFBh DMA1SSAU 3BDBh DMA2SSAU 3BBBh — 3B9Bh — 3B7Bh — 3B5Bh — 3B3Bh — 3B1Bh —
3BFAh DMA1SSAH 3BDAh DMA2SSAH 3BBAh — 3B9Ah — 3B7Ah — 3B5Ah — 3B3Ah — 3B1Ah —
3BF9h DMA1SSAL 3BD9h DMA2SSAL 3BB9h — 3B99h — 3B79h — 3B59h — 3B39h — 3B19h —
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3BF8h DMA1SSZH 3BD8h DMA2SSZH 3BB8h — 3B98h — 3B78h — 3B58h — 3B38h — 3B18h —
3BF7h DMA1SSZL 3BD7h DMA2SSZL 3BB7h — 3B97h — 3B77h — 3B57h — 3B37h — 3B17h —
3BF6h DMA1SPTRU 3BD6h DMA2SPTRU 3BB6h — 3B96h — 3B76h — 3B56h — 3B36h — 3B16h —
3BF5h DMA1SPTRH 3BD5h DMA2SPTRH 3BB5h — 3B95h — 3B75h — 3B55h — 3B35h — 3B15h —
3BF4h DMA1SPTRL 3BD4h DMA2SPTRL 3BB4h — 3B94h — 3B74h — 3B54h — 3B34h — 3B14h —
3BF3h DMA1SCNTH 3BD3h DMA2SCNTH 3BB3h — 3B93h — 3B73h — 3B53h — 3B33h — 3B13h —
3BF2h DMA1SCNTL 3BD2h DMA2SCNTL 3BB2h — 3B92h — 3B72h — 3B52h — 3B32h — 3B12h —
3BF1h DMA1DSAH 3BD1h DMA2DSAH 3BB1h — 3B91h — 3B71h — 3B51h — 3B31h — 3B11h —
3BF0h DMA1DSAL 3BD0h DMA2DSAL 3BB0h — 3B90h — 3B70h — 3B50h — 3B30h — 3B10h —
3BEFh DMA1DSZH 3BCFh DMA2DSZH 3BAFh — 3B8Fh — 3B6Fh — 3B4Fh — 3B2Fh — 3B0Fh —
3BEEh DMA1DSZL 3BCEh DMA2DSZL 3BAEh — 3B8Eh — 3B6Eh — 3B4Eh — 3B2Eh — 3B0Eh —
3BEDh DMA1DPTRH 3BCDh DMA2DPTRH 3BADh — 3B8Dh — 3B6Dh — 3B4Dh — 3B2Dh — 3B0Dh —
3BECh DMA1DPTRL 3BCCh DMA2DPTRL 3BACh — 3B8Ch — 3B6Ch — 3B4Ch — 3B2Ch — 3B0Ch —
3BEBh DMA1DCNTH 3BCBh DMA2DCNTH 3BABh — 3B8Bh — 3B6Bh — 3B4Bh — 3B2Bh — 3B0Bh —
3BEAh DMA1DCNTL 3BCAh DMA2DCNTL 3BAAh — 3B8Ah — 3B6Ah — 3B4Ah — 3B2Ah — 3B0Ah —
3BE9h DMA1BUF 3BC9h DMA2BUF 3BA9h — 3B89h — 3B69h — 3B49h — 3B29h — 3B09h —
3BE8h — 3BC8h — 3BA8h — 3B88h — 3B68h — 3B48h — 3B28h — 3B08h —
DS40001919E-page 53
3AFFh — 3ADFh SPI1SDIPPS 3ABFh PPSLOCK 3A9Fh — 3A7Fh — 3A5Fh — 3A3Fh — 3A1Fh RD7PPS(2)
3AFEh — 3ADEh SPI1SCKPPS 3ABEh —(4) 3A9Eh — 3A7Eh — 3A5Eh — 3A3Eh — 3A1Eh RD6PPS(2)
3AFDh — 3ADDh ADACTPPS 3ABDh — 3A9Dh — 3A7Dh — 3A5Dh — 3A3Dh — 3A1Dh RD5PPS(2)
3AFCh — 3ADCh CLCIN3PPS 3ABCh — 3A9Ch — 3A7Ch — 3A5Ch — 3A3Ch — 3A1Ch RD4PPS(2)
3AFBh — 3ADBh CLCIN2PPS 3ABBh — 3A9Bh — 3A7Bh RD1I2C(2) 3A5Bh RB2I2C 3A3Bh — 3A1Bh RD3PPS(2)
3AFAh — 3ADAh CLCIN1PPS 3ABAh — 3A9Ah — 3A7Ah RD0I2C(2) 3A5Ah RB1I2C 3A3Ah — 3A1Ah RD2PPS(2)
3AF9h — 3AD9h CLCIN0PPS 3AB9h — 3A99h —(4) 3A79h —(4) 3A59h —(4) 3A39h — 3A19h RD1PPS(2)
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3AF8h — 3AD8h MD1SRCPPS 3AB8h — 3A98h —(4) 3A78h —(4) 3A58h —(4) 3A38h — 3A18h RD0PPS(2)
3AF7h — 3AD7h MD1CARHPPS 3AB7h — 3A97h — 3A77h — 3A57h IOCBF 3A37h — 3A17h RC7PPS
3AF6h — 3AD6h MD1CARLPPS 3AB6h — 3A96h — 3A76h — 3A56h IOCBN 3A36h — 3A16h RC6PPS
3AF5h — 3AD5h CWG3INPPS 3AB5h — 3A95h — 3A75h — 3A55h IOCBP 3A35h — 3A15h RC5PPS
3AF4h — 3AD4h CWG2INPPS 3AB4h — 3A94h INLVLF(3) 3A74h INLVLD(2) 3A54h INLVLB 3A34h — 3A14h RC4PPS
3AF3h — 3AD3h CWG1INPPS 3AB3h — 3A93h SLRCONF(3) 3A73h SLRCOND(2) 3A53h SLRCONB 3A33h — 3A13h RC3PPS
3AF2h — 3AD2h SMT1SIGPPS 3AB2h — 3A92h ODCONF(3) 3A72h ODCOND(2) 3A52h ODCONB 3A32h — 3A12h RC2PPS
3AF1h — 3AD1h SMT1WINPPS 3AB1h — 3A91h WPUF(3) 3A71h WPUD(2) 3A51h WPUB 3A31h — 3A11h RC1PPS
3AF0h — 3AD0h CCP4PPS 3AB0h — 3A90h ANSELF(3) 3A70h ANSELD(2) 3A50h ANSELB 3A30h — 3A10h RC0PPS
3AEFh — 3ACFh CCP3PPS 3AAFh — 3A8Fh — 3A6Fh — 3A4Fh — 3A2Fh RF7PPS(3) 3A0Fh RB7PPS
3AEEh — 3ACEh CCP2PPS 3AAEh — 3A8Eh — 3A6Eh — 3A4Eh — 3A2Eh RF6PPS(3) 3A0Eh RB6PPS
3AEDh — 3ACDh CCP1PPS 3AADh — 3A8Dh — 3A6Dh — 3A4Dh — 3A2Dh RF5PPS(3) 3A0Dh RB5PPS
3AECh — 3ACCh T6INPPS 3AACh — 3A8Ch — 3A6Ch — 3A4Ch — 3A2Ch RF4PPS(3) 3A0Ch RB4PPS
3AEBh — 3ACBh T4INPPS 3AABh — 3A8Bh — 3A6Bh RC4I2C 3A4Bh — 3A2Bh RF3PPS(3) 3A0Bh RB3PPS
3AEAh — 3ACAh T2INPPS 3AAAh — 3A8Ah — 3A6Ah RC3I2C 3A4Ah — 3A2Ah RF2PPS(3) 3A0Ah RB2PPS
3AE9h U2CTSPPS 3AC9h T5GPPS 3AA9h — 3A89h —(4) 3A69h —(4) 3A49h —(4) 3A29h RF1PPS(3) 3A09h RB1PPS
3AE8h U2RXPPS 3AC8h T5CKIPPS 3AA8h — 3A88h —(4) 3A68h —(4) 3A48h —(4) 3A28h RF0PPS(3) 3A08h RB0PPS
3AE7h — 3AC7h T3GPPS 3AA7h — 3A87h IOCEF 3A67h IOCCF 3A47h IOCAF 3A27h — 3A07h RA7PPS
3AE6h U1CTSPPS 3AC6h T3CKIPPS 3AA6h — 3A86h IOCEN 3A66h IOCCN 3A46h IOCAN 3A26h — 3A06h RA6PPS
3AE5h U1RXPPS 3AC5h T1GPPS 3AA5h — 3A85h IOCEP 3A65h IOCCP 3A45h IOCAP 3A25h — 3A05h RA5PPS
3AE4h I2C2SDAPPS 3AC4h T1CKIPPS 3AA4h — 3A84h INLVLE 3A64h INLVLC 3A44h INLVLA 3A24h — 3A04h RA4PPS
3AE3h I2C2SCLPPS 3AC3h T0CKIPPS 3AA3h — 3A83h SLRCONE(2) 3A63h SLRCONC 3A43h SLRCONA 3A23h — 3A03h RA3PPS
3AE2h I2C1SDAPPS 3AC2h INT2PPS 3AA2h — 3A82h ODCONE(2) 3A62h ODCONC 3A42h ODCONA 3A22h RE2PPS(2) 3A02h RA2PPS
3AE1h I2C1SCLPPS 3AC1h INT1PPS 3AA1h — 3A81h WPUE 3A61h WPUC 3A41h WPUA 3A21h RE1PPS(2) 3A01h RA1PPS
3AE0h SPI1SSPPS 3AC0h INT0PPS 3AA0h — 3A80h ANSELE(2) 3A60h ANSELC 3A40h ANSELA 3A20h RE0PPS(2) 3A00h RA0PPS
4: Reserved, maintain as ‘0’.
DS40001919E-page 54
39FFh — 39DFh OSCFRQ 39BFh — 399Fh — 397Fh — 395Fh WDTU 393Fh — 391Fh —
39FEh — 39DEh OSCTUNE 39BEh — 399Eh — 397Eh — 395Eh WDTH 393Eh — 391Eh —
39FDh — 39DDh OSCEN 39BDh — 399Dh — 397Dh SCANTRIG 395Dh WDTL 393Dh — 391Dh —
39FCh — 39DCh OSCSTAT 39BCh — 399Ch — 397Ch SCANCON0 395Ch WDTCON1 393Ch — 391Ch —
39FBh — 39DBh OSCCON3 39BBh — 399Bh — 397Bh SCANHADRU 395Bh WDTCON0 393Bh — 391Bh —
39FAh — 39DAh OSCCON2 39BAh — 399Ah PIE10 397Ah SCANHADRH 395Ah — 393Ah — 391Ah —
39F9h — 39D9h OSCCON1 39B9h — 3999h PIE9 3979h SCANHADRL 3959h — 3939h — 3919h —
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
39F8h — 39D8h CPUDOZE 39B8h — 3998h PIE8 3978h SCANLADRU 3958h — 3938h — 3918h —
39F7h SCANPR 39D7h — 39B7h — 3997h PIE7 3977h SCANLADRH 3957h — 3937h — 3917h —
39F6h — 39D6h — 39B6h — 3996h PIE6 3976h SCANLADRL 3956h — 3936h — 3916h —
39F5h — 39D5h — 39B5h — 3995h PIE5 3975h — 3955h — 3935h — 3915h —
39F4h DMA2PR 39D4h — 39B4h — 3994h PIE4 3974h — 3954h — 3934h — 3914h —
39F3h DMA1PR 39D3h — 39B3h — 3993h PIE3 3973h — 3953h — 3933h — 3913h —
39F2h MAINPR 39D2h — 39B2h — 3992h PIE2 3972h — 3952h — 3932h — 3912h —
39F1h ISRPR 39D1h VREGCON(1) 39B1h — 3991h PIE1 3971h — 3951h — 3931h — 3911h —
39F0h — 39D0h BORCON 39B0h — 3990h PIE0 3970h — 3950h — 3930h — 3910h —
39EFh PRLOCK 39CFh — 39AFh — 398Fh — 396Fh — 394Fh — 392Fh — 390Fh —
39EEh — 39CEh — 39AEh — 398Eh — 396Eh — 394Eh — 392Eh — 390Eh —
39EDh — 39CDh — 39ADh — 398Dh — 396Dh — 394Dh — 392Dh — 390Dh —
39ECh — 39CCh — 39ACh — 398Ch — 396Ch — 394Ch — 392Ch — 390Ch —
39EBh — 39CBh — 39ABh — 398Bh — 396Bh — 394Bh — 392Bh — 390Bh —
39EAh — 39CAh — 39AAh PIR10 398Ah IPR10 396Ah — 394Ah — 392Ah — 390Ah —
39E9h — 39C9h — 39A9h PIR9 3989h IPR9 3969h CRCCON1 3949h — 3929h — 3909h —
39E8h — 39C8h — 39A8h PIR8 3988h IPR8 3968h CRCCON0 3948h — 3928h — 3908h —
39E7h — 39C7h PMD7 39A7h PIR7 3987h IPR7 3967h CRCXORH 3947h — 3927h — 3907h —
39E6h NVMCON2 39C6h PMD6 39A6h PIR6 3986h IPR6 3966h CRCXORL 3946h — 3926h — 3906h —
39E5h NVMCON1 39C5h PMD5 39A5h PIR5 3985h IPR5 3965h CRCSHIFTH 3945h — 3925h — 3905h —
39E4h — 39C4h PMD4 39A4h PIR4 3984h IPR4 3964h CRCSHIFTL 3944h — 3924h — 3904h —
39E3h NVMDAT 39C3h PMD3 39A3h PIR3 3983h IPR3 3963h CRCACCH 3943h — 3923h — 3903h —
39E2h — 39C2h PMD2 39A2h PIR2 3982h IPR2 3962h CRCACCL 3942h — 3922h — 3902h —
39E1h NVMADRH(4) 39C1h PMD1 39A1h PIR1 3981h IPR1 3961h CRCDATH 3941h — 3921h — 3901h —
39E0h NVMADRL 39C0h PMD0 39A0h PIR0 3980h IPR0 3960h CRCDATL 3940h — 3920h — 3900h —
DS40001919E-page 55
38FFh — 38DFh — 38BFh — 389Fh IVTADU 387Fh — 385Fh — 383Fh — 381Fh —

38FEh — 38DEh — 38BEh — 389Eh IVTADH 387Eh — 385Eh — 383Eh — 381Eh —
38FDh — 38DDh — 38BDh — 389Dh IVTADL 387Dh — 385Dh — 383Dh — 381Dh —
38FCh — 38DCh — 38BCh — 389Ch — 387Ch — 385Ch — 383Ch — 381Ch —
38FBh — 38DBh — 38BBh — 389Bh — 387Bh — 385Bh — 383Bh — 381Bh —
38FAh — 38DAh — 38BAh — 389Ah — 387Ah — 385Ah — 383Ah — 381Ah —
38F9h — 38D9h — 38B9h — 3899h — 3879h — 3859h — 3839h — 3819h —
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
38F8h — 38D8h — 38B8h — 3898h — 3878h — 3858h — 3838h — 3818h —
38F7h — 38D7h — 38B7h — 3897h — 3877h — 3857h — 3837h — 3817h —
38F6h — 38D6h — 38B6h — 3896h — 3876h — 3856h — 3836h — 3816h —
38F5h — 38D5h — 38B5h — 3895h — 3875h — 3855h — 3835h — 3815h —
38F4h — 38D4h — 38B4h — 3894h — 3874h — 3854h — 3834h — 3814h —
38F3h — 38D3h — 38B3h — 3893h — 3873h — 3853h — 3833h — 3813h —
38F2h — 38D2h — 38B2h — 3892h — 3872h — 3852h — 3832h — 3812h —
38F1h — 38D1h — 38B1h — 3891h — 3871h — 3851h — 3831h — 3811h —
38F0h — 38D0h — 38B0h — 3890h PRODH_SHAD 3870h — 3850h — 3830h — 3810h —
38EFh — 38CFh — 38AFh — 388Fh PRODL_SHAD 386Fh — 384Fh — 382Fh — 380Fh —
38EEh — 38CEh — 38AEh — 388Eh FSR2H_SHAD 386Eh — 384Eh — 382Eh — 380Eh —
38EDh — 38CDh — 38ADh — 388Dh FSR2L_SHAD 386Dh — 384Dh — 382Dh — 380Dh —
38ECh — 38CCh — 38ACh — 388Ch FSR1H_SHAD 386Ch — 384Ch — 382Ch — 380Ch —
38EBh — 38CBh — 38ABh — 388Bh FSR1L_SHAD 386Bh — 384Bh — 382Bh — 380Bh —
38EAh — 38CAh — 38AAh — 388Ah FSR0H_SHAD 386Ah — 384Ah — 382Ah — 380Ah —
38E9h — 38C9h — 38A9h — 3889h FSR0L_SHAD 3869h — 3849h — 3829h — 3809h —
38E8h — 38C8h — 38A8h — 3888h PCLATU_SHAD 3868h — 3848h — 3828h — 3808h —
38E7h — 38C7h — 38A7h — 3887h PCLATH_SHAD 3867h — 3847h — 3827h — 3807h —
38E6h — 38C6h — 38A6h — 3886h BSR_SHAD 3866h — 3846h — 3826h — 3806h —
38E5h — 38C5h — 38A5h — 3885h WREG_SHAD 3865h — 3845h — 3825h — 3805h —
38E4h — 38C4h — 38A4h — 3884h STATUS_SHAD 3864h — 3844h — 3824h — 3804h —
38E3h — 38C3h — 38A3h — 3883h SHADCON 3863h — 3843h — 3823h — 3803h —
38E2h — 38C2h — 38A2h — 3882h BSR_CSHAD 3862h — 3842h — 3822h — 3802h —
38E1h — 38C1h — 38A1h — 3881h WREG_CSHAD 3861h — 3841h — 3821h — 3801h —
38E0h — 38C0h — 38A0h — 3880h STATUS_CSHAD 3860h — 3840h — 3820h — 3800h —
DS40001919E-page 56
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.5.5 STATUS REGISTER
The STATUS register, shown in Register 4-2, contains
the arithmetic status of the ALU. As with any other SFR,
it can be the operand for any instruction.
If the STATUS register is the destination for an
instruction that affects the Z, DC, C, OV or N bits, the
results of the instruction are not written; instead, the
STATUS register is updated according to the
instruction performed. Therefore, the result of an
instruction with the STATUS register as its destination
may be different than intended. As an example, CLRF
STATUS will set the Z bit and leave the remaining
Status bits unchanged (‘0uuu u1uu’).
It is recommended that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF, MOVFF,
MOVWF and MOVFFL instructions are used to alter the
STATUS register, because these instructions do not
affect the Z, C, DC, OV or N bits in the STATUS
register.
For other instructions that do not affect Status bits, see
the instruction set summaries in Section
41.2 “Extended Instruction Set” and Table 41-3.
Note: The C and DC bits operate as the borrow
and digit borrow bits, respectively, in
subtraction.
4.5.6 CALL SHADOW REGISTER

When CALL instruction is used, the WREG, BSR and
STATUS are automatically saved in hardware and can
be accessed using the WREG_CSHAD, BSR_CSHAD
and STATUS_CSHAD registers.
Note: The contents of these registers should be
handled correctly to avoid erroneous code
execution.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.6 Register Definitions: Status Registers
REGISTER 4-2: STATUS: STATUS REGISTER
U-0 R-1/q R-1/q R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u
— TO PD N OV Z DC C
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’

bit 6 TO: Time-Out bit
1 = Set at power-up or by execution of CLRWDT or SLEEP instruction
0 = A WDT time-out occurred
bit 5 PD: Power-Down bit
1 = Set at power-up or by execution of CLRWDT instruction
0 = Set by execution of the SLEEP instruction
bit 4 N: Negative bit used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement); indicates if the result is negative,
(ALU MSb = 1).
1 = The result is negative
0 = The result is positive
bit 3 OV: Overflow bit used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement); indicates an overflow of the 7-bit
magnitude, which causes the sign bit (bit 7) to change state.
1 = Overflow occurred for current signed arithmetic operation
0 = No overflow occurred
bit 2 Z: Zero bit
1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero
0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero
bit 1 DC: Digit Carry/Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW, SUBWF instructions)(1)
1 = A carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result
bit 0 C: Carry/Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW, SUBWF instructions)(1,2)
1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred
Note 1: For Borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the two’s complement of the
second operand.
2: For Rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high or low-order bit of the Source
register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.7 Data Addressing Modes 4.7.1 INHERENT AND LITERAL
ADDRESSING
Note: The execution of some instructions in the
core PIC18 instruction set are changed Many PIC18 control instructions do not need any
when the PIC18 extended instruction set is argument at all; they either perform an operation that
enabled. See Section 4.8 “Data Memory globally affects the device or they operate implicitly on
and the Extended Instruction Set” for one register. This addressing mode is known as
more information. Inherent Addressing. Examples include SLEEP, RESET
and DAW.
While the program memory can be addressed in only Other instructions work in a similar way but require an
one way – through the program counter – information additional explicit argument in the opcode. This is
in the data memory space can be addressed in several known as Literal Addressing mode because they
ways. For most instructions, the addressing mode is require some literal value as an argument. Examples
fixed. Other instructions may use up to three modes, include ADDLW and MOVLW, which respectively, add or
depending on which operands are used and whether or move a literal value to the W register. Other examples
not the extended instruction set is enabled. include CALL and GOTO, which include a 20-bit
The addressing modes are: program memory address.
• Inherent
• Literal
• Direct
• Indirect
An additional addressing mode, Indexed Literal Offset,
is available when the extended instruction set is
enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). Its operation is
discussed in detail in Section 4.8.1 “Indexed
Addressing with Literal Offset”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.7.2 DIRECT ADDRESSING EXAMPLE 4-6: HOW TO CLEAR RAM
Direct addressing specifies all or part of the source (BANK 1) USING
and/or destination address of the operation within the INDIRECT ADDRESSING
opcode itself. The options are specified by the LFSRFSR0, 100h ;
arguments accompanying the instruction. NEXT CLRFPOSTINC0 ; Clear INDF
; register then
In the core PIC18 instruction set, bit-oriented and byte- ; inc pointer
oriented instructions use some version of direct BTFSS FSR0H, 1 ; All done with
addressing by default. All of these instructions include ; Bank1?
some 8-bit literal address as their Least Significant BRA NEXT ; NO, clear next
Byte. This address specifies either a register address in CONTINUE ; YES, continue
one of the banks of data RAM (Section 4.5.2 “General
Purpose Register File”) or a location in the Access 4.7.3.1 FSR Registers and the INDF
Bank (Section 4.5.4 “Access Bank”) as the data Operand
source for the instruction.
At the core of indirect addressing are three sets of
The Access RAM bit ‘a’ determines how the address is registers: FSR0, FSR1 and FSR2. Each represents a
interpreted. When ‘a’ is ‘1’, the contents of the BSR pair of 8-bit registers, FSRnH and FSRnL. Each FSR
(Section 4.5.1 “Bank Select Register (BSR)”) are pair holds a 14-bit value, therefore, the two upper bits
used with the address to determine the complete 14-bit of the FSRnH register are not used. The 14-bit FSR
address of the register. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, the address is value can address the entire range of the data memory
interpreted as being a register in the Access Bank. in a linear fashion. The FSR register pairs, then, serve
Addressing that uses the Access RAM is sometimes as pointers to data memory locations.
also known as Direct Forced Addressing mode.
Indirect addressing is accomplished with a set of
A few instructions, such as MOVFFL, include the entire Indirect File Operands, INDF0 through INDF2. These
14-bit address (either source or destination) in their can be thought of as “virtual” registers; they are
opcodes. In these cases, the BSR is ignored entirely. mapped in the SFR space but are not physically
The destination of the operation’s results is determined implemented. Reading or writing to a particular INDF
by the destination bit ‘d’. When ‘d’ is ‘1’, the results are register actually accesses the data addressed by its
stored back in the source register, overwriting its corresponding FSR register pair. A read from INDF1,
original contents. When ‘d’ is ‘0’, the results are stored for example, reads the data at the address indicated by
in the W register. Instructions without the ‘d’ argument FSR1H:FSR1L. Instructions that use the INDF
have a destination that is implicit in the instruction; their registers as operands actually use the contents of their
destination is either the target register being operated corresponding FSR as a pointer to the instruction’s
on or the W register. target. The INDF operand is just a convenient way of
using the pointer.
4.7.3 INDIRECT ADDRESSING Because indirect addressing uses a full 14-bit address,
Indirect addressing allows the user to access a location data RAM banking is not necessary. Thus, the current
in data memory without giving a fixed address in the contents of the BSR and the Access RAM bit have no
instruction. This is done by using File Select Registers effect on determining the target address.
(FSRs) as pointers to the locations which are to be read
or written. Since the FSRs are themselves located in
RAM as Special File Registers, they can also be
directly manipulated under program control. This
makes FSRs very useful in implementing data
structures, such as tables and arrays in data memory.
The registers for indirect addressing are also
implemented with Indirect File Operands (INDFs) that
permit automatic manipulation of the pointer value with
auto-incrementing, auto-decrementing or offsetting
with another value. This allows for efficient code, using
loops, such as the example of clearing an entire RAM
bank in Example 4-6.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.7.3.2 FSR Registers, POSTINC, In this context, accessing an INDF register uses the
POSTDEC, PREINC and PLUSW value in the associated FSR register without changing
it. Similarly, accessing a PLUSW register gives the
In addition to the INDF operand, each FSR register pair
FSR value an offset by that in the W register; however,
also has four additional indirect operands. Like INDF,
neither W nor the FSR is actually changed in the
these are “virtual” registers which cannot be directly
operation. Accessing the other virtual registers
read or written. Accessing these registers actually
changes the value of the FSR register.
accesses the location to which the associated FSR
register pair points, and also performs a specific action
on the FSR value. They are:
• POSTDEC: accesses the location to which the
FSR points, then automatically decrements the
FSR by 1 afterwards
• POSTINC: accesses the location to which the
FSR points, then automatically increments the
FSR by 1 afterwards
• PREINC: automatically increments the FSR by 1,
then uses the location to which the FSR points in
the operation
• PLUSW: adds the signed value of the W register
(range of -127 to 128) to that of the FSR and uses
the location to which the result points in the
operation.
FIGURE 4-6: INDIRECT ADDRESSING

0000h
Using an instruction with one of the ADDWF, INDF1, 1 Bank 0
indirect addressing registers as the 0100h
operand.... Bank 1
0200h
Bank 2
0300h
...uses the 14-bit address stored in FSR1H:FSR1L
the FSR pair associated with that
7 0 7 0
register.... Bank 3
x x 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 through
Bank 61
...to determine the data memory

location to be used in that operation.
In this case, the FSR1 pair contains 3E00h
3ECCh. This means the contents of Bank 62
location 3ECCh will be added to that 3F00h
of the W register and stored back in Bank 63
3ECCh. 3FFFh
Data Memory

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Operations on the FSRs with POSTDEC, POSTINC 4.8.1 INDEXED ADDRESSING WITH
and PREINC affect the entire register pair; that is, LITERAL OFFSET
rollovers of the FSRnL register from FFh to 00h carry
Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set changes
over to the FSRnH register. On the other hand, results
the behavior of indirect addressing using the FSR2
of these operations do not change the value of any
register pair within Access RAM. Under the proper
flags in the STATUS register (e.g., Z, N, OV, etc.).
conditions, instructions that use the Access Bank – that
The PLUSW register can be used to implement a form is, most bit-oriented and byte-oriented instructions –
of indexed addressing in the data memory space. By can invoke a form of indexed addressing using an
manipulating the value in the W register, users can offset specified in the instruction. This special
reach addresses that are fixed offsets from pointer addressing mode is known as Indexed Addressing with
addresses. In some applications, this can be used to Literal Offset, or Indexed Literal Offset mode.
implement some powerful program control structure,
When using the extended instruction set, this
such as software stacks, inside of data memory.
addressing mode requires the following:
4.7.3.3 Operations by FSRs on FSRs • The use of the Access Bank is forced (‘a’ = 0) and
Indirect addressing operations that target other FSRs • The file address argument is less than or equal to
or virtual registers represent special cases. For 5Fh.
example, using an FSR to point to one of the virtual Under these conditions, the file address of the
registers will not result in successful operations. As a instruction is not interpreted as the lower byte of an
specific case, assume that FSR0H:FSR0L contains address (used with the BSR in direct addressing), or as
3FE7h, the address of INDF1. Attempts to read the an 8-bit address in the Access Bank. Instead, the value
value of the INDF1 using INDF0 as an operand will is interpreted as an offset value to an Address Pointer,
return 00h. Attempts to write to INDF1 using INDF0 as specified by FSR2. The offset and the contents of
the operand will result in a NOP. FSR2 are added to obtain the target address of the
On the other hand, using the virtual registers to write to operation.
an FSR pair may not occur as planned. In these cases,
the value will be written to the FSR pair but without any 4.8.2 INSTRUCTIONS AFFECTED BY
incrementing or decrementing. Thus, writing to either INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE
the INDF2 or POSTDEC2 register will write the same Any of the core PIC18 instructions that can use direct
value to the FSR2H:FSR2L. addressing are potentially affected by the Indexed
Since the FSRs are physical registers mapped in the Literal Offset Addressing mode. This includes all
SFR space, they can be manipulated through all direct byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost
operations. Users should proceed cautiously when one-half of the standard PIC18 instruction set.
working on these registers, particularly if their code Instructions that only use Inherent or Literal Addressing
uses indirect addressing. modes are unaffected.
Similarly, operations by indirect addressing are generally Additionally, byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions
permitted on all other SFRs. Users should exercise the are not affected if they do not use the Access Bank
appropriate caution that they do not inadvertently change (Access RAM bit is ‘1’), or include a file address of 60h
settings that might affect the operation of the device. or above. Instructions meeting these criteria will
continue to execute as before. A comparison of the
4.8 Data Memory and the Extended different possible addressing modes when the
extended instruction set is enabled is shown in
Instruction Set Figure 4-7.
Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set (XINST Those who desire to use byte-oriented or bit-oriented
Configuration bit = 1) significantly changes certain instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode should
aspects of data memory and its addressing. note the changes to assembler syntax for this mode.
Specifically, the use of the Access Bank for many of the This is described in more detail in Section
core PIC18 instructions is different; this is due to the 41.2.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax”.
introduction of a new addressing mode for the data
memory space.
What does not change is just as important. The size of
the data memory space is unchanged, as well as its
linear addressing. The SFR map remains the same.
Core PIC18 instructions can still operate in both Direct
and Indirect Addressing mode; inherent and literal
instructions do not change at all. Indirect addressing
with FSR0 and FSR1 also remain unchanged.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 4-7: COMPARING ADDRESSING OPTIONS FOR BIT-ORIENTED AND
BYTE-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS (EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ENABLED)
EXAMPLE INSTRUCTION: ADDWF, f, d, a (Opcode: 0010 01da ffff ffff)
0000h
When ‘a’ = 0 and f  60h:
0060h
The instruction executes in
Direct Forced mode. ‘f’ is inter- Bank 0
preted as a location in the 0100h

Access RAM between 060h 00h
Bank 1
and 0FFh. This is the same as through 60h
locations 3F60h to 3FFFh Bank 62
Valid range
(Bank 63) of data memory. for ‘f’
Locations below 60h are not FFh
3F00h Access RAM
available in this Addressing
Bank 63
mode.
3F60h
SFRs
3FFFh
Data Memory
When ‘a’ = 0 and f5Fh: 0000h

Indexed Literal Offset mode. ‘f’ 0060h
Bank 0
is interpreted as an offset to the
0100h 001001da ffffffff
address value in FSR2. The
two are added together to Bank 1
obtain the address of the target through
Bank 62
register for the instruction. The
address can be anywhere in FSR2H FSR2L
the data memory space.
3F00h
Note that in this mode, the Bank 63
correct syntax is now: 3F60h
ADDWF [k], d SFRs
where ‘k’ is the same as ‘f’. 3FFFh
Data Memory
BSR
When ‘a’ = 1 (all values of f): 0000h 00000000

0060h
Direct mode (also known as
Bank 0
Direct Long mode). ‘f’ is inter-
0100h
preted as a location in one of
the 63 banks of the data Bank 1 001001da ffffffff
memory space. The bank is through
Bank 62
designated by the Bank Select
Register (BSR). The address
can be in any implemented 3F00h
bank in the data memory Bank 63
space. 3F60h
SFRs
3FFFh
Data Memory

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
4.8.3 MAPPING THE ACCESS BANK IN 4.9 PIC18 Instruction Execution and
INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE the Extended Instruction Set
The use of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode Enabling the extended instruction set adds eight
effectively changes how the first 96 locations of Access additional commands to the existing PIC18 instruction
RAM (00h to 5Fh) are mapped. Rather than containing set. These instructions are executed as described in
just the contents of the bottom section of Bank 0, this Section 41.2 “Extended Instruction Set”.
mode maps the contents from a user defined “window”
that can be located anywhere in the data memory
space. The value of FSR2 establishes the lower bound-
ary of the addresses mapped into the window, while the
upper boundary is defined by FSR2 plus 95 (5Fh).
Addresses in the Access RAM above 5Fh are mapped
as previously described (see Section 4.5.4 “Access
Bank”). An example of Access Bank remapping in this
addressing mode is shown in Figure 4-8.
Remapping of the Access Bank applies only to
operations using the Indexed Literal Offset mode.
Operations that use the BSR (Access RAM bit is ‘1’) will
continue to use direct addressing as before.
FIGURE 4-8: REMAPPING THE ACCESS BANK WITH INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET
ADDRESSING
Example Situation:
ADDWF f, d, a 0000h
FSR2H:FSR2L = 120h
Bank 0
Locations in the region
from the FSR2 pointer 0100h
(0120h) to the pointer plus Bank 1
0120h
05Fh (017Fh) are mapped Window
017Fh 00h
to the bottom of the
Bank 1
Access RAM (000h-05Fh). 0200h Bank 1 “Window”
Special File Registers at 5Fh
60h
3F60h through 3FFFh are
mapped to 60h through Bank 2
FFh, as usual. SFRs
through
Bank 0 addresses below Bank 62
5Fh can still be addressed FFh
by using the BSR. Access Bank
3F00h
Bank 63
3F60h
SFRs
3FFFh
Data Memory

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
5.0 DEVICE CONFIGURATION
Device configuration consists of the Configuration
Words, User ID, Device ID, Rev ID, Device Information
Area (DIA), (see Section 5.7 “Device Information
Area”), and the Device Configuration Information
(DCI) regions, (see Section 5.8 “Device Configura-
tion Information”).
5.1 Configuration Words

There are six Configuration Word bits that allow the
user to setup the device with several choices of
oscillators, Resets and memory protection options.
These are implemented as Configuration Word 1
through Configuration Word 6 at 300000h through
30000Bh.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
5.2 Register Definitions: Configuration Words
REGISTER 5-1: CONFIGURATION WORD 1L (30 0000h)

U-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
— RSTOSC[2:0] — FEXTOSC[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
-n = Value for blank device ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown

bit 6-4 RSTOSC[2:0]: Power-up Default Value for COSC bits
111 = EXTOSC operating per FEXTOSC[2:0] bits
110 = HFINTOSC with HFFRQ = 4 MHz and CDIV = 4:1
101 = LFINTOSC
100 = SOSC
011 = Reserved
010 = EXTOSC with 4x PLL, with EXTOSC operating per FEXTOSC[2:0] bits
001 = Reserved
000 = HFINTOSC with HFFRQ = 64 MHz and CDIV = 1:1; resets COSC/NOSC to 3’b110
bit 2-0 FEXTOSC[2:0]: FEXTOSC External Oscillator Mode Selection bits
111 = ECH (External Clock High Power)(1)
110 = ECM (External Clock Medium Power)(1)
101 = ECL (External Clock Low Power)(1)
100 = Oscillator is not enabled
011 = Reserved (do not use)
010 = HS (crystal oscillator) above 8 MHz
001 = XT (crystal oscillator) above 500 kHz, below 8 MHz
000 = LP (crystal oscillator) optimized for 32.768 kHz
Note 1: Refer to Table 44-8 for External Clock/Oscillator Timing Requirements.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 5-2: CONFIGURATION WORD 1H (30 0001h)

U-1 U-1 R/W-1 U-1 R/W-1 U-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
— — FCMEN — CSWEN — PR1WAY CLKOUTEN
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5 FCMEN: Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Enable bit
1 = FSCM timer is enabled
0 = FSCM timer is disabled
bit 3 CSWEN: Clock Switch Enable bit
1 = Writing to NOSC and NDIV is allowed
0 = The NOSC and NDIV bits cannot be changed by user software
bit 1 PR1WAY: PRLOCKED One-Way Set Enable bit
1 = PRLOCKED bit can be cleared and set only once; Priority registers remain locked after one
clear/set cycle
0 = PRLOCKED bit can be set and cleared multiple times (subject to the unlock sequence)
bit 0 CLKOUTEN: Clock Out Enable bit
If FEXTOSC[2:0] = EC (high, mid or low) or Not Enabled:
1 = CLKOUT function is disabled; I/O or oscillator function on OSC2
0 = CLKOUT function is enabled; FOSC/4 clock appears at OSC2
Otherwise:
This bit is ignored.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

BOREN[1:0] LPBOREN IVT1WAY MVECEN PWRTS[1:0] MCLRE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-6 BOREN[1:0]: Brown-out Reset Enable bits

When enabled, Brown-out Reset Voltage (VBOR) is set by the BORV bit.
11 = Brown-out Reset is enabled, SBOREN bit is ignored
10 = Brown-out Reset is enabled while running, disabled in Sleep; SBOREN is ignored
01 = Brown-out Reset is enabled according to SBOREN
00 = Brown-out Reset is disabled
bit 5 LPBOREN: Low-Power BOR Enable bit
1 = Low-Power BOR is disabled
0 = Low-Power BOR is enabled
bit 4 IVT1WAY: IVTLOCK bit One-Way Set Enable bit
1 = IVTLOCKED bit can be cleared and set only once; IVT registers remain locked after one clear/set
cycle
0 = IVTLOCK ED bit can be set and cleared multiple times (subject to the unlock sequence)
bit 3 MVECEN: Multi-vector Enable bit
1 = Multi-vector enabled; Vector table used for interrupts
0 = Legacy interrupt behavior
bit 2-1 PWRTS[1:0]: Power-up Timer Selection bits
11 = PWRT is disabled
10 = PWRT set at 64 ms (2048 LFINTOSC Cycles)
bit 0 MCLRE: Master Clear (MCLR) Enable bit
If LVP = 1:
RE3 pin function is MCLR
If LVP = 0:
1 = MCLR pin is MCLR
0 = MCLR pin function is a port defined function

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W-1 U-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
XINST — DEBUG STVREN PPS1WAY ZCD BORV[1:0](1)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 XINST: Extended Instruction Set Enable bit

1 = Extended instruction set and Indexed Addressing mode are disabled (Legacy mode)
0 = Extended instruction set and Indexed Addressing mode are enabled
bit 5 DEBUG: Debugger Enable bit
1 = Background debugger is disabled
0 = Background debugger is enabled
bit 4 STVREN: Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset Enable bit
1 = Stack Overflow or Underflow will cause a Reset
0 = Stack Overflow or Underflow will not cause a Reset
bit 3 PPS1WAY: PPSLOCKED One-Way Set Enable bit
1 = PPSLOCKED bit can be cleared and set only once; PPS registers remain locked after one clear/set
cycle
0 = PPSLOCKED bit can be set and cleared multiple times (subject to the unlock sequence)
bit 2 ZCD: Zero-Cross Detect Enable bit
1 = ZCD is disabled; ZCD can be enabled by setting the bit SEN of the ZCDCON register
0 = ZCD is always enabled
bit 1-0 BORV[1:0]: Brown-out Reset Voltage Selection bits(1)
PIC18FXXK42 Devices:
11 = Brown-out Reset Voltage (VBOR) is set to 2.45V
PIC18LFXXK42 Device:
Note 1: The higher voltage setting is recommended for operation at or above 16 MHz.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
— WDTE[1:0] WDTCPS[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6-5 WDTE[1:0]: WDT Operating Mode bits
00 = WDT is disabled, SWDTEN is ignored
01 = WDT is enabled/disabled by the SWDTEN bit in WDTCON0
10 = WDT is enabled while Sleep = 0, suspended when Sleep = 1; SWDTEN is ignored
11 = WDT is enabled regardless of Sleep; SWDTEN is ignored
bit 4-0 WDTCPS[4:0]: WDT Period Select bits
WDTPS at POR
Software Control
WDTCPS[4:0] Typical Time-out
Value Divider Ratio of WDTPS?
(FIN = 31 kHz)
00000 00000 1:32 25 1 ms
00001 00001 1:64 26 2 ms
00010 00010 1:128 27 4 ms
00011 00011 1:256 28 8 ms
00100 00100 1:512 29 16 ms
00101 00101 1:1024 210 32 ms
00110 00110 1:2048 211 64 ms
00111 00111 1:4096 212 128 ms
01000 01000 1:8192 213 256 ms
01001 01001 1:16384 214 512 ms No
01010 01010 1:32768 215 1s
01011 01011 1:65536 216 2s
01100 01100 1:131072 217 4s
01101 01101 1:262144 218 8s
01110 01110 1:524299 219 16s
01111 01111 1:1048576 220 32s
10000 10000 1:2097152 221 64s
10001 10001 1:4194304 222 128s
10010 10010 1:8388608 223 256s
10011 10011
... ... 1:32 25 1 ms No
11110 11110
11111 01011 1:65536 216 2s Yes

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-1 U-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
— — WDTCCS[2:0] WDTCWS[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-3 WDTCCS[2:0]: WDT Input Clock Selector bits
If WDTE[1:0] Fuses = 2’b00:
These bits are ignored.
Otherwise:
000 = WDT reference clock is the 31.0 kHz LFINTOSC
001 = WDT reference clock is the 31.25 kHz MFINTOSC
010 = WDT reference clock is SOSC
011 = Reserved (default to LFINTOSC)
•
•
110 = Reserved (default to LFINTOSC)
111 = Software control
bit 2-0 WDTCWS[2:0]: WDT Window Select bits
Window at POR Software Keyed

WDTCWS[2:0] Window Delay Window Opening Control of Access
Value Window Required?
Percent of Time Percent of Time
000 000 87.5 12.5
001 001 75 25
010 010 62.5 37.5
011 011 50 50 No Yes
100 100 37.5 62.5
101 101 25 75
110 111 n/a 100
111 111 n/a 100 Yes No

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W-1 U-1 U-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
WRTAPP (1) — — SAFEN (1) BBEN (1) BBSIZE[2:0] (2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 WRTAPP: Application Block Write Protection bit(1)

1 = Application Block is NOT write-protected
0 = Application Block is write-protected
bit 4 SAFEN: Storage Area Flash Enable bit(1)
1 = SAF is disabled
0 = SAF is enabled
bit 3 BBEN: Boot Block Enable bit(1)
1 = Boot Block disabled
0 = Boot Block enabled
bit 2-0 BBSIZE[2:0]: Boot Block Size Selection bits(2)
Refer to Table 5-1.
Note 1: Bits are implemented as sticky bits. Once protection is enabled through ICSP™ or a self-write, it can only be
reset through a Bulk Erase.
2: BBSIZE[2:0] bits can only be changed when BBEN = 1. Once BBEN = 0, BBSIZE[2:0] can only be changed
through a Bulk Erase.
TABLE 5-1: BOOT BLOCK SIZE BITS

Boot Block Size Device Size(1)
BBEN BBSIZE[2:0] END_ADDRESS_BOOT
(words) 16k 32k 64k
1 xxx 0 — X X X
0 111 512 00 03FFh X X X
0 110 1024 00 07FFh X X X
0 101 2048 00 0FFFh X X X
0 100 4096 00 1FFFh X X X
0 011 8192 00 3FFFh X X X
0 010 16384 00 7FFFh — X X
0 001 32768 00 FFFFh Note 2 X
0 000 32768 00 FFFFh — — —
Note 1: For each device, the quoted device size specification is listed in Table 4-1.
2: The maximum boot block size is half the user program memory size. All selections higher than the maximum size default
to maximum boot block size of half PFM. For example, all settings of BBSIZE = 000 through BBSIZE = 011, default to a
boot block size of 8 kW on a 16 kW device.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-1 U-1 R/W-1 U-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
— — LVP(2) — WRTSAF (1,3) WRTD (1,4) WRTC (1) WRTB(1,5)

bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5 LVP: Low-Voltage Programming Enable bit(2)
1 = Low-voltage programming enabled. MCLR/VPP pin function is MCLR. MCLRE (Register 5-3) is
ignored.
0 = HV on MCLR/VPP must be used for programming.
bit 3 WRTSAF: Storage Area Flash (SAF) Write Protection bit(1,3)
1 = SAF is NOT write-protected
0 = SAF is write-protected
bit 2 WRTD: Data EEPROM Write Protection bit(1,4)
1 = Data EEPROM NOT write-protected
0 = Data EEPROM write-protected
bit 1 WRTC: Configuration Register Write Protection bit(1)
1 = Configuration Register NOT write-protected
0 = Configuration Register write-protected
bit 0 WRTB: Boot Block Write Protection bit(1,5)
1 = Boot Block NOT write-protected
0 = Boot Block write-protected
Note 1: Bits are implemented as sticky bits. Once protection is enabled through ICSP or a self write, it can only be
reset through a Bulk Erase.
2: The LVP bit cannot be written (to zero) while operating from the LVP programming interface. The purpose of
this rule is to prevent the user from dropping out of LVP mode while programming from LVP mode, or acci-
dentally eliminating LVP mode from the configuration state.
3: Unimplemented if SAF is not present and only applicable if SAFEN = 0.
4: Unimplemented if data EEPROM is not present.
5: Only applicable if BBEN = 0.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 R/W-1
— — — — — — — CP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 0 CP: User Program Flash Memory and Data EEPROM Code Protection bit
1 = User Program Flash Memory and Data EEPROM code protection is disabled
0 = User Program Flash Memory and Data EEPROM code protection is enabled

U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1
— — — — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
TABLE 5-2: SUMMARY OF CONFIGURATION WORDS

Default/
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Unprogrammed
Value
30 0000h CONFIG1L — RSTOSC[2:0] — FEXTOSC[2:0] 1111 1111
30 0001h CONFIG1H — — FCMEN — CSWEN — PR1WAY CLKOUTEN 1111 1111
30 0002h CONFIG2L BOREN[1:0] LPBOREN IVT1WAY MVECEN PWRTS[1:0] MCLRE 1111 1111
30 0003h CONFIG2H XINST — DEBUG STVREN PPS1WAY ZCD BORV[1:0] 1111 1111
30 0004h CONFIG3L — WDTE[1:0] WDTCPS[4:0] 1111 1111
30 0005h CONFIG3H — — WDTCCS[2:0] WDTCWS[2:0] 1111 1111
30 0006h CONFIG4L WRTAPP — — SAFEN BBEN BBSIZE[2:0] 1111 1111
30 0007h CONFIG4H — — LVP — WRTSAF WRTD WRTC WRTB 1111 1111
30 0008h CONFIG5L — — — — — — — CP 1111 1111
30 0009h CONFIG5H — — — — — — — — 1111 1111

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
5.3 Code Protection
Code protection allows the device to be protected from
external access. Program memory protection and data
memory are controlled through the CP Configuration
bit. Internal access to the program memory is
unaffected by code protection setting.
The entire program memory space and Data
EEPROM is protected from external reads and writes
by the CP bit in Configuration Words. When CP = 0,
external reads and writes of memory are inhibited and
a read will return all ‘0’s. The CPU can continue to
read program memory and data EEPROM, regardless
of the protection bit settings. Self-writing the program
memory or Data EEPROM is dependent upon the
write protection settings.
5.4 User ID
Eight words in the memory space (200000h-20000Fh)
are designated as ID locations where the user can
store checksum or other code identification numbers.
These locations are readable and writable during
normal execution. See Section 13.2 “Device
Information Area, Device Configuration Area, User
ID, Device ID and Configuration Word Access” for
more information on accessing these memory
locations. For more information on checksum
calculation, see the “PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/
57K42 Memory Programming Specification”
(DS40001886).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
5.5 Device ID and Revision ID
The 16-bit device ID word is located at 3F FFFEh and
the 16-bit revision ID is located at 3F FFFCh. These
locations are read-only and cannot be erased or
modified.
Development tools, such as device programmers and
debuggers, may be used to read the Device ID,
Revision ID and Configuration Words. Refer to 13.0
“Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) Control” for more
information on accessing these locations.
5.6 Register Definitions: Device ID and Revision ID
REGISTER 5-11: DEVICE ID: DEVICE ID REGISTER

R R R R R R R R
DEV[15:8]
bit 15 bit 8
R R R R R R R R
DEV[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit ‘1’ = Bit is set 0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown
bit 15-0 DEV[15:0]: Device ID bits
Device Device ID
PIC18F26K42 6C60h
PIC18F27K42 6C40h
PIC18F45K42 6C20h
PIC18F46K42 6C00h
PIC18F47K42 6BE0h
PIC18F55K42 6BC0h
PIC18F56K42 6BA0h
PIC18F57K42 6B80h
PIC18LF26K42 6DA0h
PIC18LF27K42 6D80h
PIC18LF45K42 6D60h
PIC18LF46K42 6D40h
PIC18LF47K42 6D20h
PIC18LF55K42 6D00h
PIC18LF56K42 6CE0h
PIC18LF57K42 6CC0h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 5-12: REVISION ID: REVISION ID REGISTER

R R R R R R R R
1 0 1 0 MJRREV[5:2]
bit 15 bit 8
R R R R R R R R
MJRREV[1:0] MNRREV[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit ‘1’ = Bit is set 0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown
bit 15-12 Read as ‘1010’

These bits are fixed with value ‘1010’ for all devices in this family.
bit 11-6 MJRREV[5:0]: Major Revision ID bits
These bits are used to identify a major revision. A major revision is indicated by revision (A0, B0, C0,
etc.)
Revision A = 0b00 0000
bit 5-0 MNRREV[5:0]: Minor Revision ID bits
These bits are used to identify a minor revision.
Revision A0 = 0b00 0000

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
5.7 Device Information Area
The Device Information Area (DIA) is a dedicated
region in the Program memory space. The DIA
contains the calibration data for the internal
temperature indicator module, stores the Microchip
Unique Identifier words and the Fixed Voltage
Reference voltage readings measured in mV.
The complete DIA table is shown in Table 5-3: Device
Information Area, followed by a description of each
region and its functionality. The data is mapped from
3F0000h to 3F003Fh in the PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/
55/56/57K42 family. These locations are read-only and
cannot be erased or modified by the user. The data is
programmed into the device during manufacturing.
TABLE 5-3: DEVICE INFORMATION AREA

Address Range Name of Region Standard Device Information
MUI0
MUI1
MUI2
3F0000h-3F000Bh Microchip Unique Identifier (6 Words)
MUI3
MUI4
MUI5
MUI6
3F000Ch-3F000Fh Unassigned (2 Words)
MUI7
EUI0
EUI1
EUI2
EUI3
EUI4
3F0010h-3F0023h Optional External Unique Identifier (10 Words)
EUI5
EUI6
EUI7
EUI8
EUI9
3F0024h-3F0025h Reserved (1 Word)
3F0026h-3F0027h TSLR2 Temperature Indicator ADC reading at @ 90°C (low range setting)
3F0028h-3F0029h Reserved (1 Word)
3F002Ah-3F002Bh Reserved (1 Word)
3F002Ch-3F002Dh TSHR2 Temperature Indicator ADC reading at @ 90°C (high range setting)
3F002Eh-3F002Fh Reserved (1 Word)
3F0030h-3F0031h FVRA1X ADC FVR1 Output voltage for 1x setting (in mV)
3F0032h-3F0033h FVRA2X ADC FVR1 Output Voltage for 2x setting (in mV)
3F0034h-3F0035h FVRA4X ADC FVR1 Output Voltage for 4x setting (in mV)
3F0036h-3F0037h FVRC1X Comparator FVR2 output voltage for 1x setting (in mV)
3F0038h-3F0039h FVRC2X Comparator FVR2 output voltage for 2x setting (in mV)
3F003Ah-3F003Bh FVRC4X(1) Comparator FVR2 output voltage for 4x setting (in mV)
3F003Ch-3F003Fh Unassigned (2 Words)
Note 1: Value not present on LF devices.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
5.7.1 MICROCHIP UNIQUE IDENTIFIER 5.7.3 ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL
(MUI) CONVERSION DATA OF THE
The PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 devices TEMPERATURE SENSOR
are individually encoded during final manufacturing The purpose of the Temperature Sensor module is to
with a Microchip Unique Identifier, or MUI. The MUI provide a temperature-dependent voltage that can be
cannot be user-erased. This feature allows for measured by an analog module, see Section
manufacturing traceability of Microchip Technology 35.0 “Temperature Indicator Module”.
devices in applications where this is a required. It may
The DIA table contains the internal ADC measurement
also be used by the application manufacturer for a
values of the Temperature sensor for Low and High
number of functions that require unverified unique
range at fixed points of reference. The values are
identification, such as:
measured during test and are unique to each device.
• Tracking the device The measurement data is stored in the DIA memory
• Unique serial number region as hexadecimal numbers corresponding to the
ADC conversion result. The calibration data can be
The MUI consists of six program words. When read
used to plot the approximate sensor output voltage,
together, these fields form a unique identifier. The MUI
VTSENSE vs. Temperature curve without having to
is stored in nine read-only locations, located between
make calibration measurements in the application. For
3F0000h to 3F000Fh in the DIA space. Table 5-3 lists
more information on the operation of the Temperature
the addresses of the identifier words.
Sensor, refer to Section 35.0 “Temperature Indicator
Note: For applications that require verified Module”.
unique identification, contact your • TSLR2: Address 3F0026h to 3F0027h store the
Microchip Technology sales office to measurements for the low-range setting of the
create a Serialized Quick Turn Temperature Sensor at VDD = 3V.
ProgrammingSM option. • TSHR2: Address 3F002Ch to 3F002Dh store the
measurements for the High Range setting of the
5.7.2 EXTERNAL UNIQUE IDENTIFIER Temperature Sensor at VDD = 3V.
(EUI) • The stored measurements are made by the
The EUI data is stored at locations 3F0010h to device ADC using the internal VREF = 2.048V.
3F0023h in the Program Memory region. This region is
an optional space for placing application specific
information. The data is coded per customer
requirements during manufacturing.
Note: Data is stored in this address range on

receiving a request from the customer.
The customer may contact the local sales
representative, or Field Applications
Engineer, and provide them the unique
identifier information that is supposed to
be stored in this region.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
5.7.4 FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE 5.8 Device Configuration Information
DATA
The Device Configuration Information (DCI) is a
The DIA stores measured FVR voltages for this device dedicated region in the Program memory space
in mV for the different buffer settings of 1x, 2x or 4x at mapped from 3FFF00h to 3FFF09h. The data stored in
Program Memory locations 3F0030h to 3F003Bh. For these locations is read-only and cannot be erased.
more information on the FVR, refer to Section 34.0
Refer to Table 5-4: Device Configuration Information
“Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)”.
for PIC18(L)F26/27/45/55/46/47/56/57K42 for the
• FVRA1X stores the value of ADC FVR1 Output complete DCI table address and description. The DCI
voltage for 1x setting (in mV) holds information about the device which is useful for
• FVRA2X stores the value of ADC FVR1 Output programming and Bootloader applications.
Voltage for 2x setting (in mV)
The erase size is the minimum erasable unit in the
• FVRA4X stores the value of ADC FVR1 Output
PFM, expressed as rows. The total device Flash
Voltage for 4x setting (in mV)
memory capacity is (Row Size * Number of rows)
• FVRC1X stores the value of Comparator FVR2
output voltage for 2x setting (in mV)
TABLE 5-4: DEVICE CONFIGURATION INFORMATION FOR PIC18(L)F26/27/45/55/46/47/56/57K42
VALUE
ADDRESS Name DESCRIPTION UNITS
PIC18(L)F45/55K42 PIC18(L)F26/46/56K42 PIC18(L)F27/47/57K42
3F FF00h-3F FF01h ERSIZ Erase Row Size 64 64 64 Words

3F FF02h-3F FF03h WLSIZ Number of write latches per row 128 128 128 Bytes
3F FF04h-3F FF05h URSIZ Number of User Rows 256 512 1024 Rows
3F FF06h-3F FF07h EESIZ Data EEPROM memory size 256 1024 1024 Bytes
3F FF08h-3F FF09h PCNT Pin Count 40(1)/48 28/40(1)/48 28/40(1)/48 Pins
Note 1: Pin count of 40 is also used for 44-pin part.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
6.0 RESETS To allow VDD to stabilize, an optional Power-up Timer
can be enabled to extend the Reset time after a BOR
There are multiple ways to reset this device: or POR event.
• Power-on Reset (POR) A simplified block diagram of the On-Chip Reset Circuit
• Brown-out Reset (BOR) is shown in Figure 6-1.
• Low-Power Brown-Out Reset (LPBOR)
• MCLR Reset
• WDT Reset
• RESET instruction
• Stack Overflow
• Stack Underflow
• Programming mode exit
• Memory Execution Violation Reset (MEMV)
FIGURE 6-1: SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT

Rev. 10-000006G
4/6/2017
ICSP™ Programming Mode Exit

RESET Instruction
Memory Violation
Stack Underflow
Stack Overflow
VPP /MCLR MCLRE
WWDT Time-out/
Window violation Device
Reset
Power-on
Reset
VDD
Brown-out
Reset Power-up
Timer
LFINTOSC
2
LPBOR
PWRTS<1:0>
Reset

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 6-2: LPBOR, BOR, POR RELATIONSHIP
BOR
BOR Event
REARM POR
Event To PCON0
indicator bit
POR
LPBOR
POR Event
LPBOR Event
Reset
logic

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
6.1 Power-on Reset (POR) 6.2.3 BOR CONTROLLED BY SOFTWARE
The POR circuit holds the device in Reset until VDD has When the BOREN bits of Configuration Words are
reached an acceptable level for minimum operation. programmed to ‘01’, the BOR is controlled by the
Slow rising VDD, fast operating speeds or analog SBOREN bit of the BORCON register. The device start-
performance may require greater than minimum VDD. up is not delayed by the BOR ready condition or the
The PWRT, BOR or MCLR features can be used to VDD level.
extend the start-up period until all device operation BOR protection begins as soon as the BOR circuit is
conditions have been met. ready. The status of the BOR circuit is reflected in the
BORRDY bit of the BORCON register.
6.2 Brown-out Reset (BOR) BOR protection is unchanged by Sleep.
The BOR circuit holds the device in Reset when VDD
6.2.4 BOR AND BULK ERASE
reaches a selectable minimum level. Between the
POR and BOR, complete voltage range coverage for BOR is forced ON during PFM Bulk Erase operations
execution protection can be implemented. to make sure that a safe erase voltage is maintained for
a successful erase cycle.
The Brown-out Reset module has four operating
modes controlled by the BOREN[1:0] bits in During Bulk Erase, the BOR is enabled at 2.45V for F
Configuration Words. The four operating modes are: and LF devices, even if it is configured to some other
value. If VDD falls, the erase cycle will be aborted, but
• BOR is always on
the device will not be reset.
• BOR is off when in Sleep
• BOR is controlled by software
• BOR is always off
Refer to Table 6-1 for more information.
The Brown-out Reset voltage level is selectable by
configuring the BORV[1:0] bits in Configuration Words.
A VDD noise rejection filter prevents the BOR from
triggering on small events. If VDD falls below VBOR for
a duration greater than parameter TBORDC, the device
will reset. See Table 44-12 for more information.
6.2.1 BOR IS ALWAYS ON

When the BOREN bits of Configuration Words are
programmed to ‘11’, the BOR is always on. The device
start-up will be delayed until the BOR is ready and VDD
is higher than the BOR threshold.
BOR protection is active during Sleep. The BOR does
not delay wake-up from Sleep.
6.2.2 BOR IS OFF IN SLEEP

When the BOREN bits of Configuration Words are
programmed to ‘10’, the BOR is on, except in Sleep.
The device start-up will be delayed until the BOR is
ready and VDD is higher than the BOR threshold.
BOR protection is not active during Sleep. The device
wake-up will be delayed until the BOR is ready.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 6-1: BOR OPERATING MODES

Instruction Execution upon:
BOREN[1:0] SBOREN Device Mode BOR Mode
Release of POR Wake-up from Sleep
Wait for release of BOR
11 X X Active Begins immediately
(BORRDY = 1)
Awake Active N/A
(BORRDY = 1)
10 X
Sleep Hibernate N/A
(BORRDY = 1)
1 X Active Wait for release of BOR
01 Begins immediately
0 X Hibernate (BORRDY = 1)
00 X X Disabled Begins immediately
FIGURE 6-3: BROWN-OUT SITUATIONS
VDD
VBOR
Internal
Reset TPWRT(1)
VDD
VBOR
Internal < TPWRT

Reset TPWRT(1)
VDD
VBOR
Internal
Reset TPWRT(1)
Note 1: TPWRT delay depends on PWRTS[1:0] Configuration bits.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
6.3 Register Definitions: BOR Control
REGISTER 6-1: BORCON: BROWN-OUT RESET CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-1/u U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-q/u
SBOREN — — — — — — BORRDY
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared q = Value depends on condition
bit 7 SBOREN: Software Brown-out Reset Enable bit

If BOREN  01:
SBOREN is read/write, but has no effect on the BOR.
If BOREN = 01:
1 = BOR Enabled
0 = BOR Disabled
bit 0 BORRDY: Brown-out Reset Circuit Ready Status bit
1 = The Brown-out Reset Circuit is active and armed
0 = The Brown-out Reset Circuit is disabled or is warming up

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
6.4 Low-Power Brown-out Reset 6.6 Windowed Watchdog Timer
(LPBOR) (WWDT) Reset
The Low-Power Brown-out Reset (LPBOR) provides The Windowed Watchdog Timer generates a Reset if
an additional BOR circuit for low power operation. the firmware does not issue a CLRWDT instruction
Refer to Figure 6-2 to see how the BOR interacts with within the time-out period or window set. The TO and
other modules. PD bits in the STATUS register and the RWDT bit in the
The LPBOR is used to monitor the external VDD pin. PCON0 register are changed to indicate a WWDT
When too low of a voltage is detected, the device is Reset. The WDTWV bit in the PCON0 register indicates
held in Reset. if the WDT Reset has occurred due to a time out or a
window violation. See Section 11.0 “Windowed
6.4.1 ENABLING LPBOR Watchdog Timer (WWDT)” for more information.
The LPBOR is controlled by the LPBOREN bit of
Configuration Word 2L. When the device is erased, the
6.7 RESET Instruction
LPBOR module defaults to disabled. A RESET instruction will cause a device Reset. The RI
bit in the PCON0 register will be set to ‘0’. See Table 6-
6.4.1.1 LPBOR Module Output 3 for default conditions after a RESET instruction has
The output of the LPBOR module is a signal indicating occurred.
whether or not a Reset is to be asserted. This signal is
OR’d together with the Reset signal of the BOR 6.8 Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset
module to provide the generic BOR signal, which goes
to the PCON0 register and to the power control block. The device can reset when the Stack Overflows or
Underflows. The STKOVF or STKUNF bits of the
PCON0 register indicate the Reset condition. These
6.5 MCLR
Resets are enabled by setting the STVREN bit in
The MCLR is an optional external input that can reset Configuration Words. See Section 4.2.5 “Return
the device. The MCLR function is controlled by the Address Stack” for more information.
MCLRE bit of Configuration Words and the LVP bit of
Configuration Words (Table 6-2). The RMCLR bit in the 6.9 Programming Mode Exit
PCON0 register will be set to ‘0’ if a MCLR Reset has
occurred. Upon exit of Programming mode, the device will
behave as if a POR occurred.
TABLE 6-2: MCLR CONFIGURATION 6.10 Power-up Timer (PWRT)

MCLRE LVP MCLR
The Power-up Timer provides a selected time-out
x 1 Enabled duration on POR or Brown-out Reset.
1 0 Enabled The device is held in Reset as long as PWRT is active.
0 0 Disabled The PWRT delay allows additional time for the VDD to
rise to an acceptable level. The Power-up Timer is
6.5.1 MCLR ENABLED selected by setting the PWRTS[1:0] Configuration bits,
appropriately.
When MCLR is enabled and the pin is held low, the
device is held in Reset. The MCLR pin is connected to The Power-up Timer starts after the release of the POR
VDD through an internal weak pull-up. and BOR/LPBOR if enabled, as shown in Figure 6-1.
The device has a noise filter in the MCLR Reset path.
The filter will detect and ignore small pulses.
Note: An internal Reset event (RESET
instruction, BOR, WWDT, POR stack),
does not drive the MCLR pin low.
6.5.2 MCLR DISABLED

When MCLR is disabled, the MCLR pin becomes input-
only and pin functions such as internal weak pull-ups
are under software control. See Section 16.1 “I/O
Priorities” for more information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
6.11 Start-up Sequence The total time-out will vary based on oscillator
configuration and Power-up Timer configuration. See
Upon the release of a POR or BOR, the following must Section 7.0 “Oscillator Module (with Fail-Safe
occur before the device will begin executing: Clock Monitor)” for more information.
1. Power-up Timer runs to completion (if enabled). The Power-up Timer and oscillator start-up timer run
2. Oscillator start-up timer runs to completion (if independently of MCLR Reset. If MCLR is kept low
required for selected oscillator source). long enough, the Power-up Timer and oscillator Start-
3. MCLR must be released (if enabled). up Timer will expire. Upon bringing MCLR high, the
device will begin execution after 10 FOSC cycles (see
Figure 6-4). This is useful for testing purposes or to
synchronize more than one device operating in parallel.
FIGURE 6-4: RESET START-UP SEQUENCE
VDD
Internal POR
TPWRT
Power-up Timer
MCLR
TMCLR
Internal RESET
Oscillator Modes
External Crystal
TOST
Oscillator Start-up Timer
Oscillator
FOSC
Internal Oscillator
Oscillator
FOSC
External Clock (EC)
CLKIN
FOSC

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
6.11.1 MEMORY EXECUTION VIOLATION
If the CPU executes outside the valid execution area, a
memory execution violation reset occurs.
The invalid execution areas are:
1. Addresses outside implemented program
memory (see Table 5-1).
2. Storage Area Flash (SAF) inside program
memory, if it is enabled.
When a memory execution violation is generated, flag
MEMV is cleared in PCON1 (Register 6-3) to signal the
cause of Reset. It needs to be set in the user code after
a memory execution violation Reset has occurred to
detect further violation Resets.
6.12 Determining the Cause of a Reset

Upon any Reset, multiple bits in the STATUS and
PCON0 registers are updated to indicate the cause of
the Reset. Table 6-3 shows the Reset conditions of
these registers.
TABLE 6-3: RESET CONDITION FOR SPECIAL REGISTERS

Program STATUS PCON0 PCON1
Condition
Counter Register(1,2) Register Register
Power-on Reset 0 -110 0000 0011 110x ---- --1-
Brown-out Reset 0 -110 0000 0011 11u0 ---- --1-
MCLR Reset during normal operation 0 -uuu uuuu uuuu 0uuu ---- --u-
MCLR Reset during Sleep 0 -10u uuuu uuuu 0uuu ---- --u-
WWDT Time-out Reset 0 -0uu uuuu uuu0 uuuu ---- --u-
WWDT Window Violation Reset 0 -uuu uuuu uu0u uuuu ---- --u-
RESET Instruction Executed 0 -uuu uuuu uuuu u0uu ---- --u-
Stack Overflow Reset (STVREN = 1) 0 -uuu uuuu 1uuu uuuu ---- --u-
Stack Underflow Reset (STVREN = 1) 0 -uuu uuuu u1uu uuuu ---- --u-
Memory Violation Reset 0 -uuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ---- --0-
Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, — = unimplemented bit, reads as ‘0’.
Note 1: If a Status bit is not implemented, that bit will be read as ‘0’.
2: Status bits Z, C, DC are reset by POR/BOR, but not defined by the Resets module (Register 4-2).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
6.13 Power Control (PCON0/PCON1) The PCON0/1 register bits are shown in Register 6-2
Register and Register 6-3. Hardware will change the
corresponding register bit during the Reset process; if
The Power Control (PCON0/PCON1) register contains the Reset was not caused by the condition, the bit
flag bits to differentiate between a: remains unchanged (Table 6-3).
• Brown-out Reset (BOR) Software should reset the bit to the inactive state after
• Power-on Reset (POR) restart (hardware will not reset the bit). Software may
• Reset Instruction Reset (RI) also set any PCON0 bit to the active state, so that user
code may be tested, but no Reset action will be
• MCLR Reset (RMCLR)
generated.
• Watchdog Timer Reset (RWDT)
• Watchdog Window Violation (WDTWV)
• Stack Underflow Reset (STKUNF)
• Stack Overflow Reset (STKOVF)
• Memory Violation Reset (MEMV)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
6.14 Register Definitions: Power Control
REGISTER 6-2: PCON0: POWER CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W/HS-0/q R/W/HS-0/q R/W/HC-1/q R/W/HC-1/q R/W/HC-1/q R/W/HC-1/q R/W/HC-0/u R/W/HC-q/u
STKOVF STKUNF WDTWV RWDT RMCLR RI POR BOR

bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
HC = Bit is cleared by hardware HS = Bit is set by hardware
u = Bit is unchanged x = Bit is unknown -m/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets
bit 7 STKOVF: Stack Overflow Flag bit

1 = A Stack Overflow occurred (more CALLs than fit on the stack)
0 = A Stack Overflow has not occurred or set to ‘0’ by firmware
bit 6 STKUNF: Stack Underflow Flag bit
1 = A Stack Underflow occurred (more RETURNs than CALLs)
0 = A Stack Underflow has not occurred or set to ‘0’ by firmware
bit 5 WDTWV: Watchdog Window Violation bit
1 = A WDT window violation has not occurred or set to ‘1’ by firmware
0 = A CLRWDT instruction was issued when the WDT Reset window was closed (set to ‘0’ in hardware
when a WDT window violation Reset occurs)
bit 4 RWDT: WDT Reset Flag bit
1 = A WDT overflow/time-out Reset has not occurred or set to ‘1’ by firmware
0 = A WDT overflow/time-out Reset has occurred (set to ‘0’ in hardware when a WDT Reset occurs)
bit 3 RMCLR: MCLR Reset Flag bit
1 = A MCLR Reset has not occurred or set to ‘1’ by firmware
0 = A MCLR Reset has occurred (set to ‘0’ in hardware when a MCLR Reset occurs)
bit 2 RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit
1 = A RESET instruction has not been executed or set to ‘1’ by firmware
0 = A RESET instruction has been executed (set to ‘0’ in hardware upon executing a RESET
instruction)
bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit
1 = No Power-on Reset occurred or set to ‘1’ by firmware
0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (set to ‘0’ in hardware when a Power-on Reset occurs)
bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit
1 = No Brown-out Reset occurred or set to ‘1’ by firmware
0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (set to ‘0’ in hardware when a Brown-out Reset occurs)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 6-3: PCON1: POWER CONTROL REGISTER 1

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W/HC-1/u U-0
— — — — — — MEMV —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
u = Bit is unchanged x = Bit is unknown -m/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets

bit 1 MEMV: Memory Violation Flag bit
1 = No memory violation Reset occurred or set to ‘1’ by firmware
0 = A memory violation Reset occurred (set to ‘0’ in hardware when a Memory Violation occurs)
TABLE 6-4: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH RESETS

Register
on Page
BORCON SBOREN — — — — — — BORRDY 85
PCON0 STKOVF STKUNF WDTWV RWDT RMCLR RI POR BOR 90
PCON1 — — — — — — MEMV — 91
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by Resets.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.0 OSCILLATOR MODULE (WITH The external oscillator module can be configured in one
of the following clock modes, by setting the
FAIL-SAFE CLOCK MONITOR)
FEXTOSC[2:0] Configuration bits:
7.1 Overview 1. ECL – External Clock Low-Power mode

2. ECM – External Clock Medium Power mode
The oscillator module has multiple clock sources and 3. ECH – External Clock High-Power mode
selection features that allow it to be used in a wide
4. LP – 32 kHz Low-Power Crystal mode.
range of applications while maximizing performance
and minimizing power consumption. Figure 7-1 5. XT – Medium Gain Crystal or Ceramic Resonator
illustrates a block diagram of the oscillator module. Oscillator mode (between 100 kHz and 4 MHz)
6. HS – High Gain Crystal or Ceramic Resonator
Clock sources can be supplied from external oscillators,
mode (above 4 MHz)
quartz-crystal resonators and ceramic resonators. In
addition, the system clock source can be supplied from The ECH, ECM, and ECL Clock modes rely on an
one of two internal oscillators and PLL circuits, with a external logic level signal as the device clock source.
choice of speeds selectable via software. Additional The LP, XT, and HS Clock modes require an external
clock features include: crystal or resonator to be connected to the device.
Each mode is optimized for a different frequency range.
• Selectable system clock source between external
The internal oscillator block produces low and high-
or internal sources via software.
frequency clock sources, designated LFINTOSC and
• Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) designed to HFINTOSC. (see Internal Oscillator Block, Figure 7-1).
detect a failure of the external clock source (LP, Multiple device clock frequencies may be derived from
XT, HS, ECH, ECM, ECL) and switch these clock sources.
automatically to the internal oscillator.
• Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ensures stability
of crystal oscillator sources.
The RSTOSC bits of Configuration Word 1 (Register 5-
1) determine the type of oscillator that will be used
when the device runs after Reset, including when it is
first powered up.
If an external clock source is selected, the FEXTOSC
bits of Configuration Word 1 must be used in
conjunction with the RSTOSC bits to select the
External Clock mode.

FIGURE 7-1: SIMPLIFIED PIC® MCU CLOCK SOURCE BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000208D
5/10/2016
CLKIN/OSC1
External
Oscillator
(EXTOSC)
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
CLKOUT/OSC2
CDIV<4:0>
4x PLL
COSC<2:0>
SOSCIN/SOSCI
Secondary 512
Oscillator 1001
256
(SOSC) 111 1000
128 Sleep
SOSCO 010 0111 System Clock
64
100 0110
Post Divider
LFINTOSC 32
101 0101
31 kHz 16
110 0100 SYSCMD Peripheral Clock
Oscillator
8
Reserved 011 0011
4
Reserved 001 0010 Sleep
2
HFINTOSC Reserved 000 0001 Idle
1
0000
HFFRQ<3:0>
1,2,4,8,12,16,32,48,64
MHz
Oscillator
LFINTOSC is used to
FSCM
monitor system clock
MFINTOSC
To Peripherals
31.25 kHz and 500 kHz To Peripherals
Oscillator To Peripherals
DS40001919E-page 93
To Peripherals
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.2 Clock Source Types EC mode has three power modes to select from through
Configuration Words:
Clock sources can be classified as external or internal.
• ECH – High power
External clock sources rely on external circuitry for the
• ECM – Medium power
clock source to function. Examples are: oscillator
modules (ECH, ECM, ECL mode), quartz crystal • ECL – Low power
resonators or ceramic resonators (LP, XT and HS Refer to Table 44-8 for External Clock/Oscillator Timing
modes). Requirements. The Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) is
Internal clock sources are contained within the disabled when EC mode is selected. Therefore, there
oscillator module. The internal oscillator block has two is no delay in operation after a Power-on Reset (POR)
internal oscillators that are used to generate internal or wake-up from Sleep. Because the PIC® MCU design
system clock sources. The High-Frequency Internal is fully static, stopping the external clock input will have
Oscillator (HFINTOSC) can produce 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, the effect of halting the device while leaving all data
32, 48 and 64 MHz clock. The frequency can be intact. Upon restarting the external clock, the device
controlled through the OSCFRQ register (Register 7- will resume operation as if no time had elapsed.
5). The Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC)
generates a fixed 31 kHz frequency. FIGURE 7-2: EXTERNAL CLOCK (EC)
MODE OPERATION
A 4x PLL is provided that can be used with an external
clock. When used with the HFINTOSC the 4x PLL has
input frequency limitations.See Section 7.2.1.4 “4x Clock from OSC1/CLKIN
PLL” for more details. Ext. System
PIC® MCU
The system clock can be selected between external or
internal clock sources via the NOSC bits in the OSC2/CLKOUT
OSCCON1 register. See Section 7.3 “Clock FOSC/4 or I/O(1)
Switching” for additional information. The system
clock can be made available on the OSC2/CLKOUT pin Note 1: Output depends upon CLKOUTEN bit of the
for any of the modes that do not use the OSC2 pin. The Configuration Words (CONFIG1H).
clock out functionality is governed by the CLKOUTEN
bit in the CONFIG1H register (Register 5-2). If enabled,
the clock out signal is always at a frequency of FOSC/4. 7.2.1.2 LP, XT, HS Modes
The LP, XT and HS modes support the use of quartz
7.2.1 EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCES crystal resonators or ceramic resonators connected to
An external clock source can be used as the device OSC1 and OSC2 (Figure 7-3). The three modes select
system clock by performing one of the following a low, medium or high gain setting of the internal
actions: inverter-amplifier to support various resonator types
and speed.
• Program the RSTOSC[2:0] and FEXTOSC[2:0]
bits in the Configuration Words to select an LP Oscillator mode selects the lowest gain setting of the
external clock source that will be used as the internal inverter-amplifier. LP mode current consumption
default system clock upon a device Reset. is the least of the three modes. This mode is designed to
• Write the NOSC[2:0] and NDIV[3:0] bits in the drive only 32.768 kHz tuning-fork type crystals (watch
OSCCON1 register to switch the system clock crystals), but can operate up to 100 kHz.
source. XT Oscillator mode selects the intermediate gain
See Section 7.3 “Clock Switching” for more setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. XT mode
information. current consumption is the medium of the three modes.
This mode is best suited to drive crystals and
7.2.1.1 EC Mode resonators with a frequency range up to 4 MHz.
The External Clock (EC) mode allows an externally HS Oscillator mode selects the highest gain setting of the
generated logic level signal to be the system clock internal inverter-amplifier. HS mode current consumption
source. When operating in this mode, an external clock is the highest of the three modes. This mode is best
source is connected to the OSC1 input. OSC2/ suited for resonators that require an operating frequency
CLKOUT is available for general purpose I/O or up to 20 MHz.
CLKOUT. Figure 7-2 shows the pin connections for EC Figure 7-3 and Figure 7-4 show typical circuits for
mode. quartz crystal and ceramic resonators, respectively.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 7-3: QUARTZ CRYSTAL 7.2.1.3 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)
OPERATION (LP, XT OR If the oscillator module is configured for LP, XT or HS
HS MODE) modes, the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) counts
1024 oscillations from OSC1. This occurs following a
PIC® MCU Power-on Reset (POR), Brown-out Reset (BOR), or a
wake-up from Sleep. The OST ensures that the
OSC1/CLKIN oscillator circuit, using a quartz crystal resonator or
C1
ceramic resonator, has started and is providing a stable
To Internal
Logic system clock to the oscillator module.
Quartz
RF(2) Sleep 7.2.1.4 4x PLL
Crystal
The oscillator module contains a 4x PLL that can be
used with the external clock sources to provide a
OSC2/CLKOUT
C2 RS(1) system clock source. The input frequency for the PLL
must fall within specifications. See the PLL Clock
Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for Timing Specifications in Table 44-10.
quartz crystals with low drive level.
The PLL can be enabled for use by one of two
2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode methods:
selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M.
1. Program the RSTOSC bits in the Configuration
Word 1 to 010 (enable EXTOSC with 4x PLL).
FIGURE 7-4: CERAMIC RESONATOR 2. Write the NOSC bits in the OSCCON1 register
OPERATION to 010 (enable EXTOSC with 4x PLL).
(XT OR HS MODE)
PIC® MCU
OSC1/CLKIN
C1 To Internal
Logic
RP(3) RF(2) Sleep
C2 Ceramic RS(1) OSC2/CLKOUT

Resonator
Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for

ceramic resonators with low drive level.
2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode
selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M.
3: An additional parallel feedback resistor (RP)
may be required for proper ceramic resonator
operation.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.2.1.5 Secondary Oscillator
Note 1: Quartz crystal characteristics vary
The secondary oscillator is a separate oscillator block according to type, package and
that can be used as an alternate system clock source. manufacturer. The user should consult the
The secondary oscillator is optimized for 32.768 kHz, manufacturer data sheets for specifications
and can be used with an external crystal oscillator con- and recommended application.
nected to the SOSCI and SOSCO device pins, or an
2: Always verify oscillator performance over
external clock source connected to the SOSCIN pin.
the VDD and temperature range that is
The secondary oscillator can be selected during run-
expected for the application.
time using clock switching. Refer to Section
7.3 “Clock Switching” for more information. 3: For oscillator design assistance, reference
the following Microchip Application Notes:
Two power modes are available for the secondary
oscillator. These modes are selected with the • AN826, “Crystal Oscillator Basics and
SOSCPWR (OSCCON3[6]). Clearing this bit selects Crystal Selection for PIC® and PIC®
the lower Crystal Gain mode which provides lowest Devices” (DS00826)
microcontroller power consumption. Setting this bit • AN849, “Basic PIC® Oscillator Design”
enables a higher Gain mode to support faster crystal (DS00849)
start-up or crystals with higher ESR. • AN943, “Practical PIC® Oscillator
Analysis and Design” (DS00943)
FIGURE 7-5: QUARTZ CRYSTAL • AN949, “Making Your Oscillator Work”
OPERATION (DS00949)
(SECONDARY • TB097, “Interfacing a Micro Crystal
OSCILLATOR) MS1V-T1K 32.768 kHz Tuning Fork
Crystal to a PIC16F690/SS” (DS91097)
• AN1288, “Design Practices for Low-
PIC® MCU
Power External Oscillators” (DS01288)
SOSCI
C1 To Internal
Logic
32.768 kHz
Quartz
Crystal
C2 SOSCO

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.2.2 INTERNAL CLOCK SOURCES 7.2.2.1 HFINTOSC
The device may be configured to use the internal The High-Frequency Internal Oscillator (HFINTOSC) is
oscillator block as the system clock by performing one a precision digitally-controlled internal clock source
of the following actions: that produces a stable clock up to 64 MHz. The
• Program the RSTOSC[2:0] bits in Configuration HFINTOSC can be enabled through one of the
Words to select the INTOSC clock source, which following methods:
will be used as the default system clock upon a • Programming the RSTOSC[2:0] bits in
device Reset. Configuration Word 1 to ‘110’ (FOSC = 1 MHz) or
• Write the NOSC[2:0] bits in the OSCCON1 ‘000’ (FOSC = 64 MHz) to set the oscillator upon
register to switch the system clock source to the device Power-up or Reset.
internal oscillator during run-time. See Section • Write to the NOSC[2:0] bits of the OSCCON1
7.3 “Clock Switching” for more information. register during run-time. See Section 7.3 “Clock
In INTOSC mode, OSC1/CLKIN is available for general Switching” for more information.
purpose I/O. OSC2/CLKOUT is available for general The HFINTOSC frequency can be selected by setting
purpose I/O or CLKOUT. the FRQ[3:0] bits of the OSCFRQ register.
The function of the OSC2/CLKOUT pin is determined The NDIV[3:0] bits of the OSCCON1 register allow for
by the CLKOUTEN bit in Configuration Words. division of the HFINTOSC output from a range between
The internal oscillator block has two independent 1:1 and 1:512.
oscillators that can produce two internal system clock
7.2.2.2 MFINTOSC
sources.
The module provides two (500 kHz and 31.25 kHz)
1. The HFINTOSC (High-Frequency Internal
constant clock outputs. These clocks are digital
Oscillator) is factory-calibrated and operates
divisors of the HFINTOSC clock. Dynamic divider logic
from 1 to 64 MHz. The frequency of HFINTOSC
is used to provide constant MFINTOSC clock rates for
can be selected through the OSCFRQ
all settings of HFINTOSC.
Frequency Selection register, and fine-tuning
can be done via the OSCTUNE register. The MFINTOSC cannot be used to drive the system
2. The LFINTOSC (Low-Frequency Internal but it is used to clock certain modules such as the
Oscillator) is factory-calibrated and operates at Timers and WWDT.
31 kHz.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.2.2.3 Internal Oscillator Frequency
Adjustment
The HFINTOSC is factory-calibrated. This internal
oscillator can be adjusted in software by writing to the
OSCTUNE register (Register 7-3).
The default value of the OSCTUNE register is 00h. The
value is a 6-bit two’s complement number. A value of
1Fh will provide an adjustment to the maximum
frequency. A value of 20h will provide an adjustment to
the minimum frequency.
When the OSCTUNE register is modified, the oscillator
frequency will begin shifting to the new frequency. Code
execution continues during this shift. There is no
indication that the shift has occurred.
OSCTUNE does not affect the LFINTOSC frequency.
Operation of features that depend on the LFINTOSC
clock source frequency, such as the Power-up Timer
(PWRT), WWDT, Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and
peripherals, are not affected by the change in frequency.
7.2.2.4 LFINTOSC
The Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC) is
a factory-calibrated 31 kHz internal clock source.
The LFINTOSC is the frequency for the Power-up
Timer (PWRT), Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT)
and Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM). The LFINTOSC
can also be used as the system clock, or as a clock or
input source to other peripherals.
The LFINTOSC is enabled through one of the following
methods:
• Programming the RSTOSC[2:0] bits of
Configuration Word 1 to enable LFINTOSC.
• Write to the NOSC[2:0] bits of the OSCCON1 reg-
ister during run-time. See Section 7.3, Clock
Switching for more information.
7.2.2.5 ADCRC
The ADCRC is an oscillator dedicated to the ADC2
module. The ADCRC oscillator can be manually
enabled using the ADOEN bit of the OSCEN register.
The ADCRC runs at a fixed frequency of 600 kHz.
ADCRC is automatically enabled if it is selected as the
clock source for the ADC2 module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.2.2.6 Oscillator Status and Manual Enable When the new oscillator is ready, the New Oscillator
Ready (NOSCR) bit of OSCCON3 and the Clock
The Ready status of each oscillator (including the
Switch Interrupt Flag (CSWIF) bit of the respective PIR
ADCRC oscillator) is displayed in OSCSTAT
register are set. If Clock Switch Interrupts are enabled
(Register 7-4). The oscillators (but not the PLL) may be
(CSWIE = 1), an interrupt will be generated at that time.
explicitly enabled through OSCEN (Register 7-7).
The Oscillator Ready (ORDY) bit of OSCCON3 can
7.2.2.7 HFOR and MFOR Bits also be polled to determine when the oscillator is ready
in lieu of an interrupt.
The HFOR and MFOR bits indicate that the HFINTOSC
and MFINTOSC is ready. These clocks are always
valid for use at all times, but only accurate after they are Note: The CSWIF interrupt will not wake the
ready. system from Sleep.
When a new value is loaded into the OSCFRQ register, If the Clock Switch Hold (CSWHOLD) bit of OSCCON3
the HFOR and MFOR bits will clear, and set again is clear, the oscillator switch will occur when the New
when the oscillator is ready. During pending OSCFRQ Oscillator is Ready bit (NOSCR) is set, and the
changes the MFINTOSC clock will stall at a high or a interrupt (if enabled) will be serviced at the new
low state, until the HFINTOSC resumes operation. oscillator setting.
If CSWHOLD is set, the oscillator switch is suspended,
7.3 Clock Switching while execution continues using the current (old) clock
source. When the NOSCR bit is set, software should:
The system clock source can be switched between
external and internal clock sources via software using • Set CSWHOLD = 0 so the switch can complete,
the New Oscillator Source (NOSC) bits of the or
OSCCON1 register. The following clock sources can be • Copy COSC into NOSC to abandon the switch.
selected using the following: If Doze is in effect, the switch occurs on the next clock
• External oscillator cycle, whether or not the CPU is operating during that
• Internal Oscillator Block (INTOSC) cycle.
Changing the clock post-divider without changing the
clock source (i.e., changing FOSC from 1 MHz to
Note: The Clock Switch Enable bit in 2 MHz) is handled in the same manner as a clock
Configuration Word 1 can be used to source change, as described previously. The clock
enable or disable the clock switching source will already be active, so the switch is relatively
capability. When cleared, the NOSC and quick. CSWHOLD must be clear (CSWHOLD = 0) for
NDIV bits cannot be changed by user the switch to complete.
software. When set, writing to NOSC and
The current COSC and CDIV are indicated in the
NDIV is allowed and would switch the
OSCCON2 register up to the moment when the switch
clock frequency.
actually occurs, at which time OSCCON2 is updated
and ORDY is set. NOSCR is cleared by hardware to
7.3.1 NEW OSCILLATOR SOURCE
indicate that the switch is complete.
(NOSC) AND NEW DIVIDER
SELECTION REQUEST (NDIV) BITS
The New Oscillator Source (NOSC) and New Divider
Selection Request (NDIV) bits of the OSCCON1
register select the system clock source and frequency
that are used for the CPU and peripherals.
When new values of NOSC and NDIV are written to
OSCCON1, the current oscillator selection will
continue to operate while waiting for the new clock
source to indicate that it is stable and ready. In some
cases, the newly requested source may already be in
use, and is ready immediately. In the case of a divider-
only change, the new and old sources are the same, so
the old source will be ready immediately. The device
may enter Sleep while waiting for the switch as
described in Section 7.3.2 “Clock Switch and
Sleep”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.3.2 CLOCK SWITCH AND SLEEP
If OSCCON1 is written with a new value and the device
is put to Sleep before the switch completes, the switch
will not take place and the device will enter Sleep
mode.
When the device wakes from Sleep and the
CSWHOLD bit is clear, the device will wake with the
‘new’ clock active, and the Clock Switch Interrupt flag
bit (CSWIF) will be set.
When the device wakes from Sleep and the
CSWHOLD bit is set, the device will wake with the ‘old’
clock active and the new clock will be requested again.
FIGURE 7-6: CLOCK SWITCH (CSWHOLD = 0)

OSCCON1
WRITTEN
OSC #1 OSC #2
ORDY
NOTE 2
NOSCR
NOTE 1
CSWIF
USER
CSWHOLD CLEAR
Note 1: CSWIF is asserted coincident with NOSCR; interrupt is serviced at OSC#2 speed.
2: The assertion of NOSCR is hidden from the user because it appears only for the duration of the switch.
FIGURE 7-7: CLOCK SWITCH (CSWHOLD = 1)

OSCCON1
WRITTEN
OSC #1 OSC #2
ORDY
NOSCR
NOTE 1
CSWIF
USER
CSWHOLD CLEAR
Note 1: CSWIF is asserted coincident with NOSCR, and may be cleared before or after clearing CSWHOLD = 0.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 7-8: CLOCK SWITCH ABANDONED
OSCCON1 OSCCON1
WRITTEN WRITTEN
OSC #1
ORDY
NOTE 2
NOSCR
NOTE 1
CSWIF
CSWHOLD
Note 1: CSWIF may be cleared before or after rewriting OSCCON1; CSWIF is not automatically cleared.
2: ORDY = 0 if OSCCON1 does not match OSCCON2; a new switch will begin.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.4 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor 7.4.3 FAIL-SAFE CONDITION CLEARING
The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the device The Fail-Safe condition is cleared after a Reset,
to continue operating should the external oscillator fail. executing a SLEEP instruction or changing the NOSC
The FSCM is enabled by setting the FCMEN bit in the and NDIV bits of the OSCCON1 register. When
Configuration Words. The FSCM is applicable to all switching to the external oscillator or PLL, the OST is
external Oscillator modes (LP, XT, HS, ECL/M/H and restarted. While the OST is running, the device
Secondary Oscillator). continues to operate from the INTOSC selected in
OSCCON1. When the OST times out, the Fail-Safe
condition is cleared after successfully switching to the
FIGURE 7-9: FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM
external clock source. The OSCFIF bit should be
Clock Monitor cleared prior to switching to the external clock source.
Latch If the Fail-Safe condition still exists, the OSCFIF flag
External will again become set by hardware.
S Q
Clock
LFINTOSC
÷ 64 R Q
Oscillator
31 kHz 488 Hz
(~32 s) (~2 ms)
Sample Clock Clock

Failure
Detected
7.4.1 FAIL-SAFE DETECTION

The FSCM module detects a failed oscillator by
comparing the external oscillator to the FSCM sample
clock. The sample clock is generated by dividing the
LFINTOSC by 64. See Figure 7-9. Inside the fail
detector block is a latch. The external clock sets the
latch on each falling edge of the external clock. The
sample clock clears the latch on each rising edge of the
sample clock. A failure is detected when an entire half-
cycle of the sample clock elapses before the external
clock goes low.
7.4.2 FAIL-SAFE OPERATION

When the external clock fails, the FSCM overwrites the
COSC bits to select HFINTOSC (3'b110). The
frequency of HFINTOSC would be determined by the
previous state of the FRQ bits and the NDIV/CDIV bits.
The bit flag OSFIF of the respective PIR register is set.
Setting this flag will generate an interrupt if the OSFIE
bit of the respective PIR register is also set. The device
firmware can then take steps to mitigate the problems
that may arise from a failed clock. The system clock will
continue to be sourced from the internal clock source
until the device firmware successfully restarts the
external oscillator and switches back to external
operation, by writing to the NOSC and NDIV bits of the
OSCCON1 register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.4.4 RESET OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP
The FSCM is designed to detect an oscillator failure
after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired.
The OST is used after waking up from Sleep and after
any type of Reset. The OST is not used with the EC
Clock modes so that the FSCM will be active as soon
as the Reset or wake-up has completed.
FIGURE 7-10: FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM
Sample Clock
System Oscillator
Clock Failure
Output
Clock Monitor Output

(Q)
Failure
Detected
OSCFIF
Test Test Test
Note: The system clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in
this example have been chosen for clarity.
TABLE 7-1: NOSC/COSC AND NDIV/CDIV BIT SETTINGS

NOSC[2:0] NDIV[3:0]
Clock Source Clock Divider
COSC[2:0] CDIV[3:0]
111 EXTOSC(1) 1111-1010 Reserved
110 HFINTOSC(2) 1001 512
101 LFINTOSC 1000 256
100 SOSC 0111 128
011 Reserved 0110 64
010 EXTOSC + 4x PLL(3) 0101 32
001 Reserved 0100 16
000 Reserved 0011 8
0010 4
0001 2
0000 1
Note 1: EXTOSC configured by the FEXTOSC bits of Configuration Word 1 (Register 5-1).
2: HFINTOSC frequency is set with the FRQ bits of the OSCFRQ register (Register 7-5).
3: EXTOSC must meet the PLL specifications (Table 44-10).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
7.5 Register Definitions: Oscillator Control
REGISTER 7-1: OSCCON1: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER 1
U-0 R/W-f/f R/W-f/f R/W-f/f R/W-q/q R/W-q/q R/W-q/q R/W-q/q
— NOSC[2:0] NDIV[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared f = determined by Configuration bit setting
q = Reset value is determined by hardware

bit 6-4 NOSC[2:0]: New Oscillator Source Request bits(1,2,3)
The setting requests a source oscillator and PLL combination per Table 7-1.
POR value = RSTOSC (Register 5-1).
bit 3-0 NDIV[3:0]: New Divider Selection Request bits(2,3)
The setting determines the new postscaler division ratio per Table 7-1.
Note 1: The default value (f/f) is determined by the RSTOSC Configuration bits. See Table 7-2 below.
2: If NOSC is written with a reserved value (Table 7-1), the operation is ignored and neither NOSC nor NDIV is
written.
3: When CSWEN = 0, this register is read-only and cannot be changed from the POR value.
TABLE 7-2: DEFAULT OSCILLATOR SETTINGS

SFR Reset Values
RSTOSC Initial FOSC Frequency
NOSC/COSC CDIV OSCFRQ
111 111 1:1 EXTOSC per FEXTOSC
110 110 4:1 FOSC = 1 MHz (4 MHz/4)
4 MHz
101 101 1:1 LFINTOSC
100 100 1:1 SOSC
011 Reserved
010 010 1:1 4 MHz EXTOSC + 4xPLL(1)
001 Reserved
000 110 1:1 64 MHz FOSC = 64 MHZ
Note 1: EXTOSC must meet the PLL specifications (Table 44-10).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 R-f/f R-f/f R-f/f R-f/f R-f/f R-f/f R-f/f
— COSC[2:0] CDIV[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared

bit 6-4 COSC[2:0]: Current Oscillator Source Select bits (read-only)(1)
Indicates the current source oscillator and PLL combination per Table 7-1.
bit 3-0 CDIV[3:0]: Current Divider Select bits (read-only)(1)
Indicates the current postscaler division ratio per Table 7-1.
Note 1: The POR value is the value present when user code execution begins.

R/W/HC-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R-0/0 R-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0
CSWHOLD SOSCPWR — ORDY NOSCR — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HC = Bit is cleared by hardware
bit 7 CSWHOLD: Clock Switch Hold bit

1 = Clock switch will hold (with interrupt) when the oscillator selected by NOSC is ready
0 = Clock switch may proceed when the oscillator selected by NOSC is ready; NOSCR
becomes ‘1’, the switch will occur
bit 6 SOSCPWR: Secondary Oscillator Power Mode Select bit
1 = Secondary oscillator operating in High-Power mode
0 = Secondary oscillator operating in Low-Power mode
bit 4 ORDY: Oscillator Ready bit (read-only)
1 = OSCCON1 = OSCCON2; the current system clock is the clock specified by NOSC
0 = A clock switch is in progress
bit 3 NOSCR: New Oscillator is Ready bit (read-only)(1)
1 = A clock switch is in progress and the oscillator selected by NOSC indicates a “ready” condition
0 = A clock switch is not in progress, or the NOSC-selected oscillator is not yet ready
Note 1: If CSWHOLD = 0, the user may not see this bit set because, when the oscillator becomes ready there
may be a delay of one instruction clock before this bit is set. The clock switch occurs in the next instruction
cycle and this bit is cleared.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 7-4: OSCSTAT: OSCILLATOR STATUS REGISTER 1

R-q/q R-q/q R-q/q R-q/q R-q/q R-q/q U-0 R-q/q
EXTOR HFOR MFOR LFOR SOR ADOR — PLLR
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared q = Reset value is determined by hardware
bit 7 EXTOR: EXTOSC (external) Oscillator Ready bit

1 = The oscillator is ready to be used
0 = The oscillator is not enabled, or is not yet ready to be used
bit 6 HFOR: HFINTOSC Oscillator Ready bit
bit 5 MFOR: MFINTOSC Oscillator Ready
bit 4 LFOR: LFINTOSC Oscillator Ready bit
bit 3 SOR: Secondary (Timer1) Oscillator Ready bit
bit 2 ADOR: ADC Oscillator Ready bit
bit 0 PLLR: PLL is Ready bit
1 = The PLL is ready to be used
0 = The PLL is not enabled, the required input source is not ready, or the PLL is not locked.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 7-5: OSCFRQ: HFINTOSC FREQUENCY SELECTION REGISTER
U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-q/q R/W-q/q R/W-q/q R/W-q/q
— — — — FRQ[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared q = Reset value is determined by hardware

bit 3-0 FRQ[3:0]: HFINTOSC Frequency Selection bits(1)
FRQ[3:0] Nominal Freq (MHz)

1001
1010
1111
1110 Reserved
1101
1100
1011
1000 64
0111 48
0110 32
0101 16
0100 12
0011 8
0010 4
0001 2
0000 1
Note 1: Refer to Table 7-2 for more information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 7-6: OSCTUNE: HFINTOSC TUNING REGISTER
U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — TUN[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 TUN[5:0]: HFINTOSC Frequency Tuning bits
01 1111 = Maximum frequency
•
•
•
00 0000 = Center frequency. Oscillator module is running at the calibrated frequency
(default value).
•
•
•
10 0000 = Minimum frequency

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 7-7: OSCEN: OSCILLATOR MANUAL ENABLE REGISTER

R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0
EXTOEN HFOEN MFOEN LFOEN SOSCEN ADOEN — —
Legend:
bit 7 EXTOEN: External Oscillator Manual Request Enable bit

1 = EXTOSC is explicitly enabled, operating as specified by FEXTOSC
0 = EXTOSC could be enabled by requesting peripheral
bit 6 HFOEN: HFINTOSC Oscillator Manual Request Enable bit
1 = HFINTOSC is explicitly enabled, operating as specified by OSCFRQ (Register 7-5)
0 = HFINTOSC could be enabled by requesting peripheral
bit 5 MFOEN: MFINTOSC (500 kHz/31.25 kHz) Oscillator Manual Request Enable bit (Derived from
HFINTOSC)
1 = MFINTOSC is explicitly enabled
0 = MFINTOSC could be enabled by requesting peripheral
bit 4 LFOEN: LFINTOSC (31 kHz) Oscillator Manual Request Enable bit
1 = LFINTOSC is explicitly enabled
0 = LFINTOSC could be enabled by requesting peripheral
bit 3 SOSCEN: Secondary Oscillator Manual Request Enable bit
1 = Secondary Oscillator is explicitly enabled, operating as specified by SOSCPWR
0 = Secondary Oscillator could be enabled by requesting peripheral
bit 2 ADOEN: ADC Oscillator Manual Request Enable bit
1 = ADC oscillator is explicitly enabled
0 = ADC oscillator could be enabled by requesting peripheral

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 7-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CLOCK SOURCES
Register
on Page
OSCCON1 — NOSC[2:0] NDIV[3:0] 104
OSCCON2 — COSC[2:0] CDIV[3:0] 105
OSCCON3 CSWHOLD SOSCPWR — ORDY NOSCR — — — 105
OSCSTAT EXTOR HFOR MFOR LFOR SOR ADOR — PLLR 106
OSCTUNE — — TUN[5:0] 108
OSCFRQ — — — — FRQ[3:0] 107
OSCEN EXTOEN HFOEN MFOEN LFOEN SOSCEN ADOEN — — 109
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by clock sources.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
8.0 REFERENCE CLOCK OUTPUT
MODULE
The reference clock output module provides the ability
to send a clock signal to the clock reference output pin
(CLKR). The reference clock output can also be used
as a signal for other peripherals, such as the Data
Signal Modulator (DSM), Memory Scanner and Timer
module.
The reference clock output module has the following
features:
• Selectable clock source using the CLKRCLK
register
• Programmable clock divider
• Selectable duty cycle
FIGURE 8-1: CLOCK REFERENCE BLOCK DIAGRAM

Rev. 10-000261B
5/11/2016
CLKRDIV<2:0>
CLKREN Counter Reset
128
111
Reference Clock Divider

See 64 CLKRDC<1:0>
110
CLKRCLK 32
Register 101
16 CLKR
100
8 Duty Cycle PPS
011
4
010
2
001 To Peripherals
CLKREN 000
CLKRCLK<3:0>
FIGURE 8-2: CLOCK REFERENCE TIMING
Rev. 10-000264B
5/25/2016
P1 P2
CLKRCLK
CLKREN
CLKR Output
CLKRDIV<2:0> = 001
CLKRDC<1:0> = 10
Duty Cycle
(50%)
CLKR Output CLKRCLK/2

CLKRDIV<2:0> = 001
CLKRDC<1:0> = 01
Duty Cycle
(25%)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
8.1 Clock Source 8.3 Selectable Duty Cycle
The input to the reference clock output can be selected The DC[1:0] bits of the CLKRCON register can be used
using the CLKRCLK register. to modify the duty cycle of the output clock. A duty cycle
of 25%, 50%, or 75% can be selected for all clock rates,
8.1.1 CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION with the exception of the undivided base FOSC value.
Once the reference clock enable (EN) is set, the The duty cycle can be changed while the module is
module is ensured to be glitch-free at start-up. enabled; however, in order to prevent glitches on the
When the reference clock output is disabled, the output output, the DC[1:0] bits should only be changed when
signal will be disabled immediately. the module is disabled (EN = 0).
Clock dividers and clock duty cycles can be changed

while the module is enabled, but glitches may occur on Note: The DC1 bit is reset to ‘1’. This makes the
the output. To avoid possible glitches, clock dividers default duty cycle 50% and not 0%.
and clock duty cycles should be changed only when the
CLKREN is clear.
8.4 Operation in Sleep Mode
8.2 Programmable Clock Divider The reference clock output module clock is based on
the system clock. When the device goes to Sleep, the
The module takes the clock input and divides it based module outputs will remain in their current state. This
on the value of the DIV[2:0] bits of the CLKRCON will have a direct effect on peripherals using the
register (Register 8-1). reference clock output as an input signal. No change
The following configurations can be made based on the should occur in the module from entering or exiting
DIV[2:0] bits: from Sleep.
• Base FOSC value
• FOSC divided by 2
The clock divider values can be changed while the
module is enabled; however, in order to prevent
glitches on the output, the DIV[2:0] bits should only be
changed when the module is disabled (EN = 0).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
8.5 Register Definitions: Reference Clock
Long bit name prefixes for the Reference Clock
peripherals are shown below. Refer to Section
1.3.2.2 “Long Bit Names” for more information.
Peripheral Bit Name Prefix

CLKR CLKR
REGISTER 8-1: CLKRCON: REFERENCE CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1/1 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN — — DC[1:0] DIV[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: Reference Clock Module Enable bit

1 = Reference clock module enabled
0 = Reference clock module is disabled
bit 4-3 DC[1:0]: Reference Clock Duty Cycle bits(1)
11 = Clock outputs duty cycle of 75%
bit 2-0 DIV[2:0]: Reference Clock Divider bits
111 = Base clock value divided by 128
000 = Base clock value
Note 1: Bits are valid for reference clock divider values of two or larger, the base clock cannot be further divided.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 8-2: CLKRCLK: CLOCK REFERENCE CLOCK SELECTION MUX

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — CLK[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3-0 CLK[3:0]: CLKR Clock Selection bits
1111 = Reserved



1011 = Reserved
1010 = CLC4 Output
1001 = CLC3 Output
1000 = CLC2 Output
0111 = CLC1 Output
0110 = NCO1 Output
0101 = SOSC
0100 = MFINTOSC (31.25 kHz)
0011 = MFINTOSC (500 kHz)
0010 = LFINTOSC (31 kHz)
0001 = HFINTOSC
0000 = FOSC
TABLE 8-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CLOCK REFERENCE OUTPUT

Register
on Page
CLKRCON EN — — DC[1:0] DIV[2:0] 113
CLKRCLK — — — — — CLK[2:0] 114
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the CLKR module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
9.0 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER There are two other configuration bits that control the
way the interrupt controller can be configured.
The Vectored Interrupt Controller module reduces the
• CONFIG2L[3], MVECEN bit
numerous peripheral interrupt request signals to a
single interrupt request signal to the CPU. This module • CONFIG2L[4], IVT1WAY bit
includes the following major features: The MVECEN bit in CONFIG2L determines whether
• Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) with a unique vector the Vector table is used to determine the interrupt
for each interrupt source priorities.
• Fixed and ensured interrupt latency • The IVT1WAY determines the number of times
• Programmable base address for Interrupt Vector the IVTLOCKED bit can be cleared and set after a
Table (IVT) with lock device Reset. See Section 9.2.3 “Interrupt Vec-
tor Table (IVT) address calculation” for details.
• Two user-selectable priority levels – High priority
and Low priority
• Two levels of context saving
• Interrupt state status bits to indicate the current
execution status of the CPU
The Interrupt Controller module assembles all of the
interrupt request signals and resolves the interrupts
based on both a fixed natural order priority (i.e.,
determined by the Interrupt Vector Table), and a user-
assigned priority (i.e., determined by the IPRx
registers), thereby eliminating scanning of interrupt
sources.
9.1 Interrupt Control and Status

Registers
The devices in this family implement the following
registers for the interrupt controller:
• INTCON0, INTCON1 Control Registers
• PIRx – Peripheral Interrupt Status Registers
• PIEx – Peripheral Interrupt Enable Registers
• IPRx – Peripheral Interrupt Priority Registers
• IVTBASE[20:0] Address Registers
• IVTLOCK Register
Global interrupt control functions and external
interrupts are controlled from the INTCON0 register.
The INTCON1 register contains the status flags for the
Interrupt controller.
The PIRx registers contain all of the interrupt request
flags. Each source of interrupt has a status bit, which is
set by the respective peripherals or an external signal
and is cleared via software.
The PIEx registers contain all of the interrupt enable
bits. These control bits are used to individually enable
interrupts from the peripherals or external signals.
The IPRx registers are used to set the Interrupt Priority
Level for each source of interrupt. Each user interrupt
source can be assigned to either a high or low priority.
The IVTBASE register is user programmable and is
used to determine the start address of the Interrupt
Vector Table and the IVTLOCK register is used to
prevent any unintended writes to the IVTBASE register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
9.2 Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) 9.2.2 INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE
CONTENTS
The interrupt controller supports an Interrupt Vector
Table (IVT) that contains the vector address location for MVECEN = 0
each interrupt request source. When MVECEN = 0, the address location pointed by
The Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) resides in program the IVTBASE registers has a GOTO instruction for a
memory, starting at address location determined by the high priority interrupt. Similarly, the corresponding low
IVTBASE registers; refer to Register 9-36, Register 9- priority vector location also has a GOTO instruction,
37 and Register 9-38 for details. The IVT contains 68 which is executed in case of a low priority interrupt.
vectors, one for each source of interrupt. Each interrupt MVECEN = 1
vector location contains the starting address of the
When MVECEN = 1, the value in the vector table of
associated Interrupt Service Routine (ISR).
each interrupt, points to the address location of the first
The MVECEN bit in Configuration Word 2L controls the instruction of the interrupt service routine.
availability of the vector table.
ISR Location = Interrupt Vector Table entry << 2.
9.2.1 INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE BASE
9.2.3 INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE (IVT)
ADDRESS (IVTBASE)
ADDRESS CALCULATION
The start address of the vector table is user
MVECEN = 0
programmable through the IVTBASE registers. The
user must ensure the start address is such that it can When the MVECEN bit in Configuration Word 2L
encompass the entire vector table inside the program (Register 5-3) is cleared, the address pointed by
memory. IVTBASE registers is used as the high priority interrupt
vector address. The low priority interrupt vector
Each vector address is a 16-bit word (or two address
address is offset eight instruction words from the
locations on PIC18 devices). So for n interrupt sources,
address in IVTBASE registers.
there are 2n address locations necessary to hold the
table starting from IVTBASE as the first location. So the For PIC18 devices the IVTBASE registers default to
staring address of IVTBASE should be chosen such 00 0008h, the high priority interrupt vector address will
that the address range form IVTBASE to (IVTBASE be 00 0008h and the low priority interrupt vector
+2n-1) can be encompassed inside the program flash address will be 00 0018h.
memory. MVECEN = 1
For example, the K42 devices have the highest vector Each interrupt has a unique vector number associated
number: 81. So IVTBASE should be chosen such that with it as defined in Table 9-2. This vector number is
(IVTBASE + 0xA1) is less than the last memory used for calculating the location of the interrupt vector
location in program flash memory. for a particular interrupt source.
A programmable vector table base address is useful in Interrupt Vector Address = IVTBASE + (2*Vector
situations to switch between different sets of vector Number).
tables, depending on the application. It can also be
used when the application program needs to update This calculated Interrupt Vector Address value is stored
the existing vector table (vector address values). in the IVTAD[20:0] registers when an interrupt is
received (Registers 9-39 through 9-41).
Note: It is required that the user assign an even
User-assigned software priority assigned using the
address to the IVTBASE register for
IPRx registers does not affect address calculation and
correct operation.
is only used to resolve concurrent interrupts.
If for any reason the address of the ISR could not be

fetched from the vector table, it will cause the system
to reset and clear the memory execution violation flag
(MEMV bit) in PCON1 register (Register 6-3). This
occurs due to any one of the following:
• The entry for the interrupt in the vector table lies
outside the executable PFM area (SAF area is
non-executable when SAFEN = 1).
• ISR pointed by the vector table lies outside the
executable PFM area (SAF area is non-
executable when SAFEN = 1).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 9-1: IVT ADDRESS CALCULATION SUMMARY

Interrupt Priority
IVT Address Calculation INTCON0 Register, IPEN bit
0 1
High Priority
Multi-Vector Enable IVTBASE
0 IVTBASE
CONFIG 2L register Low Priority
MVECEN bit IVTBASE + 8 words
1 IVTBASE + 2*(Vector Number)
9.2.4 ACCESS CONTROL FOR IVTBASE The user must follow the sequence shown in
REGISTERS Example 9-2 to set the IVTLOCKED bit.
The Interrupt controller has an IVTLOCKED bit which
can be set to avoid inadvertent changes to the IVT- EXAMPLE 9-2: IVT LOCK SEQUENCE
BASE registers contents. Setting and clearing this bit ; Disable Interrupts:
requires a special sequence as an extra precaution BCF INTCON0, GIE;
; Bank to IVTLOCK register
against inadvertent changes.
BANKSEL IVTLOCK;
To allow writes to IVTBASE registers, the interrupts MOVLW 55h;
must be disabled (GIEH = 0) and the IVTLOCKED bit
must be cleared. The user must follow the sequence ; Required sequence, next 4 instructions
shown in Example 9-1 to clear the IVTLOCKED bit. MOVWF IVTLOCK;
MOVLW AAh;
MOVWF IVTLOCK;
EXAMPLE 9-1: IVT UNLOCK SEQUENCE
; Disable Interrupts: ; Set IVTLOCKED bit to enable writes
BCF INTCON0, GIE; BSF IVTLOCK, IVTLOCKED;
; Bank to IVTLOCK register
BANKSEL IVTLOCK; ; Enable Interrupts
MOVLW 55h; BSF INTCON0, GIE;
; Required sequence, next 4 instructions

MOVWF IVTLOCK; When the IVT1WAY Configuration bit is set, the
MOVLW AAh; IVTLOCKED bit can be cleared and set only once after
MOVWF IVTLOCK; a device Reset. The unlock operation in Example 9-1
will have no effect after the lock sequence in
; Clear IVTLOCKED bit to enable writes Example 9-2 is used to set the IVTLOCK. Unlocking is
BCF IVTLOCK, IVTLOCKED; inhibited until a system Reset occurs.
; Enable Interrupts
BSF INTCON0, GIE;

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
9.3 Interrupt Priority
Note 1: When a high priority interrupt preempts a
The final priority level for any pending source of interrupt
concurrent low priority interrupt, the GIEL
is determined first by the user-assigned priority of that
bit may be cleared in the high priority
source in the IPRx register, then by the natural order
Interrupt Service Routine. If the GIEL bit
priority within the IVT. The sections below detail the
is cleared, the low priority interrupt will
operation of Interrupt priorities.
NOT be serviced even if it was originally
9.3.1 USER (SOFTWARE) PRIORITY requested. The corresponding interrupt
flag needs to be cleared in user code.
User-assigned interrupt priority is enabled by setting
the IPEN bit in the INTCON0 register (Register 9-1). 2: When a high priority interrupt is
Each peripheral interrupt source can be assigned a requested while a low priority Interrupt
high or low priority level by the user. The user- Service Routine is executing, the GIEL bit
assignable interrupt priority control bits for each may be cleared in the high priority
interrupt are located in the IPRx registers (Registers 9- Interrupt Service Routine. The pending
25 through 9-35). low priority interrupt will resume even if
the GIEL bit is cleared.
The interrupts are serviced based on predefined
interrupt priority scheme defined below.
1. Interrupts set by the user as high-priority
interrupt have higher precedence of execution.
High-priority interrupts will override a low-priority
request when:
a) A low priority interrupt has been requested or its
request is already pending.
b) A low- and high-priority interrupt are triggered
concurrently, i.e., on the same instruction cycle(1).
c) A low-priority interrupt was requested and the
corresponding Interrupt Service Routine is
currently executing. In this case, the lower
priority interrupt routine will complete executing
after the high-priority interrupt has been
serviced(2).
2. Interrupts set by the user as a low priority have
the lower priority of execution and are
preempted by any high-priority interrupt.
3. Interrupts defined with the same software priority
cannot preempt or interrupt each other.
Concurrent pending interrupts with the same user
priority are resolved using the natural order priority.
(when MVECEN = ON) or in the order the interrupt
flag bits are polled in the ISR (when MVECEN =
OFF).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
9.3.2 NATURAL ORDER (HARDWARE) The natural order priority scheme has vector interrupt 0
PRIORITY as the highest priority and vector interrupt 81 as the
lowest priority.
When more than one interrupt with the same user
specified priority level are requested, the priority For example, when two concurrently occurring interrupt
conflict is resolved by using a method called “Natural sources that are both designated high priority using the
Order Priority”. Natural order priority is a fixed priority IPRx register will be resolved using the natural order
scheme that is based on the Interrupt Vector Table. priority (i.e., the interrupt with a lower corresponding
Table 9-2 shows the natural order priority and the vector number will preempt the interrupt with the higher
interrupt vector number assigned for each source. vector number).
The ability for the user to assign every interrupt source
TABLE 9-2: INTERRUPT VECTOR to high or low priority levels means that the user
PRIORITY TABLE program can give an interrupt with a low natural order
Vector Interrupt Vector Interrupt
priority a higher overall priority level.
Number Source Number Source
0 Software Interrupt 42 DMA2SCNT 9.4 Interrupt Operation
1 HLVD 43 DMA2DCNT
All pending interrupts are indicated by the flag bit being
2 OSF 44 DMA2OR
equal to a ‘1’ in the PIRx register. All pending interrupts
3 CSW 45 DMA2A
are resolved using the priority scheme explained in
4 NVM 46 I2C2RX
Section 9.3 “Interrupt Priority”.
5 SCAN 47 I2C2TX
6 CRC 48 I2C2 Once the interrupt source to be serviced is resolved,
7 IOC 49 I2C2E the program execution vectors to the resolved interrupt
8 INT0 50 U2RX vector addresses, as explained in Section
9 ZCD 51 U2TX 9.2 “Interrupt Vector Table (IVT)”. The vector number
10 AD 52 U2E is also stored in the WREG register. Most of the flag bits
11 ADT 53 U2 are required to be cleared by the application software,
12 C1 54 TMR3 but in some cases, device hardware clears the interrupt
13 SMT1 55 TMR3G automatically. Some flag bits are read-only in the PIRx
14 SMT1PRA 56 TMR4 registers, these flags are a summary of the source
15 SMT1PWA 57 CCP2 interrupts and the corresponding interrupt flags of the
16 DMA1SCNT 58 — source must be cleared.
17 DMA1DCNT 59 CWG2 A valid interrupt can be either a high or low priority
18 DMA1OR 60 CLC2 interrupt when in main routine or a high priority interrupt
19 DMA1A 61 INT2 when in low priority Interrupt Service Routine.
20 SPI1RX 62 — Depending on order of interrupt requests received and
21 SPI1TX 63 — their relative timing, the CPU will be in the state of
22 SPI1 64 — execution indicated by the STAT bits of the INTCON1
23 I2C1RX 65 — register (Register 9-2).
24 I2C1TX 66 —
25 I2C1 67 —
The State machine shown in Figure 9-1 and the
26 I2C1E 68 —
subsequent sections detail the execution of interrupts
27 U1RX 69 —
when received in different orders.
28 U1TX 70 TMR5
29 U1E 71 TMR5G
Note: The state of GIEH/L is not changed by the
30 U1 72 TMR6
hardware when servicing an interrupt. The
31 TMR0 73 CCP3
internal state machine is used to keep
32 TMR1 74 CWG3
track of execution states. These bits can
33 TMR1G 75 CLC3
be manipulated in the user code resulting
34 TMR2 76 —
in transferring execution to the main
35 CCP1 77 —
routine and ignoring existing interrupts.
36 — 78 —
37 NCO 79 —
38 CWG1 80 CCP4
39 CLC1 81 CLC4
40 INT1
41 C2

FIGURE 9-1: VECTORED INTERRUPTS STATE TRANSITION DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000265A
7/6/2016
MAIN
INTSTAT = 00
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
High Interrupt addressed,
High Interrupt Low Interrupt pending Low Interrupt
HIGH LOW
requested INTSTAT = 10 INTSTAT = 01 requested
Low Interrupt addressed,
High Interrupt pending
High Interrupt addressed,

High Interrupt requested,
Low Interrupt pending
Low Interrupt pending

HIGH High Interrupt
INTSTAT = 11 requested
DS40001919E-page 120
9.4.1 SERVING A HIGH OR LOW PRIORITY INTERRUPT
WHEN MAIN ROUTINE CODE IS EXECUTING

When a high or low priority interrupt is requested when the main routine code
is executing, the main routine execution is halted and the ISR is addressed, see
Figure 9-2. Upon a return from the ISR (by executing the RETFIE instruction),
the main routine resumes execution.
FIGURE 9-2: INTERRUPT EXECUTION: HIGH/LOW PRIORITY INTERRUPT WHEN EXECUTING MAIN ROUTINE
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000267A
9/12/2016
ISR Code Executing
RETFIE Executed
Main Code Main Code Executing Main Code Execution Halted Main Code Executing
Interrupt
Interrupt Interrupt
received cleared
DS40001919E-page 121
9.4.2 SERVING A HIGH PRIORITY INTERRUPT WHILE A LOW
PRIORITY INTERRUPT PENDING

A high priority interrupt request will always take precedence over any interrupt
of a lower priority. The high priority interrupt is acknowledged first, then the low-
priority interrupt is acknowledged. Upon a return from the high priority ISR (by
executing the RETFIE instruction), the low priority interrupt is serviced, see
Figure 9-3.
If any other high priority interrupts are pending and enabled, then they are
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
serviced before servicing the pending low priority interrupt. If no other high
priority interrupt requests are active, the low priority interrupt is serviced.
FIGURE 9-3: INTERRUPT EXECUTION: HIGH PRIORITY INTERRUPT WITH A LOW PRIORITY INTERRUPT PENDING
Rev. 10-000267C
9/12/2016
High ISR High ISR

RETFIE Executed
Low ISR Low ISR

RETFIE Executed
Main Code Main routine Main Code Execution Halted Main routine
High Priority
Interrupt
High Interrupt High Interrupt
received cleared
Low Priority
Interrupt
Low Interrupt Low Interrupt
DS40001919E-page 122
received cleared
9.4.3 PREEMPTING LOW PRIORITY INTERRUPTS
Low-priority interrupts can be preempted by high priority interrupts. While in the

Note 1: The high priority interrupt flag must be
low priority ISR, if a high-priority interrupt arrives, the high priority interrupt
cleared to avoid recursive interrupts.
request is generated and the low priority ISR is suspended, while the high
priority ISR is executed, see Figure 9-4. 2: If a low-priority ISR was already serviced
halfway before moving on to a high
After the high priority ISR is complete and if any other high priority interrupt
priority ISR, then the low priority ISR is
requests are not active, the execution returns to the preempted low priority ISR.
completely serviced even if user code
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
clears GIEL.
FIGURE 9-4: INTERRUPT EXECUTION: HIGH PRIORITY INTERRUPT PREEMPTING LOW PRIORITY INTERRUPTS
Rev. 10-000267B
9/12/2016
High ISR High ISR

Low Interrupt pending, RETFIE Executed
High Interrupt received
Low ISR Low ISR Low ISR Execution Halted Low ISR
RETFIE Executed
High Priority
Interrupt
received cleared
Low Priority
Interrupt
received cleared
DS40001919E-page 123
9.4.4 SIMULTANEOUS LOW AND HIGH PRIORITY
INTERRUPTS
When both high and low interrupts are active in the same instruction cycle (i.e.,
simultaneous interrupt events), both the high and the low priority requests are
generated. The high priority ISR is serviced first before servicing the low priority
interrupt see Figure 9-5.
FIGURE 9-5: INTERRUPT EXECUTION: SIMULTANEOUS LOW AND HIGH PRIORITY INTERRUPTS
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000267D
9/12/2016
High ISR High ISR

RETFIE Executed
Low ISR Low ISR

RETFIE Executed
High Priority
Interrupt
received cleared
Low Priority
Interrupt
received cleared
DS40001919E-page 124
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
9.5 Context Saving
The Interrupt controller supports a two-level deep
context saving (Main routine context and Low ISR
context). Refer to state machine shown in Figure 9-6
for details.
The Program Counter (PC) is saved on the dedicated
device PC stack. CPU registers saved include STATUS,
WREG, BSR, FSR0/1/2, PRODL/H and PCLATH/U.
After WREG has been saved to the context registers,
the resolved vector number of the interrupt source to be
serviced is copied into WREG. Context save and
restore operation is completed by the interrupt
controller based on current state of the interrupts and
the order in which they were sent to the CPU.
Context save/restore works the same way in both
states of MVECEN. When IPEN = 0, there is only one
level interrupt active. Hence, only the main context is
saved when an interrupt is received.
9.5.1 ACCESSING SHADOW REGISTERS

The Interrupt controller automatically saves the context
information in the shadow registers available in Bank
56. Both the saved context values (i.e., main routine
and low ISR) can be accessed using the same set of
shadow registers. By clearing the SHADLO bit in the
SHADCON register (Register 9-43), the CPU register
values saved for main routine context can accessed,
and by setting the SHADLO bit of the CPU register,
values saved for low ISR context can accessed. Low
ISR context is automatically restored to the CPU
registers upon exiting the high ISR. Similarly, the main
context is automatically restored to the CPU registers
upon exiting the low ISR.
The Shadow registers in Bank 56 are readable and
writable, so if the user desires to modify the context,
then the corresponding shadow register should be
modified and the value will be restored when exiting the
ISR. Depending on the user’s application, other
registers may also need to be saved.

FIGURE 9-6: CONTEXT SAVE STATE MACHINE DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000266A
7/6/2016
MAIN
INTSTAT = 00
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
No Context Save/Restore
No Context HIGH LOW No Context
Save/Restore INTSTAT = 10 INTSTAT = 01 Save/Restore
No Context Save/Restore
Restore Low context

Save Low context
HIGH No Context
INTSTAT = 11 Save/Restore
DS40001919E-page 126
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
9.6 Returning from Interrupt Service
Routine (ISR)
The “Return from Interrupt” instruction (RETFIE) is
used to mark the end of an ISR.
When RETFIE 1 instruction is executed, the PC is
loaded with the saved PC value from the top of the PC
stack. Saved context is also restored with the execution
of this instruction. Thus, execution returns to the
previous state of operation that existed before the
interrupt occurred.
When RETFIE 0 instruction is executed, the saved
context is not restored back to the registers.
9.7 Interrupt Latency

By assigning each interrupt with a vector address/
number (MVECEN = 1), scanning of all interrupts is not
necessary to determine the source of the interrupt.
When MVECEN = 1, Vectored interrupt controller
requires three clock cycles to vector to the ISR from
main routine, thereby removing dependency of
interrupt timing on compiled code.
There is a fixed latency of three instruction cycles
between the completion of the instruction active when
the interrupt occurred and the first instruction of the
Interrupt Service Routine. Figure 9-7, Figure 9-8 and
Figure 9-9 illustrate the sequence of events when a
peripheral interrupt is asserted when the last executed
instruction is one-cycle, two-cycle and three-cycle
respectively, when MVECEN = 1.
After the Interrupt Flag Status bit is set, the current
instruction completes executing. In the first latency
cycle, the contents of the PC, STATUS, WREG, BSR,
FSR0/1/2, PRODL/H and PCLATH/U registers are
context saved and the IVTBASE+ Vector number is
calculated. In the second latency cycle, the PC is
loaded with the calculated vector table address for the
interrupt source and the starting address of the ISR is
fetched. In the third latency cycle, the PC is loaded with
the ISR address. All the latency cycles are executed as
a FNOP instruction.
When MVECEN = 0, Vectored interrupt controller
requires two clock cycles to vector to the ISR from main
routine. There is a latency of two instruction cycles plus
the software latency between the completion of the
instruction active when the interrupt occurred and the
first instruction of the Interrupt Service Routine.

FIGURE 9-7: INTERRUPT TIMING DIAGRAM - ONE CYCLE INSTRUCTION
Rev. 10-000269A
9/12/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
System
Clock
Program
X X+2 X+2 0x82 0x218 0x21A 0x21C X+2 X+4 X+6
Counter
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Instruction
Inst @ X(1) FNOP FNOP FNOP Inst @ 0x218 Inst @ 0x21A FNOP Inst @ X+2 Inst @ X+4
Register
BCF RETFIE
Interrupt
Routine MAIN FNOP ISR FNOP MAIN
IVTBASE 0x80
Vector
1
Number
Program Memory
0x86
0x82
Interrupt Location = Interrupt vector table entry << 2

= 0x86 << 2 = 0x218
Note 1: Instruction @ X is a One-cycle Instruction

DS40001919E-page 128
FIGURE 9-8: INTERRUPT TIMING DIAGRAM - TWO WORD INSTRUCTION
Rev. 10-000269B
9/12/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
System
Clock
Program
Y Y+2 Y+2 Y+2 0x82 0x218 0x21A 0x21C Y+2 Y+4 Y+6
Counter
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Instruction
Inst @ Y(1) Inst @ Y(1) FNOP FNOP FNOP Inst @ 0x218 Inst @ 0x21A FNOP Inst @ Y+2 Inst @ Y+4
Register
BCF RETFIE
Interrupt
IVTBASE 0x80
Vector
1
Number
Program Memory
0x86
0x82

= 0x86 << 2 = 0x218
Note 1: Instruction @ Y is a Two-cycle instruction.

DS40001919E-page 129
FIGURE 9-9: INTERRUPT TIMING DIAGRAM - THREE CYCLE INSTRUCTION
Rev. 10-000269C
9/12/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
System
Clock
Program
Z Z+2 Z+2 Z+2 Z+2 0x82 0x218 0x21A 0x21C Z+2 Z+4 Z+6
Counter
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Instruction Inst @ Inst @
Inst @ Z(1) Inst @ Z(1) Inst @ Z(1) FNOP FNOP FNOP FNOP Inst @ Z+2 Inst @ Z+4
Register 0x218 0x21A
BCF RETFIE
Interrupt
IVTBASE 0x80
Vector
1
Number
Program Memory
0x86
0x82

= 0x86 << 2 = 0x218
Note 1: Instruction @ Z is a Three-cycle instruction.

DS40001919E-page 130
9.7.1 ABORTING INTERRUPTS
If the last instruction before the interrupt controller vectors to the ISR from main
routine clears the GIE, PIE or PIR bit associated with the interrupt, the controller
executes one force NOP cycle before it returns to the main routine.
Figure 9-10 illustrates the sequence of events when a peripheral interrupt is
asserted and then cleared on the last executed instruction cycle.
If the GIE, PIE or PIR bit associated with the interrupt is cleared prior to
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
vectoring to the ISR, then the controller continues executing the main routine.
FIGURE 9-10: INTERRUPT TIMING DIAGRAM - ABORTING INTERRUPTS
Rev. 10-000269D
7/6/2016
1 2 3 4 5
Instruction
Clock
Program
X X+2 X+2 X+4 X+6
Counter
Instruction
Inst @ X(1) FNOP Inst @ X+2 Inst @ X+4
Register
Interrupt
Routine MAIN FNOP MAIN
Note 1: Inst @ X clears the interrupt flag, Example BCF INTCON0, GIE.
DS40001919E-page 131
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
9.8 Interrupt Setup Procedure 9.10 Wake-up from Sleep
1. When using interrupt priority levels, set the IPEN The interrupt controller provides a wake-up request to
bit in INTCON0 register and then select the the CPU whenever an interrupt event occurs, if the
user-assigned priority level for the interrupt interrupt event is enabled. This occurs regardless of
source by writing the control bits in the whether the part is in Run, Idle/Doze or Sleep modes.
appropriate IPRx Control register. The status of the GIEH/GIEL bits has no effect on the
Note: At a device Reset, the IPRx registers are wake-up request. The wake-up request will be
initialized, such that all user interrupt asynchronous to all clocks.
sources are assigned to high priority.
9.11 Interrupt Compatibility
2. Clear the Interrupt Flag Status bit associated
with the peripheral in the associated PIRx Status When the MVECEN bit in Configuration Word 2L is
register. cleared (Register 5-3), the Interrupt Vector Table
3. Enable the interrupt source by setting the feature is disabled and interrupts are compatible with
interrupt enable control bit associated with the previous high performance 8-bit PIC18 microcontroller
source in the appropriate PIEx Control register. devices. In this mode, the Interrupt Vector Table priority
4. If the vector table is used (MVECEN = 1), then has no effect.
setup the start address for the Interrupt Vector When the IPEN bit is also cleared, the interrupt priority
Table using the IVTBASE register. See Section feature is disabled and interrupts are compatible with
9.2.2 “Interrupt Vector Table Contents”. PIC®16 microcontroller mid-range devices. All
5. Once the IVTBASE is written to, set the Interrupt interrupts branch to address 0008h since the interrupt
enable bits in INTCON0 register. priority is disabled.
6. An example of setting up interrupts and ISRs
using assembly and C can be found in
Examples 9-3 and 9-4.
9.9 External Interrupt Pins

The PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 devices
have three external interrupt sources which can be
assigned to any pin on different ports based on the PPS
settings. Refer Section 17.0 “Peripheral Pin Select
(PPS) Module” for possible rerouting options. The
external interrupt sources are edge-triggered. If the
corresponding INTxEDG bit in the INTCON0 register is
set (= 1), the interrupt is triggered by a rising edge. If
the bit is clear, the trigger is on the falling edge.
When a valid edge appears on the INTx pin, the
corresponding flag bit, INTxF in the PIRx registers, is
set. This interrupt can be disabled by clearing the
corresponding enable bit, INTxE. Flag bit, INTxF, must
be cleared by software in the Interrupt Service Routine
before re-enabling the interrupt.
All external interrupts (INT0, INT1 and INT2) can wake-
up the processor from Idle or Sleep modes if bit INTxE
was set prior to going into those modes. If the Global
Interrupt Enable bit, GIE/GIEH, is set, the processor
will branch to the interrupt vector following wake-up.
Interrupt priority is determined by the value contained
in the interrupt priority bits, INT0IP, INT1IP and INT2IP
of the IPRx registers.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
EXAMPLE 9-3: SETTING UP VECTORED INTERRUPTS USING MPASM
; Each ISR routine must have a predetermined origin otherwise there will be
; an assembly error because the address is not determined until link time
; which is too late to do the divide by 4 math on the address.
; Predetermined addresses must be evenly divisible by 4.
ISRCLC2 CODE 0x7E00

; CLC2 interrupt service code here.
BANKSEL PIR7
BCF PIR7, CLC2IF
RETFIE FAST
ISRTMR0 CODE 0x7E40

; Timer0 interrupt service code here.
BANKSEL PIR3
BCF PIR3, TMR0IF
RETFIE FAST
ISRTMR4 CODE 0x7E60

; Timer4 interrupt service code here.
BANKSEL PIR7
BCF PIR7, TMR4IF
RETFIE FAST
IntInit:
; Disable all interrupts
BCF INTCON0, GIE, ACCESS
; Set IVTBASE (optional - default is 0x000008)

CLRF IVTBASEU, ACCESS
MOVLW 0x7F
MOVWF IVTBASEH, ACCESS
CLRF IVTBASEL, ACCESS
; Clear any interrupt flags before enabling interrupts

BANKSEL PIR7
BCF PIR7, CLC2IF
BCF PIR3, TMR0IF
BCF PIR7, TMR4IF
; Enable interrupts
BANKSEL PIE7
BSF PIE7, CLC2IE
BSF PIE3, TMR0IE
BSF PIE7, TMR4IE
; Set interrupt priorities if necessary

BANKSEL IPR7
BSF INTCON0, IPEN_INTCON0, ACCESS ; Enable interrupt priority
BCF IPR7, CLC2IP ; Make CLC2 interrupt low priority
; Enable interrupts
BSF INTCON0, GIEH, ACCESS
BSF INTCON0, GIEL, ACCESS
RETURN 1
; Save TMR0ISR in vector table (IVTBASE+31*2)

ISR1 CODE 0x7F3E
DW (0x7E40>>2) ; (TMR0ISR/4)
; Save TMR4ISR in vector table (IVTBASE+56*2)

ISR2 CODE 0x7F70
DW (0x7E60>>2) ; (TMR4ISR/4)
; Save CLC2ISR in vector table (IVTBASE+60*2)

ISR3 CODE 0x7F78
DW (0x7E00>>2) ; (CLC2ISR/4)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
EXAMPLE 9-4: SETTING UP VECTORED INTERRUPTS USING XC8
// NOTE 1: If IVTBASE is changed from its default value of 0x000008, then the
// "base(...)" argument must be provided in the ISR. Otherwise the vector
// table will be placed at 0x0008 by default regardless of the IVTBASE value.
// NOTE 2: When MVECEN=0 and IPEN=1, a separate argument as "high_priority"

// or "low_priority" can be used to distinguish between the two ISRs.
// If the argument is not provided, the ISR is considered high priority
// by default.
// NOTE 3: Multiple interrupts can be handled by the same ISR if they are
// specified in the "irq(...)" argument. Ex: irq(IRQ_TMR0, IRQ_CCP1)
void __interrupt(irq(IRQ_TMR0), base(0x4008)) TMR0_ISR(void)

{
PIR3bits.TMR0IF = 0; // Clear the interrupt flag
LATCbits.LC0 ^= 1; // ISR code goes here
}
void __interrupt(irq(default), base(0x4008)) DEFAULT_ISR(void)

{
// Unhandled interrupts go here
}
void INTERRUPT_Initialize (void)

{
INTCON0bits.GIEH = 1; // Enable high priority interrupts
INTCON0bits.GIEL = 1; // Enable low priority interrupts
INTCON0bits.IPEN = 1; // Enable interrupt priority
PIE3bits.TMR0IE = 1; // Enable TMR0 interrupt

PIE4bits.TMR1IE = 1; // Enable TMR1 interrupt
IPR3bits.TMR0IP = 0; // Make TMR0 interrupt low priority
// Change IVTBASE if required

IVTBASEU = 0x00; // Optional
IVTBASEH = 0x40; // Default is 0x0008
IVTBASEL = 0x08;
}

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
9.12 Register Definitions: Interrupt Control
REGISTER 9-1: INTCON0: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 0
R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1
GIE/GIEH GIEL IPEN — — INT2EDG INT1EDG INT0EDG
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 GIE/GIEH: Global Interrupt Enable bits

If IPEN = 0:
GIE:
1 = Enables all unmasked interrupts
0 = Disables all interrupts
If IPEN = 1:
GIEH:
1 = Enables all unmasked high priority interrupts: bit also needs to be set for enabling low priority
interrupts
0 = Disables all interrupts
bit 6 GIEL: Global Low Priority Interrupt Enable bit
If IPEN = 0:
Reserved, read as ‘0’
If IPEN = 1:
GIEL:
1 = Enables all unmasked low priority interrupts, GIEH also needs to be set for low priority interrupts
0 = Disables all low priority
bit 5 IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit
1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts
0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts; all interrupts are treated as high priority interrupts
bit 2 INT2EDG: External Interrupt 2 Edge Select bit
1 = Interrupt on rising edge of INT2 pin
0 = Interrupt on falling edge of INT2 pin

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 9-2: INTCON1: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 1

R-0/0 R-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
STAT[1:0] — — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
HC = Bit is cleared by hardware
bit 7-6 STAT[1:0]: Interrupt State Status bits

11 = High priority ISR executing, high priority interrupt was received while a low priority ISR was
executing
10 = High priority ISR executing, high priority interrupt was received in main routine
01 = Low priority ISR executing, low priority interrupt was received in main routine
00 = Main routine executing

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 9-3: PIR0: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER 0

R-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W-0/0
IOCIF(2) CRCIF SCANIF NVMIF CSWIF (3)
OSFIF HLVDIF SWIF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HS = Bit is set in hardware
bit 7 IOCIF: Interrupt-on-Change Interrupt Flag bit(2)

1 = Interrupt has occurred
0 = Interrupt event has not occurred
bit 6 CRCIF: CRC Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Interrupt has occurred (must be cleared by software)
bit 5 SCANIF: Memory Scanner Interrupt Flag bit
bit 4 NVMIF: NVM Interrupt Flag bit
bit 3 CSWIF: Clock Switch Interrupt Flag bit(3)
bit 2 OSFIF: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit
bit 1 HLVDIF: HLVD Interrupt Flag bit
bit 0 SWIF: Software Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Interrupt will trigger (bit is set and cleared by user software)
Note 1: Interrupt flag bits get set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding
enable bit, or the global enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are
clear prior to enabling an interrupt.
2: IOCIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the IOCxF registers must be cleared.
3: The CSWIF interrupt will not wake the system from Sleep. The system will sleep until another interrupt
causes the wake-up.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 9-4: PIR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER 1

R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0
SMT1PWAIF SMT1PRAIF SMT1IF C1IF ADTIF ADIF ZCDIF INT0IF(2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SMT1PWAIF: SMT1 Pulse-Width Acquisition Interrupt Flag bit

bit 6 SMT1PRAIF: SMT1 Period Acquisition Interrupt Flag bit
bit 5 SMT1IF: SMT1 Interrupt Flag bit
bit 4 C1IF: CMP1 Interrupt Flag bit
bit 3 ADTIF: ADC Threshold Interrupt Flag bit
bit 2 ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag bit
bit 1 ZCDIF: ZCD Interrupt Flag bit
bit 0 INT0IF: External Interrupt 0 Interrupt Flag bit(2)
2: The external interrupt GPIO pin is selected by the INTxPPS register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 9-5: PIR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REGISTER 2(1)

R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0
I2C1RXIF(2) SPI1IF (3)
SPI1TXIF (4)
SPI1RXIF (4)
DMA1AIF DMA1ORIF DMA1DCNTIF DMA1SCNTIF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HS = Hardware set
bit 7 I2C1RXIF: I2C1 Receive Interrupt Flag bit(2)

bit 6 SPI1IF: SPI1 Interrupt Flag bit(3)
bit 5 SPI1TXIF: SPI1 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit(4)
bit 4 SPI1RXIF: SPI1 Receive Interrupt Flag bit(4)
bit 3 DMA1AIF: DMA1 Abort Interrupt Flag bit
bit 2 DMA1ORIF: DMA1 Overrun Interrupt Flag bit
bit 1 DMA1DCNTIF: DMA1 Destination Count Interrupt Flag bit
bit 0 DMA1SCNTIF: DMA1 Source Count Interrupt Flag bit
enable bit, or the global enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear
prior to enabling an interrupt.
2: I2CxTXIF and I2CxRXIF are read-only bits. To clear the interrupt condition, the CLRBF bit in I2CxSTAT1
register must be set.
3: SPIxIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the SPIxINTF register must be cleared.
4: SPIxTXIF and SPIxRXIF are read-only bits and cannot be set/cleared by the software.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W/HS-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
TMR0IF U1IF(2) U1EIF (3)
U1TXIF (4)
U1RXIF (4)
I2C1EIF (5)
I2C1IF(6)
I2C1TXIF(7)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 TMR0IF: TMR0 Interrupt Flag bit

bit 6 U1IF: UART1 Interrupt Flag bit(2)
bit 5 U1EIF: UART1 Framing Error Interrupt Flag bit(3)
bit 4 U1TXIF: UART1 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit(4)
bit 3 U1RXIF: UART1 Receive Interrupt Flag bit(4)
bit 2 I2C1EIF: I2C1 Error Interrupt Flag bit(5)
bit 1 I2C1IF: I2C1 Interrupt Flag bit(6)
bit 0 I2C1TXIF: I2C1 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit(7)
2: UxIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the UxUIR register must be cleared.
3: UxEIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the UxERRIR register must be cleared.
4: UxTXIF and UxRXIF are read-only bits and cannot be set/cleared by the software.
5: I2CxEIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the I2CxERR register must be cleared.
6: I2CxIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the I2CxPIR register must be cleared.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 U-0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0
CLC1IF CWG1IF NCO1IF — CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1GIF TMR1IF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CLC1IF: CLC1 Interrupt Flag bit

bit 6 CWG1IF: CWG1 Interrupt Flag bit
bit 5 NCO1IF: NCO1 Interrupt Flag bit
bit 3 CCP1IF: CCP1 Interrupt Flag bit
bit 1 TMR1GIF: TMR1 Gate Interrupt Flag bit

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R-0/0 R-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0
I2C2TXIF(2) I2C2RXIF (2)
DMA2AIF DMA2ORIF DMA2DCNTIF DMA2SCNTIF C2IF INT1IF(3)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 I2C2TXIF: I2C2 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit(2)

bit 6 I2C2RXIF: I2C2 Receive Interrupt Flag bit(2)
bit 5 DMA2AIF: DMA2 Abort Interrupt Flag bit
bit 4 DMA2ORIF: DMA2 Overrun Interrupt Flag bit
bit 3 DMA2DCNTIF: DMA2 Destination Count Interrupt Flag bit
bit 2 DMA2SCNTIF: DMA2 Source Count Interrupt Flag bit
bit 1 C2IF: C2 Interrupt Flag bit

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
TMR3GIF TMR3IF U2IF(2) U2EIF(3) U2TXIF(4) U2RXIF(4) I2C2EIF(5) I2C2IF(6)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5 U2IF: UART2 Interrupt Flag bit(2)
bit 4 U2EIF: UART2 Framing Error Interrupt Flag bit(3)
bit 3 U2TXIF: UART2 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit(4)
bit 2 U2RXIF: UART2 Receive Interrupt Flag bit(4)
bit 1 I2C2EIF: I2C2 Error Interrupt Flag bit(5)
bit 0 I2C2IF: I2C2 Interrupt Flag bit(6)
2: UxIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the UxUIR register must be cleared.
3: UxEIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the UxERRIR register must be cleared.
4: UxTXIF and UxRXIF are read-only bits and cannot be set/cleared by the software.
5: I2CxEIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the I2CxERR register must be cleared.
6: I2CxIF is a read-only bit. To clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the I2CxPIR register must be cleared.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 U-0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0
(2)
— — INT2IF CLC2IF CWG2IF — CCP2IF TMR4IF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
TMR5GIF TMR5IF — — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:


U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0
— — — — CLC3IF CWG3IF CCP3IF TMR6IF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0
— — — — — — CLC4IF CCP4IF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 9-14: PIE0: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
IOCIE CRCIE SCANIE NVMIE CSWIE OSFIE HLVDIE SWIE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 IOCIE: Interrupt-on-Change Enable bit

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 6 CRCIE: CRC Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 5 SCANIE: Memory Scanner Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 4 NVMIE: NVM Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 3 CSWIE: Clock Switch Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 2 OSFIE: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 1 HLVDIE: HLVD Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 0 SWIE: Software Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

SMT1PWAIE SMT1PRAIE SMT1IE C1IE ADTIE ADIE ZCDIE INT0IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SMT1PWAIE: SMT1 Pulse Width Acquisition Interrupt Enable bit

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 6 SMT1PRAIE: SMT1 Period Acquisition Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 5 SMT1IE: SMT1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 4 C1IE: C1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 3 ADTIE: ADC Threshold Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 2 ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 1 ZCDIE: ZCD Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 0 INT0IE: External Interrupt 0 Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

I2C1RXIE SPI1IE SPI1TXIE SPI1RXIE DMA1AIE DMA1ORIE DMA1DCNTIE DMA1SCNTIE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 I2C1RXIE: I2C1 Receive Interrupt Enable bit

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 6 SPI1IE: SPI1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 5 SPI1TXIE: SPI1 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 4 SPI1RXIE: SPI1 Receive Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 3 DMA1AIE: DMA1 Abort Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 2 DMA1ORIE: DMA1 Overrun Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 1 DMA1DCNTIE: DMA1 Destination Count Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 0 DMA1SCNTIE: DMA1 Source Count Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

TMR0IE U1IE U1EIE U1TXIE U1RXIE I2C1EIE I2C1IE I2C1TXIE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 TMR0IE: TMR0 Interrupt Enable bit

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 6 U1IE: UART1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 5 U1EIE: UART1 Framing Error Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 4 U1TXIE: UART1 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 3 U1RXIE: UART1 Receive Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 2 I2C1EIE: I2C1 Error Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 1 I2C1IE: I2C1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 0 I2C1TXIE: I2C1 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
CLC1IE CWG1IE NCO1IE — CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1GIE TMR1IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CLC1IE: CLC1 Interrupt Enable bit

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 6 CWG1IE: CWG1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 5 NCO1IE: NCO1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 3 CCP1IE: CCP1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 1 TMR1GIE: TMR1 Gate Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

I2C2TXIE I2C2RXIE DMA2AIE DMA2ORIE DMA2DCNTIE DMA2SCNTIE C2IE INT1IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 I2C2TXIE: I2C2 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 6 I2C2RXIE: I2C2 Receive Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 5 DMA2AIE: DMA2 Abort Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 4 DMA2ORIE: DMA2 Overrun Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 3 DMA2DCNTIE: DMA2 Destination Count Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 2 DMA2SCNTIE: DMA2 Source Count Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 1 C2IE: C2 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

TMR3GIE TMR3IE U2IE U2EIE U2TXIE U2RXIE I2C2EIE I2C2IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 5 U2IE: UART2 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 4 U2EIE: UART2 Framing Error Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 3 U2TXIE: UART2 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 2 U2RXIE: UART2 Receive Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 1 I2C2EIE: I2C2 Error Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 0 I2C2IE: I2C2 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — INT2IE CLC2IE CWG2IE — CCP2IE TMR4IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
TMR5GIE TMR5IE — — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — CLC3IE CWG3IE CCP3IE TMR6IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — CLC4IE CCP4IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 9-25: IPR0: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 0

IOCIP CRCIP SCANIP NVMIP CSWIP OSFIP HLVDIP SWIP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 IOCIP: Interrupt-on-Change Priority bit

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6 CRCIP: CRC Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 SCANIP: Memory Scanner Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4 NVMIP: NVM Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 CSWIP: Clock Switch Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 2 OSFIP: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1 HLVDIP: HLVD Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 0 SWIP: Software Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

SMT1PWAIP SMT1PRAIP SMT1IP C1IP ADTIP ADIP ZCDIP INT0IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SMT1PWAIP: SMT1 Pulse Width Acquisition Interrupt Priority bit

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6 SMT1PRAIP: SMT1 Period Acquisition Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 SMT1IP: SMT1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4 C1IP: C1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 ADTIP: ADC Threshold Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 2 ADIP: ADC Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1 ZCDIP: ZCD Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 0 INT0IP: External Interrupt 0 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

I2C1RXIP SPI1IP SPI1TXIP SPI1RXIP DMA1AIP DMA1ORIP DMA1DCNTIP DMA1SCNTIP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 I2C1RXIP: I2C1 Receive Interrupt Priority bit

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6 SPI1IP: SPI1 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 SPI1TXIP: I2C1 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4 SPI1RXIP: SPI1 Receive Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 DMA1AIP: DMA1 Abort Transmit Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 2 DMA1ORIP: DMA1 Overrun Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1 DMA1DCNTIP: DMA1 Destination Count Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 0 DMA1SCNTIP: DMA1 Source Count Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

TMR0IP U1IP U1EIP U1TXIP U1RXIP I2C1EIP I2C1IP I2C1TXIP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 TMR0IP: TMR0 Interrupt Priority bit

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6 U1IP: UART1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 U1EIP: UART1 Framing Error Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4 U1TXIP: UART1 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 U1RXIP: UART1 Receive Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 2 I2C1EIP: I2C1 Error Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1 I2C1IP: I2C1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 0 I2C1TXIP: I2C1 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

CLC1IP CWG1IP NCO1IP — CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1GIP TMR1IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CLC1IP: CLC1 Interrupt Priority bit

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6 CWG1IP: CWG1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 NCO1IP: NCO1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 CCP1IP: CCP1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1 TMR1GIP: TMR1 Gate Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

I2C2TXIP I2C2RXIP DMA2AIP DMA2ORIP DMA2DCNTIP DMA2SCNTIP C2IP INT1IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 I2C2TXIP: I2C2 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6 I2C2RXIP: I2C2 Receive Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 DMA2AIP: DMA2 Abort Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4 DMA2ORIP: DMA2 Overrun Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 DMA2DCNTIP: DMA2 Destination Count Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 2 DMA2SCNTIP: DMA2 Source Count Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1 C2IP: C2 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

TMR3GIP TMR3IP U2IP U2EIP U2TXIP U2RXIP I2C2EIP I2C2IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 U2IP: UART2 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4 U2EIP: UART2 Framing Error Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 U2TXIP: UART2 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 2 U2RXIP: UART2 Receive Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1 I2C2EIP: I2C2 Error Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 0 I2C2IP: I2C2 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 U-0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1
— — INT2IP CLC2IP CWG2IP — CCP2IP TMR4IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1 CCP2IP: CRC Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
TMR5GIP TMR5IP — — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1
— — — — CLC3IP CWG3IP CCP3IP TMR6IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — CLC4IP CCP4IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 9-36: IVTBASEU: INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE BASE ADDRESS UPPER REGISTER
U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — BASE[20:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 BASE[20:16]: Interrupt Vector Table Base Address bits
REGISTER 9-37: IVTBASEH: INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE BASE ADDRESS HIGH REGISTER
BASE[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
REGISTER 9-38: IVTBASEL: INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE BASE ADDRESS LOW REGISTER
BASE[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 9-39: IVTADU: INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE ADDRESS UPPER REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
— — — AD[20:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 AD[20:16]: Interrupt Vector Table Address bits
REGISTER 9-40: IVTADH: INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE ADDRESS HIGH REGISTER

R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
AD[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
REGISTER 9-41: IVTADL: INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE ADDRESS LOW REGISTER

R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-1/1 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
AD[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 9-42: IVTLOCK: INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE LOCK REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — — IVTLOCKED(1,2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 0 IVTLOCKED: IVT Registers Lock bits(1,2)
1 = IVTBASE Registers are locked and cannot be written
0 = IVTBASE Registers can be modified by write operations
Note 1: The IVTLOCK bit can only be set or cleared after the unlock sequence in Example 9-1.
2: If IVT1WAY = 1, the IVTLOCK bit cannot be cleared after it has been set. See Register 5-3.
REGISTER 9-43: SHADCON: SHADOW CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — — SHADLO
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 0 SHADLO: Interrupt Shadow Register Access Switch bit
0 = Access Main Context for Interrupt Shadow Registers
1 = Access Low-Priority Interrupt Context for Interrupt Shadow Registers

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 9-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH INTERRUPTS

Register
on Page
INTCON0 GIE/GIEH GIEL IPEN — — INT2EDG INT1EDG INT0EDG 135

INTCON1 STAT[1:0] — — — — — — 136
PIE0 IOCIE CRCIE SCANIE NVMIE CSWIE OSFIE HLVDIE SWIE 147
PIE1 SMT1PWAIE SMT1PRAIE SMT1IE C1IE ADTIE ADIE ZCDIE INT0IE 148
PIE2 I2C1RXIE SPI1IE SPI1TXIE SPI1RXIE DMA1AIE DMA1ORIE DMA1DCNTIE DMA1SCNTIE 149
PIE3 TMR0IE U1IE U1EIE U1TXIE U1RXIE I2C1EIE I2C1IE I2C1TXIE 150
PIE4 CLC1IE CWG1IE NCO1IE —
CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1GIE TMR1IE 151
PIE5 I2C2TXIE I2C2RXIE DMA2AIE DMA2ORIE DMA2DCNTIE DMA2SCNTIE C2IE INT1IE 152
PIE6 TMR3GIE TMR3IE U2IE U2EIE U2TXIE U2RXIE I2C2EIE I2C2IE 153
PIE7 — —
INT2IE CLC2IE CWG2IE —
CCP2IE TMR4IE 154
PIE8 TMR5GIE TMR5IE — — — — — —
155
PIE9 — — — —
CLC3IE CWG3IE CCP3IE TMR6IE 155
PIE10 — — — — — —
CLC4IE CCP4IE 156
PIR0 IOCIF CRCIF SCANIF NVMIF CSWIF OSFIF HLVDIF SWIF 137
PIR1 SMT1PWAIF SMT1PRAIF SMT1IF C1IF ADTIF ADIF ZCDIF INT0IF 138
PIR2 I2C1RXIF SPI1IF SPI1TXIF SPI1RXIF DMA1AIF DMA1ORIF DMA1DCNTIF DMA1SCNTIF 139
PIR3 TMR0IF U1IF U1EIF U1TXIF U1RXIF I2C1EIF I2C1IF I2C1TXIF 140
PIR4 CLC1IF CWG1IF NCO1IF —
CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1GIF TMR1IF 141
PIR5 I2C2TXF I2C2RXF DMA2AIF DMA2ORIF DMA2DCNTIF DMA2SCNTIF C2IF INT1IF 142
PIR6 TMR3GIF TMR3IF U2IF U2EIF U2TXIF U2RXIF I2C2EIF I2C2IF 143
PIR7 — —
INT2IF CLC2IF CWG2IF —
CCP2IF TMR4IF 144
PIR8 TMR5GIF TMR5IF — — — — — —
145
PIR9 — — — —
CLC3IF CWG3IF CCP3IF TMR6IF 145
PIR10 — — — — — —
CLC4IF CCP4IF 146
IPR0 IOCIP CRCIP SCANIP NVMIP CSWIP OSFIP HLVDIP SWIP 157
IPR1 SMT1PWAIP SMT1PRAIP SMT1IP C1IP ADTIP ADIP ZCDIP INT0IP 158
IPR2 I2C1RIP SPI1IP SPI1TIP SPI1RIP DMA1AIP DMA1ORIP DMA1DCNTIP DMA1SCNTIP 159
IPR3 TMR0IP U1IP U1EIP U1TXIP U1RXIP I2C1EIP I2C1IP I2C1TXIP 160
IPR4 CLC1IP CWG1IP NCO1IP — CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1GIP TMR1IP 161
IPR5 I2C2TXP I2C2RXP DMA2AIP DMA2ORIP DMA2DCNTIP DMA2SCNTIP C2IP INT1IP 162
IPR6 TMR3GIP TMR3IP U2IP U2EIP U2TXIP U2RXIP I2C2EIP I2C2IP 163
IPR7 — —
INT2IP CLC2IP CWG2IP —
CCP2IP TMR4IP 164
IPR8 TMR5GIP TMR5IP — — — — — — 164
IPR9 — — — —
CLC3IP CWG3IP CCP3IP TMR6IP 165
IPR10 — — — — — — CLC4IP CCP4IP 165
IVTBASEU — — —
BASE[20:16] 166
IVTBASEH BASE[15:8] 166
IVTBASEL BASE[7:0] 166
IVTADU AD[20:16] 167
IVTADH AD[15:8] 167
IVTADL AD[7:0] 167
IVTLOCK — — — — — — — IVTLOCKED 168
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for interrupts.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
10.0 POWER-SAVING OPERATION 10.1.2 INTERRUPTS DURING DOZE
MODES When an interrupt occurs during Doze, the system
behavior can be configured using the Recover-On-
The purpose of the Power-Down modes is to reduce Interrupt bit (ROI) and the Doze-On-Exit bit (DOE).
power consumption. There are three Power-Down Refer to Table 10-2 for details about system behavior in
modes: all the cases for a transition from Main > ISR > Main.
• Doze mode For PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57 devices, the
• Sleep mode transition from Main > ISR > Main always happens in
• Idle mode Normal operation, regardless of the state of the
DOZEN or DOE bits.
10.1 Doze Mode
Doze mode saves power by reducing CPU execution
and program memory (PFM) access, without affecting
peripheral operation.
10.1.1 DOZE OPERATION

When the Doze Enable bit is set (DOZEN = 1), the CPU
executes one instruction cycle out of every N cycles as
defined by the DOZE[2:0] bits of the CPUDOZE
register. FOSC and FOSC/4 clock sources are
unaffected in Doze mode and peripherals can continue
using these sources.
TABLE 10-1: SYSTEM BEHAVIOR FOR INTERRUPT DURING DOZE

Code Flow
DOZEN ROI
(1)
Main ISR Return to Main
0 0 Normal operation Normal operation and

DOE = DOZEN (in hard-
ware) DOZEN = 0
(unchanged)
0 1 Normal operation Normal operation and
If DOE = 1 when If DOE = 0 when
return from inter- return from inter-
ware) DOZEN = 0 (in
rupt; Doze opera- rupt; Normal oper-
hardware)
tion and DOZEN = ation and DOZEN
1 0 Doze operation Doze operation and DOE 1 (in hardware) = 0 (in hardware)
= DOZEN (in hardware)
DOZEN = 1 (unchanged)
1 1 Doze operation Normal operation and
ware) DOZEN = 0 (in
hardware)
Note 1: User software can change the DOE bit in ISR.
For example, if ROI = 1 and DOZE[2:0] = 001, the
instruction cycle ratio is 1:4. The CPU and memory
operate for one instruction cycle and stay idle for the
next three instruction cycles. The Doze operation is
illustrated in Figure 10-1.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
EXAMPLE 10-1: DOZE SOFTWARE
EXAMPLE
//Mainline operation
bool somethingToDo = FALSE:
void main()
{
initializeSystem();
// DOZE = 64:1 (for example)
// ROI = 1;
GIE = 1; // enable interrupts
while (1)
{
// If ADC completed, process data
if (somethingToDo)
{
doSomething();
DOZEN = 1; // resume low-power
}
}
}
// Data interrupt handler

void interrupt()
{
// DOZEN = 0 because ROI = 1
if (ADIF)
{
somethingToDo = TRUE;
DOE = 0; // make main() go fast
ADIF = 0;
}
// else check other interrupts...
if (TMR0IF)
{
timerTick++;
DOE = 1; // make main() go slow
TMR0IF = 0;
}
}

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 10-1: DOZE MODE OPERATION EXAMPLE (DOZE[2:0] = 001, 1:4)
FOSC
CPU Clocks 1 2 3 4 DOZE = 3’b001 (1:4) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Program Counter Interrupt

PC-2 PC PC+2 ISR ISR+2
Vectoring
CPU Operation
Exec Exec Exec FNOP FNOP FNOP Exec Exec
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
Interrupt
Here
(ROI = ‘1’)
Note 1: Multicycle instructions are executed to completion before fetching the interrupt vector.
2: If the prefetched instruction clears the interrupt enable or GIEx, ISR vectoring will not occur, but DOZEN is
cleared and the CPU will resume execution at full speed.
10.2 Sleep Mode I/O pins that are high-impedance inputs should be
pulled to VDD or VSS externally to avoid switching
Sleep mode is entered by executing the SLEEP currents caused by floating inputs.
instruction, while the Idle Enable (IDLEN) bit of the
CPUDOZE register is clear (IDLEN = 0). Examples of internal circuitry that might be sourcing
current include modules such as the DAC and FVR
Upon entering Sleep mode, the following conditions modules. See Section 37.0 “5-Bit Digital-to-Analog
exist: Converter (DAC) Module” and Section 34.0 “Fixed
1. WDT will be cleared but keeps running if Voltage Reference (FVR)” for more information on
enabled for operation during Sleep these modules.
2. The PD bit of the STATUS register is cleared
(Register 4-2)
3. The TO bit of the STATUS register is set
(Register 4-2)
4. The CPU clock is disabled
5. LFINTOSC, SOSC, HFINTOSC and ADCRC
are unaffected and peripherals using them may
continue operation in Sleep.
6. I/O ports maintain the status they had before
Sleep was executed (driving high, low, or high-
impedance)
7. Resets other than WDT are not affected by
Sleep mode
Refer to individual chapters for more details on
peripheral operation during Sleep.
To minimize current consumption, the following
conditions should be considered:
- I/O pins should not be floating
- External circuitry sinking current from I/O pins
- Internal circuitry sourcing current from I/O
pins
- Current draw from pins with internal weak
pull-ups
- Modules using any oscillator

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
10.2.1 WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP 10.2.2 WAKE-UP USING INTERRUPTS
The device can wake up from Sleep through one of the When any interrupt source, with the exception of the
following events: clock switch interrupt, has both its interrupt enable bit
1. External Reset input on MCLR pin, if enabled and interrupt flag bit set, one of the following will occur:
2. BOR Reset, if enabled • If the interrupt occurs before the execution of a
3. Low-Power Brown-Out Reset (LPBOR), if SLEEP instruction
enabled - SLEEP instruction will execute as a NOP
4. POR Reset - WDT and WDT prescaler will not be cleared
5. Windowed Watchdog Timer, if enabled - TO bit of the STATUS register will not be set
6. All interrupt sources except clock switch - PD bit of the STATUS register will not be
interrupt can wake up the part. cleared
The first five events will cause a device Reset. The last • If the interrupt occurs during or after the
one event is considered a continuation of program execution of a SLEEP instruction
execution. To determine whether a device Reset or - SLEEP instruction will be completely
wake-up event occurred, refer to Section 6.13 “Power executed
Control (PCON0/PCON1) Register”. - Device will immediately wake-up from Sleep
When the SLEEP instruction is being executed, the next - WDT and WDT prescaler will be cleared
instruction (PC + 2) is prefetched. For the device to - TO bit of the STATUS register will be set
wake-up through an interrupt event, the corresponding - PD bit of the STATUS register will be cleared
Interrupt Enable bit must be enabled. Wake-up will
Even if the flag bits were checked before executing a
occur regardless of the state of the GIE bit. If the GIE
SLEEP instruction, it may be possible for flag bits to
bit is disabled, the device continues execution at the
become set before the SLEEP instruction completes. To
instruction after the SLEEP instruction. If the GIE bit is
determine whether a SLEEP instruction executed, test
enabled, the device executes the instruction after the
the PD bit. If the PD bit is set, the SLEEP instruction
SLEEP instruction, the device will then call the Interrupt
was executed as a NOP.
Service Routine. In cases where the execution of the
instruction following SLEEP is not desirable, the user
should have a NOP after the SLEEP instruction.
The WDT is cleared when the device wakes-up from
Sleep, regardless of the source of wake-up.
Upon a wake from a Sleep event, the core will wait for
a combination of three conditions before beginning
execution. The conditions are:
• PFM Ready
• COSC-Selected Oscillator Ready
• BOR Ready (unless BOR is disabled)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 10-2: WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP THROUGH INTERRUPT
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
CLKIN(1)
CLKOUT(2) TOST(3)
Interrupt flag Interrupt Latency (4)
GIE bit
(INTCON reg.) Processor in
Sleep
Instruction Flow
PC PC PC + 1 PC + 2 PC + 2 PC + 2 0004h 0005h
Instruction Inst(PC + 1) Inst(PC + 2) Inst(0004h) Inst(0005h)
Fetched Inst(PC) = Sleep
Instruction Sleep Inst(PC + 1) Forced NOP Forced NOP
Executed Inst(PC - 1) Inst(0004h)
Note 1: External clock. High, Medium, Low mode assumed.

2: CLKOUT is shown here for timing reference.
3: TOST = 1024 TOSC. This delay does not apply to EC and INTOSC Oscillator modes.
4: GIE = 1 assumed. In this case after wake-up, the processor calls the ISR at 0004h. If GIE = 0, execution will continue in-line.
10.2.3 LOW-POWER SLEEP MODE 10.2.3.1 Sleep Current vs. Wake-up Time
The PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 device family In the default operating mode, the LDO and reference
contains an internal Low Dropout (LDO) voltage circuitry remain in the normal configuration while in
regulator, which allows the device I/O pins to operate at Sleep. The device is able to exit Sleep mode quickly
voltages up to 5.5V while the internal device logic since all circuits remain active. In Low-Power Sleep
operates at a lower voltage. The LDO and its mode, when waking-up from Sleep, an extra delay time
associated reference circuitry must remain active when is required for these circuits to return to the normal
the device is in Sleep mode. configuration and stabilize.
The PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 devices allow The Low-Power Sleep mode is beneficial for
the user to optimize the operating current in Sleep, applications that stay in Sleep mode for long periods of
depending on the application requirements. time. The Normal mode is beneficial for applications
that need to wake from Sleep quickly and frequently.
Low-Power Sleep mode can be selected by setting the
VREGPM bit of the VREGCON register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
10.2.3.2 Peripheral Usage in Sleep 10.2.4.1 Idle and Interrupts
Some peripherals that can operate in Sleep mode will Idle mode ends when an interrupt occurs (even if GIE
not operate properly with the Low-Power Sleep mode = 0), but IDLEN is not changed. The device can re-
selected. The Low-Power Sleep mode is intended for enter Idle by executing the SLEEP instruction.
use with these peripherals: If Recover-On-Interrupt is enabled (ROI = 1), the
• Brown-out Reset (BOR) interrupt that brings the device out of Idle also restores
• Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT) full-speed CPU execution when Doze is also enabled.
• External interrupt pin/Interrupt-On-Change pins
• Peripherals that run off external secondary clock 10.2.4.2 Idle and WWDT
source When in Idle, the WWDT Reset is blocked and will
It is the responsibility of the end user to determine what instead wake the device. The WWDT wake-up is not an
is acceptable for their application when setting the interrupt, therefore ROI does not apply.
VREGPM settings in order to ensure operation in
Sleep.
Note: The WDT can bring the device out of Idle,
in the same way it brings the device out of
Note: The PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Sleep. The DOZEN bit is not affected.
devices do not have a configurable Low-
Power Sleep mode. PIC18F26/27/45/46/ 10.3 Peripheral Operation in Power
47/55/56/57K42 devices are unregulated
Saving Modes
and are always in the lowest power state
when in Sleep, with no wake-up time All selected clock sources and the peripherals running
penalty. These devices have a lower off them are active in both Idle and Doze mode. Only in
maximum VDD and I/O voltage than the Sleep mode, both the FOSC and FOSC/4 clocks are
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42. unavailable. All the other clock sources are active, if
See Section 44.0 “Electrical enabled manually or through peripheral clock selection
Specifications” for more information. before the part enters Sleep.
10.2.4 IDLE MODE

When IDLEN is set (IDLEN = 1), the SLEEP instruction
will put the device into Idle mode. In Idle mode, the
CPU and memory operations are halted, but the
peripheral clocks continue to run. This mode is similar
to Doze mode, except that in Idle, both the CPU and
PFM are shut off.
Note: If CLKOUTEN is enabled (CLKOUTEN = 0,

Configuration Word 1H), the output will
continue operating while in Idle.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
10.4 Register Definitions: Voltage Regulator Control
REGISTER 10-1: VREGCON: VOLTAGE REGULATOR CONTROL REGISTER(1)

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1
— — — — — — VREGPM Reserved
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 1 VREGPM: Voltage Regulator Power Mode Selection bit
1 = Low-Power Sleep mode enabled in Sleep(2)
Draws lowest current in Sleep, slower wake-up
0 = Normal Power mode enabled in Sleep(2)
Draws higher current in Sleep, faster wake-up
bit 0 Reserved: Read as ‘1’. Maintain this bit set.
Note 1: Not present in LF parts.

2: See Section 44.0 “Electrical Specifications”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 10-2: CPUDOZE: DOZE AND IDLE REGISTER
R/W-0/0 R/W/HC/HS-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
IDLEN DOZEN ROI DOE — DOZE[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
u = Bit is unchanged x = Bit is unknown -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other
Resets
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HC = Bit is cleared by hardware; HS = Bit is set by
hardware
bit 7 IDLEN: Idle Enable bit

1 = A SLEEP instruction places the device into Idle mode
0 = A SLEEP instruction places the device into Sleep mode
bit 6 DOZEN: Doze Enable bit(1)
1 = Places the device into Doze mode
0 = Places the device into Normal mode
bit 5 ROI: Recover-On-Interrupt bit(1)
1 = Entering the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) makes DOZEN = 0
0 = Entering the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) does not change DOZEN
bit 4 DOE: Doze-On-Exit bit(1)
1 = Exiting the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) makes DOZEN = 1
0 = Exiting the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) does not change DOZEN
bit 2-0 DOZE[2:0]: Ratio of CPU Instruction Cycles to Peripheral Instruction Cycles
111 =1:256
110 =1:128
101 =1:64
100 =1:32
011 =1:16
010 =1:8
001 =1:4
000 =1:2
Note 1: Refer Table 10-1 for more details.
TABLE 10-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH POWER-DOWN MODE

Register on
Page
VREGCON(1) — — — — — — VREGPM Reserved 176

CPUDOZE IDLEN DOZEN ROI DOE — DOZE[2:0] 177
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used in Power-Down mode.
Note 1: Not present in LF parts.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
11.0 WINDOWED WATCHDOG
TIMER (WWDT)
The Watchdog Timer (WDT) is a system timer that
generates a Reset if the firmware does not issue a
CLRWDT instruction within the time-out period. The
Watchdog Timer is typically used to recover the system
from unexpected events. The Windowed Watchdog
Timer (WWDT) differs in that CLRWDT instructions are
only accepted when they are performed within a
specific window during the time-out period.
The WWDT has the following features:
• Selectable clock source
• Multiple operating modes
- WWDT is always On
- WWDT is off when in Sleep
- WWDT is controlled by software
- WWDT is always Off
• Configurable time-out period is from 1 ms to 256s
(nominal)
• Configurable window size from 12.5% to 100% of
the time-out period
• Multiple Reset conditions

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 11-1: WINDOWED WATCHDOG TIMER BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000162D
1/27/2017
WWDT
Armed
WDT
Window
Violation
Window Closed
Window
Comparator
CLRWDT Sizes
WINDOW
RESET
Reserved 111
Reserved 110
Reserved 101
R
Reserved 100 18-bit Prescale
Reserved 011 Counter
E
SOSC 010
MFINTOSC 31.25 kHz 001
LFINTOSC 000
CS
PS
R
5-bit Overflow
WDT Time-out
WDT Counter Latch
WDTE<1:0> = 01
SEN
WDTE<1:0> = 11
WDTE<1:0> = 10
Sleep

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
11.1 Independent Clock Source 11.3 Time-out Period
The WWDT can derive its time base from either the If the WDTCPS[4:0] Configuration bits default to
31 kHz LFINTOSC or 31.25 kHz MFINTOSC internal 0b11111, then the PS bits of the WDTCON0 register
oscillators, depending on the value of WDTE[1:0] set the time-out period from 1 ms to 256 seconds
Configuration bits. (nominal). If any value other than the default value is
If WDTE = 0b1x, then the clock source will be enabled assigned to WDTCPS[4:0] Configuration bits, then the
depending on the WDTCCS[2:0] Configuration bits. timer period will be based on the WDTCPS[4:0] bits in
the CONFIG3L register. After a Reset, the default time-
If WDTE = 0b01, the SEN bit should be set by software out period is 2s.
to enable WWDT, and the clock source is enabled by
the CS bits in the WDTCON1 register.
11.4 Watchdog Window
Time intervals in this chapter are based on a minimum
nominal interval of 1 ms. See Section 44.0 “Electrical The Windowed Watchdog Timer has an optional
Specifications” for LFINTOSC and MFINTOSC Windowed mode that is controlled by the WDTCWS[2:0]
tolerances. Configuration bits and WINDOW[2:0] bits of the
WDTCON1 register. In the Windowed mode, the
CLRWDT instruction must occur within the allowed
11.2 WWDT Operating Modes
window of the WDT period. Any CLRWDT instruction that
The Windowed Watchdog Timer module has four occurs outside of this window will trigger a window
operating modes controlled by the WDTE[1:0] bits in violation and will cause a WWDT Reset, similar to a
Configuration Words. See Table 11-1. WWDT time out. See Figure 11-2 for an example.
The window size is controlled by the WINDOW[2:0]
11.2.1 WWDT IS ALWAYS ON Configuration bits, or the WINDOW[2:0] bits of
When the WDTE bits of Configuration Words are set to WDTCON1, if WDTCWS[2:0] = 111.
‘11’, the WWDT is always on. The five Most Significant bits of the WDTTMR register
WWDT protection is active during Sleep. are used to determine whether the window is open, as
defined by the WINDOW[2:0] bits of the WDTCON1
11.2.2 WWDT IS OFF IN SLEEP register.
When the WDTE bits of Configuration Words are set to In the event of a window violation, a Reset will be
‘10’, the WWDT is on, except in Sleep. generated and the WDTWV bit of the PCON0 register
WWDT protection is not active during Sleep. will be cleared. This bit is set by a POR or can be set in
firmware.
11.2.3 WWDT CONTROLLED BY
SOFTWARE 11.5 Clearing the WWDT
When the WDTE bits of Configuration Words are set to The WWDT is cleared when any of the following
‘01’, the WWDT is controlled by the SEN bit of the conditions occur:
WDTCON0 register.
• Any Reset
WWDT protection is unchanged by Sleep. See • Valid CLRWDT instruction is executed
Table 11-1 for more details.
• Device enters Sleep
• Exit Sleep by Interrupt
TABLE 11-1: WWDT OPERATING MODES • WWDT is disabled
Device WWDT • Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) is running
WDTE[1:0] SEN
Mode Mode • Any write to the WDTCON0 or WDTCON1
11 X X Active registers
Awake Active 11.5.1 CLRWDT CONSIDERATIONS
10 X
Sleep Disabled (WINDOWED MODE)
1 X Active When in Windowed mode, the WWDT must be armed
01
0 X Disabled before a CLRWDT instruction will clear the timer. This is
00 X X Disabled performed by reading the WDTCON0 register.
Executing a CLRWDT instruction without performing
such an arming action will trigger a window violation
regardless of whether the window is open or not.
See Table 11-2 for more information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
11.6 Operation During Sleep
When the device enters Sleep, the WWDT is cleared.
If the WWDT is enabled during Sleep, the WWDT
resumes counting. When the device exits Sleep, the
WWDT is cleared again.
The WWDT remains clear until the Oscillator Start-up
Timer (OST) completes, if enabled. See Section
7.2.1.3 “Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)” for more
information on the OST.
When a WWDT time-out occurs while the device is in
Sleep, no Reset is generated. Instead, the device
wakes up and resumes operation. The TO and PD bits
in the STATUS register are changed to indicate the
event. The RWDT bit in the PCON0 register can also be
used. See Section 4.0 “Memory Organization” for
more information.
TABLE 11-2: WWDT CLEARING CONDITIONS

Conditions WWDT
WDTE[1:0] = 00
WDTE[1:0] = 01 and SEN = 0
WDTE[1:0] = 10 and enter Sleep
Cleared
CLRWDT Command
Oscillator Fail Detected
Exit Sleep + System Clock = SOSC, EXTRC, INTOSC, EXTCLK
Exit Sleep + System Clock = XT, HS, LP Cleared until the end of OST
Change INTOSC divider (IRCF bits) Unaffected
FIGURE 11-2: WINDOW PERIOD AND DELAY
Rev. 10-000 163A

11/8/201 3
CLRWDT Instruction
(or other WDT reset)
Window Period
Window Closed Window Open
Window Delay Time-out Event

(window violation can occur)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
11.7 Register Definitions: Windowed Watchdog Timer Control
REGISTER 11-1: WDTCON0: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER 0

U-0 U-0 R/W(3)-q/q(2) R/W(3)-q/q(2) R/W(3)-q/q(2) R/W(3)-q/q(2) R/W(3)-q/q(2) R/W-0/0
— — PS[4:0] SEN
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-1 PS[4:0]: Watchdog Timer Prescale Select bits(1)
Bit Value = Prescale Rate
11111 = Reserved. Results in minimum interval (1:32)
•
•
•
10011 = Reserved. Results in minimum interval (1:32)
10010 = 1:8388608 (223) (Interval 256s nominal)

01011 = 1:65536 (Interval 2s nominal) (Reset value)
01010 = 1:32768 (Interval 1s nominal)
01001 = 1:16384 (Interval 512 ms nominal)
bit 0 SEN: Software Enable/Disable for Watchdog Timer bit
If WDTE[1:0] = 1x:
If WDTE[1:0] = 01:
1 = WDT is turned on
0 = WDT is turned off
If WDTE[1:0] = 00:
Note 1: Times are approximate. WDT time is based on 31 kHz LFINTOSC.

2: When WDTCPS [4:0] in CONFIG3L = 11111, the Reset value of PS[4:0] is 01011. Otherwise, the Reset value of
PS[4:0] is equal to WDTCPS[4:0] in CONFIG3L.
3: When WDTCPS [4:0] in CONFIG3L ≠ 11111, these bits are read-only.
4: When the WWDT is configured to run using the SOSC as a clock source and the device is allowed to undergo a Reset,
as triggered by a WDT time-out, the SOSC would also undergo a Reset. That means the SOSC will execute its start-up
sequence which requires 1024 SOSC clock counts before it is made available for peripherals to use. So for example, if
the WDT is set for a 1 ms time-out and the device is allowed to undergo a WDT Reset, then the actual WDT Reset
period will be: WDT_PERIOD = (1/(SOSC_FREQUENCY) * 1024) + 1 ms.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 11-2: WDTCON1: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER 1

U-0 R/W -q/q(1) R/W(3)-q/q(1) R/W(3)-q/q(1)
(3)
U-0 R/W(4)-q/q(2) R/W(4)-q/q(2) R/W(4)-q/q(2)
— CS[2:0] — WINDOW[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6-4 CS[2:0]: Watchdog Timer Clock Select bits
111 = Reserved
•
•
•
011 = Reserved
010 = SOSC
001 = MFINTOSC 31.25 kHz
000 = LFINTOSC 31 kHz
bit 2-0 WINDOW[2:0]: Watchdog Timer Window Select bits
Window delay Window opening

WINDOW[2:0]
Percent of time Percent of time
111 N/A 100
110 12.5 87.5
101 25 75
100 37.5 62.5
011 50 50
010 62.5 37.5
001 75 25
000 87.5 12.5
Note 1: If WDTCCS [2:0] in CONFIG3H = 111, the Reset value of CS[2:0] is 000.
2: The Reset value of WINDOW[2:0] is determined by the value of WDTCWS[2:0] in the CONFIG3H register.
3: If WDTCCS[2:0] in CONFIG3H ≠ 111, these bits are read-only.
4: If WDTCWS[2:0] in CONFIG3H ≠ 111, these bits are read-only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 11-3: WDTPSL: WWDT PRESCALE SELECT LOW BYTE REGISTER (READ-ONLY)
R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
PSCNT[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 PSCNT[7:0]: Prescale Select Low Byte bits(1)
Note 1: The 18-bit WDT prescale value, PSCNT[17:0] includes the WDTPSL, WDTPSH and the lower bits of the
WDTTMR registers. PSCNT[17:0] is intended for debug operations and should not be read during normal
operation.
REGISTER 11-4: WDTPSH: WWDT PRESCALE SELECT HIGH BYTE REGISTER (READ-ONLY)
R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
PSCNT[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 PSCNT[15:8]: Prescale Select High Byte bits(1)
operation.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 11-5: WDTTMR: WDT TIMER REGISTER (READ-ONLY)

R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
WDTTMR[4:0] STATE PSCNT[17:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-3 WDTTMR[4:0]: Watchdog Window Value bits
WDT Window State

WINDOW Open Percent
Closed Open
111 N/A 00000-11111 100
110 00000-00011 00100-11111 87.5
101 00000-00111 01000-11111 75
100 00000-01011 01100-11111 62.5
011 00000-01111 10000-11111 50
010 00000-10011 10100-11111 37.5
001 00000-10111 11000-11111 25
000 00000-11011 11100-11111 12.5
bit 2 STATE: WDT Armed Status bit

1 = WDT is armed
0 = WDT is not armed
bit 1-0 PSCNT[17:16]: Prescale Select Upper Byte bits(1)
operation.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 11-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH WINDOWED WATCHDOG TIMER

Register
on Page
WDTCON0 — — PS[4:0] SEN 182

WDTCON1 — CS[2:0] — WINDOW[2:0] 183
WDTPSL PSCNT[7:0] 184
WDTPSH PSCNT[15:8] 184
WDTTMR WDTTMR[4:0] STATE PSCNT[17:16] 185
Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, – = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by
Windowed Watchdog Timer.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
12.0 8x8 HARDWARE MULTIPLIER EXAMPLE 12-1: 8x8 UNSIGNED MULTIPLY
ROUTINE
12.1 Introduction MOVF ARG1, W ;
MULWF ARG2 ; ARG1 * ARG2 ->
All PIC18 devices include an 8x8 hardware multiplier ; PRODH:PRODL
as part of the ALU. The multiplier performs an unsigned
operation and yields a 16-bit result that is stored in the
product register pair, PRODH:PRODL. The multiplier’s EXAMPLE 12-2: 8x8 SIGNED MULTIPLY
operation does not affect any flags in the STATUS ROUTINE
register.
MOVF ARG1, W
Making multiplication a hardware operation allows it to MULWF ARG2 ; ARG1 * ARG2 ->
be completed in a single instruction cycle. This has the ; PRODH:PRODL
advantages of higher computational throughput and BTFSC ARG2, SB ; Test Sign Bit
reduced code size for multiplication algorithms and SUBWF PRODH, F ; PRODH = PRODH
allows the PIC18 devices to be used in many applica- ; - ARG1
tions previously reserved for digital signal processors. MOVF ARG2, W
BTFSC ARG1, SB ; Test Sign Bit
A comparison of various hardware and software
SUBWF PRODH, F ; PRODH = PRODH
multiply operations, along with the savings in memory ; - ARG2
and execution time, is shown in Table 12-1.
12.2 Operation
Example 12-1 shows the instruction sequence for an
8x8 unsigned multiplication. Only one instruction is
required when one of the arguments is already loaded in
the WREG register.
Example 12-2 shows the sequence to do an 8x8 signed
multiplication. To account for the sign bits of the
arguments, each argument’s Most Significant bit (MSb)
is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done.
TABLE 12-1: PERFORMANCE COMPARISON FOR VARIOUS MULTIPLY OPERATIONS

Program Time
Cycles
Routine Multiply Method Memory
(Max) @ 64 MHz @ 40 MHz @ 10 MHz @ 4 MHz
(Words)
Without hardware multiply 13 69 4.3 s 6.9 s 27.6 s 69 s
8x8 unsigned
Hardware multiply 1 1 62.5 ns 100 ns 400 ns 1 s
8x8 signed
Hardware multiply 6 6 375 ns 600 ns 2.4 s 6 s
16x16 unsigned
Hardware multiply 28 28 1.8 s 2.8 s 11.2 s 28 s
16x16 signed
Hardware multiply 35 40 2.5 s 4.0 s 16.0 s 40 s

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Example 12-3 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 EXAMPLE 12-4: 16 x 16 SIGNED
unsigned multiplication. Equation 12-1 shows the MULTIPLY ROUTINE
algorithm that is used. The 32-bit result is stored in four MOVF ARG1L, W
registers (RES[3:0]). MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1L * ARG2L ->
; PRODH:PRODL
MOVFF PRODH, RES1 ;
EQUATION 12-1: 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MOVFF PRODL, RES0 ;
;
MULTIPLICATION MOVF ARG1H, W
ALGORITHM MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1H * ARG2H ->
; PRODH:PRODL
RES3:RES0 = ARG1H:ARG1L  ARG2H:ARG2L MOVFF PRODH, RES3 ;
= (ARG1H  ARG2H  216) + MOVFF PRODL, RES2 ;
(ARG1H  ARG2L  28) + ;
(ARG1L  ARG2H  28) + MOVF ARG1L, W
MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1L * ARG2H ->
(ARG1L  ARG2L) ; PRODH:PRODL
MOVF PRODL, W ;
ADDWF RES1, F ; Add cross
EXAMPLE 12-3: 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MOVF PRODH, W ; products
ADDWFC RES2, F ;
MULTIPLY ROUTINE CLRF WREG ;
MOVF ARG1L, W ADDWFC RES3, F ;
MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1L * ARG2L-> ;
; PRODH:PRODL MOVF ARG1H, W ;
MOVFF PRODH, RES1 ; MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1H * ARG2L ->
MOVFF PRODL, RES0 ; ; PRODH:PRODL
; MOVF PRODL, W ;
MOVF ARG1H, W ADDWF RES1, F ; Add cross
MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1H * ARG2H-> MOVF PRODH, W ; products
; PRODH:PRODL ADDWFC RES2, F ;
MOVFF PRODH, RES3 ; CLRF WREG ;
MOVFF PRODL, RES2 ; ADDWFC RES3, F ;
; ;
MOVF ARG1L, W BTFSS ARG2H, 7 ; ARG2H:ARG2L neg?
MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1L * ARG2H-> BRA SIGN_ARG1 ; no, check ARG1
; PRODH:PRODL MOVF ARG1L, W ;
MOVF PRODL, W ; SUBWF RES2 ;
ADDWF RES1, F ; Add cross MOVF ARG1H, W ;
MOVF PRODH, W ; products SUBWFB RES3
ADDWFC RES2, F ; ;
CLRF WREG ; SIGN_ARG1
ADDWFC RES3, F ; BTFSS ARG1H, 7 ; ARG1H:ARG1L neg?
; BRA CONT_CODE ; no, done
MOVF ARG1H, W ; MOVF ARG2L, W ;
MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1H * ARG2L-> SUBWF RES2 ;
; PRODH:PRODL MOVF ARG2H, W ;
MOVF PRODL, W ; SUBWFB RES3
ADDWF RES1, F ; Add cross ;
MOVF PRODH, W ; products CONT_CODE
ADDWFC RES2, F ; :
CLRF WREG ;
ADDWFC RES3, F ;
Example 12-4 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16

signed multiply. Equation 12-2 shows the algorithm
used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers
(RES[3:0]). To account for the sign bits of the
arguments, the MSb for each argument pair is tested
and the appropriate subtractions are done.
EQUATION 12-2: 16 x 16 SIGNED

MULTIPLICATION
ALGORITHM
RES3:RES0 = ARG1H:ARG1L  ARG2H:ARG2L
= (ARG1H  ARG2H  216) +
(ARG1H  ARG2L  28) +
(ARG1L  ARG2H  28) +
(ARG1L  ARG2L) +
(-1  ARG2H[7]  ARG1H:ARG1L  216) +
(-1  ARG1H[7]  ARG2H:ARG2L  216)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.0 NONVOLATILE MEMORY NVM can be protected in two ways, by either code
protection or write protection. Code protection (CP and
(NVM) CONTROL CPD bits in Configuration Word 5L) disables access,
Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) is separated into two types: reading and writing to both PFM and Data EEPROM
Program Flash Memory (PFM) and Data EEPROM Memory via external device programmers. Code
Memory. protection does not affect the self-write and erase
functionality. Code protection can only be reset by a
PFM, Data EEPROM, User IDs and Configuration bits
device programmer performing a Bulk Erase to the
can all be accessed using the REG[1:0] bits of the
device, clearing all nonvolatile memory, Configuration
NVMCON1 register.
bits and User IDs.
The write time is controlled by an on-chip timer. The
Write protection prohibits self-write and erase to a
write/erase voltages are generated by an on-chip
portion or all of the PFM, as defined by the WRT bits of
charge pump rated to operate over the operating
Configuration Word 4H. Write protection does not affect
voltage range of the device.
a device programmer’s ability to read, write or erase
the device.
TABLE 13-1: NVM ORGANIZATION AND ACCESS INFORMATION

PC[20:0] Execution User Access
ICSP™ Addr[21:0]
Memory CPU
TBLPTR[21:0] REG TABLAT NVMDAT
NVMADDR[9:0] Execution
00 0000h
Program Flash Memory Read/
••• Read 10 —(3)
(PFM) Write(1)
01 FFFFh
20 0000h
Read/
User IDs(2) ••• No Access x1 —(3)
Write
20 000Fh
20 0010h
Reserved No Access —(3)
2F FFFFh
30 0000h
Read/
Configuration ••• No Access x1 —(3)
Write(1)
30 0009h
30 000Ah
30 FFFFh
31 0000h
User Data Memory Read/
••• No Access 00 —(3)
(Data EEPROM) Write(1)
31 03FFh
31 0400h
3E FFFFh
3F 0000h
Device Information Area
••• No Access x1 Read —(3)
(DIA)
3F 003Fh
3F 0040h
3F FF09h
3F FF00h
Device Configuration Information
(DCI)
3F FF09h
3F FF0Ah
3F FFFBh
3F FFFCh
Revision ID/
Device ID
3F FFFFh
Note 1: Subject to Memory Write Protection settings.

2: User IDs are eight words ONLY. There is no code protection, table read protection or write protection implemented for this
region.
3: Reads as ‘0’, writes clear the WR bit and WRERR bit is set.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.1 Program Flash Memory
The Program Flash Memory is readable, writable and
erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD
range.
A read from program memory is executed one byte at
a time. A write to program memory or program memory
erase is executed on blocks of n bytes at a time. Refer
to Table 5-4 for write and erase block sizes. A Bulk
Erase operation cannot be issued from user code.
Writing or erasing program memory will cease
instruction fetches until the operation is complete. The
program memory cannot be accessed during the write
or erase, therefore, code cannot execute. An internal
programming timer terminates program memory writes
and erases.
A value written to program memory does not need to be
a valid instruction. Executing a program memory
location that forms an invalid instruction results in a
NOP.
It is important to understand the PFM memory structure
for erase and programming operations. Program
memory word size is 16 bits wide. PFM is arranged in
rows. A row is the minimum size that can be erased by
user software. Refer to Table 5-4 for the row sizes for
these devices.
After a row has been erased, all or a portion of this row
can be programmed. Data to be written into the
program memory row is written to 8-bit wide data write
latches by means of 6 address lines. These latches are
not directly accessible, but may be loaded via
sequential writes to the TABLAT register.
Note: To modify only a portion of a previously

programmed row, then the contents of the
entire row must be read and saved in
RAM prior to the erase. Then, the new
data and retained data can be written into
the write latches to reprogram the row of
PFM. However, any unprogrammed
locations can be written without first
erasing the row. In this case, it is not
necessary to save and rewrite the other
previously programmed locations.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.1.1 TABLE READS AND TABLE WRITES The table write operation stores one byte of data from
the TABLAT register into a write block holding register.
In order to read and write program memory, there are
The procedure to write the contents of the holding
two operations that allow the processor to move bytes
registers into program memory is detailed in Section
between the program memory space and the data RAM:
13.1.6 “Writing to Program Flash Memory”.
• Table Read (TBLRD) Figure 13-2 shows the operation of a table write with
• Table Write (TBLWT) program memory.
The program memory space is 16 bits wide, while the Table operations work with byte entities. Tables
data RAM space is eight bits wide. Table reads and containing data, rather than program instructions, are
table writes move data between these two memory not required to be word aligned. Therefore, a table can
spaces through an 8-bit register (TABLAT). start and end at any byte address. If a table write is being
The table read operation retrieves one byte of data used to write executable code into program memory,
directly from program memory and places it into the program instructions will need to be word aligned.
TABLAT register. Figure 13-1 shows the operation of a
table read.
FIGURE 13-1: TABLE READ OPERATION

Instruction: TBLRD*
Program Memory
Table Pointer(1)
Table Latch (8-bit)
TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL
TABLAT
Program Memory
(TBLPTR)
Note 1: Table Pointer register points to a byte in program memory.
FIGURE 13-2: TABLE WRITE OPERATION

Instruction: TBLWT*
Program Memory Holding Registers
Table Pointer(1) Table Latch (8-bit)

TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TABLAT
Program Memory
(TBLPTR[MSBs])
Note 1: During table writes the Table Pointer does not point directly to program memory. The LSBs of TBLPRTL
actually point to an address within the write block holding registers. The MSBs of the Table Pointer deter-
mine where the write block will eventually be written. The process for writing the holding registers to the
program memory array is discussed in Section 13.1.6 “Writing to Program Flash Memory”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.1.2 CONTROL REGISTERS 13.1.2.3 TBLPTR – Table Pointer Register
Several control registers are used in conjunction with The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register addresses a byte
the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These include the within the program memory. The TBLPTR is comprised
following registers: of three SFR registers: Table Pointer Upper Byte, Table
• NVMCON1 register Pointer High Byte and Table Pointer Low Byte
(TBLPTRU:TBLPTRH:TBLPTRL). These three
• NVMCON2 register
registers join to form a 22-bit wide pointer. The low-
• TABLAT register order 21 bits allow the device to address up to 2 Mbytes
• TBLPTR registers of program memory space. The 22nd bit allows access
to the Device ID, the User ID and the Configuration bits.
13.1.2.1 NVMCON1 and NVMCON2
The Table Pointer register, TBLPTR, is used by the
Registers
TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These instructions can
The NVMCON1 register (Register 13-1) is the control update the TBLPTR in one of four ways based on the
register for memory accesses. The NVMCON2 register table operation. These operations on the TBLPTR
is not a physical register; it is used exclusively in the affect only the low-order 21 bits.
memory write and erase sequences. Reading
NVMCON2 will read all ‘0’s. 13.1.2.4 Table Pointer Boundaries
The REG[1:0] control bits determine if the access will TBLPTR is used in reads, writes and erases of the
be to Data EEPROM Memory locations. PFM locations Program Flash Memory.
or User IDs, Configuration bits, Rev ID and Device ID. When a TBLRD is executed, all 22 bits of the TBLPTR
When REG[1:0] = 00, any subsequent operations will determine which byte is read from program memory
operate on the Data EEPROM Memory. When directly into the TABLAT register.
REG[1:0] = 10, any subsequent operations will operate
on the program memory. When REG[1:0] = x1, any When a TBLWT is executed the byte in the TABLAT
subsequent operations will operate on the register is written, not to memory but, to a holding
Configuration bits, User IDs, Rev ID and Device ID. register in preparation for a program memory write. The
holding registers constitute a write block which varies
The FREE bit allows the program memory erase depending on the device (see Table 5-4).The 3, 4, or
operation. When the FREE bit is set, an erase 5 LSbs of the TBLPTRL register determine which
operation is initiated on the next WR command. When specific address within the holding register block is
FREE is clear, only writes are enabled. This bit is written to. The MSBs of the Table Pointer have no effect
applicable only to the PFM and not to data EEPROM. during TBLWT operations.
When set, the WREN bit will allow a program/erase When a program memory write is executed the entire
operation. The WREN bit is cleared on power-up. holding register block is written to the memory at the
The WRERR bit is set by hardware when the WR bit is address determined by the MSbs of the TBLPTR. The
set and is cleared when the internal programming timer 3, 4, or 5 LSBs are ignored during memory writes. For
expires and the write operation is successfully more detail, see Section 13.1.6 “Writing to Program
complete. Flash Memory”.
The WR control bit initiates erase/write cycle operation Figure 13-3 describes the relevant boundaries of
when the REG[1:0] bits point to the Data EEPROM TBLPTR based on Program Flash Memory operations.
Memory location, and it initiates a write operation when
the REG[1:0] bits point to the PFM location. The WR bit
cannot be cleared by firmware; it can only be set by
firmware. Then the WR bit is cleared by hardware at
the completion of the write operation.
The NVMIF Interrupt Flag bit is set when the write is

complete. The NVMIF flag stays set until cleared by
firmware.
13.1.2.2 TABLAT – Table Latch Register

The Table Latch (TABLAT) is an 8-bit register mapped
into the SFR space. The Table Latch register is used to
hold 8-bit data during data transfers between program
memory and data RAM.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 13-2: TABLE POINTER OPERATIONS WITH TBLRD AND TBLWT INSTRUCTIONS
Example Operation on Table Pointer
TBLRD*
TBLPTR is not modified
TBLWT*
TBLRD*+
TBLPTR is incremented after the read/write
TBLWT*+
TBLRD*-
TBLPTR is decremented after the read/write
TBLWT*-
TBLRD+*
TBLPTR is incremented before the read/write
TBLWT+*
FIGURE 13-3: TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES BASED ON OPERATION
21 TBLPTRU 16 15 TBLPTRH 8 7 TBLPTRL 0
TABLE ERASE/WRITE TABLE WRITE

TBLPTR[21:n+1](1) TBLPTR[n:0](1)
TABLE READ – TBLPTR[21:0]
Note 1: Refer to Table 5-4 for the row size values.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.1.3 READING THE PROGRAM FLASH The CPU operation is suspended during the read, and
MEMORY it resumes immediately after. From the user point of
view, TABLAT is valid in the next instruction cycle.
The TBLRD instruction retrieves data from program
memory and places it into data RAM. Table reads from The internal program memory is typically organized by
program memory are performed one byte at a time. words. The Least Significant bit of the address selects
between the high and low bytes of the word.
TBLPTR points to a byte address in program space.
Executing TBLRD places the byte pointed to into Figure 13-4 shows the interface between the internal
TABLAT. In addition, TBLPTR can be modified program memory and the TABLAT.
automatically for the next table read operation.
FIGURE 13-4: READS FROM PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY
Program Memory
(Even Byte Address) (Odd Byte Address)
TBLPTR = xxxxx1 TBLPTR = xxxxx0
Instruction Register TABLAT

FETCH TBLRD
(IR) Read Register
EXAMPLE 13-1: READING A PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY WORD

BCF NVMCON1, REG0 ; point to Program Flash Memory
BSF NVMCON1, REG1 ; access Program Flash Memory
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; Load TBLPTR with the base
MOVWF TBLPTRU ; address of the word
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_HIGH
MOVWF TBLPTRH
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF TBLPTRL
READ_WORD
TBLRD*+ ; read into TABLAT and increment
MOVF TABLAT, W ; get data
MOVWF WORD_EVEN
TBLRD*+ ; read into TABLAT and increment
MOVFW TABLAT, W ; get data
MOVF WORD_ODD

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 13-5: PROGRAM FLASH
MEMORY READ
FLOWCHART
Rev. 10-000046B
8/7/2015
Start
Read Operation
Select PFM
(NVMREG<1:0> = 0x10)
Select Word Address

(TBLPTR registers)
Initiate Read operation

(TBLRD)
Data read now in

TABLAT
End
Read Operation

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.1.4 NVM UNLOCK SEQUENCE FIGURE 13-6: NVM UNLOCK
The unlock sequence is a mechanism that protects the SEQUENCE FLOWCHART
NVM from unintended self-write programming or
erasing. The sequence must be executed and
Start Unlock Sequence
completed without interruption to successfully
complete any of the following operations:
• PFM Row Erase
• Write of PFM write latches to PFM memory
• Write of PFM write latches to User IDs
Write 55h to NVMCON2
• Write to Data EEPROM Memory
• Write to Configuration Words
The unlock sequence consists of the following steps
and must be completed in order:
• Write 55h to NVMCON2 Write AAh to NVMCON2
• Write AAh to NMVCON2
• Set the WR bit of NVMCON1
Once the WR bit is set, the processor will stall internal
operations until the operation is complete and then Initiate Write or Erase Operation
resume with the next instruction. (WR = 1)
Since the unlock sequence must not be interrupted,
global interrupts should be disabled prior to the unlock
sequence and re-enabled after the unlock sequence is
completed.
End Unlock Operation
EXAMPLE 13-2: NVM UNLOCK SEQUENCE

BCF INTCON0,GIE ; Recommended so sequence is not interrupted
BANKSEL NVMCON1
BSF NVMCON1,WREN ; Enable write/erase
MOVLW 55h ; Load 55h
MOVWF NVMCON2 ; Step 1: Load 55h into NVMCON2

MOVLW AAh ; Step 2: Load W with AAh
MOVWF NVMCON2 ; Step 3: Load AAh into NVMCON2
BSF NVMCON1,WR ; Step 4: Set WR bit to begin write/erase
BSF INTCON0,GIE ; Re-enable interrupts
Note 1: Sequence begins when NVMCON2 is written; steps 1-4 must occur in the cycle-accurate order
shown. If the timing of the steps 1 to 4 is corrupted by an interrupt or a debugger Halt, the action
will not take place.
2: Opcodes shown are illustrative; any instruction that has the indicated effect may be used.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.1.5 ERASING PROGRAM FLASH 13.1.5.1 Program Flash Memory Erase
MEMORY Sequence
The minimum erase block is 64 words (refer to Table 5- The sequence of events for erasing a block of internal
4). Only through the use of an external programmer, or program memory is:
through ICSP™ control, can larger blocks of program 1. REG bits of the NVMCON1 register point to
memory be bulk erased. Word erase in the program PFM
memory array is not supported.
2. Set the FREE and WREN bits of the NVMCON1
For example, when initiating an erase sequence from a register
microcontroller with erase row size of 64 words, a block 3. Perform the unlock sequence as described in
of 64 words (128 bytes) of program memory is erased. Section 13.1.4 “NVM Unlock Sequence”
The Most Significant 16 bits of the TBLPTR[21:6] point
to the block being erased. The TBLPTR[5:0] bits are If the PFM address is write-protected, the WR bit will be
ignored. cleared and the erase operation will not take place,
WRERR is signaled in this scenario.
The NVMCON1 register commands the erase
operation. The REG[1:0] bits must be set to point to the The operation erases the memory row indicated by
Program Flash Memory. The WREN bit must be set to masking the LSBs of the current TBLPTR.
enable write operations. The FREE bit is set to select While erasing PFM, CPU operation is suspended and
an erase operation. it resumes when the operation is complete. Upon
The NVM unlock sequence described in Section completion the WR bit is cleared in hardware, the
13.1.4 “NVM Unlock Sequence” should be used to NVMIF is set and an interrupt will occur if the NVMIE bit
guard against accidental writes. This is sometimes is also set.
referred to as a long write. Write latch data is not affected by erase operations and
A long write is necessary for erasing program memory. WREN will remain unchanged.
Instruction execution is halted during the long write
cycle. The long write is terminated by the internal
Note 1: If a write or erase operation is terminated
programming timer.
by an unexpected event, WRERR bit will
set which user can check to decide
whether a rewrite of the location(s) is
needed.
2: WRERR is set if WR is written to ‘1’ while
TBLPTR points to a write-protected
address.
3: WRERR is set if WR is written to ‘1’ while
TBLPTR points to an invalid address
location (Table 13-1).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
EXAMPLE 13-3: ERASING A PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY BLOCK
; This sample row erase routine assumes the following:
; 1. A valid address within the erase row is loaded in variables TBLPTR register
CLRF NVMCON1 ; Setup PFM Access

MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; load TBLPTR with the base
MOVWF TBLPTRU ; address of the memory block
MOVWF TBLPTRH
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF TBLPTRL
ERASE_BLOCK
BSF NVMCON1, REG1 ; access Program Flash Memory
BSF NVMCON1, WREN ; enable write to memory
BSF NVMCON1, FREE ; enable block Erase operation
BCF INTCON0, GIE ; disable interrupts
MOVLW 55h ; next four instructions are required sequence
MOVWF NVMCON2 ; write 55h
MOVLW AAh
MOVWF NVMCON2 ; write AAh
BSF NVMCON1, WR ; start erase (CPU stalls)
BSF INTCON0, GIE ; re-enable interrupts

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 13-7: PFM ROW ERASE 13.1.6 WRITING TO PROGRAM FLASH
FLOWCHART MEMORY
The programming write block size is described in
Start Erase Operation Table 5-4. Word or byte programming is not supported.
Table writes are used internally to load the holding
registers needed to program the memory. There are
Select Memory: only as many holding registers as there are bytes in a
PFM (NVMREGS[1:0] = 10) write block. Refer to Table 5-4 for write latch size.
Since the table latch (TABLAT) is only a single byte, the
TBLWT instruction needs to be executed multiple times
Load Table Pointer register with for each programming operation. The write protection
address of the block being erased state is ignored for this operation. All of the table write
operations will essentially be short writes because only
the holding registers are written. NVMIF is not affected
Select Erase Operation while writing to the holding registers.
(FREE = 1)
After all the holding registers have been written, the
programming operation of that block of memory is
started by configuring the NVMCON1 register for a
Enable Write/Erase Operation
(WREN = 1)
program memory write and performing the long write
sequence.
If the PFM address in the TBLPTR is write-protected or
Disable Interrupts if TBLPTR points to an invalid location, the WR bit is
(GIE = 0) cleared without any effect and the WRERR is signaled.
The long write is necessary for programming the
Unlock Sequence
program memory. CPU operation is suspended during
a long write cycle and resumes when the operation is
(Figure 13-6)
complete. The long write operation completes in one
instruction cycle. When complete, WR is cleared in
hardware and NVMIF is set and an interrupt will occur if
CPU stalls while Erase operation
completes (2 ms typical) NVMIE is also set. The latched data is reset to all ‘1s’.
WREN is not changed.
The internal programming timer controls the write time.
Enable Interrupts The write/erase voltages are generated by an on-chip
(GIE = 1) charge pump, rated to operate over the voltage range of
the device.
Disable Write/Erase Operation

Note: The default value of the holding registers on
(WREN = 0) device Resets and after write operations is
FFh. A write of FFh to a holding register
does not modify that byte. This means that
individual bytes of program memory may
End Erase Operation
be modified, provided that the change does
not attempt to change any bit from a ‘0’ to a
‘1’. When modifying individual bytes, it is
not necessary to load all holding registers
before executing a long write operation.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 13-8: TABLE WRITES TO PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY
TABLAT
Write Register
8 8 8 8
TBLPTR = xxxx00 TBLPTR = xxxx01 TBLPTR = xxxx02 TBLPTR = xxxxYY(1)
Holding Register Holding Register Holding Register Holding Register
Program Memory
Note 1: Refer to Table 5-4 for number of holding registers (e.g., YY = 3F for 64 holding registers).
13.1.6.1 Program Flash Memory Write

Sequence
The sequence of events for programming an internal
program memory location should be:
1. Read appropriate number of bytes into RAM.
Refer to Table 5-4 for Write latch size.
2. Update data values in RAM as necessary.
3. Load Table Pointer register with address being
erased.
4. Execute the block erase procedure.
5. Load Table Pointer register with address of first
byte being written.
6. Write the n-byte block into the holding registers
with auto-increment. Refer to Table 5-4 for Write
latch size.
7. Set REG[1:0] bits to point to program memory.
8. Clear FREE bit and set WREN bit in NVMCON1
register.
9. Disable interrupts.
10. Execute the unlock sequence (see Section
13.1.4 “NVM Unlock Sequence”).
11. WR bit is set in NVMCON1 register.
12. The CPU will stall for the duration of the write
(about 2 ms using internal timer).
13. Re-enable interrupts.
14. Verify the memory (table read).
This procedure will require about 6 ms to update each
write block of memory. An example of the required code
is given in Example 13-4.
Note: Before setting the WR bit, the Table
Pointer address needs to be within the
intended address range of the bytes in the
holding registers.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
EXAMPLE 13-4: WRITING TO PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY
MOVLW D'64’ ; number of bytes in erase block
MOVWF COUNTER
MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH ; point to buffer
MOVWF FSR0H
MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF FSR0L
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; Load TBLPTR with the base
MOVWF TBLPTRH
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF TBLPTRL
READ_BLOCK
TBLRD*+ ; read into TABLAT, and inc
MOVF TABLAT, W ; get data
MOVWF POSTINC0 ; store data
DECFSZ COUNTER ; done?
BRA READ_BLOCK ; repeat
MODIFY_WORD
MOVWF FSR0H
MOVWF FSR0L
MOVLW NEW_DATA_LOW ; update buffer word
MOVWF POSTINC0
MOVLW NEW_DATA_HIGH
MOVWF INDF0
ERASE_BLOCK
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; load TBLPTR with the base
MOVWF TBLPTRH
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF TBLPTRL
BSF NVMCON1, REG1 ; point to Program Flash Memory
BSF NVMCON1, FREE ; enable Erase operation
MOVLW AAh
MOVWF NVMCON2 ; write 0AAh
BSF NVMCON1, WR ; start erase (CPU stall)
TBLRD*- ; dummy read decrement
MOVWF FSR0H
MOVWF FSR0L
WRITE_BUFFER_BACK
MOVLW BlockSize ; number of bytes in holding register
MOVWF COUNTER
MOVLW D’64’/BlockSize ; number of write blocks in 64 bytes
MOVWF COUNTER2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
EXAMPLE 13-4: WRITING TO PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY (CONTINUED)
WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS
MOVF POSTINC0, W ; get low byte of buffer data
MOVWF TABLAT ; present data to table latch
TBLWT+* ; write data, perform a short write
; to internal TBLWT holding register.
DECFSZ COUNTER ; loop until holding registers are full
BRA WRITE_WORD_TO_HREGS
PROGRAM_MEMORY
BSF NVMCON1, REG1 ; point to Program Flash Memory
BCF NVMCON1, FREE ; enable write to memory
MOVLW 0AAh
MOVWF NVMCON2 ; write 0AAh
BSF NVMCON1, WR ; start program (CPU stall)
DCFSZ COUNTER2 ; repeat for remaining write blocks
BRA WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS
BCF NVMCON1, WREN ; disable write to memory

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 13-9: PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY (PFM) WRITE FLOWCHART
Rev. 10-000049B
12/4/2015
Start
Write Operation
Determine number of
words to be written into Load the value to write
PFM. The number of TABLAT
words cannot exceed the
number of words per row
(word_cnt)
Update the word counter

Write Latches to PFM
(word_cnt--)
Select access to PFM

locations using
NVMREG<1:0> bits
Disable Interrupts
(GIE = 0)
Last word to Yes
write ?
Select Row Address
TBLPTR
No
Unlock Sequence(1)
Disable Interrupts
Select Write Operation (GIE = 0)
(FREE = 0)
CPU stalls while Write
operation completes
(2 ms typical)
Load Write Latches Only Unlock Sequence(1)
Enable Write/Erase
Operation (WREN = 1) No delay when writing to Re-enable Interrupts
PFM Latches (GIE = 1)
Disable Write/Erase
Operation (WREN = 0)
Re-enable Interrupts
(GIE = 1)
End
Write Operation
Increment Address
TBLPTR++

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.1.6.2 Write Verify 13.1.6.3 Unexpected Termination of Write
Depending on the application, good programming Operation
practice may dictate that the value written to the If a write is terminated by an unplanned event, such as
memory should be verified against the original value. loss of power or an unexpected Reset, the memory
This should be used in applications where excessive location just programmed should be verified and
writes can stress bits near the specification limit. Since reprogrammed if needed. If the write operation is
program memory is stored as a full page, the stored interrupted by a MCLR Reset or a WDT Time-out Reset
program memory contents are compared with the during normal operation, the WRERR bit will be set
intended data stored in RAM after the last write is which the user can check to decide whether a rewrite
complete. of the location(s) is needed.
FIGURE 13-10: PROGRAM FLASH 13.1.6.4 Protection Against Spurious Writes

MEMORY VERIFY A write sequence is valid only when both the following
FLOWCHART conditions are met, this prevents spurious writes which
Rev. 10-000051B
12/4/2015
might lead to data corruption.
1. The WR bit is gated through the WREN bit. It is
suggested to have the WREN bit cleared at all
times except during memory writes. This
Start prevents memory writes if the WR bit gets set
Verify Operation
accidentally.
2. The NVM unlock sequence must be performed
each time before a write operation.
This routine assumes that the last
row of data written was from an
image saved on RAM. This image
13.2 Device Information Area, Device
will be used to verify the data Configuration Area, User ID,
currently stored in PFM
Device ID and Configuration Word
Access
When REG[1:0] = 0b01 or 0b11 in the NVMCON1
register, the Device Information Area, the Device
Configuration Area, the User IDs, Device ID/
Read Operation(1) Revision ID and Configuration Words can be
accessed. Different access may exist for reads and
writes (see Table 13-1).
13.2.1 Reading Access

NVMDAT = No The user can read from these blocks by setting the
RAM image ?
REG bits to 0b01 or 0b11. The user needs to load the
address into the TBLPTR registers. Executing a
Yes TBLRD after that moves the byte pointed to the
Fail
Verify Operation TABLAT register. The CPU operation is suspended
during the read and resumes after. When read access
is initiated on an address outside the parameters listed
No
Last word ?
in Table 13-1, the TABLAT register is cleared, reading
back ‘0’s.
Yes 13.2.2 Writing Access

The WREN bit in NVMCON1 must be set to enable
writes. This prevents accidental writes to the CONFIG
End words due to errant (unexpected) code execution. The
Verify Operation WREN bit should be kept clear at all times, except
when updating the CONFIG words. The WREN bit is
not cleared by hardware. The WR bit will be inhibited
from being set unless the WREN bit is set.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
The user needs to load the TBLPTR and TABLAT
register with the address and data byte respectively
before executing the write command. An unlock
sequence needs to be followed for writing to the USER
IDs/ DEVICE IDs/CONFIG words (Section 13.1.4,
NVM Unlock Sequence). If WRTC = 0 or if TBLPTR
points an invalid address location (see Table 13-1), WR
bit is cleared without any effect and WRERR is set.
A single CONFIG word byte is written at once and the
operation includes an implicit erase cycle for that byte
(it is not necessary to set FREE). CPU execution is
stalled and at the completion of the write cycle, the WR
bit is cleared in hardware and the NVM Interrupt Flag
bit (NVMIF) is set. The new CONFIG value takes effect
when the CPU resumes operation.
TABLE 13-3: DIA, DCI, USER ID, DEV/REV ID AND CONFIGURATION WORD ACCESS
(REG[1:0] = X1)
Address Function Read Access Write Access
20 0000h-20 000Fh User IDs Yes Yes
30 0000h-30 0009h Configuration Words Yes Yes
3F 0000h-3F 003Fh DIA Yes No
3F FF00h-3F FF09h DCI Yes No
3F FFFCh-3F FFFFh Revision ID/Device ID Yes No

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.3 Data EEPROM Memory 13.3.2 NVMCON1 AND NVMCON2
REGISTERS
The data EEPROM is a nonvolatile memory array,
separate from the data RAM and program memory, Access to the data EEPROM is controlled by two
which is used for long-term storage of program data. It registers: NVMCON1 and NVMCON2. These are the
is not directly mapped in either the register file or same registers which control access to the program
program memory space but is indirectly addressed memory and are used in a similar manner for the data
through the Special Function Registers (SFRs). The EEPROM.
EEPROM is readable and writable during normal The NVMCON1 register (Register 13-1) is the control
operation over the entire VDD range. register for data and program memory access. Control
Five SFRs are used to read and write to the data bits REG[1:0] determine if the access will be to
EEPROM as well as the program memory. They are: program, Data EEPROM Memory or the User IDs,
Configuration bits, Revision ID and Device ID.
• NVMCON1
• NVMCON2 The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation.
On power-up, the WREN bit is clear.
• NVMDAT
• NVMADRL The WRERR bit is set by hardware when the WR bit is
set and cleared when the internal programming timer
• NVMADRH(1)
expires and the write operation is complete.
Note 1: NVMADRH register is not implemented
on PIC18(L)F45/55K42. The WR control bit initiates write operations. The bit
can be set but not cleared by software. It is cleared only
The data EEPROM allows byte read and write. When by hardware at the completion of the write operation.
interfacing to the data memory block, NVMDAT holds
the 8-bit data for read/write and the The NVMIF Interrupt Flag bit of the PIR0 register is set
NVMADRH:NVMADRL register pair holds the address when the write is complete. It must be cleared by
of the EEPROM location being accessed. software.
The EEPROM data memory is rated for high erase/write Control bits, RD and WR, start read and erase/write
cycle endurance. A byte write automatically erases the operations, respectively. These bits are set by firmware
location and writes the new data (erase-before-write). and cleared by hardware at the completion of the
The write time is controlled by an internal programming operation.
timer; it will vary with voltage and temperature as well as
The RD bit cannot be set when accessing program
from chip-to-chip. Refer to the Data EEPROM Memory
memory (REG[1:0] = 0x10). Program memory is read
parameters in Section 44.0 “Electrical
using table read instructions. See Section
Specifications” for limits.
13.1.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes” regarding
table reads.
13.3.1 NVMADRL AND NVMADRH
REGISTERS
The NVMADRH:NVMADRL registers are used to
address the data EEPROM for read and write
operations.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.3.3 READING THE DATA EEPROM 13.3.4 WRITING TO THE DATA EEPROM
MEMORY MEMORY
To read a data memory location, the user must write the To write an EEPROM data location, the address must
address to the NVMADRL and NVMADRH register first be written to the NVMADRL and NVMADRH
pair, clear REG[1:0] control bit in NVMCON1 register to register pair and the data written to the NVMDAT
access Data EEPROM locations and then set control register. The sequence in Example 13-6 must be
bit, RD. The data is available on the very next followed to initiate the write cycle.
instruction cycle; therefore, the NVMDAT register can The write will not begin if NVM Unlock sequence,
be read by the next instruction. NVMDAT will hold this described in Section 13.1.4 “NVM Unlock
value until another read operation, or until it is written to Sequence”, is not exactly followed for each byte. It is
by the user (during a write operation). strongly recommended that interrupts be disabled
The basic process is shown in Example 13-5. during this code segment.
Additionally, the WREN bit in NVMCON1 must be set to
FIGURE 13-11: DATA EEPROM READ enable writes. This mechanism prevents accidental
FLOWCHART writes to data EEPROM due to unexpected code
execution (i.e., runaway programs). The WREN bit
should be kept clear at all times, except when updating
Start Read Operation the EEPROM. The WREN bit is not cleared by
hardware.
Select EEPROM Memory (REG)

After a write sequence has been initiated, NVMCON1,
NVMADRL, NVMADRH and NVMDAT cannot be
modified. The WR bit will be inhibited from being set
unless the WREN bit is set. Both WR and WREN
Select Word Address
(NVMADRH:NVMADRL)
cannot be set with the same instruction.
After a write sequence has been initiated, clearing the
WREN bit will not affect this write cycle. A single Data
Initiate Read Operation EEPROM word is written and the operation includes an
(RD = 1) implicit erase cycle for that word (it is not necessary to
set FREE). CPU execution continues in parallel and at
the completion of the write cycle, the WR bit is cleared
Data read now in in hardware and the NVM Interrupt Flag bit (NVMIF) is
NVMDAT set. The user can either enable this interrupt or poll this
bit. NVMIF must be cleared by software.
End Read Operation

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.3.5 WRITE VERIFY
Depending on the application, good programming
practice may dictate that the value written to the
memory should be verified against the original value.
This should be used in applications where excessive
writes can stress bits near the specification limit.
EXAMPLE 13-5: DATA EEPROM READ

; Data Memory Address to read
CLRF NVMCON1 ; Setup Data EEPROM Access
MOVF EE_ADDRL, W ;
MOVWF NVMADRL ; Setup Address
BSF NVMCON1, RD ; Issue EE Read
MOVF NVMDAT, W ; W = EE_DATA
EXAMPLE 13-6: DATA EEPROM WRITE

; Data Memory Address to write
CLRF NVMCON1 ; Setup Data EEPROM Access
MOVF EE_ADDRL, W ;
MOVWF NVMADRL ; Setup Address
; Data Memory Value to write
MOVF EE_DATA, W ;
MOVWF NVMDAT ;
; Enable writes
BSF NVMCON1, WREN ;
; Disable interrupts
BCF INTCON0, GIE ;
; Required unlock sequence
MOVLW 55h ;
MOVWF NVMCON2 ;
MOVLW AAh ;
MOVWF NVMCON2 ;
; Set WR bit to begin write
BSF NVMCON1, WR ;
; Enable INT
BSF INTCON0, GIE ;
; Wait for interrupt, write done
SLEEP ;
; Disable writes
BCF NVMCON1, WREN ;
13.3.6 OPERATION DURING CODE- 13.3.7 PROTECTION AGAINST SPURIOUS

PROTECT WRITE
Data EEPROM Memory has its own code-protect bits in There are conditions when the user may not want to
Configuration Words. External read and write write to the Data EEPROM Memory. To protect against
operations are disabled if code protection is enabled. spurious EEPROM writes, various mechanisms have
If the Data EEPROM is write-protected or if NVMADR been implemented. On power-up, the WREN bit is
points an invalid address location, the WR bit is cleared cleared. In addition, writes to the EEPROM are blocked
without any effect. WRERR is signaled in this scenario. during the Power-up Timer period (TPWRT).
The unlock sequence and the WREN bit together help
prevent an accidental write during brown-out, power
glitch or software malfunction.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.3.8 ERASING THE DATA EEPROM
MEMORY
Data EEPROM Memory can be erased by writing 0xFF
to all locations in the Data EEPROM Memory that
needs to be erased.
EXAMPLE 13-7: DATA EEPROM REFRESH ROUTINE

CLRF NVMADRL ; Start at address 0
BCF NVMCON1, CFGS ; Set for memory
BCF NVMCON1, EEPGD ; Set for Data EEPROM
BCF INTCON0, GIE ; Disable interrupts
BSF NVMCON1, WREN ; Enable writes
Loop ; Loop to refresh array
BSF NVMCON1, RD ; Read current address
MOVLW 55h ;
MOVWF NVMCON2 ; Write 55h
MOVLW 0AAh ;
MOVWF NVMCOM2 ; Write 0AAh
BSF NVMCON1, WR ; Set WR bit to begin write
BTFSC NVMCON1, WR ; Wait for write to complete
BRA $-2
INCFSZ NVMADRL, F ; Increment address
BRA LOOP ; Not zero, do it again
BCF NVMCON1, WREN ; Disable writes

BSF INTCON0, GIE ; Enable interrupts

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
13.4 Register Definitions: Nonvolatile Memory
REGISTER 13-1: NVMCON1: NONVOLATILE MEMORY CONTROL 1 REGISTER
R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/S/HC-0/0 R/W/HS-x/q R/W-0/0 R/S/HC-0/0 R/S/HC-0/0
REG[1:0] — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit HC = Bit is cleared by hardware
x = Bit is unknown -n = Value at POR S = Bit can be set by software, but not cleared
‘0’ = Bit is cleared ‘1’ = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
bit 7-6 REG[1:0]: NVM Region Selection bit

10 =Access PFM Locations
x1 = Access User IDs, Configuration Bits, DIA, DCI, Rev ID and Device ID
00 = Access Data EEPROM Memory Locations
bit 4 FREE: Program Flash Memory Erase Enable bit(1)
1 = Performs an erase operation on the next WR command
0 = The next WR command performs a write operation
bit 3 WRERR: Write-Reset Error Flag bit(2,3,4)
1 = A write operation was interrupted by a Reset (hardware set),
or WR was written to 0b1 when an invalid address is accessed (Table 9-1, Table 13-1)
or WR was written to 0b1 when REG[1:0] and address do not point to the same region
or WR was written to 0b1 when a write-protected address is accessed (Table 9-2).
0 = All write operations have completed normally
bit 2 WREN: Program/Erase Enable bit
1 = Allows program/erase and refresh cycles
0 = Inhibits programming/erasing and user refresh of NVM
bit 1 WR: Write Control bit(5,6,7)
When REG points to a Data EEPROM Memory location:
1 = Initiates an erase/program cycle at the corresponding Data EEPROM Memory location
When REG points to a PFM location:
1 = Initiates the PFM write operation with data from the holding registers
0 = NVM program/erase operation is complete and inactive
bit 0 RD: Read Control bit(8)
1 = Initiates a read at address pointed by REG and NVMADR, and loads data into NVMDAT
0 = NVM read operation is complete and inactive
Note 1: This can only be used with PFM.

2: This bit is set when WR = 1 and clears when the internal programming timer expires or the write is
completed successfully.
3: Bit must be cleared by the user; hardware will not clear this bit.
4: Bit may be written to ‘1’ by the user in order to implement test sequences.
5: This bit can only be set by following the unlock sequence of Section 13.1.4 “NVM Unlock Sequence”.
6: Operations are self-timed and the WR bit is cleared by hardware when complete.
7: Once a write operation is initiated, setting this bit to zero will have no effect.
8: The bit can only be set in software. The bit is cleared by hardware when the operation is complete.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 13-2: NVMCON2: NONVOLATILE MEMORY CONTROL 2 REGISTER

NVMCON2[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
x = Bit is unknown ‘0’ = Bit is cleared ‘1’ = Bit is set
-n = Value at POR
bit 7-0 NVMCON2[7:0]:

Refer to Section 13.1.4 “NVM Unlock Sequence”.
Note 1: This register always reads zeros, regardless of data written.
Register 13-3: NVMADRL: Data EEPROM Memory Address Low

ADR[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
-n = Value at POR
bit 7-0 ADR[7:0]: EEPROM Read Address bits
REGISTER 13-4: NVMADRH: DATA EEPROM MEMORY ADDRESS HIGH(1)

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — ADR[9:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
-n = Value at POR

bit 1-0 ADR[9:8]: EEPROM Read Address bits
Note 1: The NVMADRH register is not implemented on PIC18(L)F45/55K42.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 13-5: NVMDAT: DATA EEPROM MEMORY DATA

DAT[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
-n = Value at POR
bit 7-0 DAT[7:0]: The value of the data memory word returned from NVMADR after a Read command, or the
data written by a Write command.
TABLE 13-4: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH NONVOLATILE MEMORY

CONTROL
Register
on Page
NVMCON1 REG[1:0] — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD 210
NVMCON2 Unlock Pattern 211
NVMADRL NVMADR[7:0] 211
(1)
NVMADRH — — — — — — NVMADR[9:8] 211
NVMDAT NVMDAT[7:0] 212
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used during EEPROM access.
*Page provides register information.
Note 1: The NVMADRH register is not implemented on PIC18(L)F45/55K42.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
14.0 CYCLIC REDUNDANCY CHECK
(CRC) MODULE WITH MEMORY
SCANNER
The Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) module provides
a software-configurable hardware-implemented CRC
checksum generator. This module includes the following
features:
• Any standard CRC up to 16 bits can be used
• Configurable Polynomial
• Any seed value up to 16 bits can be used
• Standard and reversed bit order available
• Augmented zeros can be added automatically or
by the user
• Memory scanner for fast CRC calculations on
program/Data EEPROM memory user data
• Software loadable data registers for
communication CRC’s
14.1 CRC Module Overview

The CRC module provides a means for calculating a
check value of program/Data EEPROM memory. The
CRC module is coupled with a memory scanner for
faster CRC calculations. The memory scanner can
automatically provide data to the CRC module. The
CRC module can also be operated by directly writing
data to SFRs, without using a scanner.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
14.2 CRC Functional Overview
The CRC module can be used to detect bit errors in the
program memory using the built-in memory scanner or
through user input RAM memory. The CRC module can
accept up to a 16-bit polynomial with up to a 16-bit seed
value. A CRC calculated check value (or checksum)
will then be generated into the CRCACC[15:0] registers
for user storage. The CRC module uses an XOR shift
register implementation to perform the polynomial
division required for the CRC calculation.
EXAMPLE 14-1: CRC EXAMPLE

Rev. 10-000206A
1/8/2014
CRC-16-ANSI
x16 + x15 + x2 + 1 (17 bits)
Standard 16-bit representation = 0x8005
CRCXORH = 0b10000000
CRCXORL = 0b0000010- (1)
Data Sequence:
0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x88
DLEN = 0b0111
PLEN = 0b1111
Data entered into the CRC:

SHIFTM = 0:
01010101 01100110 01110111 10001000
SHIFTM = 1:
10101010 01100110 11101110 00010001
Check Value (ACCM = 1):

SHIFTM = 0: 0x32D6
CRCACCH = 0b00110010
CRCACCL = 0b11010110
SHIFTM = 1: 0x6BA2
CRCACCH = 0b01101011
CRCACCL = 0b10100010
Note 1: Bit 0 is unimplemented. The LSb of any

CRC polynomial is always ‘1’ and will always
be treated as a ‘1’ by the CRC for calculating
the CRC check value. This bit will be read in
software as a ‘0’.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
14.3 CRC Polynomial Implementation The X16 and X0 = 1 terms are the MSb and LSb
controlled by hardware. The X15 and X2 terms are
Any polynomial can be used. The polynomial and specified by setting the corresponding CRCXOR[15:0]
accumulator sizes are determined by the PLEN[3:0] bits with the value of ‘0x8004’. The actual value is
bits. For an n-bit accumulator, PLEN = n-1 and the ‘0x8005’ because the hardware sets the LSb to 1.
corresponding polynomial is n+1 bits. Therefore the However, the LSb of the CRCXORL register is
accumulator can be any size up to 16 bits with a unimplemented and always reads as ‘0’. Refer to
corresponding polynomial up to 17 bits. The MSb and Example 14-1.
LSb of the polynomial are always ‘1’ which is forced by
hardware. All polynomial bits between the MSb and
LSb are specified by the CRCXOR registers. For
example, when using CRC-16-ANSI, the polynomial is
defined as X16+X15+X2+1.
EXAMPLE 14-2: CRC LFSR EXAMPLE
Rev. 10-000207A
Linear Feedback Shift Register for CRC-16-ANSI 5/27/2014
x16 + x15 + x2 + 1
Data in
Augmentation Mode ON
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Data in
Augmentation Mode OFF
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
14.4 CRC Data Sources 14.4.1 CRC FROM USER DATA

Data can be input to the CRC module in two ways: To use the CRC module on data input from the user, the
user must write the data to the CRCDAT registers. The
- User data using the CRCDAT registers data from the CRCDAT registers will be latched into the
(CRCDATH and CRCDATL) shift registers on any write to the CRCDATL register.
- Program memory using the Program Memory
Scanner 14.4.2 CRC FROM FLASH
To set the number of bits of data, up to 16 bits, the To use the CRC module on data located in Program
DLEN bits of CRCCON1 must be set accordingly. Only memory, the user can initialize the Program Memory
data bits in CRCDAT registers up to DLEN will be used, Scanner as defined in Section 14.8, Scanner Module
other data bits in CRCDAT registers will be ignored. Overview.
Data is moved into the CRCSHIFT as an intermediate
to calculate the check value located in the CRCACC
registers.
The SHIFTM bit is used to determine the bit order of the
data being shifted into the accumulator. If SHIFTM is
not set, the data will be shifted in MSb first (Big Endian).
The value of DLEN will determine the MSb. If SHIFTM
bit is set, the data will be shifted into the accumulator in
reversed order, LSb first (Little Endian).
The CRC module can be seeded with an initial value by
setting the CRCACC[15:0] registers to the appropriate
value before beginning the CRC.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
14.5 CRC Check Value 14.7 Configuring the CRC
The CRC check value will be located in the CRCACC The following steps illustrate how to properly configure
registers after the CRC calculation has finished. The the CRC.
check value will depend on two mode settings of the 1. Determine if the automatic program memory
CRCCON0 register: ACCM and SHIFTM. When the scan will be used with the scanner or manual
ACCM bit is set, the CRC module augments the data calculation through the SFR interface and
with a number of zeros equal to the length of the perform the actions specified in Section
polynomial to align the final check value. When the 14.4 “CRC Data Sources”, depending on which
ACCM bit is not set, the CRC will stop at the end of the decision was made.
data. A number of zeros equal to the length of the
2. If desired, seed a starting CRC value into the
polynomial can then be entered into CRCDAT to find
CRCACCH/L registers.
the same check value as augmented mode.
Alternatively, the expected check value can be entered 3. Program the CRCXORH/L registers with the
at this point to make the final result equal ‘0’. desired generator polynomial.
4. Program the DLEN[3:0] bits of the CRCCON1
When the CRC check value is computed with the
register with the length of the data word - 1 (refer
SHIFTM bit set, selecting LSb first, and the ACCM bit
to Example 14-1). This determines how many
is also set, then the final value in the CRCACC
times the shifter will shift into the accumulator for
registers will be reversed such that the LSb will be in
each data word.
the MSb position and vice versa. This is the expected
check value in bit reversed form. If you are creating a 5. Program the PLEN[3:0] bits of the CRCCON1
check value to be appended to a data stream, then a bit register with the length of the polynomial -2
reversal must be performed on the final value to (refer to Example 14-1).
achieve the correct checksum. You can use the CRC to 6. Determine whether shifting in trailing zeros is
do this reversal by the following method: desired and set the ACCM bit of the CRCCON0
register appropriately.
• Save the CRCACC value in user RAM space
• Clear the CRCACC registers 7. Likewise, determine whether the MSb or LSb
• Clear the CRCXOR registers should be shifted first and write the SHIFTM bit
• Write the saved CRCACC value to the CRCDAT of the CRCCON0 register appropriately.
input. 8. Write the GO bit of the CRCCON0 register to
begin the shifting process.
The properly oriented check value will be in the
CRCACC registers as the result. 9a. If manual SFR entry is used, monitor the FULL bit
of the CRCCON0 register. When FULL = 0,
another word of data can be written to the
14.6 CRC Interrupt
CRCDATH/L registers, keeping in mind that
The CRC will generate an interrupt when the BUSY bit CRCDATH should be written first if the data has
transitions from 1 to 0. The CRCIF Interrupt Flag is set more than eight bits, as the shifter will begin upon
every time the BUSY bit transitions, regardless of the CRCDATL register being written.
whether or not the CRC interrupt is enabled. The 9b. If the scanner is used, the scanner will
CRCIF bit can only be cleared in software. automatically load words into the CRCDATH/L
registers as needed, as long as the GO bit is set.
10a.If manual entry is used, monitor the CRCIF (and
BUSY bit to determine when the completed
CRC calculation can be read from CRCACCH/L
registers.
10b.If using the memory scanner, monitor the
SCANIF (or the GO bit) for the scanner to finish
pushing information into the CRCDAT registers.
After the scanner is completed, monitor the
BUSY bit to determine that the CRC has been
completed and the check value can be read
from the CRCACC registers. If both the interrupt
flags are set and the BUSY and GO bits are
cleared, the completed CRC calculation can be
read from the CRCACCH/L registers.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
14.8 Scanner Module Overview 14.11 Scanning Modes
The Scanner allows segments of the Program Flash The interaction of the scanner with the system
Memory or Data EEPROM, to be read out (scanned) to operation is controlled by the priority selection in the
the CRC Peripheral. The Scanner module interacts System Arbiter (see Section 3.2 “Memory Access
with the CRC module and supplies it data one word at Scheme”). Additionally, BURSTMD and TRIGEN also
a time. Data is fetched from the address range defined determine the operation of the Scanner.
by SCANLADR registers up to the SCANHADR
registers. 14.11.1 TRIGEN = 0, BURSTMD = 0
The Scanner begins operation when the SGO bit is set In this case, the memory access request is granted to
(SCANCON0 Register) and ends when either SGO is the scanner if no other higher priority source is
cleared by the user or when SCANLADR increments requesting access.
past SCANHADR. The SGO bit is also cleared by All sources with lower priority than the scanner will get
clearing the EN bit (CRCCON0 register). the memory access cycles that are not utilized by the
scanner.
14.9 Configuring the Scanner
14.11.2 TRIGEN = 1, BURSTMD = 0
The scanner module may be used in conjunction with
the CRC module to perform a CRC calculation over a In this case, the memory access request is generated
range of program memory or Data EEPROM when the CRC module is ready to accept.
addresses. In order to set up the scanner to work with The memory access request is granted to the scanner
the CRC, perform the following steps: if no other higher priority source is requesting access.
1. Set up the CRC module (See Section 14.7 All sources with lower priority than the scanner will get
“Configuring the CRC”) and enable the the memory access cycles that are not utilized by the
Scanner module by setting the EN bit in the scanner.
SCANCON0 register. The memory access request is granted to the scanner
2. Choose which memory region the Scanner if no other higher priority source is requesting access.
module should operate on and set the MREG bit All sources with lower priority than the scanner will get
of the SCANCON0 register appropriately.
the memory access cycles that are not utilized by the
3. If trigger is used for scanner operation, set the scanner.
TRIGEN bit of the SCANCON0 register and
select the trigger source using SCANTRIG 14.11.3 TRIGEN = x, BURSTMD = 1
register. Select the trigger source using
In this case, the memory access is always requested
SCANTRIG register and then set the TRIGEN
by the scanner.
bit of the SCANCON0 register. See Table 14-1
for Scanner Operation. The memory access request is granted to the scanner
4. If Burst mode of operation is desired, set the if no other higher priority source is requesting access.
BURSTMD bit (SCANCON0 register). See The memory access cycles will not be granted to lower
Table 14-1 for Scanner Operation. priority sources than the scanner until it completes
operation i.e. SGO = 0 (SCANCON0 register)
5. Set the SCANLADRL/H/U and SCANHADRL/H/
U registers with the beginning and ending
locations in memory that are to be scanned.
Note: If TRIGEN = 1 and BURSTMD = 1, the
6. Select the priority level for the Scanner module user should ensure that the trigger source
(See Section 3.1 “System Arbitration”) and is active for the Scanner operation to
lock the priorities (See Section 3.1.1 “Priority complete.
Lock”).
7. Both CRCEN and CRCGO bits must be enabled
to use the scanner. Setting the SGO bit will start
the scanner operation.
14.10 Scanner Interrupt

The scanner will trigger an interrupt when the
SCANLADR increments past SCANHADR. The
SCANIF bit can only be cleared in software.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
14.12 Register Definitions: CRC and Scanner Control
Long bit name prefixes for the CRC and Scanner
peripherals are shown below. Refer to Section

CRC CRC
REGISTER 14-1: CRCCON0: CRC CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R-0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R-0
EN GO BUSY ACCM — — SHIFTM FULL
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: CRC Enable bit

1 = CRC module is enabled
0 = CRC is disabled
bit 6 GO: CRC Go bit
1 = Start CRC serial shifter
0 = CRC serial shifter turned off
bit 5 BUSY: CRC Busy bit
1 = Shifting in progress or pending
0 = All valid bits in shifter have been shifted into accumulator
bit 4 ACCM: Accumulator Mode bit
1 = Data is concatenated with zeros
0 = Data is not concatenated with zeros
bit 1 SHIFTM: Shift Mode bit
1 = Shift right (LSb)
0 = Shift left (MSb)
bit 0 FULL: Data Path Full Indicator bit
1 = CRCDATH/L registers are full
0 = CRCDATH/L registers have shifted their data into the shifter
REGISTER 14-2: CRCCON1: CRC CONTROL REGISTER 1

DLEN[3:0] PLEN[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-4 DLEN[3:0]: Data Length bits

Denotes the length of the data word -1 (See Example 14-1)
bit 3-0 PLEN[3:0]: Polynomial Length bits
Denotes the length of the polynomial -1 (See Example 14-1)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 14-3: CRCDATH: CRC DATA HIGH BYTE REGISTER

R/W-xx R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x
DATA[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 DATA[15:8]: CRC Input/Output Data bits
REGISTER 14-4: CRCDATL: CRC DATA LOW BYTE REGISTER

R/W-xx R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x
DATA[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 DATA[7:0]: CRC Input/Output Data bits

Writing to this register fills the shifter.
REGISTER 14-5: CRCACCH: CRC ACCUMULATOR HIGH BYTE REGISTER

ACC[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ACC[15:8]: CRC Accumulator Register bits

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 14-6: CRCACCL: CRC ACCUMULATOR LOW BYTE REGISTER

ACC[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ACC[7:0]: CRC Accumulator Register bits
REGISTER 14-7: CRCSHIFTH: CRC SHIFT HIGH BYTE REGISTER

R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
SHIFT[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SHIFT[15:8]: CRC Shifter Register bits

Reading from this register reads the CRC Shifter.
REGISTER 14-8: CRCSHIFTL: CRC SHIFT LOW BYTE REGISTER

R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
SHIFT[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SHIFT[7:0]: CRC Shifter Register bits

Reading from this register reads the CRC Shifter.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 14-9: CRCXORH: CRC XOR HIGH BYTE REGISTER

R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x
X[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 X[15:8]: XOR of Polynomial Term Xn Enable bits
REGISTER 14-10: CRCXORL: CRC XOR LOW BYTE REGISTER

R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x R/W-x/x U-1
X[7:1] —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit
bit 7-1 X[7:1]: XOR of Polynomial Term Xn Enable bits


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 14-11: SCANCON0: SCANNER ACCESS CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W/HC-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R-0/0
EN TRIGEN SGO — — MREG BURSTMD BUSY
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: Scanner Enable bit(1)

1 = Scanner is enabled
0 = Scanner is disabled
bit 6 TRIGEN: Scanner Trigger Enable bit(2)
1 = Scanner trigger is enabled
0 = Scanner trigger is disabled
Refer Table 14-1.
bit 5 SGO: Scanner GO bit(3, 4)
1 = When the CRC is ready, the Memory region set by the MREG bit will be accessed and data is passed
to the CRC peripheral.
0 = Scanner operations will not occur
bit 2 MREG: Scanner Memory Region Select bit(2)
1 = Scanner address points to Data EEPROM
0 = Scanner address points to Program Flash Memory
bit 1 BURSTMD: Scanner Burst Mode bit
1 = Memory access request to the CPU Arbiter is always true
0 = Memory access request to the CPU Arbiter is dependent on the CRC request and Trigger
Refer Table 14-1.
bit 0 BUSY: Scanner Busy Indicator bit
1 = Scanner cycle is in process
0 = Scanner cycle is compete (or never started)
Note 1: Setting EN = 1 (SCANCON0 register) does not affect any other register content.
2: Scanner trigger selection can be set using the SCANTRIG register.
3: This bit can be cleared in software. It is cleared in hardware when LADR>HADR (and a data cycle is not
occurring) or when CRCGO = 0 (CRCCON0 register).
4: CRCEN and CRCGO bits (CRCCON0 register) must be set before setting the SGO bit.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 14-1: SCANNER OPERATING MODES(1)

TRIGEN BURSTMD Scanner Operation
0 0 Memory access is requested when the CRC module is ready to accept data; the
request is granted if no other higher priority source request is pending.
1 0 Memory access is requested when the CRC module is ready to accept data and trigger
selection is true; the request is granted if no other higher priority source request is
pending.
x 1 Memory access is always requested, the request is granted if no other higher priority
source request is pending.
Note 1: See Section 3.1 “System Arbitration” for Priority selection and Section 3.2 “Memory Access Scheme” for
Memory Access Scheme.
REGISTER 14-12: SCANLADRU: SCAN LOW ADDRESS UPPER BYTE REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — LADR[21:16] (1,2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 LADR[21:16]: Scan Start/Current Address bits(1,2)
Upper bits of the current address to be fetched from, value increments on each fetch of memory.
Note 1: Registers SCANLADRU/H/L form a 22-bit value, but are not guarded for atomic or asynchronous access;
registers should only be read or written while SGO = 0 (SCANCON0 register).
2: While SGO = 1 (SCANCON0 register), writing to this register is ignored.
REGISTER 14-13: SCANLADRH: SCAN LOW ADDRESS HIGH BYTE REGISTER

LADR[15:8](1, 2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 LADR[15:8]: Scan Start/Current Address bits(1, 2)

Most Significant bits of the current address to be fetched from, value increments on each fetch of
memory.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 14-14: SCANLADRL: SCAN LOW ADDRESS LOW BYTE REGISTER

LADR[7:0](1, 2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 LADR[7:0]: Scan Start/Current Address bits(1, 2)

Least Significant bits of the current address to be fetched from, value increments on each fetch of
memory
REGISTER 14-15: SCANHADRU: SCAN HIGH ADDRESS UPPER BYTE REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1
— — HADR[21:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 HADR[21:16]: Scan End Address bits(1, 2)
Upper bits of the address at the end of the designated scan
Note 1: Registers SCANHADRU/H/L form a 22-bit value but are not guarded for atomic or asynchronous access;

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 14-16: SCANHADRH: SCAN HIGH ADDRESS HIGH BYTE REGISTER

HADR[15:8](1, 2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

Most Significant bits of the address at the end of the designated scan
Note 1: Registers SCANHADRU/H/L form a 22-bit value, but are not guarded for atomic or asynchronous access;
REGISTER 14-17: SCANHADRL: SCAN HIGH ADDRESS LOW BYTE REGISTER

(1, 2)
HADR[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

Least Significant bits of the address at the end of the designated scan
Note 1: Registers SCANHADRU/H/L form a 22-bit value, but are not guarded for atomic or asynchronous access; registers
should only be read or written while SGO = 0 (SCANCON0 register).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 14-18: SCANTRIG: SCAN TRIGGER SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — TSEL[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3-0 TSEL[3:0]: Scanner Data Trigger Input Selection bits
1111 = Reserved
•
•
•
1010 = Reserved
1001 = SMT1_output
1000 = TMR6_postscaled
0111 = TMR5_output
0101 = TMR3_output
0011 = TMR1_output
0010 = TMR0_output
0001 = CLKREF_output
0000 = LFINTOSC

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 14-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CRC

Register
on Page
CRCACCH ACC[15:8] 219
CRCACCL ACC[7:0] 220
CRCCON0 EN GO BUSY ACCM — — SHIFTM FULL 218
CRCCON1 DLEN[3:0] PLEN[3:0] 218
CRCDATH DATA[15:8] 219
CRCDATL DATA[7:0] 219
CRCSHIFTH SHIFT[15:8] 220
CRCSHIFTL SHIFT[7:0] 220
CRCXORH X[15:8] 221
CRCXORL X[7:1] — 221
SCANCON0 EN TRIGEN SGO — — MREG BURSTMD BUSY 222
SCANHADRU — — HADR[21:16] 224
SCANHADRH HADR[15:8] 225
SCANHADRL HADR[7:0] 225
SCANLADRU — — LADR[21:16] 223
SCANLADRH LADR[15:8] 223
SCANLADRL LADR[7:0] 224
SCANTRIG — — — — TSEL[3:0] 226
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for the CRC module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.0 DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS 15.2 DMA Registers
(DMA) The operation of the DMA module has the following
registers:
15.1 Introduction • Control registers (DMAxCON0, DMAxCON1)
The Direct Memory Access (DMA) module is designed • Data buffer register (DMAxBUF)
to service data transfers between different memory • Source Start Address Register (DMAxSSAU:H:L)
regions directly without intervention from the CPU. By • Source Pointer Register (DMAxSPTRU:H:L)
eliminating the need for CPU-intensive management of
• Source Message Size Register (DMAxSSZH:L)
handling interrupts intended for data transfers, the CPU
now can spend more time on other tasks. • Source Count Register (DMAxSCNTH:L)
• Destination Start Address Register
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 family has two
(DMAxDSAH:L)
DMA modules which can be independently
programmed to transfer data between different • Destination Pointer Register (DMAxDPTRH:L)
memory locations, move different data sizes, and use a • Destination Message Size Register
wide range of hardware triggers to initiate transfers. (DMAxDSZH:L)
The two DMA registers can even be programmed to • Destination Count Register (DMAxDCNTH:L)
work together, in order to carry out more complex data • Start Interrupt Request Source Register
transfers without CPU overhead. (DMAxSIRQ)
Key features of the DMA module include: • Abort Interrupt Request Source Register
• Support access to the following memory regions: (DMAxAIRQ)
- GPR and SFR space (R/W) These registers are detailed in Section 15.13 “Regis-
- Program Flash Memory (R only) ter definitions: DMA”.
- Data EEPROM Memory (R only)
• Programmable priority between the DMA and
CPU Operations. Refer to Section 3.1 “System
Arbitration” for details.
• Programmable Source and Destination address
modes
- Fixed address
- Post-increment address
- Post-decrement address
• Programmable Source and Destination sizes
• Source and destination pointer register,
dynamically updated and reloadable
• Source and destination count register,
dynamically updated and reloadable
• Programmable auto-stop based on Source or
Destination counter
• Software triggered transfers
• Multiple user selectable sources for hardware
triggered transfers
• Multiple user selectable sources for aborting DMA
transfers

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.3 DMA Organization
The DMA module on the K42 family of devices is
designed to move data by using the existing Instruction
Bus[16] and Data Bus[8] without the need for any dual-
porting of memory or peripheral systems (Figure 15-1).
The DMA accesses the required bus when it has been
granted to by the System Arbiter.
FIGURE 15-1: DMA FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

Rev. 10-000 274A
11/11/201 6
Configure DMA
Module
EN = 1
DMA Source/
Destination Pointers/
Counters are loaded
SIRQEN = 1 & N
Trigger?
DGO = 1
N
Bubble?
Y
DMAxBUF = &DMAxSPTR
Source Read
XIP = 1
N
Bubble?
Y
&DMAxDPTR = DMABUF
Destination Write
XIP = 0
Y Reload
DMAxSCNTIF
DMAxSCNT = 0 DMAxSCNT & DGO = 0
=1
DMAxSPTR
N
Update Y
DMAxSSA, SIRQEN = 0 SSTP = 1
DMAxSCNT
Y Reload
DMAxDCNTIF
DMAxDCNT = 0 DMAxDCNT & DGO = 0
=1
DMAxDPTR
N
Y
Update AIRQEN = 0 DSTP = 1
DMAxDSA,
DMAxDCNT
N
N
DGO = 0
End Process

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Depending on the priority of the DMA with respect to
CPU execution (Refer to Section 3.2 “Memory TABLE 15-1: DMA MEMORY ACCESS
Access Scheme” for more information), the DMA
Controller can move data through two methods: Read Source Write Destination
• Stalling the CPU execution until it has completed Program Flash Memory GPR
its transfers (DMA has higher priority over the Program Flash Memory SFR
CPU in this mode of operation) Data EE GPR
• Utilizing unused CPU cycles for DMA transfers
(CPU has higher priority over the DMA in this Data EE SFR
mode of operation). Unused CPU cycles are GPR GPR
referred to as bubbles which are instruction cycles SFR GPR
available for use by the DMA to perform read and
GPR SFR
write operations. In this way, the effective
bandwidth for handling data is increased; at the SFR SFR
same time, DMA operations can proceed without
causing a processor stall.
Note: Even though the DMA module has access
to all memory and peripherals that are
15.4 DMA Interface
also available to the CPU, it is
The DMA module transfers data from the source to the recommended that the DMA does not
destination one byte at a time, this smallest data access any register that is part of the
movement is called a DMA data transaction. A DMA System arbitration. The DMA, as a system
Message refers to one or more DMA data transactions. arbitration client should not be read or
written by itself or by another DMA
Each DMA data transaction consists of two separate
instantiation.
actions:
• Reading the Source Address Memory and storing The following sections discuss the various control
the value in the DMA Buffer register interfaces required for DMA data transfers.
• Writing the contents of the DMA Buffer register to
15.4.1 DMA ADDRESSING
the Destination Address Memory
The start addresses for the source read and destination
Note: DMA data movement is a two-cycle
write operations are set using the DMAxSSA [21:0] and
operation.
DMAxDSA [15:0] registers, respectively.
The XIP bit (DMAxCON0 register) is a status bit to When the DMA Message transfers are in progress, the
indicate whether or not the data in the DMAxBUF DMAxSPTR [21:0] and DMAxDPTR [15:0] registers
register has been written to the destination address. If contain the current address pointers for each source
the bit is set then data is waiting to be written to the read and destination write operation, these registers
destination. If clear, it means that either data has been are modified after each transaction based on the
written to the destination or that no source read has Address mode selection bits.
occurred.
The SMODE and DMODE bits in the DMAxCON1
The DMA has read access to PFM, Data EEPROM, control register determine the address modes of
and SFR/GPR space, and write access to SFR/GPR operation by controlling how the DMAxSPTR [21:0] and
space. Based on these memory access capabilities, DMAxDPTR [15:0] bits are updated after every DMA
the DMA can support the following memory data transaction combination (Figure 15-2).
transactions:
Each address can be separately configured to:
• Remain unchanged
• Increment by 1
• Decrement by 1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 15-2: DMA POINTERS BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000272A
3/15/2018
DMAxSSA[21:0] DMAxDSA[15:0]
DMAxSPTR[21:0] DMAxDPTR[15:0]
+1 +1
0 0
-1 -1
SMODE<1:0> DMODE<1:0>
The DMA can initiate data transfers from the PFM, Data
EEPROM or SFR/GPR Space. The SMR[1:0] bits in the
DMAxCON1 register are used to select the type of
memory being pointed to by the Source Address
Pointer. The SMR[1.0] bits are required because the
PFM and SFR/GPR spaces have overlapping
addresses that do not allow the specified address to
uniquely define the memory location to be accessed.
Note 1: For proper memory read access to occur,
the combination of address and space
selection must be valid.
2: The destination does not have space
selection bits because it can only write to
the SFR/GPR space.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.4.2 DMA MESSAGE SIZE/COUNTERS
A transaction is the transfer of one byte. A message
consists of one or more transactions. A complete DMA
process consists of one or more messages. The size
registers determine how many transactions are in a
message. The DMAxSSZ registers determine the
source size and DMAxDSZ registers determine the
destination size.
When a DMA transfer is initiated, the size registers are
copied to corresponding counter registers that control
the duration of the message. The DMAxSCNT registers
count the source transactions and the DMAxDCNT
registers count the destination transactions. Both are
simultaneously decremented by one after each
transaction.
A message is started by setting the DGO bit of the
DMAxCON0 register and terminates when the smaller
of the two counters reaches zero.
When either counter reaches zero the DGO bit is
cleared and the counter and pointer registers are
immediately reloaded with the corresponding size and
address data. If the other counter did not reach zero
then the next message will continue with the count and
address corresponding to that register.
When the source and destination size registers are not
equal, then the ratio of the largest to the smallest size
determines how many messages are in the DMA
process. For example, when the destination size is 6
and the source size is 2, then each message will
consist of two transactions and the complete DMA
process will consist of three messages. When the
larger size is not an even integer of the smaller size,
then the last message in the process will terminate
early when the larger count reaches zero. In that case,
the larger counter will reset and the smaller counter will
have a remainder skewing any subsequent messages
by that amount.
Note: Reading the DMAxSCNT or DMAxDCNT
registers will never return zero. When
either register is decremented from ‘1’ it is
immediately reloaded from the
corresponding size register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 15-3: DMA COUNTERS BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000273A
8/8/2016
DMAxSSIZ[11:0] DMAxDSIZ[11:0]
DMAxSCNT[11:0] DMAxDCNT[11:0]
1 1
Table 15-2 has a few examples of configuring DMA

Message sizes.
TABLE 15-2: EXAMPLE MESSAGE SIZE TABLE

Operation Example SCNT DCNT Comments
Read from single SFR N equals the number of bytes desired in the
U1RXB 1 N
location to RAM destination buffer. N >= 1.
Write to single SFR location N equals the number of bytes desired in the
U1TXB N 1
from RAM source buffer. N >= 1.
N equals the number of ADC results to be
ADRES[H:L] 2 2*N
stored in memory. N>= 1
Read from multiple SFR N equals the number of TMR1 Acquisition
TMR1[H:L] 2 2*N
location results to be stored in memory. N>= 1
N equals the number of Capture Pulse Width
SMT1CPR[U:H:L] 3 3*N
measurements to be stored in memory. N>= 1
N equals the number of PWM duty cycle val-
PWMDC[H:L] 2*N 2
Write to Multiple SFR regis- ues to be loaded from a memory table. N>= 1
ters Using the DMA to transfer a complete ADC
All ADC registers N*31 31
context from RAM to the ADC registers.N>= 1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.5 DMA Message Transfers
Once the Enable bit is set to start DMA message
transfers, the Source/Destination pointer and counter
registers are initialized to the conditions shown in
Table 15-3.
TABLE 15-3: DMA INITIAL CONDITIONS
Register Value loaded
DMAxSPTR[21:0] DMAxSSA[21:0]
DMAxSCNT[11:0] DMAxSSZ[11:0]
DMAxDPTR[15:0] DMAxDSA[15:0]
DMAxDCNT[11:0] DMAxDSZ[11:0]
During the DMA Operation after each transaction,
Table 15-4 and Table 15-5 indicate how the Source/
Destination pointer and counter registers are modified.
TABLE 15-4: DMA SOURCE POINTER/COUNTER DURING OPERATION

Register Modified Source Counter/Pointer Value
DMAxSCNT[11:0] != 1 DMAxSCNT = DMAxSCNT -1
SMODE = 00: DMAxSPTR = DMAxSPTR
SMODE = 01: DMAxSPTR = DMAxSPTR + 1
SMODE = 10: DMAxSPTR = DMAxSPTR - 1
DMAxSCNT[11:0] == 1 DMAxSCNT = DMAxSSZ
DMAxSPTR = DMAxSSA
TABLE 15-5: DMA DESTINATION POINTER/COUNTER DURING OPERATION

Register Modified Destination Counter/Pointer Value
DMAxDCNT[11:0]!= 1 DMAxDCNT = DMAxDCNT -1
DMODE = 00: DMAxDPTR = DMAxDPTR
DMODE = 01: DMAxDPTR = DMAxDPTR + 1
DMODE = 10: DMAxDPTR = DMAxDPTR - 1
DMAxDCNT[11:0] == 1 DMAxDCNT = DMAxDSZ
DMAxDPTR = DMAxDSA
The following sections discuss how to initiate and 15.5.1.1 User Software Control
terminate DMA transfers.
Software starts or stops DMA transaction by setting/
clearing the DGO bit. The DGO bit is also used to
15.5.1 STARTING DMA MESSAGE
indicate whether a DMA hardware trigger has been
TRANSFERS
received and a message is in progress.
The DMA can initiate data transactions by either of the
following two conditions: Note 1: Software start can only occur if the EN bit
(DMAxCON0) is set.
1. User software control
2: If the CPU writes to the DGO bit while it is
2. Hardware trigger, SIRQ
already set, there is no effect on the
system, the DMA will continue to operate
normally.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.5.1.2 Hardware Trigger, SIRQ 15.5.2.3 Source Count Reload
A Hardware trigger is an interrupt request from another A DMA message is considered to be complete when
module sent to the DMA with the purpose of starting a the Source count register is decremented from 1 and
DMA message. The DMA start trigger source is user then reloaded (i.e., once the last byte from either the
selectable using the DMAxSIRQ register. source read or destination write has occurred). When
The SIRQEN bit (DMAxCON0 register) is used to the SSTP bit is set (DMAxCON1 register) and the
enable sampling of external interrupt triggers by which source count register is reloaded, then further message
a DMA transfer can be started. When set, the DMA will transfer is stopped.
sample the selected Interrupt source and when
15.5.2.4 Destination Count Reload
cleared, the DMA will ignore the selected Interrupt
source. Clearing SIRQEN does not stop a DMA A DMA message is considered to be complete when
transaction currently in progress, it only stops more the Destination count register is decremented from 1
hardware request signals from being received. and then reloaded (i.e., once the last byte from either
the source read or destination write has occurred).
15.5.2 STOPPING DMA MESSAGE When the DSTP bit is set (DMAxCON1) and the
TRANSFERS destination count register is reloaded then further
message transfer is stopped.
The DMA controller can stop data transactions by
either of the following two conditions: Note: Reading the DMAxSCNT or DMAxDCNT
1. Clearing the DGO bit registers will never return zero. When
either register is decremented from ‘1’ it is
2. Hardware trigger, AIRQ
immediately reloaded from the
3. Source Count reload corresponding size register.
4. Destination Count reload
5. Clearing the Enable bit 15.5.2.5 Clearing the Enable bit
If the User clears the EN bit, the message will be
15.5.2.1 User Software Control
stopped and the DMA will return to its default
If the user clears the DGO bit, the message will be configuration. This is also referred to as a hard-stop as
stopped and the DMA will remain in the current the DMA cannot resume operation from where it was
configuration. stopped.
For example, if the user clears the DGO bit after source Note: After the DMA message transfer is
data has been read but before it is written to the stopped, it requires an extra instruction
destination, then the data in DMAxBUF will not reach its cycle before the Stop condition takes
destination. effect. Thus, after the Stop condition has
This is also referred to as a soft-stop as the operation occurred, a Source read or a Destination
can resume if desired by setting DGO bit again. write can occur depending on the Source
or Destination Bus availability.
15.5.2.2 Hardware Trigger, AIRQ
The AIRQEN bit (DMAxCON0 register) is used to 15.5.3 DISABLE DMA MESSAGES
enable sampling of external interrupt triggers by which TRANSFERS UPON COMPLETION
a DMA transaction can be aborted. Once the DMA message is complete it may be
Once an Abort interrupt request has been received, the desirable to disable the trigger source to prevent
DMA will perform a soft-stop by clearing the DGO bit as overrun or under run of data. This can be done by either
well as clearing the SIRQEN bit so overruns do not of the following methods:
occur. The AIRQEN bit is also cleared to prevent 1. Clearing the SIRQEN bit
additional abort signals from triggering false aborts.
2. Setting the SSTP bit
If desired, the DGO bit can be set again and the DMA 3. Setting the DSTP bit
will resume operation from where it left off after the soft-
stop had occurred as none of the DMA state
information is changed in the event of an abort.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.5.3.1 Clearing the SIRQEN bit 15.7 Types of Data Transfers
Clearing the SIRQEN bit (DMAxCON1 register) stops Based on the memory access capabilities of the DMA
the sampling of external start interrupt triggers, hence (See Table 15-1), the following sections discuss the
preventing further DMA Message transfers. different types of data movement between the Source
An example would be a communications peripheral and Destination Memory regions.
with a level-triggered interrupt. The peripheral will • N: 1
continue to request data (because its buffer is empty)
even though there is no more data to be moved. This type of transfer is common when sending
Disabling the SIRQEN bit prevents the DMA from predefined data packets (such as strings) through a
processing these requests. single interface point (such as communications
modules transmit registers).
15.5.3.2 Source/Destination Stop • N: N
The SSTP and DSTP bits (DMAxCON0 register) This type of transfer is useful for moving information out
determine whether or not to disable the hardware of the Program Flash or Data EEPROM to SRAM for
triggers (SIRQEN = 0) once a DMA message has manipulation by the CPU or other peripherals.
completed.
• 1: N
When the SSTP bit is set and the DMAxSCNT = 0, then
This type of transfer is common when bridging two
the SIRQEN bit will be cleared. Similarly, when the
different modules data streams together
DSTP bit is set and the DMAxDCNT = 0, the SIRQEN
(communications bridge).
bit will be cleared.
• 1: N
Note: The SSTP and DSTP bits are
independent functions and do not depend This type of transfer is useful for moving information
on each other. It is possible for a message from a single data source into a memory buffer
to be stopped by either counter at (communications receive registers).
message end or both counters at
message end. 15.8 DMA Interrupts
Each DMA has its own set of four interrupt flags, used
15.6 Types of Hardware Triggers to indicate a range of conditions during data transfers.
The interrupt flag bits can be accessed using the
The DMA has two different trigger inputs namely the
corresponding PIR registers (Refer to the Interrupt
Source trigger and the abort trigger. Each of these
Section).
trigger sources is user configurable using the
DMAxSIRQ and DMAxAIRQ registers. 15.8.1 DMA SOURCE COUNT INTERRUPT
Based on the source selected for each trigger, there The DMAxSCNTIF source count interrupt flag is set
are two types of requests that can be sent to the DMA. every time the DMAxSCNT[11:0] reaches zero and is
• Edge triggers reloaded to its starting value.
• Level triggers
15.8.2 DMA DESTINATION COUNT
15.6.1 EDGE TRIGGER REQUESTS INTERRUPT
Edge triggers are generated by the signal that sets the The DMAxDCNTIF destination count interrupt flag is
corresponding interrupt flag. The DMA responds to this set every time the DMAxDCNT[11:0] reaches zero and
event but leaves the interrupt flag set. An Edge request is reloaded to its starting value.
occurs only once when a given module interrupt The DMA Source Count zero and Destination Count
requirements are true. zero interrupts are used in conjunction to determine
when to signal the CPU when the DMA Messages are
15.6.2 LEVEL TRIGGER REQUESTS completed.
A level request is asserted as long as the condition that
causes the interrupt is true. For example, the RXIF 15.8.3 ABORT INTERRUPT
interrupt is asserted as long as the UART receive buffer The DMAxAIF abort interrupt flag is used to signal that
has unread data. The RXIF cannot be cleared except the DMA has halted activity due to an abort signal from
by emptying the receive buffer. one of the abort sources. This is used to indicate that
the transaction has been halted for some reason.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.8.4 OVERRUN INTERRUPT 15.9 DMA Setup and Operation
When the DMA receives a trigger to start a new The following steps illustrate how to configure the DMA
message before the current message is completed, for data transfer:
then the DMAxORIF Overrun interrupt flag is set.
1. Program the appropriate Source and
This condition indicates that the DMA is being Destination addresses for the transaction into
requested before its current transaction is finished. the DMAxSSA and DMAxDSA registers
This implies that the active DMA may not be able to
2. Select the source memory region that is being
keep up with the demands from the peripheral module
addressed by DMAxSSA register, using the
being serviced, which may result in data loss.
SMR[1:0] bits.
The DMAxORIF flag being set does not cause the 3. Program the SMODE and DMODE bits to select
current DMA transfer to terminate. the addressing mode.
The Overrun interrupt is only available for trigger 4. Program the Source size DMAxSSZ and
sources that are edge based and not available for Destination size DMAxDSZ registers with the
sources that are level-based. Therefore a level-based number of bytes to be transferred. It is
interrupt source does not trigger a DMA overrun error recommended for proper operation that the size
due to the potential latency issues in the system. registers be a multiple of each other.
An example of an interrupt that could use the overrun 5. If the user desires to disable data transfers once
interrupt would be a timer overflow (or period match) the message has completed, then the SSTP and
interrupt. This event only happens every time the timer DSTP bits in DMAxCON1 register need to be
rolls over and is not dependent on any other system set. (see Section 15.5.3.2 “Source/Destina-
conditions. tion Stop”).
An example of an interrupt that does not allow the 6. If using hardware triggers for data transfer,
overrun interrupt would be the UARTTX buffer. The setup the hardware trigger interrupt sources for
UART will continue to assert the interrupt until the DMA the starting and aborting DMA transfers
is able to process the MSG. Due to latency issues, the (DMAxSIRQ and DMAxAIRQ), and set the
DMA may not be able to service an empty buffer corresponding interrupt request enable bits
immediately, but the UART continues to assert its (SIRQEN and AIRQEN).
transmit interrupt until it is serviced. If overrun was 7. Select the priority level for the DMA (see
allowed in this case, the overrun would occur almost Section 3.1 “System Arbitration”) and lock
immediately as the module samples the interrupt the priorities (see Section 3.1.1 “Priority
sources every instruction cycle. Lock”)
8. Enable the DMA (DMAxCON1bits. EN = 1)
9. If using software control for data transfer, set the
DGO bit, else this bit will be set by the hardware
trigger.
Once the DMA is set up, the following flow chart
describes the sequence of operation when the DMA
uses hardware triggers and utilizes the unused CPU
cycles (bubble) for DMA transfers.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 15-4: DMA OPERATION WITH HARDWARE TRIGGER
Rev. 10-000274A
8/8/2016
Configure DMA
Module
EN = 1
Load DMA Source/

Destination Pointers
& Counters
SIRQEN = 1 & N
Trigger?
DGO = 1
Bubble?
DMAxBUF = &DMAxSPTR
Source Read
XIP = 1
N
Bubble?
Y
&DMAxDPTR = DMABUF
Destination Write
XIP = 0
Y Reload
DMAxSCNTIF
DMAxSCNT = 0 DMAxSCNT & DGO = 0
=1
DMAxSPTR
N
Update Y
DMAxSSA, SIRQEN = 0 SSTP = 1
DMAxSCNT
Y Reload
DMAxDCNTIF
DMAxDCNT = 0 DMAxDCNT & DGO = 0
=1
DMAxDPTR
Y
Update AIRQEN = 0 DSTP = 1
DMAxDSA,
DMAxDCNT
N
N
DGO = 0
End Process

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
The following sections describe with visual reference
the sequence of events for different configurations of
the DMA module
15.9.1 SOURCE STOP

When the Source Stop bit is set (SSTP = 1) and the
DMAxSCNT register reloads, the DMA clears the
SIRQEN bit to stop receiving new start interrupt
request signals and sets the DMAxSCNTIF flag.
FIGURE 15-5: GPR-GPR TRANSACTIONS WITH HARDWARE TRIGGERS, SSTP = 1

Rev. 10-000275A
8/9/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Instruction
Clock
EN
SIRQEN
Source Hardware
Trigger
DGO
DMAxSPTR 0x100 0x101 0x102 0x103 0x100
DMAxDPTR 0x200 0x201 0x201 0x201 0x200
DMAxSCNT 4 3 2 1 4
DMAxDCNT 2 1 2 1 2
DMA STATE IDLE SR(1) DW(2) SR(1) DW(2) IDLE SR(1) DW(2) SR(1) DW(2) IDLE
DMAxSCNTIF
DMAxDCNTIF
DMAxSSA 0x100 DMAxDSA 0x200
DMAxSSZ 0x4 DMAxDSZ 0x2
Note 1: SR - Source Read

2: DW - Destination Write

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.9.2 DESTINATION STOP
When the Destination Stop bit is set (DSTP = 1) and the
DMAxDCNT register reloads, the DMA clears the
SIRQEN bit to stop receiving new start interrupt
request signals and sets the DMAxDCNTIF flag.
FIGURE 15-6: GPR-GPR TRANSACTIONS WITH HARDWARE TRIGGERS, DSTP = 1

Rev. 10-000275B
8/9/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Instruction
Clock
EN
SIRQEN
Source Hardware
Trigger
DGO
DMAxSPTR 0x100 0x101 0x100 0x101 0x100
DMAxDPTR 0x200 0x201 0x202 0x203 0x200
DMAxSCNT 2 1 2 1 2
DMAxDCNT 4 3 2 1 4
DMAxSCNTIF
DMAxDCNTIF


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.9.3 CONTINUOUS TRANSFER
When the Source or the Destination stop bit is cleared
(SSTP, DSTP = 0), the transactions continue unless
cleared by the user. The DMAxSCNTIF and
DMAxDCNTIF flags are set whenever the respective
counter registers are reloaded.
FIGURE 15-7: GPR-GPR TRANSACTIONS WITH HARDWARE TRIGGERS, SSTP, DSTP = 0

Rev. 10-000275D
9/15/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Instruction
Clock
EN
SIRQEN
Source
Hardware
Trigger
DGO
DMAxSPTR 0x100 0x101 0x100 0x101 0x100 0x101 0x100 0x101 0x100
DMAxDPTR 0x200 0x201 0x202 0x203 0x200 0x201 0x202 0x203 0x202
DMAxSCNT 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
DMAxDCNT 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2
DMA (1) (2)
IDLE SR DW SR(1) DW(2) IDLE SR(1) DW(2) SR(1) DW(2) IDLE SR(1) DW(2) SR(1) DW(2) IDLE SR(1) DW(2) SR(1) DW(2) IDLE
STATE
DMAxSCNTIF
DMAxDCNTIF


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.9.4 TRANSFER FROM SFR TO GPR Hardware trigger, the Source address can be set to
point to the ADC Result registers at 3EEF, the
The following visual reference describes the sequence
Destination address can be set to point to any GPR
of events when copying ADC results to a GPR location.
location of our choice (Example 0x100).
The ADC Interrupt Flag can be chosen as the Source
FIGURE 15-8: SFR SPACE TO GPR SPACE TRANSFER

Rev. 10-000275C
8/12/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 N+5 N+6 N+7 N+x
Instruction
Clock
EN
SIRQEN
Source Hardware
Trigger
DGO
DMAxSPTR 0x3EEF 0x3EF0 0x3EEF 0x3EF0 0x3EEF
DMAxDPTR 0x100 0x101 0x102 0x103 0x103
DMAxSCNT 2 1 2 1 2
DMAxDCNT 10 9 8 7 6
(1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2)

DMA STATE IDLE SR DW SR DW IDLE SR DW SR DW IDLE
DMAxSCNTIF
DMAxDCNTIF
DMAxSSA 0x3EEF DMAxDSA 0x100
DMAxSSZ 0x2 DMAxDSZ 0xA
SMODE 0x1 DMODE 0x1


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.9.5 OVERRUN INTERRUPT
The Overrun Interrupt flag is set if the DMA receives a
trigger to start a new message before the current
message is completed.
FIGURE 15-9: OVERRUN INTERRUPT

Rev. 10-000275E
8/11/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Instruction
Clock
EN
SIRQEN
Source Hardware
Trigger
DGO
DMAxSPTR 0x100 0x101 0x100 0x101 0x100
DMAxDPTR 0x200 0x201 0x202 0x203 0x200
DMAxSCNT 2 1 2 1 2
DMAxDCNT 4 3 2 1 4
DMAxSCNTIF
DMAxDCNTIF
DMAxORIF
DMAxCON1bits.SMA = 01


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.9.6 ABORT TRIGGER, MESSAGE
COMPLETE
The AIRQEN needs to be set in order for the DMA to
sample Abort Interrupt sources. When an abort
interrupt is received the SIRQEN bit is cleared and the
AIRQEN bit is cleared to avoid receiving further abort
triggers.
FIGURE 15-10: ABORT AT THE END OF MESSAGE

Rev. 10-000275F
8/12/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 N+5 N+6 N+7 N+8
Instruction
Clock
EN
SIRQEN
AIRQEN
Source Hardware
Trigger
Abort Hardware
Trigger
DGO
DMAxSPTR 0x3EEF 0x3EF0 0x3EEF 0x3EF0 0x3EEF
DMAxDPTR 0x100 0x101 0x109 0x10A 0x100
DMAxSCNT 2 1 2 1 2
DMAxDCNT 10 9 2 1 10
DMAxSCNTIF
DMAxDCNTIF
DMAxAIF


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.9.7 ABORT TRIGGER, MESSAGE IN The SIREQEN bit is cleared to prevent any overrun and
PROGRESS the AIRQEN bit is cleared to prevent any false aborts.
When an abort interrupt request is received in a DMA When the DGO bit is set again the DMA will resume
transaction, the DMA will perform a soft-stop by operation from where it left off after the soft-stop.
clearing the DGO (i.e., if the DMA was reading the
source register, it will complete the read operation and
then clear the DGO bit).
FIGURE 15-11: ABORT DURING MESSAGE TRANSFER
Rev. 10-000275G
8/12/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 11 12
Instruction
Clock
EN
SIRQEN
AIRQEN
Source Hardware
Trigger
Abort Hardware
Trigger
DGO
DMAxSPTR 0x3EEF 0x3EF0 0x3EEF
DMAxDPTR 0x100 0x101 0x102
DMAxSCNT 2 1 2
DMAxDCNT 10 9 8
DMA STATE IDLE SR(1) IDLE DW(2) SR(1) DW(2) IDLE
DMAxCONbits.XIP
DMAxAIF

The following table contains some of the cases in which

the DMA module can be configured to.

TABLE 15-6: EXAMPLE DMA USE CASE TABLE
Source Module Source Register(s) Destination Module Destination Register(s) DCHxSIRQ Comment
Signal Measurement SMTxCPW[U:H:L] GPR GPR[x,y,z] SMTxPWAIF Store Captured Pulse-width
Timer values
(SMT) SMTxCPR[U:H:L] SMTxPRAIF Store Captured Period values
GPR/SFR/Program MEMORY[x,y] TMR0 TMR0[H:L] TMR0IF Use as a Timer0 reload for
Flash/Data EEPROM custom 16-bit value
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
GPR/SFR/ Program MEMORY[x] TMR0 PR0 ANY Update TMR0 frequency
Flash/Data EEPROM based on a specific trigger
GPR/SFR/ Program MEMORY[x,y] TMR1 TMR1[H:L] TMR1IF Use as a Timer1 reload for
Flash/Data EEPROM custom 16-bit value
TMR1 TMR1[H:L] GPR GPR[x,y] TMR1GIF Use TMR1 Gate interrupt flag
to read data out of TMR1
register
GPR/SFR/ Program MEMORY[x] TMR2 PR2 TMR2IF
Flash/Data EEPROM
GPR/SFR/ Program MEMORY[x,y,z] TMR2 PR2 ANY Frequency generator with 50%
Flash/Data EEPROM CCP or PWM CCPR[H:L] or duty cycle look up table
PWMDC[H:L]
CCP CCPR[H:L] GPR GPR[x,y] CCPxIF Move data from CCP 16b
Capture
GPR/SFR/ Program MEMORY[x,y] CCP CCPR[H:L] ANY Load Compare value or PWM
Flash/Data EEPROM values into the CCP
GPR/SFR/ Program MEMORY [x,y,z,u,v,w] CCPx CCPxR[H:L] ANY Update multiple PWM values
Flash/Data EEPROM CCPy CCPyR[H:L] at the same time
CCPz CCPzR[H:L] e.g. 3-phase motor control
GPR/SFR/ Program MEMORY[x,y,z] NCO NCOxINC[U:H:L] ANY Frequency Generator look-up
Flash/Data EEPROM table
GPR/SFR/ Program MEMORY[x] DAC DACxCON0 ANY Update DAC values
Flash/Data EEPROM
GPR/SFR/ Program MEMORY[x] OSCTUNE OSCTUNE ANY Automated Frequency
Flash/Data EEPROM dithering
DS40001919E-page 246
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.10 Reset 15.12 DMA Register Interfaces
The DMA registers are set to the default state on any The DMA can transfer data to any GPR or SFR
Reset. The registers are also reset to the default state location. For better user accessibility, some of the more
when the enable bit is cleared (DMA1CON1bits.EN=0). commonly used SFR spaces have their Mirror registers
placed in a separate data memory location (0x4000-
15.11 Power Saving Mode Operation 0x40FF). These Mirror registers can be only accessed
through the DMA Source and Destination Address
The DMA utilizes system clocks and it is treated as a registers. Refer to Table 4-3 for details about these
peripheral when it comes to power saving operations. mirror registers.
Like other peripherals, the DMA also uses Peripheral
Module Disable bits to further tailor its operation in low-
power states.
15.11.1 SLEEP MODE

When the device enters Sleep mode, the system clock
to the module is shut down, therefore no DMA
operation is supported in Sleep. Once the system clock
is disabled, the requisite read and write clocks are also
disabled, without which the DMA cannot perform any of
its tasks.
Any transfers that may be in progress are resumed on
exiting from Sleep mode. Register contents are not
affected by the device entering or leaving Sleep mode.
It is recommended that DMA transactions be allowed to
finish before entering Sleep mode.
15.11.2 IDLE MODE

In Idle mode, all of the system clocks (including the
read and write clocks) are still operating but the CPU is
not using them to save power.
Therefore, every instruction cycle is available to the
system arbiter and if the bubble is granted to the DMA,
it may be utilized to move data.
15.11.3 DOZE MODE

Similar to the Idle mode, the CPU does not utilize all of
the available instruction cycles slots that are available
to it in order to save power. It only executes instructions
based on its settings from the Doze settings.
Therefore, every instruction not used by the CPU is
available for system arbitration and may be utilized by
the DMA if granted by the arbiter.
15.11.4 PERIPHERAL MODULE DISABLE

The Peripheral Module Disable (PMD) registers
provide a method to disable DMA by gating all clock
sources supplied to it. The respective DMAxMD bit
needs to be set in order to disable the DMA.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
EXAMPLE 15-1: SETUP DMA1 TO MOVE DATA FROM PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY TO UART1
TRANSMIT BUFFER USING HARDWARE TRIGGERS
//This code example illustrates using DMA1 to transfer
//10 bytes of data from 0x1000 in PFM to U1TXB 0x3DEA
void main() {
//System Initialize
initializeSystem();
//Setup UART1
initializeUART1();
//Setup DMA1
//DMA1CON1 - DPTR remains, Source Memory Region PFM, SPTR increments, SSTP
DMA1CON1 = 0x0B;
//Source registers
//Source size
DMA1SSZH = 0x00;
DMA1SSZL = 0x0A;
//Source start address, 0x1000

DMA1SSAU = 0x00;
DMA1SSAH = 0x10;
DMA1SSAL = 0x00;
//Destination registers
//Destination size
DMA1DSZH = 0x00;
DMA1DSZL = 0x01;
//Destination start address, 0x3DEA

DMA1DSAH = 0x3D;
DMA1DSAL = 0xEA;
//Start trigger source U1TX

DMA1SIRQ = 0x1C;
//Set PRLOCKED bit to grant memory access to DMA

INTCON0bits.GIE = 0;
PRLOCK = 0x55;
PRLOCK = 0xAA;
PRLOCKbits.PRLOCKED = 1;
INTCON0bits.GIE = 1;
//Enable & Start DMA transfer

DMA1CON0 = 0xC0;
while (1) {
doSomething();
}
}

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15.13 Register definitions: DMA
Long bit name prefixes for the DMA peripherals are
shown in Table 15-7. Refer to Section 1.3 “Register
and Bit naming conventions” for more information.
TABLE 15-7: REGISTER AND BIT NAMING

DMA 1 DMA1
DMA 2 DMA2
REGISTER 15-1: DMAxCON0: DMAx CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 R/W/HC-0/0 R/W/HS/HC-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W/HC-0/0 U-0 R/HS/HC-0/0
EN SIRQEN DGO — — AIRQEN — XIP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
-n/n = Value at POR 0 = bit is cleared x = bit is unknown
and BOR/Value at all u = bit is unchanged
other Resets
bit 7 EN: DMA Module Enable bit

1 = Enables module
0 = Disables module
bit 6 SIRQEN: Start of Transfer Interrupt Request Enable bits
1 = Hardware triggers are allowed to start DMA transfers
0 = Hardware triggers are not allowed to start DMA transfers
bit 5 DGO: DMA transaction bit
1 = DMA transaction is in progress
0 = DMA transaction is not in progress
bit 2 AIRQEN: Abort of Transfer Interrupt Request Enable bits
1 = Hardware triggers are allowed to abort DMA transfers
0 = Hardware triggers are not allowed to abort DMA transfers
bit 0 XIP: Transfer in Progress Status bit
1 = The DMAxBUF register currently holds contents from a read operation and has not transferred data
to the destination.
0 = The DMAxBUF register is empty or has successfully transferred data to the destination address

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 15-2: DMAxCON1: DMAx CONTROL REGISTER1
DMODE[1:0] DSTP SMR[1:0] SMODE[1:0] SSTP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-6 DMODE[1:0]: Destination Address Mode Selection bits

11 = Reserved, Do not use
10 = DMAxDPTR[15:0] is decremented after each transfer completion
01 = DMAxDPTR[15:0] is incremented after each transfer completion
00 = DMAxDPTR[15:0] remains unchanged after each transfer completion
bit 5 DSTP: Destination Counter Reload Stop bit
1 = SIRQEN bit is cleared when Destination Counter reloads
0 = SIRQEN bit is not cleared when Destination Counter reloads
bit 4-3 SMR[1:0]: Source Memory Region Select bits
1x = DMAxSSA[21:0] points to Data EEPROM
01 = DMAxSSA[21:0] points to Program Flash Memory
00 = DMAxSSA[21:0] points to SFR/GPR Data Space
bit 2-1 SMODE[1:0]: Source Address Mode Selection bits
11 = Reserved, Do not use
10 = DMAxSPTR[21:0] is decremented after each transfer completion
01 = DMAxSPTR[21:0] is incremented after each transfer completion
00 = DMAxSPTR[21:0] remains unchanged after each transfer completion
bit 0 SSTP: Source Counter Reload Stop bit
1 = SIRQEN bit is cleared when Source Counter reloads
0 = SIRQEN bit is not cleared when Source Counter reloads

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 15-3: DMAxBUF: DMAx DATA BUFFER REGISTER
R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
BUF7 BUF6 BUF5 BUF4 BUF3 BUF2 BUF1 BUF0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
-n/n = Value at POR 1 = bit is set 0 = bit is cleared x = bit is unknown
other Resets
bit 7-0 BUF[7:0]: DMA Internal Data Buffer bits

DMABUF[7:0]
These bits reflect the content of the internal data buffer the DMA peripheral uses to hold the data being
moved from the source to destination.
REGISTER 15-4: DMAxSSAL: DMAx SOURCE START ADDRESS LOW REGISTER

SSA[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
other Resets
bit 7-0 SSA[7:0]: Source Start Address bits
REGISTER 15-5: DMAxSSAH: DMAx SOURCE START ADDRESS HIGH REGISTER

SSA[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
-n/n = Value at POR and 1 = bit is set 0 = bit is cleared x = bit is unknown
BOR/Value at all other u = bit is unchanged
Resets

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 15-6: DMAxSSAU: DMAx SOURCE START ADDRESS UPPER REGISTER
U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — SSA[21:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
other Resets
REGISTER 15-7: DMAxSPTRL: DMAx SOURCE POINTER LOW REGISTER

R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
SPTR[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets
bit 15-0 SPTR[7:0]: Current Source Address Pointer
REGISTER 15-8: DMAxSPTRH: DMAx SOURCE POINTER HIGH REGISTER

R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
SPTR[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 15-9: DMAxSPTRU: DMAx SOURCE POINTER UPPER REGISTER
U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
— — SPTR[21:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets

REGISTER 15-10: DMAxSSZL: DMAx SOURCE SIZE LOW REGISTER

SSZ[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets
bit 7-0 SSZ[7:0]: Source Message Size bits
REGISTER 15-11: DMAxSSZH: DMAx SOURCE SIZE HIGH REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — SSZ[11:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets

bit 3-0 SSZ[11:8]: Source Message Size bits

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 15-12: DMAxSCNTL: DMAx SOURCE COUNT LOW REGISTER
R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
SCNT[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets
bit 7-0 SCNT[7:0]: Current Source Byte Count
REGISTER 15-13: DMAxSCNTH: DMAx SOURCE COUNT HIGH REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
— — — — SCNT[11:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
other Resets

bit 3-0 SCNT[11:8]: Current Source Byte Count
REGISTER 15-14: DMAxDSAL: DMAx DESTINATION START ADDRESS LOW REGISTER

DSA[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets
bit 7-0 DSA[7:0]: Destination Start Address bits

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 15-15: DMAxDSAH: DMAx DESTINATION START ADDRESS HIGH REGISTER
DSA[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets
bit 7-0 DSA[15:8]: Destination Start Address bits
REGISTER 15-16: DMAxDPTRL: DMAx DESTINATION POINTER LOW REGISTER

R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
DPTR[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets
bit 7-0 DPTR[7:0]: Current Destination Address Pointer
REGISTER 15-17: DMAxDPTRH: DMAx DESTINATION POINTER HIGH REGISTER

R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
DPTR[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets
bit 7-0 DPTR[15:8]: Current Destination Address Pointer

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 15-18: DMAxDSZL: DMAx DESTINATION SIZE LOW REGISTER
DSZ[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets
bit 7-0 DSZ[7:0]: Destination Message Size bits
REGISTER 15-19: DMAxDSZH: DMAx DESTINATION SIZE HIGH REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — DSZ[11:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets

bit 3-0 DSZ[11:8]: Destination Message Size bits
REGISTER 15-20: DMAxDCNTL: DMAx DESTINATION COUNT LOW REGISTER

R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
DCNT[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets
bit 7-0 DCNT[7:0]: Current Destination Byte Count

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 15-21: DMAxDCNTH: DMAx DESTINATION COUNT HIGH REGISTER
U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
— — — — DCNT[11:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Resets

bit 3-0 DCNT[11:8]: Current Destination Byte Count
REGISTER 15-22: DMAxSIRQ: DMAx START INTERRUPT REQUEST SOURCE SELECTION

REGISTER
U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— SIRQ[6:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
other Resets

bit 6-0 SIRQ[6:0]: DMAx Start Interrupt Request Source Selection bits
Please refer to Table 15-2 for more information.
REGISTER 15-23: DMAxAIRQ: DMAx ABORT INTERRUPT REQUEST SOURCE SELECTION

REGISTER
— AIRQ[6:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
other Resets

bit 6-0 AIRQ[6:0]: DMAx Interrupt Request Source Selection bits
Please refer to Table 15-2 for more information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 15-2: DMAxSIRQ AND DMAxAIRQ TRIGGER SOURCES
DMAxSIRQ Trigger Level DMAxSIRQ Trigger Level
DMAxAIRQ Source(2) Triggered(1) DMAxAIRQ Source Triggered
0x00 Reserved 0x2A DMA2SCNTIF No
0x01 HLVDIF No 0x2B DMA2DCNTIF No
0x02 OSFIF No 0x2C DMA2ORIF No
0x03 CSWIF No 0x2D DMA2AIF No
0x04 NVMIF No 0x2E I2C2RXIF Yes
0x05 SCANIF No 0x2F I2C2TXIF Yes
0x06 CRCIF No 0x30 I2C2IF Yes
0x07 IOCIF Yes 0x31 I2C2EIF Yes
0x08 INT0IF No 0x32 U2RXIF Yes
0x09 ZCDIF No 0x33 U2TXIF Yes
0x0A ADIF No 0x34 U2EIF Yes
0x0B ADTIF No 0x35 U2IF No
0x0C CMP1IF No 0x36 TMR3IF No
0x0D SMT1IF No 0x37 TMR3GIF No
0x0E SMT1PRAIF No 0x38 TMR4IF No
0x0F SMT1PWAIF No 0x39 CCP2IF No
0x10 DMA1SCNTIF No 0x3A Reserved
0x11 DMA1DCNTIF No 0x3B CWG2IF No
0x12 DMA1ORIF No 0x3C CLC2IF No
0x13 DMA1AIF No 0x3D INT2IF No
0x14 SPI1RXIF Yes 0x3E Reserved
0x15 SPI1TXIF Yes 0x3F Reserved
0x16 SPI1IF Yes 0x40 Reserved
0x17 I2C1RXIF Yes 0x41 Reserved
0x18 I2C1TXIF Yes 0x42 Reserved
0x19 I2C1IF Yes 0x43 Reserved
0x1A I2C1EIF Yes 0x44 Reserved
0x1B U1RXIF Yes 0x45 Reserved
0x1C U1TXIF Yes 0x46 TMR5IF No
0x1D U1EIF Yes 0x47 TMR5GIF No
0x1E U1IF No 0x48 TMR6IF No
0x1F TMR0IF No 0x49 CCP3IF No
0x20 TMR1IF No 0x4A CWG3IF No
0x21 TMR1GIF No 0x4B CLC3IF No
0x22 TMR2IF No 0x4C Reserved
0x23 CCP1IF No 0x4D Reserved
0x24 Reserved 0x4E Reserved
0x25 NCOIF No 0x4F Reserved
0x26 CWG1IF No 0x50 CCP4IF No
0x27 CLC1IF No 0x51 CLC4IF No
0x28 INT1IF No 0x52 Reserved
0x29 CMP2IF No –
0xFF
Note 1: All trigger sources that are not Level-triggered are Edge-triggered.
2: The event that sets the flag is the interrupt trigger, not the flag itself. The flag remains set.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 15-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH DMA

Register
on Page
DMAxCON0 EN SIRQEN DGO — — AIRQEN — XIP 249
DMAxCON1 DMODE[1:0] DSTP SMR[1:0] SMODE[1:0] SSTP 250
DMAxBUF DBUF7 DBUF6 DBUF5 DBUF4 DBUF3 DBUF2 DBUF1 DBUF0 251
DMAxSSAL SSA[7:0] 251
DMAxSSAH SSA[15:8] 251
DMAxSSAU — — SSA[21:16] 252
DMAxSPTRL SPTR[7:0] 252
DMAxSPTRH SPTR[15:8] 252
DMAxSPTRU — — SPTR[21:16] 253
DMAxSSZL SSZ[7:0] 253
DMAxSSZH — — — — SSZ[11:8] 253
DMAxSCNTL SCNT[7:0] 254
DMAxSCNTH — — — — SCNT[11:8] 254
DMAxDSAL DSA[7:0] 254
DMAxDSAH DSA[15:8] 255
DMAxDPTRL DPTR[7:0] 255
DMAxDPTRH DPTR[15:8] 255
DMAxDSZL DSZ[7:0] 256
DMAxDSZH — — — — DSZ[11:8] 256
DMAxDCNTL DCNT[7:0] 256
DMAxDCNTH — — — — DCNT[11:8] 257
DMAxSIRQ — SIRQ[6:0] 257
DMAxAIRQ — AIRQ[6:0] 257
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by DMA.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
16.0 I/O PORTS FIGURE 16-1: GENERIC I/O PORT
OPERATION
The PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 devices
have six I/O ports, allocated as shown in Table 16-1.
TABLE 16-1: PORT ALLOCATION TABLE Read LATx

TRISx
FOR PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/
55/56/57K42 DEVICES D Q
PORTB
PORTC
PORTD
Write LATx
PORTE
PORTA
PORTF
Write PORTx
Device CK VDD
Data Register
PIC18(L)F26K42 • • • •(1)
PIC18(L)F27K42 • • • •(1) Data Bus
PIC18(L)F45K42 • • • • •(2) I/O pin
(2) Read PORTx
PIC18(L)F46K42 • • • • •
PIC18(L)F47K42 • • • • •(2) To digital peripherals
VSS
PIC18(L)F55K42 • • • • •(2) • ANSELx
To analog peripherals
PIC18(L)F56K42 • • • • •(2) •
(2)
PIC18(L)F57K42 • • • • • •
Note 1: Pin RE3 only. 16.1 I/O Priorities
2: Pins RE0, RE1, RE2 and RE3 only.
Each pin defaults to the PORT data latch after Reset.
Each port has ten registers to control the operation. Other functions are selected with the peripheral pin
These registers are: select logic. See Section 17.0 “Peripheral Pin Select
• PORTx registers (reads the levels on the pins of (PPS) Module” for more information.
the device) Analog input functions, such as ADC and comparator
• LATx registers (output latch) inputs, are not shown in the peripheral pin select lists.
• TRISx registers (data direction) These inputs are active when the I/O pin is set for
• ANSELx registers (analog select) Analog mode using the ANSELx register. Digital output
• WPUx registers (weak pull-up) functions may continue to control the pin when it is in
• INLVLx (input level control) Analog mode.
• SLRCONx registers (slew rate control) Analog outputs, when enabled, take priority over digital
• ODCONx registers (open-drain control) outputs and force the digital output driver into a
Most port pins share functions with device peripherals, high-impedance state.
both analog and digital. In general, when a peripheral The pin function priorities are as follows:
is enabled on a port pin, that pin cannot be used as a
1. Configuration bits
general purpose output; however, the pin can still be
read. 2. Analog outputs (disable the input buffers)
3. Analog inputs
The Data Latch (LATx registers) is useful for
read-modify-write operations on the value that the I/O 4. Port inputs and outputs from PPS
pins are driving.
A write operation to the LATx register has the same
16.2 PORTx Registers
effect as a write to the corresponding PORTx register. In this section, the generic names such as PORTx,
A read of the LATx register reads of the values held in LATx, TRISx, etc. can be associated with PORTA,
the I/O PORT latches, while a read of the PORTx PORTB, and PORTC. The functionality of PORTE is
register reads the actual I/O pin value. different compared to other ports and is explained in a
Ports that support analog inputs have an associated separate section.
ANSELx register. When an ANSELx bit is set, the
digital input buffer associated with that bit is disabled.
Disabling the input buffer prevents analog signal levels
on the pin between a logic high and low from causing
excessive current in the logic input circuitry. A
simplified model of a generic I/O port, without the
interfaces to other peripherals, is shown in Figure 16-1.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
16.2.1 DATA REGISTER 16.2.3 ANALOG CONTROL
PORTx is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The The ANSELx register (Register 16-4) is used to
corresponding data direction register is TRISx configure the Input mode of an I/O pin to analog.
(Register 16-2). Setting a TRISx bit (‘1’) will make the Setting the appropriate ANSELx bit high will cause all
corresponding PORTA pin an input (i.e., disable the digital reads on the pin to be read as ‘0’ and allow
output driver). Clearing a TRISx bit (‘0’) will make the analog functions on the pin to operate correctly.
corresponding PORTx pin an output (i.e., it enables The state of the ANSELx bits has no effect on digital
output driver and puts the contents of the output latch output functions. A pin with TRIS clear and ANSEL set
on the selected pin). Example 16-1 shows how to will still operate as a digital output, but the Input mode
initialize PORTx. will be analog. This can cause unexpected behavior
Reading the PORTx register (Register 16-1) reads the when executing read-modify-write instructions on the
status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the affected port.
PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write
Note: The ANSELx bits default to the Analog
operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the
mode after Reset. To use any pins as
port pins are read, this value is modified and then
digital general purpose or peripheral
written to the PORT data latch (LATx).
inputs, the corresponding ANSEL bits
The PORT data latch LATx (Register 16-3) holds the must be initialized to ‘0’ by user software.
output port data and contains the latest value of a LATx
or PORTx write. 16.2.4 OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL
EXAMPLE 16-1: INITIALIZING PORTA The ODCONx register (Register 16-6) controls the
; This code example illustrates
open-drain feature of the port. Open-drain operation is
; initializing the PORTA register. The independently selected for each pin. When an
; other ports are initialized in the same ODCONx bit is set, the corresponding port output
; manner. becomes an open-drain driver capable of sinking
current only. When an ODCONx bit is cleared, the
BANKSEL PORTA ; corresponding port output pin is the standard push-pull
CLRF PORTA ;Init PORTA drive capable of sourcing and sinking current.
BANKSEL LATA ;Data Latch
CLRF LATA ;
BANKSEL ANSELA ; Note: It is necessary to set open-drain control
CLRF ANSELA ;digital I/O when using the pin for I2C.
BANKSEL TRISA ;
MOVLW B'11111000' ;Set RA[7:3] as inputs
MOVWF TRISA ;and set RA[2:0] as
16.2.5 SLEW RATE CONTROL
;outputs The SLRCONx register (Register 16-7) controls the
slew rate option for each port pin. Slew rate for each
port pin can be controlled independently. When an
16.2.2 DIRECTION CONTROL
SLRCONx bit is set, the corresponding port pin drive is
The TRISx register (Register 16-2) controls the PORTx slew rate limited. When an SLRCONx bit is cleared,
pin output drivers, even when they are being used as The corresponding port pin drive slews at the maximum
analog inputs. The user should ensure the bits in the rate possible.
TRISx register are maintained set when using them as
analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog inputs
always read ‘0’.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
16.2.6 INPUT THRESHOLD CONTROL 16.3 PORTE Registers
The INLVLx register (Register 16-8) controls the input Depending on the device, PORTE is implemented in
voltage threshold for each of the available PORTx input two different ways.
pins. A selection between the Schmitt Trigger CMOS or
the TTL compatible thresholds is available. The input 16.3.1 PORTE ON 40/44/48-PIN DEVICES
threshold is important in determining the value of a read
of the PORTx register and also the level at which an For PIC18(L)F45/46/47/55/56/57K42 devices, PORTE
interrupt-on-change occurs, if that feature is enabled. is a 4-bit wide port. Three pins (RE0, RE1 and RE2)
See Table 44-5 for more information on threshold are individually configurable as inputs or outputs.
levels. These pins have Schmitt Trigger input buffers. When
selected as an analog input, these pins will read as
Note: Changing the input threshold selection
should be performed while all peripheral ‘0’s. The corresponding data direction register is
modules are disabled. Changing the TRISE. Setting a TRISE bit (= 1) will make the
threshold level during the time a module is corresponding PORTE pin an input (i.e., disable the
active may inadvertently generate a output driver).
transition associated with an input pin, Clearing a TRISE bit (= 0) will make the corresponding
regardless of the actual voltage level on PORTE pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver
that pin.
and put the contents of the output latch on the
16.2.7 WEAK PULL-UP CONTROL selected pin). TRISE controls the direction of the REx
pins, even when they are being used as analog pins.
The WPUx register (Register 16-5) controls the
The user must make sure to keep the pins configured
individual weak pull-ups for each port pin.
as inputs when using them as analog inputs. RE[2:0]
16.2.8 EDGE SELECTABLE bits have other registers associated with them (i.e.,
INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE ANSELE, WPUE, INLVLE, SLRCONE and ODCONE).
The functionality is similar to the other ports. The Data
An interrupt can be generated by detecting a signal at
Latch register (LATE) is also memory-mapped. Read-
the port pin that has either a rising edge or a falling
edge. Any individual pin can be configured to generate modify-write operations on the LATE register read and
an interrupt. The interrupt-on-change module is write the latched output value for PORTE.
present on all the pins. For further details about the IOC
module refer to Section 18.0 “Interrupt-on-Change”. Note: On a Power-on Reset, RE[2:0] are
configured as analog inputs.
16.2.9 I2C PAD CONTROL
For the PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 The fourth pin of PORTE (MCLR/VPP/RE3) is an
devices, the I2C specific pads are available on RB1, input-only pin. Its operation is controlled by the
RB2, RC3, RC4, RD0(1) and RD1(1) pins. The I2C MCLRE Configuration bit. When selected as a port
characteristics of each of these pins is controlled by the
pin, (MCLRE = 0), it functions as a digital input-only
RxyI2C registers (see Register 16-9). These
pin; as such, it does not have TRIS or LAT bits
characteristics include enabling I2C specific slew rate
(over standard GPIO slew rate), selecting internal pull- associated with its operation. Otherwise, it functions
ups for I2C pins, and selecting appropriate input as the device’s Master Clear input. In either
threshold as per I2C/SMBus specifications. configuration, RE3 also functions as the programming
voltage input during programming. RE3 in PORTE
register is a read-only bit and will read ‘1’ when
Note 1: RD0 and RD1 I2C pads are not available MCLRE = 1 (i.e., Master Clear enabled).
in PIC18(L)F26K42 parts.
2: Any peripheral using the I2C pins read
Note: On a Power-on Reset, RE3 is enabled as
the I2C ST inputs when enabled via
a digital input only if Master Clear
RxyI2C.
functionality is disabled.
.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
EXAMPLE 16-2: INITIALIZING PORTE
CLRF PORTE ;Initialize PORTE by
;clearing output
;data latches
CLRF LATE ;Alternate method
;to clear output
;data latches
CLRF ANSELE ;Configure analog pins
;for digital only
MOVLW 05h ;Value used to
;initialize data
;direction
MOVWF TRISE ;Set RE[0] as input
;RE[1] as output
;RE[2] as input
16.3.2 PORTE ON 28-PIN DEVICES

For PIC18(L)F26/27K42 devices, PORTE is only
available when Master Clear functionality is disabled
(MCLRE = 0). In this case, PORTE is a single bit, input-
only port comprised of RE3 only. The pin operates as
previously described. RE3 in PORTE register is a read-
only bit and will read ‘1’ when MCLRE = 1 (i.e., Master
Clear enabled).
16.3.3 RE3 WEAK PULL-UP

The port RE3 pin has an individually controlled weak
internal pull-up. When set, the WPUE3 bit enables the
RE3 pin pull-up. When the RE3 port pin is configured
as MCLR, (CONFIG2L, MCLRE = 1 and CONFIG4H,
LVP = 0), or configured for Low-Voltage Programming,
(MCLRE = x and LVP = 1), the pull-up is always
enabled and the WPUE3 bit has no effect.
16.3.4 INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE
The interrupt-on-change feature is available only on the
RE3 pin of PORTE for all devices. If MCLRE = 1 or
LVP = 1, RE3 port functionality is disabled and
interrupt-on-change on RE3 is not available. For further
details refer to Section 18.0 “Interrupt-on-Change”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
16.4 Register Definitions: Port Control
REGISTER 16-1: PORTx: PORTx REGISTER(1)
R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u
Rx7 Rx6 Rx5 Rx4 Rx3 Rx2 Rx1 Rx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown
-n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets
bit 7-0 Rx[7:0]: Rx7:Rx0 Port I/O Value bits

1 = Port pin is  VIH
0 = Port pin is  VIL
Note 1: Writes to PORTx are actually written to the corresponding LATx register.
Reads from PORTx register return actual I/O pin values.
TABLE 16-2: PORT REGISTERS

PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0
PORTB RB7(1) RB6(1) RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0
PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0
PORTD(3) RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 RD0
PORTE — — — — RE3(2) RE2(3) RE1(3) RE0(3)
PORTF(4) RF7 RF6 RF5 RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1 RF0
Note 1: Bits RB6 and RB7 read ‘1’ while in Debug mode.
2: Bit PORTE3 is read-only, and will read ‘1’ when MCLRE = 1 (Master Clear enabled).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 16-2: TRISx: TRI-STATE CONTROL REGISTER

TRISx7 TRISx6 TRISx5 TRISx4 TRISx3 TRISx2 TRISx1 TRISx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TRISx[7:0]: TRISx Port I/O Tri-state Control bits

1 = Port output driver is disabled
0 = Port output driver is enabled
TABLE 16-3: TRIS REGISTERS

TRISA TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0
TRISB TRISB7(1) TRISB6(1) TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0
TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0
TRISD(2) TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0
TRISE(2) — — — — — TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0
TRISF(3) TRISF7 TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 TRISF1 TRISF0
3: Unimplemented in PIC18(L)F26/45/46/47K42.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 16-3: LATx: LATx REGISTER(1)

LATx7 LATx6 LATx5 LATx4 LATx3 LATx2 LATx1 LATx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 LATx[7:0]: Rx7:Rx0 Output Latch Value bits

Note 1: Writes to LATx are equivalent with writes to the corresponding PORTx register. Reads from LATx register
return register values, not I/O pin values.
TABLE 16-4: LAT REGISTERS

LATA LATA7 LATA6 LATA5 LATA4 LATA3 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0
LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0
LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0
LATD(1) LATD7 LATD6 LATD5 LATD4 LATD3 LATD2 LATD1 LATD0
LATE(1) — — — — — LATE2 LATE1 LATE0
LATF(2) LATF7 LATF6 LATF5 LATF4 LATF3 LATF2 LATF1 LATF0
Note 1: Unimplemented in PIC18(L)F26/27K42.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 16-4: ANSELx: ANALOG SELECT REGISTER

ANSELx7 ANSELx6 ANSELx5 ANSELx4 ANSELx3 ANSELx2 ANSELx1 ANSELx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ANSELx[7:0]: Analog Select on Pins Rx[7:0]

1 = Digital Input buffers are disabled.
0 = ST and TTL input devices are enabled
TABLE 16-5: ANALOG SELECT PORT REGISTERS

ANSELA ANSELA7 ANSELA6 ANSELA5 ANSELA4 ANSELA3 ANSELA2 ANSELA1 ANSELA0
ANSELB ANSELB7 ANSELB6 ANSELB5 ANSELB4 ANSELB3 ANSELB2 ANSELB1 ANSELB0
ANSELC ANSELC7 ANSELC6 ANSELC5 ANSELC4 ANSELC3 ANSELC2 ANSELC1 ANSELC0
ANSELD(1) ANSELD7 ANSELD6 ANSELD5 ANSELD4 ANSELD3 ANSELD2 ANSELD1 ANSELD0
ANSELE(1) — — — — — ANSELE2 ANSELE1 ANSELE0
ANSELF(2) ANSELF7 ANSELF6 ANSELF5 ANSELF4 ANSELF3 ANSELF2 ANSELF1 ANSELF0

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 16-5: WPUx: WEAK PULL-UP REGISTER

WPUx7 WPUx6 WPUx5 WPUx4 WPUx3 WPUx2 WPUx1 WPUx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 WPUx[7:0]: Weak Pull-up PORTx Control bits

1 = Weak Pull-up enabled
0 = Weak Pull-up disabled
TABLE 16-6: WEAK PULL-UP PORT REGISTERS

WPUA WPUA7 WPUA6 WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3 WPUA2 WPUA1 WPUA0
WPUB WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0
WPUC WPUC7 WPUC6 WPUC5 WPUC4 WPUC3 WPUC2 WPUC1 WPUC0
WPUD(2) WPUD7 WPUD6 WPUD5 WPUD4 WPUD3 WPUD2 WPUD1 WPUD0
WPUE — — — — WPUE3(1) WPUE2(2) WPUE1(2) WPUE0(2)
WPUF(3) WPUF7 WPUF6 WPUF5 WPUF4 WPUF3 WPUF2 WPUF1 WPUF0
Note 1: If MCLRE = 1, the weak pull-up in RE3 is always enabled; bit WPUE3 is not affected.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 16-6: ODCONx: OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL REGISTER

ODCx7 ODCx6 ODCx5 ODCx4 ODCx3 ODCx2 ODCx1 ODCx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ODCx[7:0]: Open-Drain Configuration on Pins Rx[7:0]

1 = Output drives only low-going signals (sink current only)
0 = Output drives both high-going and low-going signals (source and sink current)
TABLE 16-7: OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL REGISTERS

ODCONA ODCA7 ODCA6 ODCA5 ODCA4 ODCA3 ODCA2 ODCA1 ODCA0
ODCONB ODCB7 ODCB6 ODCB5 ODCB4 ODCB3 ODCB2 ODCB1 ODCB0
ODCONC ODCC7 ODCC6 ODCC5 ODCC4 ODCC3 ODCC2 ODCC1 ODCC0
ODCOND(1) ODCD7 ODCD6 ODCD5 ODCD4 ODCD3 ODCD2 ODCD1 ODCD0
ODCONE(1) — — — — — ODCE2 ODCE1 ODCE0
ODCONF(2) ODCF7 ODCF6 ODCF5 ODCF4 ODCF3 ODCF2 ODCF1 ODCF0

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 16-7: SLRCONx: SLEW RATE CONTROL REGISTER

SLRx7 SLRx6 SLRx5 SLRx4 SLRx3 SLRx2 SLRx1 SLRx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SLRx[7:0]: Slew Rate Control on Pins Rx[7:0], respectively

1 = Port pin slew rate is limited
0 = Port pin slews at maximum rate
TABLE 16-8: SLEW RATE CONTROL REGISTERS

SLRCONA SLRA7 SLRA6 SLRA5 SLRA4 SLRA3 SLRA2 SLRA1 SLRA0
SLRCONB SLRB7 SLRB6 SLRB5 SLRB4 SLRB3 SLRB2 SLRB1 SLRB0
SLRCONC SLRC7 SLRC6 SLRC5 SLRC4 SLRC3 SLRC2 SLRC1 SLRC0
SLRCOND(1) SLRD7 SLRD6 SLRD5 SLRD4 SLRD3 SLRD2 SLRD1 SLRD0
SLRCONE(1) — — — — — SLRE2 SLRE1 SLRE0
SLRCONF(2) SLRF7 SLRF6 SLRF5 SLRF4 SLRF3 SLRF2 SLRF1 SLRF0

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 16-8: INLVLx: INPUT LEVEL CONTROL REGISTER

INLVLx7 INLVLx6 INLVLx5 INLVLx4 INLVLx3 INLVLx2 INLVLx1 INLVLx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 INLVLx[7:0]: Input Level Select on Pins Rx[7:0], respectively

1 = ST input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change
0 = TTL input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change
TABLE 16-9: INPUT LEVEL PORT REGISTERS

INLVLA INLVLA7 INLVLA6 INLVLA5 INLVLA4 INLVLA3 INLVLA2 INLVLA1 INLVLA0
INLVLB INLVLB7 INLVLB6 INLVLB5 INLVLB4 INLVLB3 INLVLB2(1) INLVLB1(1) INLVLB0
INLVLC INLVLC7 INLVLC6 INLVLC5 INLVLC4(1) INLVLC3(1) INLVLC2 INLVLC1 INLVLC0
INLVLD(2) INLVLD7 INLVLD6 INLVLD5 INLVLD4 INLVLD3 INLVLD2 INLVLD1(1) INLVLD0(1)
INLVLE — — — — INLVLE3 INLVLE2(2) INLVLE1(2) INLVLE0(2)
INLVLF(3) INLVLF7 INLVLF6 INLVLF5 INLVLF4 INLVLF3 INLVLF2 INLVLF1 INLVLF0
Note 1: Any peripheral using the I 2C
pins read the I 2C
ST inputs when enabled via RxyI2C.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 16-9: RxyI2C: I2C PAD Rxy CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HS = Hardware set

bit 6 SLEW: I2C specific slew rate limiting is enabled
1 = I2C specific slew rate limiting is enabled. Standard pad slew limiting is disabled. The SLRxy bit
is ignored.
0 = Standard GPIO Slew Rate; enabled/disabled via SLRxy bit.
bit 5-4 PU[1:0]: I2C Pull-up Selection bits
11 = Reserved
10 = 10x current of standard weak pull-up
01 = 2x current of standard weak pull-up
00 = Standard GPIO weak pull-up, enabled via WPUxy bit
bit 1-0 TH[1:0]: I2C Input Threshold Selection bits
11 = SMBus 3.0 (1.35 V) input threshold
10 = SMBus 2.0 (2.1 V) input threshold
01 = I2C specific input thresholds
00 = Standard GPIO Input pull-up, enabled via INLVLxy registers
TABLE 16-10: I2C PAD CONTROL REGISTERS

RB1I2C — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0]
RB2I2C — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0]
RC3I2C — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0]
RC4I2C — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0]
RD0I2C(1) — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0]
RD1I2C(1) — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0]

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 16-11: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH I/O

Register on
Page
PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 264
PORTB RB7(1) RB6(1) RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 264
PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 264
PORTD(6) RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 RD0 264
PORTE — — — — RE3(2) RE2(6) RE1(6) RE0(6) 264
PORTF(7) RF7 RF6 RF5 RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1 RF0 264
TRISA TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 265
TRISB TRISB7(3) TRISB6(3) TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 265
TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 265
TRISD(6) TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 265
TRISE(6) — — — — — TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 265
TRISF(7) TRISF7 TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 TRISF1 TRISF0 265
LATA LATA7 LATA6 LATA5 LATA4 LATA3 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0 266
LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 266
LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 266
LATD(6) LATD7 LATD6 LATD5 LATD4 LATD3 LATD2 LATD1 LATD0 266
LATE(6) — — — — — LATE2 LATE1 LATE0 266
LATF(7) LATF7 LATF6 LATF5 LATF4 LATF3 LATF2 LATF1 LATF0 266
ANSELA ANSELA7 ANSELA6 ANSELA5 ANSELA4 ANSELA3 ANSELA2 ANSELA1 ANSELA0 267
ANSELB ANSELB7 ANSELB6 ANSELB5 ANSELB4 ANSELB3 ANSELB2 ANSELB1 ANSELB0 267
ANSELC ANSELC7 ANSELC6 ANSELC5 ANSELC4 ANSELC3 ANSELC2 ANSELC1 ANSELC0 267
ANSELD(6) ANSELD7 ANSELD6 ANSELD5 ANSELD4 ANSELD3 ANSELD2 ANSELD1 ANSELD0 267
ANSELE(6) — — — — — ANSELE2 ANSELE1 ANSELE0 267
ANSELF(7) ANSELF7 ANSELF6 ANSELF5 ANSELF4 ANSELF3 ANSELF2 ANSELF1 ANSELF0 267
WPUA WPUA7 WPUA6 WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3 WPUA2 WPUA1 WPUA0 268
WPUB WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0 268
WPUC WPUC7 WPUC6 WPUC5 WPUC4 WPUC3 WPUC2 WPUC1 WPUC0 268
WPUD(6) WPUD7 WPUD6 WPUD5 WPUD4 WPUD3 WPUD2 WPUD1 WPUD0 268
WPUE — — — — WPUE3(4) WPUE2(6) WPUE1(6) WPUE0(6) 268
WPUF(6) WPUF7 WPUF6 WPUF5 WPUF4 WPUF3 WPUF2 WPUF1 WPUF0 268
ODCONA ODCA7 ODCA6 ODCA5 ODCA4 ODCA3 ODCA2 ODCA1 ODCA0 269
ODCONB ODCB7 ODCB6 ODCB5 ODCB4 ODCB3 ODCB2 ODCB1 ODCB0 269
ODCONC ODCC7 ODCC6 ODCC5 ODCC4 ODCC3 ODCC2 ODCC1 ODCC0 269
ODCOND(6) ODCD7 ODCD6 ODCD5 ODCD4 ODCD3 ODCD2 ODCD1 ODCD0 269
ODCONE(6) — — — — — ODCE2 ODCE1 ODCE0 269
ODCONF(7) ODCF7 ODCF6 ODCF5 ODCF4 ODCF3 ODCF2 ODCF1 ODCF0 269
SLRCONA SLRA7 SLRA6 SLRA5 SLRA4 SLRA3 SLRA2 SLRA1 SLRA0 270
SLRCONB SLRB7 SLRB6 SLRB5 SLRB4 SLRB3 SLRB2 SLRB1 SLRB0 270
SLRCONC SLRC7 SLRC6 SLRC5 SLRC4 SLRC3 SLRC2 SLRC1 SLRC0 270
SLRCOND(6) SLRD7 SLRD6 SLRD5 SLRD4 SLRD3 SLRD2 SLRD1 SLRD0 270
SLRCONE(6) — — — — — SLRE2 SLRE1 SLRE0 270
SLRCONF(7) SLRF7 SLRF6 SLRF5 SLRF4 SLRF3 SLRF2 SLRF1 SLRF0 270
INLVLA INLVLA7 INLVLA6 INLVLA5 INLVLA4 INLVLA3 INLVLA2 INLVLA1 INLVLA0 271
INLVLB INLVLB7 INLVLB6 INLVLB5 INLVLB4 INLVLB3 INLVLB2(5) INLVLB1(5) INLVLB0 271
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by I/O Ports.
3: Bits RB6 and RB7 read ‘1’ while in Debug mode.
4: If MCLRE = 1, the weak pull-up in RE3 is always enabled; bit WPUE3 is not affected.
5: Any peripheral using the I2C pins read the I2C ST inputs when enabled via RxyI2C.
7: Unimplemented in PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47K42 parts.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 16-11: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH I/O (CONTINUED)
Register on
Page
INLVLC INLVLC7 INLVLC6 INLVLC5 INLVLC4(5) INLVLC3(5) INLVLC2 INLVLC1 INLVLC0 271
INLVLD(6) INLVLD7 INLVLD6 INLVLD5 INLVLD4 INLVLD3 INLVLD2 INLVLD1(5) INLVLD0(5) 271
INLVLF(7) INLVLF7 INLVLF6 INLVLF5 INLVLF4 INLVLF3 INLVLF2 INLVLF1 INLVLF0 271
INLVLE — — — — INLVLE3 — — — 271
RB1I2C — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0] 272
RB2I2C — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0] 272
RC3I2C — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0] 272
RC4I2C — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0] 272
RD0I2C(6) — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0] 272
RD1I2C(6) — SLEW PU[1:0] — — TH[1:0] 272
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by I/O Ports.
3: Bits RB6 and RB7 read ‘1’ while in Debug mode.
4: If MCLRE = 1, the weak pull-up in RE3 is always enabled; bit WPUE3 is not affected.
5: Any peripheral using the I2C pins read the I2C ST inputs when enabled via RxyI2C.
7: Unimplemented in PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47K42 parts.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
17.0 PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT
(PPS) MODULE
The Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) module connects
peripheral inputs and outputs to the device I/O pins. Only
digital signals are included in the selections. All analog
inputs and outputs remain fixed to their assigned pins.
Input and output selections are independent as shown in
the simplified block diagram Figure 17-1.
The peripheral input is selected with the peripheral
xxxPPS register (Register 17-1), and the peripheral
output is selected with the PORT RxyPPS register
(Register 17-2). For example, to select PORTC[7] as
the UART1 RX input, set U1RXPPS to 0b1 0111, and
to select PORTC[6] as the UART1 TX output set
RC6PPS to 0b01 0011.
17.1 PPS Inputs

Each peripheral has a PPS register with which the
inputs to the peripheral are selected. Inputs include the
device pins.
Multiple peripherals can operate from the same source
simultaneously. Port reads always return the pin level
regardless of peripheral PPS selection. If a pin also has
analog functions associated, the ANSEL bit for that pin
must be cleared to enable the digital input buffer.
Although every peripheral has its own PPS input
selection register, the selections are identical for every
peripheral as shown in Register 17-1.
Note: The notation “xxx” in the register name is
a place holder for the peripheral identifier.
For example, INT0PPS.
17.2 PPS Outputs

Each I/O pin has a PPS register with which the pin
output source is selected. With few exceptions, the port
TRIS control associated with that pin retains control
over the pin output driver. Peripherals that control the
pin output driver as part of the peripheral operation will
override the TRIS control as needed. These
peripherals include:
• UART I2C
Although every pin has its own PPS peripheral
selection register, the selections are identical for every
pin as shown in Register 17-2.
Note: The notation “Rxy” is a place holder for the
pin identifier. For example, RA0PPS.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 17-1: SIMPLIFIED PPS BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000262D
3/27/2017
RxyPPS
abcPPS
Rxy
Rxy
Peripheral abc
RxyPPS
Rxy
Peripheral xyz
RxyPPS
Rxy
xyzPPS
Rxy

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
17.3 Bidirectional Pins EXAMPLE 17-2: PPS UNLOCK SEQUENCE
; Disable interrupts:
PPS selections for peripherals with bidirectional BCF INTCON0,GIE
signals on a single pin must be made so that the PPS
input and PPS output select the same pin. Peripherals ; Bank to PPSLOCK register
that have bidirectional signals include: BANKSEL PPSLOCK
MOVLB PPSLOCK
• I2C
MOVLW 55h

Note: Refer to Table 17-1 for pins that are I2C
MOVWF PPSLOCK
compatible. Clock and data signals can be
MOVLW AAh
routed to any pin, however pins without MOVWF PPSLOCK
I2C compatibility will operate at standard
TTL/ST logic levels as selected by the ; Clear PPSLOCKED bit to enable writes
INVLV register. ; Only a BCF instruction will work
BCF PPSLOCK,0
17.4 PPS Lock ; Enable Interrupts
The PPS includes a mode in which all input and output BSF INTCON0,GIE
selections can be locked to prevent inadvertent
changes. PPS selections are locked by setting the 17.5 PPS One-way Lock
PPSLOCKED bit of the PPSLOCK register. Setting and
clearing this bit requires a special sequence as an extra When the PPS1WAY Configuration bit is set, the
precaution against inadvertent changes. Examples of PPSLOCKED bit can only be cleared and set one time
setting and clearing the PPSLOCKED bit are shown in after a device Reset. This allows for clearing the
Example 17-1. PPSLOCKED bit so that the input and output selections
can be made during initialization. When the
EXAMPLE 17-1: PPS LOCK SEQUENCE PPSLOCKED bit is set after all selections have been
; Disable interrupts: made, it will remain set and cannot be cleared until after
BCF INTCON0,GIE the next device Reset event.
; Bank to PPSLOCK register 17.6 Operation During Sleep

BANKSEL PPSLOCK
MOVLB PPSLOCK PPS input and output selections are unaffected by
MOVLW 55h Sleep.

17.7 Effects of a Reset
MOVWF PPSLOCK
MOVLW AAh A device Power-on-Reset (POR) clears all PPS input
MOVWF PPSLOCK and output selections to their default values. All other
Resets leave the selections unchanged. Default input
; Set PPSLOCKED bit to disable writes
selections are shown in pin allocation Table 1. The PPS
; Only a BSF instruction will work
BSF PPSLOCK,0 one-way lock is also removed.
; Enable Interrupts
BSF INTCON0,GIE

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
17.8 Register Definitions: PPS Input Selection
REGISTER 17-1: xxxPPS: PERIPHERAL xxx INPUT SELECTION
U-0 U-0 R/W-m/u(1,3) R/W-m/u(1) R/W-m/u(1) R/W-m/u(1) R/W-m/u(1) R/W-m/u(1)
— — xxxPPS[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets
u = Bit is unchanged x = Bit is unknown q = value depends on peripheral
‘1’ = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, m = value depends on default location for that input
‘0’ = Bit is cleared read as ‘0’

bit 5-3 xxxPPS[5:3]: Peripheral xxx Input PORTx Pin Selection bits
See Table 17-1 for the list of available ports and default pin locations.
101 = PORTF(2)
100 = PORTE(3)
011 = PORTD(3)
010 = PORTC
001 = PORTB
000 = PORTA
bit 2-0 xxxPPS[2:0]: Peripheral xxx Input PORTx Pin Selection bits
111 = Peripheral input is from PORTx Pin 7 (Rx7)
Note 1: The Reset value ‘m’ of this register is determined by device default locations for that input.
2: Reserved on PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47K42 parts.
3: Reserved on PIC18LF26K42 parts.

TABLE 17-1: PPS INPUT REGISTER DETAILS

Default Pin Register Input Available from Selected PORTx
PPS Input
Peripheral Selection at Reset Value
Register PIC18(L)F26/27K42 PIC18(L)F45/46/47K42 PIC18(L)F55/56/57K42
POR at POR
Interrupt 0 INT0PPS RB0 0b0 1000 A B — A B — — — A B — — — —
Interrupt 1 INT1PPS RB1 0b0 1001 A B — A B — — — — B — D — —
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Interrupt 2 INT2PPS RB2 0b0 1010 A B — A B — — — — B — — — F
Timer0 Clock T0CKIPPS RA4 0b0 0100 A B — A B — — — A — — — — F
Timer1 Clock T1CKIPPS RC0 0b1 0000 A — C A — C — — — — C — E —
Timer1 Gate T1GPPS RB5 0b0 1101 — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
Timer3 Clock T3CKIPPS RC0 0b1 0000 — B C — B C — — - — C — E —
Timer3 Gate T3GPPS RC0 0b1 0000 A — C A — C — — A — C — — —
Timer5 Clock T5CKIPPS RC2 0b1 0010 A — C A — C — — — — C — E —
Timer5 Gate T5GPPS RB4 0b0 1100 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
Timer2 Clock T2INPPS RC3 0b1 0011 A — C A — C — — A — C — — —
Timer4 Clock T4INPPS RC5 0b1 0101 — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
Timer6 Clock T6INPPS RB7 0b0 1111 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
CCP1 CCP1PPS RC2 0b1 0010 — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
CCP2 CCP2PPS RC1 0b1 0001 — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
CCP3 CCP3PPS RB5 0b0 1101 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
CCP4 CCP4PPS RB0 0b0 1000 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
SMT1 Window SMT1WINPPS RC0 0b1 0000 — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
SMT1 Signal SMT1SIGPPS RC1 0b1 0001 — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
CWG1 CWG1PPS RB0 0b0 1000 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
DSM1 Carrier MD1CARLPPS RA3 0b0 0011 A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
Low
DSM1 Carrier MD1CARHPPS RA4 0b0 0100 A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
High
DS40001919E-page 279
DSM1 Source MD1SRCPPS RA5 0b0 0101 A — C A — — D — A — — D — —

CLCx Input 1 CLCIN0PPS RA0 0b0 0000 A — C A — C — — A — C — — —
CLCx Input 2 CLCIN1PPS RA1 0b0 0001 A — C A — C — — A — C — — —
CLCx Input 3 CLCIN2PPS RB6 0b0 1110 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
CLCx Input 4 CLCIN3PPS RB7 0b0 1111 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
TABLE 17-1: PPS INPUT REGISTER DETAILS
Default Pin Register Input Available from Selected PORTx

PPS Input
Peripheral Selection at Reset Value
Register PIC18(L)F26/27K42 PIC18(L)F45/46/47K42 PIC18(L)F55/56/57K42
POR at POR
ADC Conversion ADACTPPS RB4 0b0 1100 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
Trigger
SPI1 Clock SPI1SCKPPS RC3 0b1 0011 — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
SPI1 Data SPI1SDIPPS RC4 0b1 0100 — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SPI1 Slave SPI1SSPPS RA5 0b0 0101 A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
Select
I2C1 Clock I2C1SCLPPS RC3 0b1 0011 — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
I2C1 Data I2C1SDAPPS RC4 0b1 0100 — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
I2C2 Clock I2C2SCLPPS RB1 0b0 1001 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
I2C2 Data I2C2SDAPPS RB2 0b0 1010 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
UART1 Receive U1RXPPS RC7 0b1 0111 — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
UART1 Clear To U1CTSPPS RC6 0b1 0110 — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
Send
UART2 Receive U2RXPPS RB7 0b0 1111 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
UART2 Clear To U2CTSPPS RB6 0b0 1110 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
Send
DS40001919E-page 280
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 17-2: RxyPPS: PIN Rxy OUTPUT SOURCE SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u
— — RxyPPS[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 RxyPPS[5:0]: Pin Rxy Output Source Selection bits
See Table 17-2 for the list of available ports.

TABLE 17-2: PPS OUTPUT REGISTER DETAILS

Device Configuration
RxyPPS[5:0] Pin Rxy Output Source
PIC18(L)F26K42 PIC18(L)F45/46K42 PIC18(L)F55/56/57K42
0b11 1111 - Reserved

0b11 0011
0b11 0010 ADGRDB A — C A — C — — A — — — — F
0b11 0001 ADGRDA A — C A — C — — A — — — — F
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
0b11 0000 CWG3D A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
0b10 1111 CWG3C A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
0b10 1110 CWG3B A — C A — — — E A — — — E —
0b10 1101 CWG3A — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
0b10 1100 CWG2D — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b10 1011 CWG2C — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b10 1010 CWG2B — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b10 1001 CWG2A — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
0b10 1000 DSM1 A — C A — — D — A — — D - —
0b10 0111 CLKR — B C — B C — — — B — — E —
0b10 0110 NCO1 A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
0b10 0101 TMR0 — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
0b10 0100 I2C2 (SDA) — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b10 0011 I2C2 (SCL) — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b10 0010 I2C1 (SDA) — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
0b10 0001 I2C1 (SCL) — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
0b10 0000 SPI1 (SS) A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
0b01 1111 SPI1 (SDO) — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
0b01 1110 SPI1 (SCK) — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
0b01 1101 C2OUT A — C A — — — E A — — — E —
0b01 1100 C1OUT A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
0b01 1001
0b01 1000 UART2 (RTS) — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
DS40001919E-page 282
0b01 0111 UART2 (TXDE) — B C — B — D — — B — D — —

0b01 0110 UART2 (TX) — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b01 0101 UART1 (RTS) — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
0b01 0100 UART1 (TXDE) — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
0b01 0011 UART1 (TX) — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
TABLE 17-2: PPS OUTPUT REGISTER DETAILS
Device Configuration
RxyPPS[5:0] Pin Rxy Output Source
PIC18(L)F26K42 PIC18(L)F45/46K42 PIC18(L)F55/56/57K42

0b01 0001
0b01 0000 PWM8 A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
0b00 1111 PWM7 A — C A — C — — — — C — — F
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
0b00 1110 PWM6 A — C A — — D — A — — D — —
0b00 1101 PWM5 A — C A — C — — A — — — — F
0b00 1100 CCP4 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b00 1011 CCP3 — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b00 1010 CCP2 — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
0b00 1001 CCP1 — B C — B C — — — — C — — F
0b00 1000 CWG1D — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b00 0111 CWG1C — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b00 0110 CWG1B — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b00 0101 CWG1A — B C — B C — — — B C — — —
0b00 0100 CLC4OUT — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b00 0011 CLC3OUT — B C — B — D — — B — D — —
0b00 0010 CLC2OUT A — C A — C — — A — — — — F
0b00 0001 CLC1OUT A — C A — C — — A — — — — F
0b00 0000 LATxy A B C A B C D E A B C D E F
DS40001919E-page 283
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 17-3: PPSLOCK: PPS LOCK REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — — PPSLOCKED
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 0 PPSLOCKED: PPS Locked bit
1 = PPS is locked.
0 = PPS is not locked. PPS selections can be changed.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 17-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE PPS MODULE

Register
on page
PPSLOCK — — — — — — — PPSLOCKED 284

INT0PPS — — INT0PPS[5:0] 278
T0CKIPPS — — T0CKPPS[5:0] 278
T1GPPS — — T1GPPS[5:0] 278
T3CKIPPS — — T3CKIPPS[5:0] 278
T3GPPS — — T3GPPS[5:0] 278
T5GPPS — — T5GPPS[5:0] 278
T2INPPS — — T2INPPS[5:0] 278
CCP1PPS — — CCP1PPS[5:0] 278
SMT1WINPPS — — SMT1WINPPS[5:0] 278
SMT1SIGPPS — — SMT1SIGPPS[5:0] 278
CWG1PPS — — CWG1PPS[5:0] 278
MD1CARLPPS — — MD1CARLPPS[5:0] 278
MD1CARHPPS — — MD1CARHPPS[5:0] 278
MD1SRCPPS — — MD1SRCPPS[5:0] 278
CLCIN0PPS — — CLCIN0PPS[5:0] 278
ADACTPPS — — ADACTPPS[5:0] 278
SPI1SCKPPS — — SPI1SCKPPS[5:0] 278
SPI1SDIPPS — — SPI1SDIPPS[5:0] 278
SPI1SSPPS — — SPI1SSPPS[5:0] 278
I2C1SCLPPS — — I2C1SCLPPS[5:0] 278
I2C1SDAPPS — — I2C1SDAPPS[5:0] 278
I2C2SCLPPS — — I2C2SCLPPS[5:0] 278
I2C2SDAPPS — — I2C2SDAPPS[5:0] 278
U1RXPPS — — U1RXPPS[5:0] 278
U1CTSPPS — — U1CTSPPS[5:0] 278
U2RXPPS — — U2RXPPS[5:0] 278
U2CTSPPS — — U2CTSPPS[5:0] 278
RxyPPS — — RxyPPS[5:0] 281
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the PPS module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
18.0 INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE 18.3 Interrupt Flags
PORTA, PORTB, PORTC and pin RE3 of PORTE can The IOCAFx, IOCBFx, IOCCFx and IOCEF3 bits located
be configured to operate as Interrupt-on-Change (IOC) in the IOCAF, IOCBF, IOCCF and IOCEF registers
pins on PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 family respectively, are status flags that correspond to the
devices. An interrupt can be generated by detecting a interrupt-on-change pins of the associated port. If an
signal that has either a rising edge or a falling edge. Any expected edge is detected on an appropriately enabled
individual port pin, or combination of port pins, can be pin, then the status flag for that pin will be set, and an
configured to generate an interrupt. The interrupt-on- interrupt will be generated if the IOCIE bit is set. The
change module has the following features: IOCIF bit of the PIR0 register reflects the status of all
IOCAFx, IOCBFx, IOCCFx and IOCEF3 bits.
• Interrupt-on-Change enable (Master Switch)
• Individual pin configuration
18.4 Clearing Interrupt Flags
• Rising and falling edge detection
• Individual pin interrupt flags The individual status flags, (IOCAFx, IOCBFx, IOCCFx
and IOCEF3 bits), can be cleared by resetting them to
Figure 18-1 is a block diagram of the IOC module.
zero. If another edge is detected during this clearing
operation, the associated status flag will be set at the
18.1 Enabling the Module end of the sequence, regardless of the value actually
To allow individual port pins to generate an interrupt, the being written.
IOCIE bit of the PIEx register must be set. If the IOCIE In order to ensure that no detected edge is lost while
bit is disabled, the edge detection on the pin will still clearing flags, only AND operations masking out known
occur, but an interrupt will not be generated. changed bits should be performed. The following
sequence is an example of what should be performed.
18.2 Individual Pin Configuration
EXAMPLE 18-1: CLEARING INTERRUPT
For each port pin, a rising edge detector and a falling
FLAGS
edge detector are present. To enable a pin to detect a
(PORTA EXAMPLE)
rising edge, the associated bit of the IOCxP register is
set. To enable a pin to detect a falling edge, the MOVLW 0xff
associated bit of the IOCxN register is set. XORWF IOCAF, W
ANDWF IOCAF, F
A pin can be configured to detect rising and falling
edges simultaneously by setting both associated bits of
the IOCxP and IOCxN registers, respectively. 18.5 Operation in Sleep
The interrupt-on-change interrupt sequence will wake
the device from Sleep mode, if the IOCIE bit is set.
If an edge is detected while in Sleep mode, the IOCxF
register will be updated prior to the first instruction
executed out of Sleep.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 18-1: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE BLOCK DIAGRAM (PORTA EXAMPLE)
Rev. 10-000037D
10/3/2016
IOCANx D Q
R Q4Q1
edge
detect
RAx
to data bus
data bus = S
IOCAPx D Q D Q IOCAFx
0 or 1
R
write IOCAFx
IOCIE
Q2
IOC interrupt
to CPU core
from all other
IOCnFx individual
pin detectors

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
18.6 Register Definitions: Interrupt-on-Change Control
REGISTER 18-1: IOCxP: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE POSITIVE EDGE REGISTER EXAMPLE

IOCxP7 IOCxP6 IOCxP5 IOCxP4 IOCxP3 IOCxP2 IOCxP1 IOCxP0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 IOCxP[7:0]: Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Enable bits

1 = Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCx pin for a positive-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag
will be set upon detecting an edge.
0 = Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin.
REGISTER 18-2: IOCxN: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE NEGATIVE EDGE REGISTER EXAMPLE

IOCxN7 IOCxN6 IOCxN5 IOCxN4 IOCxN3 IOCxN2 IOCxN1 IOCxN0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 IOCxN[7:0]: Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Enable bits

1 = Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCx pin for a negative-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt
flag will be set upon detecting an edge.
0 = Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin
REGISTER 18-3: IOCxF: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE FLAG REGISTER EXAMPLE

R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0
IOCxF7 IOCxF6 IOCxF5 IOCxF4 IOCxF3 IOCxF2 IOCxF1 IOCxF0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HS - Bit is set in hardware
bit 7-0 IOCxF[7:0]: Interrupt-on-Change Flag bits

1 = A enabled change was detected on the associated pin. Set when IOCP[n] = 1 and a positive edge was detected
on the IOCn pin, or when IOCN[n] = 1 and a negative edge was detected on the IOCn pin
0 = No change was detected, or the user cleared the detected change

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 18-1: IOC REGISTERS

IOCAP IOCAP7 IOCAP6 IOCAP5 IOCAP4 IOCAP3 IOCAP2 IOCAP1 IOCAP0
IOCAN IOCAN7 IOCAN6 IOCAN5 IOCAN4 IOCAN3 IOCAN2 IOCAN1 IOCAN0
IOCAF IOCAF7 IOCAF6 IOCAF5 IOCAF4 IOCAF3 IOCAF2 IOCAF1 IOCAF0
IOCBP IOCBP7 IOCBP6 IOCBP5 IOCBP4 IOCBP3 IOCBP2 IOCBP1 IOCBP0
IOCBN IOCBN7 IOCBN6 IOCBN5 IOCBN4 IOCBN3 IOCBN2 IOCBN1 IOCBN0
IOCBF IOCBF7 IOCBF6 IOCBF5 IOCBF4 IOCBF3 IOCBF2 IOCBF1 IOCBF0
IOCCP IOCCP7 IOCCP6 IOCCP5 IOCCP4 IOCCP3 IOCCP2 IOCCP1 IOCCP0
IOCCN IOCCN7 IOCCN6 IOCCN5 IOCCN4 IOCCN3 IOCCN2 IOCCN1 IOCCN0
IOCCF IOCCF7 IOCCF6 IOCCF5 IOCCF4 IOCCF3 IOCCF2 IOCCF1 IOCCF0
IOCEP — — — — IOCEP3 (1) — — —
IOCEN — — — — IOCEN3(1) — — —
IOCEF — — — — IOCEF3(1) — — —
Note 1: If MCLRE = 1 or LVP = 1, RE3 port functionality is disabled and IOC on RE3 is not available.
TABLE 18-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE

Register
on Page
IOCxF IOCxF7 IOCxF6 IOCxF5 IOCxF4 IOCxF3 IOCxF2 IOCxF1 IOCxF0 288
IOCxN IOCxN7 IOCxN6 IOCxN5 IOCxN4 IOCxN3 IOCxN2 IOCxN1 IOCxN0 288
IOCxP IOCxP7 IOCxP6 IOCxP5 IOCxP4 IOCxP3 IOCxP2 IOCxP1 IOCxP0 288
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by interrupt-on-change.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
19.0 PERIPHERAL MODULE 19.3 Effects of a Reset
DISABLE (PMD) Following any Reset, each control bit is set to ‘0’,
Sleep, Idle and Doze modes allow users to enabling all modules.
substantially reduce power consumption by slowing or
stopping the CPU clock. Even so, peripheral modules 19.4 System Clock Disable
still remain clocked, and thus, consume some amount
Setting SYSCMD (PMD0, Register 19-1) disables the
of power. There may be cases where the application
system clock (FOSC) distribution network to the
needs what these modes do not provide: the ability to
peripherals. Not all peripherals make use of SYSCLK,
allocate limited power resources to the CPU while
so not all peripherals are affected. Refer to the specific
eliminating power consumption from the peripherals.
peripheral description to see if it will be affected by this
The PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 microcontrol- bit.
lers address this requirement by allowing peripheral
modules to be selectively enabled or disabled, placing
them into the lowest possible power mode.
All modules are ON by default following any Reset.
19.1 Disabling a Module

Disabling a module has the following effects:
• All clock and control inputs to the module are
suspended; there are no logic transitions, and the
module will not function.
• The module is held in Reset.
• Any SFR becomes “unimplemented”
- Writing is disabled
- Reading returns 00h
• I/O functionality is prioritized as per Section 16.1,
I/O Priorities
• All associated Input Selection registers are also
disabled
19.2 Enabling a Module

When the PMD register bit is cleared, the module is
re-enabled and will be in its Reset state (Power-on
Reset). SFR data will reflect the POR Reset values.
Depending on the module, it may take up to one full
instruction cycle for the module to become active.
There should be no interaction with the module
(e.g., writing to registers) for at least one instruction
after it has been re-enabled.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
19.5 Register Definitions: Peripheral Module Disable
REGISTER 19-1: PMD0: PMD CONTROL REGISTER 0

SYSCMD FVRMD HLVDMD CRCMD SCANMD NVMMD CLKRMD IOCMD
7 0
Legend:
bit 7 SYSCMD: Disable Peripheral System Clock Network bit(1)

See description in Section 19.4 “System Clock Disable”.
1 = System clock network disabled (FOSC)
0 = System clock network enabled
bit 6 FVRMD: Disable Fixed Voltage Reference bit
1 = FVR module disabled
0 = FVR module enabled
bit 5 HLVDMD: Disable High/Low-Voltage Detect bit
1 = HLVD module disabled
0 = HLVD module enabled
bit 4 CRCMD: Disable CRC Engine bit
1 = CRC module disabled
0 = CRC module enabled
bit 3 SCANMD: Disable NVM Memory Scanner bit(2)
1 = NVM Memory Scan module disabled
0 = NVM Memory Scan module enabled
bit 2 NVMMD: NVM Module Disable bit(3)
1 = All Memory reading and writing is disabled; NVMCON registers cannot be written
0 = NVM module enabled
bit 1 CLKRMD: Disable Clock Reference bit
1 = CLKR module disabled
0 = CLKR module enabled
bit 0 IOCMD: Disable Interrupt-on-Change bit, All Ports
1 = IOC module(s) disabled
0 = IOC module(s) enabled
Note 1: Clearing the SYSCMD bit disables the system clock (FOSC) to peripherals, however peripherals clocked
by FOSC/4 are not affected.
2: Subject to SCANE bit in CONFIG4H.
3: When enabling NVM, a delay of up to 1 µs may be required before accessing data.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

NCO1MD TMR6MD TMR5MD TMR4MD TMR3MD TMR2MD TMR1MD TMR0MD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 NCO1MD: Disable NCO1 Module bit

1 = NCO1 module disabled
0 = NCO1 module enabled
bit 6 TMR6MD: Disable Timer TMR6 bit
1 = TMR6 module disabled
0 = TMR6 module enabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— DACMD ADCMD — — CMP2MD CMP1MD ZCDMD(1)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6 DACMD: Disable DAC bit
1 = DAC module disabled
0 = DAC module enabled
bit 5 ADCMD: Disable ADCC bit
1 = ADCC module disabled
0 = ADCC module enabled
bit 2 CMP2MD: Disable Comparator CMP2 bit
1 = CMP2 module disabled
0 = CMP2 module enabled
bit 1 CMP1MD: Disable Comparator CMP1 bit
1 = CMP1 module disabled
0 = CMP1 module enabled
bit 0 ZCDMD: Disable Zero-Cross Detect module bit(1)
1 = ZCD module disabled
0 = ZCD module enabled
Note 1: Subject to ZCD bit in CONFIG2H.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PWM8MD PWM7MD PWM6MD PWM5MD CCP4MD CCP3MD CCP2MD CCP1MD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 PWM8MD: Disable Pulse-Width Modulator PWM8 bit

1 = PWM8 module disabled
0 = PWM8 module enabled
bit 3 CCP4MD: Disable Capture/Compare/PWM CCP4 bit
1 = CCP4 module disabled
0 = CCP4 module enabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
CWG3MD CWG2MD CWG1MD — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CWG3MD: Disable CWG3 Module bit

1 = CWG3 module disabled
0 = CWG3 module enabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — U2MD U1MD — SPI1MD I2C2MD I2C1MD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5 U2MD: Disable UART2 bit
1 = UART2 module disabled
0 = UART2 module enabled
bit 4 U1MD: Disable UART1 bit
1 = UART1 module disabled
0 = UART1 module enabled
bit 2 SPI1MD: Disable SPI1 Module bit
1 = SPI1 module disabled
0 = SPI1 module enabled
bit 1 I2C2MD: Disable I2C2 Module bit
1 = I2C2 module disabled
0 = I2C2 module enabled
bit 0 I2C1MD: Disable I2C1 Module bit
1 = I2C1 module disabled
0 = I2C1 module enabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — SMT1MD CLC4MD CLC3MD CLC2MD CLC1MD DSMMD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5 SMT1MD: Disable SMT1 Module bit
1 = SMT1 module disabled
0 = SMT1 module enabled
bit 4 CLC1MD: Disable CLC4 Module bit
1 = CLC4 module disabled
0 = CLC4 module enabled
bit 0 DSMMD: Disable Data Signal Modulator bit
1 = DSM module disabled
0 = DSM module enabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — DMA2MD DMA1MD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 1 DMA2MD: Disable DMA2 Module bit
1 = DMA2 module disabled
0 = DMA2 module enabled
bit 0 DMA1MD: Disable DMA1 Module bit
1 = DMA1 module disabled
0 = DMA1 module enabled
TABLE 19-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PERIPHERAL MODULE DISABLE

Register
on Page
PMD0 SYSCMD FVRMD HLVDMD CRCMD SCANMD NVMMD CLKRMD IOCMD 291
PMD1 NCO1MD TMR6MD TMR5MD TMR4MD TMR3MD TMR2MD TMR1MD TMR0MD 292
PMD2 — DACMD ADCMD — — CMP2MD CMP1MD ZCDMD 293
PMD3 PWM8MD PWM7MD PWM6MD PWM5MD CCP4MD CCP3MD CCP2MD CCP1MD 294
PMD4 CWG3MD CWG2MD CWG1MD — — — — — 295
PMD5 — — U2MD U1MD — SPI1MD I2C2MD I2C1MD 296
PMD6 — — SMT1MD CLC4MD CLC3MD CLC2MD CLC1MD DSMMD 296
PMD7 — — — — — — DMA2MD DMA1MD 298
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by peripheral module disable.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
20.0 TIMER0 MODULE
Timer0 module is an 8/16-bit timer/counter with the
following features:
• 16-bit timer/counter
• 8-bit timer/counter with programmable period
• Synchronous or asynchronous operation
• Selectable clock sources
• Programmable prescaler
• Programmable postscaler
• Operation during Sleep mode
• Interrupt on match or overflow
• Output on I/O pin (via PPS) or to other peripherals
FIGURE 20-1: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF TIMER0

Rev. 10-000017F
11/11/2016
CLC1 111
SOSC 110 T0_match
Peripherals
MFINTOSC 101 CKPS<3:0>
LFINTOSC 100 TMR0 OUTPS<3:0> T0IF
Prescaler 1
HFINTOSC 011 IN OUT Postscaler T0_out
SYNC 0
FOSC/4 010
PPS 001 FOSC/4 MD16 TMR0
ASYNC D Q PPS
000
T0CKIPPS CK Q RxyPPS
CS<2:0>
8-bit TMR0 (MD16 = 0) 16-bit TMR0 (MD16 = 1)
Clear IN TMR0 High OUT

IN TMR0L R TMR0L
Byte
8
Read TMR0L
COMPARATOR OUT
Write TMR0L
T0_match 8
8 TMR0H
TMR0 High
Byte
Latch 8
Enable
TMR0H
8
Internal Data Bus

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
20.1 Timer0 Operation Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared
on the following events:
Timer0 can operate as either an 8-bit timer/counter or
• A write to the TMR0L register
a 16-bit timer/counter. The mode is selected with the
• A write to either the T0CON0 or T0CON1
MD16 bit of the T0CON register.
registers
20.1.1 16-BIT MODE • Any device Reset – Power-on Reset (POR),
MCLR Reset, Watchdog Timer Reset (WDTR) or
The register pair TMR0H:TMR0L increments on the • Brown-out Reset (BOR)
rising edge of the clock source. A 15-bit prescaler on
the clock input gives several prescale options (see 20.1.3 COUNTER MODE
prescaler control bits, CKPS[3:0] in the T0CON1
In Counter mode, the prescaler is normally disabled by
register).
setting the CKPS bits of the T0CON1 register to ‘0000’.
20.1.1.1 Timer0 Reads and Writes in 16-Bit Each rising edge of the clock input (or the output of the
prescaler if the prescaler is used) increments the
Mode
counter by ‘1’.
In 16-bit mode, in order to avoid rollover between
reading high and low registers, the TMR0H register is 20.1.4 TIMER MODE
a buffered copy of the actual high byte of Timer0, which
In Timer mode, the Timer0 module will increment every
is neither directly readable, nor writable (see Figure 20-
instruction cycle as long as there is a valid clock signal
1). TMR0H is updated with the contents of the high byte
and the CKPS bits of the T0CON1 register
of Timer0 during a read of TMR0L. This provides the
(Register 20-2) are set to ‘0000’. When a prescaler is
ability to read all 16 bits of Timer0 without having to
added, the timer will increment at the rate based on the
verify that the read of the high and low byte was valid,
prescaler value.
due to a rollover between successive reads of the high
and low byte. 20.1.5 ASYNCHRONOUS MODE
Similarly, a write to the high byte of Timer0 must also When the ASYNC bit of the T0CON1 register is set
take place through the TMR0H Buffer register. The high (ASYNC = ‘1’), the counter increments with each rising
byte is updated with the contents of TMR0H when a edge of the input source (or output of the prescaler, if
write occurs to TMR0L. This allows all 16 bits of Timer0 used). Asynchronous mode allows the counter to
to be updated at once. continue operation during Sleep mode provided that
the clock also continues to operate during Sleep.
20.1.2 8-BIT MODE
In 8-bit mode, the value of TMR0L is compared to that 20.1.6 SYNCHRONOUS MODE
of the Period buffer, a copy of TMR0H, on each clock When the ASYNC bit of the T0CON1 register is clear
cycle. When the two values match, the following events (ASYNC = ‘0’), the counter clock is synchronized to the
happen: system clock (FOSC/4). When operating in
• TMR0_out goes high for one prescaled clock Synchronous mode, the counter clock frequency
period cannot exceed FOSC/4.
• TMR0L is reset
• The contents of TMR0H are copied to the period 20.2 Clock Source Selection
buffer
The CS[2:0] bits of the T0CON1 register are used to
In 8-bit mode, the TMR0L and TMR0H registers are
select the clock source for Timer0. Register 20-2
both directly readable and writable. The TMR0L
displays the clock source selections.
register is cleared on any device Reset, while the
TMR0H register initializes at FFh.
20.2.1 INTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE
When the internal clock source is selected, Timer0
operates as a timer and will increment on multiples of
the clock source, as determined by the Timer0
prescaler.
20.2.2 EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE

When an external clock source is selected, Timer0 can
operate as either a timer or a counter. Timer0 will
increment on multiples of the rising edge of the external
clock source, as determined by the Timer0 prescaler.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
20.3 Programmable Prescaler 20.7 Timer0 Output
A software programmable prescaler is available for The Timer0 output can be routed to any I/O pin via the
exclusive use with Timer0. There are 16 prescaler RxyPPS output selection register (see Section
options for Timer0 ranging in powers of two from 1:1 to 17.0 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) Module” for
1:32768. The prescaler values are selected using the additional information). The Timer0 output can also be
CKPS[3:0] bits of the T0CON1 register. used by other peripherals, such as the auto-conversion
The prescaler is not directly readable or writable. trigger of the Analog-to-Digital Converter. Finally, the
Clearing the prescaler register can be done by writing Timer0 output can be monitored through software via
to the TMR0L register or to the T0CON0/T0CON1 the Timer0 output bit (OUT) of the T0CON0 register
register or by any Reset. (Register 20-1).
TMR0_out will be a pulse of one postscaled clock
20.4 Programmable Postscaler period when a match occurs between TMR0L and PR0
(Period register for TMR0) in 8-bit mode, or when
A software programmable postscaler (output divider) is TMR0 rolls over in 16-bit mode. The Timer0 output is a
available for exclusive use with Timer0. There are 16 50% duty cycle that toggles on each TMR0_out rising
postscaler options for Timer0 ranging from 1:1 to 1:16. clock edge.
The postscaler values are selected using the OUTPS
bits of the T0CON0 register.
The postscaler is not directly readable or writable.
Clearing the postscaler register can be done by writing
to the TMR0L register or to the T0CON0/T0CON1
register or by any Reset.

When operating synchronously, Timer0 will halt. When
operating asynchronously, Timer0 will continue to
increment and wake the device from Sleep (if Timer0
interrupts are enabled) provided that the input clock
source is active.
20.6 Timer0 Interrupts

The Timer0 interrupt flag bit (TMR0IF) is set when
either of the following conditions occur:
• 8-bit TMR0L matches the TMR0H value
• 16-bit TMR0 rolls over from ‘FFFFh’
When the postscaler bits (OUTPS) are set to 1:1
operation (no division), the T0IF flag bit will be set with
every TMR0 match or rollover. In general, the TMR0IF
flag bit will be set every OUTPS +1 matches or
rollovers.
If Timer0 interrupts are enabled (TMR0IE bit of the
PIE3 register = ‘1’), the CPU will be interrupted and the
device may wake from Sleep (see Section
20.2 “Clock Source Selection” for more details).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
20.8 Register Definitions: Timer0 Control
REGISTER 20-1: T0CON0: TIMER0 CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 U-0 R-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN — OUT MD16 OUTPS[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: TMR0 Enable bit

1 = The module is enabled and operating
0 = The module is disabled and in the lowest power mode
bit 5 OUT: TMR0 Output bit (read-only)
TMR0 output bit
bit 4 MD16: TMR0 Operating as 16-Bit Timer Select bit
1 = TMR0 is a 16-bit timer
0 = TMR0 is an 8-bit timer
bit 3-0 OUTPS[3:0]: TMR0 Output Postscaler (Divider) Select bits
1111 = 1:16 Postscaler

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 20-2: T0CON1: TIMER0 CONTROL REGISTER 1
CS[2:0] ASYNC CKPS[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-5 CS[2:0]:Timer0 Clock Source Select bits

111 = CLC1
110 = SOSC
100 = LFINTOSC
011 = HFINTOSC
010 = FOSC/4
001 = Pin selected by T0CKIPPS (Inverted)
000 = Pin selected by T0CKIPPS (Non-inverted)
bit 4 ASYNC: TMR0 Input Asynchronization Enable bit
1 = The input to the TMR0 counter is not synchronized to system clocks
0 = The input to the TMR0 counter is synchronized to FOSC/4
bit 3-0 CKPS[3:0]: Prescaler Rate Select bit
1111 = 1:32768
1110 = 1:16384
1101 = 1:8192
1100 = 1:4096
1011 = 1:2048
1010 = 1:1024
1001 = 1:512
1000 = 1:256
0111 = 1:128
0110 = 1:64
0101 = 1:32
0100 = 1:16
0011 = 1:8
0010 = 1:4
0001 = 1:2
0000 = 1:1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 20-3: TMR0L: TIMER0 COUNT REGISTER

TMR0L[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TMR0L[7:0]: TMR0 Counter bits [7:0]
REGISTER 20-4: TMR0H: TIMER0 PERIOD REGISTER

TMR0H[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 When MD16 = 0

PR0[7:0]:TMR0 Period Register Bits [7:0]
When MD16 = 1
TMR0H[15:8]: TMR0 Counter bits [15:8]
TABLE 20-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0

Register
on Page
T0CON0 EN — OUT MD16 OUTPS[3:0] 302
T0CON1 CS[2:0] ASYNC CKPS[3:0] 303
TMR0L TMR0L[7:0] 304
TMR0H TMR0H[15:8] 304
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by Timer0.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
21.0 TIMER1/3/5 MODULE WITH Asynchronous mode only)
GATE CONTROL • 16-Bit Read/Write Operation
• Time base for the Capture/Compare function with
Timer1/3/5 module is a 16-bit timer/counter with the the CCP modules
following features:
• Special Event Trigger (with CCP)
• 16-bit timer/counter register pair (TMRxH:TMRxL) • Selectable Gate Source Polarity
• Programmable internal or external clock source • Gate Toggle mode
• 2-bit prescaler • Gate Single-pulse mode
• Dedicated Secondary 32 kHz oscillator circuit • Gate Value Status
• Optionally synchronized comparator out • Gate Event Interrupt
• Multiple Timer1/3/5 gate (count enable) sources
Figure 21-1 is a block diagram of the Timer1/3/5
• Interrupt on overflow module.
• Wake-up on overflow (external clock,
FIGURE 21-1: TIMER1/3/5 BLOCK DIAGRAM

Rev. 10-000018L
GSS<4:0> 9/12/2016
5
TxGPPS
GSPM
PPS 00000
1
0 Single Pulse D Q GVAL
NOTE (5) 0
11111
1 Acq. Control
Q1
D Q
GPOL GGO/DONE
CK Q
ON Interrupt
set bit
R
GTM det TMRxGIF
GE
set flag bit
TMRxIF
ON
EN
(2) To Comparators (6)
TMRx
Tx_overflow Synchronized Clock Input
TMRxH TMRxL Q D 0
1
TxCLK
SYNC
CS<4:0>
5
TxCKIPPS
(1)
PPS 00000
Prescaler
Synchronize(3)
1,2,4,8
Note (4) det
11111
2
Fosc/2
CKPS<1:0> Internal Sleep
Clock Input
Note 1: ST Buffer is high speed type when using TxCKIPPS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
21.1 Timer1/3/5 Operation The following asynchronous sources may be used at
the Timer1/3/5 gate:
The Timer1/3/5 module is a 16-bit incrementing
counter which is accessed through the TMRxH:TMRxL • Asynchronous event on the TxGPPS pin
register pair. Writes to TMRxH or TMRxL directly • TMR0OUT
update the counter. • TMR1/3/5OUT (excluding the TMR for which it is
When used with an internal clock source, the module is being used)
a timer and increments on every instruction cycle. • TMR 2/4/6OUT (postscaled)
When used with an external clock source, the module • CMP1/2OUT
can be used as either a timer or counter and • SMT1_match
increments on every selected edge of the external • NCO1OUT
source. • PWM3/4 OUT
Timer1/3/5 is enabled by configuring the ON and GE • CCP1/2/3/4 OUT
bits in the TxCON and TxGCON registers, respectively. • CLC1/2/3/4 OUT
Table 21-1 displays the Timer1/3/5 enable selections.
• ZCDOUT
TABLE 21-1: TIMER1/3/5 ENABLE Note: In Counter mode, a falling edge must be
SELECTIONS registered by the counter prior to the first
Timer1/3/5 incrementing rising edge after any one or
ON GE more of the following conditions:
Operation
1 1 Count Enabled • Timer1/3/5 enabled after POR
• Write to TMRxH or TMRxL
1 0 Always On
• Timer1/3/5 is disabled
0 1 Off
• Timer1/3/5 is disabled (TMRxON = 0)
0 0 Off when TxCKI is high then Timer1/3/5
is enabled (TMRxON = 1) when
21.2 Clock Source Selection TxCKI is low.
The CS[4:0] bits of the TMRxCLK register (Register 21-
21.2.2 EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE
3) are used to select the clock source for Timer1/3/5.
The TxCLK register allows the selection of several When the external clock source is selected, the Timer1/
possible synchronous and asynchronous clock 3/5 module may work as a timer or a counter.
sources. Register 21-3 displays the clock source When enabled to count, Timer1/3/5 is incremented on
selections. the rising edge of the external clock input of the
TxCKIPPS pin. This external clock source can be
21.2.1 INTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE synchronized to the microcontroller system clock or it
When the internal clock source is selected the can run asynchronously.
TMRxH:TMRxL register pair will increment on multiples When used as a timer with a clock oscillator, an
of FOSC as determined by the Timer1/3/5 prescaler. external 32.768 kHz crystal can be used in conjunction
When the FOSC internal clock source is selected, the with the dedicated secondary internal oscillator circuit.
Timer1/3/5 register value will increment by four counts
every instruction clock cycle. Due to this condition, a
2 LSB error in resolution will occur when reading the
Timer1/3/5 value. To utilize the full resolution of Timer1/
3/5, an asynchronous input signal must be used to gate
the Timer1/3/5 clock input.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
21.3 Timer1/3/5 Prescaler 21.4.1 READING AND WRITING TIMER1/3/
5 IN ASYNCHRONOUS COUNTER
Timer1/3/5 has four prescaler options allowing 1, 2, 4 or
MODE
8 divisions of the clock input. The CKPS bits of the
TxCON register control the prescale counter. The Reading TMRxH or TMRxL while the timer is running
prescale counter is not directly readable or writable; from an external asynchronous clock will ensure a valid
however, the prescaler counter is cleared upon a write to read (taken care of in hardware). However, the user
TMRxH or TMRxL. should keep in mind that reading the 16-bit timer in two
8-bit values itself, poses certain problems, since the
21.4 Timer1/3/5 Operation in timer may overflow between the reads. For writes, it is
recommended that the user simply stop the timer and
Asynchronous Counter Mode
write the desired values. A write contention may occur
If control bit SYNC of the TxCON register is set, the by writing to the timer registers, while the register is
external clock input is not synchronized. The timer incrementing. This may produce an unpredictable
increments asynchronously to the internal phase value in the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair.
clocks. If external clock source is selected then the
timer will continue to run during Sleep and can 21.5 Timer1/3/5 16-Bit Read/Write Mode
generate an interrupt on overflow, which will wake up
the processor. However, special precautions in Timer1/3/5 can be configured to read and write all 16
software are needed to read/write the timer (see bits of data, to and from, the 8-bit TMRxL and TMRxH
Section 21.4.1 “Reading and Writing Timer1/3/5 in registers, simultaneously. The 16-bit read and write
Asynchronous Counter Mode”). operations are enabled by setting the RD16 bit of the
TxCON register.
Note: When switching from synchronous to
To accomplish this function, the TMRxH register value
asynchronous operation, it is possible to
is mapped to a buffer register called the TMRxH buffer
skip an increment. When switching from
register. While in 16-Bit mode, the TMRxH register is
asynchronous to synchronous operation,
not directly readable or writable and all read and write
it is possible to produce an additional
operations take place through the use of this TMRxH
increment.
buffer register.
When a read from the TMRxL register is requested, the
value of the TMRxH register is simultaneously loaded
into the TMRxH buffer register. When a read from the
TMRxH register is requested, the value is provided
from the TMRxH buffer register instead. This provides
the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of
the Timer1/3/5 value from a single instance in time.
Reference the block diagram in Figure 21-2 for more
details.
In contrast, when not in 16-Bit mode, the user must
read each register separately and determine if the
values have become invalid due to a rollover that may
have occurred between the read operations.
When a write request of the TMRxL register is
requested, the TMRxH buffer register is simultaneously
updated with the contents of the TMRxH register. The
value of TMRxH must be preloaded into the TMRxH
buffer register prior to the write request for the TMRxL
register. This provides the user with the ability to write
all 16 bits to the TMRxL:TMRxH register pair at the
same time.
Any requests to write to the TMRxH directly does not
clear the Timer1/3/5 prescaler value. The prescaler
value is only cleared through write requests to the
TMRxL register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 21-2: TIMER1/3/5 16-BIT READ/
WRITE MODE BLOCK
DIAGRAM
From
Timer1
Circuitry
TMR1 Set
TMR1L High Byte TMR1IF
on Overflow
8
Read TMR1L
Write TMR1L
8
8
TMR1H
8
8
Internal Data Bus
Block Diagram of Timer1 Example of TIMER1/3/5
21.6 Timer1/3/5 Gate

Timer1/3/5 can be configured to count freely or the
count can be enabled and disabled using Timer1/3/5
gate circuitry. This is also referred to as Timer1/3/5 gate
enable.
Timer1/3/5 gate can also be driven by multiple
selectable sources.
21.6.1 TIMER1/3/5 GATE ENABLE

The Timer1/3/5 Gate Enable mode is enabled by
setting the TMRxGE bit of the TxGCON register. The
polarity of the Timer1/3/5 Gate Enable mode is
configured using the TxGPOL bit of the TxGCON
register.
When Timer1/3/5 Gate Enable mode is enabled,
Timer1/3/5 will increment on the rising edge of the
Timer1/3/5 clock source. When Timer1/3/5 Gate signal
is inactive, the timer will not increment and hold the
current count. See Figure 21-4 for timing details.
TABLE 21-2: TIMER1/3/5 GATE ENABLE

SELECTIONS
Timer1/3/5
TMRxCLK TxGPOL TxG
Operation
 1 1 Counts
 1 0 Holds Count
 0 1 Holds Count
 0 0 Counts

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
21.6.2 TIMER1/3/5 GATE SOURCE 21.6.4 TIMER1/3/5 GATE SINGLE-PULSE
SELECTION MODE
The gate source for Timer1/3/5 can be selected using When Timer1/3/5 Gate Single-Pulse mode is enabled,
the GSS[4:0] bits of the TMRxGATE register it is possible to capture a single-pulse gate event.
(Register 21-4). The polarity selection for the gate Timer1/3/5 Gate Single-Pulse mode is first enabled by
source is controlled by the TxGPOL bit of the TxGCON setting the GSPM bit in the TxGCON register. Next, the
register (Register 21-2). GGO/DONE bit in the TxGCON register must be set.
Any of the above mentioned signals can be used to The Timer1/3/5 will be fully enabled on the next
trigger the gate. The output of the CMPx can be incrementing edge of the gate signal. On the next
synchronized to the Timer1/3/5 clock or left trailing edge of the pulse, the GGO/DONE bit will
asynchronous. For more information see Section automatically be cleared. No other gate events will be
38.3.1 “Comparator Output Synchronization”. allowed to increment Timer1/3/5 until the GGO/DONE
bit is once again set in software.
21.6.3 TIMER1/3/5 GATE TOGGLE MODE Clearing the TxGSPM bit of the TxGCON register will
When Timer1/3/5 Gate Toggle mode is enabled, it is also clear the GGO/DONE bit. See Figure 21-6 for
possible to measure the duration between every rising timing details.
and falling edge of the gate signal. Enabling the Toggle mode and the Single-Pulse mode
The Timer1/3/5 gate source is routed through a flip-flop simultaneously will permit both sections to work
that changes state on every incrementing edge of the together. This allows the period on the Timer1/3/5 gate
signal. See Figure 21-5 for timing details. source to be measured. See Figure 21-7 for timing
details.
Timer1/3/5 Gate Toggle mode is enabled by setting the
GTM bit of the TxGCON register. When the GTM bit is 21.6.5 TIMER1/3/5 GATE VALUE STATUS
cleared, the flip-flop is cleared and held clear. This is
necessary in order to control which edge is measured. When Timer1/3/5 Gate Value Status is utilized, it is
possible to read the most current level of the gate
Note: Enabling Toggle mode at the same time signal. The value is stored in the GVAL bit in the
as changing the gate polarity may result in TxGCON register. The GVAL bit is valid even when the
indeterminate operation. Timer1/3/5 gate is not enabled (GE bit is cleared).
21.6.6 TIMER1/3/5 GATE EVENT

INTERRUPT
When Timer1/3/5 Gate Event Interrupt is enabled, it is
possible to generate an interrupt upon the completion
of a gate event. When the falling edge of GVAL occurs,
the TMRxGIF flag bit in the respective PIR register will
be set. If the TMRxGIE bit in the respective PIE register
is set, then an interrupt will be recognized.
The TMRxGIF flag bit operates even when the Timer1/
3/5 gate is not enabled (GE bit is cleared).
For more information on selecting high or low priority
status for the Timer1/3/5 Gate Event Interrupt see
Section 9.0 “Interrupt Controller”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
21.7 Timer1/3/5 Interrupt 21.9 CCP Capture/Compare Time Base
The Timer1/3/5 register pair (TMRxH:TMRxL) The CCP modules use the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair
increments to FFFFh and rolls over to 0000h. When as the time base when operating in Capture or
Timer1/3/5 rolls over, the Timer1/3/5 interrupt flag bit of Compare mode.
the respective PIR register is set. To enable the In Capture mode, the value in the TMRxH:TMRxL
interrupt-on-rollover, you must set these bits: register pair is copied into the CCPRxH:CCPRxL
• ON bit of the TxCON register register pair on a configured event.
• TMRxIE bits of the respective PIE register In Compare mode, an event is triggered when the value
• GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON0 register in the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair matches the
The interrupt is cleared by clearing the TMRxIF bit in value in the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair. This event
the Interrupt Service Routine. can be a Special Event Trigger.
For more information on selecting high or low priority For more information, see Section 23.0 “Capture/
status for the Timer1/3/5 Overflow Interrupt, see Compare/PWM Module”.
Section 9.0 “Interrupt Controller”.
21.10 CCP Special Event Trigger
Note: The TMRxH:TMRxL register pair and the
TMRxIF bit should be cleared before When any of the CCP’s are configured to trigger a
enabling interrupts. special event, the trigger will clear the TMRxH:TMRxL
register pair. This special event does not cause a
Timer1/3/5 interrupt. The CCP module may still be
21.8 Timer1/3/5 Operation During Sleep
configured to generate a CCP interrupt.
Timer1/3/5 can only operate during Sleep when set up In this mode of operation, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL
in Asynchronous Counter mode. In this mode, an register pair becomes the period register for Timer1/3/
external crystal or clock source can be used to 5.
increment the counter. To set up the timer to wake the
device: Timer1/3/5 should be synchronized and FOSC/4 should
be selected as the clock source in order to utilize the
• ON bit of the TxCON register must be set Special Event Trigger. Asynchronous operation of
• TMRxIE bit of the respective PIE register must be Timer1/3/5 can cause a Special Event Trigger to be
set missed.
• SYNC bit of the TxCON register must be set In the event that a write to TMRxH or TMRxL coincides
• Configure the TMRxCLK register for using with a Special Event Trigger from the CCP, the write will
secondary oscillator as the clock source take precedence.
• Enable the SOSCEN bit of the OSCEN register
(Register 7-7)
The device will wake-up on an overflow and execute
the next instruction. If the GIE/GIEH bit of the
INTCON0 register is set, the device will call the
Interrupt Service Routine.
The secondary oscillator will continue to operate in
Sleep regardless of the SYNC bit setting.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 21-3: TIMER1/3/5 INCREMENTING EDGE
TxCKI = 1
when TxTMR
Enabled
TxCKI = 0
when TxTMR
Enabled
Note 1: Arrows indicate counter increments.

2: In Counter mode, a falling edge must be registered by the counter prior to the first incrementing rising edge of the clock.
FIGURE 21-4: TIMER1/3/5 GATE ENABLE MODE
TMRxGE
TxGPOL
TxG_IN
TxCKI
TxGVAL
Timer1/3/5 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 21-5: TIMER1/3/5 GATE TOGGLE MODE
TMRxGE
TxGPOL
TxGTM
TxTxG_IN
TxCKI
TxGVAL
TIMER1/3/5 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 N+5 N+6 N+7 N+8
FIGURE 21-6: TIMER1/3/5 GATE SINGLE-PULSE MODE
TMRxGE
TxGPOL
TxGSPM
Cleared by hardware on
TxGGO/ Set by software falling edge of TxGVAL
DONE
Counting enabled on
rising edge of TxG
TxG_IN
TxCKI
TxGVAL
TIMER1/3/5 N N+1 N+2
Cleared by
TMRxGIF Cleared by software Set by hardware on software
falling edge of TxGVAL

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 21-7: TIMER1/3/5 GATE SINGLE-PULSE AND TOGGLE COMBINED MODE
TMRxGE
TxGPOL
TxGSPM
TxGTM
Cleared by hardware on
TxGGO/ Set by software falling edge of TxGVAL
DONE Counting enabled on
rising edge of TxG
TxG_IN
TxCKI
TxGVAL
TIMER1/3/5 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4
Set by hardware on Cleared by

TMRxGIF Cleared by software falling edge of TxGVAL software
21.11 Peripheral Module Disable

When a peripheral module is not used or inactive, the
module can be disabled by setting the Module Disable
bit in the PMD registers. This will reduce power
consumption to an absolute minimum. Setting the PMD
bits holds the module in Reset and disconnects the
module’s clock source. The Module Disable bits for
Timer1 (TMR1MD), Timer3 (TMR3MD) and Timer5
(TMR5MD) are in the respective PMD registers. See
Section 19.0 “Peripheral Module Disable (PMD)” for
more information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
21.12 Register Definitions: Timer1/3/5
Long bit name prefixes for the Timer1/3/5 are shown
below. Refer to Section 1.3.2.2 “Long Bit Names” for
more information.

Timer1 T1
Timer3 T3
Timer5 T5
REGISTER 21-1: TXCON: TIMERx CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-0/u R/W-0/u U-0 R/W-0/u R/W-0/0 R/W-0/u
— — CKPS[1:0] — SYNC RD16 ON
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
-n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared u = unchanged

bit 5-4 CKPS[1:0]: Timerx Input Clock Prescale Select bits
11 = 1:8 Prescale value
bit 2 SYNC: Timerx External Clock Input Synchronization Control bit
TMRxCLK = FOSC/4 or FOSC:
This bit is ignored. Timer1 uses the incoming clock as is.
Else:
1 = Do not synchronize external clock input
0 = Synchronize external clock input with system clock
bit 1 RD16: 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit
1 = Enables register read/write of Timerx in one 16-bit operation
0 = Enables register read/write of Timerx in two 8-bit operation
bit 0 ON: Timerx On bit
1 = Enables Timerx
0 = Disables Timerx

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 21-2: TxGCON: TIMERx GATE CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R-x U-0 U-0
GE GPOL GTM GSPM GGO/DONE GVAL — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 GE: Timerx Gate Enable bit

If TMRxON = 1:
1 = Timerx counting is controlled by the Timerx gate function
0 = Timerx is always counting
If TMRxON = 0:
This bit is ignored
bit 6 GPOL: Timerx Gate Polarity bit
1 = Timerx gate is active-high (Timerx counts when gate is high)
0 = Timerx gate is active-low (Timerx counts when gate is low)
bit 5 GTM: Timerx Gate Toggle Mode bit
1 = Timerx Gate Toggle mode is enabled
0 = Timerx Gate Toggle mode is disabled and Toggle flip-flop is cleared
Timerx Gate Flip Flop Toggles on every rising edge
bit 4 GSPM: Timerx Gate Single Pulse Mode bit
1 = Timerx Gate Single Pulse mode is enabled and is controlling Timerx gate)
0 = Timerx Gate Single Pulse mode is disabled
bit 3 GGO/DONE: Timerx Gate Single Pulse Acquisition Status bit
1 = Timerx Gate Single Pulse Acquisition is ready, waiting for an edge
0 = Timerx Gate Single Pulse Acquisition has completed or has not been started.
This bit is automatically cleared when TxGSPM is cleared.
bit 2 GVAL: Timerx Gate Current State bit
Indicates the current state of the Timerx gate that could be provided to TMRxH:TMRxL
Unaffected by Timerx Gate Enable (TMRxGE)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 21-3: TxCLK: TIMERx CLOCK REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u
— — — CS[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 CS[4:0]: Timerx Clock Source Selection bits
Timer1 Timer3 Timer5

CS
Clock Source Clock Source Clock Source
11111-10001 Reserved Reserved Reserved

10000 CLC4 CLC4 CLC4
01100 TMR5 overflow TMR5 overflow Reserved
01011 TMR3 overflow Reserved TMR3 overflow
01010 Reserved TMR1 overflow TMR1 overflow
01001 TMR0 overflow TMR0 overflow TMR0 overflow
01000 CLKREF CLKREF CLKREF
00111 SOSC SOSC SOSC
00110 MFINTOSC (32 kHz) MFINTOSC (32 kHz) MFINTOSC (32 kHz)
00100 LFINTOSC LFINTOSC LFINTOSC
00011 HFINTOSC HFINTOSC HFINTOSC
00010 Fosc Fosc Fosc
00001 Fosc/4 Fosc/4 Fosc/4
00000 T1CKIPPS T3CKIPPS T5CKIPPS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 21-4: TxGATE: TIMERx GATE ISM REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u
— — — GSS[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 GSS[4:0]: Timerx Gate Source Selection bits
Timer1 Timer3 Timer5

GSS
Gate Source Gate Source Gate Source
11010 CLC4_out CLC4_out CLC4_out
10110 ZCDOUT ZCDOUT ZCDOUT
10101 CMP2OUT CMP2OUT CMP2OUT
10011 NCO1OUT NCO1OUT NCO1OUT
10000 PWM8OUT PWM8OUT PWM8OUT
01100 CCP4OUT CCP4OUT CCP4OUT
01000 SMT1_match SMT1_match SMT1_match
00111 TMR6OUT (postscaled) TMR6OUT (postscaled) TMR6OUT (postscaled)
00110 TMR5 overflow TMR5 overflow Reserved
00100 TMR3 overflow Reserved TMR3 overflow
00010 Reserved TMR1 overflow TMR1 overflow
00001 TMR0 overflow TMR0 overflow TMR0 overflow
00000 Pin selected by T1GPPS Pin selected by T3GPPS Pin selected by T5GPPS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 21-5: TMRxL: TIMERx LOW BYTE REGISTER

TMRxL[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TMRxL[7:0]:Timerx Low Byte bits
REGISTER 21-6: TMRxH: TIMERx HIGH BYTE REGISTER

TMRxH[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TMRxH[7:0]:Timerx High Byte bits

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 21-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1/3/5 AS A TIMER/COUNTER
Reset
Values
on
Page
TxCON — — CKPS[1:0] — SYNC RD16 ON 314

TxGCON GE GPOL GTM GSPM GO/DONE GVAL — — 315
TxCLK — — — CS[4:0] 316
TxGATE — — — GSS[4:0] 317

TMRxL Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR3 Register 318
TMRxH Holding Register for the Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR3 Register 318
Legend: — = Unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by TIMER1/3/5.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.0 TIMER2/4/6 MODULE • Three modes of operation:
- Free Running Period
The Timer2/4/6 modules are 8-bit timers that can
- One-Shot
operate as free-running period counters or in
conjunction with external signals that control start, run, - Monostable
freeze, and reset operation in One-Shot and See Figure 22-1 for a block diagram of Timer2. See
Monostable modes of operation. Sophisticated Figure 22-2 for the clock source block diagram.
waveform control such as pulse density modulation are
possible by combining the operation of these timers Note: Three identical Timer2 modules are
with other internal peripherals such as the comparators implemented on this device. The timers are
and CCP modules. Features of the timer include: named Timer2, Timer4, and Timer6. All
references to Timer2 apply as well to
• 8-bit timer register Timer4 and Timer6. All references to T2PR
• 8-bit period register apply as well to T4PR and T6PR.
• Selectable external hardware timer resets
• Programmable prescaler (1:1 to 1:128)
• Programmable postscaler (1:1 to 1:16)
• Selectable synchronous/asynchronous operation
• Alternate clock sources
• Interrupt on period
FIGURE 22-1: TIMER2 BLOCK DIAGRAM

RSEL <4:0> Rev. 10-000168D
9/12/2016
TxINPPS
TxIN PPS MODE<4:0> MODE<3>
Edge Detector reset

External
TMRx_ers Level Detector CCP_pset(1)
Reset
(2) Mode Control
Sources (2 clock Sync)
enable MODE<4:3>=01
Clear ON
MODE<4:1>=1011 D Q
CKPOL
TMRx_clk Prescaler 0
R
TxTMR
Set flag bit
3 Sync 1 TMRxIF
CKPS<2:0> Fosc/4 PSYNC TMRx_postscaled

Comparator Postscaler
4
ON Sync
1
(2 Clocks) TxPR OUTPS<3:0>
0
CKSYNC

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 22-2: TIMER2 CLOCK SOURCE output postscaler counter. When the postscaler count
BLOCK DIAGRAM equals the value in the OUTPS bits of the TxCON
Rev. 10-000169E
register, then a one clock period wide pulse occurs on
9/12/2016
the T2TMR_postscaled output, and the postscaler count
is cleared.
CS<3:0>
TXINPPS 22.1.2 ONE-SHOT MODE
TXIN PPS 0000 The One-Shot mode is identical to the Free Running
Period mode except that the ON bit is cleared and the
timer is stopped when T2TMR matches T2PR and will
not restart until the T2ON bit is cycled off and on.
Postscaler OUTPS values other than 0 are
See TMRx_clk
TxCLK
meaningless in this mode because the timer is stopped
Register at the first period event and the postscaler is reset
when the timer is restarted.
1111
22.1.3 MONOSTABLE MODE
Monostable modes are similar to One-Shot modes
except that the ON bit is not cleared and the timer can
be restarted by an external Reset event.
22.1 Timer2 Operation
22.2 Timer2 Output
Timer2 operates in three major modes:
The Timer2 module’s primary output is
• Free Running Period
T2TMR_postscaled, which pulses for a single
• One-Shot T2TMR_clk period when the postscaler counter
• Monostable matches the value in the OUTPS bits of the TxCON
Within each mode there are several options for starting, register. The T2PR postscaler is incremented each
stopping, and reset. Table 22-1 lists the options. time the T2TMR value matches the T2PR value. This
signal can be selected as an input to several other input
In all modes the T2TMR count register is incremented
modules.
on the rising edge of the clock signal from the
programmable prescaler. When T2TMR equals T2PR Timer2 is also used by the CCP module for pulse
then a high level is output to the postscaler counter. generation in PWM mode. Both the actual T2TMR
T2TMR is cleared on the next clock input. value as well as other internal signals are sent to the
CCP module to properly clock both the period and
An external signal from hardware can also be
pulse width of the PWM signal. See Section
configured to gate the timer operation or force a
23.0 “Capture/Compare/PWM Module” for more
T2TMR count Reset. In gate modes, the counter stops
details on setting up Timer2 for use with the CCP, as
when the gate is disabled and resumes when the gate
well as the timing diagrams in Section
is enabled. In Reset modes the T2TMR count is reset
22.5 “Operation Examples” for examples of how the
on either the level or edge from the external source.
varying Timer2 modes affect CCP PWM output.
The T2TMR and T2PR registers are both directly
readable and writable. The T2TMR register is cleared 22.3 External Reset Sources
and the T2PR register initializes to FFh on any device
Reset. Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are In addition to the clock source, the Timer2 also takes in
cleared on the following events: an external Reset source. This external Reset source
is selected for Timer2, Timer4, and Timer6 with the
• a write to the T2TMR register
T2RST, T4RST, and T6RST registers, respectively.
• a write to the TxCON register This source can control starting and stopping of the
• any device Reset timer, as well as resetting the timer, depending on
• External Reset Source event that resets the timer. which mode the timer is in. The mode of the timer is
Note: T2TMR is not cleared when TxCON is controlled by the MODE bits of the T2HLT register.
written. Edge Triggered modes require six Timer clock periods
between external triggers. Level Triggered modes
require the triggering level to be at least three Timer
22.1.1 FREE RUNNING PERIOD MODE
clock periods long. External triggers are ignored while
The value of T2TMR is compared to that of the Period in Debug Freeze mode.
register, T2PR, on each clock cycle. When the two
values match, the comparator resets the value of
T2TMR to 00h on the next cycle and increments the

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 22-1: TIMER2 OPERATING MODES
MODE[4:0] Output Timer Control
Mode Operation
[4:3] [2:0] Operation Start Reset Stop
000 Software gate (Figure 22-4) ON = 1 — ON = 0
Hardware gate, active-high ON = 1 & — ON = 0 or
001 Period
(Figure 22-5) TMRx_ers = 1 TMRx_ers = 0
Pulse
ON = 1 & — ON = 0 or
010 Hardware gate, active-low
TMRx_ers = 0 TMRx_ers = 1
Free 011 Rising or Falling Edge Reset TMRx_ers ↕
Running 00
Period 100 Period Rising Edge Reset (Figure 22-6) TMRx_ers ↑ ON = 0
101 Pulse Falling Edge Reset TMRx_ers ↓
with ON = 1 ON = 0 or
110 Hardware Low Level Reset TMRx_ers = 0
TMRx_ers = 0
Reset
High Level Reset (Figure 22-7) ON = 0 or
111 TMRx_ers = 1
TMRx_ers = 1
000 One-Shot Software Start (Figure 22-8) ON = 1 —
ON = 1 &
001 Rising Edge Start (Figure 22-9) —
Edge TMRx_ers ↑
Triggered ON = 1 &
010 Falling Edge Start —
Start TMRx_ers ↓
(Note 1) ON = 1 &
011 Any Edge Start — ON = 0
TMRx_ers ↕ or
One-shot 01 Rising Edge Start & ON = 1 & Next clock after
100 TMRx_ers ↑ TMRx = PRx
Edge Rising Edge Reset (Figure 22-10) TMRx_ers ↑
Triggered (Note 2)
Falling Edge Start & ON = 1 &
101 Start TMRx_ers ↓
Falling Edge Reset TMRx_ers ↓
and
Hardware Rising Edge Start & ON = 1 &
110 TMRx_ers = 0
Reset Low Level Reset (Figure 22-11) TMRx_ers ↑
(Note 1) Falling Edge Start & ON = 1 &
111 TMRx_ers = 1
High Level Reset TMRx_ers ↓
000 Reserved
Rising Edge Start ON = 1 &
001 — ON=0
Edge (Figure 22-12) TMRx_ers ↑
Monostable or
Triggered ON = 1 &
010 Falling Edge Start — Next clock after
Start TMRx_ers ↓
TxTMR = TxPR
(Note 1) ON = 1 &
011 Any Edge Start — (Note 3)
TMRx_ers ↕
Reserved 10 100 Reserved
Reserved 101 Reserved
Level High Level Start & ON = 1 &
110 TMRx_ers = 0
Triggered Low Level Reset (Figure 22-13) TMRx_ers = 1
ON = 0 or
Start
One-shot Held in Reset
and Low Level Start & ON = 1 &
111 TMRx_ers = 1 (Note 2)
Hardware High Level Reset TMRx_ers = 0
Reset
Reserved 11 xxx Reserved
Note 1: If ON = 0 then an edge is required to restart the timer after ON = 1.
2: When TxTMR = TxPR then the next clock clears ON and stops TxTMR at 00h.
3: When TxTMR = TxPR then the next clock stops TxTMR at 00h but does not clear ON.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.4 Timer2 Interrupt
Timer2 can also generate a device interrupt. The
interrupt is generated when the postscaler counter
matches one of 16 postscale options (from 1:1 through
1:16), which is selected with the postscaler control bits,
OUTPS of the T2CON register. The interrupt is enabled
by setting the T2TMR Interrupt Enable bit, TMR2IE, of
the respective PIE register. The interrupt timing is
illustrated in Figure 22-3.
FIGURE 22-3: TIMER2 PRESCALER, POSTSCALER, AND INTERRUPT TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000205B
9/12/2016
CKPS 0b010
TxPR 1
OUTPS 0b0001
TMRx_clk
TxTMR 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
TMRx_postscaled
(1) (2) (1)

TMRxIF
Note 1: Setting the interrupt flag is synchronized with the instruction clock.
Synchronization may take as many as 2 instruction cycles
2: Cleared by software.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.5 Operation Examples
Unless otherwise specified, the following notes apply to
the following timing diagrams:
- Both the prescaler and postscaler are set to
1:1 (both the CKPS and OUTPS bits in the
T2CON register are cleared).
- The diagrams illustrate any clock except
FOSC/4 and show clock-sync delays of at
least two full cycles for both ON and
T2TMR_ers. When using FOSC/4, the clock-
sync delay is at least one instruction period
for T2TMR_ers; ON applies in the next
instruction period.
- ON and T2TMR_ers are somewhat
generalized, and clock-sync delays may
produce results that are slightly different than
illustrated.
- The PWM Duty Cycle and PWM output are
illustrated assuming that the timer is used for
the PWM function of the CCP module as
described in Section 23.0 “Capture/
Compare/PWM Module” and Section
24.0 “Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM)”.
The signals are not a part of the T2TMR
module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.5.1 SOFTWARE GATE MODE
The timer increments with each clock input when ON = 1
and does not increment when ON = 0. When the
T2TMR count equals the T2PR period count the timer
resets on the next clock and continues counting from 0.
Operation with the ON bit software controlled is
illustrated in Figure 22-4. With T2PR = 5, the counter
advances until T2TMR = 5, and goes to zero with the
next clock.
FIGURE 22-4: SOFTWARE GATE MODE TIMING DIAGRAM

Rev. 10-000195C
9/12/2016
MODE 0b00000
TMRx_clk
Instruction (1) BSF BCF BSF
ON
TxPR 5
TxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
3
Cycle
PWM Output
Note 1: BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to
set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input .

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.5.2 HARDWARE GATE MODE
The Hardware Gate modes operate the same as the
Software Gate mode except the T2TMR_ers external
signal can also gate the timer. When used with the CCP
the gating extends the PWM period. If the timer is
stopped when the PWM output is high, then the duty
cycle is also extended.
When MODE[4:0] = 00001, then the timer is stopped
when the external signal is high. When MODE[4:0] =
00010, then the timer is stopped when the external
signal is low.
Figure 22-5 illustrates the Hardware Gating mode for
MODE[4:0] = 00001 in which a high input level starts
the counter.
FIGURE 22-5: HARDWARE GATE MODE TIMING DIAGRAM (MODE = 00001)
Rev. 10-000196C
9/12/2016
MODE 0b00001
TMRx_clk
TMRx_ers
TxPR 5
TxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
3
Cycle
PWM Output

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.5.3 EDGE-TRIGGERED HARDWARE
LIMIT MODE
In Hardware Limit mode the timer can be reset by the
TMRx_ers external signal before the timer reaches the
period count. Three types of Resets are possible:
• Reset on rising or falling edge
(MODE[4:0] = 00011)
• Reset on rising edge (MODE[4:0] = 0010)
• Reset on falling edge (MODE[4:0] = 00101)
When the timer is used in conjunction with the CCP in
PWM mode then an early Reset shortens the period
and restarts the PWM pulse after a two clock delay.
Refer to Figure 22-6.
FIGURE 22-6: EDGE TRIGGERED HARDWARE LIMIT MODE TIMING DIAGRAM (MODE=00100)
Rev. 10-000197C
9/12/2016
MODE 0b00100
TMRx_clk
TxPR 5
ON
TMRx_ers
TxTMR 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
3
Cycle
PWM Output

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.5.4 LEVEL-TRIGGERED HARDWARE When the CCP uses the timer as the PWM time base
LIMIT MODE then the PWM output will be set high when the timer
starts counting and then set low only when the timer
In the level triggered Hardware Limit Timer modes the
count matches the CCPRx value. The timer is reset
counter is reset by high or low levels of the external
when either the timer count matches the T2PR value or
signal TMR2_ers, as shown in Figure 22-7. Selecting
two clock periods after the external Reset signal goes
MODE[4:0] = 00110 will cause the timer to reset on a
true and stays true.
low level external signal. Selecting MODE[4:0] =
00111 will cause the timer to reset on a high level The timer starts counting, and the PWM output is set
external signal. In the example, the counter is reset high, on either the clock following the T2PR match or
while TMR2_ers = 1. ON is controlled by BSF and BCF two clocks after the external Reset signal relinquishes
instructions. When ON=0 the external signal is ignored. the Reset. The PWM output will remain high until the
timer counts up to match the CCPRx pulse width value.
If the external Reset signal goes true while the PWM
output is high then the PWM output will remain high
until the Reset signal is released allowing the timer to
count up to match the CCPRx value.
FIGURE 22-7: LEVEL TRIGGERED HARDWARE LIMIT MODE TIMING DIAGRAM

(MODE = 00111)
Rev. 10-000198C
9/12/2016
MODE 0b00111
TMRx_clk
TxPR 5
ON
TMRx_ers
TxTMR 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 0
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
3
Cycle
PWM Output

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.5.5 SOFTWARE START ONE-SHOT When One-Shot mode is used in conjunction with the
MODE CCP PWM operation, the PWM pulse drive starts
concurrent with setting the ON bit. Clearing the ON bit
In One-Shot mode, the timer resets and the ON bit is
while the PWM drive is active will extend the PWM
cleared when the timer value matches the T2PR period
drive. The PWM drive will terminate when the timer
value. The ON bit must be set by software to start
value matches the CCPRx pulse width value. The
another timer cycle. Setting MODE[4:0] = 01000
PWM drive will remain off until software sets the ON bit
selects One-Shot mode which is illustrated in
to start another cycle. If software clears the ON bit after
Figure 22-8. In the example, ON is controlled by BSF
the CCPRx match but before the T2PR match then the
and BCF instructions. In the first case, a BSF
PWM drive will be extended by the length of time the
instruction sets ON and the counter runs to completion
ON bit remains cleared. Another timing cycle can only
and clears ON. In the second case, a BSF instruction
be initiated by setting the ON bit after it has been
starts the cycle, BCF/BSF instructions turn the counter
cleared by a T2PR period count match.
off and on during the cycle, and then it runs to
completion.
FIGURE 22-8: SOFTWARE START ONE-SHOT MODE TIMING DIAGRAM (MODE = 01000)
Rev. 10-000199C
9/12/2016
MODE 0b01000
TMRx_clk
TxPR 5
Instruction (1) BSF BSF BCF BSF
ON
TxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
3
Cycle
PWM Output
Note 1: BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions
executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU
execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.5.6 EDGE-TRIGGERED ONE-SHOT If the timer is halted by clearing the ON bit then another
MODE TMRx_ers edge is required after the ON bit is set to
resume counting. Figure 22-9 illustrates operation in
The Edge-Triggered One-Shot modes start the timer the rising edge One-Shot mode.
on an edge from the external signal input, after the ON
When Edge-Triggered One-Shot mode is used in
bit is set, and clear the ON bit when the timer matches
conjunction with the CCP then the edge-trigger will
the T2PR period value. The following edges will start activate the PWM drive and the PWM drive will
the timer: deactivate when the timer matches the CCPRx pulse
• Rising edge (MODE[4:0] = 01001) width value and stay deactivated when the timer halts
• Falling edge (MODE[4:0] = 01010) at the T2PR period count match.
• Rising or Falling edge (MODE[4:0] = 01011)
FIGURE 22-9: EDGE TRIGGERED ONE-SHOT MODE TIMING DIAGRAM (MODE = 01001)
Rev. 10-000200C
9/12/2016
MODE 0b01001
TMRx_clk
TxPR 5
Instruction (1) BSF BSF BCF
ON
TMRx_ers
TxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2
CCP_pset
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
3
Cycle
PWM Output
set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input.

22.5.7 EDGE-TRIGGERED HARDWARE LIMIT ONE-SHOT The timer resets and clears the ON bit when the timer value matches the T2PR
MODE period value. External signal edges will have no effect until after software sets
the ON bit. Figure 22-10 illustrates the rising edge hardware limit one-shot
In Edge-Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot modes, the timer starts on the operation.
first external signal edge after the ON bit is set and resets on all subsequent
When this mode is used in conjunction with the CCP then the first starting edge
edges. Only the first edge after the ON bit is set is needed to start the timer.
trigger, and all subsequent Reset edges, will activate the PWM drive. The PWM
The counter will resume counting automatically two clocks after all subsequent drive will deactivate when the timer matches the CCPRx pulse width value and
external Reset edges. Edge triggers are as follows: stay deactivated until the timer halts at the T2PR period match unless an
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
• Rising edge Start and Reset (MODE[4:0] = 01100) external signal edge resets the timer before the match occurs.
• Falling edge Start and Reset (MODE[4:0] = 01101)
FIGURE 22-10: EDGE TRIGGERED HARDWARE LIMIT ONE-SHOT MODE TIMING DIAGRAM (MODE = 01100))
Rev. 10-000201C
9/12/2016
MODE 0b01100
TMRx_clk
TxPR 5
Instruction(1) BSF BSF
ON
TMRx_ers
TxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 0
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
3
Cycle
DS40001919E-page 331
PWM Output
22.5.8 LEVEL RESET, EDGE-TRIGGERED HARDWARE LIMIT When the timer count matches the T2PR period count, the timer is reset and
ONE-SHOT MODES the ON bit is cleared. When the ON bit is cleared by either a T2PR match or by
software control a new external signal edge is required after the ON bit is set to
In Level Triggered One-Shot mode, the timer count is reset on the external start the counter.
signal level and starts counting on the rising/falling edge of the transition from
When Level Triggered Reset One-Shot mode is used in conjunction with the
reset level to the active level while the ON bit is set. Reset levels are selected
CCP PWM operation, the PWM drive goes active with the external signal edge
as follows: that starts the timer. The PWM drive goes inactive when the timer count equals
• Low reset level (MODE[4:0] = 01110) the CCPRx pulse-width count. The PWM drive does not go active when the
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
• High reset level (MODE[4:0] = 01111) timer count clears at the T2PR period count match.
FIGURE 22-11: LOW LEVEL RESET, EDGE-TRIGGERED HARDWARE LIMIT ONE-SHOT MODE TIMING DIAGRAM (MODE = 01110)
Rev. 10-000202C
9/12/2016
MODE 0b01110
TMRx_clk
TxPR 5
Instruction(1) BSF BSF
ON
TMRx_ers
TxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 0
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
3
Cycle
DS40001919E-page 332
PWM Output
22.5.9 EDGE-TRIGGERED MONOSTABLE MODES When an Edge-Triggered Monostable mode is used in conjunction with the
CCP PWM operation the PWM drive goes active with the external Reset signal
The Edge-Triggered Monostable modes start the timer on an edge from the
edge that starts the timer, but will not go active when the timer matches the
external Reset signal input, after the ON bit is set, and stop incrementing the
T2PR value. While the timer is incrementing, additional edges on the external
timer when the timer matches the T2PR period value. The following edges will
Reset signal will not affect the CCP PWM.
start the timer:
• Rising edge (MODE[4:0] = 10001)
• Falling edge (MODE[4:0] = 10010)
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
• Rising or Falling edge (MODE[4:0] = 10011)
FIGURE 22-12: RISING EDGE-TRIGGERED MONOSTABLE MODE TIMING DIAGRAM (MODE = 10001)
Rev. 10-000203B
12/13/2016
MODE 0b10001
TMRx_clk
TxPR 5
Instruction(1) BSF BCF BSF BCF BSF
ON
TMRx_ers
TxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
3
Cycle
PWM Output
DS40001919E-page 333
22.5.10 LEVEL-TRIGGERED HARDWARE LIMIT ONE-SHOT When the timer count matches the T2PR period count, the timer is reset and
MODES the ON bit is cleared. When the ON bit is cleared by either a T2PR match or by
software control, the timer will stay in Reset until both the ON bit is set and the
The Level Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot modes hold the timer in Reset
external signal is not at the Reset level.
on an external Reset level and start counting when both the ON bit is set and
the external signal is not at the Reset level. If one of either the external signal When Level Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot modes are used in conjunction
is not in reset or the ON bit is set then the other signal being set/made active with the CCP PWM operation, the PWM drive goes active with either the
will start the timer. Reset levels are selected as follows: external signal edge or the setting of the ON bit, whichever of the two starts the
timer.
• Low reset level (MODE[4:0] = 10110)
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
• High reset level (MODE[4:0] = 10111)
FIGURE 22-13: LEVEL-TRIGGERED HARDWARE LIMIT ONE-SHOT MODE TIMING DIAGRAM (MODE = 10110)
Rev. 10-000204B
12/13/2016
MODE 0b10110
TMRx_clk
TxPR 5
Instruction(1) BSF BSF BCF BSF
ON
TMRx_ers
TxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 0
TMRx_postscaled
PWM Duty
‘D3
Cycle
DS40001919E-page 334
PWM Output
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.6 Timer2 Operation During Sleep
When PSYNC = 1, Timer2 cannot be operated while
the processor is in Sleep mode. The contents of the
T2TMR and T2PR registers will remain unchanged
while processor is in Sleep mode.
When PSYNC = 0, Timer2 will operate in Sleep as long
as the clock source selected is also still running.
Selecting the LFINTOSC, MFINTOSC, or HFINTOSC
oscillator as the timer clock source will keep the
selected oscillator running during Sleep.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
22.7 Register Definitions: Timer2/4/6
Control TABLE 22-2: OPERATING MODES
Long bit name prefixes for the Timer2/4/6 peripherals Peripheral Bit Name Prefix
are shown in Table 22-2. Refer to Section Timer2 T2
Timer4 T4
Timer6 T6
REGISTER 22-1: TxCLK: TIMERx CLOCK SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — CS[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3-0 CS[3:0]: Timerx Clock Selection bits
T2TMR TMR4 TMR6

CS[3:0]
Clock Source Clock Source Clock Source
1111 Reserved Reserved Reserved
1010 ZCD_OUT ZCD_OUT ZCD_OUT
1000 CLKREF_OUT CLKREF_OUT CLKREF_OUT
0111 SOSC SOSC SOSC
0100 LFINTOSC LFINTOSC LFINTOSC
0011 HFINTOSC HFINTOSC HFINTOSC
0010 FOSC FOSC FOSC
0001 FOSC/4 FOSC/4 FOSC/4
0000 Pin selected by T2INPPS Pin selected by T4INPPS Pin selected by T6INPPS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 22-2: TxRST: TIMER2 EXTERNAL RESET SIGNAL SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — RSEL[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 RSEL[4:0]: Timer2 External Reset Signal Source Selection bits
T2TMR TMR4 TMR6

RSEL[4:0]
Reset Source Reset Source Reset Source
11000 UART2_tx_edge UART2_tx_edge UART2_tx_edge
10111 UART2_rx_edge UART2_rx_edge UART2_rx_edge
10110 UART1_tx_edge UART1_tx_edge UART1_tx_edge
10101 UART1_rx_edge UART1_rx_edge UART1_rx_edge
10000 ZCD_OUT ZCD_OUT ZCD_OUT
00011 TMR6 postscaled TMR6 postscaled Reserved
00010 TMR4 postscaled Reserved TMR4 postscaled
00001 Reserved T2TMR postscaled T2TMR postscaled
00000 Pin selected by T2INPPS Pin selected by T4INPPS Pin selected by T6INPPS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 22-3: TxTMR: TIMERx COUNTER REGISTER

TMRx[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TMRx[7:0]: Timerx Counter bits
REGISTER 22-4: TxPR: TIMERx PERIOD REGISTER

PRx[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 PRx[7:0]: Timerx Period Register bits

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 22-5: TxCON: TIMERx CONTROL REGISTER

R/W/HC-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
ON CKPS[2:0] OUTPS[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 ON: Timerx On bit(1)

1 = Timerx is On
0 = Timerx is Off: all counters and state machines are reset
bit 6-4 CKPS[2:0]: Timerx-type Clock Prescale Select bits
111 = 1:128 Prescaler
011 = 1:8 Prescaler
010 = 1:4 Prescaler
001 = 1:2 Prescaler
000 = 1:1 Prescaler
bit 3-0 OUTPS[3:0]: Timerx Output Postscaler Select bits
Note 1: In certain modes, the ON bit will be auto-cleared by hardware. See Section 22.1.2 “One-Shot Mode”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 22-6: TxHLT: TIMERx HARDWARE LIMIT CONTROL REGISTER

PSYNC CKPOL CKSYNC MODE[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 PSYNC: Timerx Prescaler Synchronization Enable bit(1, 2)

1 = TxTMR Prescaler Output is synchronized to Fosc/4
0 = TxTMR Prescaler Output is not synchronized to Fosc/4
bit 6 CKPOL: Timerx Clock Polarity Selection bit(3)
1 = Falling edge of input clock clocks timer/prescaler
0 = Rising edge of input clock clocks timer/prescaler
bit 5 CKSYNC: Timerx Clock Synchronization Enable bit(4, 5)
1 = ON register bit is synchronized to T2TMR_clk input
0 = ON register bit is not synchronized to T2TMR_clk input
bit 4-0 MODE[4:0]: Timerx Control Mode Selection bits(6, 7)
See Table 22-1 for all operating modes.
Note 1: Setting this bit ensures that reading TxTMR will return a valid data value.
2: When this bit is ‘1’, Timer2 cannot operate in Sleep mode.
3: CKPOL should not be changed while ON = 1.
4: Setting this bit ensures glitch-free operation when the ON is enabled or disabled.
5: When this bit is set then the timer operation will be delayed by two TxTMR input clocks after the ON bit is
set.
6: Unless otherwise indicated, all modes start upon ON = 1 and stop upon ON = 0 (stops occur without
affecting the value of TxTMR).
7: When TxTMR = TxPR, the next clock clears TxTMR, regardless of the operating mode.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 22-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER2
Register
on Page
TxPR Timer2 Module Period Register 321*

TxTMR Holding Register for the 8-bit T2TMR Register 321*
TxCON ON CKPS[2:0] OUTPS[3:0] 339
TxCLK — — — — — CS[2:0] 336
TxRST — — — — RSEL[3:0] 337
TxHLT PSYNC CPOL CSYNC MODE[4:0] 340
Legend: — = unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for Timer2 module.
* Page provides register information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
23.0 CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM 23.1 CCP Module Configuration
MODULE Each Capture/Compare/PWM module is associated
The Capture/Compare/PWM module is a peripheral with a control register (CCPxCON), a capture input
that allows the user to time and control different events, selection register (CCPxCAP) and a data register
and to generate Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) (CCPRx). The data register, in turn, is comprised of two
signals. In Capture mode, the peripheral allows the 8-bit registers: CCPRxL (low byte) and CCPRxH (high
timing of the duration of an event. The Compare mode byte).
allows the user to trigger an external event when a
23.1.1 CCP MODULES AND TIMER
predetermined amount of time has expired. The PWM
mode can generate pulse-width modulated signals of RESOURCES
varying frequency and duty cycle. The CCP modules utilize Timers 1 through 6 that vary
This family of devices contains four standard Capture/ with the selected mode. Various timers are available to
Compare/PWM modules (CCP1, CCP2, CCP3 and the CCP modules in Capture, Compare or PWM
CCP4). Each individual CCP module can select the modes, as shown in Table 23-1.
timer source that controls the module. Each module
has an independent timer selection which can be TABLE 23-1: CCP MODE – TIMER
accessed using the CxTSEL bits in the CCPTMRS RESOURCE
register (Register 23-2). The default timer selection is CCP Mode Timer Resource
TMR1 when using Capture/Compare mode and TMR2
when using PWM mode in the CCPx module. Capture
Timer1, Timer3 or Timer5
Please note that the Capture/Compare mode operation Compare
is described with respect to TMR1 and the PWM mode
PWM Timer2, Timer4 or Timer6
operation is described with respect to TMR2 in the
following sections. The assignment of a particular timer to a module is
The Capture and Compare functions are identical for all determined by the timer to CCP enable bits in the
CCP modules. CCPTMRS register (see Register 23-2) All of the
modules may be active at once and may share the
Note 1: In devices with more than one CCP same timer resource if they are configured to operate
module, it is very important to pay close in the same mode (Capture/Compare or PWM) at the
attention to the register names used. A same time.
number placed after the module acronym
is used to distinguish between separate 23.1.2 OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT OPTION
modules. For example, the CCP1CON
When operating in Output mode (the Compare or PWM
and CCP2CON control the same
modes), the drivers for the CCPx pins can be optionally
operational aspects of two completely
configured as open-drain outputs. This feature allows
different CCP modules.
the voltage level on the pin to be pulled to a higher level
2: Throughout this section, generic through an external pull-up resistor and allows the
references to a CCP module in any of its output to communicate with external circuits without the
operating modes may be interpreted as need for additional level shifters.
being equally applicable to CCPx module.
Register names, module signals, I/O pins, Note: The voltage on the pin should not exceed
and bit names may use the generic the maximum recommended voltage level
designator ‘x’ to indicate the use of a for that pin.
numeral to distinguish a particular module,
when required.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
23.2 Capture Mode 23.2.1 CAPTURE SOURCES
Capture mode makes use of the 16-bit Timer1 In Capture mode, the CCPx pin should be configured
resource. When an event occurs on the capture as an input by setting the associated TRIS control bit.
source, the 16-bit CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair Note: If the CCPx pin is configured as an output,
captures and stores the 16-bit value of the a write to the port can cause a capture
TMRxH:TMRxL register pair, respectively. An event is condition.
defined as one of the following and is configured by the
MODE[3:0] bits of the CCPxCON register: The capture source is selected by configuring the
CTS[2:0] bits of the CCPxCAP register. Refer to
• Every falling edge of CCPx input
CCPxCAP register (Register 23-3) for a list of sources
• Every rising edge of CCPx input that can be selected.
• Every 4th rising edge of CCPx input
• Every 16th rising edge of CCPx input 23.2.2 TIMER1 MODE RESOURCE
• Every edge of CCPx input (rising or falling) Timer1 must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized
When a capture is made, the Interrupt Request Flag bit Counter mode for the CCP module to use the capture
CCPxIF of the respective PIR register is set. The feature. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture
interrupt flag must be cleared in software. If another operation may not work.
capture occurs before the value in the • See Section 21.0 “Timer1/3/5 Module with Gate
CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair is read, the old Control” for more information on configuring
captured value is overwritten by the new captured Timer1.
value.
Note: Clocking Timer1 from the system clock

Note: If an event occurs during a 2-byte read, (FOSC) should not be used in Capture
the high and low-byte data will be from mode. In order for Capture mode to
different events. It is recommended while recognize the trigger event on the CCPx
reading the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pin, Timer1 must be clocked from the
pair to either disable the module or read instruction clock (FOSC/4) or from an
the register pair twice for data integrity. external clock source.
Figure 23-1 shows a simplified diagram of the capture
operation.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 23-1: CAPTURE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000158J
9/13/2016
RxyPPS
CCPx
CTS<2:0>
TRIS Control
CLC4_out 111
CLC3_out 110 CCPRxH CCPRxL
CLC2_out 101 16
set CCPxIF
CLC1_out 100 Prescaler and
IOC_interrupt 011 1,4,16 Edge Detect
16
CMP2_out 010
CMP1_out 001 MODE <3:0> TMR1H TMR1L
CCPx PPS 000
CCPxPPS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
23.2.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE 23.3 Compare Mode
When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture Compare mode makes use of the 16-bit Timer1
interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the resource. The 16-bit value of the CCPRxH:CCPRxL
CCPxIE Interrupt Priority bit of the respective PIE register pair is constantly compared against the 16-bit
register clear to avoid false interrupts. Additionally, the value of the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair. When a
user should clear the CCPxIF interrupt flag bit of the match occurs, one of the following events can occur:
respective PIR register following any change in
Operating mode. • Toggle the CCPx output, clear TMRx
• Toggle the CCPx output
23.2.4 CAPTURE DURING SLEEP • Set the CCPx output
Capture mode depends upon the Timer1 module for • Clear the CCPx output
proper operation. There are two options for driving the • Pulse output
Timer1 module in Capture mode. It can be driven by the • Pulse output, clear TMRx
instruction clock (FOSC/4), or by an external clock source.
The action on the pin is based on the value of the
When Timer1 is clocked by FOSC/4, Timer1 will not MODE[3:0] control bits of the CCPxCON register. At
increment during Sleep. When the device wakes from the same time, the interrupt flag CCPxIF bit is set, and
Sleep, Timer1 will continue from its previous state. an ADC conversion can be triggered, if selected.
Capture mode will operate during Sleep as long as the All Compare modes can generate an interrupt and
clock source for Timer1 is active in Sleep. trigger an ADC conversion. When MODE = 0b0001 or
0b1011, the CCP resets the TMR register pair.
Figure 23-2 shows a simplified diagram of the compare
operation.
FIGURE 23-2: COMPARE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000159C
5/26/2016
To Peripherals
CCPRxH CCPRxL
CCPx_out
set CCPxIF
Output S Q PPS CCPx Pin
Comparator
Logic
R TRIS Control
4 RxyPPS
TMR1H TMR1L MODE<3:0>
23.3.1 CCPx PIN CONFIGURATION In Compare mode, Timer1 must be running in either
Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode. The
The software must configure the CCPx pin as an output
compare operation may not work in Asynchronous
by clearing the associated TRIS bit and defining the
Counter mode.
appropriate output pin through the RxyPPS registers.
See Section 17.0 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) See Section 21.0 “Timer1/3/5 Module with Gate
Module” for more details. Control” for more information on configuring Timer1.
Note: Clocking Timer1 from the system clock
(FOSC) should not be used in Compare
Note: Clearing the CCPxCON register will force
mode. In order for Compare mode to
the CCPx compare output latch to the
recognize the trigger event on the CCPx
default low level. This is not the PORT I/O
pin, TImer1 must be clocked from the
data latch.
instruction clock (FOSC/4) or from an
external clock source.
23.3.2 TIMER1 MODE RESOURCE

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
23.3.3 AUTO-CONVERSION TRIGGER 23.4 PWM Overview
All CCPx modes set the CCP interrupt flag (CCPxIF). Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) is a scheme that
When this flag is set and a match occurs, an auto- provides power to a load by switching quickly between
conversion trigger can take place if the CCP module is fully ON and fully OFF states. The PWM signal
selected as the conversion trigger source. resembles a square wave where the high portion of the
Refer to Section 36.2.5 “Auto-Conversion Trigger” signal is considered the ON state and the low portion of
for more information. the signal is considered the OFF state. The high portion,
also known as the pulse width, can vary in time and is
Note: Removing the match condition by defined in steps. A larger number of steps applied, which
changing the contents of the CCPRxH lengthens the pulse width, also supplies more power to
and CCPRxL register pair, between the the load. Lowering the number of steps applied, which
clock edge that generates the Auto- shortens the pulse width, supplies less power. The PWM
conversion Trigger and the clock edge period is defined as the duration of one complete cycle
that generates the Timer1 Reset, will or the total amount of on and off time combined.
preclude the Reset from occurring
PWM resolution defines the maximum number of steps
23.3.4 COMPARE DURING SLEEP that can be present in a single PWM period. A higher
resolution allows for more precise control of the pulse-
Since FOSC is shut down during Sleep mode, the width time and in turn the power that is applied to the
Compare mode will not function properly during Sleep, load.
unless the timer is running. The device will wake on
interrupt (if enabled). The term duty cycle describes the proportion of the on
time to the off time and is expressed in percentages,
where 0% is fully off and 100% is fully on. A lower duty
cycle corresponds to less power applied and a higher
duty cycle corresponds to more power applied.
Figure 23-3 shows a typical waveform of the PWM
signal.
23.4.1 STANDARD PWM OPERATION

The standard PWM mode generates a Pulse-Width
Modulation (PWM) signal on the CCPx pin with up to
ten bits of resolution. The period, duty cycle, and
resolution are controlled by the following registers:
• T2PR registers
• T2CON registers
• CCPRxL and CCPRxH registers
• CCPxCON registers
It is required to have FOSC/4 as the clock input to
TMR2/4/6 for correct PWM operation. Figure 23-4
shows a simplified block diagram of PWM operation.
Note: The corresponding TRIS bit must be
cleared to enable the PWM output on the
CCPx pin.
FIGURE 23-3: CCP PWM OUTPUT SIGNAL

Period Rev. 10-000023E
9/13/2016
Pulse Width
T2TMR = T2PR
T2TMR reloaded with 0
T2TMR = Duty Cycle =

PWMxDCH<7:0>:PWMxDCL<7:6>
T2TMR = T2PR

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 23-4: SIMPLIFIED PWM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000157D
Duty cycle registers 9/13/2016
CCPRxH CCPRxL
CCPx_out
To Peripherals
set CCPxIF
10-bit Latch(2)
(Not accessible by user)
Comparator R Q PPS CCPx
S RxyPPS
TMR2 Module TRIS Control
R
T2TMR (1)
ERS logic
Comparator CCPx_pset
T2PR
Notes: 1. 8-bit timer is concatenated with two bits generated by Fosc or two bits of the internal prescaler to
create 10-bit time-base.
2. The alignment of the 10 bits from the CCPR register is determined by the CCPxFMT bit.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
23.4.2 SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION 23.4.4 PWM PERIOD
The following steps should be taken when configuring The PWM period is specified by the T2PR register of
the CCP module for standard PWM operation: Timer2. The PWM period can be calculated using the
1. Use the desired output pin RxyPPS control to formula of Equation 23-1.
select CCPx as the source and disable the
CCPx pin output driver by setting the associated EQUATION 23-1: PWM PERIOD
TRIS bit.
PWM Period =   T2PR  + 1   4  T OSC 
2. Load the T2PR register with the PWM period
value. (TMR2 Prescale Value)
3. Configure the CCP module for the PWM mode
by loading the CCPxCON register with the Note 1: TOSC = 1/FOSC
appropriate values.
When T2TMR is equal to T2PR, the following three
4. Load the CCPRxL register, and the CCPRxH
events occur on the next increment cycle:
register with the PWM duty cycle value and
configure the FMT bit of the CCPxCON register • T2TMR is cleared
to set the proper register alignment. • The CCPx pin is set. (Exception: If the PWM duty
5. Configure and start Timer2: cycle = 0%, the pin will not be set.)
• Clear the TMR2IF interrupt flag bit of the • The PWM duty cycle is transferred from the
respective PIR register. See Note below. CCPRxL/H register pair into a 10-bit buffer.
• Select the timer clock source to be as
FOSC/4 using the T2CLK register. This is Note: The Timer postscaler (see Section
required for correct operation of the PWM 22.3 “External Reset Sources”) is not
module. used in the determination of the PWM
• Configure the CKPS bits of the T2CON frequency.
register with the Timer prescale value.
• Enable the Timer by setting the ON bit of
the T2CON register.
6. Enable PWM output pin:
• Wait until the Timer overflows and the
TMR2IF bit of the PIR4 register is set. See
Note below.
• Enable the CCPx pin output driver by
clearing the associated TRIS bit.
Note: In order to send a complete duty cycle and

period on the first PWM output, the above
steps must be included in the setup
sequence. If it is not critical to start with a
complete PWM signal on the first output,
then step 6 may be ignored.
23.4.3 TIMER2 TIMER RESOURCE

The PWM standard mode makes use of the 8-bit
Timer2 timer resources to specify the PWM period.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
23.4.5 PWM DUTY CYCLE 23.4.6 PWM RESOLUTION
The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing a 10-bit The resolution determines the number of available duty
value to the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair. The cycles for a given period. For example, a 10-bit resolution
alignment of the 10-bit value is determined by the FMT will result in 1024 discrete duty cycles, whereas an 8-bit
bit of the CCPxCON register (see Figure 23-5). The resolution will result in 256 discrete duty cycles.
CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair can be written to at any The maximum PWM resolution is ten bits when T2PR
time; however the duty cycle value is not latched into is 255. The resolution is a function of the T2PR register
the 10-bit buffer until after a match between T2PR and value as shown by Equation 23-4.
T2TMR.
Equation 23-2 is used to calculate the PWM pulse EQUATION 23-4: PWM RESOLUTION
width. Equation 23-3 is used to calculate the PWM duty
cycle ratio.
 4  T2PR + 1  - bits
Resolution = log
---------------------------------------------
log  2 
FIGURE 23-5: PWM 10-BIT ALIGNMENT
Rev. 10-000 160A
12/9/201 3
CCPRxH CCPRxL Note: If the pulse-width value is greater than the

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FMT = 0 period, the assigned PWM pin(s) will
remain unchanged.
CCPRxH CCPRxL
FMT = 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10-bit Duty Cycle

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EQUATION 23-2: PULSE WIDTH
Pulse Width =  CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair  

T OSC  (TMR2 Prescale Value)
EQUATION 23-3: DUTY CYCLE RATIO
 CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair -

Duty Cycle Ratio = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4  T2PR + 1 
CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair are used to double

buffer the PWM duty cycle. This double buffering
provides glitchless PWM operation.
The 8-bit timer T2TMR register is concatenated with
either the 2-bit internal system clock (FOSC), or two bits
of the prescaler, to create the 10-bit time base. The
system clock is used if the Timer2 prescaler is set to 1:1.
When the 10-bit time base matches the
CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair, then the CCPx pin is
cleared (see Figure 23-4).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 23-2: EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS (FOSC = 20 MHz)

PWM Frequency 1.22 kHz 4.88 kHz 19.53 kHz 78.12 kHz 156.3 kHz 208.3 kHz
Timer Prescale 16 4 1 1 1 1
T2PR Value 0xFF 0xFF 0xFF 0x3F 0x1F 0x17
Maximum Resolution (bits) 10 10 10 8 7 6.6

T2PR Value 0x65 0x65 0x65 0x19 0x0C 0x09
Maximum Resolution (bits) 8 8 8 6 5 5
23.4.7 OPERATION IN SLEEP MODE

In Sleep mode, the T2TMR register will not increment
and the state of the module will not change. If the CCPx
pin is driving a value, it will continue to drive that value.
When the device wakes up, T2TMR will continue from
its previous state.
23.4.8 CHANGES IN SYSTEM CLOCK

FREQUENCY
The PWM frequency is derived from the system clock
frequency. Any changes in the system clock frequency
will result in changes to the PWM frequency. See Sec-
tion 7.0 “Oscillator Module (with Fail-Safe Clock
Monitor)” for additional details.
23.4.9 EFFECTS OF RESET

Any Reset will force all ports to Input mode and the
CCP registers to their Reset states.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
23.5 Register Definitions: CCP Control
Long bit name prefixes for the CCP peripherals are
shown below. Refer to Section 1.3.2.2 “Long Bit
Names” for more information.

CCP1 CCP1
CCP2 CCP2
CCP3 CCP3
CCP4 CCP4
REGISTER 23-1: CCPxCON: CCPx CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 U-0 R-x R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN — OUT FMT MODE[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: CCP Module Enable bit

1 = CCP is enabled
0 = CCP is disabled
bit 5 OUT: CCPx Output Data bit (read-only)
bit 4 FMT: CCPW (pulse-width) Alignment bit
MODE = Capture mode:
Unused
MODE = Compare mode:
Unused
MODE = PWM mode:
1 = Left-aligned format
0 = Right-aligned format
bit 3-0 MODE[3:0]: CCPx Mode Select bits
MODE Operating Mode Operation Set CCPxIF

11xx PWM PWM operation Yes
1011 Pulse output; clear TMR1(2) Yes
1010 Pulse output Yes
Compare
1001 Clear output(1) Yes
1000 Set output(1) Yes
0111 Every 16th rising edge of CCPx input Yes
0110 Every 4th rising edge of CCPx input Yes
0101 Capture Every rising edge of CCPx input Yes
0100 Every falling edge of CCPx input Yes
0011 Every edge of CCPx input Yes
0010 Toggle output Yes
Compare
0001 Toggle output; clear TMR1(2) Yes
0000 Disabled —
Note 1: The set and clear operations of the Compare mode are reset by setting MODE = 4’b0000 or EN = 0.
2: When MODE = 0001 or 1011, then the timer associated with the CCP module is cleared. TMR1 is the default selection
for the CCP module, so it is used for indication purpose only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 23-2: CCPTMRS0: CCP TIMERS CONTROL REGISTER 0

C4TSEL[1:0] C3TSEL[1:0] C2TSEL[1:0] C1TSEL[1:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-6 C4TSEL[1:0]: CCP4 Timer Selection bits

11 = CCP4 is based off Timer5 in Capture/Compare mode and Timer6 in PWM mode
00 = Reserved
00 = Reserved
00 = Reserved
00 = Reserved

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 23-3: CCPxCAP: CAPTURE INPUT SELECTION MULTIPLEXER REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/x R/W-0/x R/W-0/x
— — — — — CTS[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 CTS[2:0]: Capture Trigger Input Selection bits
Connection
CTS[1:0]
CCP1 CCP2 CCP3 CCP4
111 CLC4_out
110 CLC3_out
101 CLC2_out
100 CLC1_out
011 IOC_Interrupt
010 CMP2_output
001 CMP1_output
Pin selected by Pin selected by Pin selected by Pin selected by
000
CCP1PPS CCP2PPS CCP3PPS CCP4PPS
REGISTER 23-4: CCPRxL: CCPx REGISTER LOW BYTE

RL[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 MODE = Capture Mode:

RL[7:0]: LSB of captured TMR1 value
MODE = Compare Mode:
RL[7:0]: LSB compared to TMR1 value
MODE = PWM Mode && FMT = 0:
RL[7:0]: CCPW[7:0] – Pulse-Width LS 8 bits
RL[7:6]: CCPW[1:0] – Pulse-Width LS 2 bits
RL[5:0]: Not used

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 23-5: CCPRxH: CCPx REGISTER HIGH BYTE

RH[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 MODE = Capture Mode:

RH[7:0]: MSB of captured TMR1 value
MODE = Compare Mode:
RH[7:0]: MSB compared to TMR1 value
RH[7:2]: Not used
RH[1:0]: CCPW[9:8] – Pulse-Width MS 2 bits
RH[7:0]: CCPW[9:2] – Pulse-Width MS 8 bits
TABLE 23-4: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CCPx

Register
on Page
CCPxCON EN — OUT FMT MODE[3:0] 351
CCPxCAP — — — — — — CTS[1:0] 353
CCPRxL CCPRx[7:0] 353
CCPRxH CCPRx[15:8] 354
CCPTMRS0 C4TSEL[1:0] C3TSEL[1:0] C2TSEL[1:0] C1TSEL[1:0] 352
Legend: — = Unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the CCP module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
24.0 PULSE-WIDTH MODULATION Each PWM module can select the timer source that
controls the module. Each module has an independent
(PWM)
timer selection which can be accessed using the
The PWM module generates a pulse-width modulated CCPTMRS1 register (Register 23-2). Please note that
signal determined by the duty cycle, period, and the PWM mode operation is described with respect to
resolution that are configured by the following registers: T2TMR in the following sections.
• TxPR Figure 24-1 shows a simplified block diagram of PWM
• TxCON operation.
• PWMxDCH Figure 24-2 shows a typical waveform of the PWM
• PWMxDCL signal.
• PWMxCON
Note: The corresponding TRIS bit must be
cleared to enable the PWM output on the
PWMx pin.
FIGURE 24-1: SIMPLIFIED PWM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000022D
9/13/2016
Duty cycle registers PWMxDCL<7:6>
PWMxDCH
PWMx_out
To Peripherals
10-bit Latch
(Not visible to user)
Comparator R Q
0
PPS PWMx
1
S Q
TMR2 Module
R POL RxyPPS TRIS Control
T2TMR (1)
Comparator
T2_match
T2PR
Note 1: 8-bit timer is concatenated with two bits generated by Fosc or two bits of the internal prescaler to
create 10-bit time-base.
FIGURE 24-2: PWM OUTPUT For a step-by-step procedure on how to set up this
Period Rev. 10-000023E
module for PWM operation, refer to Section
24.1.9 “Setup for PWM Operation using PWMx
9/13/2016
Pins”.
Pulse Width
T2TMR = T2PR
T2TMR = Duty Cycle =

PWMxDCH<7:0>:PWMxDCL<7:6>
T2TMR = T2PR

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
24.1 PWMx Pin Configuration 24.1.3 PWM PERIOD
All PWM outputs are multiplexed with the PORT data The PWM period is specified by the T2PR register of
latch. The user must configure the pins as outputs by Timer2. The PWM period can be calculated using the
clearing the associated TRIS bits. formula of Equation 24-1. It is required to have FOSC/4
as clock input to Timer2/4/6 for correct PWM operation.
24.1.1 FUNDAMENTAL OPERATION
The PWM module produces a 10-bit resolution output. EQUATION 24-1: PWM PERIOD
The PWM timer can be selected using the PxTSEL bits PWM Period =   T2PR  + 1   4  T OSC 
in the CCPTMRS1 register. The default selection for
(TMR2 Prescale Value)
PWMx is T2TMR. Please note that the PWM module
operation in the following sections is described with Note: TOSC = 1/FOSC
respect to T2TMR. Timer2 and T2PR set the period of
the PWM. The PWMxDCL and PWMxDCH registers When T2TMR is equal to T2PR, the following three
configure the duty cycle. The period is common to all events occur on the next increment cycle:
PWM modules, whereas the duty cycle is • T2TMR is cleared
independently controlled. • The PWM output is active. (Exception: When the
Note: The Timer2 postscaler is not used in the PWM duty cycle = 0%, the PWM output will
determination of the PWM frequency. The remain inactive.)
postscaler could be used to have a servo • The PWMxDCH and PWMxDCL register values
update rate at a different frequency than the are latched into the buffers.
PWM output.
All PWM outputs associated with Timer2 are set when Note: The Timer2 postscaler has no effect on the
T2TMR is cleared. Each PWMx is cleared when PWM operation.
T2TMR is equal to the value specified in the
corresponding PWMxDCH (8 MSb) and 24.1.4 PWM DUTY CYCLE
PWMxDCL[7:6] (2 LSb) registers. When the value is The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing a 10-bit
greater than or equal to T2PR, the PWM output is value to the PWMxDCH and PWMxDCL register pair.
never cleared (100% duty cycle). The PWMxDCH register contains the eight MSbs and
Note: The PWMxDCH and PWMxDCL registers the PWMxDCL[7:6], the two LSbs. The PWMxDCH and
are double buffered. The buffers are updated PWMxDCL registers can be written to at any time.
when Timer2 matches T2PR. Care should Equation 24-2 is used to calculate the PWM pulse
be taken to update both registers before the width.
timer match occurs. Equation 24-3 is used to calculate the PWM duty cycle
ratio.
24.1.2 PWM OUTPUT POLARITY
The output polarity is inverted by setting the PWMxPOL EQUATION 24-2: PULSE WIDTH
bit of the PWMxCON register.
Pulse Width =  PWMxDCH:PWMxDCL<7:6>  
T O SC  (TMR2 Prescale Value)
Note: TOSC = 1/FOSC
EQUATION 24-3: DUTY CYCLE RATIO
 PWMxDCH:PWMxDCL<7:6> -
Duty Cycle Ratio = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4  T2 PR + 1 
The 8-bit timer T2TMR register is concatenated with the

two Least Significant bits of 1/FOSC, adjusted by the
Timer2 prescaler to create the 10-bit time base. The
system clock is used if the Timer2 prescaler is set to 1:1.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
24.1.5 PWM RESOLUTION
The resolution determines the number of available duty
cycles for a given period. For example, a 10-bit resolution
will result in 1024 discrete duty cycles, whereas an 8-bit
resolution will result in 256 discrete duty cycles.
The maximum PWM resolution is ten bits when T2PR
is 255. The resolution is a function of the T2PR register
value as shown by Equation 24-4.
EQUATION 24-4: PWM RESOLUTION
 4  T2PR + 1  - bits
Resolution = log
---------------------------------------------
log  2 
Note: If the pulse-width value is greater than the

period, the assigned PWM pin(s) will
remain unchanged.

T2PR Value 0xFF 0xFF 0xFF 0x3F 0x1F 0x17
Maximum Resolution (bits) 10 10 10 8 7 6.6

T2PR Value 0x65 0x65 0x65 0x19 0x0C 0x09
Maximum Resolution (bits) 8 8 8 6 5 5
24.1.6 OPERATION IN SLEEP MODE

In Sleep mode, the T2TMR register will not increment
and the state of the module will not change. If the
PWMx pin is driving a value, it will continue to drive that
value. When the device wakes up, T2TMR will continue
from its previous state.
24.1.7 CHANGES IN SYSTEM CLOCK

FREQUENCY
The PWM frequency is derived from the system clock
frequency (FOSC). Any changes in the system clock
frequency will result in changes to the PWM frequency.
Refer to Section 7.0 “Oscillator Module (with Fail-
Safe Clock Monitor)” for additional details.
24.1.8 EFFECTS OF RESET

Any Reset will force all ports to Input mode and the
PWM registers to their Reset states.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
24.1.9 SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION 24.1.10 SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION TO
USING PWMx PINS OTHER DEVICE PERIPHERALS
The following steps should be taken when configuring The following steps should be taken when configuring
the module for PWM operation using the PWMx pins: the module for PWM operation to be used by other
1. Disable the PWMx pin output driver(s) by setting device peripherals:
the associated TRIS bit(s). 1. Disable the PWMx pin output driver(s) by setting
2. Clear the PWMxCON register. the associated TRIS bit(s).
3. Load the T2PR register with the PWM period 2. Clear the PWMxCON register.
value. 3. Load the T2PR register with the PWM period
4. Load the PWMxDCH register and bits [7:6] of value.
the PWMxDCL register with the PWM duty cycle 4. Load the PWMxDCH register and bits [7:6] of
value. the PWMxDCL register with the PWM duty cycle
5. Configure and start Timer2: value.
• Clear the TMR2IF interrupt flag bit of the 5. Configure and start Timer2:
respective PIR register. See Note 1 below. • Clear the TMR2IF interrupt flag bit of the
• Select the timer clock source to be as respective PIR register. See Note 1 below.
FOSC/4 using the TxCLK register. This is • Select the timer clock source to be as
required for correct operation of the PWM FOSC/4 using the TxCLK register. This is
module. required for correct operation of the PWM
• Configure the CKPS bits of the T2CON module.
register with the Timer2 prescale value. • Configure the CKPS bits of the T2CON
• Enable Timer2 by setting the ON bit of the register with the Timer2 prescale value.
T2CON register. • Enable Timer2 by setting the ON bit of the
6. Enable PWM output pin and wait until Timer2 T2CON register.
overflows, TMR2IF bit of the respective PIR 6. Enable PWM output pin:
register is set. See note below. • Wait until Timer2 overflows, TMR2IF bit of the
7. Enable the PWMx pin output driver(s) by respective PIR register is set. See Note 1
clearing the associated TRIS bit(s) and setting below.
the desired pin PPS control bits. 7. Configure the PWM module by loading the
8. Configure the PWM module by loading the PWMxCON register with the appropriate values.
PWMxCON register with the appropriate values.
Note 1: In order to send a complete duty cycle

Note 1: In order to send a complete duty cycle and period on the first PWM output, the
and period on the first PWM output, the above steps must be included in the
above steps must be followed in the order setup sequence. If it is not critical to start
given. If it is not critical to start with a with a complete PWM signal on the first
complete PWM signal, then move Step 8 output, then step 6 may be ignored.
to replace Step 4.
2: For operation with other peripherals only,
disable PWMx pin outputs.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
24.2 Register Definitions: PWM Control
Long bit name prefixes for the PWM peripherals are

PWM5 PWM5
PWM6 PWM6
PWM7 PWM7
PWM8 PWM8
REGISTER 24-1: PWMxCON: PWM CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 U-0 R-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
EN — OUT POL — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: PWM Module Enable bit

1 = PWM module is enabled
0 = PWM module is disabled
bit 5 OUT: PWM Module Output Level When Bit is Read
bit 4 POL: PWM Output Polarity Select bit
1 = PWM output is inverted
0 = PWM output is normal

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 24-2: CCPTMRS1: CCP TIMERS CONTROL REGISTER 1

P8TSEL[1:0] P7TSEL[1:0] P6TSEL[1:0] P5TSEL[1:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-6 P8TSEL[1:0]: PWM8 Timer Selection bits

11 = PWM8 based on TMR6
00 = Reserved
00 = Reserved
00 = Reserved
00 = Reserved

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 24-3: PWMxDCH: PWM DUTY CYCLE HIGH BITS

DC[9:2]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 DC[9:2]: PWM Duty Cycle Most Significant bits

These bits are the MSbs of the PWM duty cycle. The two LSbs are found in PWMxDCL Register.
REGISTER 24-4: PWMxDCL: PWM DUTY CYCLE LOW BITS

R/W-x/u R/W-x/u U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
DC[1:0] — — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-6 DC[1:0]: PWM Duty Cycle Least Significant bits

These bits are the LSbs of the PWM duty cycle. The MSbs are found in PWMxDCH Register.
TABLE 24-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PWM

Register
on Page
PWMxCON EN — OUT POL — — — — 359

PWMxDCH DC[9:2] 361
PWMxDCL DC[1:0] — — — — — — 361
CCPTMRS1 P8TSEL[1:0] P7TSEL[1:0] P6TSEL[1:0] P5TSEL[1:0] 360
Legend: - = Unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’, u = unchanged, x = unknown. Shaded cells are not used by the PWM.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.0 SIGNAL MEASUREMENT TIMER
(SMT)
The SMT is a 24-bit counter with advanced clock and
gating logic, which can be configured for measuring a
variety of digital signal parameters such as pulse width,
frequency and duty cycle, and the time difference
between edges on two signals. The device has only
one SMT module implemented.
Features of the SMT include:
• 24-bit timer/counter
- Three 8-bit registers (SMT1L/H/U)
- Readable and writable
- Optional 16-bit operating mode
• Two 24-bit measurement capture registers
• One 24-bit period match register
• Multi-mode operation, including relative timing
measurement
• Interrupt on period match
• Multiple clock, gate and signal sources
• Interrupt on acquisition complete
• Ability to read current input values

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 25-1: SMT BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000161E
10/12/2016
Period Latch
Set SMTxPRAIF
SMT_window SMT
Clock SMTxPR
Sync
Circuit
Control Set SMTxIF
Logic Comparator
SMT_signal SMT
Clock
Sync
Circuit
24-bit
Reset SMTxCPR
Buffer
Enable SMTxTMR 24-bit

SMTxCPW
CLKR 111 Buffer
SOSC 110 Window Latch

Set SMTxPWAIF
MFINTOSC/16 101
MFINTOSC 100
Prescaler
LFINTOSC 011
HFINTOSC 010
FOSC 001
FOSC/4 000
CSEL<2:0>
FIGURE 25-2: SMT SIGNAL AND WINDOW BLOCK DIAGRAM

Rev. 10-000173D
10/12/2016
See See
SMTxSIG SMT_signal SMTxWIN SMT_window
Register Register
SSEL<4:0> WSEL<4:0>

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.1 SMT Operation 25.2.3 PERIOD LATCH REGISTERS
The core of the module is the 24-bit counter, The SMT1CPR registers are the 24-bit SMT period
SMT1TMR combined with a complex data acquisition latch. They are used to latch in other values of the
front-end. Depending on the mode of operation SMT1TMR when triggered by various other signals,
selected, the SMT can perform a variety of which are determined by the mode the SMT is currently
measurements summarized in Table 25-1. in.
The SMT1CPR registers can also be updated with the
25.1.1 CLOCK SOURCES current value of the SMT1TMR value by setting the
Clock sources available to the SMT include: CPRUP bit in the SMT1STAT register.
• FOSC
25.3 Halt Operation
• FOSC/4
• HFINTOSC 16 MHz The counter can be prevented from rolling-over using
• LFINTOSC the STP bit in the SMT1CON0 register. When halting is
enabled, the period match interrupt persists until the
• MFINTOSC 31.25 kHz
SMT1TMR is reset (either by a manual Reset, Section
The SMT clock source is selected by configuring the 25.2.1 “Time Base”) or by clearing the GO bit of the
CSEL[2:0] bits in the SMT1CLK register. The clock SMT1CON1 register and writing the SMT1TMR values
source can also be prescaled using the PS[1:0] bits of in software.
the SMT1CON0 register. The prescaled clock source is
used to clock both the counter and any synchronization 25.4 Polarity Control
logic used by the module.
The three input signals for the SMT have polarity
25.1.2 PERIOD MATCH INTERRUPT control to determine whether or not they are active-
Similar to other timers, the SMT triggers an interrupt high/positive edge or active-low/negative edge signals.
when SMT1TMR rolls over to ‘0’. This happens when The following bits apply to Polarity Control:
SMT1TMR = SMT1PR, regardless of mode. Hence, in
• WSEL bit (Window Polarity)
any mode that relies on an external signal or a window
to reset the timer, proper operation requires that • SSEL bit (Signal Polarity)
SMT1PR be set to a period larger than that of the • CSEL bit (Clock Polarity)
expected signal or window. These bits are located in the SMT1CON0 register.
25.2 Basic Timer Function Registers 25.5 Status Information

The SMT1TMR time base and the SMT1CPW/ The SMT provides input status information for the user
SMT1PR/SMT1CPR buffer registers serve several without requiring the need to deal with the polarity of
functions and can be manually updated using software. the incoming signals.
25.2.1 TIME BASE 25.5.1 WINDOW STATUS

The SMT1TMR is the 24-bit counter that is the center of Window status is determined by the WS bit of the
the SMT. It is used as the basic counter/timer for SMT1STAT register. This bit is only used in Windowed
measurement in each of the modes of the SMT. It can be Measure, Gated Counter and Gated Window Measure
reset to a value of 24’h00_0000 by setting the RST bit of modes, and is only valid when TS = 1, and will be
the SMT1STAT register. It can be written to and read delayed in time by synchronizer delays in non-Counter
from software, but it is not guarded for atomic access, modes.
therefore reads and writes to the SMT1TMR should only
be made when the GO = 0, or the software should have 25.5.2 SIGNAL STATUS
other measures to ensure integrity of SMT1TMR reads/
Signal status is determined by the AS bit of the
writes.
SMT1STAT register. This bit is used in all modes
except Window Measure, Time of Flight and Capture
25.2.2 PULSE-WIDTH LATCH REGISTERS
modes, and is only valid when TS = 1, and will be
The SMT1CPW registers are the 24-bit SMT pulse- delayed in time by synchronizer delays in non-Counter
width latch. They are used to latch in the value of the modes.
SMT1TMR when triggered by various signals, which
are determined by the mode the SMT is currently in. 25.5.3 GO STATUS
The SMT1CPW registers can also be updated with the
Timer run status is determined by the TS bit of the
current value of the SMT1TMR value by setting the
SMT1STAT register, and will be delayed in time by
CPWUP bit of the SMT1STAT register.
synchronizer delays in non-Counter modes.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6 Modes of Operation 25.6.1 TIMER MODE
The modes of operation are summarized in Table 25-1. Timer mode is the simplest mode of operation where
The following sections provide detailed descriptions, the SMT1TMR is used as a 16/24-bit timer. No data
examples of how the modes can be used. Note that all acquisition takes place in this mode. The timer
waveforms assume WPOL/SPOL/CPOL = 0. When increments as long as the GO bit has been set by
WPOL/SPOL/CPOL = 1, all SMTSIGx, SMTWINx and software. No SMT window or SMT signal events affect
SMT clock signals will have a polarity opposite to that the GO bit. Everything is synchronized to the SMT
indicated. For all modes, the REPEAT bit controls clock source. When the timer experiences a period
whether the acquisition is repeated or single. When match (SMT1TMR = SMT1PR), SMT1TMR is reset
REPEAT = 0 (Single Acquisition mode), the timer will and the period match interrupt trips. See Figure 25-3.
stop incrementing and the GO bit will be reset upon the
completion of an acquisition. Otherwise, the timer will
continue and allow for continued acquisitions to
overwrite the previous ones until the timer is stopped in
software.
TABLE 25-1: MODES OF OPERATION

Synchronous
MODE Mode of Operation Reference
Operation
0000 Timer Yes Section 25.6.1 “Timer Mode”
0001 Gated Timer Yes Section 25.6.2 “Gated Timer Mode”
0010 Period and Duty Cycle Acquisition Yes Section 25.6.3 “Period and Duty Cycle Mode”
0011 High and Low Time Measurement Yes Section 25.6.4 “High and Low Measure Mode”
0100 Windowed Measurement Yes Section 25.6.5 “Windowed Measure Mode”
0101 Gated Windowed Measurement Yes Section 25.6.6 “Gated Windowed Measure Mode”
0110 Time of Flight Yes Section 25.6.7 “Time of Flight Measure Mode”
0111 Capture Yes Section 25.6.8 “Capture Mode”
1000 Counter No Section 25.6.9 “Counter Mode”
1001 Gated Counter No Section 25.6.10 “Gated Counter Mode”
1010 Windowed Counter No Section 25.6.11 “Windowed Counter Mode”
1011-1111 Reserved — —

FIGURE 25-3: TIMER MODE TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 174A

12/19/201 3
SMTx Clock
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxPR 11
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SMTxIF
DS40001919E-page 366
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6.2 GATED TIMER MODE
Gated Timer mode uses the SMTSIGx input to control
whether or not the SMT1TMR will increment. Upon a
falling edge of the external signal, the SMT1CPW
register will update to the current value of the
SMT1TMR. Example waveforms for both repeated and
single acquisitions are provided in Figure 25-4 and
Figure 25-5.

FIGURE 25-4: GATED TIMER MODE REPEAT ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 176A

12/19/201 3
SMTx_signal
SMTx_signalsync
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxPR 0xFFFFFF
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SMTxCPW 5 7
SMTxPWAIF
DS40001919E-page 368
FIGURE 25-5: GATED TIMER MODE SINGLE ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 175A

12/19/201 3
SMTx_signal
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTx_signalsync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxPR 0xFFFFFF
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5
SMTxCPW 5
SMTxPWAIF
DS40001919E-page 369
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6.3 PERIOD AND DUTY CYCLE MODE
In Duty Cycle mode, either the duty cycle or period
(depending on polarity) of the SMT1_signal can be
acquired relative to the SMT clock. The CPW register is
updated on a falling edge of the signal, and the CPR
register is updated on a rising edge of the signal, along
with the SMT1TMR resetting to 0x0001. In addition, the
GO bit is reset on a rising edge when the SMT is in
Single Acquisition mode. See Figure 25-6 and
Figure 25-7.

FIGURE 25-6: PERIOD AND DUTY-CYCLE REPEAT ACQUISITION MODE TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 177A

12/19/201 3
SMTx_signal
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTx_signalsync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5
SMTxCPW 5 2
SMTxCPR 11
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 371
FIGURE 25-7: PERIOD AND DUTY-CYCLE SINGLE ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 178A

12/19/201 3
SMTx_signal
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTx_signalsync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SMTxCPW 5
SMTxCPR 11
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 372
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6.4 HIGH AND LOW MEASURE MODE
This mode measures the high and low pulse time of the
SMTSIGx relative to the SMT clock. It begins
incrementing the SMT1TMR on a rising edge on the
SMTSIGx input, then updates the SMT1CPW register
with the value and resets the SMT1TMR on a falling
edge, starting to increment again. Upon observing
another rising edge, it updates the SMT1CPR register
with its current value and once again resets the
SMT1TMR value and begins incrementing again. See
Figure 25-8 and Figure 25-9.

FIGURE 25-8: HIGH AND LOW MEASURE MODE REPEAT ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 180A

12/19/201 3
SMTx_signal
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTx_signalsync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3
SMTxCPW 5 2
SMTxCPR 6
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 374
FIGURE 25-9: HIGH AND LOW MEASURE MODE SINGLE ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 179A

12/19/201 3
SMTx_signal
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTx_signalsync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6
SMTxCPW 5
SMTxCPR 6
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 375
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6.5 WINDOWED MEASURE MODE
This mode measures the window duration of the
SMTWINx input of the SMT. It begins incrementing the
timer on a rising edge of the SMTWINx input and
updates the SMT1CPR register with the value of the
timer and resets the timer on a second rising edge. See

FIGURE 25-10: WINDOWED MEASURE MODE REPEAT ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 182A

12/19/201 3
SMTxWIN
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTxWIN_sync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
SMTxCPR 12 8
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 377
FIGURE 25-11: WINDOWED MEASURE MODE SINGLE ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 181A

12/19/201 3
SMTxWIN
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTxWIN_sync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SMTxCPR 12
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 378
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6.6 GATED WINDOWED MEASURE
MODE
This mode measures the duty cycle of the SMT1_signal
input over a known input window. It does so by
incrementing the timer on each pulse of the clock signal
while the SMT1_signal input is high, updating the
SMT1CPR register and resetting the timer on every
rising edge of the SMTWINx input after the first. See

FIGURE 25-12: GATED WINDOWED MEASURE MODE REPEAT ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 184A

12/19/201 3
SMTxWIN
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTxWIN_sync
SMTx_signal
SMTx_signalsync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 0
SMTxCPR 6 3
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 380
FIGURE 25-13: GATED WINDOWED MEASURE MODE SINGLE ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAMS
DS40001919E-page 381
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000 183A
12/19/201 3
SMTxWIN
SMTxWIN_sync
SMTx_signal
SMTx_signalsync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
SMTxCPR 6
SMTxPRAIF
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6.7 TIME OF FLIGHT MEASURE MODE
This mode measures the time interval between a rising
edge on the SMTWINx input and a rising edge on the
SMT1_signal input, beginning to increment the timer
upon observing a rising edge on the SMTWINx input,
while updating the SMT1CPR register and resetting the
timer upon observing a rising edge on the SMT1_signal
input. In the event of two SMTWINx rising edges
without an SMT1_signal rising edge, it will update the
SMT1CPW register with the current value of the timer
and reset the timer value. See Figure 25-14 and
Figure 25-15.

FIGURE 25-14: TIME OF FLIGHT MODE REPEAT ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000186A
4/22/2016
SMTxWIN
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTxWIN_sync
SMTx_signal
SMTx_signalsync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2
SMTxCPW 13
SMTxCPR 4
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 383
FIGURE 25-15: TIME OF FLIGHT MODE SINGLE ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000185A
4/26/2016
SMTxWIN
SMTxWIN_sync
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTx_signal
SMTx_signalsync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5
SMTxCPW
SMTxCPR 4
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 384
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6.8 CAPTURE MODE
This mode captures the Timer value based on a rising
or falling edge on the SMTWINx input and triggers an
interrupt. This mimics the capture feature of a CCP
module. The timer begins incrementing upon the GO
bit being set, and updates the value of the SMT1CPR
register on each rising edge of SMTWINx, and updates
the value of the CPW register on each falling edge of
the SMTWINx. See Figure 25-16 and Figure 25-17.

FIGURE 25-16: CAPTURE MODE REPEAT ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000 188A

12/19/201 3
SMTxWIN
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTxWIN_sync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
SMTxCPW 3 19 32
SMTxCPR 2 18 31
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 386
FIGURE 25-17: CAPTURE MODE SINGLE ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
DS40001919E-page 387
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000 187A
12/19/201 3
SMTxWIN
SMTxWIN_sync
SMTx Clock
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxGO_sync
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3
SMTxCPW 3
SMTxCPR 2
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
25.6.9 COUNTER MODE
This mode increments the timer on each pulse of the SMT1_signal input. This
mode is asynchronous to the SMT clock and uses the SMT1_signal as a time
source. The SMT1CPW register will be updated with the current SMT1TMR
value on the rising edge of the SMT1WIN input. See Figure 25-18.
FIGURE 25-18: COUNTER MODE TIMING DIAGRAM
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000189A
4/12/2016
SMTxWIN
SMTx_signal
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
SMTxCPW 12 25
DS40001919E-page 388
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6.10 GATED COUNTER MODE
This mode counts pulses on the SMT1_signal input,
gated by the SMT1WIN input. It begins incrementing
the timer upon seeing a rising edge of the SMT1WIN
input and updates the SMT1CPW register upon a
falling edge on the SMT1WIN input. See Figure 25-
19 and Figure 25-20.

FIGURE 25-19: GATED COUNTER MODE REPEAT ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000190A
12/18/2013
SMTxWIN
SMTx_signal
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
SMTxCPW 8 13
SMTxPWAIF
FIGURE 25-20: GATED COUNTER MODE SINGLE ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM

Rev. 10-000191A
12/18/2013
SMTxWIN
SMTx_signal
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
DS40001919E-page 390
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SMTxCPW 8
SMTxPWAIF
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.6.11 WINDOWED COUNTER MODE
This mode counts pulses on the SMT1_signal input,
within a window dictated by the SMT1WIN input. It
begins counting upon seeing a rising edge of the
SMT1WIN input, updates the SMT1CPW register on a
falling edge of the SMT1WIN input, and updates the
SMT1CPR register on each rising edge of the
SMT1WIN input beyond the first. See Figure 25-21 and
Figure 25-22.

FIGURE 25-21: WINDOWED COUNTER MODE REPEAT ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000192A
12/18/2013
SMTxWIN
SMTx_signal
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5
SMTxCPW 9 5
SMTxCPR 16
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
DS40001919E-page 392
FIGURE 25-22: WINDOWED COUNTER MODE SINGLE ACQUISITION TIMING DIAGRAM
DS40001919E-page 393
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000193A
12/18/2013
SMTxWIN
SMTx_signal
SMTxEN
SMTxGO
SMTxTMR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SMTxCPW 9
SMTxCPR 16
SMTxPWAIF
SMTxPRAIF
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.7 Interrupts
The SMT can trigger an interrupt under three different
conditions:
• PW Acquisition Complete
• PR Acquisition Complete
• Counter Period Match
The interrupts are controlled by the PIR and PIE
registers of the device.
25.7.1 PW AND PR ACQUISITION

INTERRUPTS
The SMT can trigger interrupts whenever it updates the
SMT1CPW and SMT1CPR registers, the
circumstances for which are dependent on the SMT
mode, and are discussed in each mode’s specific
section. The SMT1CPW interrupt is controlled by
SMT1PWAIF and SMT1PWAIE bits in the respective
PIR and PIE registers. The SMT1CPR interrupt is
controlled by the SMT1PRAIF and SMT1PRAIE bits,
also located in the respective PIR and PIE registers.
In synchronous SMT modes, the interrupt trigger is
synchronized to the SMT1CLK. In Asynchronous
modes, the interrupt trigger is asynchronous. In either
mode, once triggered, the interrupt will be
synchronized to the CPU clock.
25.7.2 COUNTER PERIOD MATCH

INTERRUPT
As described in Section 25.1.2 “Period Match
interrupt”, the SMT will also interrupt upon SMT1TMR,
matching SMT1PR with its period match limit functionality
described in Section 25.3 “Halt Operation”. The period
match interrupt is controlled by SMT1IF and SMT1IE,
located in the respective PIR and PIE registers.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
25.8 Register Definitions: SMT Control
Long bit name prefixes for the Signal Measurement
Timer peripherals are shown in Section 1.3 “Register
and Bit naming conventions”.
TABLE 25-2: LONG BIT NAMES PREFIXES
FOR SMT PERIPHERALS
SMT1 SMT1
REGISTER 25-1: SMT1CON0: SMT CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN(1) — STP WPOL SPOL CPOL PS[1:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: SMT Enable bit(1)

1 = SMT is enabled
0 = SMT is disabled; internal states are reset, clock requests are disabled
bit 5 STP: SMT Counter Halt Enable bit
When SMT1TMR = SMT1PR:
1 = Counter remains SMT1PR; period match interrupt occurs when clocked
0 = Counter resets to 24’h000000; period match interrupt occurs when clocked
bit 4 WPOL: SMT1WIN Input Polarity Control bit
1 = SMT1WIN signal is active-low/falling edge enabled
0 = SMT1WIN signal is active-high/rising edge enabled
bit 3 SPOL: SMT1SIG Input Polarity Control bit
1 = SMT1_signal is active-low/falling edge enabled
0 = SMT1_signal is active-high/rising edge enabled
bit 2 CPOL: SMT Clock Input Polarity Control bit
1 = SMT1TMR increments on the falling edge of the selected clock signal
0 = SMT1TMR increments on the rising edge of the selected clock signal
bit 1-0 PS[1:0]: SMT Prescale Select bits
11 = Prescaler = 1:8
Note 1: Setting EN to ‘0’ does not affect the register contents.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 25-2: SMT1CON1: SMT CONTROL REGISTER 1

R/W/HC-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
GO REPEAT — — MODE[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 GO: GO Data Acquisition bit

1 = Incrementing, acquiring data is enabled
0 = Incrementing, acquiring data is disabled
bit 6 REPEAT: SMT Repeat Acquisition Enable bit
1 = Repeat Data Acquisition mode is enabled
0 = Single Acquisition mode is enabled
bit 3-0 MODE[3:0] SMT Operation Mode Select bits
1111 = Reserved
•
•
•
1011 = Reserved
1010 = Windowed counter
1001 = Gated counter
1000 = Counter
0111 = Capture
0110 = Time of flight
0101 = Gated windowed measure
0100 = Windowed measure
0011 = High and low time measurement
0010 = Period and Duty-Cycle Acquisition
0001 = Gated Timer
0000 = Timer

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 25-3: SMT1STAT: SMT STATUS REGISTER

R/W/HC-0/0 R/W/HC-0/0 R/W/HC-0/0 U-0 U-0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
CPRUP CPWUP RST — — TS WS AS
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CPRUP: SMT Manual Period Buffer Update bit

1 = Request update to SMT1CPRx registers
0 = SMT1CPRx registers update is complete
bit 6 CPWUP: SMT Manual Pulse Width Buffer Update bit
1 = Request update to SMT1CPW registers
0 = SMT1CPW registers update is complete
bit 5 RST: SMT Manual Timer Reset bit
1 = Request Reset to SMT1TMR registers
0 = SMT1TMR registers update is complete
bit 2 TS: GO Value Status bit
1 = SMT timer is incrementing
0 = SMT timer is not incrementing
bit 1 WS: SMT1WIN Value Status bit
1 = SMT window is open
0 = SMT window is closed
bit 0 AS: SMT_signal Value Status bit
1 = SMT acquisition is in progress
0 = SMT acquisition is not in progress

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 25-4: SMT1CLK: SMT CLOCK SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — CSEL[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 CSEL[2:0]: SMT Clock Selection bits
111 = Reference Clock Output
110 = SOSC
101 = MFINTOSC/16 (32 kHz)
011 = LFINTOSC
010 = HFINTOSC 16 MHz
001 = FOSC
000 = FOSC/4

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 25-5: SMT1WIN: SMT1 WINDOW INPUT SELECT REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — WSEL[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 WSEL[4:0]: SMT1 Window Selection bits
11111 = Reserved
•
•
•
11011 = Reserved
11010 = CLC4_out
11001 = CLC3_out
11000 = CLC2_out
10111 = CLC1_out
10110 = ZCD1_out
10101 = CMP2_out
10100 = CMP1_out
10011 = NCO1_out
10010 = Reserved
10001 = Reserved
10000 = PWM8_out
01111 = PWM7_out
01110 = PWM6_out
01101 = PWM5_out
01100 = CCP4_out
01011 = CCP3_out
01010 = CCP2_out
01001 = CCP1_out
00100 = CLKREF
00011 = SOSC
00010 = MFINTOSC/16 (32 kHz)
00001 = LFINTOSC
00000 = SMTxWINPPS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 25-6: SMT1SIG: SMT1 SIGNAL INPUT SELECT REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — SSEL[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 SSEL[4:0]: SMT1 Signal Selection bits
11111 = Reserved
•
•
•
11010 = Reserved
11001 = CLC4_out
11000 = CLC3_out
10111 = CLC2_out
10110 = CLC1_out
10101 = ZCD1_out
10100 = CMP2_out
10011 = CMP1_out
10010 = NCO1_out
10001 = Reserved
10000 = Reserved
01111 = PWM8_out
01110 = PWM7_out
01101 = PWM6_out
01100 = PWM5_out
01011 = CCP4_out
01010 = CCP3_out
01001 = CCP2_out
01000 = CCP1_out
00001 = TMR0_overflow
00000 = SMTxSIGPPS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 25-7: SMT1TMRL: SMT TIMER REGISTER – LOW BYTE

SMT1TMR[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1TMR[7:0]: Significant bits of the SMT Counter – Low Byte
REGISTER 25-8: SMT1TMRH: SMT TIMER REGISTER – HIGH BYTE

SMT1TMR[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1TMR[15:8]: Significant bits of the SMT Counter – High Byte
REGISTER 25-9: SMT1TMRU: SMT TIMER REGISTER – UPPER BYTE

SMT1TMR[23:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1TMR[23:16]: Significant bits of the SMT Counter – Upper Byte

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 25-10: SMT1CPRL: SMT CAPTURED PERIOD REGISTER – LOW BYTE

R-x/x R-x/x R-x/x R-x/x R-x/x R-x/x R-x/x R-x/x
SMT1CPR[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1CPR[7:0]: Significant bits of the SMT Period Latch – Low Byte
REGISTER 25-11: SMT1CPRH: SMT CAPTURED PERIOD REGISTER – HIGH BYTE

SMT1CPR[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1CPR[15:8]: Significant bits of the SMT Period Latch – High Byte
REGISTER 25-12: SMT1CPRU: SMT CAPTURED PERIOD REGISTER – UPPER BYTE

SMT1CPR[23:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1CPR[23:16]: Significant bits of the SMT Period Latch – Upper Byte

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 25-13: SMT1CPWL: SMT CAPTURED PULSE WIDTH REGISTER – LOW BYTE
SMT1CPW[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1CPW[7:0]: Significant bits of the SMT PW Latch – Low Byte
REGISTER 25-14: SMT1CPWH: SMT CAPTURED PULSE WIDTH REGISTER – HIGH BYTE
SMT1CPW[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1CPW[15:8]: Significant bits of the SMT PW Latch – High Byte
REGISTER 25-15: SMT1CPWU: SMT CAPTURED PULSE WIDTH REGISTER – UPPER BYTE
SMT1CPW[23:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1CPW[23:16]: Significant bits of the SMT PW Latch – Upper Byte

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 25-16: SMT1PRL: SMT PERIOD REGISTER – LOW BYTE

R/W-x/1 R/W-x/1 R/W-x/1 R/W-x/1 R/W-x/1 R/W-x/1 R/W-x/1 R/W-x/1
SMT1PR[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1PR[7:0]: Significant bits of the SMT Timer Value for Period Match – Low Byte
REGISTER 25-17: SMT1PRH: SMT PERIOD REGISTER – HIGH BYTE

SMT1PR[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1PR[15:8]: Significant bits of the SMT Timer Value for Period Match – High Byte
REGISTER 25-18: SMT1PRU: SMT PERIOD REGISTER – UPPER BYTE

SMT1PR[23:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 SMT1PR[23:16]: Significant bits of the SMT Timer Value for Period Match – Upper Byte

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 25-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SMT1
Register
on Page
SMT1CON0 EN — STP WPOL SPOL CPOL SMT1PS[1:0] 395
SMT1CON1 GO REPEAT — — MODE[3:0] 396
SMT1STAT CPRUP CPWUP RST — — TS WS AS 397
SMT1CLK — — — — — CSEL[2:0] 398
SMT1SIG — — — SSEL[4:0] 400
SMT1WIN — — — WSEL[4:0] 399
SMT1TMRL TMR[7:0] 401
SMT1TMRH TMR[15:8] 401
SMT1TMRU TMR[23:16] 401
SMT1CPRL CPR[7:0] 402
SMT1CPRH CPR[15:8] 402
SMT1CPRU CPR[23:16] 402
SMT1CPWL CPW[7:0] 403
SMT1CPWH CPW[15:8] 403
SMT1CPWU CPW[23:16] 403
SMT1PRL PR[7:0] 404
SMT1PRH PR[15:8] 404
SMT1PRU PR[23:16] 404
Legend: — = unimplemented read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for SMT1 module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.0 COMPLEMENTARY 26.2 Operating Modes
WAVEFORM GENERATOR The CWG module can operate in six different modes,
(CWG) MODULE as specified by the MODE[2:0] bits of the CWGxCON0
register:
The Complementary Waveform Generator (CWG)
produces half-bridge, full-bridge, and steering of PWM • Half-Bridge mode
waveforms. It is backwards compatible with previous • Push-Pull mode
CCP functions. There are three instances of the CWG • Asynchronous Steering mode
module present on the device. • Synchronous Steering mode
• Full-Bridge mode, Forward
Each of the CWG modules has the following features: • Full-Bridge mode, Reverse
• Six operating modes: All modes accept a single pulse data input, and
- Synchronous Steering mode provide up to four outputs as described in the following
- Asynchronous Steering mode sections.
- Full-Bridge mode, Forward All modes include auto-shutdown control as described
- Full-Bridge mode, Reverse in Section 26.10 “Auto-Shutdown”.
- Half-Bridge mode Note: Except as noted for Full-bridge mode
- Push-Pull mode (Section 26.2.3 “Full-Bridge Modes”),
• Output polarity control mode changes should only be performed
• Output steering while EN = 0 (Register 26-1).
• Independent 6-bit rising and falling event dead-
band timers 26.2.1 HALF-BRIDGE MODE
- Clocked dead band In Half-Bridge mode, two output signals are generated
- Independent rising and falling dead-band as true and inverted versions of the input as illustrated
enables in Figure 26-2. A non-overlap (dead-band) time is
inserted between the two outputs as described in
• Auto-shutdown control with:
Section 26.6 “Dead-Band Control”. The output
- Selectable shutdown sources steering feature cannot be used in this mode. A basic
- Auto-restart option block diagram of this mode is shown in Figure 26-1.
- Auto-shutdown pin override control The unused outputs CWGxC and CWGxD drive similar
signals as CWGxA and CWGxB, with polarity
26.1 Fundamental Operation independently controlled by the POLC and POLD bits
of the CWGxCON1 register, respectively.
The CWG generates two output waveforms from the
selected input source.
The off-to-on transition of each output can be delayed
from the on-to-off transition of the other output, thereby
creating a time delay immediately where neither output
is driven. This is referred to as dead time and is covered
in Section 26.6 “Dead-Band Control”.
It may be necessary to guard against the possibility of
circuit faults or a feedback event arriving too late or not
at all. In this case, the active drive must be terminated
before the Fault condition causes damage. This is
referred to as auto-shutdown and is covered in Section
26.10 “Auto-Shutdown”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 26-1: SIMPLIFIED CWG BLOCK DIAGRAM (HALF-BRIDGE MODE, MODE[2:0] = 100)
LSAC<1:0> Rev. 10-000209D

2/2/2016
‘1’ 00
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
Rising Dead-Band Block
CWG Clock clock 1
CWG Data A
data out
CWG Data data in 0 CWG1A
POLA
LSBD<1:0>
Falling Dead-Band Block ‘1’ 00

clock CWG Data B ‘0’ 01
data out
data in High-Z 10
11
CWG Data Input CWG 1

Data
0 CWG1B
POLB
D Q
E LSAC<1:0>
EN ‘1’ 00
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
1
0 CWG1C
POLC
Auto-shutdown source S Q
(CWGxAS1 register) LSBD<1:0>
R
REN ‘1’ 00
SHUTDOWN = 0 ‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
1
0 CWG1D
POLD
SHUTDOWN
FREEZE
D Q
CWG Data

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 26-2: CWGx HALF-BRIDGE MODE OPERATION
CWGx_clock
CWGxA
CWGxC
Rising Event Dead Band Rising Event D
Falling Event Dead Band Falling Event Dead Band
CWGxB
CWGxD
CWGx_data
Note: CWGx_rising_src = CCP1_out, CWGx_falling_src = ~CCP1_out
26.2.2 PUSH-PULL MODE

In Push-Pull mode, two output signals are generated,
alternating copies of the input as illustrated in
Figure 26-4. This alternation creates the push-pull
effect required for driving some transformer-based
power supply designs. Steering modes are not used in
Push-Pull mode. A basic block diagram for the
Push-Pull mode is shown in Figure 26-3.
The push-pull sequencer is reset whenever EN = 0 or
if an auto-shutdown event occurs. The sequencer is
clocked by the first input pulse, and the first output
appears on CWGxA.
The unused outputs CWGxC and CWGxD drive copies
of CWGxA and CWGxB, respectively, but with polarity
controlled by the POLC and POLD bits of the
CWGxCON1 register, respectively.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 26-3: SIMPLIFIED CWG BLOCK DIAGRAM (PUSH-PULL MODE, MODE[2:0] = 101)
LSAC<1:0>
Rev. 10-000210D
2/2/2016
‘1’ 00
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
1
CWG Data CWG Data A
0 CWG1A
POLA
LSBD<1:0>
D Q
Q
‘1’ 00
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
CWG Data B 11
1
CWG Data Input CWG 0 CWG1B
POLB
Data
D Q
LSAC<1:0>
E
‘1’ 00
EN ‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
1
0 CWG1C
POLC
(CWGxAS1 register)
R LSBD<1:0>
REN 00
‘1’
SHUTDOWN = 0
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
1
0 CWG1D
POLD
SHUTDOWN
FREEZE
D Q
CWG Data

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 26-4: CWGx PUSH-PULL MODE OPERATION
CWG1
clock
Input
source
CWG1A
CWG1B
26.2.3 FULL-BRIDGE MODES

In Forward and Reverse Full-Bridge modes, three
outputs drive static values while the fourth is modulated
by the input data signal. The mode selection may be
toggled between forward and reverse by toggling the
MODE[0] bit of the CWGxCON0 while keeping
MODE[2:1] static, without disabling the CWG module.
When connected as shown in Figure 26-5, the outputs
are appropriate for a full-bridge motor driver. Each
CWG output signal has independent polarity control, so
the circuit can be adapted to high-active and low-active
drivers. A simplified block diagram for the Full-Bridge
modes is shown in Figure 26-6.
FIGURE 26-5: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE APPLICATION

Rev. 10-000263A
12/8/2015
VDD
FET QA QC
FET
Driver Driver
CWG1A
CWG1B LOAD
CWG1C FET FET

Driver Driver
CWG1D QB QD

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 26-6: SIMPLIFIED CWG BLOCK DIAGRAM (FORWARD AND REVERSE FULL-BRIDGE
MODES)
MODE<2:0> = 010: Forward

Rev. 10-000212D
2/2/2016
LSAC<1:0>
MODE<2:0> = 011: Reverse
‘1’ 00
Rising Dead-Band Block ‘0’ 01
CWG Clock clock
signal out High-Z 10
signal in 11
CWG 1
CWG Data A
Data
MODE<2:0> 0 CWG1A
POLA
D Q
CWG Q LSBD<1:0>
Data
cwg data ‘1’ 00

signal in ‘0’ 01
signal out
CWG Clock clock High-Z 10
Falling Dead-Band Block 11
1
CWG Data Input CWG Data B
CWG Data
0 CWG1B
POLB
D Q
E LSAC<1:0>
‘1’ 00
EN
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
CWG Data C
1
0 CWG1C
POLC
(CWGxAS1 register)
R LSBD<1:0>
REN
‘1’ 00
SHUTDOWN = 0
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
CWG Data D
1
0 CWG1D
POLD
SHUTDOWN
FREEZE
D Q
CWG Data

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
In Forward Full-Bridge mode (MODE[2:0] = 010), In Full-Bridge mode, the dead-band period is used
CWGxA is driven to its active state, CWGxB and when there is a switch from forward to reverse or vice-
CWGxC are driven to their inactive state, and CWGxD versa. This dead-band control is described in Section
is modulated by the input signal, as shown in 26.6 “Dead-Band Control”, with additional details in
Figure 26-7. Section 26.7 “Rising Edge and Reverse Dead
In Reverse Full-Bridge mode (MODE[2:0] = 011), Band” and Section 26.8 “Falling Edge and Forward
CWGxC is driven to its active state, CWGxA and Dead Band”. Steering modes are not used with either
CWGxD are driven to their inactive states, and CWGxB of the Full-Bridge modes. The mode selection may be
is modulated by the input signal, as shown in toggled between forward and reverse toggling the
Figure 26-7. MODE[0] bit of the CWGxCON0 while keeping
MODE[2:1] static, without disabling the CWG module.
FIGURE 26-7: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE OUTPUT

Forward
Mode
Period
CWG1A(2)
CWG1B(2)
CWG1C(2)
Pulse Width
CWG1D(2)
(1) (1)
Reverse
Mode
Period
CWG1A(2)
Pulse Width
CWG1B(2)
CWG1C(2)
CWG1D(2)
(1) (1)
Note 1: A rising CWG data input creates a rising event on the modulated output.
2: Output signals shown as active-high; all POLy bits are clear.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.2.3.1 Direction Change in Full-Bridge The dead-band delay is inserted only when changing
Mode directions, and only the modulated output is affected.
The statically-configured outputs (CWGxA and
In Full-Bridge mode, changing MODE[2:0] controls the
CWGxC) are not afforded dead band, and switch
forward/reverse direction. Changes to MODE[2:0]
essentially simultaneously.
change to the new direction on the next rising edge of
the modulated input. Figure 26-8 shows an example of the CWG outputs
changing directions from forward to reverse, at near
A direction change is initiated in software by changing
100% duty cycle. In this example, at time t1, the output
the MODE[2:0] bits of the CWGxCON0 register. The
of CWGxA and CWGxD become inactive, while output
sequence is illustrated in Figure 26-8.
CWGxC becomes active. Since the turn-off time of the
• The associated active output CWGxA and the power devices is longer than the turn-on time, a shoot-
inactive output CWGxC are switched to drive in through current will flow through power devices QC and
the opposite direction. QD for the duration of ‘t’. The same phenomenon will
• The previously modulated output CWGxD is occur to power devices QA and QB for the CWG
switched to the inactive state, and the previously direction change from reverse to forward.
inactive output CWGxB begins to modulate.
When changing the CWG direction at high duty cycle is
• CWG modulation resumes after the direction-
required for an application, two possible solutions for
switch dead band has elapsed.
eliminating the shoot-through current are:
26.2.3.2 Dead-Band Delay in Full-Bridge 1. Reduce the CWG duty cycle for one period
Mode before changing directions.
2. Use switch drivers that can drive the switches off
Dead-band delay is important when either of the
faster than they can drive them on.
following conditions is true:
1. The direction of the CWG output changes when
the duty cycle of the data input is at or near
100%, or
2. The turn-off time of the power switch, including
the power device and driver circuit, is greater
than the turn-on time.
FIGURE 26-8: EXAMPLE OF PWM DIRECTION CHANGE AT NEAR 100% DUTY CYCLE
t1
Forward Period Reverse Period
CWG1A
CWG1B Pulse Width
CWG1C
CWG1D Pulse Width

TON
External Switch C
TOFF
External Switch D
Potential Shoot- T = TOFF - TON

Through Current

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.2.4 STEERING MODES 26.2.4.1 Synchronous Steering Mode
In both Synchronous and Asynchronous Steering In Synchronous Steering mode (MODE[2:0] bits = 001,
modes, the modulated input signal can be steered to Register 26-1), changes to steering selection registers
any combination of four CWG outputs and a fixed-value take effect on the next rising edge of the modulated
will be presented on all the outputs not used for the data input (Figure 26-9). In Synchronous Steering
PWM output. Each output has independent polarity, mode, the output will always produce a complete
steering, and shutdown options. Dead-band control is waveform.
not used in either steering mode.
When STRx = 0 (Register 26-5), then the
corresponding pin is held at the level defined by OVRx
(Register 26-5). When STRx = 1, then the pin is driven
by the modulated input signal.
The POLx bits (Register 26-2) control the signal
polarity only when STRx = 1.
The CWG auto-shutdown operation also applies to
steering modes as described in Section
26.14 “Register Definitions: CWG Control”.
Note: Only the STRx bits are synchronized; the

SDATx (data) bits are not synchronized.
The CWG auto-shutdown operation also applies in
Steering modes as described in Section 26.10 “Auto-
Shutdown””. An auto-shutdown event will only affect
pins that have STRx = 1.
FIGURE 26-9: EXAMPLE OF SYNCHRONOUS STEERING (MODE[2:0] = 001)
CWG1
clock
Input
source
CWG1A
CWG1B

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.2.4.2 Asynchronous Steering Mode
In Asynchronous mode (MODE[2:0] bits = 000,
Register 26-1), steering takes effect at the end of the
instruction cycle that writes to STR. In Asynchronous
Steering mode, the output signal may be an incomplete
waveform (Figure 26-10). This operation may be useful
when the user firmware needs to immediately remove
a signal from the output pin.
FIGURE 26-10: EXAMPLE OF ASYNCHRONOUS STEERING (MODE[2:0] = 000)
CWG1
INPUT
End of Instruction Cycle End of Instruction Cycle
STRA
CWG1A
CWG1A Follows CWG1 data input
26.2.4.3 Start-up Considerations

The application hardware must use the proper external
pull-up and/or pull-down resistors on the CWG output
pins. This is required because all I/O pins are forced to
high-impedance at Reset.
The POLy bits (Register 26-2) allow the user to choose
whether the output signals are active-high or active-
low.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 26-11: SIMPLIFIED CWG BLOCK DIAGRAM (OUTPUT STEERING MODES)
Rev. 10-000211D
5/30/2017
MODE<2:0> = 000: Asynchronous LSAC<1:0>

MODE<2:0> = 001: Synchronous
‘1’ 00
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
CWG Data A 1
1
POLA 0 CWG1A
0
OVRA
STRA LSBD<1:0>
‘1’ 00
‘0’ 01
CWG
CWG Data Data High-Z 10
Input
11
D Q CWG Data B
1
E 1
POLB 0 CWG1B
0
OVRB
EN
STRB LSAC<1:0>
‘1’ 00
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
CWG Data C 1
Auto-shutdown source S Q 1
(CWGxAS1 register) POLC 0 CWG1C
R 0
OVRC
REN STRC LSBD<1:0>

SHUTDOWN = 0
‘1’ 00
‘0’ 01
High-Z 10
11
CWG Data D
1
1
POLD 0 CWG1D
0
OVRD
SHUTDOWN
STRD
FREEZE
D Q
CWG Data

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.3 Clock Source 26.5 Output Control
The clock source is used to drive the dead-band timing 26.5.1 CWG OUTPUTS
circuits. The CWG module allows the following clock
sources to be selected: Each CWG output can be routed to a Peripheral Pin
Select (PPS) output via the RxyPPS register (see Sec-
• FOSC (system clock) tion 17.0 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) Module”).
• HFINTOSC
When the HFINTOSC is selected, the HFINTOSC will 26.5.2 POLARITY CONTROL
be kept running during Sleep. Therefore, CWG modes The polarity of each CWG output can be selected
requiring dead band can operate in Sleep, provided independently. When the output polarity bit is set, the
that the CWG data input is also active during Sleep.The corresponding output is active-high. Clearing the
clock sources are selected using the CS bit of the output polarity bit configures the corresponding output
CWGxCLKCON register (Register 26-3). The system as active-low. However, polarity does not affect the
clock FOSC, is disabled in Sleep and thus dead-band override levels. Output polarity is selected with the
control cannot be used. POLy bits of the CWGxCON1. Auto-shutdown and
steering options are unaffected by polarity.
26.4 Selectable Input Sources
The CWG generates the output waveforms from the 26.6 Dead-Band Control
following input sources: The dead-band control provides non-overlapping PWM
signals to prevent shoot-through current in PWM
TABLE 26-1: SELECTABLE INPUT switches. Dead-band operation is employed for Half-
Bridge and Full-Bridge modes. The CWG contains two
SOURCES
6-bit dead-band counters. One is used for the rising
Source edge of the input source control in Half-Bridge mode or
Signal Name ISM[2:0]
Peripheral for reverse dead-band Full-Bridge mode. The other is
Pin selected by used for the falling edge of the input source control in
CWGxPPS 000 Half-Bridge mode or for forward dead band in Full-
CWGxPPS
Bridge mode.
CCP1 CCP1 Output 001
Dead band is timed by counting CWG clock periods
CCP2 CCP2 Output 010 from zero up to the value in the rising or falling dead-
PWM3 PWM3 Output 011 band counter registers. See CWGxDBR and
PWM4 PWM4 Output 100 CWGxDBF registers, respectively.
CMP1 Comparator 1 Output 101 26.6.1 DEAD-BAND FUNCTIONALITY IN

CMP2 Comparator 2 Output 110 HALF-BRIDGE MODE
Data signal modulator In Half-Bridge mode, the dead-band counters dictate
DSM 111
output the delay between the falling edge of the normal output
and the rising edge of the inverted output. This can be
The input sources are selected using the IS[4:0] bits in
seen in Figure 26-2.
the CWGxISM register (Register 26-4).
26.6.2 DEAD-BAND FUNCTIONALITY IN
FULL-BRIDGE MODE
In Full-Bridge mode, the dead-band counters are used
when undergoing a direction change. The MODE[0] bit
of the CWGxCON0 register can be set or cleared while
the CWG is running, allowing for changes from
Forward to Reverse mode. The CWGxA and CWGxC
signals will change immediately upon the first rising
input edge following a direction change, but the
modulated signals (CWGxB or CWGxD, depending on
the direction of the change) will experience a delay
dictated by the dead-band counters.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.7 Rising Edge and Reverse Dead
Band
In Half-Bridge mode, the rising edge dead band delays
the turn-on of the CWGxA output after the rising edge
of the CWG data input. In Full-Bridge mode, the
reverse dead-band delay is only inserted when
changing directions from Forward mode to Reverse
mode, and only the modulated output CWGxB is
affected.
The CWGxDBR register determines the duration of the
dead-band interval on the rising edge of the input
source signal. This duration is from 0 to 64 periods of
the CWG clock.
Dead band is always initiated on the edge of the input
source signal. A count of zero indicates that no dead
band is present.
If the input source signal reverses polarity before the
dead-band count is completed, then no signal will be
seen on the respective output.
The CWGxDBR register value is double-buffered.
When EN = 0 (Register 26-1), the buffer is loaded
when CWGxDBR is written. If EN = 1, then the buffer
will be loaded at the rising edge following the first falling
edge of the data input, after the LD bit (Register 26-1)
is set. Refer to Figure 26-12 for an example.
26.8 Falling Edge and Forward Dead

Band
In Half-Bridge mode, the falling edge dead band delays
the turn-on of the CWGxB output at the falling edge of
the CWG data input. In Full-Bridge mode, the forward
dead-band delay is only inserted when changing
directions from Reverse mode to Forward mode, and
only the modulated output CWGxD is affected.
The CWGxDBF register determines the duration of the
dead-band interval on the falling edge of the input
source signal. This duration is from zero to 64 periods
of CWG clock.
Dead-band delay is always initiated on the edge of the
input source signal. A count of zero indicates that no
dead band is present.
If the input source signal reverses polarity before the
dead-band count is completed, then no signal will be
seen on the respective output.
The CWGxDBF register value is double-buffered.
When EN = 0 (Register 26-1), the buffer is loaded
when CWGxDBF is written. If EN = 1, then the buffer
will be loaded at the rising edge following the first
falling edge of the data input after the LD (Register 26-
1) is set. Refer to Figure 26-13 for an example.

FIGURE 26-12: DEAD-BAND OPERATION, CWGxDBR = 0x01, CWGxDBF = 0x02
cwg_clock
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Input Source
CWGxA
CWGxB
FIGURE 26-13: DEAD-BAND OPERATION, CWGxDBR = 0x03, CWGxDBF = 0x06, SOURCE SHORTER THAN DEAD BAND
cwg_clock
Input Source
CWGxA
DS40001919E-page 419
CWGxB
source shorter than dead band

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.9 Dead-Band Jitter
When the rising and falling edges of the input source
are asynchronous to the CWG clock, it creates jitter in
the dead-band time delay. The maximum jitter is equal
to one CWG clock period. Refer to Equation 26-1 for
more details.
EQUATION 26-1: DEAD-BAND DELAY TIME

CALCULATION
1
T = ------------------------------------------  DBx  4: 0>
DEAD – BAND_MIN F
CWG CLOCK
1
T = ------------------------------------------  DBx  4: 0>+1
DEAD – BANDMAX F
CWG CLOCK
T
JITTER
= T
DEAD – BAND _ MAX
– TDEAD – BAND _ MIN
1
T = --------------------------------------------
JITTER F
CWG _ CLOCK
T = T +T
DEAD – BAND _ MAX DEAD – BAND _ MIN JITTER
EXAMPLE
DBR<4:0> = 0x0A = 10
F = 8 MHz
CWG_CLOCK
1
T = ---------------- = 125 ns
JITTER 8MHz
T = 125 ns*10 = 125 s
DEAD – BAND_MIN
T = 1.25 s + 0.125s = 1.37s

DEAD – BAND_MAX

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.10 Auto-Shutdown 26.10.1.3 Pin Override Levels
Auto-shutdown is a method to immediately override the The levels driven to the CWG outputs during an auto-
CWG output levels with specific overrides that allow for shutdown event are controlled by the LSBD[1:0] and
safe shutdown of the circuit. The shutdown state can be LSAC[1:0] bits of the CWGxAS0 register (Register 26-
either cleared automatically or held until cleared by 6). The LSBD[1:0] bits control CWGxB/D output levels,
software. The auto-shutdown circuit is illustrated in while the LSAC[1:0] bits control the CWGxA/C output
Figure 26-14. levels.
26.10.1 SHUTDOWN 26.10.1.4 Auto-Shutdown Interrupts

The shutdown state can be entered by either of the When an auto-shutdown event occurs, either by
following two methods: software or hardware setting SHUTDOWN, the
CWGxIF flag bit of the respective PIR register is set.
• Software generated
• External Input 26.11 Auto-Shutdown Restart
26.10.1.1 Software Generated Shutdown After an auto-shutdown event has occurred, there are
Setting the SHUTDOWN bit of the CWGxAS0 register two ways to resume operation:
will force the CWG into the shutdown state. • Software controlled
When the auto-restart is disabled, the shutdown state • Auto-restart
will persist as long as the SHUTDOWN bit is set. In either case, the shutdown source must be cleared
before the restart can take place. That is, either the
When auto-restart is enabled, the SHUTDOWN bit will
shutdown condition must be removed, or the
clear automatically and resume operation on the next
corresponding ASxE bit must be cleared.
rising edge event. The SHUTDOWN bit indicates when
a shutdown condition exists. The bit may be set or
26.11.1 SOFTWARE-CONTROLLED
cleared in software or by hardware.
RESTART
26.10.1.2 External Input Source If the REN bit of the CWGxAS0 register is clear
External shutdown inputs provide the fastest way to safely (REN = 0), the CWG module must be restarted after an
suspend CWG operation in the event of a Fault condition. auto-shutdown event through software.
When any of the selected shutdown inputs goes active, Once all auto-shutdown sources are removed, the
the CWG outputs will immediately go to the specified software must clear SHUTDOWN. Once SHUTDOWN
override levels without software delay. The override levels is cleared, the CWG module will resume operation
are selected by the LSBD[1:0] and LSAC[1:0] bits of the upon the first rising edge of the CWG data input.
CWGxAS0 register (Register 26-6). Several input
sources can be selected to cause a shutdown condition.
All input sources are active-low. The sources are: Note: The SHUTDOWN bit cannot be cleared in
software if the auto-shutdown condition is
• Pin selected by CWGxPPS still present.
• Timer2 postscaled output
• Timer4 postscaled output 26.11.2 AUTO-RESTART
• Timer6 postscaled output If the REN bit of the CWGxAS0 register is set (REN = 1),
• Comparator 1 output the CWG module will restart from the shutdown state
• Comparator 2 output automatically.
• CLC2 output Once all auto-shutdown conditions are removed, the
Shutdown input sources are individually enabled by the hardware will automatically clear SHUTDOWN. Once
ASxE bits of the CWGxAS1 register (Register 26-7). SHUTDOWN is cleared, the CWG module will resume
operation upon the first rising edge of the CWG data
Note: Shutdown inputs are level sensitive, not input.
edge sensitive. The shutdown state
cannot be cleared, except by disabling
auto-shutdown, as long as the shutdown Note: The SHUTDOWN bit cannot be cleared in
input level persists. software if the auto-shutdown condition is
still present.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.12 Operation During Sleep 26.13 Configuring the CWG
The CWG module operates independently from the 1. Ensure that the TRIS control bits corresponding
system clock and will continue to run during Sleep, to CWG outputs are set so that all are
provided that the clock and input sources selected configured as inputs, ensuring that the outputs
remain active. are inactive during setup. External hardware
The HFINTOSC remains active during Sleep when all should ensure that pin levels are held to safe
the following conditions are met: levels.
2. Clear the EN bit, if not already cleared.
• CWG module is enabled
3. Configure the MODE[2:0] bits of the CWGx-
• Input source is active CON0 register to set the output operating mode.
• HFINTOSC is selected as the clock source, 4. Configure the POLy bits of the CWGxCON1
regardless of the system clock source selected. register to set the output polarities.
In other words, if the HFINTOSC is simultaneously 5. Configure the ISM[4:0] bits of the CWGxISM
selected as system clock and CWG clock, when the register to select the data input source.
CWG is enabled and the input source is active, then the 6. If a steering mode is selected, configure the
CPU will go idle during Sleep, but the HFINTOSC will STRx bits to select the desired output on the
remain active and the CWG will continue to operate. CWG outputs.
This will have a direct effect on the Sleep mode current. 7. Configure the LSBD[1:0] and LSAC[1:0] bits of
the CWGxASD0 register to select the auto-
shutdown output override states (this is
necessary even if not using auto-shutdown
because start-up will be from a shutdown state).
8. If auto-restart is desired, set the REN bit of
CWGxAS0.
9. If auto-shutdown is desired, configure the ASxE
bits of the CWGxAS1 register to select the
shutdown source.
10. Set the desired rising and falling dead-band
times with the CWGxDBR and CWGxDBF
registers.
11. Select the clock source in the CWGxCLKCON
register.
12. Set the EN bit to enable the module.
13. Clear the TRIS bits that correspond to the CWG
outputs to set them as outputs.
If auto-restart is to be used, set the REN bit and the
SHUTDOWN bit will be cleared automatically.
Otherwise, clear the SHUTDOWN bit in software to
start the CWG.

FIGURE 26-14: CWG SHUTDOWN BLOCK DIAGRAM
Write ‘1’ to Rev. 10-000172E

9/13/2016
SHUTDOWN bit
PPS
AS0E
CWGxINPPS
CMP1_out
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
AS4E
CMP2_out
AS5E
TMR2_postscaled SHUTDOWN S
S Q
AS1E D Q CWG_shutdown
TMR4_postscaled
REN FREEZE
R
AS2E Write ‘0’ to
SHUTDOWN bit
TMR6_postscaled CWG_data CK
AS3E
CLC2_out
AS6E
FIGURE 26-15: SHUTDOWN FUNCTIONALITY, AUTO-RESTART DISABLED (REN = 0, LSAC = 01, LSBD = 01)
Shutdown Event Ceases REN Cleared by Software
CWG Input
Source
Shutdown Source
SHUTDOWN
CWGxA Tri-State (No Pulse)

CWGxC
DS40001919E-page 423
CWGxB Tri-State (No Pulse)

CWGxD
No Shutdown
Shutdown Output Resumes
FIGURE 26-16: SHUTDOWN FUNCTIONALITY, AUTO-RESTART ENABLED (REN = 1, LSAC = 01, LSBD = 01)
Shutdown Event Ceases REN auto-cleared by hardware
CWG Input
Source
Shutdown Source
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SHUTDOWN
CWGxA Tri-State (No Pulse)

CWGxC
CWGxB Tri-State (No Pulse)

CWGxD
No Shutdown
Shutdown Output Resumes
DS40001919E-page 424
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
26.14 Register Definitions: CWG Control
Long bit name prefixes for the CWG peripheral is

CWG1 CWG1
CWG2 CWG2
CWG3 CWG3
l
REGISTER 26-1: CWGxCON0: CWG CONTROL REGISTER 0
R/W-0/0 R/W/HC-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN LD(1) — — — MODE[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: CWGx Enable bit

1 = Module is enabled
0 = Module is disabled
bit 6 LD: CWGx Load Buffers bit(1)
1 = Dead-band count buffers to be loaded on CWG data rising edge, following first falling edge after
this bit is set
0 = Buffers remain unchanged
bit 2-0 MODE[2:0]: CWGx Mode bits
111 = Reserved
110 = Reserved
101 = CWG outputs operate in Push-Pull mode
100 = CWG outputs operate in Half-Bridge mode
011 = CWG outputs operate in Reverse Full-Bridge mode
010 = CWG outputs operate in Forward Full-Bridge mode
001 = CWG outputs operate in Synchronous Steering mode
000 = CWG outputs operate in Asynchronous Steering mode
Note 1: This bit can only be set after EN = 1; it cannot be set in the same cycle when EN is set.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 26-2: CWGxCON1: CWG CONTROL REGISTER 1

U-0 U-0 R-x U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — IN — POLD POLC POLB POLA
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5 IN: CWG Input Value bit (read-only)
bit 3 POLD: CWGxD Output Polarity bit
1 = Signal output is inverted polarity
0 = Signal output is normal polarity
bit 2 POLC: CWGxC Output Polarity bit
bit 1 POLB: CWGxB Output Polarity bit
bit 0 POLA: CWGxA Output Polarity bit

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 26-3: CWGxCLK: CWGx CLOCK INPUT SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — — CS
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 0 CS: CWG Clock Source Selection bits
CS CWG1 CWG2 CWG3

1 HFINTOSC (1) HFINTOSC (1) HFINTOSC (1)
0 FOSC FOSC FOSC
Note 1: HFINTOSC remains operating during Sleep.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 26-4: CWGxISM: CWGx INPUT SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — ISM[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-5 Unimplemented Read as ‘0’

bit 4-0 ISM[4:0]: CWG Data Input Selection Multiplexer Select bits
CWG1 CWG2 CWG3

ISM[4:0]
Input Selection Input Selection Input Selection
01110 DSM_out DSM_out DSM_out
00100 CCP4_out CCP4_out CCP4_out
00000 Pin selected by Pin selected by Pin selected by
CWG1PPS CWG2PPS CWG3PPS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 26-5: CWGxSTR(1): CWG STEERING CONTROL REGISTER

OVRD OVRC OVRB OVRA STRD(2) STRC(2) STRB(2) STRA(2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 OVRD: Steering Data D bit

bit 6 OVRC: Steering Data C bit
bit 5 OVRB: Steering Data B bit
bit 4 OVRA: Steering Data A bit
bit 3 STRD: Steering Enable bit D(2)
1 = CWGxD output has the CWG data input waveform with polarity control from POLD bit
0 = CWGxD output is assigned to value of OVRD bit
bit 2 STRC: Steering Enable bit C(2)
1 = CWGxC output has the CWG data input waveform with polarity control from POLC bit
0 = CWGxC output is assigned to value of OVRC bit
bit 1 STRB: Steering Enable bit B(2)
1 = CWGxB output has the CWG data input waveform with polarity control from POLB bit
0 = CWGxB output is assigned to value of OVRB bit
bit 0 STRA: Steering Enable bit A(2)
1 = CWGxA output has the CWG data input waveform with polarity control from POLA bit
0 = CWGxA output is assigned to value of OVRA bit
Note 1: The bits in this register apply only when MODE[2:0] = 00x (Register 26-1, Steering modes).
2: This bit is double-buffered when MODE[2:0] = 001.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 26-6: CWGxAS0: CWG AUTO-SHUTDOWN CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W/HS/HC-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1 R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1 U-0 U-0
SHUTDOWN REN LSBD[1:0] LSAC[1:0] — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HS/HC = Bit is set/cleared by hardware
q = Value depends on condition
bit 7 SHUTDOWN: Auto-Shutdown Event Status bit(1,2)

1 = An auto-shutdown state is in effect
0 = No auto-shutdown event has occurred
bit 6 REN: Auto-Restart Enable bit
1 = Auto-restart is enabled
0 = Auto-restart is disabled
bit 5-4 LSBD[1:0]: CWGxB and CWGxD Auto-Shutdown State Control bits
11 = A logic ‘1’ is placed on CWGxB/D when an auto-shutdown event occurs.
10 = A logic ‘0’ is placed on CWGxB/D when an auto-shutdown event occurs.
01 = Pin is tri-stated on CWGxB/D when an auto-shutdown event occurs.
00 = The inactive state of the pin, including polarity, is placed on CWGxB/D after the required
dead-band interval when an auto-shutdown event occurs.
bit 3-2 LSAC[1:0]: CWGxA and CWGxC Auto-Shutdown State Control bits
11 = A logic ‘1’ is placed on CWGxA/C when an auto-shutdown event occurs.
10 = A logic ‘0’ is placed on CWGxA/C when an auto-shutdown event occurs.
01 = Pin is tri-stated on CWGxA/C when an auto-shutdown event occurs.
00 = The inactive state of the pin, including polarity, is placed on CWGxA/C after the required
dead-band interval when an auto-shutdown event occurs.
Note 1: This bit may be written while EN = 0 (Register 26-1), to place the outputs into the shutdown configuration.
2: The outputs will remain in auto-shutdown state until the next rising edge of the CWG data input after this
bit is cleared.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 26-7: CWGxAS1: CWG AUTO-SHUTDOWN CONTROL REGISTER 1

— AS6E AS5E AS4E AS3E AS2E AS1E AS0E
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 Unimplemented Read as ‘0’

bit 6 AS6E: CWG Auto-shutdown Source 6 Enable bit
1 = Auto-shutdown for Source 6 is enabled
CWG Module CWG1 CWG2 CWG3
Auto-shutdown Source 6 CLC2 OUT CLC3 OUT CLC4 OUT
0 = Auto-shutdown for Source 6 is disabled

bit 5 AS5E: CWG Auto-shutdown Source 5 (CMP2 OUT) Enable bit
1 = Auto-shutdown for CMP2 OUT is enabled
0 = Auto-shutdown for CMP2 OUT is disabled
bit 4 AS4E: CWG Auto-shutdown Source 4 (CMP1 OUT) Enable bit
1 = Auto-shutdown for CMP1 OUT is enabled
0 = Auto-shutdown for CMP1 OUT is disabled
bit 3 AS3E: CWG Auto-shutdown Source 3 (TMR6_Postscaled) Enable bit
1 = Auto-shutdown for TMR6_Postscaled is enabled
0 = Auto-shutdown for TMR6_Postscaled is disabled
bit 0 AS0E: CWG Auto-shutdown Source 0 (Pin selected by CWGxPPS) Enable bit
1 = Auto-shutdown for CWGxPPS Pin is enabled
0 = Auto-shutdown for CWGxPPS Pin is disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 26-8: CWGxDBR: CWG RISING DEAD-BAND COUNT REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u
— — DBR[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 DBR[5:0]: CWG Rising Edge Triggered Dead-Band Count bits
11 1111 = 63-64 CWG clock periods
.
.
.
00 0000 = 0 CWG clock periods. Dead-band generation is by-passed
REGISTER 26-9: CWGxDBF: CWG FALLING DEAD-BAND COUNT REGISTER

— — DBF[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 DBF[5:0]: CWG Falling Edge Triggered Dead-Band Count bits
.
.
.
00 0000 = 0 CWG clock periods. Dead-band generation is by-passed.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 26-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CWG

Register
on Page
CWGxCON0 EN LD — — — MODE[2:0] 425
CWGxCON1 — — IN — POLD POLC POLB POLA 426
CWGxCLK — — — — — — — CS 427
CWGxISM — — — ISM[4:0] 428
CWGxSTR OVRD OVRC OVRB OVRA STRD STRC STRB STRA 429
CWGxAS0 SHUTDOWN REN LSBD[1:0] LSAC[1:0] — — 430
CWGxAS1 — AS6E AS5E AS4E AS3E AS2E AS1E AS0E 431
CWGxDBR — — DBR[5:0] 432
CWGxDBF — — DBF[5:0] 432
Legend: – = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by CWG.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
27.0 CONFIGURABLE LOGIC CELL
(CLC)
The Configurable Logic Cell (CLCx) module provides
programmable logic that operates outside the speed
limitations of software execution. The logic cell takes up
the input signals and, through the use of configurable
gates, reduces the inputs to four logic lines that drive
one of eight selectable single-output logic functions.
Input sources are a combination of the following:
• I/O pins
• Internal clocks
• Peripherals
• Register bits
The output can be directed internally to peripherals and
to an output pin.
There are four CLC modules available on this device -
CLC1, CLC2, CLC3 and CLC4.
Note: The CLC1, CLC2, CLC3 and CLC4 are
four separate module instances of the
same CLC module design. Throughout
this section, the lower case ‘x’ in register
names is a generic reference to the CLC
number (which should be substituted with
1, 2, 3, or 4 during code development).
For example, the control register is
generically described in this chapter as
CLCxCON, but the actual device registers
are CLC1CON, CLC2CON, CLC3CON
and CLC4CON.
Refer to Figure 27-1 for a simplified diagram showing
signal flow through the CLCx.
Possible configurations include:
• Combinatorial Logic
- AND
- NAND
- AND-OR
- AND-OR-INVERT
- OR-XOR
- OR-XNOR
• Latches
- S-R
- Clocked D with Set and Reset
- Transparent D with Set and Reset

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 27-1: CLCx SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000025H
11/9/2016
OUT
D Q
CLCxOUT
Q1
LCx_in[0]
LCx_in[1] CLCx_out
to Peripherals
LCx_in[2]
Input Data Selection Gates(1)

. lcxg1
EN
CLCxPPS
. lcxg2
lcxg3
Logic
Function
(2)
lcxq
PPS CLCx
. lcxg4
POL TRIS
LCx_in[n-2] MODE<2:0> Interrupt

LCx_in[n-1] det
LCx_in[n]
INTP
set bit
INTN CLCxIF
Interrupt
det
Note 1: See Figure 27-2: Input Data Selection and Gating

2: See Figure 27-3: Programmable Logic Functions.
27.1 CLCx Setup Data inputs are selected with CLCxSEL0 through
CLCxSEL3 registers (Register 27-3 through
Programming the CLCx module is performed by Register 27-6).
configuring the four stages in the logic signal flow. The
four stages are: Note: Data selections are undefined at power-up.
• Data selection
• Data gating
• Logic function selection
• Output polarity
Each stage is setup at run time by writing to the
corresponding CLCx Special Function Registers. This
has the added advantage of permitting logic
reconfiguration on-the-fly during program execution.
27.1.1 DATA SELECTION

There are many signals available as inputs to the
configurable logic. Four input multiplexers are used to
select the inputs to pass on to the next stage.
Data selection is through four multiplexers as indicated
on the left side of Figure 27-2. Data inputs in the figure
are identified by a generic numbered input name.
Table 27-1 correlates the generic input name to the
actual signal for each CLC module. The column labeled
‘DyS[5:0] Value’ indicates the MUX selection code for the
selected data input. DyS is an abbreviation for the MUX
select input codes: D1S[5:0] through D4S[5:0].

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 27-1: CLCx DATA INPUT SELECTION
TABLE 27-1: CLCx DATA INPUT (CONTINUED)
SELECTION DyS[5:0]
CLCx Input Source
Value
DyS[5:0]
CLCx Input Source
Value 001110 [14] TMR2 _out
111111 [63] Reserved 001101 [13] TMR1 _overflow
. 001100 [12] TMR0 _overflow
. 001011 [11] CLKR _out
. 001010 [10] ADCRC
110100 [52] Reserved 001001 [9] SOSC
110011 [51] CWG3B_out 001000 [8] MFINTOSC (32 kHz)
110010 [50] CWG3A_out 000111 [7] MFINTOSC (500 kHz)
110001 [49] CWG2B_out 000110 [6] LFINTOSC
110000 [48] CWG2A_out 000101 [5] HFINTOSC
101111 [47] CWG1B_out 000100 [4] FOSC
101110 [46] CWG1A_out 000011 [3] CLCIN3PPS
101101 [45] SS1 000010 [2] CLCIN2PPS
101100 [44] SCK1 000001 [1] CLCIN1PPS
101011 [43] SDO1 000000 [0] CLCIN0PPS
101010 [42] Reserved
101001 [41] UART2_tx_out
101000 [40] UART1_tx_out
100111 [39] CLC4_out
100110 [38] CLC3_out
100101 [37] CLC2_out
100100 [36] CLC1_out
100011 [35] DSM1_out
100010 [34] IOC_flag
100001 [33] ZCD_out
100000 [32] CMP2_out
011111 [31] CMP1_out
011110 [30] NCO1_out
011011 [27] PWM8_out
011010 [26] PWM7_out
011001 [25] PWM6_out
011000 [24] PWM5_out
010111 [23] CCP4_out
010110 [22] CCP3_out
010101 [21] CCP2_out
010100 [20] CCP1 _out
010011 [19] SMT1_out
010010 [18] TMR6_out
010001 [17] TMR5 _overflow
010000 [16] TMR4 _out
001111 [15] TMR3 _overflow

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
27.1.2 DATA GATING Data gating is indicated in the right side of Figure 27-2.
Only one gate is shown in detail. The remaining three
Outputs from the input multiplexers are directed to the
gates are configured identically with the exception that
desired logic function input through the data gating
the data enables correspond to the enables for that
stage. Each data gate can direct any combination of the
gate.
four selected inputs.
Note: Data gating is undefined at power-up. 27.1.3 LOGIC FUNCTION
The gate stage is more than just signal direction. The There are eight available logic functions including:
gate can be configured to direct each input signal as • AND-OR
inverted or non-inverted data. Directed signals are • OR-XOR
ANDed together in each gate. The output of each gate
• AND
can be inverted before going on to the logic function
stage. • S-R Latch
• D Flip-Flop with Set and Reset
The gating is in essence a 1-to-4 input AND/NAND/OR/
NOR gate. When every input is inverted and the output • D Flip-Flop with Reset
is inverted, the gate is an OR of all enabled data inputs. • J-K Flip-Flop with Reset
When the inputs and output are not inverted, the gate • Transparent Latch with Set and Reset
is an AND or all enabled inputs. Logic functions are shown in Figure 27-2. Each logic
Table 27-2 summarizes the basic logic that can be function has four inputs and one output. The four inputs
obtained in gate 1 by using the gate logic select bits. are the four data gate outputs of the previous stage.
The table shows the logic of four input variables, but The output is fed to the inversion stage and from there
to other peripherals, an output pin, and back to the
each gate can be configured to use less than four. If
CLCx itself.
no inputs are selected, the output will be zero or one,
depending on the gate output polarity bit. 27.1.4 OUTPUT POLARITY
TABLE 27-2: DATA GATING LOGIC The last stage in the Configurable Logic Cell is the
output polarity. Setting the POL bit of the CLCxPOL
CLCxGLSy GyPOL Gate Logic register inverts the output signal from the logic stage.
0x55 1 AND Changing the polarity while the interrupts are enabled
will cause an interrupt for the resulting output transition.
0x55 0 NAND
0xAA 1 NOR
0xAA 0 OR
0x00 0 Logic 0
0x00 1 Logic 1
It is possible (but not recommended) to select both the
true and negated values of an input. When this is done,
the gate output is zero, regardless of the other inputs,
but may emit logic glitches (transient-induced pulses).
If the output of the channel must be zero or one, the
recommended method is to set all gate bits to zero and
use the gate polarity bit to set the desired level.
Data gating is configured with the logic gate select
registers as follows:
• Gate 1: CLCxGLS0 (Register 27-7)
Register number suffixes are different than the gate
numbers because other variations of this module have
multiple gate selections in the same register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
27.2 CLCx Interrupts 27.6 CLCx Setup Steps
An interrupt will be generated upon a change in the The following steps should be followed when setting up
output value of the CLCx when the appropriate interrupt the CLCx:
enables are set. A rising edge detector and a falling • Disable CLCx by clearing the EN bit.
edge detector are present in each CLC for this purpose.
• Select desired inputs using CLCxSEL0 through
The CLCxIF bit of the associated PIRx register will be CLCxSEL3 registers (See Table 27-1).
set when either edge detector is triggered and its • Clear any associated ANSEL bits.
associated enable bit is set. The INTP enables rising • Set all TRIS bits associated with inputs.
edge interrupts and the INTN bit enables falling edge
• Clear all TRIS bits associated with outputs.
interrupts. Both are located in the CLCxCON register.
• Enable the chosen inputs through the four gates
To fully enable the interrupt, set the following bits: using CLCxGLS0, CLCxGLS1, CLCxGLS2, and
• CLCxIE bit of the respective PIE register CLCxGLS3 registers.
• INTP bit of the CLCxCON register (for a rising • Select the gate output polarities with the GyPOL
edge detection) bits of the CLCxPOL register.
• INTN bit of the CLCxCON register (for a falling • Select the desired logic function with the
edge detection) MODE[2:0] bits of the CLCxCON register.
• GIE bits of the INTCON0 register • Select the desired polarity of the logic output with
The CLCxIF bit of the respective PIR register, must be the POL bit of the CLCxPOL register. (This step
cleared in software as part of the interrupt service. If may be combined with the previous gate output
another edge is detected while this flag is being polarity step).
cleared, the flag will still be set at the end of the • If driving a device pin, set the desired pin PPS
sequence. control register and also clear the TRIS bit
corresponding to that output.
27.3 Output Mirror Copies • If interrupts are desired, configure the following
bits:
Mirror copies of all CON output bits are contained in the - Set the INTP bit in the CLCxCON register for
CLCxDATA register. Reading this register reads the rising event.
outputs of all CLCs simultaneously. This prevents any
- Set the INTN bit in the CLCxCON register for
reading skew introduced by testing or reading the OUT
falling event.
bits in the individual CLCxCON registers.
- Set the CLCxIE bit of the respective PIE
register.
- Set the GIE bits of the INTCON0 register.
The CLCxCON register is cleared to zero as the result • Enable the CLCx by setting the EN bit of the
of a Reset. All other selection and gating values remain CLCxCON register.
unchanged.

The CLC module operates independently from the
system clock and will continue to run during Sleep,
provided that the input sources selected remain active.
The HFINTOSC remains active during Sleep when the
CLC module is enabled and the HFINTOSC is
selected as an input source, regardless of the system
clock source selected.
In other words, if the HFINTOSC is simultaneously
selected as the system clock and as a CLC input
source, when the CLC is enabled, the CPU will go idle
during Sleep, but the CLC will continue to operate and
the HFINTOSC will remain active.
This will have a direct effect on the Sleep mode current.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 27-2: INPUT DATA SELECTION AND GATING
Data Selection
LCx_in[0] 000000
Data GATE 1
d1T G1D1T
d1N G1D1N
LCx_in[n] 111111
G1D2T
D1S[5:0]
G1D2N lcxg1
LCx_in[0] 000000
G1D3T
G1POL
d2T
G1D3N
d2N
G1D4T
LCx_in[n] 111111
D2S[5:0] G1D4N
LCx_in[0] 000000
Data GATE 2
lcxg2
d3T
(Same as Data GATE 1)
d3N
Data GATE 3
LCx_in[n] 111111
lcxg3
D3S[5:0]
(Same as Data GATE 1)
LCx_in[0] 000000 Data GATE 4

lcxg4
d4T (Same as Data GATE 1)
d4N
LCx_in[n] 111111
D4S[5:0]
Note: All controls are undefined at power-up.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 27-3: PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS
Rev. 10-000122B
9/13/2016
AND-OR OR-XOR
lcxg1 lcxg1
lcxg2 lcxg2
lcxq lcxq
lcxg3 lcxg3
lcxg4 lcxg4
MODE<2:0> = 000 MODE<2:0> = 001

4-input AND S-R Latch
lcxg1 lcxg1
S Q lcxq
lcxg2
lcxg2
lcxq
lcxg3
lcxg3
R
lcxg4 lcxg4
MODE<2:0> = 010 MODE<2:0> = 011

1-Input D Flip-Flop with S and R 2-Input D Flip-Flop with R
lcxg4
S
lcxg4
lcxg2 D Q lcxq D Q lcxq
lcxg2
lcxg1 R
lcxg1 R
lcxg3 lcxg3
MODE<2:0> = 100 MODE<2:0> = 101

J-K Flip-Flop with R 1-Input Transparent Latch with S and R
lcxg4
lcxg2 J Q lcxq S
lcxg2 D Q lcxq
lcxg1
lcxg4 K
R
lcxg3 LE
R
lcxg3
lcxg1
MODE<2:0> = 110 MODE<2:0> = 111

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
27.7 Register Definitions: CLC Control
REGISTER 27-1: CLCxCON: CONFIGURABLE LOGIC CELL CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 U-0 R-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN — OUT INTP INTN MODE[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: Configurable Logic Cell Enable bit

1 = Configurable logic cell is enabled and mixing input signals
0 = Configurable logic cell is disabled and has logic zero output
bit 5 OUT: Configurable Logic Cell Data Output bit
Read-only: logic cell output data, after LCPOL; sampled from CLCxOUT
bit 4 INTP: Configurable Logic Cell Positive Edge Going Interrupt Enable bit
1 = CLCxIF will be set when a rising edge occurs on CLCxOUT
0 = CLCxIF will not be set
bit 3 INTN: Configurable Logic Cell Negative Edge Going Interrupt Enable bit
1 = CLCxIF will be set when a falling edge occurs on CLCxOUT
0 = CLCxIF will not be set
bit 2-0 MODE[2:0]: Configurable Logic Cell Functional Mode bits
111 = Cell is 1-input transparent latch with S and R
110 = Cell is J-K flip-flop with R
101 = Cell is 2-input D flip-flop with R
100 = Cell is 1-input D flip-flop with S and R
011 = Cell is S-R latch
010 = Cell is 4-input AND
001 = Cell is OR-XOR
000 = Cell is AND-OR

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 27-2: CLCxPOL: SIGNAL POLARITY CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u
POL — — — G4POL G3POL G2POL G1POL
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 POL: CLCxOUT Output Polarity Control bit

1 = The output of the logic cell is inverted
0 = The output of the logic cell is not inverted
bit 3 G4POL: Gate 3 Output Polarity Control bit
1 = The output of gate 3 is inverted when applied to the logic cell
0 = The output of gate 3 is not inverted

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 27-3: CLCxSEL0: GENERIC CLCx DATA 0 SELECT REGISTER

— — D1S[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 D1S[5:0]: CLCx Data1 Input Selection bits
See Table 27-1.

— — D2S[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 D2S[5:0]: CLCx Data 2 Input Selection bits
See Table 27-1.

— — D3S[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

See Table 27-1.

— — D4S[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

See Table 27-1.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 27-7: CLCxGLS0: GATE 0 LOGIC SELECT REGISTER

G1D4T G1D4N G1D3T G1D3N G1D2T G1D2N G1D1T G1D1N
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 G1D4T: Gate 0 Data 4 True (non-inverted) bit

1 = CLCIN3 (true) is gated into CLCx Gate 0
0 = CLCIN3 (true) is not gated into CLCx Gate 0
bit 6 G1D4N: Gate 0 Data 4 Negated (inverted) bit
1 = CLCIN3 (inverted) is gated into CLCx Gate 0
0 = CLCIN3 (inverted) is not gated into CLCx Gate 0
0 = CLCIN1 (true) is not gated into l CLCx Gate 0

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 G2D4T: Gate 1 Data 4 True (noninverted) bit

0 = CLCIN0 (true) is not gated into CLCx Gate1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

bit 7 bit 0
Legend:


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

bit 7 bit 0
Legend:


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 27-11: CLCDATA: CLC DATA OUTPUT

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
— — — — CLC4OUT CLC3OUT CLC2OUT CLC1OUT
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3 CLC4OUT: Mirror copy of OUT bit of CLC4CON register
TABLE 27-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CLCx
Register on
Page
CLCxCON EN ― OUT INTP INTN MODE[2:0] 441

CLCxPOL POL ― ― ― G4POL G3POL G2POL G1POL 442
CLCxSEL0 ― ― D1S[5:0] 443
CLCxSEL1 ― ― D2S[5:0] 443
CLCxSEL2 ― ― D3S[5:0] 443
CLCxSEL3 ― ― D4S[5:0] 443
CLCxGLS0 G1D4T G1D4N G1D3T G1D3N G1D2T G1D2N G1D1T G1D1N 444
CLCDATA ― ― ― ― CLC4OUT CLC3OUT CLC2OUT CLC1OUT 448
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the CLCx modules.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
28.0 NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED
OSCILLATOR (NCO) MODULE
The Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) module is
a timer that uses overflow from the addition of an
increment value to divide the input frequency. The
advantage of the addition method over simple counter
driven timer is that the output frequency resolution
does not vary with the divider value. The NCO is most
useful for applications that require frequency accuracy
and fine resolution at a fixed duty cycle.
Features of the NCO include:
• 20-bit Increment Function
• Fixed Duty Cycle mode (FDC) mode
• Pulse Frequency (PF) mode
• Output Pulse-Width Control
• Multiple Clock Input Sources
• Output Polarity Control
• Interrupt Capability
Figure 28-1 is a simplified block diagram of the NCO
module.

FIGURE 28-1: DIRECT DIGITAL SYNTHESIS MODULE SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM
DS40001919E-page 450
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
NCOxINCU NCOxINCH NCOxINCL Rev. 10-000028E
10/12/2016
20
(1)
INCBUFU INCBUFH INCBUFL
20
20
1111
NCO_overflow Adder
NCOx Clock 20
Sources
NCOx_clk
NCOxACCU NCOxACCH NCOxACCL
See 20
NCOxCLK
Register
NCO_interrupt set bit
NCOxIF
0000 Fixed Duty
Cycle Mode
Circuitry
CKS<3:0> D Q D Q 0 TRIS bit
4
_ NCOxOUT
1
Q
PFM POL
NCOx_out
To Peripherals
S Q
EN
_ D Q OUT
Ripple
R Q
Counter
Pulse Q1
R Frequency
3 Mode Circuitry
PWS<2:0>
Note 1: The increment registers are double-buffered to allow for value changes to be made without first disabling the NCO module. The full increment value is loaded into the buffer registers on the
second rising edge of the NCOx_clk signal that occurs immediately after a write to NCOxINCL register. The buffers are not user-accessible and are shown here for reference.
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
28.1 NCO Operation
The NCO operates by repeatedly adding a fixed value to
an accumulator. Additions occur at the input clock rate.
The accumulator will overflow with a carry periodically,
which is the raw NCO output (NCO_overflow). This
effectively reduces the input clock by the ratio of the
addition value to the maximum accumulator value. See
Equation 28-1.
The NCO output can be further modified by stretching
the pulse or toggling a flip-flop. The modified NCO
output is then distributed internally to other peripherals
and can be optionally output to a pin. The accumulator
overflow also generates an interrupt (NCO_overflow).
The NCO period changes in discrete steps to create an
average frequency. This output depends on the ability
of the receiving circuit (i.e., CWG or external resonant
converter circuitry) to average the NCO output to
reduce uncertainty.
EQUATION 28-1: NCO OVERFLOW FREQUENCY
Clock Frequency  Increment Value-

F OVERFLOW = NCO
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20
2
28.1.1 NCO CLOCK SOURCES 28.1.4 INCREMENT REGISTERS

Clock sources available to the NCO include: The increment value is stored in three registers making
• FOSC up a 20-bit incrementer. In order of LSB to MSB they
• HFINTOSC are:
• LFINTOSC • NCO1INCL
• MFINTOSC/4 (32 kHz) • NCO1INCH
• MFINTOSC (500 kHz) • NCO1INCU
• CLC1/2/3/4_out
• CLKREF When the NCO module is enabled, the NCO1INCU and
• SOSC NCO1INCH registers should be written first, then the
NCO1INCL register. Writing to the NCO1INCL register
The NCO clock source is selected by configuring the initiates the increment buffer registers to be loaded
N1CKS[2:0] bits in the NCO1CLK register. simultaneously on the second rising edge of the
NCO_clk signal.
28.1.2 ACCUMULATOR
The registers are readable and writable. The increment
The accumulator is a 20-bit register. Read and write
registers are double-buffered to allow value changes to
access to the accumulator is available through three
be made without first disabling the NCO module.
registers:
When the NCO module is disabled, the increment
• NCO1ACCL
buffers are loaded immediately after a write to the
• NCO1ACCH increment registers.
• NCO1ACCU
28.1.3 ADDER Note: The increment buffer registers are not user-
The NCO Adder is a full adder, which operates accessible.
independently from the source clock. The addition of
the previous result and the increment value replaces
the accumulator value on the rising edge of each input
clock.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
28.2 FIXED DUTY CYCLE MODE 28.5 Interrupts
In Fixed Duty Cycle (FDC) mode, every time the When the accumulator overflows (NCO_overflow), the
accumulator overflows (NCO_overflow), the output is NCO Interrupt Flag bit, NCO1IF, of the PIR4 register is
toggled. This provides a 50% duty cycle, provided that set. To enable the interrupt event (NCO_interrupt), the
the increment value remains constant. For more following bits must be set:
information, see Figure 28-2. • EN bit of the NCO1CON register
• NCO1IE bit of the PIE4 register
28.3 PULSE FREQUENCY MODE • GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON0 register
In Pulse Frequency (PF) mode, every time the The interrupt must be cleared by software by clearing
Accumulator overflows, the output becomes active for the NCO1IF bit in the Interrupt Service Routine.
one or more clock periods. Once the clock period
expires, the output returns to an inactive state. This 28.6 Effects of a Reset
provides a pulsed output. The output becomes active
on the rising clock edge immediately following the All of the NCO registers are cleared to zero as the
overflow event. For more information, see Figure 28-2. result of a Reset.
The value of the active and inactive states depends on

the polarity bit, POL in the NCO1CON register.
28.7 Operation in Sleep
The PF mode is selected by setting the PFM bit in the The NCO module operates independently from the
NCO1CON register. system clock and will continue to run during Sleep,
provided that the clock source selected remains active.
28.3.1 OUTPUT PULSE-WIDTH CONTROL The HFINTOSC remains active during Sleep when the
When operating in PF mode, the active state of the NCO module is enabled and the HFINTOSC is
output can vary in width by multiple clock periods. selected as the clock source, regardless of the system
Various pulse widths are selected with the PWS[2:0] clock source selected.
bits in the NCO1CLK register. In other words, if the HFINTOSC is simultaneously
When the selected pulse width is greater than the selected as the system clock and the NCO clock
Accumulator overflow time frame, then DDS operation source, when the NCO is enabled, the CPU will go idle
is undefined. during Sleep, but the NCO will continue to operate and
the HFINTOSC will remain active.
28.4 OUTPUT POLARITY CONTROL This will have a direct effect on the Sleep mode current.
The last stage in the NCO module is the output polarity.
The POL bit in the NCO1CON register selects the
output polarity. Changing the polarity while the
interrupts are enabled will cause an interrupt for the
resulting output transition. The NCO output signal is
available to most of the other peripherals available on
the device.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 28-2: FDC OUTPUT MODE OPERATION DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000029A
11/7/2013
NCOx
Clock
Source
NCOx
Increment 4000h 4000h 4000h
Value
NCOx
Accumulator 00000h 04000h 08000h FC000h 00000h 04000h 08000h FC000h 00000h 04000h 08000h
Value
NCO_overflow
NCO_interrupt
NCOx Output
FDC Mode
NCOx Output
PF Mode
NCOxPWS =
000
NCOx Output
PF Mode
NCOxPWS =
001

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
28.8 NCO Control Registers
REGISTER 28-1: NCO1CON: NCO CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 U-0 R-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
EN — OUT POL — — — PFM
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: NCO1 Enable bit

1 = NCO1 module is enabled
0 = NCO1 module is disabled
bit 5 OUT: NCO1 Output bit
Displays the current output value of the NCO1 module.
bit 4 POL: NCO1 Polarity
1 = NCO1 output signal is inverted
0 = NCO1 output signal is not inverted
bit 0 PFM: NCO1 Pulse Frequency Mode bit
1 = NCO1 operates in Pulse Frequency mode
0 = NCO1 operates in Fixed Duty Cycle mode, divide by 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 28-2: NCO1CLK: NCO1 INPUT CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER
PWS[2:0](1,2) — CKS[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-5 PWS[2:0]: NCO1 Output Pulse Width Select bits(1,2)

111 = NCO1 output is active for 128 input clock periods
000 = NCO1 output is active for 1 input clock period
bit 3-0 CKS[3:0]: NCO1 Clock Source Select bits
1111 = Reserved
•
•
•
1011 = Reserved
1010 = CLC4_out
1001 = CLC3_out
1000 = CLC2_out
0111 = CLC1_out
0110 = CLKREF_out
0101 = SOSC
0100 = MFINTOSC/4 (32 kHz)
0010 = LFINTOSC
0001 = HFINTOSC
0000 = FOSC
Note 1: N1PWS applies only when operating in Pulse Frequency mode.

2: If NCO1 pulse width is greater than NCO1 overflow period, operation is undefined.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 28-3: NCO1ACCL: NCO1 ACCUMULATOR REGISTER – LOW BYTE
ACC[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ACC[7:0]: NCO1 Accumulator, Low Byte
REGISTER 28-4: NCO1ACCH: NCO1 ACCUMULATOR REGISTER – HIGH BYTE

ACC[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ACC[15:8]: NCO1 Accumulator, High Byte

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 28-5: NCO1ACCU: NCO1 ACCUMULATOR REGISTER – UPPER BYTE(1)
U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — ACC[19:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3-0 ACC[19:16]: NCO1 Accumulator, Upper Byte
Note 1: The accumulator spans registers NCO1ACCU:NCO1ACCH: NCO1ACCL. The 24 bits are reserved but
not all are used.This register updates in real time, asynchronously to the CPU; there is no provision to
guarantee atomic access to this 24-bit space using an 8-bit bus. Writing to this register while the module is
operating will produce undefined results.
REGISTER 28-6: NCO1INCL: NCO1 INCREMENT REGISTER – LOW BYTE(1,2)

INC[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 INC[7:0]: NCO1 Increment, Low Byte
Note 1: The logical increment spans NCO1INCU:NCO1INCH:NCO1INCL.

2: NCO1INC is double-buffered as INCBUF; INCBUF is updated on the next falling edge of NCOCLK after
writing to NCO1INCL; NCO1INCU and NCO1INCH should be written prior to writing NCO1INCL.
REGISTER 28-7: NCO1INCH: NCO1 INCREMENT REGISTER – HIGH BYTE(1)

INC[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 INC[15:8]: NCO1 Increment, High Byte

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 28-8: NCO1INCU: NCO1 INCREMENT REGISTER – UPPER BYTE(1)
U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
― ― ― ― INC[19:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3-0 INC[19:16]: NCO1 Increment, Upper Byte
TABLE 28-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH NCO
Register
on Page
NCO1CON N1EN ― N1OUT N1POL ― ― ― N1PFM 454

NCO1CLK N1PWS[2:0] ― ― N1CKS[2:0] 455
NCO1ACCL NCO1ACC[7:0] 456
NCO1ACCH NCO1ACC[15:8] 456
NCO1ACCU ― ― ― ― NCO1ACC[19:16] 457
NCO1INCL NCO1INC[7:0] 457
NCO1INCH NCO1INC[15:8] 457
NCO1INCU ― ― ― ― NCO1INC[19:16] 458
Legend: — = unimplemented read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for NCO module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
29.0 ZERO-CROSS DETECTION 29.1 External Resistor Selection
(ZCD) MODULE The ZCD module requires a current-limiting resistor in
The ZCD module detects when an A/C signal crosses series with the external voltage source. The impedance
through the ground potential. The actual zero-crossing and rating of this resistor depends on the external
threshold is the zero-crossing reference voltage, source peak voltage. Select a resistor value that will
VCPINV, which is typically 0.75V above ground. drop all of the peak voltage when the current through
the resistor is nominally 300 A. Refer to Equation 29-
The connection to the signal to be detected is through 1 and Figure 29-1. Make sure that the ZCD I/O pin
a series current-limiting resistor. The module applies a internal weak pull-up is disabled so it does not interfere
current source or sink to the ZCD pin to maintain a with the current source and sink.
constant voltage on the pin, thereby preventing the pin
voltage from forward biasing the ESD protection
EQUATION 29-1: EXTERNAL RESISTOR
diodes. When the applied voltage is greater than the
reference voltage, the module sinks current. When the
applied voltage is less than the reference voltage, the V PEAK-
module sources current. The current source and sink R SERIES = ----------------
–4
action keeps the pin voltage constant over the full 3 10
range of the applied voltage. The ZCD module is
shown in the simplified block diagram Figure 29-2.
The ZCD module is useful when monitoring an A/C
waveform for, but not limited to, the following purposes: FIGURE 29-1: EXTERNAL VOLTAGE
• A/C period measurement VMAXPEAK
• Accurate long term time measurement VPEAK VMINPEAK
• Dimmer phase delayed drive
• Low EMI cycle switching
VCPINV

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 29-2: SIMPLIFIED ZCD BLOCK DIAGRAM
VPULLUP Rev. 10-000194E

9/13/2016
optional
VDD RPULLUP
- ZCDxIN RSERIES
External
Zcpinv + RPULLDOWN voltage
source
optional
ZCD Output for other modules
POL
OUT pin
Interrupt
det
INTP Set
ZCDxIF
INTN flag
Interrupt
det
29.2 ZCD Logic Output 29.3 ZCD Logic Polarity

The ZCD module includes a Status bit, which can be The POL bit of the ZCDCON register inverts the OUT
read to determine whether the current source or sink is bit relative to the current source and sink output. When
active. The OUT bit of the ZCDCON register is set the POL bit is set, a OUT high indicates that the current
when the current sink is active, and cleared when the source is active, and a low output indicates that the
current source is active. The OUT bit is affected by the current sink is active.
polarity bit, even if the module is disabled. The POL bit affects the ZCD interrupts.
The OUT signal can also be used as input to other
modules. This is controlled by the registers of the
corresponding module. OUT can be used as follows:
• Gate source for TMR1/3/5
• Clock source for TMR2/4/6
• Reset source for TMR2/4/6

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
29.4 ZCD Interrupts 29.5 Correcting for VCPINV offset
An interrupt will be generated upon a change in the The actual voltage at which the ZCD switches is the
ZCD logic output when the appropriate interrupt reference voltage at the noninverting input of the ZCD
enables are set. A rising edge detector and a falling op amp. For external voltage source waveforms other
edge detector are present in the ZCD for this purpose. than square waves, this voltage offset from zero
The ZCDIF bit of the respective PIR register will be set causes the zero-cross event to occur either too early or
when either edge detector is triggered and its too late. When the waveform is varying relative to VSS,
associated enable bit is set. The INTP enables rising then the zero cross is detected too early as the
edge interrupts and the INTN bit enables falling edge waveform falls and too late as the waveform rises.
interrupts. Both are located in the ZCDCON register. When the waveform is varying relative to VDD, then the
Priority of the interrupt can be changed if the IPEN bit zero cross is detected too late as the waveform rises
of the INTCON register is set. The ZCD interrupt can be and too early as the waveform falls. The actual offset
made high or low priority by setting or clearing the time can be determined for sinusoidal waveforms with
ZCDIP bit of the respective IPR register. the corresponding equations shown in Equation 29-2.
To fully enable the interrupt, the following bits must be set:

EQUATION 29-2: ZCD EVENT OFFSET
• ZCDIE bit of the respective PIE register
• INTP bit of the ZCDCON register When External Voltage Source is relative to VSS:
(for a rising edge detection)
V CPINV
• INTN bit of the ZCDCON register asin  -------------------
(for a falling edge detection)  V PEAK 
T OFFSET = -----------------------------------
• GIE bits of the INTCON0 register 2  Freq
Changing the POL bit can cause an interrupt,
regardless of the level of the SEN bit. When External Voltage Source is relative to VDD:
The ZCDIF bit of the respective PIR register must be
cleared in software as part of the interrupt service. If V DD – V CPINV
another edge is detected while this flag is being asin  ---------------------------------
cleared, the flag will still be set at the end of the
 V PEAK 
T OFFSET = -------------------------------------------------
sequence. 2  Freq
This offset time can be compensated for by adding a

pull-up or pull-down biasing resistor to the ZCD pin. A
pull-up resistor is used when the external voltage
source is varying relative to VSS. A pull-down resistor is
used when the voltage is varying relative to VDD. The
resistor adds a bias to the ZCD pin so that the target
external voltage source must go to zero to pull the pin
voltage to the VCPINV switching voltage. The pull-up or
pull-down value can be determined with the equations
shown in Equation 29-3 or Equation 29-4.
EQUATION 29-3: ZCD PULL-UP/DOWN

When External Signal is relative to Vss:
R SERIES  V PULLUP – V CPINV 

R PULLUP = --------------------------------------------------------------------------
V CPINV
When External Signal is relative to VDD:
R SERIES  V CPINV 
R PULLDOWN = ---------------------------------------------
 V DD – V CPINV 

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Measuring VCPINV can be difficult, especially when the 29.8 Effects of a Reset
waveform is relative to VDD. However, by combining
Equations 29-2 and 29-3, the resistor value can be The ZCD circuit can be configured to default to the active
determined from the time difference between the or inactive state on Power-on-Reset (POR). When the
ZCD_output high and low intervals. Note that the time ZCD Configuration bit is cleared, the ZCD circuit will be
difference, ∆T, is 4*TOFFSET. The equation for active at POR. When the ZCD Configuration bit is set,
determining the pull-up and pull-down resistor values the SEN bit of the ZCDCON register must be set to
from the high and low ZCD_output periods is shown in enable the ZCD module.
Equation 29-4.
29.9 Disabling the ZCD Module
EQUATION 29-4: PULL-UP/DOWN The ZCD module can be disabled in two ways:
RESISTOR VALUES
1. Configuration Word 2H has the ZCD bit which
disables the ZCD module when set, but it can be
  enabled using the SEN bit of the ZCDCON
 V BIAS  register (Register 29-1). If the ZCD bit is clear,
R = R SERIES  ---------------------------------------------------------------- – 1
    T -   the ZCD is always enabled.
 V PEAK  sin  Freq ----------- 2   2. The ZCD can also be disabled using the
ZCDMD bit of the respective PMD2 register
(Register 19-3). This is subject to the status of
R is pull-up or pull-down resistor. the ZCD bit.
VBIAS is VPULLUP when R is pull-up or VDD when R
is pull-down.
∆T is the ZCDOUT high and low period difference.
29.6 Handling VPEAK Variations

If the peak amplitude of the external voltage is
expected to vary, the series resistor must be selected
to keep the ZCD current source and sink below the
design maximum range of ± 600 A and above a
reasonable minimum range. A general rule of thumb is
that the maximum peak voltage can be no more than
six times the minimum peak voltage. To ensure that the
maximum current does not exceed ± 600 A and the
minimum is at least ± 100 A, compute the series
resistance as shown in Equation 29-5. The
compensating pull-up for this series resistance can be
determined with Equation 29-3 because the pull-up
value is not dependent to the peak voltage.
EQUATION 29-5: SERIES R FOR V RANGE
R SERIES = V MAXPEAK + V MINPEAK

---------------------------------------------------------
–4
7 10

The ZCD current sources and interrupts are unaffected
by Sleep.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
29.10 Register Definitions: ZCD Control
REGISTER 29-1: ZCDCON: ZERO-CROSS DETECT CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 U-0 R-x R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
SEN — OUT POL — — INTP INTN
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SEN: Zero-Cross Detect Software Enable bit

This bit is ignored when ZCDSEN configuration bit is set.
1= Zero-cross detect is enabled.
0= Zero-cross detect is disabled. ZCD pin operates according to PPS and TRIS controls.
bit 5 OUT: Zero-Cross Detect Data Output bit
ZCDPOL bit = 0:
1 = ZCD pin is sinking current
0 = ZCD pin is sourcing current
ZCDPOL bit = 1:
1 = ZCD pin is sourcing current
0 = ZCD pin is sinking current
bit 4 POL: Zero-Cross Detect Polarity bit
1 = ZCD logic output is inverted
0 = ZCD logic output is not inverted
bit 1 INTP: Zero-Cross Detect Positive-Going Edge Interrupt Enable bit
1 = ZCDIF bit is set on low-to-high ZCD_output transition
0 = ZCDIF bit is unaffected by low-to-high ZCD_output transition
bit 0 INTN: Zero-Cross Detect Negative-Going Edge Interrupt Enable bit
1 = ZCDIF bit is set on high-to-low ZCD_output transition
0 = ZCDIF bit is unaffected by high-to-low ZCD_output transition
TABLE 29-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE ZCD MODULE

Register
on page
ZCDCON SEN — OUT POL — — INTP INTN 463
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the ZCD module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
30.0 DATA SIGNAL MODULATOR
(DSM) MODULE
The Data Signal Modulator (DSM) is a peripheral which
allows the user to mix a data stream, also known as a
modulator signal, with a carrier signal to produce a
modulated output.
Both the carrier and the modulator signals are supplied
to the DSM module either internally, from the output of
a peripheral, or externally through an input pin.
The modulated output signal is generated by
performing a logical “AND” operation of both the carrier
and modulator signals and then provided to the MDOUT
pin.
The carrier signal is comprised of two distinct and
separate signals. A carrier high (CARH) signal and a
carrier low (CARL) signal. During the time in which the
modulator (MOD) signal is in a logic high state, the
DSM mixes the carrier high signal with the modulator
signal. When the modulator signal is in a logic low
state, the DSM mixes the carrier low signal with the
modulator signal.
Using this method, the DSM can generate the following
types of Key Modulation schemes:
• Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK)
• Phase-Shift Keying (PSK)
• On-Off Keying (OOK)
Additionally, the following features are provided within
the DSM module:
• Carrier Synchronization
• Carrier Source Polarity Select
• Programmable Modulator Data
• Modulated Output Polarity Select
• Peripheral Module Disable, which provides the
ability to place the DSM module in the lowest
power consumption mode
Figure 30-1 shows a Simplified Block Diagram of the
Data Signal Modulator peripheral.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 30-1: SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE DATA SIGNAL MODULATOR
CH<n:0> Rev. 10-000248G

3/8/2019
Data Signal Modulator

00..0
See
MD1CARH CARH
Register
CHPOL D
11..1 SYNC
Q
MS<n:0> 1
0
00..0
CHSYNC
RxyPPS
See
MOD
MD1SRC
PPS
Register
OPOL
11..1
CL<n:0>
D
SYNC
00..0 Q
1
0
See
MD1CARL CARL
Register CLSYNC
CLPOL
11..1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
30.1 DSM Operation 30.3 Carrier Signal Sources
The DSM module can be enabled by setting the EN bit The carrier high signal and carrier low signal can be
in the MD1CON0 register. Clearing the EN bit in the supplied from the sources specified in Table 30-1.
MD1CON0 register, disables the DSM module output The carrier high signal is selected by configuring the
and switches the carrier high and carrier low signals to CH[4:0] bits in the MD1CARH register. The carrier low
the default option of MD1CARHPPS and signal is selected by configuring the CL[4:0] bits in the
MD1CARLPPS, respectively. The modulator signal MD1CARL register.
source is also switched to the BIT in the MD1CON0
register.
30.4 Carrier Synchronization
The values used to select the carrier high, carrier low,
and modulator sources held by the Modulation Source, During the time when the DSM switches between
Modulation High Carrier, and Modulation Low Carrier carrier high and carrier low signal sources, the carrier
control registers are not affected when the EN bit is data in the modulated output signal can become
cleared and the DSM module is disabled. The values truncated. To prevent this, the carrier signal can be
inside these registers remain unchanged while the synchronized to the modulator signal. When
DSM is inactive. The sources for the carrier high, synchronization is enabled, the carrier pulse that is
carrier low and modulator signals will once again be being mixed at the time of the transition is allowed to
selected when the EN bit is set and the DSM module is transition low before the DSM switches over to the next
again enabled and active. carrier source.
Synchronization is enabled separately for the carrier
30.2 Modulator Signal Sources high and carrier low signal sources. Synchronization for
the carrier high signal is enabled by setting the
The modulator signal can be supplied from the sources CHSYNC bit in the MD1CON1 register.
specified in Table 30-3. Synchronization for the carrier low signal is enabled by
The modulator signal is selected by configuring the setting the CLSYNC bit in the MD1CON1 register.
MS[4:0] bits in the MD1SRC register. Figure 30-2 through Figure 30-6 show timing diagrams
of using various synchronization methods.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 30-2: On Off Keying (OOK) Synchronization
Carrier Low (CARL)
Carrier High (CARH)
Modulator (BIT)
CHSYNC = 1
CLSYNC = 0
CHSYNC = 1
CLSYNC = 1
CHSYNC = 0
CLSYNC = 0
CHSYNC = 0
CLSYNC = 1
FIGURE 30-3: No Synchronization (CHSYNC = 0, CLSYNC = 0)
carrier_high
carrier_low
modulator
MDCHSYNC = 0
MDCLSYNC = 0
Active Carrier
carrier_high carrier_low carrier_high carrier_low
State
FIGURE 30-4: Carrier High Synchronization (CHSYNC = 1, CLSYNC = 0)
carrier_high
carrier_low
modulator
MDCHSYNC = 1
MDCLSYNC = 0
Active Carrier carrier_high carrier_high carrier_low

State both carrier_low both

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 30-5: Carrier Low Synchronization (CHSYNC = 0, CLSYNC = 1)
carrier_high
carrier_low
modulator
MDCHSYNC = 0
MDCLSYNC = 1
Active Carrier
State carrier_high carrier_low carrier_high carrier_low
FIGURE 30-6: Full Synchronization (CHSYNC = 1, CLSYNC = 1)
carrier_high
carrier_low
modulator Falling edges

used to sync
MDCHSYNC = 1
MDCLSYNC = 1
Active Carrier
State carrier_high carrier_low carrier_high CL

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
30.5 Carrier Source Polarity Select 30.8 Operation in Sleep Mode
The signal provided from any selected input source for The DSM module is not affected by Sleep mode. The
the carrier high and carrier low signals can be inverted. DSM can still operate during Sleep, if the Carrier and
Inverting the signal for the carrier high source is Modulator input sources are also still operable during
enabled by setting the CHPOL bit of the MD1CON1 Sleep. Refer to Section 10.0 “Power-Saving Opera-
register. Inverting the signal for the carrier low source is tion Modes” for more details.
enabled by setting the CLPOL bit of the MD1CON1
register. 30.9 Effects of a Reset
30.6 Programmable Modulator Data Upon any device Reset, the DSM module is disabled.
The user’s firmware is responsible for initializing the
The BIT of the MD1CON0 register can be selected as module before enabling the output. The registers are
the source for the modulator signal. This gives the user reset to their default values.
the ability to program the value used for modulation.
30.10 Peripheral Module Disable
30.7 Modulated Output Polarity
The DSM module can be completely disabled using the
The modulated output signal provided on the DSM pin PMD module to achieve maximum power saving. The
can also be inverted. Inverting the modulated output DSMMD bit of PMD6 (Register 19-7) when set disables
signal is enabled by setting the OPOL bit of the the DSM module completely. When enabled again, all
MD1CON0 register. the registers of the DSM module default to POR status.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
30.11 Register Definitions: Modulation Control
Long bit name prefixes for the Modulation peripheral is

MD1 MD1
REGISTER 30-1: MD1CON0: MODULATION CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 U-0 R-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
EN — OUT OPOL — — — BIT
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: Modulator Module Enable bit

1 = Modulator module is enabled and mixing input signals
0 = Modulator module is disabled and has no output
bit 5 OUT: Modulator Output bit
Displays the current output value of the Modulator module.(1)
bit 4 OPOL: Modulator Output Polarity Select bit
1 = Modulator output signal is inverted; idle high output
0 = Modulator output signal is not inverted; idle low output
bit 0 BIT: Allows software to manually set modulation source input to module(2)
1 = Modulator selects Carrier High
0 = Modulator selects Carrier Low
Note 1: The modulated output frequency can be greater and asynchronous from the clock that updates this
register bit, the bit value may not be valid for higher speed modulator or carrier signals.
2: BIT bit must be selected as the modulation source in the MD1SRC register for this operation.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 30-2: MD1CON1: MODULATION CONTROL REGISTER 1

U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — CHPOL CHSYNC — — CLPOL CLSYNC
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5 CHPOL: Modulator High Carrier Polarity Select bit
1 = Selected high carrier signal is inverted
0 = Selected high carrier signal is not inverted
bit 4 CHSYNC: Modulator High Carrier Synchronization Enable bit
1 = Modulator waits for a falling edge on the high time carrier signal before allowing a switch to the
low time carrier
0 = Modulator output is not synchronized to the high time carrier signal(1)
bit 1 CLPOL: Modulator Low Carrier Polarity Select bit
1 = Selected low carrier signal is inverted
0 = Selected low carrier signal is not inverted
bit 0 CLSYNC: Modulator Low Carrier Synchronization Enable bit
1 = Modulator waits for a falling edge on the low time carrier signal before allowing a switch to the high
time carrier
0 = Modulator output is not synchronized to the low time carrier signal(1)
Note 1: Narrowed carrier pulse widths or spurs may occur in the signal stream if the carrier is not synchronized.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 30-3: MD1CARH: MODULATION HIGH CARRIER CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
(1)
— — — CH[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 CH[4:0]: Modulator Carrier High Selection bits(1)
See Table 30-1 for signal list
Note 1: Unused selections provide an input value.
REGISTER 30-4: MD1CARL: MODULATION LOW CARRIER CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — CL[4:0](1)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 CL[4:0]: Modulator Carrier Low Input Selection bits(1)
Note 1: Unused selections provide a zero as the input value.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 30-1: MD1CARH/MD1CARL SELECTION MUX CONNECTIONS

MD1CARH MD1CARL
CH[4:0] Connection CL[4:0] Connection

11111-10011 31-19 Reserved 11111-10011 31-19 Reserved
10010 18 CLC4OUT 10010 18 CLC4OUT
10001 17 CLC3OUT 10001 17 CLC3OUT
10000 16 CLC2OUT 10000 16 CLC2OUT
01111 15 CLC1OUT 01111 15 CLC1OUT
01110 14 NCO1OUT 01110 14 NCO1OUT
01101-01100 13-12 Reserved 01101-01100 13-12 Reserved
01011 11 PWM8 OUT 01011 11 PWM8 OUT
01010 10 PWM7 OUT 01010 10 PWM7 OUT
01001 9 PWM6 OUT 01001 9 PWM6 OUT
01000 8 PWM5 OUT 01000 8 PWM5 OUT
00111 7 CCP4 OUT 00111 7 CCP4 OUT
00110 6 CCP3 OUT 00110 6 CCP3 OUT
00101 5 CCP2 OUT 00101 5 CCP2 OUT
00100 4 CCP1 OUT 00100 4 CCP1 OUT
00011 3 CLKREF output 00011 3 CLKREF output
00010 2 HFINTOSC 00010 2 HFINTOSC
00001 1 FOSC (system clock) 00001 1 FOSC (system clock)
00000 0 Pin selected by MD1CARHPPS 00000 0 Pin selected by MD1CARLPPS
REGISTER 30-5: MD1SRC: MODULATION SOURCE CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — MS[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 MS[4:0]: Modulator Source Selection bits(1)
Note 1:Unused selections provide a zero as the input value.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 30-2: MD1SRC SELECTION MUX
TABLE 30-2: MD1SRC SELECTION MUX CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS MS[4:0] Connection
MS[4:0] Connection 0 0101 5 CCP4 OUT
1 1111 31- Reserved 0 0100 4 CCP3 OUT
- 23 0 0011 CCP2 OUT
3
1 0111
0 0010 2 CCP1 OUT
1 0110 22 SPI1 SDO
0 0001 1 DSM1 BIT
1 0101 21 Reserved
0 0000 0 Pin selected by MDSRCPPS
1 0100 20 UART2 TX
1 0011 19 UART1 TX
1 0010 18 CLC4 OUT
1 0001 17 CLC3 OUT
1 0000 16 CLC2 OUT
0 1111 15 CLC1 OUT
0 1110 14 CMP2 OUT
0 1101 13 CMP1 OUT
0 1100 12 NCO1 OUT
0 1011 11 Reserved
0 1010 10 Reserved
0 1001 9 PWM8 OUT
0 1000 8 PWM7 OUT
0 0111 7 PWM6 OUT
0 0110 6 PWM5 OUT
TABLE 30-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH DATA SIGNAL MODULATOR MODE
Register
on Page
MD1CON0 EN — OUT OPOL — — — BIT 470
MD1CON1 — — CHPOL CHSYNC — — CLPOL CLSYNC 471
MD1CARH — — — CH[4:0] 472
MD1CARL — — — CL[4:0] 472
MD1SRC — — — MS[4:0] 473
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used in the Data Signal Modulator mode.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.0 UNIVERSAL ASYNCHRONOUS The UART module includes the following capabilities:
RECEIVER TRANSMITTER • Full-duplex asynchronous transmit and receive
(UART) WITH PROTOCOL • Two-character input buffer
• One-character output buffer
SUPPORT • Programmable 7-bit or 8-bit character length
The Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter • 9th bit Address detection
(UART) module is a serial I/O communications • 9th bit even or odd parity
peripheral. It contains all the clock generators, shift • Input buffer overrun error detection
registers and data buffers necessary to perform an • Received character framing error detection
input or output serial data transfer, independent of • Hardware and software flow control
device program execution. The UART, also known as a • Automatic checksums
Serial Communications Interface (SCI), can be • Programmable 1, 1.5, and 2 Stop bits
configured as a full-duplex asynchronous system or • Programmable data polarity
one of several automated protocols. Full-Duplex mode • Manchester encoder/decoder
is useful for communications with peripheral systems, • Operation in Sleep
such as CRT terminals and personal computers. • Automatic detection and calibration of the baud
rate
Supported protocols include: • Wake-up on Break reception
• LIN Master and Slave • Automatic and user timed Break period
• DMX mode generation
• DALI control gear and control device • RX and TX inactivity timeouts (with Timer2)
Block diagrams of the UART transmitter and receiver
are shown in Figure 31-1 and Figure 31-2.
The UART transmit output (TX_out) is available to the
TX pin and internally to various peripherals.
FIGURE 31-1: UART TRANSMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM

Data Bus
UxTXIE
+ Interrupt
UxTXCHK UxTXB Register UxTXIF
8 RxyPPS
TXEN
MSb LSb TX pin
(8) 0 Mode
• • • Control PPS
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
TXMTIF TX_out
Address or
Baud Rate Generator FOSC Parity Mode
÷n
n
+1 Multiplier x4 x16
BRGS 1 0
UxBRGH UxBRGL

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 31-2: UART RECEIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM
RXEN RXFOIF RXIDL
RXPPS
RX pin MSb RSR Register LSb
Pin Buffer Mode Data
PPS and Control Recovery
Stop (8) 7 ••• 1 0 Start
Baud Rate Generator FOSC

÷n
Address or +
Parity Mode UxRXCHK
+1 n
Multiplier x4 x16
BRGS 1 0
UxBRGH UxBRGL FIFO
FERIF PERIF UxRXB Register
8
Data Bus
RXIF Interrupt
RXIE
The operation of the UART module is controlled represents a ‘1’ data bit, and a VOL space state, which
through nineteen registers: represents a ‘0’ data bit. NRZ refers to the fact that
• Three control registers (UxCON0-UxCON2) consecutively transmitted data bits of the same value
• Error enable and status (UxERRIE, UxERRIR, stay at the output level of that bit without returning to a
UxUIR) neutral level between each bit transmission. An NRZ
• UART buffer status and control (UxFIFO) transmission port idles in the Mark state. Each character
• Three 9-bit protocol parameters (UxP1-UxP3) transmission consists of one Start bit followed by seven
• 16-bit baud rate generator (UxBRGH:L) or eight data bits, one optional parity or address bit, and
• Transmit buffer write (UxTXB) is always terminated by one or more Stop bits. The Start
• Receive buffer read (UxRXB) bit is always a space and the Stop bits are always
• Receive checksum (UxRXCHK) marks. The most common data format is eight bits with
• Transmit checksum (UxTXCHK) no parity. Each transmitted bit persists for a period of 1/
(Baud Rate). An on-chip dedicated 16-bit Baud Rate
These registers are detailed in Section 31.21 “Register Generator is used to derive standard baud rate
Definitions: UART Control”. frequencies from the system oscillator. See
Section 31.17 “UART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)”
31.1 UART I/O Pin Configuration for more information.
The RX input pin is selected with the UxRPPS register. In all the asynchronous modes, the UART transmits
The TX output pin is selected with each pin’s RxyPPS and receives the LSb first. The UART’s transmitter and
register. When the TRIS control for the pin corresponding receiver are functionally independent, but share the
to the TX output is cleared, then the UART will maintain same data format and baud rate. Parity is supported by
control and the logic level on the TX pin. Changing the the hardware by even and odd parity modes.
TXPOL bit in UxCON2 will immediately change the TX
pin logic level regardless of the value of EN or TXEN. 31.2.1 UART ASYNCHRONOUS
TRANSMITTER
31.2 UART Asynchronous Modes The UART transmitter block diagram is shown in
Figure 31-1. The heart of the transmitter is the serial
The UART has five asynchronous modes: Transmit Shift Register (TSR), which is not directly
• 7-bit accessible by software. The TSR obtains its data from
• 8-bit the transmit buffer, which is the UxTXB register.
• 8-bit with even parity in the 9th bit
• 8-bit with odd parity in the 9th bit
• 8-bit with address indicator in the 9th bit
The UART transmits and receives data using the
standard Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) format. NRZ is
implemented with two levels: a VOH mark state, which

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.2.1.1 Enabling the Transmitter The UxTXIF interrupt can be enabled by setting the
UxTXIE interrupt enable bit in the PIE register.
The UART transmitter is enabled for asynchronous
However, the UxTXIF flag bit will be set whenever the
operations by configuring the following control bits:
UxTXB is empty, regardless of the state of UxTXIE
• TXEN = 1 enable bit.The UxTXIF bit is read-only and cannot be
• MODE[3:0] = 0h through 3h set or cleared by software.
• UxBRGH:L = desired baud rate
To use interrupts when transmitting data, set the
• UxBRGS = desired baud rate multiplier
UxTXIE bit only when there is more data to send. Clear
• RxyPPS = code for desired output pin
the UxTXIE interrupt enable bit upon writing UxTXB
• ON = 1
with the last character of the transmission.
All other UART control bits are assumed to be in their
default state. 31.2.1.5 TSR Status
Setting the TXEN bit in the UxCON0 register enables The TXMTIF bit in the UxERRIR register indicates the
the transmitter circuitry of the UART. The MODE[3:0] status of the TSR. This is a read-only bit. The TXMTIF
bits in the UxCON0 register select the desired mode. bit is set when the TSR is empty and idle. The TXMTIF
Setting the ON bit in the UxCON1 register enables the bit is cleared when a character is transferred to the
UART. When TXEN is set and the transmitter is not idle, TSR from the UxTXB. The TXMTIF bit remains clear
the TX pin is automatically configured as an output. until all bits, including the Stop bits, have been shifted
When the transmitter is idle, the TX pin drive is out of the TSR and a byte is not waiting in the UxTXB
relinquished to the port TRIS control. If the TX pin is register.
shared with an analog peripheral, the analog I/O
The TXMTIF will generate an interrupt when the
function should be disabled by clearing the
TXMTIE bit in the UxERRIE register is set.
corresponding ANSEL bit.
Note: The TSR is not mapped in data memory,
Note: The UxTXIF Transmitter Interrupt flag is
so it is not available to the user.
set when the TXEN enable bit is set and
the UxTXB register can accept data.
31.2.1.6 Transmitter 7-bit Mode
31.2.1.2 Transmitting Data 7-Bit mode is selected when the MODE[3:0] bits are set
to ‘0001’. In 7-bit mode, only the seven Least
A transmission is initiated by writing a character to the
Significant bits of the data written to UxTXB are
UxTXB register. If this is the first character, or the
transmitted. The Most Significant bit is ignored.
previous character has been completely transmitted
from the TSR, the data in the UxTXB is immediately 31.2.1.7 Transmitter Parity Modes
transferred to the TSR register. If the TSR still contains
all or part of a previous character, the new character When the Odd or even Parity mode is selected, all data
data is held in the UxTXB until the previous character is sent as nine bits. The first eight bits are data and the
transmission is complete. The pending character in the 9th bit is parity. Even and odd parity is selected when
UxTXB is then transferred to the TSR at the beginning the MODE[3:0] bits are set to ‘0011’ and ‘0010’,
of the previous character Stop bit transmission. The respectively. Parity is automatically determined by the
transmission of the Start bit, data bits and Stop bit module and inserted in the serial data stream.
sequence commences immediately following the
completion of all of the previous character’s Stop bits.
31.2.1.3 Transmit Data Polarity

The polarity of the transmit data is controlled with the
TXPOL bit in the UxCON2 register. The default state of
this bit is ‘0’ which selects high true transmit idle and
data bits. Setting the TXPOL bit to ‘1’ will invert the
transmit data, resulting in low true idle and data bits. The
TXPOL bit controls transmit data polarity in all modes.
31.2.1.4 Transmit Interrupt Flag

The UxTXIF interrupt flag bit in the PIR register is set
whenever the UART transmitter is enabled and no
character is being held for transmission in the UxTXB. In
other words, the UxTXIF bit is clear only when the TSR
is busy with a character and a new character has been
queued for transmission in the UxTXB.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.2.1.8 Asynchronous Transmission Setup
1. Initialize the UxBRGH, UxBRGL register pair and
the BRGS bit to achieve the desired baud rate
(see Section 31.17 “UART Baud Rate
Generator (BRG)”).
2. Set the MODE[3:0] bits to the desired
asynchronous mode.
3. Set TXPOL bit if inverted TX output is desired.
4. Enable the asynchronous serial port by setting
the ON bit.
5. Enable the transmitter by setting the TXEN
control bit. This will cause the UxTXIF interrupt
flag to be set.
6. If the device has PPS, configure the desired I/O
pin RxyPPS register with the code for TX output.
7. If interrupts are desired, set the UxTXIE interrupt
enable bit in the respective PIE register. An
interrupt will occur immediately provided that the
GIE bits in the INTCON0 register are also set.
8. Write one byte of data into the UxTXB register.
This will start the transmission.
9. Subsequent bytes may be written when the
UxTXIF bit is ‘1’.
FIGURE 31-3: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION
Write to UxTXB
Word 1
BRG Output
(Shift Clock)
TX
pin Start bit bit 0 bit 1 last bit Stop bit
Word 1
UxTXIF bit
(Transmit Buffer 1 TCY
Reg. Empty Flag)
Word 1
TXMTIF bit Transmit Shift Reg.
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)
FIGURE 31-4: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (BACK-TO-BACK)
Write to UxTXB
Word 1 Word 2
BRG Output
(Shift Clock)
TX
pin Start bit bit 0 bit 1 last bit Stop bit Start bit bit 0
UxTXIF bit 1 TCY Word 1 Word 2
(Transmit Buffer
Reg. Empty Flag) 1 TCY
TXMTIF bit Word 1 Word 2

(Transmit Shift Transmit Shift Reg. Transmit Shift Reg.
Reg. Empty Flag)
Note: This timing diagram shows the first transmission and the start of the second consecutive transmission.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.2.2 UART ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER If both samples are high then the falling edge is
deemed a glitch and the UART returns to the Start bit
The Asynchronous mode is typically used in RS-232
detection state without generating an error.
systems. The receiver block diagram is shown in
Figure 31-2. The data is received on the RX pin and If either sample is low, the data recovery circuit
drives the data recovery block. The data recovery block continues counting BRG clocks and takes samples at
is actually a high-speed shifter operating at 4 or 16 clock counts 7, 8, and 9. When less than two samples
times the baud rate, whereas the serial Receive Shift are low, the Start bit is deemed invalid and the data
Register (RSR) operates at the bit rate. When all bits of recovery circuit aborts character reception, without
the character have been shifted in, they are generating an error, and resumes looking for the falling
immediately transferred to a two character First-In- edge of the Start bit.
First-Out (FIFO) memory. The FIFO buffering allows When two or more samples are low, the Start bit is
reception of two complete characters and the start of a deemed valid and the data recovery continues. After a
third character before software must start servicing the valid Start bit is detected, the BRG clock counter
UART receiver. The FIFO registers and RSR are not continues and resets at count 16. This is the beginning
directly accessible by software. Access to the received of the first data bit.
data is via the UxRXB register.
The data recovery circuit counts BRG clocks from the
31.2.2.1 Enabling the Receiver beginning of the bit and takes samples at clocks 7, 8,
and 9. The bit value is determined from the majority of
The UART receiver is enabled for asynchronous the samples. The resulting ‘0’ or ‘1’ is shifted into the
operation by configuring the following control bits: RSR.The BRG clock counter continues and resets at
• RXEN = 1 count 16. This sequence repeats until all data bits have
• MODE[3:0] = 0h through 3h been sampled and shifted into the RSR.
• UxBRGH:L = desired baud rate After all data bits have been shifted in, the first Stop bit
• RXPPS = code for desired input pin is sampled. Stop bits are always a ‘1’. If the bit sampling
• Input pin ANSEL bit = 0 determines that a ‘0’ is in the Stop bit position, the
• ON = 1 framing error is set for this character. Otherwise, the
All other UART control bits are assumed to be in their framing error is cleared for this character. See Section
default state. 31.2.2.4 “Receive Framing Error” for more
Setting the RXEN bit in the UxCON0 register enables information on framing errors.
the receiver circuitry of the UART. Setting the
31.2.2.3 Receive Interrupts
MODE[3:0] bits in the UxCON0 register configures the
UART for the desired asynchronous mode. Setting the Immediately after all data bits and the Stop bit have
ON bit in the UxCON1 register enables the UART. The been received, the character in the RSR is transferred
TRIS bit corresponding to the selected RX I/O pin must to the UART receive FIFO. The UxRXIF interrupt flag in
be set to configure the pin as an input. the respective PIR register is set at this time, provided
it is not being suppressed.
Note: If the RX function is on an analog pin, the
corresponding ANSEL bit must be cleared The UxRXIF is suppressed by any of the following:
for the receiver to function. • FERIF if FERIE is set
• PERIF if PERIE is set
31.2.2.2 Receiving Data This suspends DMA transfer of data until software
Data is recovered from the bit stream by timing to the processes the error and reads UxRXB to advance the
center of the bits and sampling the input level. In High- FIFO beyond the error.
Speed mode, there are four BRG clocks per bit and UxRXIF interrupts are enabled by setting all of the
only one sample is taken per bit. In Normal-Speed following bits:
mode, there are 16 BRG clocks per bit and three
samples are taken per bit. • UxRXIE, Interrupt Enable bit in the PIE register
• GIE, Global Interrupt Enable bits in the INTCON0
The receiver data recovery circuit initiates character register
reception on the falling edge of the Start bit. The Start
bit, is always a ‘0’. The Start bit is qualified in the middle The UxRXIF interrupt flag bit will be set when not
of the bit. In Normal-Speed mode only, the Start bit is suppressed and there is an unread character in the
also qualified at the leading edge of the bit. The FIFO, regardless of the state of interrupt enable bits.
following paragraphs describe the majority detect Reading the UxRXB register will transfer the top
sampling of Normal-Speed mode. character out of the FIFO and reduce the FIFO
contents by one. The UxRXIF interrupt flag bit is read-
The falling edge starts the baud rate generator (BRG) only, it cannot be set or cleared by software.
clock. The input is sampled at the first and second BRG
clocks.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.2.2.4 Receive Framing Error 31.2.2.6 Receive FIFO Overflow
Each character in the receive FIFO buffer has a When more characters are received than the receive
corresponding framing error flag bit. A framing error FIFO can hold, the RXFOIF bit in the UxERRIR register
indicates that the Stop bit was not seen at the expected is set. The character causing the overflow condition is
time. The framing error flag is accessed via the FERIF discarded. The RUNOVF bit in the UxCON2 register
bit in the UxERRIR register. The FERIF bit represents determines how the receive circuit responds to
the frame status of the top unread character of the characters while the overflow condition persists. When
receive FIFO. Therefore, the FERIF bit must be read RUNOVF is set, the receive shifter stays synchronized
before reading UxRXB. to the incoming data stream by responding to Start,
The FERIF bit is read-only and only applies to the top data, and Stop bits. However, all received bytes not
unread character of the receive FIFO. A framing error already in the FIFO are discarded. When RUNOVF is
(FERIF = 1) does not preclude reception of additional cleared, the receive shifter ceases operation and Start,
characters. It is neither necessary nor possible to clear data, and Stop bits are ignored. The receive overflow
the FERIF bit directly. Reading the next character from condition is cleared by reading the UxRXB register and
the FIFO buffer will advance the FIFO to the next clearing the RXFOIF bit. If the UxRXB register is not
character and the next corresponding framing error. read to open a space in the FIFO, the next character
received will be discarded and cause another overflow
The FERIF bit is cleared when the character at the top condition.
of the FIFO does not have a framing error or when all
bytes in the receive FIFO have been read. Clearing the A receive overflow error will generate a summary
ON bit resets the receive FIFO, thereby also clearing UxEIF interrupt when the RXFOIE bit in the UxERRIE
the FERIF bit. register is set.
A framing error will generate a summary UxERR 31.2.2.7 Asynchronous Reception Setup
interrupt when the FERIE bit in the UxERRIE register is
1. Initialize the UxBRGH, UxBRGL register pair
set. The summary error is reset when the FERIF bit of
and the BRGS bit to achieve the desired baud
the top of the FIFO is ‘0’ or when all FIFO characters
rate (see Section 31.17 “UART Baud Rate
have been retrieved.
Generator (BRG)”).
When FERIE is set, UxRXIF interrupts are suppressed 2. Configure the RXPPS register for the desired RX
when FERIF is ‘1’. pin
3. Clear the ANSEL bit for the RX pin (if
31.2.2.5 Receiver Parity Modes
applicable).
Even and odd parity is automatically detected when the 4. Set the MODE[3:0] bits to the desired
MODE[3:0] bits are set to ‘0011’ and ‘0010’, asynchronous mode.
respectively. Parity modes receive eight data bits and
5. Set the RXPOL bit if the data stream is inverted.
one parity bit for a total of nine bits for each character.
The PERIF bit in the UxERRIR register represents the 6. Enable the serial port by setting the ON bit.
parity error of the top unread character of the receive 7. If interrupts are desired, set the UxRXIE bit in
FIFO rather than the parity bit itself. The parity error must the PIEx register and the GIE bits in the
be read before reading the UxRXB register advances INTCON0 register.
the FIFO. 8. Enable reception by setting the RXEN bit.
A parity error will generate a summary UxERR interrupt 9. The UxRXIF interrupt flag bit will be set when a
when the PERIE bit in the UxERRIE register is set.The character is transferred from the RSR to the
summary error is reset when the PERIF bit of the top of receive buffer. An interrupt will be generated if
the FIFO is ‘0’ or when all FIFO characters have been the UxRXIE interrupt enable bit is also set.
retrieved. 10. Read the UxERRIR register to get the error
When PERIE is set, UxRXIF interrupts are suppressed flags.
when PERIF is ‘1’. 11. Read the UxRXB register to get the received
byte.
12. If an overrun occurred, clear the RXFOIF bit.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 31-5: ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION
Start Start Start
RX pin bit bit 0 bit 1 last bit Stop bit bit 0 last bit Stop bit last bit Stop
bit bit bit
Rcv Shift
Reg
Rcv Buffer Reg. Word 1 Word 2
UxRXB UxRXB
RXIDL
Read Rcv
Buffer Reg.
UxRXB
UxRXIF
(Interrupt Flag)
RXFOIF bit
Cleared by software
Note: This timing diagram shows three words appearing on the RX input. The UxRXB (receive buffer) is not read before the third word
is received, causing the RXFOIF (FIFO overrun) bit to be set. STPMD = 0, STP[1:0] = 00.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.3 Asynchronous Address Mode 31.3.2 ADDRESS MODE RECEIVE
A special Address Detection mode is available for use The UART receiver is enabled for asynchronous
when multiple receivers share the same transmission address operation by configuring the following control
line, such as in RS-485 systems. bits:
When Asynchronous Address mode is enabled, all • RXEN = 1

data is transmitted and received as 9-bit characters. • MODE[3:0] = 0100
The 9th bit determines whether the character is an • UxBRGH:L = desired baud rate
address or data. When the 9th bit is set, the eight Least • RXPPS = code for desired input pin
Significant bits are the address. When the 9th bit is • Input pin ANSEL bit = 0
clear, the Least Significant bits are data. In either case, • UxP2L = receiver address
the 9th bit is stored in PERIF when the byte is written to • UxP3L = address mask
the receive FIFO. When PERIE is also set, the RXIF • ON = 1
will be suppressed, thereby suspending DMA transfers In Address mode, no data will be transferred to the
allowing software to process the received address. input FIFO until a valid address is received. This is the
An address character will enable all receivers that default state. Any of the following conditions will cause
match the address and disable all other receivers. the UART to revert to the default state:
Once a receiver is enabled, all non-address characters • ON = 0
will be received until an address character is received • RXEN = 0
that does not match. • Received address does not match
When a character with the 9th bit set is received, the
31.3.1 ADDRESS MODE TRANSMIT
Least Significant eight bits of that character will be
The UART transmitter is enabled for asynchronous qualified by the values in the UxP2L and UxP3L
address operation by configuring the following control registers.
bits:
The byte is XOR’d with UxP2L then AND’d with UxP3L.
• TXEN = 1 A match occurs when the result is 0h, in which case,
• MODE[3:0] = 0100 the unaltered received character is stored in the
• UxBRGH:L = desired baud rate receive FIFO, thereby setting the UxRXIF interrupt bit.
• RxyPPS = code for desired output pin The 9th bit is stored in the corresponding PERIF bit,
• ON = 1 identifying this byte as an address.
Addresses are sent by writing to the UxP1L register. An address match also enables the receiver for all data
This transmits the written byte with the 9th bit set, which such that all subsequent characters without the 9th bit
indicates that the byte is an address. set will be stored in the receive FIFO.
Data is sent by writing to the UxTXB register. This When the 9th bit is set and a match does not occur, the
transmits the written byte with the 9th bit cleared, which character is not stored in the receive FIFO and all
indicates that the byte is data. subsequent data is ignored.
To send data to a particular device on the transmission The UxP3L register mask allows a range of addresses
bus, first transmit the address of the intended device. All to be accepted. Software can then determine the sub-
subsequent data will be accepted only by that device address of the range by processing the received
until an address of another device is transmitted. address character.
Writes to UxP1L take precedence over writes to
UxTXB. When both the UxP1L and UxTXB registers
are written while the TSR is busy, the next byte to be
transmitted will be from UxP1L.
To ensure that all data intended for one device is sent
before the address is changed, wait until the TXMTIF
bit is high before writing UxP1L with the new address.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.4 DMX Mode (UART1 only) toggle TXEN after the last byte of the universe is
completely free of the transmit shift register as
DMX is a protocol used in stage and show equipment. indicated by the TXMTIF bit.
This includes lighting, fog machines, motors, etc. The
protocol consists of a controller that sends out 31.4.2 DMX RECEIVER
commands, and receiver such as theater lights that
DMX Receiver mode is configured with the following
receive these commands. DMX protocol is usually
settings:
unidirectional, but can be a bidirectional protocol in
either Half or Full-duplex modes. An example of Half- • MODE[3:0] = 1010
duplex mode is the RDM (Remote Device • TXEN = 0
Management) protocol that sits on DMX512A. The • RXEN = 1
controller transmits commands and the receiver • RXPOL = 0
receives them. Also there are no error conditions or re- • UxP2 = number of first byte to receive
transmit mechanisms. • UxP3 = number of last byte to receive
• UxBRGH:L = Value to achieve 250K baud rate
DMX, or DMX512A as it is known, consists of a
• STP[1:0] = 10 for 2 Stop bits
“Universe” of 512 channels. This means that one
• ON = 1
controller can output up to 512 bytes on a single DMX
• UxRXPPS = code for desired input pin
link. Each equipment on the line is programmed to
• Input pin ANSEL bit = 0
listen to a consecutive sequence of one or more of
these bytes. When configured as DMX Receiver, the UART listens
for a Break character that is at least 23 bit periods wide.
For example, a fog machine connected to one of the
If the Break is shorter than 23 bit times, the Break is
universes may be programmed to receive one byte,
ignored and the DMX state machine remains in Idle
starting at byte number 10, and a lighting unit may be
mode. Upon receiving the Break, the DMX counters will
programmed to receive four bytes starting at byte
be reset to align with the incoming data stream.
number 22.
Immediately after the Break, the UART will see the
31.4.1 DMX CONTROLLER “Mark after Break” (MAB). This space is ignored by the
UART. The Start Code follows the MAB and will always
DMX Controller mode is configured with the following be stored in the receive FIFO.
settings:
After the Start Code, the 1st through 512th byte will be
• MODE[3:0] = 1010 received, but not all of them are stored in the receive
• TXEN = 1 FIFO. The UART ignores all received bytes until the
• RXEN = 0 ones of interest are received. This is done using the
• TXPOL = 0 UxP2 and UxP3 registers. The UxP2 register holds the
• UxP1 = One less than the number of bytes to value of the byte number to start the receive process.
transmit (excluding the Start code) The byte counter starts at 0 for the first byte after the
• UxBRGH:L = Value to achieve 250K baud rate Start Code. For example, to receive four bytes starting
• STP[1:0] = 10 for 2 Stop bits at the 10th byte after the Start Code, write 009h
• RxyPPS = TX pin output code (9 decimal) to UxP2H:L and 00Ch (12 decimal) to
• ON = 1 UxP3H:L. The receive FIFO is only 2 bytes deep,
Each DMX transmission begins with a Break followed therefore the bytes must be retrieved by reading
by a byte called the ‘Start Code’. The width of the UxRXB as they come in to avoid a receive FIFO
BREAK is fixed at 25 bit times. The Break is followed overrun condition.
by a “Mark After Break” (MAB) Idle period. After this Typically two Stop bits are inserted between bytes. If
Idle period, the 1st through ‘n’th byte is transmitted, either Stop bit is detected as a ‘0’ then the framing error
where ‘n-1’ is the value in UxP1. See Figure 31-6. for that byte will be set.
Software sends the Start Code and the ‘n’ data bytes by Since the DMX sequence always starts with a Break,
writing the UxTXB register with each byte to be sent in the software can verify that it is in sync with the
the desired order. A UxTXIF value of ‘1’ indicates when sequence by monitoring the RXBKIF flag to ensure that
the UxTXB is ready to accept the next byte. the next byte received after the RXBKIF is processed
The internal byte counter is not accessible to software. as the Start Code and subsequent bytes are processed
Software needs to keep track of the number of bytes as the expected data.
written to UxTXB to ensure that no more and no less
than ‘n’ bytes are sent because the DMX state machine
will automatically insert a Break and reset its internal
counter after ‘n’ bytes are written. One way to ensure
synchronization between hardware and software is to

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 31-6: DMX TRANSMIT SEQUENCE
Start Code Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte n Start Code Byte 1

Write to UxTXB
MAB(1)
TX pin Break Start Code byte 1 byte 2 byte n software Break MAB Start Code
UxTXIF bit delay
(Transmit Buffer
Reg. Empty Flag)
TXMTIF bit
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)
TXEN bit
(optional
synchronization)
Note 1: The MAB period is fixed at 3-bits period.
31.5 LIN Modes (UART1 only) When a Slave receives data, the checksum is
accumulated on each byte as it is received using the
LIN is a protocol used primarily in automotive same algorithm as the sending process. The last byte,
applications. The LIN network consists of two kinds of which is the inverted checksum value calculated by the
software processes: a Master process and a Slave sending process, is added to the locally calculated
process. Each network has only one Master process checksum by the UART. The check passes when the
and one or more Slave processes. result is all ‘1’s, otherwise the check fails and the
From a physical layer point of view, the UART on one CERIF bit is set.
processor may be driven by both a Master and a Slave Two methods for computing the checksum are
process, as long as only one Master process exists on available: legacy and enhanced. The legacy checksum
the network. includes only the data bytes. The enhanced checksum
A LIN transaction consists of a Master process followed includes the PID and the data. The C0EN control bit in
by a Slave process. The Slave process may involve the UxCON2 register determines the checksum
more than one Slave where one is transmitting and the method. Setting C0EN to ‘1’ selects the enhanced
other(s) are receiving. The transaction begins by the method. Software must select the appropriate method
following Master process transmission sequence: before the Start bit of the checksum byte is received.
1. Break
31.5.1 LIN MASTER/SLAVE MODE
2. Delimiter bit
The LIN Master mode includes capabilities to generate
3. Sync Field
Slave processes. The Master process stops at the PID
4. PID byte transmission. Any data that is transmitted in Master/
The PID determines which Slave processes are Slave mode is done as a Slave process. LIN Master/
expected to respond to the Master. When the PID byte Slave mode is configured by the following settings:
is complete, the TX output remains in the Idle state. • MODE[3:0] = 1100
One or more of the Slave processes may respond to • TXEN = 1
the Master process. If no one responds within the inter- • RXEN = 1
byte period, the Master is free to start another • UxBRGH:L = Value to achieve desired baud rate
transmission. The inter-byte period is timed by software • TXPOL = 0 (for high Idle state)
using a means other than the UART. • STP = desired Stop bits selection
The Slave process follows the Master process. When • C0EN = desired checksum mode
the Slave software recognizes the PID then that Slave • RxyPPS = TX pin selection code
process responds by either transmitting the required • TX pin TRIS control = 0
response or by receiving the transmitted data. Only • ON = 1
Slave processes send data. Therefore, Slave
processes receiving data are receiving that of another
Slave process. Note: The TXEN bit must be set before the
Master process is received and remain set
When a Slave sends data, the Slave UART
while in LIN mode whether or not the slave
automatically calculates the checksum for the
process is a transmitter.
transmitted bytes as they are sent and appends the
inverted checksum byte to the slave response.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
The Master process is started by writing the PID to the 31.5.2.1 LIN Slave Receiver
UxP1L register when UxP2 is ‘0’ and the UART is idle.
When the Slave process is a receiver, the software
The UxTXIF will not be set in this case. Only the six
performs the following tasks:
Least Significant bits of UxP1L are used in the PID
transmission. • UxP3 register is written with a value equal to the
number of data bytes to receive.
The two Most Significant bits of the transmitted PID are
• C0EN bit is set or cleared to select the
PID parity bits. PID[6] is the exclusive-or of PID bits
appropriate checksum. This must be completed
0,1,2,and 4. PID[7] is the inverse of the exclusive-or of
before the Start bit of the checksum byte is
PID bits 1,3,4,and 5.
received.
The UART calculates and inserts these bits in the serial • Each byte of the process response is read from
stream. UxRXB when UxRXIF is set.
Writing UxP1L automatically clears the UxTXCHK and The UART updates the checksum on each received
UxRXCHK registers and generates the Break, delimiter byte. When the last data byte is received, the computed
bit, Sync character (55h), and PID transmission portion checksum total is stored in the UxRXCHK register. The
of the transaction. The data portion of the transaction next received byte is saved in the receive FIFO and
that follows, if there is one, is a Slave process. See added with the value in UxRXCHK. The result of this
Section 31.5.2 “LIN Slave Mode” for more details of addition is not accessible. However, if the result is not
that process. The Master receives it’s own PID when all ‘1’s, the CERIF bit in the UxERRIR is set. The
RXEN is set. Software performs the Slave process CERIF flag persists until cleared by software. Software
corresponding to the PID that was sent and received. needs to read UxRXB to remove the checksum byte
Attempting to write UxP1L before an active master from the FIFO, but the byte can be discarded if not
process is complete will not succeed. Instead, the needed for any other purpose.
TXWRE bit will be set.
After the checksum is received, the UART ignores all
activity on the RX pin until a Break starts the next
31.5.2 LIN SLAVE MODE
transaction.
LIN Slave mode is configured by the following settings:
• MODE[3:0] = 1011 31.5.2.2 LIN Slave Transmitter
• TXEN = 1 When the Slave process is a transmitter, software
• RXEN = 1 performs the following tasks in the order shown:
• UxP2 = Number of data bytes to transmit
• UxP2 register is written with a value equal to the
• UxP3 = Number of data bytes to receive
number of bytes to transmit. This will enable TXIF
• UxBRGH:L = Value to achieve default baud rate
flag which is disabled when UxP2 is ‘0’.
• TXPOL = 0 (for high Idle state)
• C0EN bit is set or cleared to select the
• STP = desired Stop bits selection
appropriate checksum
• C0EN = desired checksum mode
• Inter-byte delay is performed
• RxyPPS = TX pin selection code
• Each byte of the process response is written to
• TX pin TRIS control = 0
UxTXB when UxTXIF is set
• ON = 1
The UART accumulates the checksum as each byte is
The Slave process starts upon detecting a Break on the
written to UxTXB. After the last byte is written, the
RX pin. The Break clears the UxTXCHK, UxRXCHK,
UART stores the calculated checksum in the
UxP2, and UxP3 registers. At the end of the Break, the
UxTXCHK register and transmits the inverted result as
auto-baud circuity is activated and the baud rate is
the last byte in the response.
automatically set using the Sync character following
the Break. The character following the Sync character The TXIF flag is disabled when UxP2 bytes have been
is received as the PID code and is saved in the receive written. Any writes to UxTXB that exceed the UxP2
FIFO. The UART computes the two PID parity bits from count will be ignored and set the TXWRE flag in the
the six Least Significant bits of the PID. If either parity UxFIFO register.
bit does not match the corresponding bit of the received
PID code, the PERIF flag is set and saved at the same
FIFO location as the PID code. The UxRXIF bit is set
indicating that the PID is available.
Software retrieves the PID by reading the UxRXB
register and determines the Slave process to execute
from that. The checksum method, number of data
bytes, and whether to send or receive data, is defined
by software according to the PID code.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.6 DALI Mode (UART1 only) A Start bit is used to indicate the start of the forward and
backward frames. The receiver bit rate is determined
DALI is a protocol used for intelligent lighting control for by the BRG register. The low period of the Start bit is
building automation. The protocol consists of Control measured and is used as the timing reference for all
Devices and Control Gear. A Control Device is an data bits in the forward and backward frames. The
application controller that sends out commands to the ABDOVF bit is set if the Stat bit low period causes the
light fixtures. The light fixture itself is termed as a measurement counter to overflow. All the bits following
Control Gear. The communication is done using the Start bit are data bits. The bit stream terminates
Manchester encoding, which is performed by the UART when no transition is detected in the middle of a bit
hardware. period (see Figure 31-7).
Manchester encoding consists of the clock and data in Forward and backward frames are terminated by two
a single bit stream. A high-to-low or a low-to-high Idle bit periods or Stop bits. Normally, these start in the
transition always occurs in the middle of the bit period first bit period of a byte. If both Stop bits are valid, the
and is not guaranteed to occur at the bit period byte reception is terminated and the CERIF bit in
boundaries. When the consecutive bits in the bit stream UxERRIR register is set. This bit needs to be cleared in
are of the same value (i.e., consecutive '1's or the software.
consecutive '0's), a transition occurs at the bit
boundary. However, when the bit value changes, there If either of the Stop bits is invalid, the frame is tagged
is no transition at the bit boundary. According to the as invalid by saving it as a null byte and setting the
standard, a half-bit time is typically 416.7 µs long. A framing error in the receive FIFO.
double half-bit time or a single bit is typically 833.3 µs. A framing error also occurs when no transition is
The protocol is inherently half-duplex. Communication detected on the bus in the middle of a bit period when
over the bus occurs in the form of forward and the byte reception is not complete. In such a scenario,
backward frames. Wait times between the frames are the byte will be saved with the FERIF bit.
defined in the standard to prevent collision between the
31.6.1 CONTROL DEVICE
frames.
Control Device mode is configured with the following
A Control Device transmission is termed as the forward
settings:
frame. In the DALI 2.0 standard, a forward frame can
be two or three bytes in length. The two-byte forward • MODE = 0b1000
frame is used for communication between Control • TXEN = 1
Device and Control Gear whereas the three-byte for- • RXEN = 1
ward frame is used for communication between Control
• UxP1 = Forward frames are held for transmission
Devices on the bus. The first byte in the forward frame
with this number of half-bit periods after the
is the control byte and is followed by either one or two
completion of a forward or backward frame.
data bytes. The transaction begins when the Control
Device starts a transmission. Unlike other protocols, • UxP2 = Forward/backward frame threshold
each byte in the frame is transmitted MSB first. Typical delimiter. Any reception that starts this number of
frame timing is as shown in Figure 31-8. half bit periods after the completion of a forward or
backward frame is detected as forward frame and
During communication between two Control Devices, sets the PERIF flag of the corresponding received
three bytes are required to be transmitted. In this case, byte.
the software must write the third byte to UxTXB as soon
• UxBRGH:L = Value to achieve 1200 baud rate
as UxTXIF goes True and before the output shifter
becomes empty. This ensures that the three bytes of • TXPOL = appropriate polarity for interface circuit
the forward frame are transmitted back-to-back without • STP = 0b10 for two Stop bits
any interruption. • CERIE = 1 to enable interrupt when STP bit is
All Control Gear on the bus receive the forward frame. received (if applicable)
If the forward frame requires a reply to be sent, one of • RxyPPS = TX pin selection code
the Control Gear may respond with a single byte, called • TX pin TRIS control = 0
the backward frame. The 2.0 standard requires the • ON = 1.
Control Gear to begin transmission of the backward
A forward frame is initiated by writing the control byte to
frame between 5.5 ms to 10.5 ms (~14 to 22 half-bit
the UxTXB register. After sending the control byte,
times) after reception of the forward frame. Once the
each data byte must be written to the UxTXB register
backward frame is received by the Control Device, it is
as soon as UxTXIF goes true. It is necessary to
required to wait a minimum of 2.4 ms (~6 half-bit times).
perform every write after UxTXIF goes true, to ensure
After this wait time, the Control Device is free to
that the transmit buffer is ready to accept the byte.
transmit another forward frame (see Figure 31-9).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Each write must also occur before the TXMTIF bit goes received (if applicable)
true, to ensure that the bit stream of forward frame is • RxyPPS = TX pin output code
generated without an interruption. • TX pin TRIS control = 0
When TXMTIF goes true, indicating the transmit shift • RXPPS = RX pin selection code
register has completed sending the last byte in the • RX pin TRIS control = 1
frame, the TX output is held in Idle state for the number • Input pin ANSEL bit = 0
of half-bit periods selected by the STP bits in the • ON = 1
UxCON2 register and the CERIF bit in UxERRIR The UART starts listening for a forward frame when the
register is set. This bit needs to be cleared in the Control Gear mode is entered. Only the frames that
software. follow an Idle period longer than UxP2 half-bit periods
After the last Stop bit, the TX output is held in Idle state are detected as forward frames. Backward frames from
for an additional wait time determined by the half-bit other Control Gear are ignored. Only forward frames
period count in the UxP1 register. For example, a 2450 will be stored in UxRXB. This is necessary because a
µs delay (~6 half-bit times) requires a value of 6 in backward frame can be sent only as a response to a
UxP1L. forward frame.
Any writes to the UxTXB register that occur after The forward frame is received one byte at a time in the
TXMTIF goes true, but before the UxP1 wait time receive FIFO and retrieved by reading the UxRXB
expires, are held and then transmitted immediately register. At the end of the forward frame, when the stop
following the wait time. If a backward frame is received bit is received, the CERIF bit in UxERRIR register is
during the wait time, any bytes that may have been set. This bit needs to be cleared in the software. The
written to UxTXB will be transmitted after completion of end of the forward frame starts a timer to delay the
the backward frame reception plus the UxP1 wait time. backward frame response by wait time equal to the
number of half-bit periods stored in UxP1.
The wait timer is reset by the backward frame and
starts over immediately following the reception of the The data received in the forward frame is processed by
Stop bits of the backward frame. Data pending in the the application software. If the application decides to
transmit shift register will be sent when the wait time send a backward frame in response to the forward
elapses. frame, the value of the backward frame is written to
UxTXB. This value is held for transmission in the
To replace or delete any pending forward frame data, transmit shift register until the wait time expires and is
the TXBE bit needs to be set to flush the shift register then transmitted.
and transmit buffer. A new control byte can then be
written to the UxTXB register. The control byte will be If the backward frame data is written to UxTXB after the
held in the buffer and sent at the beginning of the next wait time has expired, it is held in the UxTXB register
forward frame following the UxP1 wait time. until the end of the wait time following the next forward
frame. The TXMTIF bit is false when the backward
In Control Device mode, PERIF is set when a forward frame data is held in the transmit shift register.
frame is received. This helps the software to determine Receiving a UxRXIF interrupt before the TXMTIF goes
whether the received byte is part of a forward frame true indicates that the backward frame write was too
from a Control Device (either from the Control Device late and another forward frame was received before
under consideration or from another Control Device on sending the backward frame. The pending backward
the bus) or a backward frame from a Control Gear. frame has to be flushed by setting the TXBE bit, to
prevent it from being sent after the next Forward
31.6.2 CONTROL GEAR Frame.
The Control Gear mode is configured with the following
settings:
• MODE = 0b1001
• TXEN = 1
• RXEN = 1
• UxP1 = Back Frames are held for transmission
this number of half-bit periods after the completion
of a Forward Frame.
• UxP2 = Forward/Back Frame threshold delimiter.
Idle periods more than this number of half-bit
periods are detected as Forward Frames.
• UxBRGH:L = Value to achieve 1200 baud rate
• TXPOL = appropriate polarity for interface circuit
• RXPOL = same as TXPOL
• STP = 0b10 for two Stop bits
• CERIE = 1 to enable interrupt when STP bit is

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 31-7: MANCHESTER TIMING
byte0 byte1
Write to UxTXB
Start byte0 byte1 Stop bit(s) idle Start
bit bit
TX pin
b7=1 b6=0 b5=0 b4=1 b0=1 b7=0 b6=1 b0=0
UxTXIF bit
(Transmit Buffer
Reg. Empty Flag)
TXMTIF bit
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)
FIGURE 31-8: DALI FRAME TIMING

Control Control
Byte 1 Code Byte 1
Code
Write to UxTXB
Start bit Stop bits wait period Start bit

TX pin CC[7] CC[6] CC[0] byte1[7] byte1[0]
UxTXIF bit
(Transmit Buffer
Reg. Empty Flag)
TXMTIF bit
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)
FIGURE 31-9: DALI FORWARD/BACK FRAME TIMING
forward wait period forward wait period

Device TX Forward Frame Forward Frame Forward Frame
Gear TX Back Frame

back wait period
Gear
UxTXB Write
31.7 General Purpose Manchester • STP = desired number of stop periods

(UART1 only) • RxyPPS = TX pin selection code
• TX pin TRIS control = 0
General purpose Manchester is a subset of the DALI • RXPPS = RX pin selection code
mode. When the UxP1L register is cleared, there is no • RX pin TRIS control = 1
minimum wait time between frames. This allows full • Input pin ANSEL bit = 0
and half-duplex operation because writes to the UxTXB • ON = 1
are not held waiting for a receive operation to complete.
The Manchester bit stream timing is shown in
General purpose Manchester operation maintains all Figure 31-7.
other aspects of DALI mode such as:
• Single-pulse Start bit
• Most Significant bit first
• No stop periods between back-to-back bytes
General purpose Manchester mode is configured with
the following settings:
• MODE[3:0] = 1000
• TXEN = 1
• RXEN = 1
• UxP1 = 0h
• UxBRGH:L = desired baud rate
• TXPOL and RXPOL = desired Idle state

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.8 Polarity
Receive and transmit polarity is user selectable and
affects all modes of operation.
The idle level is programmable with the polarity control
bits in the UxCON2 register. The control bits default to
‘0’, which select a high idle level. The low level Idle
state is selected by setting the control bit to ‘1’. TXPOL
controls the TX idle level. RXPOL controls the RX idle
level.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.9 Stop Bits 31.11 Receive and Transmit Buffers
The number of Stop bits is user selectable with the STP The UART uses small buffer areas to transmit and
bits in the UxCON2 register.The STP bits affect all receive data. These are sometimes referred to as
modes of operation. FIFOs.
Stop bits selections include: The receiver has a Receive Shift Register (RSR) and
• 1 transmit with receive verify on first two buffer registers. The buffer at the top of the FIFO
• 1.5 transmit with receive verify on first (earliest byte to enter the FIFO) is by retrieved by
• 2 transmit with receive verify on both reading the UxRXB register.
• 2 transmit with receive verify on first only The transmitter has one Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
In all modes, except DALI, the transmitter is idle for the and one buffer register. Writes to UxTXB go to the
number of Stop bit periods between each consecutively transmit buffer then immediately to the TSR, if it is
transmitted word. In DALI, the Stop bits are generated empty. When the TSR is not empty, writes to UxTXB
after the last bit in the transmitted data stream. are held then transferred to the TSR when it becomes
available.
The input is checked for the idle level in the middle of
the first Stop bit, when receive verify on first is selected, 31.11.1 FIFO STATUS
as well as in the middle of the second Stop bit, when
The UxFIFO register contains several status bits for
verify on both is selected. If any Stop bit verification
determining the state of the receive and transmit
indicates a non-idle level, the framing error FERIF bit is
buffers.
set for the received word.
The RXBE bit indicates that the receive FIFO is empty.
31.9.1 DELAYED UXRXIF This bit is essentially the inverse of UxRXIF. The RXBF
When operating in Half-Duplex mode, where the bit indicates that the receive FIFO is full.
microcontroller needs to reverse the transceiver The transmitter has only one buffer register so the
direction after a reception, it may be more convenient status bits are essentially a copy and inverse of the
to hold off the UxRXIF interrupt until the end of the Stop UxTXIF bit. The TXBE bit indicates that the buffer is
bits to avoid line contention. The user selects when the empty (same as UxTXIF) and the TXBF bit indicates
UxRXIF interrupt occurs with the STPMD bit in the that the buffer is full (UxTXIF inverse). A third
UxFIFO register. When STPMD is ‘1’, the UxRXIF transmitter status bit, TXWRE (transmit write error), is
occurs at the end of the last Stop bit. When STPMD is set whenever a UxTXB write is performed when the
‘0’, UxRXIF occurs when the received byte is stored in TXBF bit is set. This indicates that the write was
the receive FIFO. When STP[1:0] = 10, the store unsuccessful.
operation is performed in the middle of the second Stop
bit, otherwise, it is performed in the middle of the first 31.11.2 FIFO RESET
Stop bit. The FERIF and PERIF interrupts are not All modes support resetting the receive and transmit
delayed with STPMD. Only UxRXIF is delayed when buffers.
STPMD is set and should be the only indicator for
reversing transceiver direction. The receive buffer is flushed and all unread data
discarded when the RXBE bit in the UxFIFO register is
written to ‘1’. The MOVWF instruction with the TXBE bit
31.10 Operation after FIFO overflow cleared should be used to avoid inadvertently clearing
The Receive Shift Register (RSR) can be configured to a byte pending in the TSR when UxTXB is empty.
stop or continue running during a receive FIFO Data written to UxTXB when TXEN is low will be held in
overflow condition. Stopped operation is the Legacy the Transmit Shift Register (TSR) then sent when
mode. TXEN is set. The transmit buffer and inactive TSR are
When the RSR continues to run during an overflow flushed by setting the TXBE bit in the UxFIFO register.
condition, the first word received after clearing the Setting TXBE while a character is actively transmitting
overflow will always be valid. from the TSR will complete the transmission without
being flushed.
When the RSR is stopped during an overflow condition,
synchronization with the Start bits is lost. Therefore, the Clearing the ON bit will discard all received data and
first word received after the overflow is cleared may transmit data pending in the TSR and UxTXB.
start in the middle of a word.
Operation during overflow is selected with the
RUNOVF bit in the UxCON2 register. Setting the
RUNOVF bit selects the run during overflow method.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.12 Flow Control FIGURE 31-10: FLOW CONTROL
This section does not apply to the LIN, DALI, or DMX UART 1 UART 2
modes. (DTE) (DTE)
Flow control is the means by which a sending UART
data stream can be suspended by a receiving UART.
RX TX
Flow control prevents input buffers from overflowing
without software intervention. The UART supports both
RTS CTS
hardware and XON/XOFF methods of flow control.
The flow control method is selected with the FLO[1:0]
TX RX
bits in the UxCON2 register. Flow control is disabled
when are both bits are cleared. CTS RTS
31.12.1 HARDWARE FLOW CONTROL

Hardware flow control is selected by setting the 31.12.2 RS-485 TRANSCEIVER CONTROL
FLO[1:0] bits to ‘10’.
Hardware flow control can be used to control the
Hardware flow control consists of three lines. The RS- direction of an RS-485 transceiver as shown in
232 signal names for two of these are RTS, and CTS. Figure 31-11. Configure the CTS input to be always
Both are low true. The third line may be used to control enabled by setting the UxCTSPPS selection to an
an RS-485 transceiver. The signal name for this is unimplemented port pin such as RD0. When the signal
TXDE for transmit drive enable. This output is high and control lines are configured as shown in Figure 31-
when the TX output is actively sending a character and 11, then the UART will not receive its own
low at all other times. The UART is configured as DTE transmissions. To verify that there are no collisions on
(computer) equipment which means RTS is an output the RS-485 lines then the transceiver RE control can
and CTS is an input. be disconnected from TXDE and tied low thereby
The RTS and CTS signals work as a pair to control the enabling loop-back reception of all transmissions. See
transmission flow. A DTE-to-DTE configuration Section 31.14 “Collision Detection” for more
connects the RTS output of the receiving UART to the information.
CTS input of the sending UART. Refer to Figure 31-10.
The UART receiving data asserts the RTS output low FIGURE 31-11: RS-485 CONFIGURATION
when the input FIFO is empty. When a character is
received, the RTS output goes high until the UxRXB is
read to free up both FIFO locations. UART VCC
When the CTS input goes high after a byte has started
to transmit, the transmission will complete normally.
The receiver accommodates this by accepting the RX R 4k7
character in the second FIFO location even when the (1) RE A
CTS input is high. TXDE
DE B
TX D 4k7
SN75176
Gnd
Note 1: Configure UxCTSPPS to an

unimplemented input such as RD0
(UxCTSPPS = 0x18).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.12.3 XON/XOFF FLOW CONTROL
XON/XOFF flow control is selected by setting the
FLO[1:0] bits to ‘01’.
XON/XOFF is a data based flow control method. The
signals to suspend and resume transmission are
special characters sent by the receiver to the
transmitter The advantage is that additional hardware
lines are not needed.
XON/XOFF flow control requires full duplex operation
because the transmitter must be able to receive the
signal to suspend transmitting while the transmission is
in progress. Although XON and XOFF are not defined
in the ASCII code, the generally accepted values are
13h for XOFF and 11h for XON. The UART uses those
codes.
The transmitter defaults to XON, or transmitter
enabled. This state is also indicated by the read-only
XON bit in the UxFIFO register.
When an XOFF character is received, the transmitter
stops transmitting after completing the character
actively being transmitted. The transmitter remains
disabled until an XON character is received.
XON will be forced on when software toggles the TXEN
bit.
When the RUNOVF bit in the UxCON2 register is set
then XON and XOFF characters continue to be
received and processed without the need to clear the
input FIFO by reading the UxRXB. However, if the
RUNOVF bit is clear then the UxRXB must be read to
avoid a receive overflow which will suspend flow
control when the receive buffer overflows.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.13 Checksum (UART1 only) The TXCIF flag in the UxERRIR register is used to
signal collisions. This signal is only useful when the TX
This section does not apply to the LIN mode, which output is looped back to the RX input and everything
handles checksums automatically. that is transmitted is expected to be received. If more
The transmit and receive checksum adders are than one transmitter is active at the same time, it can
enabled when the C0EN bit in the UxCON2 register is be assumed that the TX word will not match the RX
set. When enabled, the adders accumulate every byte word. The TXCIF detects this mismatch and flags an
that is transmitted or received. The accumulated sum interrupt. The TXCIF bit will also be set in DALI mode
includes the carry of the addition. Software is transmissions when the received bit is missing the
responsible for clearing the checksum registers before expected mid-bit transition.
a transaction and performing the check at the end of Collision detection is always active, regardless of
the transaction. whether or not the RX input is connected to the TX
The following is an example of how the checksum output. It is up to the user to disable the TXCIE bit when
registers could be used in the asynchronous modes. collision interrupts are not required.
The software overhead of unloading the receive buffer
31.13.1 TRANSMIT CHECKSUM METHOD of transmitted data is avoided by setting the RUNOVF
1. Clear the UxTXCHK register. bit in UxCON2 and ignoring the receive interrupt and
2. Set the C0EN bit. letting the receive buffer overflow. When the
3. Send all bytes of the transaction output. transmission is complete, prepare for receiving data by
flushing the receive buffer (see Section 31.11.2, FIFO
4. Invert UxTXCHK and send the result as the last
Reset) and clearing the RXFOIF overflow flag in the
byte of the transaction.
UxERRIR register.
31.13.2 RECEIVE CHECKSUM METHOD
31.15 RX/TX Activity Timeout
1. Clear the UxRXCHK register.
2. Set the C0EN bit. The UART works in conjunction with the HLT timers to
3. Receive all bytes in the transaction including the monitor activity on the RX and TX lines. Use this
checksum byte. feature to determine when there has been no activity
on the receive or transmit lines for a user specified
4. Set MSb of UxRXCHK if 7-bit mode is selected.
period of time.
5. Add 1 to UxRXCHK.
To use this feature, set the HLT to the desired timeout
6. If the result is ‘0’, the checksum passes,
period by a combination of the HLT clock source, timer
otherwise it fails.
prescale value, and timer period registers. Configure
the HLT to reset on the UART TX or RX line and start
31.14 Collision Detection the HLT at the same time the UART is started. UART
External forces that interfere with the transmit line are activity will keep resetting the HLT to prevent a full HLT
detected in all modes of operation with collision period from elapsing. When there has been no activity
detection. Collision detection is always active when on the selected TX or RX line for longer than the HLT
RXEN and TXEN are both set. period then an HLT interrupt will occur signaling the
timeout event.
When the receive input is connected to the transmit
output through either the same I/O pin or external For example, the following register settings will
circuitry, a character will be received for every configure HLT2 for a 5 ms timeout of no activity on
character transmitted. The collision detection circuit U1RX:
provides a warning when the word received does not • T2PR = 0x9C (156 prescale periods)
match the word transmitted. • T2CLKCON = 0x05 (500 kHz internal oscillator)
• T2HLT = 0x04 (free running, reset on rising edge)
• T2RST = 0x15 (reset on U1RX)
• T2CON = 0xC0 (Timer2 on with 1:16 prescale)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.16 Clock Accuracy with EXAMPLE 31-1: CALCULATING BAUD
Asynchronous Operation RATE ERROR
The factory calibrates the internal oscillator block For a device with FOSC of 16 MHz, desired baud rate
output (INTOSC). However, the INTOSC frequency of 9600, Asynchronous mode, BRGS = 0:
may drift as VDD or temperature changes, and this
directly affects the asynchronous baud rate. Two
methods may be used to adjust the baud rate clock, but F O SC
Desired Baud Rate = --------------------------------------------
-
both require a reference clock source of some kind. 16  [UxBRG] + 1 
The first (preferred) method uses the OSCTUNE
F OSC
---------------------------------------------
register to adjust the INTOSC output. Adjusting the Desired Baud Rate – 1
value of the OSCTUNE register allows for fine resolution X = ---------------------------------------------
16
changes to the system clock source. See Section
7.2.2.3 “Internal Oscillator Frequency Adjustment” 16000000
for more information. ---------------------------
9600
= --------------------------- – 1
The other method adjusts the value of the Baud Rate 16
Generator. This can be done automatically with the
Auto-Baud Detect feature (see Section =  103.17  = 103
31.17.1 “Auto-Baud Detect”). There may not be fine
enough resolution when adjusting the Baud Rate
16000000
Generator to compensate for a gradual change of the Calculated Baud Rate = -------------------------------
16  103 + 1 
peripheral clock frequency.
= 9615
31.17 UART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)
The Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is a 16-bit timer that Error = Calc. Baud Rate – Desired Baud Rate-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Desired Baud Rate
is dedicated to the support of the UART operation.
The UxBRGH, UxBRGL register pair determines the  9615 – 9600 
period of the free running baud rate timer. The multiplier = ------------------------------------- = 0.16 %
9600
of the baud rate period is determined by the BRGS bit in
the UxCON0 register.
Table 31-1 contains the formulas for determining the
TABLE 31-1: BAUD RATE FORMULAS
baud rate. Example 31-1 provides a sample calculation
for determining the baud rate and baud rate error. BRGS BRG/UART Mode Baud Rate Formula
The high baud rate range (BRGS = 1) is intended to 1 High Rate FOSC/[4 (n+1)]
extend the baud rate range up to a faster rate when the
0 Normal Rate FOSC/[16(n+1)]
desired baud rate is not possible otherwise. Using the
normal baud rate range (BRGS = 0) is recommended Legend: n = value of UxBRGH, UxBRGL register pair.
when the desired baud rate is achievable with either
range.
Writing a new value to the UxBRGH, UxBRGL register
pair causes the BRG timer to be reset (or cleared). This
ensures that the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow
before outputting the new baud rate.
If the system clock is changed during an active receive
operation, a receive error or data loss may result. To
avoid this problem, check the status of the RXIDL bit to
make sure that the receive operation is idle before
changing the system clock.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.17.1 AUTO-BAUD DETECT left in the UxBRGH, UxBRGL register pair, the ABDEN
bit is automatically cleared and the ABDIF interrupt flag
The UART module supports automatic detection and
is set. ABDIF must be cleared by software.
calibration of the baud rate in the 8-bit asynchronous
and LIN modes. However, setting ABDEN to start auto- RXIDL indicates that the sync input is active. RXIDL will
baud detection is neither necessary, nor possible in LIN go low on the first falling edge and go high on the fifth
mode because that mode supports auto-baud detec- rising edge.
tion automatically at the beginning of every data The BRG auto-baud clock is determined by the BRGS
packet. Enabling auto-baud detect with the ABDEN bit bit as shown in Table 31-2. During ABD, the internal
applies to the asynchronous modes only. BRG register is used as a 16-bit counter. However, the
Note: In DALI Mode, ABDEN is ignored. The UxBRGH and UxBRGL registers retain the previous
baud rate needs to be manually set to BRG value until the auto-baud process is successfully
1200 using the BRG registers. completed. While calibrating the baud rate period, the
internal BRG register is clocked at 1/8th the BRG base
When Auto-Baud Detect (ABD) is active, the clock to clock rate. The resulting byte measurement is the
the BRG is reversed. Rather than the BRG clocking the average bit time when clocked at full speed and is
incoming RX signal, the RX signal is timing the BRG. transferred to the UxBRGH and UxBRGL registers
The Baud Rate Generator is used to time the period of when complete.
a received 55h (ASCII “U”), which is the Sync character
for the LIN bus. The unique feature of this character is Note 1: If the WUE bit is set with the ABDEN bit,
that it has five falling edges, including the Start bit edge, auto-baud detection will occur on the byte
five rising edges including the Stop bit edge. following the Break character (see Sec-
tion 31.17.3 “Auto-Wake-up on
In 8-bit Asynchronous mode, setting the ABDEN bit in Break”).
the UxCON0 register enables the auto-baud calibration
sequence. The first falling edge of the RX input after 2: It is up to the user to determine that the
ABDEN is set will start the auto-baud calibration incoming character baud rate is within the
sequence. While the ABD sequence takes place, the range of the selected BRG clock source.
UART state machine is held in idle. On the first falling Some combinations of oscillator frequency
edge of the receive line, the UxBRG begins counting up and UART baud rates are not possible.
using the BRG counter clock as shown in Figure 31-12.
The fifth falling edge will occur on the RX pin at the TABLE 31-2: BRG COUNTER CLOCK RATES
beginning of the bit 7 period. At that time, an BRGS BRG Base Clock BRG ABD Clock
accumulated value totaling the proper BRG period is
1 FOSC/4 FOSC/32
0 FOSC/16 FOSC/128
FIGURE 31-12: AUTOMATIC BAUD RATE CALIBRATION
BRG Value XXXXh 0000h 001Ch
Edge #1 Edge #2 Edge #3 Edge #4 Edge #5

RX pin Start bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 Stop bit
BRG Clock
Set by User Auto Cleared

in 8-bit mode
ABDEN bit
RXIDL
ABDIF bit
(Interrupt)
Cleared by software
UxBRG XXXXh 001Ch
Note 1: Auto-baud is supported in LIN and 8-bit asynchronous modes only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.17.2 AUTO-BAUD OVERFLOW 31.17.3.1 Special Considerations
During the course of automatic baud detection, the Break Character
ABDOVF bit in the UxERRIR register will be set if the To avoid character errors or character fragments during
baud rate counter overflows before the fifth falling edge a wake-up event, the wake-up character must be all
is detected on the RX pin. The ABDOVF bit indicates zeros.
that the counter has exceeded the maximum count that
can fit in the 16 bits of the UxBRGH:UxBRGL register When the wake-up is enabled, the function works
pair. After the ABDOVF bit has been set, the state independent of the low time on the data stream. If the
machine continues to search until the fifth falling edge WUE bit is set and a valid non-zero character is
is detected on the RX pin. Upon detecting the fifth received, the low time from the Start bit to the first rising
falling RX edge, the hardware will set the ABDIF edge will be interpreted as the wake-up event. The
interrupt flag and clear the ABDEN bit in the UxCON0 remaining bits of the character will be received as a
register. The UxBRGH and UxBRGL register values fragmented character and subsequent characters can
retain their previous value. The ABDIF flag in the result in framing or overrun errors.
UxUIR register and ABDOVF flag in the UxERRIR Therefore, the initial character of the transmission must
register can be cleared by software directly. To be all zeros. This must be eleven or more bit times, 13-
generate an interrupt on an auto-baud overflow bit times recommended for LIN bus, or any number of
condition, all the following bits must be set: bit times for standard RS-232 devices.
• ABDOVE bit in the UxERRIE register Oscillator Start-up Time
• UxEIE bit in the PIEx register
Oscillator start-up time must be considered, especially
• PIE and GIE bits in the INTCON register
in applications using oscillators with longer start-up
To terminate the auto-baud process before the ABDIF intervals (i.e., LP, XT or HS/PLL modes). The Sync
flag is set, clear the ABDEN bit, then clear the ABDOVF Break (or wake-up signal) character must be of
bit in the UxERRIR register. sufficient length, and be followed by a sufficient
interval, to allow enough time for the selected oscillator
31.17.3 AUTO-WAKE-UP ON BREAK to start and provide proper initialization of the UART.
During Sleep mode, all clocks to the UART are WUE Bit
suspended. Because of this, the Baud Rate Generator
To ensure that no actual data is lost, check the RXIDL
is inactive and a proper character reception cannot be
bit to verify that a receive operation is not in process
performed. The Auto-Wake-up feature allows the
before setting the WUE bit. If a receive operation is not
controller to wake-up due to activity on the RX line.
occurring, the WUE bit may then be set just prior to
The Auto-Wake-up feature is enabled by setting both the entering the Sleep mode.
WUE bit in the UxCON1 register and the UxIE bit in the
PIEx register. Once set, the normal receive sequence on
RX is disabled, and the UART remains in an Idle state,
monitoring for a wake-up event independent of the CPU
mode. A wake-up event consists of a transition out of the
Idle state on the RX line. (This coincides with the start of
a Break or a wake-up signal character for the LIN
protocol.)
The UART module generates a WUIF interrupt
coincident with the wake-up event. The interrupt is
generated synchronously to the Q clocks in normal CPU
operating modes (Figure 31-13), and asynchronously, if
the device is in Sleep mode (Figure 31-14). The
interrupt condition is cleared by clearing the WUIF bit in
the UxUIR register. To generate an interrupt on a wake-
up event, all the following bits must be set:
• UxIE bit in the PIEx register
• PIE and GIE bits in the INTCON register
The WUE bit is automatically cleared by the transition
to the Idle state on the RX line at the end of the Break.
This signals to the user that the Break event is over. At
this point, the UART module is in Idle mode, waiting to
receive the next character.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 31-13: AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMING DURING NORMAL OPERATION
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
OSC1
Bit set by user Auto Cleared
WUE bit
RX Line
WUIF
Cleared by software
Note 1: The UART remains in idle while the WUE bit is set.
FIGURE 31-14: AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING SLEEP
Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4

OSC1
Bit Set by User Auto Cleared
WUE bit
RX Line Note 1
WUIF
Cleared by software
Sleep Command Executed Sleep Ends
Note 1: If the wake-up event requires long oscillator warm-up time, the automatic clearing of the WUE bit can occur while the stposc signal is
still active. This sequence should not depend on the presence of Q clocks.
2: The UART remains in idle while the WUE bit is set.
31.18 Transmitting a Break 31.19 Receiving a Break

The UART module has the capability of sending either The UART has counters to detect when the RX input
a fixed length Break period or a software timed Break remains in the space state for an extended period of
period. The fixed length Break consists of a Start bit, time. When this happens, the RXBKIF bit in the
followed by 12 ‘0’ bits and a Stop bit. The software UxERRIR register is set.
timed Break is generated by setting and clearing the A Break is detected when the RX input remains in the
BRKOVR bit in the UxCON1 register. space state for 11 bit periods for asynchronous and LIN
To send the fixed length Break, set the SENDB and modes, and 23 bit periods for DMX mode.
TXEN bits in the UxCON0 register. The Break The user can select to receive the Break interrupt as
sequence is then initiated by a write to UxTXB. The soon as the Break is detected or at the end of the
timed Break will occur first, followed by the character Break, when the RX input returns to the Idle state.
written to UxTXB that initiated the Break. The initiating When the RXBIMD bit in the UxCON1 is ‘1’ then
character is typically the Sync character of the LIN RXBKIF is set immediately upon Break detection.
specification. When RXBIMD is ‘0’ then RXBKIF is set when the RX
SENB is disabled in the LIN and DMX modes because input returns to the Idle state.
those modes generate the Break sequence
automatically. 31.20 UART Operation During Sleep
The SENDB bit is automatically reset by hardware after
The UART ceases to operate during Sleep. The safe
the Break Stop bit is complete.
way to wake the device from Sleep by a serial
The TXMTIF bit in the UxERRIR register indicates when operation is to use the Wake-on-Break feature of the
the transmit operation is active or idle, just as it does UART. See Section 31.17.3, Auto-Wake-up on Break
during normal transmission. See Figure 31-15 for the
timing of the Break sequence.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 31-15: SEND BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE
Write to UxTXB
Sync Write
BRG Output
(Shift Clock)
TX (pin) Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 11 Sync start
Stop bit
Break
UxTXIF bit
(Transmit
Interrupt Flag)
TXMTIF bit
(Transmit Shift
Empty Flag)
Auto Cleared
SENDB
(send Break
control bit)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
31.21 Register Definitions: UART Control
Long bit name prefixes for the UART peripherals are
shown below. Refer to Section 1.3 “Register and Bit
naming conventions”for more information.

UART 1 U1
UART 2 U2
REGISTER 31-1: UxCON0: UART CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 R/W/HS/HC-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
BRGS ABDEN TXEN RXEN MODE[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HC = Hardware clear
bit 7 BRGS: Baud rate Generator Speed Select bit

1 = Baud rate generator is high speed with 4 baud clocks per bit
0 = Baud rate generator is normal speed with 16 baud clocks per bit
bit 6 ABDEN: Auto-baud Detect Enable bit(3)
1 = Auto-baud is enabled. Receiver is waiting for Sync character (0x55)
0 = Auto-baud is not enabled or auto-baud is complete
bit 5 TXEN: Transmit Enable Control bit(2)
1 = Transmit is enabled. TX output pin drive is forced on when transmission is active, and controlled by PORT TRIS
control when transmission is idle.
0 = Transmit is disabled. TX output pin drive is controlled by PORT TRIS control
bit 4 RXEN: Receive Enable Control bit(2)
1 = Receiver is enabled
0 = Receiver is disabled
bit 3-0 MODE[3:0]: UART Mode Select bits(1)
1111 = Reserved
1110 = Reserved
1101 = Reserved
1100 = LIN Master/Slave mode(4)
1011 = LIN Slave-Only mode(4)
1010 = DMX mode(4)
1001 = DALI Control Gear mode(4)
1000 = DALI Control Device mode(4)
0111 = Reserved
0110 = Reserved
0101 = Reserved
0100 = Asynchronous 9-bit UART Address mode. 9th bit: 1 = address, 0 = data
0011 = Asynchronous 8-bit UART mode with 9th bit even parity
0010 = Asynchronous 8-bit UART mode with 9th bit odd parity
0001 = Asynchronous 7-bit UART mode
0000 = Asynchronous 8-bit UART mode
Note 1: Changing the UART MODE while ON = 1 may cause unexpected results.
2: Clearing TXEN or RXEN will not clear the corresponding buffers. Use TXBE or RXBE to clear the buffers.
3: When MODE = 100x, then ABDEN bit is ignored.
4: UART1 only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W/HC-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W/HC-0/0
ON — — WUE RXBIMD — BRKOVR SENDB
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HC = Hardware clear
bit 7 ON: Serial Port Enable bit

1 = Serial port enabled
0 = Serial port disabled (held in Reset)
bit 4 WUE: Wake-up Enable bit
1 = Receiver is waiting for falling RX input edge which will set the UxIF bit. Cleared by hardware on
wake event. Also requires UxIE bit of PIEx to enable wake
0 = Receiver operates normally
bit 3 RXBIMD: Receive Break Interrupt Mode Select bit
1 = Set RXBKIF immediately when RX in has been low for the minimum Break time
0 = Set RXBKIF on rising RX input after RX in has been low for the minimum Break time
bit 1 BRKOVR: Send Break Software Override bit
1 = TX output is forced to non-idle state
0 = TX output is driven by transmit shift register
bit 0 SENDB: Send Break Control bit(1)
1 = Output Break upon UxTXB write. Written byte follows Break. Bit is cleared by hardware.
0 = Break transmission completed or disabled
Note 1: This bit is read-only in LIN, DMX, and DALI modes.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

RUNOVF RXPOL STP[1:0] C0EN TXPOL FLO[1:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 RUNOVF: Run During Overflow Control bit

1 = RX input shifter continues to synchronize with Start bits after overflow condition
0 = RX input shifter stops all activity on receiver overflow condition
bit 6 RXPOL: Receive Polarity Control bit
1 = Invert RX polarity, Idle state is low
0 = RX polarity is not inverted, Idle state is high
bit 5-4 STP[1:0]: Stop Bit Mode Control bits(1)
11 = Transmit 2 Stop bits, receiver verifies first Stop bit
10 = Transmit 2 Stop bits, receiver verifies first and second Stop bits
01 = Transmit 1.5 Stop bits, receiver verifies first Stop bit
00 = Transmit 1 Stop bit, receiver verifies first Stop bit
bit 3 C0EN: Checksum Mode Select bit(2)
LIN mode:
1 = Checksum Mode 1, enhanced LIN checksum includes PID in sum
0 = Checksum Mode 0, legacy LIN checksum does not include PID in sum
Other modes:
1 = Add all TX and RX characters
0 = Checksums disabled
bit 2 TXPOL: Transmit Polarity Control bit
1 = Output data is inverted, TX output is low in Idle state
0 = Output data is not inverted, TX output is high in Idle state
bit 1-0 FLO[1:0]: Handshake Flow Control bits
11 = Reserved
10 = RTS/CTS and TXDE Hardware flow control
01 = XON/XOFF Software flow control
00 = Flow control is off
Note 1: All modes transmit selected number of Stop bits. Only DMX and DALI receivers verify selected number of
Stop bits and all others verify only the first Stop bit.
2: UART1 only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 31-4: UxERRIR: UART ERROR INTERRUPT FLAG REGISTER

R/S/C-1/1 R/S/C-0/0 R/W/S-0/0 R/W/S-0/0 R/S/C-0/0 R/W/S-0/0 R/W/S-0/0 R/W/S-0/0
TXMTIF PERIF ABDOVF CERIF FERIF RXBKIF RXFOIF TXCIF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared S = Hardware set C = Hardware clear
bit 7 TXMTIF: Transmit Shift Register Empty Interrupt Flag bit

1 = Transmit shift register is empty (Set at end of Stop bits)
0 = Transmit shift register is actively shifting data
bit 6 PERIF: Parity Error Interrupt Flag bit
LIN and Parity modes:
1 = Unread byte at top of input FIFO has parity error
0 = Unread byte at top of input FIFO does not have parity error
DALI Device mode:
1 = Unread byte at top of input FIFO received as Forward Frame
0 = Unread byte at top of input FIFO received as Back Frame
Address mode:
1 = Unread byte at top of input FIFO received as address
0 = Unread byte at top of input FIFO received as data
Other modes:
Not used
bit 5 ABDOVF: Auto-baud Detect Overflow Interrupt Flag bit
DALI mode:
1 = Start bit measurement overflowed counter
0 = No overflow during Start bit measurement
Other modes:
1 = Baud rate generator overflowed during the auto detection sequence
0 = Baud rate generator has not overflowed
bit 4 CERIF: Checksum Error/DALI STP bit Interrupt Flag bit
DALI modes:
1 = Stop bit detected
0 = Stop bit not detected
LIN Mode:
1 = Checksum error
0 = No Checksum error
bit 3 FERIF: Framing Error Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Unread byte at top of input FIFO has framing error
0 = Unread byte at top of input FIFO does not have framing error
bit 2 RXBKIF: Break Reception Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Break detected
0 = No Break detected
bit 1 RXFOIF: Receive FIFO Overflow Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Receive FIFO has overflowed
0 = Receive FIFO has not overflowed
bit 0 TXCIF: Transmit Collision Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Transmitted word is not equal to the word received during transmission
0 = Transmitted word equals the word received during transmission

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 31-5: UxERRIE: UART ERROR INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER

TXMTIE PERIE ABDOVE CERIE FERIE RXBKIE RXFOIE TXCIE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 TXMTIE: Transmit Shift Register Empty Interrupt Enable bit

1 = Interrupt enabled
0 = Interrupt not enabled
bit 6 PERIE: Parity Error Interrupt Enable bit
bit 5 ABDOVE: Auto-baud Detect Overflow Interrupt Enable bit
bit 4 CERIE: Checksum Error/DALI STP bit Interrupt Enable bit
bit 3 FERIE: Framing Error Interrupt Enable bit
bit 2 RXBKIE: Break Reception Interrupt Enable bit
bit 1 RXFOIE: Receive FIFO Overflow Interrupt Enable bit
bit 0 TXCIE: Transmit Collision Interrupt Enable bit

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 31-6: UxUIR: UART GENERAL INTERRUPT REGISTER

R/S/W-0/0 R/S/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0
WUIF ABDIF — — — ABDIE — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared S = Hardware set
bit 7 WUIF: Wake-up Interrupt bit

1 = Idle to non-idle transition on RX line detected when WUE is set. Also sets UxIF. (WUIF must be
cleared by software to clear UxIF)
0 = WUE not enabled by software or no transition detected
bit 6 ABDIF: Auto-baud detect interrupt bit
1 = Auto-baud detection complete. Status shown in UxIF when ABDIE is set. (Must be cleared by
software)
0 = Auto-baud not enabled or auto-baud enabled and auto-baud detection not complete
bit 2 ABDIE: Auto-baud Detect Interrupt Enable bit
1 = ABDIF will set UxIF bit in PIRx register
0 = ABDIF will not set UxIF

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 31-7: UxFIFO: UART FIFO STATUS REGISTER

R/W/S-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W/S/C-1/1 R/S/C-0/0 R/S/C-1/1 S/C-1/1 R/W/S/C-1/1 R/S/C-0/0
TXWRE STPMD TXBE TXBF RXIDL XON RXBE RXBF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared S = Hardware set C = Hardware clear
bit 7 TXWRE: Transmit Write Error Status bit (Must be cleared by software)
LIN Master mode:
1 = UxP1L was written when a master process was active
LIN Slave mode:
1 = UxTXB was written when UxP2 = 0 or more than UxP2 bytes have been written to UxTXB since
last Break
Address Detect mode:
1 = UxP1L was written before the previous data in UxP1L was transferred to TX shifter
All modes:
1 = A new byte was written to UxTXB when the output FIFO was full
0 = No error
bit 6 STPMD: Stop Bit Detection Mode bit
1 = Assert UxRXIF at end of last Stop bit or end of first Stop bit when STP = 11
0 = Assert UxRXIF in middle of first Stop bit
bit 5 TXBE: Transmit Buffer Empty Status bit
1 = Transmit buffer is empty. Setting this bit will clear the transmit buffer and output shift register.
0 = Transmit buffer is not empty. Software cannot clear this bit.
bit 4 TXBF: Transmit Buffer Full Status bit
1 = Transmit buffer is full
0 = Transmit buffer is not full
bit 3 RXIDL: Receive Pin Idle Status bit
1 = Receive pin is in Idle state
0 = UART is receiving Start, Stop, Data, Auto-baud, or Break
bit 2 XON: Software Flow Control Transmit Enable Status bit
1 = Transmitter is enabled
0 = Transmitter is disabled
bit 1 RXBE: Receive Buffer Empty Status bit
1 = Receive buffer is empty. Setting this bit will clear the RX buffer(1)
0 = Receive buffer is not empty. Software cannot clear this bit.
bit 0 RXBF: Receive Buffer Full Status bit
1 = Receive buffer is full
0 = Receive buffer is not full
Note 1: The BSF instruction should not be used to set RXBE because doing so will clear a byte pending in the
transmit shift register when the UxTXB register is empty. Instead, use the MOVWF instruction with a ‘0’ in
the TXBE bit location.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 31-8: UxBRGL: UART BAUD RATE GENERATOR LOW REGISTER

BRG[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 BRG[7:0]: Least Significant Byte of Baud Rate Generator
REGISTER 31-9: UxBRGH: UART BAUD RATE GENERATOR HIGH REGISTER

BRG[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 BRG[15:8]: Most Significant Byte of Baud Rate Generator

Note 1: The UxBRG registers should only be written when ON = 0.
2: Maximum BRG value when MODE = ‘100x’ and BRGS = 1 is 0x7FFE.
3: Maximum BRG value when MODE = ‘100x’ and BRGS = 0 is 0x1FFE.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 31-10: UxRXB: UART RECEIVE REGISTER

R-x/u R-x/u R-x/u R-x/u R-x/u R-x/u R-x/u R-x/u
RXB[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 RXB[7:0]: Top of Receive Buffer
REGISTER 31-11: UxTXB: UART TRANSMIT REGISTER

TXB[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TXB[7:0]: Bottom of Transmit Buffer

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 31-12: UxP1H: UART PARAMETER 1 HIGH REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — — P1[8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 0 P1[8]: Most Significant Bit of Parameter 1
DMX mode:
Most Significant bit of number of bytes to transmit between Start Code and automatic Break generation
DALI Control Device mode:
Most Significant bit of idle time delay after which a Forward Frame is sent. Measured in half-bit periods
DALI Control Gear mode:
Most Significant bit of delay between the end of a Forward Frame and the start of the Back Frame
Measured in half-bit periods
Other modes:
Not used
REGISTER 31-13: UxP1L: UART PARAMETER 1 LOW REGISTER

P1[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 P1[7:0]: Least Significant Bits of Parameter 1

DMX mode:
Least Significant Byte of number of bytes to transmit between Start Code and automatic Break
generation
DALI Control Device mode:
Least Significant Byte of idle time delay after which a Forward Frame is sent. Measured in half-bit periods
DALI Control Gear mode:
Least Significant Byte of delay between the end of a Forward Frame and the start of the Back Frame
Measured in half-bit periods
LIN mode:
PID to transmit (Only Least Significant 6 bits used)
Asynchronous Address mode:
Address to transmit (9th transmit bit automatically set to ‘1’)
Other modes:
Not used

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — — P2[8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

DMX mode:
Most Significant bit of first address of receive block
DALI mode:
Most Significant bit of number of half-bit periods of idle time in Forward Frame detection threshold
Other modes:
Not used

P2[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

DMX mode:
Least Significant Byte of first address of receive block
LIN Slave mode:
Number of data bytes to transmit
DALI mode:
Least Significant Byte of number of half-bit periods of idle time in Forward Frame detection threshold
Receiver address
Other modes:
Not used

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — — P3[8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

DMX mode:
Most Significant bit of last address of receive block
Other modes:
Not used

P3[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

DMX mode:
Least Significant Byte of last address of receive block
LIN Slave mode:
Number of data bytes to receive
Receiver address mask. Received address is XOR’d with UxP2L then AND’d with UxP3L
Match occurs when result is zero
Other modes:
Not used

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 31-18: UxTXCHK: UART TRANSMIT CHECKSUM RESULT REGISTER

TXCHK[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TXCHK[7:0]: Checksum calculated from TX bytes

LIN mode and C0EN = 1:
Sum of all transmitted bytes including PID
Sum of all transmitted bytes except PID
All other modes and C0EN = 1:
Sum of all transmitted bytes since last clear
Not used
REGISTER 31-19: UxRXCHK: UART RECEIVE CHECKSUM RESULT REGISTER

RXCHK[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 RXCHK[7:0]: Checksum calculated from RX bytes

Sum of all received bytes including PID
Sum of all received bytes except PID
Sum of all received bytes since last clear
Not used

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 31-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE UART

Register
on page
UxCON0 BRGS ABDEN TXEN RXEN MODE[3:0] 499
UxCON1 ON — — WUE RXBIMD — BRKOVR SENDB 500
UxCON2 RUNOVF RXPOL STP[1:0] C0EN TXPOL FLO[1:0] 501
UxERRIR TXMTIF PERIF ABDOVF CERIF FERIF RXBKIF RXFOIF TXCIF 502
UxERRIE TXMTIE PERIE ABDOVE CERIE FERIE; RXBKIE RXFOIE TXCIE 503
UxUIR WUIF ABDIF — — — ABDIE — — 504
UxFIFO TXWRE STPMD TXBE TXBF RXIDL XON RXBE RXBF 505
UxBRGL BRG[7:0] 506
UxBRGH BRG[15:8] 506
UxRXB RXB[7:0] 507
UxTXB TXB[7:0] 507
UxP1H — — — — — — — P1[8] 508
UxP1L P1[7:0] 508
UxP2H — — — — — — — P2[8] 509
UxP2L P2[7:0] 509
UxP3H — — — — — — — P3[8] 510
UxP3L P3[7:0] 510
UxTXCHK TXCHK[7:0] 511
UxRXCHK RXCHK[7:0] 511
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the UART module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.0 SERIAL PERIPHERAL
INTERFACE (SPI) MODULE
32.1 SPI Module Overview

The SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) module is a
synchronous serial data communication bus that
operates in Full-Duplex mode. Devices communicate
in a master/slave environment where the master device
initiates the communication. A slave device is
controlled through a Chip Select known as Slave
Select. Example slave devices include serial
EEPROMs, shift registers, display drivers, A/D
converters, or another PIC® device.
The SPI bus specifies four signal connections:
• Serial Clock (SCK)
• Serial Data Out (SDO)
• Serial Data IN (SDI)
• Slave Select (SS)
The SPI interface supports the following modes and
features:
• Master mode
• Slave mode
• Clock Polarity and Edge Select
• SDI, SDO, and SS Polarity Control
• Separate Transmit and Receive Enables
• Slave Select Synchronization
• Daisy-chain connection of slave devices
• Separate Transmit and Receive Buffers with
2-byte FIFO and DMA capabilities
Figure 32-1 shows the block diagram of the SPI
module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 32-1: SPI MODULE SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM
Data bus Rev. 10-000076B

7/18/2018
Read Write
8 8
Receive FIFO Transmit FIFO

(2 deep) (2 deep)
8 8
SDI SPIxSDIPPS Receive Shift Transmit

RxyPPS SDO
Register Serializer(1)
SDIP
SDOP
1
RXR TXR
1
SS(in) SPIxSSPPS
0 RxyPPS
SSP SCK(out)
CKP
SSET SPI Control Module
and Transfer Counter
See
SPIxCLK
Register SCK Generator 1
0
1
SPIxBAUD
1
MST
0 RxyPPS
SS(out)
CLKSEL<3:0>
SSP
SCK(in) SPIxSCKPPS
SSET
CKP
Note 1: If TXR=1 and the transmit FIFO is empty, the previous value of the
receive shift register will be sent to the transmit serializer.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
The SPI transmit output (SDO_out) is available to the • Master sends useful data and slave sends useful
remappable PPS SDO pin and internally to the data
following peripherals: • Master sends dummy data and slave sends useful
• Configurable Logic Cell (CLC) data
• Data Signal Modulator (DSM) In this particular SPI module, dummy data may be sent
The SPI bus typically operates with a single master without software involvement, by clearing either the
device and one or more slave devices. When multiple RXR bit (for receiving dummy data) or the TXR bit (for
slave devices are used, an independent Slave Select sending dummy data) (see Table 32-1 as well as
connection is required from the master device to each Section 32.5 “Master mode” and Section 32.6
slave device. “Slave Mode” for further TXR/RXR setting details).
This SPI module can send transmissions of any
The master selects only one slave at a time. Most slave number of bits, and can send information in segments
devices have tri-state outputs so their output signal of varying size (from 1-8 bits in width). As such,
appears disconnected from the bus when they are not transmissions may involve any number of clock cycles,
selected. depending on the amount of data to be transmitted.
Transmissions typically involve shift registers, eight bits When there is no more data to be transmitted, the
in size, one in the master and one in the slave. With master stops sending the clock signal and deselects
either the master or the slave device, data is always the slave.
shifted out one bit at a time, with the Most Significant bit
(MSb) shifted out first. At the same time, a new bit is Every slave device connected to the bus that has not
shifted into the device. Unlike older Microchip devices, been selected through its slave select line disregards
the SPI on the this device contains two separate regis- the clock and transmission signals and does not
ters for incoming and outgoing data. Both registers also transmit out any data of its own.
have 2-byte FIFO buffers and allow for DMA bus con-
nections.
Figure 32-2 shows a typical connection between two
devices configured as master and slave devices.
Data is shifted out of the transmit FIFO on the
programmed clock edge and into the receive shift
register on the opposite edge of the clock.
The master device transmits information on its SDO
output pin which is connected to, and received by, the
slave’s SDI input pin. The slave device transmits
information on its SDO output pin, which is connected
to, and received by, the master’s SDI input pin.
The master device sends out the clock signal. Both the
master and the slave devices should be configured for
the same clock polarity.
During each SPI clock cycle, a full-duplex data
transmission occurs. This means that while the master
device is sending out the MSb from its output register
(on its SDO pin) and the slave device is reading this bit
and saving as the LSb of its input register, that the slave
device is also sending out the MSb from its shift register
(on its SDO pin) and the master device is reading this
bit and saving it as the LSb of its input register.
After eight bits have been shifted out, the master and
slave have exchanged register values and stored the
incoming data into the receiver FIFOs.
If there is more data to exchange, the registers are
loaded with new data and the process repeats itself.
Whether the data is meaningful or not (dummy data)
depends on the application software. This leads to
three scenarios for data transmission:
• Master sends useful data and slave sends dummy
data

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 32-2: SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION WITH FIFOs
Rev. 10-000080C
7/18/2018
SPI Master MST=1 SPI Slave MST=0
Receive FIFO
Transmit FIFO (SPIxRXB)
(SPIxTXB) SDOx SDIx
Receive Shift
Register
LSb MSb LSb MSb
(Note 1) (Note 1)
Receive FIFO
(SPIxRXB) Transmit FIFO
SDIx SDOx (SPIxTXB)
Receive Shift
Register Serial clock
SCKx SCKx
MSb LSb MSb LSb
Slave Select
SSxOUT/ SSxIN
Device 1 GPIO (optional) Device 2
Note 1: In some modes, if the Transmit FIFO is empty, the most recently
received byte of data will be transmitted
2: This diagram assumes that the LSBF bit is cleared (communications are
MSb-first). If LSBF is set, the communications will be LSb-first.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.2 SPI REGISTERS and enable for the SPI Transmit Interrupt, as well as the
SPIxRXIF/SPIxRXIE bits, which are the interrupt flag
• SPI Interrupt Flag Register (SPIxINTF) and enable for the SPI Receive Interrupt.
• SPI Interrupt Enable Register (SPIxINTE)
• SPI Byte Count High and Low Registers
(SPIxTCNTH/L)
• SPI Bit Count Register (SPIxTWIDTH)
• SPI Baud Rate Register (SPIxBAUD)
• SPI Control Register 0 (SPIxCON0)
• SPI FIFO Status Register (SPIxSTATUS)
• SPI Receiver Buffer Register (SPIxRXB)
• SPI Transmit Buffer Register (SPIxTXB)
• SPI Clock Select Register (SPIxCLK)
SPIxCON0, SPIxCON1, and SPIxCON2 are control
registers for the SPI module.
SPIxSTATUS contains several Status bits that indicate
the status of both the SPI module and the receive and
transmit FIFOs.
SPIxBAUD and SPIxCLK control the baud rate gener-
ator of the SPI module when in Master mode. The
SPIxCLK selects the clock source that is used. The
SPIxBAUD configures the clock divider used on that
clock. More information on the baud rate generator is
available in Section 32.5.6 “Master Mode SPI Clock
Configuration”.”
SPIxTxB and SPIxRxB are the transmit and receive
buffer registers used to send and receive data on the
SPI bus. They both offer indirect access to shift
registers that are used for shifting the data in and out.
Both registers access the two-byte FIFOs, allowing for
multiple transmissions/receptions to be stored between
software transfers the data.
The SPIxTCNTH:L register pair either count or control
the number of bits or bytes in a data transfer. When
BMODE = 1, the SPIxTCNT value signifies bytes and
the SPIxTWIDTH value signifies the number of bits in a
byte. When BMODE = 0, the SPIxTCNT value is
concatenated with the SPIxTWIDTH register to signify
bits. In Master Receive-only mode (TXR = 0 and
RXR = 1), the data transfer is initiated by writing
SPIxTCNT with the desired bit or byte value to transfer.
In Master Transmit mode (TXR = 1), the data transfer
is initiated by writing the SPIxTxB register, in which
case the SPIxTCNT is a down counter for the bits or
bytes transferred.
The SPIxINTF and SPIxINTE are the flags and
enables, respectively, for SPI-specific interrupts. They
are tied to the SPIxIF flag and SPIxIE enable in the PIR
and PIE registers, which is triggered when any interrupt
contained in the SPIxINTF/SPIxINTE registers is
triggered. The PIR/PIE registers also contain
SPIxTXIF/SPIxTXIE bits, which are the interrupt flag

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.3 SPI MODE OPERATION 32.3.2 BUSY BIT
When initializing the SPI, several options need to be While a data transfer is in progress, the SPI module
specified. This is done by programming the appropriate sets the BUSY bit of SPIxCON2. This bit can be polled
control bits (SPIxCON0[2:0], SPIxCON1[7:4], by the user to determine the current status of the SPI
SPIxCON1[2:0], and SPIxCON2[2:0]). These control module, and to know when a communication is
bits allow the following to be specified: complete. The following registers/bits should not be
written by software while the BUSY bit is set:
• Master mode (SCK is the clock output)
• SPIxTCNTH/L
• Slave mode (SCK is the clock input)
• SPIxTWIDTH
• Clock Polarity (Idle state of SCK)
• SPIxCON2
• Input, Output, and Slave Select Polarity
• The CLRBF bit of SPIxSTATUS
• Data Input Sample Phase (middle or end of data
output time) Note 1: The BUSY bit is subject to synchronization
• Clock Edge (output data on first/second edge of delay of up to two instruction cycles. The
SCK) user must wait for it to set after loading the
transmit buffer (SPIxTXB register) before
• Clock Rate (Master mode only)
using it to determine the status of the SPI
• Slave Select Mode (Master or Slave mode) module.
• MSB-First or LSB-First
2: It is also not recommended to read
• Receive/Transmit Modes SPIxTCNTH/L while the BUSY bit is set,
- Full duplex as the value in the registers may not be a
- Receive-without-transmit reliable indicator of the Transfer Counter.
- Transmit-without-receive Use the Transfer Count Zero Interrupt
• Transfer Counter Mode (Transmit-without-receive Flag (the TCZIF bit of SPIxINTF) to
mode) accurately determine that the Transfer
Counter has reached zero.
32.3.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
SPI MODULE
To enable the serial peripheral, the SPI enable bit (EN
in SPIxCON0) must be set. To reset or reconfigure SPI
mode, clear the EN bit, re-initialize the SPIxCONx
registers and then set the EN bit. Setting the EN bit
enables the SPI inputs and outputs: SDI, SDO,
SCK(out), SCK(in), SS(out), and SS(in). All of these
inputs and outputs are steered by PPS, and thus must
have their functions properly mapped to device pins to
function (see Section 17.0 “Peripheral Pin Select
(PPS) Module”). In addition, SS(out) and SCK(out)
must have the pins they are steered to set as outputs
(TRIS bits must be ‘0’) in order to properly output.
Clearing the TRIS bit of the SDO pin will cause the SPI
module to always control that pin, but is not necessary
for SDO functionality. (see Section 32.3.5 “Input and
Output Polarity Bits”). Configurations selected by the
following registers should not be changed while the EN
bit is set:
• SPIxBAUD
• SPIxCON1
• SPIxCON0 (except to clear the EN bit)
Clearing the EN bit aborts any transmissions in
progress, disables the setting of interrupt flags by
hardware, and resets the FIFO occupancy (see
Section 32.3.3 “Transmit and Receive FIFOs” for
more FIFO details).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.3.3 TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE FIFOS 32.3.5 INPUT AND OUTPUT POLARITY
The transmission and reception of data from the SPI BITS
module is handled by two FIFOs, one for reception and SPIxCON1 has three bits that control the polarity of the
one for transmission (addressed by the SFRs SPIxRXB SPI inputs and outputs. The SDIP bit controls the
and SPIxTXB, respectively.). The TXFIFO is written by polarity of the SDI input, the SDOP bit controls the
software and is read by the SPI module to shift the data polarity of the SDO output, and the SSP bit controls the
onto the SDO pin. The RXFIFO is written by the SPI polarity of both the slave SS input and the master SS
module as it shifts in the data from the SDI pin and is output. For all three bits, when the bit is clear, the input
read by software. Setting the CLRBF bit of or output is active-high, and when the bit is set, the
SPIxSTATUS resets the occupancy for both FIFOs, input or output is active-low. When the EN bit of
emptying both buffers. The FIFOs are also reset by dis- SPIxCON0 is cleared, SS(out) and SCK(out) both
abling the SPI module. revert to the inactive state dictated by their polarity bits.
The SDO output state when the EN bit of SPIxCON0 is
Note: TXFIFO occupancy and RXFIFO
cleared is determined by several factors.
occupancy simply refer to the number of
bytes that are currently being stored in • When the associated TRIS bit for the SDO pin is
each FIFO. These values are used in this cleared, and the SPI goes idle after a transmis-
chapter to illustrate the function of these sion, the SDO output will remain at the last bit
FIFOs and are not directly accessible level. The SDO pin will revert to the Idle state if
through software. EN is cleared.
• When the associated TRIS bit for the SDO pin is
The SPIxRXB register addresses the receive FIFO and
set, behavior varies in Slave and Master mode.
is read-only. Reading from this register will read from
the first FIFO location that was written to by hardware - In Slave mode, the SDO pin tri-states when:
and decrease the RXFIFO occupancy. If the FIFO is - Slave Select is inactive,
empty, reading from this register will instead return a - the EN bit of SPIxCON0 is cleared, or when
value of zero and set the RXRE (Receive Buffer Read - the TXR bit of SPIxCON2 is cleared.
Error) bit of the SPIxSTATUS register. The RXRE bit
- In Master mode, the SDO pin tri-states when
must then be cleared in software in order to properly
TXR = 0. When TXR = 1 and the SPI goes
reflect the status of the read error. When RXFIFO is full,
idle after a transmission, the SDO output will
the RXBF bit of the SPIxSTATUS register will be set.
remain at the last bit level. The SDO pin will
When the device receives data on the SDI pin, the
revert to the Idle state if EN is cleared.
receive FIFO may be written to by hardware and the
occupancy increased, depending on the mode and
receiver settings, as summarized in Table 32-1.
The SPIxTXB register addresses the transmit FIFO
and is write-only. Writing to the register will write to the
first empty FIFO location and increase the occupancy.
If the FIFO is full, writing to this register will not affect
the data and will set the TXWE bit of the SPIxSTATUS
register. When the TXFIFO is empty, the TXBE bit of
SPIxSTATUS will be set. When a data transfer occurs,
data may be read from the first FIFO location written to
and the occupancy decreases, depending on mode
and transmitter settings, as summarized in Table 32-1
and Section 32.6.1 “Slave Mode Transmit options”.
32.3.4 LSB VS. MSB-FIRST OPERATION

Typically, SPI communication is output Most-Significant
bit first, but some devices/buses may not conform to
this standard. In this case, the LSBF bit may be used to
alter the order in which bits are shifted out during the
data exchange. In both Master and Slave mode, the
LSBF bit of SPIxCON0 controls if data is shifted MSb or
LSb first. Clearing the bit (default) configures the data
to transfer MSb first, which is traditional SPI operation,
while setting the bit configures the data to transfer LSb
first.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.4 Transfer Counter SPIxTCNTL value is written. Transfer clocks are
suspended when the receive FIFO is full and resume
In all master modes, the transfer counter can be used as the FIFO is read.
to determine how many data transfers the SPI will
send/receive. The transfer counter is comprised of the 32.4.2 VARIABLE TRANSFER SIZE MODE
SPIxTCNTH/L set of registers, and is also partially (BMODE = 1)
controlled by the SPIxTWIDTH register. The Transfer
Counter has two primary modes, determined by the In this mode, SPIxTWIDTH specifies the width of every
BMODE bit of the SPIxCON0 register. Each mode uses individual piece of the data transfer in bits.
the SPIxTCNTH/L and SPIxTWIDTH registers to SPIxTCNTH/SPIxTCNTL specifies the number of
determine the number and size of the transfers. In both transfers of this bit length. If SPIxTWIDTH = 0, each
modes, when the transfer counter reaches zero, the piece is a full byte of data. If SPIxTWIDTH ≠ 0, then
TCZIF interrupt flag is set. only the specified number of bits from the transmit
FIFO are shifted out, with the unused bits ignored.
Note: When BMODE=1 in all master modes Received data is padded with zeros in the unused bit
(and at all times in slave modes), the areas when transfered into the receive FIFO. The
Transfer Counter will still decrement as LSBF bit of SPIxCON0 determines whether the Most
transfers occur and can be used to count Significant or Least Significant bits of the transfers are
the number of messages sent/received, ignored/padded. In this mode, the transfer counter
as well as to control SS(out) and to trigger being zero only stops messages from being sent/
TCZIF. Also when BMODE = 1, the received when in “Receive only” mode.
SPIxTWIDTH register can be used in
Master and Slave modes to determine the Note: With BMODE = 1, it is possible for the
size of messages sent and received by transfer counter (SPIxTCNTH/L) to decre-
the SPI, even if the Transfer Counter is not ment below zero, although when in
being actively used to control the number “Receive only” Master mode, transfer
of messages being sent/received by the clocks will cease when the transfer
SPI module. counter reaches zero.
32.4.1 TOTAL BIT COUNT MODE

(BMODE = 0)
In this mode, SPIxTCNTH/L and SPIxTWIDTH are
concatenated to determine the total number of bits to
be transferred. These bits will be loaded from/into the
transmit/receive FIFOs in 8-bit increments and the
transfer counter will be decremented by eight until the
total number of remaining bits is less than eight. If there
are any remaining bits (SPIxTWIDTH ≠ 0), the transmit
FIFO will send out one final message with any extra bits
greater than the remainder ignored. The SPIxTWIDTH
is the remaining bit count but the value does not
change as it does for the SPIxTCNT value. Similarly,
the receiver will load a final byte into the receiver FIFO,
and pad the extra bits with zeros. The LSBF bit of
SPIxCON0 determines whether the Most Significant or
Least Significant bits of this final byte are ignored/
padded. For example, when LSBF = 0 and the final
transfer contains only two bits then if the last byte sent
was 5Fh then the RXB of the receiver will contain 40h
which are the two MSbits of the final byte padded with
zeros in the LSbits.
In this mode, the SPI master will only transmit
messages when the SPIxTCNT value is greater than
zero, regardless of TXR and RXR settings. In Master
Transmit mode, the transfer starts with the data write to
the SPIxTXB register or the count value written to the
SPIxTCNTL register, which ever occurs last. In Master
Receive-only mode, the transfer clocks start when the

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.4.3 TRANSFER COUNTER IN SLAVE 32.5 Master mode
MODE
In master mode, the device controls the SCK line, and
In Slave Mode, the transfer counter will still decrement as such, initiates data transfers and determines when
as data is shifted in and out of the SPI module, but it will any slaves broadcast data onto the SPI bus.
not control data transfers. In addition, in slave mode,
Master mode of this device can be configured in four
the BMODE bit along with the transfer counter is used
different modes, configured by the TXR and RXR bits:
to determine when the device should look for Slave
Select faults. If BMODE = 0, the SSFLT bit will be set if • Full Duplex mode
Slave Select transitions from its active to inactive state • Receive Only mode
during bytes of data, as well as if it transitions before • Transmit Only mode
the last bit sent during the final byte (if
• Transfer Off mode
SPIxTWIDTH ≠ 0). If BMODE = 1, the SSFLT bit will be
set if Slave Select transitions from its active to inactive The modes are illustrated in Table 32-1, below:
state before the final bit of each individual transfer is
completed. Note that SSFLT does not have an associ-
ated interrupt, so it should be checked in software. An
ideal time to do this is when the End of Slave Select
Interrupt (EOSIF) is triggered (see Section 32.8.3.3
“Start of Slave Select and End of Slave Select Inter-
rupts”).
TABLE 32-1: MASTER MODE TXR/RXR SETTINGS
TXR = 1 TXR = 0
Full Duplex Mode
Receive Only mode
If BMODE = 1, transfer when RxFIFO is not full and
Transfer when RxFIFO is not full and the
TxFIFO is not empty
RXR = 1 Transfer Counter is non-zero
If BMODE = 0, Transfer when RXFIFO is not full,
Transmitted data is either the top of the FIFO
TXFIFO is not empty, and the Transfer Counter is non-
or the most recently received data
zero
Transmit Only Mode
If BMODE = 1, transfer when TxFIFO is not empty
RXR = 0 If BMODE = 0, Transfer when TXFIFO is not empty and No Transfers
the Transfer Counter is non-zero
Received data is not stored

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.5.1 FULL DUPLEX MODE
When both TXR and RXR are set, the SPI master is in
Full Duplex mode. In this mode, data transfer triggering
is affected by the BMODE bit of SPIxCON0.
When BMODE = 1, data transfers will occur whenever
both the RXFIFO is not full and there is data present in
the TXFIFO. In practice, as long as the RXFIFO is not
full, data will be transmitted/received as soon as the
SPIxTxB register is written to, matching functionality of
SPI (MSSP) modules on older 8-bit Microchip devices.
The SPIxTCNT will decrement with each transfer.
However, when SPIxTCNT is zero the next transfer is
not inhibited and the corresponding SPIxTCNT
decrement will cause the count to roll over to the
maximum value. Figure 32-3 shows an example of a
communication using this mode.
When BMODE = 0, the transfer counter (SPIxTCNTH/
SPIxTCNTL) must also be written to before transfers
will occur, and transfers will cease when the transfer
counter reaches ‘0’. For example, if SPIxTXB is written
twice and then SPIxTCNTL is written with ‘3’ then the
transfer will start with the SPIxTCNTL write. The two
bytes in the TXFIFO will be sent after which the transfer
will suspend until the third and last byte is written to
SPIxTXB.
FIGURE 32-3: SPI MASTER OPERATION – DATA EXCHANGE, TXR/RXR = 1/1

Rev. 10-000281A
9/22/2016
Software Write to
Note 2
SPIxTCNT
SPIxTCNT 0 5 4 3 2 1 0
Software Write To
TXR
TXR
Software Write to
RXR
RXR
SCK_out Note 3
SDO_out `HX `HX
SRMTIF
TCZIF Note 2
Software Write
to SPIxTXB
TXFIFO 0 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 0 1 0
Occupancy
SPIxTIF
Software Read
from SPIxRXB
RXFIFO 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Occupancy
SPIxRIF
Note: 1. SS(out) is not shown on this diagram

2. SPIxTCNT write is optional TXR/RXR = 1/1 and BMODE=1. If BMODE=0, a write to SPIxTCNT is required to start
transmission; TCZIF signals the end of the transmission.
3. Transmission gap occurs while waiting for transmitter data.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.5.2 TRANSMIT ONLY MODE
When TXR is set and RXR is clear, the SPI master is in
Transmit Only mode. In this mode, data transfer
triggering is affected by the BMODE bit of SPIxCON0.
When BMODE = 1, data transfers will occur whenever
TXFIFO is not empty. Data will be transmitted as soon
as the TXFIFO register is written to, matching
functionality of SPI (MSSP) modules on previous 8-bit
Microchip devices. The SPIxTCNT will decrement with
each transfer. However, when SPIxTCNT is zero the
next transfer is not inhibited and the corresponding
SPIxTCNT decrement will cause the count to roll over
to the maximum value. Any data received in this mode
is not stored in RXFIFO. Figure 32-4 shows an
example of sending a command and then sending a
byte of data, using this mode.
When BMODE = 0, the transfer counter (SPIxTCNTH/
L) must also be written to before transfers will occur,
and transfers will cease when the transfer counter
reaches ‘0’.
For example, if SPIxTXB is written twice and then
SPIxTCNTL is written with ‘3’, the transfer will start with
the SPIxTCNTL write. The two bytes in the TXFIFO will
be sent after which the transfer will suspend until the
third and last byte is written to SPIxTXB.
FIGURE 32-4: SPI MASTER OPERATION, COMMAND+WRITE DATA, TXR/RXR=1/0

Rev. 10-
000282A
9/22/2016
Software Write to Note 2

TXTCNTL
SPIxTXCNT 0 -1 -2 3 2 1 0
Software Write
to TXR
TXR
Software Write
to RXR
RXR
SCK_out
SDO_out Shifted data out
SRM TIF Note 3
BCZIF
Software Write Note 4

to SPIxTXB
TxFIFO 0 1 2 1 0 1 2 1 2 1 0
Occupancy
SPIxTIF
Note: 1. SS(out) is not shown

2. The byte counter is optional when TXR/RXR = 1/0;
3. After the command bytes, wait for SRMTIF before loading SPIxBYTESL otherwise the command bytes would decrement BYTES.
Alternatively, load BC = 5 and count the command bytes also; TCZIF signals the end of the transmission.
4. Transmit data interrupt handler (or DMA) must write only the bytes necessary; the byte counter is not available as an indicator.
5. Reading the RXFIFO is not required because RXR = 0.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.5.3 RECEIVE ONLY MODE data written to the TXFIFO will be transmitted on each
data exchange, although the TXFIFO occupancy will
When RXR is set and TXR is clear, the SPI master is in
not change, meaning that the same message will be
Receive Only mode. In this mode, data transfers when
sent on each transmission. If there is no data in the
the RXFIFO is not full and the Transfer Counter is non-
TXFIFO, the most recently received data will instead be
zero. In this mode, writing a value to SPIxTCNTL will
transmitted. Figure 32-5 shows an example of sending
start the clocks for transfer. The clocks will suspend
a command using Section 32.5.2 “Transmit Only
while the RXFIFO is full and cease when the
Mode” and then receiving a byte of data using this
SPIxTCNT reaches zero (see Section 32.4 “Transfer
mode.
Counter”). If there is any data in the TXFIFO, the first
FIGURE 32-5: SPI MASTER OPERATION, COMMAND+READ DATA, TXR/RXR=0/1

Rev. 10-
000283A
9/22/2016
Software Write to
TxCNTL
SPIxTXCNT 0 -1 -2 3 2 1 0
Software Write to
TXR
TXR
Software Write
to RXR
RXR
SCK_out
SDO_out Shifted data out
SRMTIF Note 2
TCZIF
Software Write
to SPIxTXB
TXFIFO 0 1 2 1 0
Occupancy
Software Read
from SPIxRXB
RXFIFO 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Occupancy
SPIxRIF
Note: 1. SS(out) is not shown

2. Software must wait for shift-register empty (SRMTIF) before changing TXR, RXR, BYTES and BITS controls.
This is not considered an imposition in this case, because the slave probably needs time to load output data (see also Figure 4-14).
32.5.4 TRANSFER OFF MODE

When both TXR and RXR are cleared, the SPI master
is in Transfer Off mode. In this mode, SCK will not
toggle and no data is exchanged. However, writes to
SPIxTXB will be transferred to the TXFIFO which will
be transmitted if the TXR bit is set.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.5.5 MASTER MODE SLAVE SELECT and its polarity is controlled by the SSP bit of
CONTROL SPIxCON1. Setting the SSET bit will also assert
SS(out). Clearing the SSET bit will leave SS(out) to be
32.5.5.1 Hardware Slave Select Control controlled by the Transfer Counter. When the Transfer
Counter is loaded, the SPI module will automatically
This SPI module allows for direct hardware control of a
assert the SS. When the Transfer Counter decrements
Slave Select output. The Slave Select output SS(out) is
to zero, the SPI module will deassert SS either one
controlled both directly, through the SSET bit of
baud period after the final SCK pulse of the final
SPIxCON2, as well indirectly by the hardware while the
transfer (if CKE/SMP = 0/1) or one half baud period
transfer counter is non-zero (see Section 32.4
otherwise (see Figure 32-6).
“Transfer Counter”). SS(out) is steered by the PPS
registers to pins (see Section 17.2 “PPS Outputs”)
FIGURE 32-6: SPI MASTER SS OPERATION- CKE = 0, BMODE = 1, TCWIDTH = 0, SSP = 0

Rev. 10-
000284A
9/14/2016
SPIEN
baud_clock
Software Write to
SPIxTCNTL
Transfer 1 0
Counter
SS_out
minimum 1 baud clock when FST = 0 approx. 1 baud clock
SCK_out
SDO_bit_number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Note: 1. SDO bit number illustrates the transmitted bit number, and is not intended to imply SDO (out) tristate operation.
2. Assumes SPIxTXB holds data when SPIxTCNTL is written.
32.5.5.2 Software Slave Select Control

Slave Select can also be controlled through software
via a general purpose I/O pin. In this case, ensure that
the pin in question is configured as a GPIO through
PPS (see Section 17.2 “PPS Outputs”), and ensure
that the pin is set as an output (clear the appropriate bit
in the appropriate TRIS register). In this case, SSET
will not affect the slave select, the Transfer Counter will
not automatically control the slave select output, and all
setting and clearing of the slave select output line must
be directly controlled by software.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.5.6 MASTER MODE SPI CLOCK
CONFIGURATION
32.5.6.1 SPI Clock Selection

The clock source for SPI master modes is selected by
the SPIxCLK register. Selections include the following:
• FOSC
• HFINTOSC
• CLKREF
• Timer0_overflow
• Timer2_Postscaled
• SMT_match
The SPIxBAUD register allows for dividing this clock.
The frequency of the SCK output is defined by
Equation 32-1:
EQUATION 32-1: FREQUENCY OF SCK

OUTPUT SIGNAL
F CSEL
F BAUD = --------------------------------
-
 2   BAUD + 1  
where FBAUD is the baud rate frequency output on the

SCK pin, FCSEL is the frequency of the input clock
selected by the SPIxCLK register, and BAUD is the
value contained in the SPIxBAUD register.
32.5.6.2 CKE, CKP and SMP

The CKP, CKE, and SMP bits control the relationship
between the SCK clock output, SDO output data
changes, and SDI input data sampling. The bit
functions are as follows:
• CKP - SCK output polarity
• CKE - SDO output change relative to the SCK
clock
• SMP - SDI input sampling relative to the clock
edges
The CKE bit, when set, inverts the low Idle state of the
SCK output to a high Idle state.
Figure 32-7 through Figure 32-10 illustrate the eight
possible combinations of the CKP, CKE, and SMP bit
selections.
When the CKE bit is set, the SDO data is valid before
there is a clock edge on SCK. When the CKE bit is
cleared, the SDO data is undefined prior to the first
SCK edge.
Note: All timing diagrams assume the LSBF bit
of SPIxCON0 is cleared.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 32-7: CLOCKING DETAIL-MASTER MODE, CKE/SMP = 0/0
Rev. 10-
000276A
MSTEN = ,CKE = , SMP = 10/10/2016
SCK A I A I A I A I A I A I A I A I
SDO Previous bit 0 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 CKP =
input sample clock
SDO Previous bit 0 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 CKP =
input sample clock
RXFIFO Occupancy increments

T;FIFO Open R;FIFO TXFIFO Occupancy decrements
determined latch SPIxRIF and SPIxTIF interrupts
trigger
FIGURE 32-8: CLOCKING DETAIL - MASTER MODE, CKE/SMP = 1/1
Rev. 10-
000315A
10/13/2016
MSTEN = , CKE = , SMP =
SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 next CKP =
tx_buf
input sample clock write
A I A I A I A I A I A I A I A I
SCK
SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 next CKP =
tx_buf
input sample clock write
T;FIFO Open R;FIFO RXFIFO Occupancy increments

determined latch TXFIFO Occupancy decrements
SPIxRIF and SPIxTIF interrupts
trigger

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 32-9: CLOCKING DETAIL-MASTER MODE, CKE = 0, SMP = 1
Rev. 10-
000277A
9/14/2016
MSTEN = , CKE = , SMP =
SDO previous bit 0 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 CKP =
input sample clock
SDO previous bit 0 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 CKP =
input sample clock
T;FIFO determined Open R;FIFO latch RXFIFO Occupancy increments,

TXFIFO Occupancy decrements,
trigger
FIGURE 32-10: CLOCKING DETAIL-MASTER MODE, CKE = 1, SMP = 0

Rev. 10-
000278A
9/14/2016
MSTEN =, CKE = , SMP =
SCK I A I A I A I A I A I A I A I A
SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 CKP =
input sample clock tx_buf

write
SCK I A I A I A I A I A I A I A I A
SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 CKP =
input sample clock tx_buf

write
T;FIFO to SDO Open R;FIFO latch RXFIFO Occupancy increments,

TXFIFO Occupancy decrements,
trigger
32.5.6.3 SCK Start-Up Delay SPIxBAUD (indicating lower SCK frequencies), this
delay is much smaller and the first SCK can appear
When starting an SPI data exchange, the master
relatively quickly after SS is set.
device sets the SS output (either through hardware or
software) and then triggers the module to send data. By default, the SPI module inserts a ½ baud delay (half
These data triggers are synchronized to the clock of the period of the clock selected by the SPIxCLK
selected by the SPIxCLK register before the first SCK register) before the first SCK pulse. This allows for
pulse appears, usually requiring one or two clocks of systems with a high SPIxBAUD value to have extra set-
the selected clock. up time before the first clock. Setting the FST bit in
SPIxCON1 removes this additional delay, allowing
The SPI module includes synchronization delays on
systems with low SPIxBAUD values (and thus, long
SCK generation specifically designed to ensure that
synchronization delays) to forego this unnecessary
the Slave Select output timing is correct, without
extra delay.
requiring precision software timing loops.
When the value of the SPIxBAUD register is a small
number (indicating higher SCK frequencies), the
synchronization delay can be relatively long between
setting SS and the first SCK. With larger values of

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.6 Slave Mode SDO pin. When the SPI module is active, its output is
determined by both TXR and whether there is data in
32.6.1 SLAVE MODE TRANSMIT OPTIONS the TXFIFO.
The SDO output of the SPI module in Slave mode is When the TRIS bit associated with the SDO pin is set,
controlled by the TXR bit of SPIxCON2, the TRIS bit the pin will only have an output level driven to it when
associated with the SDO pin, the Slave Select input, TXR = 1 and the slave select input is true. In all other
and the current state of the TXFIFO. This control is cases, the pin will be tri-stated.
summarized in Table 32-2. In this table, TRISxn refers
to the bit in the TRIS register corresponding to the pin 32.6.1.2 SDO Output Data
that SDO has been assigned with PPS, TXR is the The TXR bit controls the nature of the data that is
Transmit Data Required Control bit of SPIxCON2, SS transmitted in Slave mode. When TXR is set,
is the state of the Slave Select input, and TXBE is the transmitted data is taken from the TXFIFO. If the FIFO
TXFIFO Buffer Empty bit of SPIxSTATUS. is empty, the most recently received data will be
transmitted and the TXUIF flag will be set to indicate
32.6.1.1 SDO Drive/Tri-state that a transmit FIFO underflow has occurred.
The TRIS bit associated with the SDO pin controls When TXR is cleared, the data will be taken from the
whether the SDO pin will tri-state. When this TRIS bit is TXFIFO, and the TXFIFO occupancy will not decrease.
cleared, the pin will always be driving to a level, even If the TXFIFO is empty, the most recently received data
when the SPI module is inactive. When the SPI module will be transmitted, and the TXUIF bit will not be set.
is inactive (either due to the master not clocking the However, if the TRIS bit associated with the SDO pin is
SCK line or the SS being false), the SDO pin will be set, clearing the TXR bit will cause the SPI module to
driven to the value of the LAT bit associated with the not output any data to the SDO pin.
TABLE 32-2: SLAVE MODE TRANSMIT
TRISxn(1) TXR SS TXBE SDO State
0 0 FALSE 0 Drives state determined by LATxn(2)
0 0 TRUE 0 Outputs the oldest byte in the TXFIFO
Does not remove data from the TXFIFO
0 0 TRUE 1 Outputs the most recently received byte
Removes transmitted byte from the TXFIFO
Decrements occupancy of TXFIFO
Sets the TXUIF bit of SPIxINTF
1 0 FALSE 0 Tri-stated
1 0 TRUE 0 Tri-stated
1 0 TRUE 1 Tri-stated
Removes transmitted byte from the TXFIFO
Decrements occupancy of TXFIFO
Sets the TXUIF bit of SPIxINTF
Note 1: TRISxn is the bit in the TRISx register corresponding to the pin that SDO has been assigned with PPS.
2: LATxn is the bit in the LATx register corresponding to the pin that SDO has been assigned with PPS.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.6.2 SLAVE MODE RECEIVE OPTIONS
The RXR bit controls the nature of receptions in slave
mode. When RXR is set, the SDI input data will be
stored in the RXFIFO if it is not full. If the RXFIFO is full,
the RXOIF bit will be set to indicate an RXFIFO over-
flow error and the data is discarded. When RXR is
cleared, all received data will be ignored and not stored
in the RXFIFO (although it may still be used for trans-
mission if TXFIFO is empty). Figure 32-11 shows a typ-
ical slave mode communication, showing a case where
the master writes two then three bytes, showing inter-
rupts as well as the behavior of the transfer counter in
slave mode (see Section 32.4.3 “Transfer Counter in
Slave mode” for more details on tSection 32.8 “SPI
Interrupts”he transfer counter in slave mode as well
as Section X.8 for more information on interrupts).
FIGURE 32-11: SPI SLAVE MODE OPERATION – INTERRUPT-DRIVEN, MASTER WRITES 2+3
BYTES
Rev. 10-
000285A
9/22/2016
SS_in
SCK_in Note 1
SDO_out Output data
SOSIF Note 2
EOSIF
Transfer Counter 0 -1 -2 3 2 1 0
Software Write to Note 3

SPIxTCNTL
TCZIF
Software Write
to TXR
TXR
Software Write to
RXR
RXR
Receiver process
SPIxRIF
Software
Read from
SPIxRXB
Note: 1. This delay is exaggerated for illustration, and can be as short as1/2 bit period.
2. If the device is sleeping, SOSIF will wake it up for interrupt service.
3. Setting SPIxTCNTL is optional in this example, otherwise it will count -3, -4, -5, and TCZIF will not occur

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.6.3 SLAVE MODE SLAVE SELECT 32.6.5 DAISY-CHAIN CONFIGURATION
In Slave mode, an external Slave Select Signal can be The SPI bus can be connected in a daisy-chain
used to synchronize communication with the Master configuration. The first slave output is connected to the
device. The Slave Select line is held in its inactive state second slave input, the second slave output is
(high by default) until the master device is ready to connected to the third slave input, and so on. The final
communicate. When the Slave Select transitions to its slave output is connected to the master input. Each
active state, the slave knows that a new transmission is slave sends out, during a second group of clock pulses,
starting. an exact copy of what was received during the first
When the Slave Select goes false at the end of the group of clock pulses. The whole chain acts as one
transmission the receive function of the selected SPI large communication shift register. The daisy-chain
Slave device returns to the inactive state. The slave is feature only requires a single Slave Select line from the
then ready to receive a new transmission when the master device connected to all slave devices
Slave Select goes True again. (alternately, the slave devices can be configured to
ignore the slave select line by setting the SSET bit). In
The Slave Select signal is received on the SS input pin. a typical Daisy-Chain configuration, the SCK signal
This pin is remappable with the SPIxSSPPS register from the master is connected to each of the slave
(see Section 17.1 “PPS Inputs”). When the input on device SCK inputs. However, the SCK input and output
this pin is true, transmission and reception are enabled, are separate signals selected by the PPS control.
and the SDO pin is driven. When the input on this pin is When the PPS selection is made to configure the SCK
false, the SDO pin is either tri-stated (if the TRIS bit input and SCK output on separate pins then, the SCK
associated with the SDO pin is set) or driven to the output will follow the SCK input, allowing for SCK
value of the LAT bit associated with the SDO pin (if the signals to be daisy-chained like the SDO/SDI signals.
TRIS bit associated with the SDO pin is cleared). In
addition, the SCK input is ignored. Figure 32-12 shows the block diagram of a typical
daisy-chain connection, and Figure 32-13 shows the
If the SS input goes False, while a data transfer is still block diagram of a daisy-chain connection possible
in progress, it is considered a slave select fault. The using this SPI module.
SSFLT bit of SPIxCON2 indicates whether such an
event has occurred. The transfer counter value
determines the number of bits in a valid data transfer
(see Section 32.4 “Transfer Counter” for more
details).
The Slave Select polarity is controlled by the SSP bit of
SPIxCON1. When SSP is set (its default state), the
Slave Select input is active-low, and when it is cleared,
the Slave Select input is active-high.
The Slave Select for the SPI module is controlled by
the SSET bit of SPIxCON2. When the bit is cleared (its
default state), the slave select will act as described
above. When the bit is set, the SPI module will behave
as if the SS input was always in its active state.
Note: When SSET is set, the effective SS(in)

signal is always active. Hence, the SSFLT
bit may be disregarded.
32.6.4 SLAVE MODE CLOCK

CONFIGURATION
In Slave Mode, SCK is an input, and must be
configured to the same polarity and clock edge as the
master device. As in Master mode, the polarity of the
clock input is controlled by the CKP bit of SPIxCON1
and the clock edge used for transmitting data is
controlled by the CKE bit of SPIxCON1.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 32-12: TRADITIONAL SPI DAISY-CHAIN CONNECTION
Rev. 10-000082B
8/11/2016
SCK SCK
SPI Master SDOx SDIx SPI Slave
SDIx SDOx #1
SSxOUT/GPIO SSxIN
SCK
SDIx SPI Slave
SDOx #2
SSxIN
SCK
SDIx SPI Slave
SDOx #3
SSxIN
FIGURE 32-13: SPI DAISY-CHAIN CONNECTION WITH CHAINED SCK
Rev. 10-000082C
10/13/2016
SCK SCK(in)
SPI Master SDOx SDIx SPI Slave
SDIx #1
SSxIN
SSxOUT/GPIO
SCK(out) SDOx
SCK(in) SDIx
SPI Slave
SSxIN #2
SCK(out) SDOx
SCK(in) SDIx
SSxIN SPI Slave

#3
SDOx

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.7 SPI Operation in Sleep Mode 32.8.2 SPI TRANSMITTER DATA
INTERRUPT
SPI master mode will operate in Sleep, provided the
clock source selected by SPIxCLK is active in Sleep The SPI Transmitter Data Interrupt is set when TXFIFO
mode. FIFOs will operate as they would when the part is not full, and is cleared when the TXFIFO is full. The
is awake. When TXR = 1, the TXFIFO will need to interrupt flag SPI1TXIF is located in PIRx and the
contain data in order for transfers to take place in interrupt enable SPI1TXIE is located in PIEx. The
Sleep. All interrupts will still set the interrupt flags in interrupt flag is read-only.
Sleep but only enabled interrupts will wake the device
from Sleep. 32.8.3 SPI MODULE STATUS INTERRUPTS
SPI Slave mode will operate in Sleep, because the The SPIxIF flag in the respective PIR register is set
clock is provided by an external master device. FIFOs when any of the individual status flags in SPIxINTF and
will still operate and interrupts will set interrupt flags, their respective SPIxINTE bits are set. In order for the
and enabled interrupts will wake the device from Sleep. setting of any specific interrupt flag to interrupt normal
program flow both the SPIxIE bit as well as the specific
bit in SPIxINTE associated with that interrupt must be
32.8 SPI Interrupts
set.
There are three top level SPI interrupts in the PIRx The Status Interrupts are:
register:
• Shift Register Empty Interrupt
• SPI Transmit
• Transfer Counter is Zero Interrupt
• SPI Receive
• Start of Slave Select Interrupt
• SPI Module status
• End of Slave Select Interrupt
The status interrupts are enabled at the module level in • Receiver Overflow Interrupt
the SPIxINTE register. Only enabled status interrupts
• Transmitter Underflow Interrupt
will cause the single top level SPIxIF flag to be set.
32.8.1 SPI RECEIVER DATA INTERRUPT

The SPI Receiver Data Interrupt is set when RXFIFO
contains data, and is cleared when the RXFIFO is
empty. The interrupt flag SPI1RXIF is located in PIRx
and the interrupt enable SPI1RXIE is located in PIEx.
This interrupt flag is read-only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.8.3.1 Shift Register Empty Interrupt
The Shift Register Empty interrupt flag and enable are Note: The TCZIF flag only indicates that the
the SRMTIF and SRMTIE bits respectively. This transfer counter has decremented from
interrupt is only available in master mode and triggers one to zero, and may not indicate that the
when a data transfer completes and conditions are not entire data transfer process is complete.
present to start a new transfer, as dictated by the TXR Either poll the BUSY bit of SPIxCON2 and
and RXR bits (see Table 32-1 for conditions for starting wait for it to be cleared or use the Shift
a new Master mode data transfer with different TXR/ Register Empty Interrupt (SRMTIF) to
RXR settings). This interrupt will be triggered at the end determine if a data transfer is fully
of the last full bit period, after SCK has been low for one complete.
½-baud period. See Figure 32-14 for more details of
the timing of this interrupt as well as other interrupts. 32.8.3.3 Start of Slave Select and End of
This bit will not clear itself when the conditions for Slave Select Interrupts
starting a new transfer occur, and must be cleared in
software. The start of slave select interrupt flag and enable are
the SOSIF and SOSIE bits, respectively, and the end of
32.8.3.2 Transfer Counter is Zero Interrupt slave select interrupt flag and enable are similarly
designated by the EOSIF and EOSIE bits. These
The Transfer Counter is zero interrupt flag and enable interrupts trigger at the leading and trailing edges of the
are the TCZIF and TCZIE bits, respectively. This slave select input. Note that the interrupts are active in
interrupt will trigger when the transfer counter (defined both master and slave mode, and will trigger on
by BMODE, SPIxTCNTH/L and SPIxTWIDTH) transitions of the slave select input regardless of which
decrements from one to zero. See Figure 32-14 for mode the SPI is in. In Master mode, PPS should be
more details on the timing of this interrupt as well as used to route the slave select input to the same pin as
other interrupts. This bit must be cleared in software. the slave select output, allowing these interrupts to
trigger on changes to the slave select output. Also note
that in slave mode, changing the SSET bit can trigger
these interrupts, as it changes the effective input value
of slave select. Both SOSIF and EOSIF must be
cleared in software
FIGURE 32-14: TRANSFER AND SLAVE SELECT INTERRUPT TIMINGS
Rev. 10-000286A
9/14/2016
SS(in)
SCK
SDO_bit_number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SRMTIF
SOSIF
Note 3
TCZIF
EOSIF Note 3
Note 1: SRMTIF available only in Master mode

2: Clearing of interrupt flags is shown for illustration; actual interrupt flags must be cleared in software
3: SOSIF and EOSIF are set according to SS(in), even in Master mode.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.8.3.4 Receiver Overflow and Transmitter
Underflow Interrupts
The receiver overflow interrupt triggers if data is
received when the RXFIFO is already full and RXR = 1.
In this case, the data will be discarded and the RXOIF
bit will be set. The receiver overflow interrupt flag is the
RXOIF bit of SPIxINTF. The receiver overflow interrupt
enable bit is the RXOIE bit of SPIxINTE.
The Transmitter Underflow interrupt flag triggers if a
data transfer begins when the TXFIFO is empty and
TXR = 1. In this case, the most recently received data
will be transmitted and the TXUIF bit will be set. The
transmitter underflow interrupt flag is the TXUIF bit of
SPIxINTF. The transmitter underflow interrupt enable
bit is the TXUIE bit of SPIxINTE.
Both of these interrupts will only occur in Slave mode,
as Master mode will not allow the RXFIFO to overflow
or the TXFIFO to underflow.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
32.9 Register definitions: SPI
REGISTER 32-1: SPIxINTF: SPI INTERRUPT FLAG REGISTER

R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 U-0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 U-0
SRMTIF TCZIF SOSIF EOSIF — RXOIF TXUIF —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
HS = Bit can be set by hardware
bit 7 SRMTIF: Shift Register Empty Interrupt Flag bit

Slave mode:
This bit is ignored
Master mode:
1 = The data transfer is complete
0 = Either no data transfers have occurred or a data transfer is in progress
bit 6 TCZIF: Transfer Counter is Zero Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The transfer counter (as defined by BMODE in Register 32-7, TCNTH/L, and TWIDTH) has
decremented to zero
0= No interrupt pending
bit 5 SOSIF: Start of Slave Select Interrupt Flag bit
1 = SS(in) transitioned from false to true
0 = No interrupt pending
bit 4 EOSIF: End of Slave Select Interrupt Flag bit
1 = SS(in) transitioned from true to false
bit 2 RXOIF: Receiver Overflow Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Data transfer completed when RXBF = 1 (edge triggered) and RXR = 1
bit 1 TXUIF: Transmitter Underflow Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Slave Data transfer started when TXBE = 1 and TXR = 1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 32-2: SPIxINTE: SPI INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER
R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0
SRMTIE TCZIE SOSIE EOSIE — RXOIE TXUIE —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SRMTIE: Shift Register Empty Interrupt Enable bit

1 = Enables the Shift Register Empty Interrupt
0 = Disables the Shift Register Empty Interrupt
bit 6 TCZIE: Transfer Counter is Zero Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the Transfer Counter is Zero Interrupt
0 = Disables the Transfer Counter is Zero Interrupt
bit 5 SOSIE: Start of Slave Select Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the Start of Slave Select Interrupt
0 = Disables the Start of Slave Select Interrupt
bit 4 EOSIE: End of Slave Select Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the End of Slave Select Interrupt
0 = Disables the End of Slave Select Interrupt
bit 2 RXOIE: Receiver Overflow Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the Receiver Overflow Interrupt
0 = Disables the Receiver Overflow Interrupt
bit 1 TXUIE: Transmitter Underflow Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the Transmitter Underflow Interrupt
0 = Disables the Transmitter Underflow Interrupt
REGISTER 32-3: SPIxTCNTL – SPI TRANSFER COUNTER LSB REGISTER

TCNT7 TCNT6 TCNT5 TCNT4 TCNT3 TCNT2 TCNT1 TCNT0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TCNT[7:0]

BMODE = 0
Bits 10-3 of the Transfer Counter, counting the total number of bits to transfer
BMODE = 1
Bits 7-0 of the Transfer Counter, counting the total number of bytes to transfer
Note: This register should not be written to while a transfer is in progress (BUSY bit of SPIxCON2 is set).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 32-4: SPIxTCNTH: SPI TRANSFER COUNTER MSB REGISTER
U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — TCNT10 TCNT9 TCNT8
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 TCNT[10:8]:
BMODE = 0
BMODE = 1
Bits 10-8 of the Transfer Counter, counting the total number of bytes to transfer
REGISTER 32-5: SPIxTWIDTH: SPI TRANSFER WIDTH REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — TWIDTH2 TWIDTH1 TWIDTH0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 TWIDTH[2:0]:
BMODE = 0
BMODE = 1
Size (in bits) of each transfer counted by the transfer counter
111 = 7 bits
110 = 6 bits
101 = 5 bits
100 = 4 bits
011 = 3 bits
010 = 2 bits
001 = 1 bit
000 = 8 bits

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 32-6: SPIxBAUD: SPI BAUD RATE REGISTER
BAUD7 BAUD6 BAUD5 BAUD4 BAUD3 BAUD2 BAUD1 BAUD0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 BAUD[7:0]: Baud Clock Prescaler Select bits

SCK high or low time: TSC=SPI Clock Period*(BAUD+1)
SCK toggle frequency: FSCK=FBAUD= SPI Clock Frequency/(2*(BAUD+1))
Note: This register should not be written while the SPI is enabled (EN bit of SPIxCON0 = 1)
REGISTER 32-7: SPIxCON0: SPI CONFIGURATION REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN — — — — LSBF MST BMODE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: SPI Module Enable Control bit

1 =SPI is enabled
0 = SPI is disabled,
bit 2 LSBF: LSb-First Data Exchange bit
1 = Data is exchanged LSb first
0 = Data is exchanged MSb first (traditional SPI operation)
bit 1 MST: SPI Operating Mode Master Select bit
1 = SPI module operates as the bus master
0 = SPI module operates as a bus slave
bit 0 BMODE: Bit-Length Mode Select bit
1 = SPIxTWIDTH setting applies to every byte: total bits sent is SPIxTWIDTH*SPIxTCNT, end-of-
packet occurs when SPIxTCNT = 0
0 = SPIxTWIDTH setting applies only to the last byte exchanged; total bits sent is SPIxTWIDTH +
(SPIxTCNT*8)
Note: This register should only be written when the EN bit is cleared, or to clear the EN bit.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-1/1 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
SMP CKE CKP FST — SSP SDIP SDOP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SMP: SPI Input Sample Phase Control bit

Slave mode:
1 = Reserved
0 = SDI input is sampled in the middle of data output time
Master mode:
1 = SDI input is sampled at the end of data output time
0 = SDI input is sampled in the middle of data output time
bit 6 CKE: Clock Edge Select bit
1 = Output data changes on transition from active to idle clock state
0 = Output data changes on transition from idle to active clock state
bit 5 CKP: Clock Polarity Select bit
1 = Idle state for SCK is high level
0 = Idle state for SCK is low level
bit 4 FST: Fast Start Enable bit
Slave mode:
This bit is ignored
Master mode:
1 = Delay to first SCK may be less than ½ baud period
0 = Delay to first SCK will be at least ½ baud period
bit 2 SSP: SS Input/Output Polarity Control bit
1 = SS is active-low
0 = SS is active-high
bit 1 SDIP: SDI Input Polarity Control bit
1 = SDI input is active-low
0 = SDI input is active-high
bit 0 SDOP: SDI Output Polarity Control bit
1 = SDO output is active-low
0 = SDO output is active-high

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
R-0/0 R-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
BUSY(1) SSFLT — — — SSET TXR(2) RXR(2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 BUSY: SPI Module Busy Status bit(1)

1 = Data exchange is busy
0 = Data exchange is not taking place
bit 6 SSFLT: SS(in) Fault Status bit
If SSET = 0
1 = SS(in) ended the transaction unexpectedly, and the data byte being received was lost
0 = SS(in) ended normally
If SSET = 1
This bit is unchanged.
bit 2 SSET: Slave Select Enable bit
Master mode:
1 = SS(out) is driven to the active state continuously
0 = SS(out) is driven to the active state while the transmit counter is not zero
Slave mode:
1 = SS(in) is ignored and data is clocked on all SCK(in) (as though SS = TRUE at all times)
0 = SS(in) enables/disables data input and tri-states SDO if the TRIS bit associated with the SDO pin
is set (see Table 32-2 for details)
bit 1 TXR: Transmit Data-Required Control bit(2)
1 = TxFIFO data is required for a transfer
0 = TxFIFO data is not required for a transfer
bit 0 RXR: Receive FIFO Space-Required Control bit(2)
1 = Data transfers are suspended if the RxFIFO is full
0 = Received data is not stored in the FIFO
Note 1: The BUSY bit is subject to synchronization delay of up to two instruction cycles. The user must wait for it
to set after loading the transmit buffer (SPIxTXB register) before using it to determine the status of the SPI
module.
2: See Table 32-1 as well as Section 32.5 “Master mode” and Section 32.6 “Slave Mode” for more details
pertaining to TXR and RXR function.
3: This register should not be written to while a transfer is in progress (BUSY bit of SPIxCON2 is set).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 32-10: SPIxSTATUS: SPI STATUS REGISTER
R/C/HS-0/0 U-0 R-1/1 U-0 R/C/HS-0/0 S-0/0 U-0 R-0/0
TXWE — TXBE — RXRE CLRBF — RXBF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
C = Clearable bit
S = Settable bit
HS = Bit can be set by hardware
bit 7 TXWE: Transmit Buffer Write Error bit

1 = SPIxTxB was written while TxFIFO was full
0 = No error has occurred
bit 5 TXBE: Transmit Buffer Empty bit (read-only)
1 = Transmit buffer TxFIFO is empty
0 = Transmit buffer is not empty
bit 3 RXRE: Receive Buffer Read Error bit
1 = SPIxRB was read while RxFIFO was empty
0 = No error has occurred
bit 2 CLRBF: Clear Buffer Control bit (write only)
1 = Reset the receive and transmit buffers, making both buffers empty
0 = Take no action
bit 0 RXBF: Receive Buffer Full bit (read-only)
1 = Receive buffer is full
0 = Receive buffer is not full
REGISTER 32-11: SPIxRxB: SPI READ BUFFER REGISTER

R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
RXB7 RXB6 RXB5 RXB4 RXB3 RXB2 RXB1 RXB0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 RXB[7:0]: Receiver Buffer bits (read-only)

If RX buffer is not empty:
Contains the top-most byte of RXFIFO, and reading this register will remove the top-most byte
RXFIFO and decrease the occupancy of the RXFIFO
If RX buffer is empty:
Reading this register will read as ‘0’, leave the occupancy unchanged, and set the RXRE bit of
SPIxSTATUS

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 32-12: SPIxTxB: SPI TRANSMIT BUFFER REGISTER
W-0 W-0 W-0 W-0 W-0 W-0 W-0 W-0
TXB7 TXB6 TXB5 TXB4 TXB3 TXB2 TXB1 TXB0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TXB[7:0]: Transmit Buffer bits (write only)

If TXFIFO is not full:
Writing to this register adds the data to the top of the TXFIFO and increases the occupancy of the
TXFIFO write pointer
If TXFIFO is full:
Writing to this register does not affect the data in the TXFIFO or the write pointer, and the TXWE bit of
SPIxSTATUS will be set
REGISTER 32-13: SPIxCLK: SPI CLOCK SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — CLKSEL3 CLKSEL2 CLKSEL1 CLKSEL0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3-0 CLKSEL[3:0]: SPI Clock Source Selection bits
1111-1001 = Reserved
1000 = SMT_match
0111 = TMR6_Postscaled
0011 = CLKREF
0010 = MFINTOSC
0001 = HFINTOSC
0000 = FOSC

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 32-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SPI

Register on
page
SPIxINTF SRMTIF TCZIF SOSIF EOSIF — RXOIF TXUIF — 536

SPIxINTE SRMTIE TCZIE SOSIE EOSIE — RXOIE TXUIE — 537
SPIxTCNTH — — — — — TCNT10 TCNT9 TCNT8 538
SPIxTCNTL TCNT7 TCNT6 TCNT5 TCNT4 TCNT3 TCNT2 TCNT1 TCNT0 537
SPIxTWIDTH — — — — — TWIDTH2 TWIDTH1 TWITDH0 538
SPIxBAUD BAUD7 BAUD6 BAUD5 BAUD4 BAUD3 BAUD2 BAUD1 BAUD0 539
SPIxCON0 EN — — — — LSBF MST BMODE 539
SPIxCON1 SMP CKE CKP FST — SSP SDIP SDOP 540
SPIxCON2 BUSY SSFLT — — — SSET TXR RXR 541
SPIxSTATUS TXWE — TXBE — RXRE CLRBF — RXBF 542
SPIxRXB RXB7 RXB6 RXB5 RXB4 RXB3 RXB2 RXB1 RXB0 542
SPIxTXB TXB7 TXB6 TXB5 TXB4 TXB3 TXB2 TXB1 TXB0 543
SPIxCLK — — — — CLKSEL3 CLKSEL2 CLKSEL1 CLKSEL0 543
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the SPI module.

33.0 I2C MODULE
The device has two dedicated, independent I2C modules. Figure 33-1 is a block
diagram of the I2C interface module. The figure shows both the Master and
Slave modes together.
FIGURE 33-1: I2C MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000 312A
11/2/201 6
SDAHT<1:0>
SDA(in) I2CxSDAPPS Shift Register SDA

Auto-NACK RxyPPS SDA(out)
RX/TX Delay
8 8
ACKDT/
I2CLVL<1:0> 8 ACKCNT
Address Buffer Transmit Buffer Recieve Buffer
and Match
(I2CxTXB) (I2CxRXB)
I2CxADB0/1
I2CxADD0/1/2/3
See I2C Control

I2CxCLK Unit and
Register
Transfer
Counter
I2CCLK<3:0>
Master
See
Module
I2CxBTO
Register
Slave
Module RxyPPS SCL(out)
I2CBTO<2:0>
Interrupt
SCL(in) I2CxSCLPPS Controller
DS40001919E-page 545
I2CLVL<1:0>
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.1 I2C Features 33.2 I2C Module Overview
• Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) interface supports The I2C module provides a synchronous interface
the following modes in hardware: between the microcontroller and other I2C-compatible
- Master mode devices using the two-wire I2C serial bus. Devices
- Slave mode with byte NACKing communicate in a master/slave environment. The I2C
- Multi-Master mode bus specifies two signal connections:
• Dedicated Address, Receive and Transmit buffers • Serial Clock (SCL)
• Up to four Slave addresses matching • Serial Data (SDA)
• General Call address matching
• 7-bit and 10-bit addressing with masking Both the SCL and SDA connections are bidirectional
• Start, Restart, Stop, Address, Write, and ACK open-drain lines, each requiring pull-up resistors to the
Interrupts supply voltage. Pulling the line to ground is considered
• Clock Stretching hardware for: a logical zero and letting the line float is considered a
- RX Buffer Full logical one. Every transaction on the I2C bus has to be
- TX Buffer Empty initiated by the Master.
- After Address, Write, and ACK Figure 33-2 shows a typical connection between a
• Bus Collision Detection with arbitration master and more than one slave.
• Bus Timeout Detection
• SDA hold time selection
• I2C, SMBus 2.0, and SMBus 3.0 input level
selections
FIGURE 33-2: I2C MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTIONS

Rev. 10-000 288A
11/2/201 6
Receive Buffer
Receive Buffer SDA

Shift Register
SDA
Shift Register SCK Transmit Buffer
I2C Slave 1
Transmit Buffer
SCK
Receive Buffer
I2C Master
SDA
Shift Register
SCK Transmit Buffer
I2C Slave 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
There are four main operations based on the direction
of the data being shared during I2C communication. TABLE 33-1: I2C BUS TERMS
• Master Transmit (master is transmitting data to a TERM Description
slave)
• Master Receive (master is receiving data from a Transmitter The device which shifts data out onto
slave) the bus
• Slave Transmit (slave is transmitting data to a Receiver The device which shifts data in from the
master) bus
• Slave Receive (slave is receiving data from the Master The device that initiates a transfer,
master) generates clock signals and terminates
a transfer
To begin any I2C communication, the master device
Slave The device addressed by the master
sends out a Start bit followed by the address byte of the
slave it intends to communicate with. This is followed Multi-master A bus with more than one device that
by a single Read/Write bit, which determines whether can initiate data transfers
the master intends to transmit to or receive data from Arbitration Procedure to ensure that only one
the slave device. master at a time controls the bus.
Winning arbitration ensures that the
If the requested slave exists on the bus, it will respond message is not corrupted
with an Acknowledge bit, otherwise known as an ACK. Synchronization Procedure to synchronize the clocks of
The master then continues to shift data in or out of the two or more devices on the bus.
slave until it terminates the message with a Stop.
Idle No master is controlling the bus, and
Further details about the I2C module are discussed in both SDA and SCL lines are high
the section below. Active Any time one or more master devices
are controlling the bus
33.3 I2C Mode Operation Addressed Slave Slave device that has received a
matching address and is actively being
All I2C communication is 8-bit data and 1-bit clocked by a master
acknowledge and shifted out MSb first. The user can
Matching Address byte that is clocked into a
control the interaction between the software and the Address slave that matches the value stored in
module using several control registers and interrupt I2CxADR
flags. Two pins, SDA and SCL, are exercised by the
Write Request Slave receives a matching address with
module to communicate with other external I2C R/W bit clear and is ready to clock in
devices. data
Read Request Master sends an address byte with the
33.3.1 DEFINITION OF I2C TERMINOLOGY
R/W bit set, indicating that it wishes to
The I2C communication protocol terminologies are clock data out of the Slave. This data is
defined for reference below in Table 33-1. These the next and all following bytes until a
terminologies are used throughout this document. Restart or Stop.
Table 33-1 has been adapted from the Phillips I2C Clock Stretching When a device on the bus holds SCL
specification. low to stall communication
Bus Collision Any time the SDA line is sampled low
by the module while it is outputting and
expected high state.
Bus Timeout A device holds the bus longer than
specified by the I2CxBTO register,
causing a module Reset.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.3.2 BYTE FORMAT 33.3.4 SDA HOLD TIME
All communication in I2C is done in 9-bit segments. A The hold time of the SDA pin is selected by the
byte is sent from a master to a slave or vice-versa, SDAHT[1:0] bits of the I2CxCON2 register. Hold time is
followed by an Acknowledge bit sent by the receiver. the time SDA is held valid after the falling edge of SCL.
After the 8th falling edge of the SCL line, the device A longer hold time setting may help on buses with large
transmitting data on the SDA line releases control of capacitance.
that pin to an input, and reads in an acknowledge value
on the next clock pulse. The clock signal is provided by 33.3.5 START CONDITION
the master. Data is valid to change while the SCL line The I2C specification defines a Start condition as a
is low, and sampled on the rising edge of the clock. transition of SDA line from a high to a low state while
Changes on the SDA line while the SCL line is high SCL line is high. A Start condition is always generated
define Start and Stop conditions on the bus which are by the master and signifies the transition of the bus
explained further in the chapter. from an Idle to an Active state. Figure 33-3 shows
waveforms for Start conditions. Master hardware waits
33.3.3 SDA AND SCL PINS for the BFRE bit of I2CxSTAT0 to be set, before
The user must configure these pins as open-drain asserting a Start condition on the SCL and SDA lines.
inputs. This is done by clearing the appropriate TRIS If two masters assert a start at the same time, a
bits and setting the appropriate and ODCON bits. The collision will occur during the addressing phase.
user may also select the input threshold, slew-rate and
internal pull-up settings using the RxyI2C control 33.3.6 STOP CONDITION
registers (Register 16-9). A Stop condition is a transition of the SDA line from low
to high while the SCL line is high. Figure 33-3 shows
waveforms for Stop conditions.
FIGURE 33-3: START AND STOP CONDITIONS
Rev. 10-000 290A

11/2/201 6
SDA
SCL
S P
Change of Change of
Data Allowed Data Allowed
Start Stop
Condition Condition
Note: At least one SCL low time must appear

before a Stop is valid. Therefore if the
SDA line goes low then high again while
the SCL line is high, only the Start
condition is detected.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.3.7 RESTART CONDITION In 10-bit Addressing Slave mode a Restart is required
for the master to clock data out of the addressed slave.
A Restart is valid any time that a Stop would be valid. A
Once a slave has been fully addressed, matching both
master can issue a Restart if it wishes to hold the bus
high and low address bytes (SMA = 1), the master can
after terminating the current transfer. A Restart has the
issue a Restart and the high address byte with the R/W
same effect on the slave that a Start would, resetting all
bit set. The slave logic will then hold the clock and
slave logic and preparing it to clock in an address. The
prepare to clock out data.
master may want to address the same or another
slave. Figure 33-4 shows the waveform for a Restart
condition.
FIGURE 33-4: RESTART CONDITION
Rev. 10-000 291A

11/2/201 6
SDA
SCL
RS
Change of Change of
Data Allowed Data Allowed
Restart
Condition
33.3.8 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE Certain conditions will cause a not-ACK (NACK) to be

sent automatically. If any of the RXRE, TXWE, RXO, or
The ninth SCL pulse for any transferred byte in I2C is
TXU bits is set, the hardware response is forced to
dedicated as an Acknowledge. It allows receiving
NACK. All subsequent responses from the device for
devices to respond back to the transmitter by pulling
address matches or data will be a NACK response.
the SDA line low. The transmitter must release control
of the line during this time to shift in the response. The
33.3.9 BUS TIME-OUT
Acknowledge (ACK) is an active-low signal, pulling the
SDA line low indicates to the transmitter that the device The I2CxBTO register can be used to select the
has received the transmitted data and is ready to timeout source for the module. The I2C module is reset
receive more. when the selected bus time out signal goes high. This
feature is useful for SMBus and PMBus™ compatibility.
The result of an ACK is placed in the ACKSTAT bit of
the I2CxCON1 register. The ACKSTAT bit is cleared For example, Timer2 can be selected as the bus
when the receiving device sends an Acknowledge and timeout source and configured to count when the SCL
is set when the receiving device does not Acknowl- pin is low. If the timer runs over before the SCL pin
edge. A slave sends an Acknowledge when it has rec- transitioned high, the timer-out pulse will reset the
ognized its address. When in a mode that is receiving module.
data, the ACK data being sent to the transmitter If the module is configured as a slave and a BTO event
depends on the value of I2CxCNT register. ACKDT is occurs when the slave is active, i.e., the SMA bit is set,
the value sent when I2CxCNT! = 0. When the module is immediately reset. The SMA and CSTR
I2CxCNT = 0, the ACKCNT value is used instead. bits are also cleared, and the BTOIF bit is set.
In Slave mode, if the ADRIE or WRIE bits are set, clock
stretching is initiated when there is an address match
or when there is an attempt to write to slave. This
allows the user to set the ACK value sent back to the
transmitter. The ACKDT bit of the I2CxCON1 register is
set/cleared to determine the response. Slave hardware
will generate an ACK response if the ADRIE or WRIE
bits are clear.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
If a BTO event occurs when the module is configured up to the user to specify all eight of these bits, even
as a master and is active, (i.e., MMA bit is set), and the though the I2C specification defines the upper five bits
module immediately tries to assert a Stop condition and as a constant.
also sets the BTOIF bit. The actual generation of the
Stop condition may be delayed if the bus is been clock 33.3.10.5 Multi-Master Mode (7-bit only)
stretched by some slave device. The MMA bit will be In Multi-Master mode, the device can be both master
cleared only after the Stop condition is generated. and slave depending on the sequence of events on the
bus. If being addressed as a slave, the I2CxADB0
33.3.10 ADDRESS BUFFERS register stores the received matching slave address
The I2C module has two address buffer registers, byte. If the device is trying to communicate as a master
I2CxADB0 and I2CxADB1. Depending on the mode, on the bus, the contents of the I2CxADB1 register are
these registers are used as either receive or transmit copied to the Shift register for addressing a slave
address buffers. See Table 33-2 for data flow directions device.
in these registers. In Slave modes, these registers are
only updated when there is an address match. The 33.3.11 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT BUFFER
ADB bit in the I2CxCON2 register is used to enable/ The receive buffer holds one byte of data while another
disable the address buffer functionality. When disabled, is shifted into the SDA pin. The user can access the
the address data is sourced from the transmit buffer buffer by software (or DMA) through the I2CxRXB
and is stored in the receive buffer. register. When new data is loaded into the I2CxRXB
register, the receive buffer full Status bit (RXBF) is set
TABLE 33-2: ADDRESS BUFFER and reading the I2CxRXB register clears this bit.
DIRECTION AS PER I2C MODE If the user tries to read I2CxRXB when it is empty (i.e.,
RXBF = 0), receive read error bit (RXRE) is set and a
Modes MODE[2:0] I2CxADB0 I2CxADB1
NACK will be generated. The user must clear the error
Slave (7-bit) 000 RX — bit to resume normal operation.
001 RX — The transmit buffer holds one byte of data while
Slave (10-bit) 010 RX RX another can be shifted out through the SDA pin. The
011 RX RX user can access the buffer by software (or DMA)
through the I2CxTXB register. When the I2CxTXB does
Master (7-bit) 100 — TX
not contain any transmit data, the transmit buffer empty
Master (10-bit) 101 TX TX status bit (TXBE) is set. At this point, the user can load
Multi-Master 110 RX TX another byte into the buffer.
(7-bit) RX TX
111 If the user tries to write I2CxTXB when it is NOT empty
(i.e. TXBE = 0), transmit write error flag bit (TXWE) is
33.3.10.1 Slave Mode (7-bit) set and the new data is discarded. When TXWE is set,
In 7-bit Slave mode, I2CxADB0 is loaded with the the user must clear this error condition to resume
received matching address and R/W data. The normal operation.
I2CxADB1 register is ignored in this mode. By setting the CLRBF bit in the I2CxSTAT1 register, the
user can clear both receive and transmit buffers.
33.3.10.2 Slave Mode (10-bit) CLRBF will also clear the I2CxRXIF and I2CxTXIF bits.
In 10-bit Slave mode, I2CxADB0 is loaded with the
lower eight bits of the matching received address. 33.3.12 CLOCK STRETCHING
I2CxADB1 is loaded with full eight bits of the high When a slave device has not completed processing
address byte, including the R/W bit. data, it can delay the transfer of more data through the
process of clock stretching. An addressed slave device
33.3.10.3 Master Mode (7-bit) may hold the SCL clock line low after receiving or send-
The I2CxADB0 register is ignored in this mode. In 7-bit ing a bit, indicating that it is not yet ready to continue.
Master mode, the I2CxADB1 register is used to copy The master will attempt to raise the SCL line in order to
address data byte, including the R/W value, to the Shift transfer the next bit, but will detect that the clock line
register. has not yet been released. Since the SCL connection
is open-drain, the slave has the ability to hold the line
33.3.10.4 Master Mode (10-bit) low until it is ready to continue communicating. Clock
stretching allows receivers that cannot keep up with a
In 10-bit Master mode, the I2CxADB0 register stores
transmitter to control the flow of incoming data.
the low address data byte value that will be copied to
the Shift register after the high address byte is shifted
out. The I2CxADB1 register stores the high address
byte value that will be copied to the Shift register. It is

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Clock stretching can be enabled or disabled by the • Acknowledge status
clearing or setting of CSD (clock stretching disable) bit - The acknowledge status time interrupt and
in the I2CxCON1 register. This bit is valid only in the hold enable (ACKTIE) bit is used to enable
Multi-Master and Slave modes of operation. clock stretching after the ACK phase of a
transmission. This bit enables clock
33.3.12.1 Clock Stretching for Buffer stretching for all address/data transactions;
Operations address, write, or read. Following the ACK,
If enabled, clock stretching is forced during buffer read/ the slave hardware will set CSTR. Clock
write operations. For example, in Slave mode if RXBF stretching from ACKTIE is released by
= 1 (receive buffer full), the clock will be stretched after software clearing the CSTR bit.
the seventh falling edge of SCL. The SCL line is
33.3.13 DATA BYTE COUNT
released only after the user reads data from the receive
buffer. This ensures that there is never a receive data The I2CxCNT register is used to specify the number of
overflow. In this situation, if clock stretching is disabled, bytes in a complete I2C packet. The value in this
the RXO bit in I2CxCON1 is set indicating a receive register will decrement every time a data byte is
overflow. When set, the module will always respond received or transmitted from the I2C module. The
with a NACK. I2CxCNT register will not decrement past zero.
Similarly, when TXBE = 1 (transmit buffer empty) and If a byte transfer causes the I2CxCNT register to
I2CxCNT! = 0, the clock is stretched after the 8th falling decrement to zero, the Count Interrupt Flag bit (CNTIF)
edge of SCL. The SCL line is released only after the in I2CxPIR is set. This flag bit is set on the 9th falling
user loads new data into the transmit buffer. This edge of SCL for transmit and receive operations.
ensures that there is never a transmit underflow. In this The I2CxCNT register can be auto-loaded if the ACNT
situation, if clock stretching is disabled, the TXU bit in bit in the I2CxCON2 register is set. When ACNT bit is
I2CxCON1 is set indicating a transmit underflow. When set, the data byte following the address byte is loaded
set, the module will always respond with a NACK. into the I2CxCNT register.
33.3.12.2 Clock Stretching for Other Slave
Operations Note 1: I2CxCNT decrements on the eighth
There are three Interrupt and Hold bits that provide (receive) or ninth (transmit) falling edge
clock stretching in Slave mode. These bits can also be of SCL; writes during this bit time can
used in conjunction with the I2CxIE bit in PIRx register corrupt the value.
to generate system level interrupts. 2: If the block size of the message is greater
• Incoming address match interrupt than 255, the I2CxCNT register can be
- Clock stretching after an incoming matching updated mid-message to prevent decre-
address byte is enabled by the Address ment to zero.
Interrupt and Hold (ADRIE) bit of the I2CxPIE
register. When ADRIE = 1, the CSTR bit is 33.4 I2C Slave Mode
set and the SCL line is stretched following the
8th falling edge of SCL of a received The I2C Slave mode operates in one of four modes
matching address. This allows the user to selected in the Mode bits of I2CxCON0. The modes
read the received address from the can be divided into 7- and 10-bit Addressing modes.
I2CADB0/1 registers and selectively ACK/ 10-bit Addressing modes operate the same as 7-bit
NACK based on the received address. Clock with some additional overhead for handling the larger
stretching from ADRIE is released by addresses.
software clearing the CSTR bit.
• Data Write Interrupt 33.4.1 SLAVE ADDRESSING MODES
- The data write interrupt and hold enable The I2CxADR/1/2/3 registers contain the Slave mode
(WRIE) bit is used to enable clock stretching addresses. The first byte received after a Start or
after a received data byte. When WRIE = 1, Restart condition is compared against the values
the CSTR bit is set, and the SCL line is stored in these registers. If the byte matches a value, it
stretched, following the 8th falling SCL edge is loaded into the I2CxADB0/1 registers. If the value
for incoming slave data. This bit allows user does not match, there is no response from the module.
software to selectively ACK/NACK each The I2C module can be configured in the following
received data byte. Clock stretching from Slave configurations.
WRIE is released by software clearing the
CSTR bit.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.4.1.1 7-bit Addresses Mode
In this mode, the LSb of the received data byte is Note: Even though 10-bit addressing calls out
ignored when determining if there is an address match. only 10-bits used in the address
All four I2CxADR registers are independently comparison, all 15 address bits in
compared to the received address byte. I2CxADR0/1 are compared in these
modes.
33.4.1.2 7-bit Addresses with Masking
In this mode, the value in I2CxADR0 is masked with the 33.4.2 GENERAL CALL ADDRESS
value in I2CxADR1 to determine if an address match SUPPORT
occurred. A second address and mask are also The addressing procedure for the I2C bus is such that
compared from I2CxADR2/3. When Mode[2:0] = 001 the first byte after the Start condition usually
or 111, the I2CxADR1/3 registers serve as the mask determines which device will be the slave addressed by
value for I2CxADR0/2. All seven bits of the address can the master device. The exception is the general call
be masked address which can address all devices. When this
address is used, all devices should, in theory, respond
33.4.1.3 10-bit Addresses
with an ACK. The general call address is a reserved
In this mode, the values stored in I2CxADR0 and address in the I2C protocol, defined as address 0x00.
I2CxADR1 registers are used to create a 10-bit In order for the slave hardware to ACK this address, it
address. A second 10-bit compare address is formed must be enabled by setting the GCEN bit in the
from I2CxADR2 and I2CxADR3. I2CxCON2 register. Setting one of the I2CxADR0/1/2/3
registers to 0x00 is not required. Figure 33-5 shows a
33.4.1.4 10-bit Address with Masking General Call reception sequence.
In this mode, the I2CxADR0/1 registers are used to If the ADRIE bit is set, the module will clock stretch after
form a 10-bit address, and the I2CxADR2/3 registers the eighth SCL pulse just like any other address match.
are used to form a 10-bit mask for that address. When
MODE[2:0] = 011, the I2CxADR2/3 registers serve as Note: General Call addressing is supported in
the mask value for the 10-bit address stored in only 7-bit Addressing modes
I2CxADR0/1.
FIGURE 33-5: SLAVE MODE GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SEQUENCE
Rev. 10-000 292B

1/28/201 9
Add ress is compare d to Gen eral Call Address

afte r ACK, set interrup t
Receivi ng Data ACK

Gen eral Ca ll A ddress ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SDA
SCL
S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ADRIF
Cleared by so ftwa re
Matchin g a ddress written to I2CxA DB0

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.4.3 SLAVE OPERATION IN 7-BIT module becomes idle.
ADDRESSING MODE 13. If the receive buffer is full from the previous
The Least Significant bit (LSb) in an address byte transaction i.e. RXBF = 1 (I2CxRXIF = 1), CSTR
transmitted by the master is used to determine if the is set. Slave software must read data out of
Master wants to read from or write to the Slave device. I2CxRXB to resume communication.
If set, it denotes that the Master wants to read from the 14. Master sends 8th SCL pulse of the data byte. D
slave and if cleared it means the master wants to write bit is set, WRIF is set.
to the slave device. If there is an address match, the R/ 15. I2CxRXB is loaded with new data, RXBF bit is
W bit is copied to the R bit of the I2CxSTAT0 register. set, I2CxRXIF is set.
16. If Data write interrupt and hold is enabled
33.4.3.1 Slave Reception (7-bit Addressing (WRIE = 1), CSTR is set, I2CxIF is set. Slave
Mode) software can read data from I2CxRXB and set/
This section describes the sequence of events for the clear ACKDT before releasing SCL by clearing
I2C module configured as an I2C slave in 7-bit CSTR.
Addressing mode and is receiving data. Figure 33-6, 17. If I2CxCNT = 0, the ACKCNT value is output to
Figure 33-7, and Figure 33-8 are used as a visual the SDA; else, if I2CxCNT!= 0, the ACKDT value
reference for this description. is used and the value of I2CxCNT is
1. Master asserts Start condition (can also be a decremented.
restart) on the bus. Start condition Interrupt Flag 18. The ACK value is copied out to SDA to be read
(SCIF) in I2CxPIR register is set. by the Master on the 9th SCL pulse.
2. If Start condition interrupt is enabled (SCIE bit is 19. If I2CxCNT = 0, CNTIF is set.
set), generic interrupt I2CxIF is set. 20. If a NACK was sent, NACKIF is set, module
3. Master transmits eight bits – 7-bit address and becomes idle.
R/W = 0. 21. If ACKTIE = 1, CSTR is set, I2CxIF is set. Slave
4. Received address is compared with the values software can read data from I2CxRXB clearing
in I2CxADR0/I2CxADR1/I2CxADR2/I2CxADR3 RXBF, before releasing SCL by clearing CSTR.
registers. Refer to section Section 33.4.1 22. Go to step 11.
“Slave Addressing Modes” for slave
addressing modes.
5. If address matches; SMA in I2CxSTAT0 register
is set, R/W is copied to R bit, D bit is cleared. If
the address does not match; module becomes
idle.
6. The matched address data is loaded into
I2CxADB0 (If ABD = 0) or I2CxRXB (if ABD = 1)
and ADRIF in I2CxPIR register is set.
7. If Address hold interrupt is enabled
(ADRIE = 1), CSTR is set. I2CxIF is set. Slave
software can read address from I2CxADB0 and
set/clear ACKDT before releasing SCL.
8. If there are any previous error conditions, e.g.,
Receive buffer overflow or transmit buffer under-
flow errors, Slave will force a NACK and the
module becomes idle.
9. ACKDT value is copied out to SDA for ACK
pulse to be read by the Master on the 9th SCL
pulse.
10. If the Acknowledge interrupt and hold is enabled
(ACKTIE = 1), CSTR is set, I2CxIF is set, then
Slave software can read address from
I2CxADB0 register and change the value of
ACKDT before releasing SCL by clearing
CSTR.
11. Master sends first seven SCL pulses of the data
byte or a Stop condition (in the case of NACK).
12. If Stop condition; PCIF in I2CxPIR register is set,

FIGURE 33-6: I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (ACKTIE = 0, ADRIE = 0, WRIE = 0)
DS40001919E-page 554
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000 293B
1/28/201 9
Bus Master sends

Matching Received Address From Slave to Master stop condition
loaded into I2CxADB0
Start R/W = 0 Receiving Data Receiving Data ACK = 1 Stop
SDA
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CSTR
CSTR is not held low
SMA
SCIF is set
PCIF is set
R
ACKTIF is set WRIF is set ACKTIF is set WRIF is set ACKTIF is set
R/W c opied from matching address
ADRIF is set NACKIF is set
D
Matching address written to I2CxADB0
I2CxCNT 0x02 0x02 0x01 0x00

Slave sends ACKCNT
value for I2CxCNT = 0
CNTIF is set
RXBF
I2CxRXIF set I2CxRXIF set

Software reads I2CxRXB
clearing I2CxRXIF
FIGURE 33-7: I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION WITH I2CxCNT (ACKTIE = 1, ADRIE = 0, WRIE = 0)
Rev. 10-000 294B

1/28/201 9
Bus Master sends

stop condition
From Slave to Master
S Receive Address Receive Data Receive Data P
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
NACK
SDA A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 R/W= 0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CSTR
SCIF is set Software clears CSTR

Software clears CSTR No CSTR for NACK
R
ACKTIF is set WRIF is set ACKTIF is set WRIF is set ACKTIF is set
R/W copied from matching address
NACKIF is set
ADRIF is set
D
matching address copied to
I2CxADB0
I2CxCNT 0x02 0x02 0x01 0x00
Slave sends ACKCNT

value for I2CxCNT = 0
CNTIF is set
RXBF
Data byte written to I2CxRXB Second data byte written to

I2CxRXB
I2CxRXIF set
I2CxRXIF set
Software reads I2CxRXB
clearing I2CxRXIF
DS40001919E-page 555
FIGURE 33-8: I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (ACKTIE = 0, ADRIE = 1, WRIE = 1)
DS40001919E-page 556
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000 295B
1/28/201 9
Master sends
Master Releases SDA to
stop condition
slave for ACK sequence
S
Receiving Data Received Data P
Receiving Address R/W = 0 NACK
SDA A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Clock is held low until CSTR is set to ‘1’
CSTR
Software clears CSTR, Software clears CSTR
CSTR is set by hardware CSTR is set by hardware SCL is released SCL is released
R
WRIF is set WRIF is set ACKTIF is set
R/W copied from ma tching address
ADRIF is set NACKIF is set
D
matching address written to
Data byte written to I2CxRXB Second data byte to I2CxRXB
I2CxADB0
ACKDT
Software reads I2CxADB0 Slave software

Software clears ACKDT sets ACKDT
ACKT
ACKT set by hard ware on ACKT cleared by
8th falling edge of SCL hardware in 9th rising
edge of SCL
I2CxCNT 0x44 0x44 0x43 0x42
RXBF
I2CxRXIF is set I2CxRXIF is set

Software reads d ata from I2CxRXB Software reads d ata from I2CxRXB
Clearing I2CxRXIF Clearing I2CxRXIF
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.4.3.2 Slave Transmission (7-bit
Addressing Mode)
This section describes the sequence of events for the
I2C module configured as an I2C slave in 7-bit
Addressing mode and is transmitting data. Figure 33-9
and Figure 33-10 are used as a visual reference for this
description.
1. Master asserts Start condition (can also be a
restart) on the bus. Start condition Interrupt Flag
(SCIF) in I2CxPIR register is set.
2. If Start condition interrupt is enabled (SCIE bit is
set), generic interrupt I2CxIF is set.
3. Master transmits eight bits – 7-bit address and
R/W = 1.
4. Received address is compared with the values
in I2CxADR0/I2CxADR1/I2CxADR2/I2CxADR3
registers. Refer to Section 33.4.1 “Slave
Addressing Modes” for Slave Addressing
modes.
5. If address matches; SMA in I2CxSTAT0 register
is set, R/W is copied to R bit, D bit is cleared. If
the address does not match; module becomes
idle.
6. The matched address data is loaded into
I2CxADB0 (If ABD = 0) or I2CxRXB (if ABD = 1)
and ADRIF in I2CxPIR register is set.
(ADRIE = 1), CSTR is set. I2CxIF is set. Slave
software can read address from I2CxADB0 and
set/clear ACKDT before releasing SCL. SCL
line can be released by clearing CSTR.
8. If the transmit buffer is empty from the previous
transaction, i.e. TXBE = 1 and I2CxCNT!= 0
(I2CxTXIF = 1), CSTR is set. Slave software
must load data into I2CxTXB to release SCL.
I2CxCNT decrements after the byte is loaded
into the Shift register.
9. Slave hardware waits for 9th SCL pulse with
ACK data from Master.
10. If I2CxCNT = 0, CNTIF is set.
(ACKTIE = 1), CSTR is set, I2CxIF is set.
12. Slave software can change the value of ACKDT
before releasing SCL by clearing CSTR.
13. Master sends eight SCL pulses to clock out data
or asserts a Stop condition to end the
transaction.
14. Go to step 8.

FIGURE 33-9: I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION
DS40001919E-page 558
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Rev. 10-000 296B
1/28/201 9
Master sends
Master Releases SDA stop condition
Master sends ACK Master sends NACK
Slave sends ACK
S Slave Transmitting Data Slave Transmitting Data
R/W = 1
SDA A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CSTR
SCIF is set PCIF is set

Software write to
I2CxTXB, clears CSTR
R
ADRIF is set ACKTIF is set ACKTIF is set
matching address copy to I2CxADB0
ACKSTAT
Master’s ACK NACKIF is set

copied to ACKSTAT
I2CxCNT 0x02 0x01 0x00 0x00

Software writes
I2CxCNT CNTIF is set
TXBE
I2CxTXIF is set for read address when
TXBE = 1value in I2CxCNT is ignored Software writes I2CxTXIF NOT set
Software write to I2CxTXB, clears CSTR I2CxTXB
MSb is of I2CxTXB copied to SDA MSb is of I2CxTXB copied to SDA No new TX data on I2CxCNT = 0
Data byte 1 loaded from Data byte 2 loaded from (shifter loaded 8’b1111 1111)
I2CxTXB to shifter I2CxTXB to shifter
I2CxTXIF set I2CxTXIF NOT set
FIGURE 33-10: I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION (NO CLOCK STRETCHING)
Rev. 10-000 297B

1/28/201 9
Master sends
Master Releases SDA stop condition
Master sends ACK Master sends NACK
Slave sends ACK
S
R/W = 1 Slave Transmitting Data Slave Transmitting Data P
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CSTR
R
ADRIF is set ACKTIF is set ACKTIF is set
matching address copy to I2CxADB0
ACKSTAT
Master’s ACK NACKIF is set

copied to ACKSTAT
I2CxCNT 0x02 0x01 0x00 0x00
CNTIF is set
TXBE
Software writes
DS40001919E-page 559
Before Start, software loads

I2CxTXB
one byte in I2CxTXB
No new TX data on I2CxCNT = 0
MSb is of I2CxTXB copied to SDA MSb is of I2CxTXB copied to SDA (shifter loaded 8’b1111 1111)
Data byte 1 loaded from Data byte 2 loaded from
I2CxTXB to shifter I2CxTXB to shifter
I2CxTXIF set I2CxTXIF NOT set I2CxTXIF NOT set
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.4.3.3 Slave operation in 10-bit Addressing a NACK and the module becomes idle.
Mode 10. Master transmits low address data byte.
In 10-bit Addressing mode, the first received byte is 11. If the low address matches; SMA is set, ADRIF
compared to the binary value of ‘11110A9A80’. A9 and is set, R/W is copied to R/W bit, D/A bit is
A8 are the two MSb of the 10-bit address. The first byte cleared, low address data is copied to
is compared with the value in I2CxADR1 and I2CxADB0, and ACKDT is copied to SDA. If the
I2CxADR3 registers. After the high byte is address does not match; module becomes idle.
acknowledged, the low address byte is clocked in and 12. If address hold interrupt is enabled, the CSTR
all eight bits are compared to the low address value in bit is set as mentioned in step 6. Slave software
the I2CxADR0 and I2CxADR2 registers. A high and low can read low address byte from I2CxADB0
address match as a write request is required at the start register and change ACKDT value before
of all 10-bit addressing communication. To initiate a releasing SCL.
read, the Master needs to issue a Restart once the 13. Master sends ninth SCL pulse for ACK.
slave is addressed and clock in the high address with 14. If the Acknowledge interrupt and hold is enabled
the R/W bit set. The slave hardware will then (ACKTIE = 1), CSTR is set, I2CxIF is set.
acknowledge the read request and prepare to clock out
15. Slave software can read address from
data. The SMA (slave active) bit is set only when both
I2CxADB0 and I2CxADB1 registers and change
the high and low address bytes match.
the value of ACKDT before releasing SCL by
clearing CSTR.
Note: All seven bits of the received high address 16. Master sends first seven SCL pulses of the data
are compared to the values in the byte or a Stop condition (in the case of NACK).
I2CxADR1 and I2CxADR3 registers. The 17. If Stop condition; PCIF in I2CxPIR register is set,
five-bit ‘11110’ high address format is not module becomes idle.
enforced by module hardware. It is up to 18. If the receive buffer is full from the previous
the user to configure these bits correctly. transaction i.e. RXBF = 1, I2CxRXIF = 1, CSTR
is set. Slave software must read data out of
33.4.3.4 Slave Reception (10-bit Addressing I2CxRXB to resume communication.
Mode) 19. Master sends eighth SCL pulse of the data byte.
This section describes the sequence of events for the D bit is set, WRIF is set. I2CxRXB is loaded with
I2C module configured as an I2C slave in 10-bit new data, RXBF bit is set.
Addressing mode and is receiving data. Figure 33-11 is 20. If Data write interrupt and hold is enabled
used as a visual reference for this description. (WRIE = 1), CSTR is set, I2CxIF is set. Slave
1. Master asserts Start condition (can also be a software can read data from I2CxRXB and set/
restart) on the bus. Start condition Interrupt Flag clear ACKDT before releasing SCL by clearing
(SCIF) in I2CxPIR register is set. If Start CSTR.
condition interrupt is enabled (SCIE bit is set), 21. If I2CxCNT = 0, the ACKCNT value is output to
generic interrupt I2CxIF is set. the SDA; else, the ACKDT value is used and the
2. Master transmits high address byte with R/W = 0. value of I2CxCNT is decremented.
3. The received high address is compared with the 22. Master sends SCL pulse for ACK.
values in I2CxADR1 and I2CxADR3 registers. 23. If I2CxCNT = 0, CNTIF is set.
4. If high address matches; R/W is copied to R bit, 24. If the response was a NACK; NACKIF is set,
D bit is cleared, high address data is copied to module becomes idle.
I2CxADB1. If the address does not match; 25. If ACKTIE = 1, CSTR is set, I2CxIF is set. Slave
module becomes idle. software can read data from I2CxRXB clearing
5. If Address hold interrupt is enabled RXBF; before releasing SCL by clearing CSTR.
(ADRIE = 1), CSTR is set. I2CxIF is set. 26. Go to step 16.
6. Slave software can read high address from
I2CxADB1 and set/clear ACKDT before releas-
ing SCL.
pulse. SCL line is released by clearing CSTR.
8. Master sends ninth SCL pulse for ACK.
9. Slave can force a NACK at this point due to
previous error not being cleared. E.g. Receive
buffer overflow or transmit buffer underflow
errors. In these cases the Slave hardware forces

FIGURE 33-11: I2C SLAVE, 10-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION WITH STOP (ADB = 1)
Rev. 10-000 298B

1/28/201 9
R/W = 0 from I2CxADB1[0]

S Recieve High Address Recieve Low Address Receive Data Stop
SDA
1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
High Address copied Low Address copied
to I2CxRXB to I2CxRXB
SCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CSTR
PCIF is set
SCIF is set
R
R/W copied from matching address ACKTIF is ACKTIF is
ACKTIF NOT set for
ADRIF is set set set
high address
matching address copied to I2CxRXB
SMA
SMA set only after full

address match Hardware clears SMA
DS40001919E-page 561
RXBF
I2CxRXIF is set I2CxRXIF is set I2CxRXIF is set

Software reads address from Software reads address from Software reads data from
I2CxRXB, Clearing I2CxRXIF I2CxRXB, Clearing I2CxRXIF I2CxRXB, Clearing I2CxRXIF
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.4.3.5 Slave Transmission (10-bit 18. If SMA = 1, and if high address matches; R/W is
Addressing Mode) copied to R bit, D bit is cleared, high address
data is copied to I2CxADB1, and ACKDT is out-
put to SDA. If the address does not match or
I2C module configured as an I2C slave in 10-bit
SMA = 0; module become idle.
Addressing mode and is transmitting data. Figure 33-
12 is used as a visual reference for this description. 19. If ADRIE = 1, CSTR is set. I2CxIF is set. Slave
software can read address from I2CxADB0/1
1. Master asserts Start condition (can also be a and set/clear ACKDT. The ACKDT value is
restart) on the bus. Start condition Interrupt Flag copied out to SDA. SCL is released by clearing
(SCIF) in I2CxPIR register is set. If Start CSTR bit.
condition interrupt is enabled (SCIE bit is set),
20. If TXBE = 1 and I2CxCNT!= 0, I2CxTXIF and
generic interrupt I2CxIF is set.
CSTR is set. Slave software must load data into
2. Master transmits high address byte with R/W = 0. I2CxTXB to release SCL.
3. The received high address is compared with the 21. Master sends SCL pulse for ACK. If
values in I2CxADR1 and I2CxADR3 registers. I2CxCNT = 0, CNTIF is set.
4. If high address matches; R/W is copied to R bit, 22. If NACK; NACKIF is set, slave goes idle.
D bit is cleared, high address data is copied to
23. If ACKTIE = 1, CSTR is set, I2CxIF is set.
I2CxADB1. If the address does not match;
module becomes idle. 24. Master sends eight SCL pulses to clock out
data.
(ADRIE = 1), CSTR is set. I2CxIF is set. 25. Go to step 20.
6. Slave software can read high address from
I2CxADB1 and set/clear ACKDT before
releasing SCL.
pulse. SCL line is released by clearing CSTR.
8. Master sends ninth SCL pulse for ACK.
9. Slave can force a NACK at this point due to
previous error not being cleared. E.g. Receive
buffer overflow or transmit buffer underflow
errors. In these cases the Slave hardware forces
a NACK and the module becomes idle.
10. Master transmits low address data byte.
11. If the low address matches; SMA is set, ADRIF
is set, low address data is copied to I2CxADB0,
and ACKDT is copied to SDA. If the address
does not match; module becomes idle.
12. If address hold interrupt is enabled, the CSTR
bit is set as mentioned in step 6. Slave software
can read low address byte from I2CxADB0
register and change ACKDT value before
releasing SCL.
13. Master sends 9th SCL pulse for ACK.
(ACKTIE = 1), CSTR is set, I2CxIF is set.
15. Slave software can read address from
I2CxADB0 and I2CxADB1 registers and change
the value of ACKDT before releasing SCL by
clearing CSTR.
16. Master asserts Restart condition (cannot be
Start) on the bus. Restart Condition Interrupt
Flag (RSCIF) is set. If the Restart Condition
Interrupt is enabled, generic interrupt I2CxIF is
set.
17. Master transmits high address byte with R/W = 1.

FIGURE 33-12: I2C SLAVE, 10-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION
Rev. 10-000 299B

1/28/201 9
Master sends
Master sends Master sends stop event
start event restart event Master sends
NACK
R/W = 0 R/W = 1
S Sr ACK = 1STOP
SDA 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
High Address copied Low Address copied High Address copied Transmit data loaded from
to I2CxADB1[7:0] to I2CxADB0[7:0] to I2CxADB1[7:0] I2CxTXB to TX shift reg
SCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CSTR
Hardware clea rs SMA
SMA
SCIF is set Full matching address

PCIF is set
RSIF is set
R
R/W copied from matching ad dress ACKTIF NOT set
ADRIF is set for high address /w ACKTIF is set ACKTIF is set
ACKTIF is set
D
matching add ress copied to
I2CxADB1/I2CxRXB
TXBE
I2CxTXIF is set
DS40001919E-page 563
Software load s I2CxTXB
I2CxCNT 0x01 0x00
Software load s I2CxCNT

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.5 I2C Master Mode After each byte is received, an Acknowledge bit is
transmitted. Start and Stop conditions indicate the
Master mode is enabled by setting and clearing the beginning and end of the transmission.
appropriate MODE[2:0] bits in I2CxCON0 and then by
setting the EN bit. Master mode of operation is 33.5.2 MASTER CLOCK SOURCE AND
supported by interrupt generation on buffer full (RXBF), ARBITRATION
buffer empty (TXBE), and the detection of the Start,
Restart, and Stop conditions. The Restart (RS) and The I2C module clock source is selected by the
Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the I2C I2CxCLK register. The I2C Clock provides the SCL
module is disabled. Control of the I2C bus is asserted output clock for Master mode and is used by the Bus
when the BFRE bit of I2CSTAT0 is set. Free timer. The I2C clock can be sourced from several
peripherals.
33.5.1 I2C MASTER MODE OPERATION
33.5.3 BUS FREE TIME
The master device generates all of the serial clock
pulses and the Start, Restart, and Stop conditions. A In Master modes, the BFRE bit of the I2CxSTAT0
transfer is ended with a Stop condition or with a Restart register gives an indication of the bus idle status. The
condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also master hardware cannot assert a Start condition until
the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will this bit is set by the hardware. This prevents the master
not be released, and MMA bit will stay set signifying from colliding with other masters that may already be
that the Master module is still active. talking on the bus. The BFRET[1:0] bits of I2CxCON1
allow selection of 8 to 64 pulses of the I2C clock input
The steps to initiate a transaction depends on the before asserting the BFRE bit. The BFRET bits are
setting of the address buffer disable bit (ABD) of the used to ensure that the I2C module always follows the
I2CxCON2 register. minimum Stop Hold Time. The I2C timing requirements
• ABD = 0 (Address buffers are enabled) are listed in the electrical specifications chapter.
In this case, the master module will use the address Note: I2C clock is not required to have a 50%
stored in the address buffer registers (I2CxADB0/1) to duty cycle.
initiate communication with a slave device. User
software needs to set the Start bit (S) in the I2CxCON0 33.5.4 MASTER CLOCK TIMING
register to start communication. This is valid for both 7-
The clock generation in the I2C module can be
bit and 10-bit Addressing modes.
configured using the Fast Mode Enable (FME) bit of the
• ABD = 1 (Address buffers are disabled) I2CxCON2 register. This bit controls the number of
In this case, the slave address is transmitted through times the SCL pin is sampled before the master
the transmit buffer and the contents of the address hardware drives it.
buffers are ignored. User software needs to write the
slave address to the transmit buffer (I2CxTXB) to 33.5.4.1 Clock Timing with FME = 0
initiate communication. Writing to the Start bit is One TSCL, consists of five clocks of the I2C clock input.
ignored in this mode. This is valid for both 7-bit and 10- The first clock is used to drive SCL low, the third
bit Addressing modes. releases SCL high. The fourth and fifth clocks are used
to detect if the SCL pin is, in fact, high or being
33.5.1.1 Master Transmitter stretched by a slave.
In Master Transmitter mode, the first byte transmitted If a slave is clock stretching, the hardware waits;
contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 checking SCL on each successive I2C clock,
bits) and the Read/Write (R/W) bit. In the case of proceeding only after detecting SCL high. Figure 33-13
master transmitter, the R/W bit will be logic ‘0’. Serial shows the clock synthesis timing when FME = 0.
data is transmitted eight bits at a time. After each byte
is transmitted, an Acknowledge bit is received. Start
and Stop conditions are output to indicate the
beginning and the end of a serial transfer.
33.5.1.2 Master Receiver

In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted
contains the slave address of the transmitting device (7
bits) and the R/W bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be
logic ‘1’. Thus, the first byte transmitted is a 7-bit slave
address followed by a ‘1’ to indicate the receive bit.
Serial data is received via SDA, while SCL outputs the
serial clock. Serial data is received eight bits at a time.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 33-13: CLOCK SYNTHESIS TIMING (FME = 0)
Rev. 10-000 305A
8/16/201 6
TSCL TSCL
2
I C_clk
SDA
SDA delay time
SCL
Master device
releases clock Slave releases bus
SCL is shortened but
is 2*TCLK, min
Master drives Master device
SCL low detects clock high twice Master waits to
detect SCL twice
33.5.4.2 Clock Timing with FME = 1

One TSCL, consists of four clocks of the I2C clock input.
The first clock is used to drive SCL low, the third
releases SCL high, and the fourth is used to detect if
the clock is, in fact, high or being stretched by a slave.
If a slave is clock stretching, the hardware waits;
checking SCL on each successive I2C clock,
proceeding only after detecting SCL high. Figure 33-14
shows the clock synthesis timing when FME = 1.
FIGURE 33-14: CLOCK SYNTHESIS TIMING (FME = 1)

Rev. 10-000 306A
8/16/201 6
TSCL TSCL TSCL

2
I C_clk
SDA
SDA delay time
SCL
Master device
Slave releases
releases clock
bus, a shortened
Master device SCL clock appears
Master drives
detects clock high Master waits to detect
SCL low
SCL no longer held low

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.5.5 I2C MASTER MODE START asserting the Start condition. The action of the SDA
CONDITION TIMING being driven low while SCL is high is the Start condition,
causing the SCIF bit to be set. One TSCL later the SCL
The user can initiate a Start condition by either writing
is asserted low, ending the start sequence. Figure 33-
to the Start bit (S) of the I2CxCON0 register or by
15 shows the Start condition timing.
writing to the I2CxTXB register based on the ABD bit
setting. Master hardware waits for BFRE = 1, before
FIGURE 33-15: START CONDITION TIMING

Rev. 10-000 307A
8/16/201 6
BFRE = 1, start is asserted

Set SCIF bit
Write to START bit occurs here At completion of Start,

hardware loads I2CSR from I2CADB0/1
S
SDA
1st bit 2nd bit
SCL
I2C_clk 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
33.5.6 I2C MASTER MODE REPEATED

START CONDITION TIMING
A Repeated Start condition occurs when the Start bit of
the I2CxCON0 register is set and the master module is
waiting from a Restart clock stretch event (RSEN = 1
and I2CxCNT = 0).
When the Start bit is set, the SDA pin is released high
for TSCL/2. Then the SCL pin is released floated high)
for TSCL/2. If the SDA pin is detected low, bus collision
flag (BCLIF) is set and the master goes idle. If SDA is
detected high, the SDA pin will be pulled low (Start
condition) for TSCL. Last, SCL is asserted low and
I2CxADB0/1 is loaded into the Shift register. As soon
as a Restart condition is detected on the SDA and SCL
pins, the RSCIF bit is set. Figure 33-16 shows the
timings for repeated Start Condition.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 33-16: REPEATED START CONDITION TIMING
Rev. 10-000 308A

8/16/201 6
Repeated Start
RSCIF bit set
2
Write to I CCON0<START>
Completion of Restart
Sr
st
1 bit
SDA
I2CTSR loaded from I2CADB0/1
SCL
I2C_clk 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2
33.5.7 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE should set the ACKDT bit before starting an
TIMING Acknowledge sequence. The master then waits one
clock period (TSCL) and the SCL pin is released high.
An Acknowledge sequence is enabled automatically
When the SCL pin is sampled high (clock arbitration),
following an address/data byte transmission. The SCL
the master counts another TSCL. The SCL pin is then
pin is pulled low and the contents of the Acknowledge
pulled low. Figure 33-17 shows the timings for
Data bits (ACKDT/ACKCNT) are presented on the SDA
Acknowledge sequence.
pin. If the user wishes to generate an Acknowledge,
then the ACKDT bit should be cleared. If not, the user
FIGURE 33-17: ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE TIMING

Rev. 10-000 309A
8/16/201 6
Acknowledge sequence starts here,

ACKDT = 0
TSCL
SDA D0 ACK
SCL 8 9
xxxIF
Cleared in
WRIF set at software
the end of receive Cleared in
ASTIF set at the end
software
of Acknowledge sequence
33.5.8 STOP CONDITION TIMING transitions high while SCL is high, the PCIF bit of the
I2CxIF register is set. Figure 33-18 shows the timings
A Stop bit is asserted on the SDA pin at the end of
for a Stop condition.
receive/transmit when I2CxCNT = 0. After the last byte
of a receive/transmit sequence, the SCL line is held
low. The master asserts the SDA line low. The SCL pin
is then released high TSCL/2 later and is detected high.
The SDA pin is then released. When the SDA pin

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 33-18: STOP CONDITION DURING RECEIVE OR TRANSMIT
Rev. 10-000 310A
1/28/201 9
SCL = 1 for T SCL/2, followed by SDA = 1

PCIF bit is set
Stop condition starts Stop condition must be held for
falling edge of TSCL after Stop trans ition
9th clock
SDA ACK
SCL
I2C_clk 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
TSCL TSCL TSCL
SDA asserted low before rising edge of clock

to setup Stop condition
33.5.9 MASTER TRANSMISSION IN 7-BIT value of I2CxCNT register is decremented.

ADDRESSING MODE 6. If a NACK was received, Master hardware
This section describes the sequence of events for the asserts Stop or Restart
I2C module configured as an I2C master in 7-bit 7. If ABD = 0; i.e., Address buffers are enabled
Addressing mode and is transmitting data. Figure 33- If I2CxCNT = 0, Master hardware sends Stop or sets
19 is used as a visual reference for this description. MDR if RSEN = 1 and waits for the software to set the
1. If ABD = 0; i.e., Address buffers are enabled Start bit again to issue a restart condition.
Master software loads number of bytes to be If ABD = 1; i.e., Address buffers are disabled
transmitted in one sequence in I2CxCNT, slave If I2CxCNT = 0, Master hardware sends Stop or sets
address in I2CxADB1 with R/W = 0 and the first byte MDR if RSEN = 1 and waits for the software to write the
of data in I2CxTXB. Master software has to set the Start new address to the I2CxTXB register. Software writes
(S) bit to initiate communication. to the S bit are ignored in this case.
If ABD = 1; i.e., Address buffers are disabled 8. Master hardware outputs data on SDA.
Master software loads the number of bytes to be 9. If TXBE = 1 and I2CxCNT! = 0, I2CxTXIF and
transmitted in one sequence in I2CxCNT and the slave MDR bits are set and the clock is stretched on
address with R/W = 0 into the I2CxTXB register. Writing 8th falling SCL edge. The user can release the
to the I2CxTXB will assert the start condition on the bus clock by writing the next data byte to I2CxTXB
and sets the S bit. Software writes to the S bit are register.
ignored in this case. 10. Master hardware clocks in ACK from Slave, and
2. Master hardware waits for BFRE bit to be set; loads the next data byte from I2CTXB to the
then shifts out start and address. Shift register. The value of I2CxCNT is decre-
3. If the transmit buffer is empty (i.e., TXBE = 1) mented.
and I2CxCNT!= 0, the I2CxTXIF and MDR bits 11. Go to step 7.
are set and the clock is stretched on the 8th
falling SCL edge. Clock can be started by
loading the next data byte in I2CxTXB register.
4. Master sends out the 9th SCL pulse for ACK.
5. If the Master hardware receives ACK from Slave
device, it loads the next byte from the transmit
buffer (I2CxTXB) into the Shift register and the

FIGURE 33-19: I2C MASTER, 7-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION
Rev. 10-000 300B

1/28/201 9
From S lave to Ma ster
S R/W = 0 from I2CxA DB1[0] Master Transmitting Data

Master Transmitting Data STOP
SDA
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK
Add ress co pied fr om

I2CxA DB1[7:1]
SCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MMA
Softwa re sets START to

Hardware clears MMA o n S top
star t tra nsmission
ACKSTAT
I2CxCNT 0x02 0x01 0x00 0x00
CNTIF is set
I2CxCNT = 0
RSEN = 0, mas ter se nds Stop
TXBE
Softwa re writes
Before Start, I2CxTXB
DS40001919E-page 569
software loads one MSb is of I2CxTXB copied to SDA

MSb is of I2CxTXB copied to SDA
byte in I2CxTXB Second da ta byte loa ded fro m No new TX data o n I2CxCNT = 0
Data byte l oaded (shifter load ed 8’b111 1 1 111)
from I2CxTXB to shifter I2CxTXB to shifter
I2CxTXIF NOT set
I2CxTXIF is set I2CxTXIF NOT set
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.5.10 MASTER RECEPTION IN 7-BIT
ADDRESSING MODE
I2C module configured as an I2C master in 7-bit
Addressing mode and is receiving data. Figure 33-20 is
used as a visual reference for this description.
1. Master software loads slave address in
I2CxADB1 with R/W bit = 1 and number of bytes
to be received in one sequence in I2CxCNT
register.
2. Master hardware waits for BFRE bit to be set;
then shifts out start and address with R/W = 1.
3. Master sends out the 9th SCL pulse for ACK,
master hardware clocks in ACK from Slave
4. If ABD = 0; i.e., Address buffers are enabled
If NACK, master hardware sends Stop or sets MDR (if
RSEN = 1) and waits for user software to write to S bit
for restart.
If ABD = 1; i.e., Address buffers are disabled
If NACK, master hardware sends Stop or sets MDR (if
RSEN = 1) and waits for user software to load the new
address into I2CxTXB. Software writes to the S bit are
ignored in this case.
5. If ACK, master hardware receives 7-bits of data
into the Shift register.
6. If the receive buffer is full (i.e., RXBF = 1), clock
is stretched on 7th falling SCL edge.
7. Master software must read previous data out of
I2CxRXB to clear RXBF.
8. Master hardware receives 8th bit of data into the
shift register and loads it into I2CxRXB, sets
I2CxRXIF and RXBF bits. I2CxCNT is
decremented.
9. If I2CxCNT! = 0, master hardware clocks out
ACKDT as ACK value to slave. If I2CxCNT = 0,
master hardware clocks out ACKCNT as ACK
value to slave. It is up to the user to set the
values of ACKDT and ACKCNT correctly. If the
user does not set ACKCNT to ‘1’, the master
hardware will never send a NACK when
I2CxCNT becomes zero. Since a NACK was not
seen on the bus, the master hardware will also
not assert a Stop condition.
10. Go to step 4.

FIGURE 33-20: I2C MASTER, 7-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION
Rev. 10-000 301B

1/28/201 9
RSEN = 0;
Slave Sends ACK Master sends
stop condition
R/W = 1 from I2CxADB1[0] Master sends ACK Master sends NACK
S
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Slave Transmitting Data Slave Transmitting Data STOP
SCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Slave Address copied

from I2CxADB1[7:1]
Software sets START

to start transmission Hardware clears MMA
MMA
MDR
PCIF is set
SCIF is set
ACKDT
Master’s ACK NACK on CNT= 0

copied from ACKDT NACKIF is set
I2CxCNT 0x02 0x02 0x01 0x00
CNTIF is set
RXBF
DS40001919E-page 571
I2CxRXIF is set I2CxRXIF is set

Software reads data from I2CxRXB Software reads I2CxRXB
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.5.11 MASTER TRANSMISSION IN 10-BIT
ADDRESSING MODE
Addressing mode and is transmitting data. Figure 33-
21 is used as a visual reference for this description
1. If ABD = 0; i.e., Address buffers are enabled
Master software loads number of bytes to be
transmitted in one sequence in I2CxCNT, high address
byte of slave address in I2CxADB1 with R/W = 0, low
address byte in I2CxADB0 and the first byte of data in
I2CxTXB. Master software has to set the Start (S) bit to
initiate communication.
If ABD = 1; i.e., Address buffers are disabled
Master software loads the number of bytes to be
transmitted in one sequence in I2CxCNT and the high
address byte of the slave address with R/W = 0 into the
I2CxTXB register. Writing to the I2CxTXB will assert
the start condition on the bus and sets the S bit.
Software writes to the S bit are ignored in this case.
2. Master hardware waits for BFRE bit to be set;
then shifts out the start and high address and
waits for acknowledge.
3. If NACK, master hardware sends Stop.
4. If ABD = 0; i.e., Address buffer are enabled
If ACK, master hardware sends the low address byte
from I2CxADB0.
If ABD = 1; i.e., Address buffer are disabled
If ACK, master hardware sets TXIF and MDR bits and
the software has to write the low address byte into
I2CxTXB. Writing to I2CxTXB sends the low address
on the bus.
5. If TXBE = 1 and I2CxCNT! = 0, I2CxTXIF and
MDR bits are set. Clock is stretched on 8th
falling SCL edge until master software writes
next data byte to I2CxTXB.
6. Master hardware sends ninth SCL pulse for
ACK from slave and loads the shift register from
I2CxTXB. I2CxCNT is decremented.
7. If slave sends a NACK, master hardware sends
Stop and ends transmission.
8. If slave sends an ACK, master hardware outputs
data in the shift register on SDA. I2CxCNT value
is checked on the 8th falling SCL edge. If
I2CxCNT = 0; master hardware sends 9th SCL
pulse for ACK and CNTIF is set.
9. If I2CxCNT! = 0; go to step 5.

FIGURE 33-21: I2C MASTER, 10-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION
Rev. 10-000 302B

1/28/201 9
R/W = 0 from I2CxADB1

S Transmitting Data STOP
SDA
1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
High Address copied Low Address copied
from I2CxADB1[7:1] from I2CxADB0[7:0]
SCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MMA
Software sets START to
start transmission Hardware clears MMA
ACKSTAT
I2CxCNT 0x01 0x01 0x00 0x00
CNTIF is set
I2CxCNT = 0
Master sends Stop
TXBE
DS40001919E-page 573
I2CxTXIF NOT set I2CxTXIF NOT set

Before Start, software
loads one byte in I2CxTXB Data byte loaded No new TX data on I2CxCNT = 0
from I2CxTXB to shifter (shifter loaded 8’b1111 1111)
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.5.12 MASTER RECEPTION IN 10-BIT 7. Master hardware transmits the 9th clock pulse,
ADDRESSING MODE and receives the ACK/NACK response from the
slave. If an ACK was received, hardware sets
MDR and waits for hardware or software to set
the Start bit. If a NACK is received, hardware
Addressing mode and is receiving data. Figure 33-22 is
sets the NACK Detect Interrupt Flag (NACKIF),
used as a visual reference for this description.
and:
1. Depending on the configuration of the Address a) ABD = 0: Master generates a Stop condi-
Buffer Disable (ABD) bit, one of two methods tion, or sets the MDR bit (if RSEN is also
may be used to begin communication: set) and waits for software to set the Start
a) When ABD is clear (ABD = 0), the address bit to generate a Restart condition.
buffers, I2CxADB0 and I2CxADB1, are b) ABD = 1: Master generates a Stop condi-
enabled. In this case, the address high byte tion, or sets the MDR bit (if RSEN is also
and R/W bit are loaded into I2CxADB1, with set) and waits for software to load a new
R/W clear (R/W = 0). The address low byte address into I2CxTXB. Software writes to
is loaded into I2CxADB0, and the Restart the Start bit are ignored. If the NACK Detect
Enable (RSEN) bit of I2CxCON0 is set by Interrupt Enable (NACKIE) is also set, hard-
software. After these registers are loaded, ware sets the generic I2CxEIF bit.
software must set the Start bit to begin com-
8. Software loads I2CxCNT with the expected
munication. Once the S bit is set, master
number of received bytes.
hardware waits for the Bus Free (BFRE) bit
to be set before transmitting the Start condi- 9. If the ABD is clear (ABD = 0), software sets the
tion to avoid bus collisions. Start bit. If the ABD is set (ABD = 1), software
writes the address high byte with R/W bit into
b) When ABD is set (ABD = 1), the address
I2CxTXB, with R/W set (R/W = 1).
buffers are disabled. In this case, the num-
ber of expected received bytes are loaded 10. Master hardware transmits the Restart condition,
into I2CxCNT, the address high byte and R/ which sets the Restart Condition Interrupt Flag
W bit are loaded into I2CxTXB, with R/W (RSCIF) bit of I2CxPIR. If the Restart Condition
clear (R/W = 0). A write to I2CxTXB will Interrupt Enable (RSCIE) bit of I2CxPIE is also
cause master hardware to automatically set, the generic I2CxIF is set by hardware.
issue a Start condition once the bus is idle 11. Master hardware transmits the high address
(BFRE = 1). Software writes to the Start bit byte and R/W bit.
are ignored. 12. Master hardware samples SCL to determine if
2. Master hardware waits for BFRE to be set, then the slave is stretching the clock, and continues
shifts out the Start condition. Module hardware to sample SCL until the line is sampled high.
sets the Master Mode Active (MMA) bit of I2Cx- 13. Master hardware transmits the 9th clock pulse,
STAT0 and the Start Condition Interrupt Flag and receives the ACK/NACK response from the
(SCIF) of I2CxPIR. If the Start Condition Inter- slave. If an ACK is received, master hardware
rupt Enable (SCIE) bit of I2CxPIE is also set, the receives the first seven bits of the data byte into
generic I2CxIF is also set. the Receive Shift Register (RSR). If a NACK is
3. Master hardware transmits the address high received, and:
byte and R/W bit. a) ABD = 0: Master generates a Stop
4. Master hardware samples SCL to determine if condition, or sets the MDR bit (if RSEN is
the slave is stretching the clock, and continues also set) and waits for software to set the
to sample SCL until the line is sampled high. Start bit to generate a Restart condition.
5. Master hardware transmits the 9th clock pulse, b) ABD = 1: Master generates a Stop
and receives the ACK/NACK response from the condition, or sets the MDR bit (if RSEN is
slave. If a NACK was received, the NACK also set) and waits for software to load a
Detect Interrupt Flag (NACKIF) is set and the new address into I2CxTXB. Software writes
master immediately issues a Stop condition. If to the Start bit are ignored.
an ACK was received, module hardware trans- 14. If previous data is currently in I2CxRXB
mits the address low byte. (RXBF = 1) when the first seven bits are
6. Master hardware samples SCL to determine if received by the Receive Shift Register, hard-
the slave is stretching the clock, and continues ware sets MDR, and the clock is stretched after
to sample SCL until the line is sampled high. the 7th falling edge of SCL. This allows software
to read I2CxRXB, which clears the RXBF bit,
and prevents a receive buffer overflow. Once the
RXBF bit is clear, hardware releases SCL.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
15. Master hardware clocks in the 8th bit of the data
byte into the Receive Shift register, then trans-
fers the complete byte into I2CxRXB, which sets
the I2CxRXIF and RXBF bits. If I2CxRXIE is
also set, hardware sets the generic I2CxIF bit.
I2CxCNT is decremented by one.
16. Hardware checks I2CxCNT for a zero value. If
I2CxCNT is non-zero (I2CxCNT != 0), hardware
transmits the value of the Acknowledge Data
(ACKDT) bit as the acknowledgment response
to the slave. It is up to user software to properly
configure ACKDT. In most cases, ACKDT
should be clear (ACKDT = 0), which indicates an
ACK response. If I2CxCNT is zero (I2CxCNT =
0), hardware transmits the value of the Acknowl-
edge End of Count (ACKCNT) bit as the
acknowledgment response to the slave. CNTIF
is set, and master hardware either issues a Stop
condition or a Restart condition. It is up to user
software to properly configure ACKCNT. In most
cases, ACKCNT should be set (ACKCNT = 1),
which indicates a NACK response. When hard-
ware detects a NACK on the bus, it automati-
cally issues a Stop condition. If a NACK is not
detected, the Stop will not be generated, which
may lead to a stalled bus condition.
17. Master hardware receives the first seven bits of
the next data byte into the receive Shift register.
18. Repeat Steps 14 – 17 until all expected bytes
have been received.

FIGURE 33-22: I2C MASTER, 10-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (USING RSEN BIT)
Rev. 10-000 303B

1/28/201 9
Master s ends Master s ends

Master s ends
restart event stop c ondition
start event Master s ends
NACK
R/W = 0 from I2CxADB1 R/W = 1 from I2CxADB1
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
S Sr ACK = 1STOP
SDA 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Low Address c opied High Addres s copied Receive data loaded from
High Addres s copied
from I2CxADB1[7:1] from I2CxADB0[7:0] from I2CxADB1[7:1] RX shift reg to I2CxRXB
SCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Software sets ST ART to Software sets ST ART

start trans mission MMA remains set Hardware clears MMA
MMA
MDR
MDR cleared by
setting START
SCIF is set RSCIF is s et PCIF is set
ACKSTAT
Software sets RSEN Software clears RSEN

before setting START before setting START
RSEN
I2CxCN T 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x00

DS40001919E-page 576
Software writes
I2CxCN T before CNTIF is set
Software sends no write data
setting START I2CxCNT = 0
Master sends Stop
RXBF
I2CxRXIF is set
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.6 I2C Multi-Master Mode In master operation, the SDA line must be monitored
for arbitration to see if the signal level is the expected
In Multi-Master mode, the bus-free (BFRE) bit allows output level. This check is performed by hardware with
the master to determine when the bus is free. Control the result placed in the BCLIF bit. MMA is cleared when
of the I2C bus may be taken when the BFRE bit of the BCLIF is set. The states where arbitration can be lost
I2CxSTAT0 register is set. Interrupt generation on the are:
detection of a slave address match, ADRIE; causes a
clock stretch and allows user software to respond to the • Address Transfer
Master being addressed as a slave device. The slave • Data Transfer (master write)
active (SMA) bit is set for a matching received slave • Repeated Start Condition
address. • Acknowledge Condition
Clock arbitration occurs when the master, during any 33.6.1 MULTI-MASTER MODE BUS
receive, transmit or Restart/Stop condition, releases COLLISION
the SCL pin (SCL allowed to float high). When the SCL
pin is allowed to float high, the SCL line is monitored to Multi-Master mode support is achieved by bus
see if the pin is actually sampled high. arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits
onto the SDA pin, arbitration takes place when the
master outputs a ‘1’ on SDA, by letting SDA float high
Note: In this mode, the slave hardware has and another master asserts a ‘0’. When the SCL pin
priority over the master hardware. Master floats high, data is stable. If the expected data on SDA
mode communication can only be initiated is a ‘1’ and the data sampled on the SDA pin is ‘0’, then
when the SMA = 0. a bus collision has taken place. The master will set the
Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLIF and reset the I2C
bus to its Idle state. Refer to Figure 33-23 for a detailed
timing diagram.
FIGURE 33-23: BUS COLLISION TIMING FOR TRANSMIT AND ACKNOWLEDGE

Rev. 10-000 311A
8/16/201 6
Data changes Sample SDA. While SCL is high,

while SCL = 0 SDA line pulled low data doesn’t match what is driven
by another source by the master.
Bus collision has occurred.
SDA released
by master
SDA
SCL Set bus collision

interrupt (BCLIF)
BCLIF
If transmission was in progress when the bus collision

occurred, the SDA and SCL lines are released. If a
Repeated Start, Stop or Acknowledge was in progress
when the bus collision occurred, the action is aborted;
the SDA and SCL lines are released. The BCLIF con-
dition must be cleared by software to allow an ACK to
be shifted out on the bus again, until then the module
will always respond with a NACK. Refer to Figure 33-
24 for a detailed timing diagram of a transaction in
Multi-Master mode.

FIGURE 33-24: I2C MULTI-MASTER, 7-BIT ADDRESS, WRITE (ADRIE = 1, WRIE = 0)
Rev. 10-000 304A

11/2/201 6
Other Master
Add ress copied Another Mas ter clocks ACK sends stop
from I2CxA DB1 and begin sending data condition
S Received Data Received Data P

SDA
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
If RX shift reg ister matches I2CxA DR0:

- Received Address a nd R/W
copied to I2CxA DB0[7:0]
CSTR
ADRIF is set CSTR cleared by so ftware

User m us t use ADRIE bit to
inte rrupt on slave addres s m atch
SMA
MMA
Softwa re sets START

Master loses arbitration of a ddress.
BCLIF is s et, hardw are clears MMA
Continues to clock in slave addre ss
ACKDT
ACKDT clear ed by software

User m us t clear BCLIF to se nd ACK
I2CxCNT 0x07 0x02 0x01 0x00
Softwa re u pdates I2CxCNT

for Slave r ece ive message CNTIF is set
RXBF
I2CxRXIF is se t I2CxRXIF is se t
Softwa re r eads d ata from I2CxRXB Softwa re r eads I2CxRXB
DS40001919E-page 578
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
33.7 Register Definitions: I2C Control
This section defines all the registers associated with
the control and status of the I2C bus.
REGISTER 33-1: I2CxCON0: I2C CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W/HC/HS-0 R/C/HS/HC-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
EN(1,2) RSEN S CSTR(3) MDR MODE [2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HS = Hardware set HC = Hardware clear
bit 7 EN: I2C Module Enable bit

1 = Enables the I2C module(1,2)
0 = Disables the I2C module.
bit 6 RSEN: Restart Enable bit (Only MODE[2:0] = 1xx)

1 = When (I2CxCNT = 0 or ACKSTAT = 1), on 9th falling SCL sets MDR.
0 = When (I2CxCNT = 0 or ACKSTAT = 1), on 9th falling SCL; master shifts out a Stop condition
bit 5 S: Master Start/Restart bit (Only MODE[2:0] = 1xx)
When MMA = 0
1 = Set by user set of Start bit or write to I2CxTXB, waits for BFRE = 1 to begin with a Start
0 = Cleared by hardware after sending Start
When MMA = 1 & MDR = 1
1 = Set by user set of Start bit or write to I2CxTXB, resumes communication with a Restart
0 = Cleared by hardware after sending Restart
Else - Writes to I2CxTXB or Start bit (S) has no effect on Start bit
bit 4 CSTR: Slave Clock Stretching bit (3)
1 = Clock is held low (clock stretching)
0 = Enable clocking, SCL control is released
SMA = 1 and RXBF = 1(6)

- Set by hardware on 7th falling SCL edge
- User must read byte I2CxRXB to release SCL
SMA = 1 and TXBE = 1 and I2CxCNT!= 0
- User must write byte to I2CxTXB to release SCL
when ADRIE is set (4)
- Set by hardware on 8th falling SCL edge of matching received address
- User must clear CSTR to release SCL
SMA = 1 & WRIE = 1
- Set by hardware on 8th falling SCL edge of received data byte
SMA = 1 & ACKTIE = 1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
bit 3 MDR: Master Data Request (Master pause)
1 = Master state mechine pauses until data is read/written to proceed (SCL is output held low)
0 = Master clocking of data is enabled.
MMA = 1 & RXBF = 1

pause_for_rx - Set by hardware on 7th falling SCL edge
- User must read from I2CxRXB to release SCL
MMA = 1 & TXBE = 1 & I2CxCNT!= 0
pause_for_tx - Set by hardware on 8th falling SCL edge
- User must write to I2CxTXB to release SCL
pause_for_restart - Set by hardware on 9th falling SCL edge
RSEN = 1 & MMA = 1 && I2CxCNT = 0 || ACKSTAT = 1
- User must set Start or write to I2CxTXB to release SCL and shift Restart onto bus
bit 2-0 MODE[2:0]: I2C Mode Select bits
111 = I2C Muti-Master mode (SMBus 2.0 Host), (5)
Works as both MODE[2:0] = 001 and MODE[2:0] = 100
110 = I2C Muti-Master mode (SMBus 2.0 Host), (5)
Works as both MODE[2:0] = 000 and MODE[2:0] = 100
101 = I2C Master mode, 10-bit address
100 = I2C Master mode, 7-bit address
011 = I2C Slave mode, one 10-bit address with masking
010 = I2C Slave mode, two 10-bit address
001 = I2C Slave mode, two 7-bit address with masking
000 = I2C Slave mode, four 7-bit address
Note 1: SDA and SCL pins must be configured for open-drain with internal or external pull-up
2: SDA and SCL pins must be selected as both input and output in PPS
3: CSTR can be set by more than one hardware source, all sources must be addressed by user software before the SCL line
is released. CSTR is a module status bit, and does not show the true bus state.
4: SMA is set on the same SCL edge as CSTR for a matching received address
5: In this mode, ADRIE should be set, this allows an interrupt to clear the BCLIF condition and allow the ACK of matching
address.
6: In 10-bit Slave mode, when ADB = 1, CSTR will set when the high address has not been read out of I2CxRXB before the
low address is shifted in.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 U-0 R/W/HS-0 R/W/HS-0 R/W-0
(2) (1,2)
ACKCNT ACKDT ACKSTAT ACKT — RXO TXU CSD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 ACKCNT: Acknowledge End of Count bit(2)

Acknowledge value transmitted after received data, when I2CxCNT = 0
1 = Not Acknowledge (copied to SDA output)
0 = Acknowledge (copied to SDA output)
bit 6 ACKDT: Acknowledge Data bit(1,2)
Acknowledge value transmitted after matching address
Acknowledge value transmitted after received data, when I2CxCNT! = 0
1 = Not Acknowledge (copied to SDA output)
0 = Acknowledge (copied to SDA output)
bit 5 ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit (Transmission only)
1 = Acknowledge was not received for most recent transmission
0 = Acknowledge was received for most recent transmission
bit 4 ACKT: Acknowledge Time Status bit
1 = Indicates the I2C bus is in an Acknowledge sequence, set on 8th falling edge of SCL clock
0 = Not in Acknowledge sequence, cleared on 9th rising edge of SCL
bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as 1’b0
bit 2 RXO: Receive Overflow Status bit (MODE[2:0] = 0xx & 11x)
This bit can only be set when CSD= 1
1 = Set when SMA = 1, and a master clocks in data when RXBF = 1
0 = No slave overflow condition
bit 1 TXU: Transmit Underflow Status bit (MODE[2:0] = 0xx & 11x)
This bit can only be set when CSD = 1
1 = Set when SMA = 1, and a master clocks out data when TXBE = 1
0 = No slave underflow condition
bit 0 CSD: Clock Stretching Disable bit (MODE[2:0] = 0xx & 11x)
1 = When SMA = 1, the CSTR bit will never be set
0 = Slave clock stretching proceeds normally
Note 1: Software writes to ACKDT bit must be followed by a minimum SDA data-setup time before clearing CSTR.
2: NACK may still be generated by I2C hardware when bus errors are indicated in the I2CxSTAT1 or
I2CxERR registers.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
ACNT GCEN FME ADB SDAHT[1:0] BFRET[1:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 ACNT: Auto-Load I2C Count Register Enable bit

1 = The first received or transmitted byte after the address, is automatically loaded into the I2CxCNT
register. The I2CxCNT register is loaded at the same time as the value is moved to/from the shifter.
ACKDT is used to determine the ACK/NACK value for the address bytes and first data byte of a
received message. This prevents a NACK from being sent for the byte that would update the
I2CxCNT register.
0 = Auto-load of I2CxCNT disabled
bit 6 GCEN: General Call Address Enable bit (MODE[2:0] = 00x & 11x)
1 = General call address, 0x00, causes address match event
0 = General call address disabled
bit 5 FME: Fast Mode Enable bit
1 = SCL is sampled high only once before driving SCL low. (FSCL = FI2CXCLK/4)
0 = SCL is sampled high twice before driving SCL low. (FSCL = FI2CXCLK/5)
bit 4 ADB: Address Data Buffer Disable bit
1 = Received address data is loaded into I2CxRXB
Transmitted address data is loaded from the I2CxTXB
0 = Received address data is loaded only into the I2CxADB
Transmitted address data is loaded from the I2CxADB0/1 registers.
bit 3-2 SDAHT[1:0]: SDA Hold Time Selection bits
11 = Reserved
10 = Minimum of 30 ns hold time on SDA after the falling edge of SCL
bit 1-0 BFRET[1:0]: Bus Free Time Selection bits
11 = 64 I2C Clock pulses

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-4: I2CxCLK: I2C CLOCK SELECTION REGISTER
U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — CLK[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3-0 CLK[3:0]: I2C Clock Selection Bits
CLK[3:0] I2Cx Clock Selection
1010-1111 Reserved
1001 SMT1 overflow
1000 TMR6 post scaled output
0101 TMR0 overflow
0100 Clock Reference output
0011 MFINTOSC (500 kHz)
0010 HFINTOSC
0001 FOSC
0000 FOSC/4

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-5: I2CxBTO: I2C BUS TIMEOUT SELECTION REGISTER
U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — BTO[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 BTO[2:0]: I2C Bus Timeout Selection bits
BTO[2:0] I2Cx Bus Timeout Selection
111 CLC4OUT
110 CLC3OUT
101 CLC2OUT
100 CLC1OUT
000 Reserved

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-6: I2CxSTAT0: I2C STATUS REGISTER 0
R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
(3)
BFRE SMA MMA R(1, 2) D — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 BFRE: Bus Free Status bit(3)

1 = Indicates the I2C bus is idle
Both SCL and SDA have been high for time-out selected by I2CxCON2[BFRET[1:0]] bits.
I2CxCLK must select a valid clock source for this bit to function.
0 = Bus not idle (When no I2CxCLK source is selected, this bit remains clear)
bit 6 SMA: Slave Module Active Status bit
1 = Set after the 8th falling SCL edge of a received matching 7-bit slave address
Set after the 8th falling SCL edge of a received matching 10-bit slave low address
Set after the 8th falling SCL edge of a received matching 10-bit slave high w/ read address, only
after a previous matching high and low w/ write.
0 = Cleared by any Restart/Stop detected on the bus
Cleared by BTOIF and BCLIF conditions
bit 5 MMA: Master Module Active Status bit
1 = Master Mode state machine is active
Set when master state machine asserts a Start on bus
0 = Master state machine is idle
Cleared when BCLIF is set
Cleared when Stop is shifted out by master.
Cleared for BTOIF condition, after the master successfully shifts out a Stop condition.
bit 4 R: Read Information bit (1, 2)
1 = Indicates the last matching received (high) address was a Read request
0 = Indicates the last matching received (high) address was a Write
bit 3 D: Data bit
1 = Indicates the last byte received or transmitted was data
0 = Indicates the last byte received or transmitted was an address
bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as 1’b0
Note 1: This bit holds the R bit information following the last received address match. Addresses transmitted by
the Master or appearing on the bus without a match do not affect this bit.
2: Clock requests and input from I2CxCLK register are disabled in Slave modes.
3: Software must use the EN bit to force Master or Slave hardware to idle.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-7: I2CxSTAT1: I2C STATUS REGISTER 1
R/W/HS-0 U-0 R-1 U-0 R/W/HS-0 R/S-0/0 U-0 R-0
TXWE(2) — TXBE(1, 3) — RXRE(2) CLRBF — RXBF(1,3)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 TXWE: Transmit Write Error Status bit (2)

1 = A new byte of data was written to I2CxTXB when it was full (Must be cleared by software)
0 = No transmit write error
bit 5 TXBE: Transmit Buffer Empty Status bit
1 = I2CxTXB is empty (Cleared by writing the I2CTXB register)
0 = I2CxTXB is full
bit 3 RXRE: Receive Read Error Status bit
1 = A byte of data was read from I2CxRXB when it was empty. (Must be cleared by software)
0 = No receive overflow
bit 2 CLRBF: Clear Buffer bit
Setting this bit clears/empties the receive and transmit buffers, causing reset of RXBF and TXBE.
Setting this bit clears the I2CxRXIF and I2CxTXIF interrupt flags.
This bit is set-only special function, and always reads ‘0’
bit 0 RXBF: Receive Buffer Full Status bit
1 = I2CxRXB has received new data (Cleared by reading the I2CxRXB register)
0 = I2CxRXB is empty
Note 1: The bits are held in Reset when EN = 0.
2: Will cause NACK to be sent for slave address and master/slave data read bytes.
3: Used as triggers for DMA operation.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-8: I2CxERR: I2C ERROR REGISTER
U-0 R/W/HS-0 R/W/HS-0 R/W/HS-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— BTOIF(1,2) BCLIF (1)
NACKIF (1)
— BTOIE BCLIE NACKIE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6 BTOIF: Bus Time-Out Interrupt Flag bit(1,2)
1 = Bus Timeout occurred
0 = No bus timeout
bit 5 BCLIF: Bus Collision Detect Interrupt Flag bit(1)
1 = Bus collision detected (On the rising edge of SCL input, SDA output is high and input is sampled
low)
Slave and Master Mode the module immediately goes idle
Multi-Master Mode attempts to match slave addresses, and/or goes idle
0 = No bus collision detected
bit 4 NACKIF: NACK Detect Interrupt Flag bit(1)
1 = When (SMA = 1 || MMA = 1) and a NACK is detected on the bus
NACKIF is also set when any of the TXWE, RXRE, TXU, or RXO bits are set.
0 = No NACK/Error detected
NACKIF is not set by the NACK send for non-matching slave addresses
bit 2 BTOIE: Bus Time-Out Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enable interrupt on bus time out
0 = Bus time-out not enabled
bit 1 BCLIE: Bus Collision Detect Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enable interrupt on bus collision
0 = Bus collision interrupts are disabled
bit 0 NACKIE: NACK Detect Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enable interrupt on NACKIF
0 = NACKIF interrupt is disabled
Note 1: Enabled error interrupt flags are OR’d to produce the PIRx[I2CxEIF] bit.
2: User software must select the Bus Time-out Source in the I2CxBTO register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-9: I2CxCNT: I2C BYTE COUNT REGISTER
CNT[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 CNT[7:0]: I2C Byte Count Register bits

If receiving data,
decremented 8th SCL edge, when a new data byte is loaded into I2CxRXB
If transmitting data,
decremented 9th SCL edge, when a new data byte is moved from I2CxTXB
CNTIF flag is set on 9th falling SCL edge, when I2CxCNT = 0. (Byte count cannot decrement past ‘0’)
Note 1: It is recommended to write this register only when the module is Idle (MMA = 0, SMA = 0) or when clock
stretching (CSTR = 1 || MDR = 1).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-10: I2CxPIR: I2CxIF INTERRUPT FLAG REGISTER
R/W/HS-0 R/W/HS-0 U-0 R/W/HS-0 R/W/HS-0 R/W/HS-0 R/W/HS-0 R/W/HS-0
CNTIF ACKTIF — WRIF ADRIF PCIF RSCIF SCIF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CNTIF: Byte Count Interrupt Flag bit

1 = When I2CxCNT = 0, set by the 9th falling edge of SCL.
0 = I2CxCNT condition has not occurred.
bit 6 ACKTIF: Acknowledge Status Time Interrupt Flag bit (2) (MODE[2:0] = 0xx OR 11x)
1 = Set by the 9th falling edge of SCL for any byte when addressed as a Slave
0 = Acknowledge condition not detected.
bit 4 WRIF: Data Write Interrupt Flag bit (MODE[2:0] = 0xx OR 11x)
1 = Set the 8th falling edge of SCL for a received data byte.
0 = Data Write condition not detected
bit 3 ADRIF: Address Interrupt Flag bit (MODE[2:0] = 0xx OR 11x)
1 = Set the 8th falling edge of SCL for a matching received (high/low) address byte
0 = Address condition not detected
bit 2 PCIF: Stop Condition Interrupt Flag
1 = Set on detection of Stop condition
0 = No Stop condition detected
bit 1 RSCIF: Restart Condition Interrupt Flag
1 = Set on detection of Restart condition
0 = No Restart condition detected
bit 0 SCIF: Start Condition Interrupt Flag
1 = Set on detection of Start condition
0 = No Start condition detected
Note 1: Enabled interrupt flags are OR’d to produce the PIRx[I2CxIF] bit.
2: ACKTIF is not set by a matching, 10-bit, high address byte with the R/W bit clear. It is only set after the
matching low address byte is shifted in.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-11: I2CxPIE: I2CxIE INTERRUPT AND HOLD ENABLE REGISTER
R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
CNTIE ACKTIE — WRIE ADRIE PCIE RSCIE SCIE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CNTIE: Byte Count Interrupt Enable bit

1 = When CNTIF is set
0 = Byte count interrupts are disabled
bit 6 ACKTIE: Acknowledge Interrupt and Hold Enable bit
1 = When ACKTIF is set
If ACK is generated, CSTR is also set.
If NACK is generated, CSTR is unchanged
0 = Acknowledge holding and interrupt is disabled
bit 4 WRIE: Data Write Interrupt and Hold Enable bit
1 = When WRIF is set; CSTR is set
0 = Data Write holding and interrupt is disabled
bit 3 ADRIE: Address Interrupt and Hold Enable bit
1 = When ADRIF is set; CSTR is set
0 = Address holding and interrupt is disabled
bit 2 PCIE: Stop Condition Interrupt Enable
1 = Enable interrupt on detection of Stop condition
0 = Stop detection interrupts are disabled
bit 1 RSCIE: Restart Condition Interrupt Enable
1 = Enable interrupt on detection of Restart condition
0 = Start detection interrupts are disabled
bit 0 SCIE: Start Condition Interrupt Enable
1 = Enable interrupt on detection of Start condition
0 = Start detection interrupts are disabled
Note 1: Enabled interrupt flags are OR’d to produce the PIRx[I2CxIF] bit.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-12: I2CxADR0: I2C ADDRESS 0 REGISTER
ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2 ADR1 ADR0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ADR[7-0]: Address 0 bits

MODE[2:0] = 00x | 11x - 7-bit Slave/Multi-Master Modes
ADR0[7:1]:7-bit Slave Address
ADR0[0]: Unused in this mode; bit state is a don’t care
MODE[2:0] = 01x - 10-bit Slave Modes
ADR0[7:0]:Eight Least Significant bits of 10-bit address 0

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0
ADR14 ADR13 ADR12 ADR11 ADR10 ADR9 ADR8 —
bit 7 bit 0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

MODE[2:0] = 000 | 110 - 7-bit Slave/Multi-Master modes
ADR[7:1]:7-bit Slave Address
MODE[2:0] = 001 | 111 - 7-bit Slave/Multi-Master modes w/Masking
ADR[7:1]: 7-bit Slave Address Mask
MODE[2:0] = 01x - 10-bit Slave Modes
ADR[14-10]:Bit pattern sent by master is fixed by I2C specification and must be equal to
‘11110’. However, these bit values are compared by hardware to the received
data to determine a match. It is up to the user to set these bits as ‘11110’.
ADR[9-8]: Two Most Significant bits of 10-bit address
bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2 ADR1 ADR0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

MODE[2:0] = 000 | 110 - 7-bit Slave/Multi-Master Modes
ADR[7:1]: 7-bit Slave Address
MODE[2:0] = 001 | 111 - 7-bit Slave/Multi-Master Modes with Masking
MODE[2:0] = 010 - 10-Bit Slave Mode
ADR[7:0]: Eight Least Significant bits of second 10-bit address
MODE[2:0] = 011 - 10-Bit Slave Mode with Masking
ADR[7-0]: Eight least significant bits of 10-bit address mask

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-15: I2CXADR3: I2C ADDRESS 3 REGISTER
bit 15 bit 8
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

MODE[2:0] = 000 | 110 - 7-bit Slave/Multi-Master modes
MODE[2:0] = 001 | 111 - 7-bit Slave/Multi-Master mode with Masking
MODE[2:0] = 010 - 10-Bit Slave Mode
ADR[14-10]:Bit pattern sent by master is fixed by I2C specification and must be equal to
‘11110’. However, these bit values are compared by hardware to the received
data to determine a match. It is up to the user to set these bits as ‘11110’
ADR[9-8]: Two Most Significant bits of 10-bit address
MODE[2:0] = 011 - 10-Bit Slave Mode with Masking
ADR[14-8]:10-bit high address mask
bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-16: I2CxADB0: I2C ADDRESS DATA BUFFER 0 REGISTER(1)
ADB7 ADB6 ADB5 ADB4 ADB3 ADB2 ADB1 ADB0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 MODE[2:0] = 00x

ADB[7:1]: Address Data byte
Received matching 7-bit slave address data
R/W: Read/not-Write Data bit
Received read/write value from 7-bit address byte
MODE[2:0] = 01x
Received matching lower 8-bits of 10-bit slave address data
MODE[2:0] = 100
Unused in this mode; bit state is a don’t care
MODE[2:0] = 101
ADB[7:0]: Low Address Data byte
Low 10-bit address value copied to transmit Shift register
MODE[2:0] = 11x
Received matching 7-bit slave address
Received read/write value received 7-bit slave address byte
Note 1: This register is read only except in master, 10-bit Address mode (MODE[2:0] = 101).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 33-17: I2CxADB1: I2C ADDRESS DATA BUFFER 1 REGISTER(1)
ADB7 ADB6 ADB5 ADB4 ADB3 ADB2 ADB1 ADB0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 MODE[2:0] = 00x

Unused in this mode; bit state is a don’t care
MODE[2:0] = 01x
ADB[7:1]: 10-bit Address High byte
Received matching 10-bit high address data
Received read/write value from matching 10-bit high address
MODE[2:0] = 100
7-bit address value copied to transmit Shift register
Read/write value copied to transmit Shift register
MODE[2:0] = 101
ADB[7:1]: 10-bit Address High Data byte
10-bit high address value copied to transmit Shift register
MODE[2:0] = 11x
7-bit address value copied to transmit Shift register
Note 1: This register is read only in slave, 7-bit Addressing modes (MODE[2:0] = 0xx)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 33-18: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS FOR I2C 8-BIT MACRO
Register
on page
I2CxBTO — — — — — BTO[2:0] 584
I2CxCLK — — — — — CLK[2:0] 583
I2CxPIE CNTIE ACKTIE — WRIE ADRIE PCIE RSCIE SCIE 590
I2CxPIR CNTIF ACKTIF — WRIF ADRIF PCIF RSCIF SCIF 589
I2CxERR — BTOIF BCLIF NACKIF — BTOIE BCLIE NACKIE 587
I2CxSTAT0 BFRE SMA MMA R D — — — 585
I2CxSTAT1 TXWE — TXBE — RXRE CLRBF — RXBF 586
I2CxCON0 EN RSEN S CSTR MDR MODE[2:0] 579
I2CxCON1 ACKCNT ACKDT ACKSTAT ACKT — RXO TXU CSD 581
I2CxCON2 ACNT GCEN FME ABD SDAHT[3:2] BFRET[1:0] 582
I2CxADR0 ADR[7:0] 591
I2CxADR1 ADR[7:1] — 592
I2CxADR2 ADR[7:0] 593
I2CxADR3 ADR[7:1] — 594
I2CxADB0 ADB[7:0] 595
I2CxADB1 ADB[7:0] 596
I2CxCNT CNT[7:0] 588
2
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the I C module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
34.0 FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE The ADFVR[1:0] bits of the FVRCON register are used
to enable and configure the gain amplifier settings for
(FVR)
the reference supplied to the ADC module. Reference
The Fixed Voltage Reference, or FVR, is a stable Section 36.0 “Analog-to-Digital Converter with
voltage reference, independent of VDD, with 1.024V, Computation (ADC2) Module” for additional
2.048V or 4.096V selectable output levels. The output information.
of the FVR can be configured to supply a reference The CDAFVR[1:0] bits of the FVRCON register are
voltage to the following: used to enable and configure the gain amplifier settings
• ADC input channel for the reference supplied to the DAC and comparator
• ADC positive reference module. Reference Section 37.0 “5-Bit Digital-to-
Analog Converter (DAC) Module” and Section
• Comparator input
38.0 “Comparator Module” for additional information.
• Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)
The FVR can be enabled by setting the EN bit of the 34.2 FVR Stabilization Period
FVRCON register.
When the Fixed Voltage Reference module is enabled, it
Note: Fixed Voltage Reference output cannot requires time for the reference and amplifier circuits to
exceed VDD. stabilize. Once the circuits stabilize and are ready for use,
the RDY bit of the FVRCON register will be set.
34.1 Independent Gain Amplifiers

The output of the FVR, which is connected to the ADC,
Comparators, and DAC, is routed through two
independent programmable gain amplifiers. Each
amplifier can be programmed for a gain of 1x, 2x or 4x,
to produce the three possible voltage levels.
FIGURE 34-1: VOLTAGE REFERENCE BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000053E
1/27/2017
2
ADFVR<1:0>
1x
FVR Buffer 1
2x
4x (To ADC Module)
2
CDAFVR<1:0>
1x FVR Buffer 2
2x (To ADC, Comparator
4x and DAC Modules)
EN
+
_ RDY
Any peripheral
requiring Fixed
Reference

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
34.3 Register Definitions: FVR Control
REGISTER 34-1: FVRCON: FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 R-q/q R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN RDY(1) TSEN (3)
TSRNG (3)
CDAFVR[1:0] ADFVR[1:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: Fixed Voltage Reference Enable bit

1 = Fixed Voltage Reference is enabled
0 = Fixed Voltage Reference is disabled
bit 6 RDY: Fixed Voltage Reference Ready Flag bit(1)
1 = Fixed Voltage Reference output is ready for use
0 = Fixed Voltage Reference output is not ready or not enabled
bit 5 TSEN: Temperature Indicator Enable bit(3)
1 = Temperature Indicator is enabled
0 = Temperature Indicator is disabled
bit 4 TSRNG: Temperature Indicator Range Selection bit(3)
1 = VOUT = 3VT (High Range)
0 = VOUT = 2VT (Low Range)
bit 3-2 CDAFVR[1:0]: FVR Buffer 2 Gain Selection bits
11 = FVR Buffer 2 Gain is 4x, (4.096V)(2)
01 = FVR Buffer 2 Gain is 1x, (1.024V)
00 = FVR Buffer 2 is off
bit 1-0 ADFVR[1:0]: FVR Buffer 1 Gain Selection bit
01 = FVR Buffer 1 Gain is 1x, (1.024V)
00 = FVR Buffer 1 is off
Note 1: RDY is always ‘1’.

2: Fixed Voltage Reference output cannot exceed VDD.
3: See Section 35.0 “Temperature Indicator Module” for additional information.
TABLE 34-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE

Register
on page
FVRCON EN RDY TSEN TSRNG CDAFVR[1:0] ADFVR[1:0] 599
Legend: — = Unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used with the Fixed Voltage Reference.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
35.0 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 35.1.1 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
MODULE RANGE
The temperature indicator circuit operates in either high
This family of devices is equipped with a temperature
or low range. The high range, selected by setting the
circuit designed to measure the operating temperature
TSRNG bit of the FVRCON register, provides a wider
of the silicon die.
output voltage. This provides more resolution over the
The circuit’s range of operating temperature falls temperature range. High range requires a higher-bias
between -40°C and +125°C. A one-point calibration voltage to operate and thus, a higher VDD is needed.
allows the circuit to indicate a temperature closely The low range is selected by clearing the TSRNG bit of
surrounding that point. A two-point calibration allows the FVRCON register. The low range generates a lower
the circuit to sense the entire range of temperature sensor voltage and thus, a lower VDD voltage is needed
more accurately. to operate the circuit.
The output voltage of the sensor is the highest value at
35.1 Module Operation -40°C and the lowest value at +125°C.
The temperature indicator module consists of a High Range: The High range is used in applications
temperature-sensing circuit that provides a voltage to with the reference for the ADC, VREF = 2.048V. This
the device ADC. The analog voltage output, VMEAS, range may not be suitable for battery-powered
varies inversely to the device temperature. The output of applications. The ADC reading (in counts) at 90°C for
the temperature indicator is referred to as VMEAS. the high range setting is stored in the DIA Table
Figure 35-1 shows a simplified block diagram of the (Table 5-3) as parameter TSHR2.
temperature indicator module. Low Range: This mode is useful in applications in
which the VDD is too low for high-range operation. The
FIGURE 35-1: TEMPERATURE VDD in this mode can be as low as 1.8V. VDD must,
INDICATOR MODULE however, be at least 0.5V higher than the maximum
BLOCK DIAGRAM sensor voltage depending on the expected low
operating temperature. The ADC reading (in counts) at
90°C for the Low range setting is stored in the DIA
5HY'

Table (Table 5-3) as parameter TSLR2.

9''
35.1.2 MINIMUM OPERATING VDD
When the temperature circuit is operated in low range,
7651* 90($6 the device may be operated at any operating voltage
7HPSHUDWXUH,QGLFDWRU
0RGXOH
7R$'& that is within specifications. When the temperature
76(1 circuit is operated in high range, the device operating
voltage, VDD, must be high enough to ensure that the
temperature circuit is correctly biased.
*1' Table 35-1 shows the recommended minimum VDD vs.

Range setting.
The output of the circuit is measured using the internal TABLE 35-1: RECOMMENDED VDD vs.
Analog-to-Digital Converter. A channel is reserved for RANGE
the temperature circuit output. Refer to Section
Min.VDD, TSRNG = 1 Min. VDD, TSRNG = 0
36.0 “Analog-to-Digital Converter with
(High Range) (Low Range)
Computation (ADC2) Module” for detailed
information.  2.5  1.8
The ON/OFF bit for the module is located in the
FVRCON register. See Section 34.0 “Fixed Voltage
Reference (FVR)” for more information. The circuit is
enabled by setting the TSEN bit of the FVRCON
register. When the module is disabled, the circuit draws
no current.
The circuit operates in either High or Low range. Refer
to the next section for more details on the range
settings.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
35.2 Temperature Calculation 35.2.1 CALIBRATION
This section describes the steps involved in calculating 35.2.1.1 Higher-Order Calibration
the die temperature, TMEAS:
If the application requires more precise temperature
1. Obtain the ADC count value of the measured measurement, additional calibrations steps will be
analog voltage: The analog output voltage, necessary. For these applications, two-point or three-
VMEAS is converted to a digital count value by point calibration is recommended.
the Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) and is
referred to as ADCMEAS. 35.2.2 TEMPERATURE RESOLUTION
2. Obtain the ADC count value, ADCDIA at 90 The resolution of the ADC reading, Ma (°C/count),
degrees, from the DIA table. This parameter is depends on both the ADC resolution N and the
TSLR2 for the low range setting or TSHR2 for reference voltage used for conversion, as shown in
the high range setting of the temperature Equation 35-1. It is recommended to use the smallest
indicator module. VREF value, such as the ADC FVR1 Output Voltage for
3. Obtain the output analog voltage (in mV) value 2x setting (FVRA2X) value from the DIA. Refer to
of the Fixed Reference Voltage (FVR) for 2x Table 5-3 for DIA location.
setting, from the DIA Table. This parameter is
FVRA2X in the DIA table (Table 5-3). Note: Refer to Table 44-18 for FVR reference
voltage accuracy.
4. Obtain the value of the temperature indicator
voltage sensitivity, parameter Mv, from Table 44-
26 for the corresponding range setting. 35.3 ADC Acquisition Time
Equation 35-1 provides an estimate for the die To ensure accurate temperature measurements, the
temperature based on the above parameters. user must wait a certain minimum acquisition time
(parameter TS01 in Table 44-26) for the ADC value to
EQUATION 35-1: SENSOR TEMPERATURE settle, after the ADC input multiplexer is connected to
 ADC MEAS – ADC DIA   FVRA2X the temperature indicator output, before the conversion
T MEAS = 90 + --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- is performed.
N
2 – 1  Mv
Where:
ADCMEAS = ADC reading at temperature being
estimated
ADCDIA = ADC reading stored in the DIA
FVRA2X = FVR value stored in the DIA for 2x setting
N = Resolution of the ADC
Mv = Temperature Indicator voltage sensitivity (mV/°C)
Note: It is recommended to take the average of

10 measurements of ADCmeas to reduce
noise and improve accuracy.
TABLE 35-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR(1)

Register
on page
FVRCON EN RDY TSEN TSRNG CDAFVR[1:0] ADFVR[1:0] 599
Legend: — = Unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the temperature indicator module.
Note 1: It is recommended to take the average of ten measurements of ADCMEAS to reduce noise and improve
accuracy.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.0 ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL
CONVERTER WITH
COMPUTATION (ADC2)
MODULE
The Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation
(ADC2) allows conversion of an analog input signal to
a 12-bit binary representation of that signal. This device
uses analog inputs, which are multiplexed into a single
sample and hold circuit. The output of the sample and
hold is connected to the input of the converter. The
converter generates a 12-bit binary result via
successive approximation and stores the conversion
result into the ADC result registers (ADRESH:ADRESL
register pair).
Additionally, the following features are provided within
the ADC module:
• 13-bit Acquisition Timer
• Hardware Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD)
support:
- 13-bit Precharge Timer
- Adjustable sample and hold capacitor array
- Guard ring digital output drive
• Automatic repeat and sequencing:
- Automated double sample conversion for
CVD
- Two sets of result registers (Result and
Previous result)
- Auto-conversion trigger
- Internal retrigger
• Computation features:
- Averaging and Low-Pass Filter functions
- Reference Comparison
- 2-level Threshold Comparison
- Selectable Interrupts
Figure 36-1 shows the block diagram of the ADC.
The ADC voltage reference is software selectable to be
either internally generated or externally supplied.
The ADC can generate an interrupt upon completion of
a conversion and upon threshold comparison. These
interrupts can be used to wake up the device from
Sleep.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 36-1: ADC2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
PREF<1:0> Rev. 10-000034D
3/13/2019
FVR_buffer1 11 Positive
VREF+ pin Reference
10 Select
Reserved 01
00
NREF
VDD
VREF- pin 1
0
VSS CS
AN0
ANa Vref- Vref+
External .
Channel . FOSC /n Fosc
. Divider FOSC
Inputs ADC_clk ADC
ANz sampled Clock
VSS input Select ADCRC
ADCRC
Temp Indicator
Internal
Channel DACx_output ADC CLOCK SOURCE
Inputs
FVR_buffer ADC
Sample Circuit
PCH<5:0>
FM
set bit ADIF
12
complete 12-bit Result
Write to bit
GO/DONE
GO/DONE 16
start
ADRESH ADRESL
Enable
Trigger Select
ACT<4:0> ON
. . . VSS
Trigger Sources
AUTO CONVERSION
TRIGGER

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.1 ADC Configuration 36.1.3 ADC VOLTAGE REFERENCE
When configuring and using the ADC the following The PREF[1:0] bits of the ADREF register provide
functions must be considered: control of the positive voltage reference. The positive
voltage reference can be:
• Port configuration
• VREF+ pin
• Channel selection
• VDD
• ADC voltage reference selection
• FVR outputs
• ADC conversion clock source
• Interrupt control The NREF bit of the ADREF register provides control of
the negative voltage reference. The negative voltage
• Result formatting
reference can be:
• Conversion Trigger Selection
• VREF- pin
• ADC Acquisition Time
• VSS
• ADC Precharge Time
See Section 34.0 “Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)”
• Additional Sample and Hold Capacitor
for more details on the Fixed Voltage Reference.
• Single/Double Sample Conversion
• Guard Ring Outputs 36.1.4 CONVERSION CLOCK
The conversion clock source is selected with the CS bit
36.1.1 PORT CONFIGURATION
in the ADCON0 register. When CS = 1 the ADC clock
The ADC will convert the voltage level on a pin whether source is an internal fixed-frequency clock referred to
or not the ANSEL bit is set. When converting analog as ADCRC. When CS = 0 the ADC clock source is
signals, the I/O pin should be configured for analog by derived from FOSC.
setting the associated TRIS and ANSEL bits. Refer to
Section 16.0 “I/O Ports” for more information. Note: When ADCON0.CS = 0, the clock can be
divided using the ADCLK register to meet
Note: Analog voltages on any pin that is defined the ADC clock period requirements.
as a digital input may cause the input
buffer to conduct excess current. The time to complete one bit conversion is defined as
TAD. Refer Figure 36-2 for the complete timing details
36.1.2 CHANNEL SELECTION of the ADC conversion.
There are several channel selections available: For correct conversion, the appropriate TAD specification
must be met. Refer to Table 44-15 for more information.
• Eight PORTA pins (RA[7:0]) Table 36-1 gives examples of appropriate ADC clock
• Eight PORTB pins (RB[7:0]) selections.
• Eight PORTC pins (RC[7:0])
Note 1: Unless using the ADCRC, any changes
• Eight PORTD pins (RD[7:0], PIC18(L)F45/46/47/ in the system clock frequency will change
55/56/57K42 only) the ADC clock frequency, which may
• Three PORTE pins (RE[2:0], PIC18(L)F45/46/47/ adversely affect the ADC result.
55/56/57K42 only)
2: The internal control logic of the ADC runs
• Eight PORTF pins (RD[7:0], PIC18(L)F55/56/ off of the clock selected by the CS bit of
57K42 only) ADCON0. What this can mean is when
• Temperature Indicator the CS bit of ADCON0 is set to ‘1’ (ADC
• DAC output runs on ADCRC), there may be
• Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) unexpected delays in operation when
setting ADC control bits.
• VSS (ground)
The ADPCH register determines which channel is
connected to the sample and hold circuit.
When changing channels, a delay is required before
starting the next conversion.
Refer to Section 36.2 “ADC Operation” for more
information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 36-1: ADC CLOCK PERIOD (TAD) VS. DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCIES(1,3)
Device Frequency (FOSC)
ADC
CS[5:0] 64 MHz 32 MHz 20 MHz 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 1 MHz
Clock Source
TAD TAD TAD TAD TAD TAD TAD
FOSC/2 000000 31.25 ns(2) 62.5 ns(2) 100 ns(2) 125 ns(2) 250 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 2.0 s
FOSC/4 000001 62.5 ns(2) 125 ns(2) 200 ns(2) 250 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 1.0 s 4.0 s
FOSC/6 000010 93.75 ns(2) 187.5 ns(2) 300 ns(2) 375 ns(2) 750 ns(2) 1.5 s 6.0 s
FOSC/8 000011 125 ns(2) 250 ns(2) 400 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 1.0 s 2.0 s 8.0 s
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FOSC/16 000111 250 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 800 ns(2) 1.0 s 2.0 s 4.0 s 16.0 s(2)
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FOSC/128 111111 2.0 s 4.0 s 6.4 s 8.0 s 16.0 s(2) 32.0 s(2) 128.0 s(2)
ADCRC ADCON0.CS = 1 1.0-6.0 s 1.0-6.0 s 1.0-6.0 s 1.0-6.0 s 1.0-6.0 s 1.0-6.0 s 1.0-6.0 s
Legend: Shaded cells are outside of recommended range.
Note 1: See TAD parameter for ADCRC source typical TAD value.
2: These values violate the required TAD time.
3: The ADC clock period (TAD) and total ADC conversion time can be minimized when the ADC clock is derived from the system
clock FOSC. However, the ADCRC oscillator source must be used when conversions are to be performed with the device in
Sleep mode.
FIGURE 36-2: ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERSION CYCLES

Rev. 10-000035E
6/1/2017
Precharge Acquisition/ ADC Conversion Time
Time Sharing Time
1-8191 FOSC 1-8191 FOSC
(TPRE) (TACQ)
External and Internal External and Internal

Channels are Channels share Holding capacitor CHOLD is
charged/discharged charge disconnected from analog input (1)
On the following cycle: (1)

If ADPRE = 0 ADRES is loaded
If ADPRE ≠ 0 If ADACQ ≠ 0 If ADACQ = 0 GO bit is cleared
ADIF bit is set
Set GO bit
Note 1: Refer to Table 44-15 for ADC Conversion Timing Specifications.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.1.5 INTERRUPTS 36.1.6 RESULT FORMATTING
The ADC module allows for the ability to generate an The 12-bit ADC conversion result can be supplied in
interrupt upon completion of an Analog-to-Digital two formats, left justified or right justified. The FM bits
conversion. The ADC Interrupt Flag is the ADIF bit in of the ADCON0 register controls the output format.
the PIRx register. The ADC Interrupt Enable is the Figure 36-3 shows the two output formats.
ADIE bit in the PIEx register. The ADIF bit must be
cleared in software. Writes to the ADRES register pair are always right
justified regardless of the selected format mode. There-
Note 1: The ADIF bit is set at the completion of fore, data read after writing to ADRES when FM = 0 will
every conversion, regardless of whether be shifted left four places.
or not the ADC interrupt is enabled.
2: The ADC operates during Sleep only
when the ADCRC oscillator is selected.
This interrupt can be generated while the device is
operating or while in Sleep. If the device is in Sleep, the
interrupt will wake up the device. Upon waking from
Sleep, the next instruction following the SLEEP
instruction is always executed. If the user is attempting
to wake-up from Sleep and resume in-line code
execution, the ADIE bit of the PIEx register and the GIE
bits of the INTCON0 register must both be set. If all
these bits are set, the execution will switch to the
Interrupt Service Routine.
FIGURE 36-3: 12-BIT ADC CONVERSION RESULT FORMAT
ADRESH ADRESL
(FM = 0) MSB
bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 LSB bit 0
12-bit ADC Result Unimplemented:

Read as ‘0’
(FM = 1) MSB LSB

bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ 12-bit ADC Result

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.2 ADC Operation 36.2.4 EXTERNAL TRIGGER DURING
SLEEP
36.2.1 STARTING A CONVERSION
If the external trigger is received during Sleep while
To enable the ADC module, the ON bit of the ADCON0 ADC clock source is set to the ADCRC, ADC module
register must be set to a ‘1’. A conversion may be will perform the conversion and set the ADIF bit upon
started by any of the following: completion.
• Software setting the GO bit of ADCON0 to ‘1’ If an external trigger is received when the ADC clock
• An external trigger (selected by Register 36-3) source is something other than ADCRC, the trigger will
• A continuous-mode retrigger (see section Sec- be recorded, but the conversion will not begin until the
tion 36.5.8 “Continuous Sampling mode”) device exits Sleep.
.
36.2.5 AUTO-CONVERSION TRIGGER
Note: The GO bit should not be set in the same
The auto-conversion trigger allows periodic ADC
instruction that turns on the ADC. Refer to
measurements without software intervention. When a
Section 36.2.6 “ADC Conversion Pro-
rising edge of the selected source occurs, the GO bit is
cedure (Basic Mode)”.
set by hardware.
36.2.2 COMPLETION OF A CONVERSION The auto-conversion trigger source is selected by the
ADACT register.
When any individual conversion is complete, the value
already in ADRES is written into PREV (if PSIS = 1) Using the auto-conversion trigger does not assure
and the new conversion results appear in ADRES. proper ADC timing. It is the user’s responsibility to
When the conversion completes, the ADC module will: ensure that the ADC timing requirements are met. See
Register 36-33 for auto-conversion sources.
• Clear the GO bit (unless the CONT bit of
ADCON0 is set)
• Set the ADIF Interrupt Flag bit
• Set the MATH bit
• Update ACC
When DSEN = 0 then after every conversion, or when
DSEN = 1 then after every other conversion, the follow-
ing events occur:
• ERR is calculated
• ADTIF is set if ERR calculation meets threshold
comparison
Importantly, filter and threshold computations occur
after the conversion itself is complete. As such,
interrupt handlers responding to ADIF should check
ADTIF before reading filter and threshold results.
36.2.3 ADC OPERATION DURING SLEEP

The ADC module can operate during Sleep. This
requires the ADC clock source to be set to the ADCRC
option. When the ADCRC oscillator source is selected,
the ADC waits one additional instruction before starting
the conversion. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be
executed, which can reduce system noise during the
conversion. If the ADC interrupt is enabled, the device
will wake-up from Sleep when the conversion
completes. If the ADC interrupt is disabled, the device
remains in Sleep and the ADC module is turned off
after the conversion completes, although the ON bit
remains set.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.2.6 ADC CONVERSION PROCEDURE 7. Read ADC Result.
(BASIC MODE) 8. Clear the ADC interrupt flag (required if interrupt
This is an example procedure for using the ADC to is enabled).
perform an analog-to-digital conversion: Note 1: The global interrupt can be disabled if the
1. Configure Port: user is attempting to wake-up from Sleep
and resume in-line code execution.
• Disable pin output driver (Refer to the TRISx
register) 2: Refer to Section 36.3 “ADC Acquisi-
• Configure pin as analog (Refer to the tion Requirements”.
ANSELx register)
2. Configure the ADC module:
• Select ADC conversion clock
• Select voltage reference
• Select ADC input channel
• Precharge and acquisition
• Turn on ADC module
3. Configure ADC interrupt (optional):
• Clear ADC interrupt flag
• Enable ADC interrupt
• Enable global interrupt(1)
4. If ADACQ = 0, software must wait the required
acquisition time(2).
5. Start conversion by setting the GO bit.
6. Wait for ADC conversion to complete by one of
the following:
• Polling the GO bit
• Polling the ADIF bit
• Waiting for the ADC interrupt (interrupts
enabled)
EXAMPLE 36-1: ADC CONVERSION

/*This code block configures the ADC
for polling, VDD and VSS references, ADCRC
oscillator and AN0 input.
Conversion start & polling for completion
are included.
*/
void main() {
//System Initialize
initializeSystem();
//Setup ADC
ADCON0bits.FM = 1; //right justify
ADCON0bits.CS = 1; //ADCRC Clock
ADPCH = 0x00; //RA0 is Analog channel
TRISAbits.TRISA0 = 1; //Set RA0 to input
ANSELAbits.ANSELA0 = 1; //Set RA0 to analog
ADCON0bits.ON = 1; //Turn ADC On
while (1) {
ADCON0bits.GO = 1; //Start conversion
while (ADCON0bits.GO); //Wait for conversion done
resultHigh = ADRESH; //Read result
resultLow = ADRESL; //Read result
}
}

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.3 ADC Acquisition Requirements impedance is decreased, the acquisition time may be
decreased. After the analog input channel is selected
For the ADC to meet its specified accuracy, the charge (or changed), an ADC acquisition must be completed
holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to fully before the conversion can be started. To calculate the
charge to the input channel voltage level. The Analog minimum acquisition time, Equation 36-1 may be used.
Input model is shown in Figure 36-4. The source This equation assumes that 1/2 LSb error is used
impedance (RS) and the internal sampling switch (RSS) (4,096 steps for the ADC). The 1/2 LSb error is the
impedance directly affect the time required to charge maximum error allowed for the ADC to meet its
the capacitor CHOLD. The sampling switch (RSS) specified resolution.
impedance varies over the device voltage (VDD), refer
to Figure 36-4. Refer to Parameter AD08 mentioned in
Table 44-14 for the maximum recommended
impedance for analog sources. If the source
EQUATION 36-1: ACQUISITION TIME EXAMPLE
Assumptions: Temperature = 50°C and external impedance of 1k  5.0V V DD
T ACQ = Amplifier Settling Time + Hold Capacitor Charging Time + Temperature Coefficient
= T AMP + T C + T COFF
= 2µs + T C +   Temperature - 25°C   0.05µs/°C  
The value for TC can be approximated with the following equations:
1
V APPLIED  1 – -------------------------- = V CHOLD ;[1] VCHOLD charged to within 1/2 lsb
 n+1 
2 –1
–T C
 ----------
RC
V APPLIED  1 – e  = V CHOLD ;[2] VCHOLD charge response to VAPPLIED
 
– Tc
 ---------
1
V APPLIED  1 – e  = V APPLIED  1 – -------------------------- ;combining [1] and [2]
RC
   n+1 
2 –1
Note: Where n = number of bits of the ADC.
Solving for TC:
T C = – C HOLD  R IC + R SS + R S  ln(1/8191)
= – 28pF  1k  + 7k  + 1k   ln(0.0001221)
= 2.27 µs
Therefore:
T ACQ = 2µs + 2.27 µs +   50°C- 25°C   0.05 µs/°C  
= 5.52µs
Note 1: The reference voltage (VREF) has no effect on the equation, since it cancels itself out.
2: The charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) is not discharged after each conversion.
3: The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is mentioned in Parameter AD08 in Table 44-
14. This is required to meet the pin leakage specification.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 36-4: ANALOG INPUT MODEL
Sampling
VDD Rev. 10-000070C
4/16/2019
Switch
Analog
VT ≈ 0.6V SS
RS Input pin RIC ≤ 1KΩ RSS
VA CPIN VT ≈ 0.6V ILEA KAGE (1) CHOLD = 28 PF

5pF
VSS Ref-
Legend: CPIN = Input Capacitance

ILEAKAGE = Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions 11
RIC = Interconnect Resistance Sampling 109
RS = Source Impedance Switch 8 RSS
VA = Analog Voltage (KΩ ) 7
VT = Diode Forward Voltage 6
5
SS = Sampling Switch
RSS = Resistance of the Sampling Switch
CHOLD = Sample/Hold Capacitance 2 3 4 5 6
VDD
Note: (V)
1. Refer to Table 44-4 (parameter D340 and D341).
FIGURE 36-5: ADC TRANSFER FUNCTION
Full-Scale Range
FFFh
FFEh
FFDh
FFCh
ADC Output Code
FFBh
03h
02h
01h
00h
Analog Input Voltage
0.5 LSB 1.5 LSB
REF- Zero-Scale
Transition Full-Scale
Transition REF+

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.4 ADC Charge Pump 36.5 Computation Operation
The ADC module has a dedicated charge pump which The ADC module hardware is equipped with post
can be controlled through the ADCP register conversion computation features. These features
(Register 36-36). The primary purpose of the charge provide data post-processing functions that can be
pump is to supply a constant voltage to the gates of operated on the ADC conversion result, including
transistor devices in the A/D converter, signal and digital filtering/averaging and threshold comparison
reference input pass-gates, to prevent degradation of functions.
transistor performance at low operating voltage.
The charge pump can be enabled by setting the CPON
bit in the ADCP register. Once enabled, the pump will
undergo a start-up time to stabilize the charge pump
output. Once the output stabilizes and is ready for use,
the CPRDY bit of the ADCP register will be set.
FIGURE 36-6: COMPUTATIONAL FEATURES SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM
CALC Rev. 10-000260C

4/16/2019
TMD
ADRES
CRS
ADFLTR
Set
Error ADERR Threshold
Interrupt
Average/ Calculation Logic
1 Flag
Filter ADPREV
0
ADSTPT
ADUTH ADLTH
PSIS
The operation of the ADC computational features is • Low-Pass Filter (LPF): With each trigger, the ADC
controlled by MD[2:0] bits in the ADCON2 register. conversion result is sent through a filter. When RPT
The module can be operated in one of five modes: samples have occurred, a threshold test is performed.
Every trigger after that the ADC conversion result is
• Basic: In this mode, ADC conversion occurs on single sent through the filter and another threshold test is
(DSEN = 0) or double (DSEN = 1) samples. ADIF is performed.
set after all the conversion are complete.
The five modes are summarized in Table 36-2 below.
• Accumulate: With each trigger, the ADC conversion
result is added to accumulator and CNT increments.
ADIF is set after each conversion. ADTIF is set
according to the calculation mode.
• Average: With each trigger, the ADC conversion
result is added to the accumulator. When the RPT
number of samples have been accumulated, a
threshold test is performed. Upon the next trigger, the
accumulator is cleared. For the subsequent tests,
additional RPT samples are required to be
accumulated.
• Burst Average: At the trigger, the accumulator is
cleared. The ADC conversion results are then collected
repetitively until RPT samples are accumulated and
finally the threshold is tested.

TABLE 36-2: COMPUTATION MODES

Bit Clear Conditions Value after Trigger completion Threshold Operations Value at ADTIF interrupt
Mode MD ACC and CNT ACC CNT Retrigger Threshold Test Interrupt ADAOV FLTR CNT
Basic 0 ACLR = 1 Unchanged Unchanged No Every Sample If threshold=true N/A N/A count
Accumulate 1 ACLR = 1 S + ACC If (CNT=0xFF): CNT, No Every Sample If threshold=true ACC Overflow ACC/2CRS count
or otherwise: CNT+1
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
(S2-S1) + ACC
Average 2 ACLR = 1 or CNT>=RPT at S + ACC If (CNT=0xFF): CNT, No If CNT>=RPT If threshold=true ACC Overflow ACC/2CRS count
GO or retrigger or otherwise: CNT+1
(S2-S1) + ACC
Burst 3 ACLR = 1 or GO set or Each repetition: same as Each repetition: same as Repeat If CNT>=RPT If threshold=true ACC Overflow ACC/2CRS RPT
Average retrigger Average Average while
End with sum of all End with CNT=RPT CNT<RPT
samples
Low-pass 4 ACLR = 1 S+ACC-ACC/ Count up, stop counting No If CNT>=RPT If threshold=true ACC Overflow ACC/2CRS count
Filter 2CRS when CNT = 0xFF (Filtered Value)
or
(S2-S1)+ACC-ACC/2CRS
Note: S1 and S2 are abbreviations for Sample 1 and Sample 2, respectively. When DSEN = 0, S1 = ADRES; When DSEN = 1, S1 = PREV and S2 = ADRES.
DS40001919E-page 612
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.5.1 DIGITAL FILTER/AVERAGE the ADSTAT register, as well as the ADCNT register.
The ACLR bit is cleared by the hardware when
The digital filter/average module consists of an
accumulator clearing action is complete.
accumulator with data feedback options, and control
logic to determine when threshold tests need to be
applied. The ADACC register is a 24-bit wide register Note: When ADC is operating from ADCRC, five
which can be accessed through the ADCRC clock cycles are required to
ADACCU:ADACCH:ADACCL register pair. It contains execute the ACC clearing operation.
18-bit accumulator value ACC [17:0] and one extended The CRS [2:0] bits in the ADCON2 register control the
sign bit. data shift on the accumulator result, which effectively
Upon each trigger event (the GO bit set or external divides the value in accumulator
event trigger), the ADC conversion result is added to (ADACCU:ADACCH:ADACCL) register pair. The right-
the accumulator. If the accumulated result exceeds shifted value is stored in the signed
2(accumulator_width)-1 = 262143, the overflow bit ADAOV ADFLTRH:ADFLTRL register pair. When the value in
in the ADSTAT register is set. the ADFLTR register overflows, the overflow bit
ADAOV in the ADSTAT register is set. For the
The number of samples to be accumulated is
Accumulate mode of the digital filter, the shift provides
determined by the RPT (A/D Repeat Setting) register.
a simple scaling operation. For the Average/Burst
Each time a sample is added to the accumulator, the
Average mode, the shift bits are used to determine the
ADCNT register is incremented. Once RPT samples
number of logical right shifts to be performed on the
are accumulated (CNT = RPT), an accumulator clear
accumulated result. For the Low-pass Filter mode, the
command can be issued by the software by setting the
shift is an integral part of the filter, and determines the
ACLR bit in the ADCON2 register. Setting the ACLR bit
cut-off frequency of the filter. Table 36-3 shows the -3
will also clear the ADAOV (Accumulator overflow) bit in
dB cut-off frequency in ωT (radians) and the highest
signal attenuation obtained by this filter at nyquist
frequency (ωT = π).
TABLE 36-3: LOW-PASS FILTER -3 dB CUT-OFF FREQUENCY

ADCRS ωT (radians) @ -3 dB Frequency dB @ Fnyquist=1/(2T)
1 0.72 -9.5
2 0.284 -16.9
3 0.134 -23.5
4 0.065 -29.8
5 0.032 -36.0
6 0.016 -42.0
7 0.0078 -48.1
36.5.2 BASIC MODE comparison performed on it (see Section

36.5.7 “Threshold Comparison”) and the ADTIF
Basic mode (MD = 000) disables all additional
interrupt may trigger.
computation features. In this mode, no accumulation
occurs but threshold error comparison is performed.
36.5.4 AVERAGE MODE
Double sampling, Continuous mode, and all CVD
features are still available, but no features involving the In Average mode (MD = 010), the ADACC registers
digital filter/average features are used. accumulate with each ADC sample, much as in
Accumulate mode, and the ADCNT register increments
36.5.3 ACCUMULATE MODE with each sample. The ADFLTR register is also
updated with the right-shifted value of the ADACC
In Accumulate mode (MD = 001), after every
register. The value of the CRS bits governs the number
conversion, the ADC result is added to the ADACC
of right shifts. However, in Average mode, the threshold
register. The ADACC register is right-shifted by the
comparison is performed upon CNT being greater than
value of the CRS bits in the ADCON2 register. This
or equal to a user-defined RPT value. In this mode
right-shifted value is copied in to the ADFLTR register.
when RPT = 2^CNT, then the final accumulated value
The Formatting mode does not affect the right-
will be divided by number of samples, allowing for a
justification of the ACC value. Upon each sample, CNT
threshold comparison operation on the average of all
is also incremented, incrementing the number of
gathered samples.
samples accumulated. After each sample and
accumulation, the ACC value has a threshold

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.5.5 BURST AVERAGE MODE • The result of the calculation (ERR) is compared to
the upper and lower thresholds, ADUTH and
The Burst Average mode (MD = 011) acts the same as
ADLTH registers, to set the UTHR and LTHR flag
the Average mode in most respects. The one way it
bits. The threshold logic is selected by TMD[2:0]
differs is that it continuously retriggers ADC sampling
bits in the ADCON3 register. The threshold trigger
until the CNT value is greater than or equal to RPT,
option can be one of the following:
even if Continuous Sampling mode (see Section
- Never interrupt
36.5.8 “Continuous Sampling mode”) is not
- Error is less than lower threshold
enabled. This allows for a threshold comparison on the
- Error is greater than or equal to lower
average of a short burst of ADC samples.
threshold
36.5.6 LOW-PASS FILTER MODE - Error is between thresholds (inclusive)
- Error is outside of thresholds
The Low-pass Filter mode (MD = 100) acts similarly to - Error is less than or equal to upper threshold
the Average mode in how it handles samples - Error is greater than upper threshold
(accumulates samples until CNT value greater than or - Always interrupt regardless of threshold test
equal to RPT, then triggers threshold comparison), but results
instead of a simple average, it performs a low-pass - If the threshold condition is met, the threshold
filter operation on all of the samples, reducing the effect interrupt flag ADTIF is set.
of high-frequency noise on the average, then performs
a threshold comparison on the results. (see Table 36-2
Note 1: The threshold tests are signed
for a more detailed description of the mathematical
operations.
operation). In this mode, the CRS bits determine the
cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter (as 2: If ADAOV is set, a threshold interrupt is
demonstrated by Table 36-3). signaled.
36.5.7 THRESHOLD COMPARISON 36.5.8 CONTINUOUS SAMPLING MODE

At the end of each computation: Setting the CONT bit in the ADCON0 register
• The conversion results are latched and held automatically retriggers a new conversion cycle after
stable at the end-of-conversion. updating the ADACC register. The GO bit remains set
• The error is calculated based on a difference and re-triggering occurs automatically.
calculation which is selected by the CALC[2:0] If SOI = 1, a threshold interrupt condition will clear GO
bits in the ADCON3 register and stored in the and the conversions will stop.
signed ADERRH:ADERRL register pair. If the
value of the ADERR register overflows, the 36.5.9 DOUBLE SAMPLE CONVERSION
ADAOV overflow bit is set in the ADSTAT register. Double sampling is enabled by setting the DSEN bit of
The value can be one of the following calculations the ADCON1 register. When this bit is set, two
(see Register 36-4 for more details): conversions are required before the module will
- The first derivative of single measurements calculate threshold error (each conversion must still be
- The CVD result in CVD mode triggered separately). The first conversion will set the
- The current result vs. a setpoint MATH bit of the ADSTAT register and update ADACC,
- The current result vs. the filtered/average but will not calculate ERR or trigger ADTIF. When the
result second conversion completes, the first value is
- The first derivative of the filtered/average transferred to PREV (depending on the setting of PSIS)
value and the value of the second conversion is placed into
- Filtered/average value vs. a setpoint ADRES. Only upon the completion of the second
conversion is ERR calculated and ADTIF triggered
(depending on the value of CALC).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.6 Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD)
Features
The ADC module contains several features that allow
the user to perform a relative capacitance
measurement on any ADC channel using the internal
ADC sample and hold capacitance as a reference. This
relative capacitance measurement can be used to
implement capacitive touch or proximity sensing
applications. Figure 36-7 shows the basic block
diagram of the CVD portion of the ADC module.
FIGURE 36-7: HARDWARE CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE DIVIDER BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000322C
4/16/2019
VDD VDD
PPOL & Precharge PPOL & Precharge

Precharge
ANx
ADC
Capacitive PPOL & Precharge PPOL & Precharge

Sensor Node
ANx
Multiplexer
ADCAP
Additional
Sample
Capacitors
This is an example to configure ADC for CVD 4. Start double sample conversion by setting the
operation: GO bit.
1. Configure Port: 5. Wait for ADC conversion to complete by one
1.1 Disable pin output driver (Refer to the of the following:
TRISx register) • Polling the GO bit
1.2 Configure pin as analog (Refer to the • Waiting for the ADC interrupt (if interrupt is
ANSELx register) enabled)
2. Configure the ADC module: 6. Second ADC conversion depends on the
2.1. Select ADC conversion clock state of CONT:
2.2. Configure voltage reference 6.1. If CONT = 1, both conversion will repeat
2.3. Select ADC input channel automatically form a single trigger
2.4. Configure precharge (ADPRE) and 6.2. If CONT = 0, each conversion must be
acquisition (ADACQ) time period triggered separately
2.5. Select precharge polarity (PPOL bit) 7. ADERR register contains the CVD result
2.6. Enable Double Sampling (DSEN bit) 8. Clear the ADC interrupt flag (if interrupt is
2.7. Turn on ADC module enabled).
3. Configure ADC interrupt (optional): Note 1: With global interrupts disabled (GIE = 0),
3.1. Clear ADC interrupt flag the device will wake from Sleep but will
3.2. Enable ADC interrupt not enter an Interrupt Service Routine.
3.3. Enable global interrupt (GIE bit)(1)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.6.1 CVD OPERATION
A CVD operation begins with the ADC’s internal
Sample-and-Hold capacitor (CHOLD) being
disconnected from the path which connects it to the
external capacitive sensor node. While disconnected,
CHOLD is precharged to VDD or discharged to VSS. The
sensor node is either discharged or charged to VSS or
VDD, respectively to the opposite level of CHOLD. When
the precharge phase is complete, the VDD/VSS bias
paths for the two nodes are disconnected and the paths
between CHOLD and the external sensor node is
reconnected, at which time the acquisition phase of the
CVD operation begins. During acquisition, a capacitive
voltage divider is formed between the precharged
CHOLD and sensor nodes, which results in a final
voltage level setting on CHOLD which is determined by
the capacitances and precharge levels of the two
nodes. After acquisition, the ADC converts the voltage
level on CHOLD. This process is then repeated with the
selected precharge levels inverted for both the CHOLD
and the sensor nodes. Figure 36-8 shows the
waveform for two inverted CVD measurements, which
is known as differential CVD measurement.
FIGURE 36-8: DIFFERENTIAL CVD MEASUREMENT WAVEFORM

Rev. 10-000335B
4/17/2019
Precharge Acquire Convert Precharge Acquire Convert
VDD
Note 1 Note 1
Voltage
ADC Sample and Hold Capacitor
External Capacitive Sensor
VSS
First Sample Second Sample

Time
Note 1: External Capacitive Sensor voltage during the conversion phase may vary as per the configuration of the
corresponding pin.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.6.2 PRECHARGE CONTROL 36.6.4 GUARD RING OUTPUTS
The precharge stage is an optional period of time that Figure 36-9 shows a typical guard ring circuit. CGUARD
brings the external channel and internal sample and represents the capacitance of the guard ring trace
hold capacitor to known voltage levels. Precharge is placed on the PCB board. The user selects values for
enabled by writing a non-zero value to the ADPRE RA and RB that will create a voltage profile on CGUARD,
register. This stage is initiated when an ADC which will match the selected acquisition channel.
conversion begins, either from setting the GO bit, a The purpose of the guard ring is to generate a signal in
special event trigger, or a conversion restart from the phase with the CVD sensing signal to minimize the
computation functionality. If the ADPRE register is effects of the parasitic capacitance on sensing
cleared when an ADC conversion begins, this stage is electrodes. It also can be used as a mutual drive for
skipped. mutual capacitive sensing. For more information about
During the precharge time, CHOLD is disconnected from active guard and mutual drive, see Application Note
the outer portion of the sample path that leads to the AN1478, “mTouchTM Sensing Solution Acquisition
external capacitive sensor and is connected to either Methods Capacitive Voltage Divider” (DS01478).
VDD or VSS, depending on the value of the PPOL bit of The ADC has two guard ring drive outputs, ADGRDA
ADCON1. At the same time, the port pin logic of the and ADGRDB. These outputs can be routed through
selected analog channel is overridden to drive a digital PPS controls to I/O pins (see Section
high or low out, in order to precharge the outer portion 17.0 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) Module” for
of the ADC’s sample path, which includes the external details) and the polarity of these outputs are controlled
sensor. The output polarity of this override is also by the GPOL and IPEN bits of ADCON1.
determined by the PPOL bit of ADCON1. The amount
of time that this charging receives is controlled by the At the start of the first precharge stage, both outputs
ADPRE register. are set to match the GPOL bit of ADCON1. Once the
acquisition stage begins, ADGRDA changes polarity,
while ADGRDB remains unchanged. When performing
Note 1: The external charging overrides the TRIS a double sample conversion, setting the IPEN bit of
setting of the respective I/O pin. ADCON1 causes both guard ring outputs to transition
2: If there is a device attached to this pin, to the opposite polarity of GPOL at the start of the
Precharge should not be used. second precharge stage, and ADGRDA toggles again
for the second acquisition. For more information on the
36.6.3 ACQUISITION CONTROL FOR CVD timing of the guard ring output, refer to Figure 36-9 and
(ADPRE > 0) Figure 36-10.
The Acquisition stage allows time for the voltage on the

FIGURE 36-9: GUARD RING CIRCUIT
internal Sample-and-Hold capacitor to charge or
discharge from the selected analog channel. This
acquisition time is controlled by the ADACQ register.
ADGRDA
The acquisition stage begins when precharge stage
ends. RA
At the start of the acquisition stage, the port pin logic of

the selected analog channel is overridden to turn off the
digital high/low output drivers so they do not affect the
final result of the charge averaging. Also, the selected RB CGUARD
ADC channel is connected to CHOLD. This allows
charge averaging to proceed between the precharged ADGRDB
channel and the CHOLD capacitor.
Note: When PRE > 0, acquisition time cannot be

‘0’. In this case, setting ADACQ to ‘0’ will
set a maximum acquisition time (8191
ADC clock cycles). When precharge is
disabled, setting ADACQ to ‘0’ will disable
hardware acquisition time control.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 36-10: DIFFERENTIAL CVD WITH GUARD RING OUTPUT WAVEFORM
Rev. 10-000336B
Precharge Acquire Convert Precharge Acquire Convert 4/17/2019
VDD
Note 1 Note 1
Voltage
External Capacitive Sensor

Guard Ring Capacitance
VSS
First Sample Second Sample
Time
ADGRDA
ADGRDB
Note 1: External Capacitive Sensor voltage during the conversion phase may vary as per the configuration of the
corresponding pin.
36.6.5 ADDITIONAL SAMPLE AND HOLD

CAPACITANCE
Additional capacitance can be added in parallel with the
internal sample and hold capacitor (CHOLD) by using
the ADCAP register. This register selects a digitally
programmable capacitance which is added to the ADC
conversion bus, increasing the effective internal
capacitance of the sample and hold capacitor in the
ADC module. This is used to improve the match
between internal and external capacitance for a better
sensing performance. The additional capacitance does
not affect analog performance of the ADC because it is
not connected during conversion. See Figure 36-6.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
36.7 Register Definitions: ADC Control
REGISTER 36-1: ADCON0: ADC CONTROL REGISTER 0
R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W/HS/
HC-0/0
ON CONT — CS — FM — GO
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
HS = Bit is set by hardware
bit 7 ON: ADC Enable bit

1 = ADC is enabled
0 = ADC is disabled
bit 6 CONT: ADC Continuous Operation Enable bit
1 = GO is retriggered upon completion of each conversion trigger until ADTIF is set (if SOI is set) or
until GO is cleared (regardless of the value of SOI)
0 = ADC is cleared upon completion of each conversion trigger
bit 4 CS: ADC Clock Selection bit
1 = Clock supplied from ADCRC dedicated oscillator
0 = Clock supplied by FOSC, divided according to ADCLK register
bit 2 FM: ADC results Format/alignment Selection
1 = ADRES and PREV data are right-justified
0 = ADRES and PREV data are left-justified, zero-filled
bit 0 GO: ADC Conversion Status bit(1,2)
1 = ADC conversion cycle in progress. Setting this bit starts an ADC conversion cycle. The bit is
cleared by hardware as determined by the CONT bit
0 = ADC conversion completed/not in progress
Note 1: This bit requires ON bit to be set.
2: If cleared by software while a conversion is in progress, the results of the conversion up to this point will
be transfered to ADRES and the state machine will be reset, but the ADIF interrupt flag bit will not be set;
filter and threshold operations will not be performed.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0
PPOL IPEN GPOL — — — — DSEN
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 PPOL: Precharge Polarity bit

If ADPRE != 0x00:
Action During 1st Precharge Stage

PPOL
External (selected analog I/O pin) Internal (AD sampling capacitor)
1 Connected to VDD CHOLD connected to VSS
0 Connected to VSS CHOLD connected to VDD
Otherwise:
The bit is ignored
bit 6 IPEN: A/D Inverted Precharge Enable bit
If DSEN = 1
1 = The precharge and guard signals in the second conversion cycle are the opposite polarity of the
first cycle
0 = Both Conversion cycles use the precharge and guards specified by PPOL and GPOL
Otherwise:
The bit is ignored
bit 5 GPOL: Guard Ring Polarity Selection bit
1 = ADC guard Ring outputs start as digital high during Precharge stage
0 = ADC guard Ring outputs start as digital low during Precharge stage
bit 0 DSEN: Double-sample enable bit
1 = Two conversions are performed on each trigger. Data from the first conversion appears in PREV
0 = One conversion is performed for each trigger

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W/HC-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
PSIS CRS[2:0] ACLR MD[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 PSIS: ADC Previous Sample Input Select bits

1 = PREV is the FLTR value at start-of-conversion
0 = PREV is the RES value at start-of-conversion
bit 6-4 CRS[2:0]: ADC Accumulated Calculation Right Shift Select bits
If MD = 100:
Low-pass filter time constant is 2CRS, filter gain is 1:1
If MD = 001, 010 or 011:
The accumulated value is right-shifted by CRS (divided by 2CRS)(1,2)
Otherwise:
Bits are ignored
bit 3 ACLR: A/D Accumulator Clear Command bit(3)
1 = ACC, ADAOV and CNT registers are cleared
0 = Clearing action is complete (or not started)
bit 2-0 MD[2:0]: ADC Operating Mode Selection bits(4)
111-101 = Reserved
100 = Low-pass Filter mode
011 = Burst Average mode
010 = Average mode
001 = Accumulate mode
000 = Basic mode
Note 1: To correctly calculate an average, the number of samples (set in RPT) must be 2CRS.
2: CRS = 0b111 is a reserved option.
3: This bit is cleared by hardware when the accumulator operation is complete; depending on oscillator
selections, the delay may be many instructions.
4: See Table 36-2 for Full mode descriptions.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W/HC-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— CALC[2:0] SOI TMD[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6-4 CALC[2:0]: ADC Error Calculation Mode Select bits
DSEN = 0 Single- DSEN = 1 CVD Double-

CALC Application
Sample Mode Sample Mode(1)
101 FLTR-STPT FLTR-STPT Average/filtered value vs.
setpoint
100 PREV-FLTR PREV-FLTR First derivative of filtered
value(3) (negative)
010 RES-FLTR (RES-PREV)-FLTR Actual result vs. averaged/
filtered value
001 RES-STPT (RES-PREV)-STPT Actual result vs.setpoint
000 RES-PREV RES-PREV First derivative of single
measurement(2)
Actual CVD result in CVD
mode(2)
bit 3 SOI: ADC Stop-on-Interrupt bit
If CONT = 1:
1 = GO is cleared when the threshold conditions are met, otherwise the conversion is retriggered
0 = GO is not cleared by hardware, must be cleared by software to stop retriggers
bit 2-0 TMD[2:0]: Threshold Interrupt Mode Select bits
111 = Interrupt regardless of threshold test results
110 = Interrupt if ERR>UTH
101 = Interrupt if ERRUTH
100 = Interrupt if ERRLTH or ERR>UTH
011 = Interrupt if ERR>LTH and ERR<UTH
010 = Interrupt if ERR≥LTH
001 = Interrupt if ERR<LTH
000 = Never interrupt
Note 1: When PSIS = 0, the value of (RES-PREV) is the value of (S2-S1) from Table 36-2.
2: When PSIS = 0
3: When PSIS = 1.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-5: ADSTAT: ADC STATUS REGISTER

R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R/W/HC-0/0 U-0 R-0/0 R-0/0 R-0/0
ADAOV UTHR LTHR MATH — STAT[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HS/HC = Bit is set/cleared by hardware
bit 7 ADAOV: ADC Accumulator Overflow bit

1 = ADACC or ADFLTR or ADERR registers have overflowed
0 = ADACC, ADFLTR and ADERR registers have not overflowed
bit 6 UTHR: ADC Module Greater-than Upper Threshold Flag bit
1 = ERR >UTH
0 = ERR UTH
bit 5 LTHR: ADC Module Less-than Lower Threshold Flag bit
1 = ERR < LTH
0 = ERR ≥ LTH
bit 4 MATH: ADC Module Computation Status bit(1)
1 = Registers ADACC, ADFLTR, ADUTH, ADLTH and the ADAOV bit are updating or have already
updated
0 = Associated registers/bits have not changed since this bit was last cleared
bit 2-0 STAT[2:0]: ADC Module Cycle Multistage Status bits
111 = ADC module is in 2nd conversion stage
110 = ADC module is in 2nd acquisition stage
101 = ADC module is in 2nd precharge stage
100 = ADC computation is suspended between 1st and 2nd sample; the computation results are
incomplete and awaiting data from the 2nd sample(2, 3)
011 = ADC module is in 1st conversion stage
010 = ADC module is in 1st acquisition stage
001 = ADC module is in 1st precharge stage
000 = ADC module is not converting
Note 1: MATH bit cannot be cleared by software while STAT = 0b100.

2: If the selected clock is ADCRC and FOSC < ADCRC, this reading may be invalid.
3: STAT = 0b100 appears between the two triggers when DSEN = 1 and CONT = 0.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-6: ADCLK: ADC CLOCK SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — CS[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 CS[5:0]: ADC Clock Divider Select bits
111111 = FOSC/128
111110 = FOSC/126
111101 = FOSC/124



000000 = FOSC/2
Note: ADC clock divider is only available if FOSC is selected as the ADC clock source (ADCON0.CS = 0).
REGISTER 36-7: ADREF: ADC REFERENCE SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — NREF — — PREF[1:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4 NREF: ADC Negative Voltage Reference Selection bit
1 = VREF- is connected to external VREF-
0 = VREF- is connected to VSS
bit 1-0 PREF: ADC Positive Voltage Reference Selection bits
11 = VREF+ is connected to internal Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) module
10 = VREF+ is connected to external VREF+
01 = Reserved
00 = VREF+ is connected to VDD

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-8: ADPCH: ADC POSITIVE CHANNEL SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — PCH[5:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 PCH[5:0]: ADC Positive Input Channel Selection bits
111111 = FVR buffer 2(2) 010111 = ANC7

111110 = FVR buffer 1(2) 010110 = ANC6
111101 = DAC1 output(1) 010101 = ANC5
111100 = Temperature indicator(3) 010100 = ANC4
111011 = VSS (Analog Ground) 010011 = ANC3
111010 = Reserved. No channel connected. 010010 = ANC2
 010001 = ANC1
 010000 = ANC0
 001111 = ANB7
110000 = Reserved. No channel connected. 001110 = ANB6
001101 = ANB5
101111 = ANF7(4) 001100 = ANB4
101110 = ANF6(4) 001011 = ANB3
101101 = ANF5(4) 001010 = ANB2
001001 = ANB1
101100 = ANF4(4) 001000 = ANB0
101011 = ANF3(4) 000111 = ANA7
101010 = ANF2(4) 000110 = ANA6
000101 = ANA5
101001 = ANF1(4) 000100 = ANA4
101000 = ANF0(4) 000011 = ANA3
100111 = Reserved. No channel connected. 000010 = ANA2
000001 = ANA1
•
000000 = ANA0
•
100011 = Reserved. No channel connected.
100010 = ANE2(5)
100001 = ANE1(5)
100000 = ANE0(5)
011111 = AND7(5)
011110 = AND6(5)
011101 = AND5(5)
011100 = AND4(5)
011011 = AND3(5)
011010 = AND2(5)
011001 = AND1(5)
011000 = AND0(5)
Note 1: See Section 37.0 “5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module” for more information.
2: See Section 34.0 “Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)” for more information.
3: See Section 35.0 “Temperature Indicator Module” for more information.
4: Reserved on PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47K42 parts.
5: Reserved on PIC18(L)F26K42 parts.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-9: ADPREL: ADC PRECHARGE TIME CONTROL REGISTER (LOW BYTE)
PRE[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 PRE[7:0]: Precharge Time Select bits

See Table 36-4.
REGISTER 36-10: ADPREH: ADC PRECHARGE TIME CONTROL REGISTER (HIGH BYTE)
U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — PRE[12:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 PRE[12:8]: Precharge Time Select bits
See Table 36-4.
TABLE 36-4: PRECHARGE TIME

Precharge time
ADPRE
CS! = ADCRC CS = ADCRC
1 1111 1111 1111 8191 clocks of FOSC 8191 clocks of ADCRC

... ... ...
0 0000 0000 0001 1 clock of FOSC 1 clock of ADCRC
0 0000 0000 0000 Not included in the data conversion cycle

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-11: ADACQL: ADC ACQUISITION TIME CONTROL REGISTER (LOW BYTE)
ACQ[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ACQ[7:0]: Acquisition (charge share time) Select bits

See Table 36-5.
REGISTER 36-12: ADACQH: ADC ACQUISITION TIME CONTROL REGISTER (HIGH BYTE)
U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — ACQ[12:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 ACQ[12:8]: Acquisition (charge share time) Select bits
See Table 36-5.
TABLE 36-5: ACQUISITION TIME

Acquisition time
ADACQ
ADCS! = ADCRC ADCS = ADCRC

... ... ...
0 0000 0000 0001 1 clock of FOSC 1 clock of ADCRC
0 0000 0000 0000 Not included in the data conversion cycle(1)
Note 1: If ADPRE is not equal to ‘0’, then ADACQ = 0 means Acquisition time is 8192 clocks of FOSC or ADCRC.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-13: ADCAP: ADC ADDITIONAL SAMPLE CAPACITOR SELECTION REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — CAP[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 CAP[4:0]: ADC Additional Sample Capacitor Selection bits
11111 = 31 pF
11110 = 30 pF
11101 = 29 pF



00011 = 3 pF
00010 = 2 pF
00001 = 1 pF
00000 = No additional capacitance
REGISTER 36-14: ADRPT: ADC REPEAT SETTING REGISTER

RPT[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 RPT[7:0]: ADC Repeat Threshold bits

Determines the number of times that the ADC is triggered before the threshold is checked when the
computation is Low-pass Filter, Burst Average, or Average modes. See Table 36-2 for more details.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-15: ADCNT: ADC REPEAT COUNTER REGISTER

CNT[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 CNT[7:0]: ADC Repeat Count bits

Counts the number of times that the ADC has been triggered and is used along with CNT to determine
when the error threshold is checked when the computation is Low-pass Filter, Burst Average, or
Average modes. See Table Table 36-2 for more details.
REGISTER 36-16: ADFLTRH: ADC FILTER HIGH BYTE REGISTER

R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x
FLTR[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 FLTR[15:8]: ADC Filter Output Most Significant bits — Signed 2’s Complement
In Accumulate, Average, and Burst Average mode, this is equal to ACC right shifted by the CRS bits
of ADCON2. In LPF mode, this is the output of the Low-pass Filter.
REGISTER 36-17: ADFLTRL: ADC FILTER LOW BYTE REGISTER

FLTR[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 FLTR[7:0]: ADC Filter Output Least Significant bits — Signed 2’s Complement
In Accumulate, Average, and Burst Average mode, this is equal to ACC right shifted by the CRS bits
of ADCON2. In LPF mode, this is the output of the Low-pass Filter.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-18: ADRESH: ADC RESULT REGISTER HIGH, FM = 0

RES[11:4]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 RES[11:4]: ADC Result Register bits

Upper eight bits of 12-bit conversion result.
REGISTER 36-19: ADRESL: ADC RESULT REGISTER LOW, FM = 0

R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
RES[3:0] — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-4 RES[3:0]: ADC Result Register bits. Lower four bits of 12-bit conversion result.
bit 3-0 Reserved

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-20: ADRESH: ADC RESULT REGISTER HIGH, FM = 1

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u
— — — — RES[11:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-4 Reserved

bit 3-0 RES[11:8]: ADC Sample Result bits. Upper four bits of 12-bit conversion result.
REGISTER 36-21: ADRESL: ADC RESULT REGISTER LOW, FM = 1

RES[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 RES[7:0]: ADC Result Register bits. Lower eight bits of 12-bit conversion result.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-22: ADPREVH: ADC PREVIOUS RESULT REGISTER

PREV[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 PREV[15:8]: Previous ADC Results bits

If PSIS = 1:
Upper byte of FLTR at the start of current ADC conversion
If PSIS = 0:
Upper bits of ADRES at the start of current ADC conversion(1)
Note 1: If PSIS = 0, ADPREVH and ADPREVL are formatted the same way as ADRES is, depending on the FM
bit.
REGISTER 36-23: ADPREVL: ADC PREVIOUS RESULT REGISTER

PREV[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 PREV[7:0]: Previous ADC Results bits

If PSIS = 1:
Lower byte of FLTR at the start of current ADC conversion
If PSIS = 0:
Lower bits of ADRES at the start of current ADC conversion(1)
Note 1: If PSIS = 0, ADPREVH and ADPREVL are formatted the same way as ADRES is, depending on the FM
bit.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-24: ADACCU: ADC ACCUMULATOR REGISTER UPPER

(sign) (sign) (sign) (sign) (sign) (sign) ACC[17:16]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-2 Six copies of sign bit (1)

bit 1-0 ACC[17:16]: ADC Accumulator MSB — Signed 2’s Complement. Upper two bits of accumulator value.
See Table 36-2 for more details.
Note 1: The ADACC register is a 24-bit wide register which contains the 18-bit accumulator value and six copies
of the sign bit.
2: This register can only be written when GO=0.
REGISTER 36-25: ADACCH: ADC ACCUMULATOR REGISTER HIGH

ACC[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ACC[15:8]: ADC Accumulator middle bits — Signed 2’s Complement. Middle eight bits of accumulator
value. See Table 36-2 for more details.
of the sign bit.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-26: ADACCL: ADC ACCUMULATOR REGISTER LOW

ACC[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ACC[7:0]: ADC Accumulator LSB — Signed 2’s Complement. Lower eight bits of accumulator value.
See Table 36-2 for more details.
of the sign bit.
REGISTER 36-27: ADSTPTH: ADC THRESHOLD SETPOINT REGISTER HIGH

STPT[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 STPT[15:8]: ADC Threshold Setpoint MSB — Signed 2’s Complement. Upper byte of ADC threshold
setpoint, depending on CALC, may be used to determine ERR, see Register 36-29 for more details.
REGISTER 36-28: ADSTPTL: ADC THRESHOLD SETPOINT REGISTER LOW

STPT[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 STPT[7:0]: ADC Threshold Setpoint LSB — Signed 2’s Complement. Lower byte of ADC threshold
setpoint, depending on CALC, may be used to determine ERR, see Register 36-30 for more details.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-29: ADERRH: ADC SETPOINT ERROR REGISTER HIGH

ERR[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ERR[15:8]: ADC Setpoint Error MSB — Signed 2’s Complement. Upper byte of ADC Setpoint Error.
Setpoint Error calculation is determined by CALC bits of ADCON3, see Register 36-4 for more details.
REGISTER 36-30: ADERRL: ADC SETPOINT ERROR LOW BYTE REGISTER

ERR[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ERR[7:0]: ADC Setpoint Error LSB — Signed 2’s Complement. Lower byte of ADC Setpoint Error cal-
culation is determined by CALC bits of ADCON3, see Register 36-4 for more details.
REGISTER 36-31: ADLTHH: ADC LOWER THRESHOLD HIGH BYTE REGISTER

LTH[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 LTH[15:8]: ADC Lower Threshold MSB — Signed 2’s Complement. LTH and UTH are compared with
ERR to set the UTHR and LTHR bits of ADSTAT. Depending on the setting of TMD, an interrupt may
be triggered by the results of this comparison.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-32: ADLTHL: ADC LOWER THRESHOLD LOW BYTE REGISTER

LTH[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 LTH[7:0]: ADC Lower Threshold LSB — Signed 2’s Complement. LTH and UTH are compared with
REGISTER 36-33: ADUTHH: ADC UPPER THRESHOLD HIGH BYTE REGISTER

UTH[15:8]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 UTH[15:8]: ADC Upper Threshold MSB — Signed 2’s Complement. LTH and UTH are compared with
REGISTER 36-34: ADUTHL: ADC UPPER THRESHOLD LOW BYTE REGISTER

UTH[7:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 UTH[7:0]: ADC Upper Threshold LSB — Signed 2’s Complement. LTH and UTH are compared with

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-35: ADACT: ADC AUTO CONVERSION TRIGGER CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — ACT[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 ACT[4:0]: Auto-Conversion Trigger Select Bits
11111 = Reserved, do not use



11101 = Software write to ADPCH
11011 = Software read of ADRESH
11010 = Software read of ADERRH
11001 = CLC4_out
11000 = CLC3_out
10111 = CLC2_out
10110 = CLC1_out
10101 = Logical OR of all Interrupt-on-change Interrupt Flags
10100 = CMP2_out
10011 = CMP1_out
10010 = NCO1_out
10001 = PWM8_out
10000 = PWM7_out
01111 = PWM6_out
01110 = PWM5_out
01101 = CCP4_trigger
01001 = SMT1_trigger
00001 = Pin selected by ADACTPPS
00000 = External Trigger Disabled

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 36-36: ADCP: ADC CHARGE PUMP CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0/0
CPON — — — — — — CPRDY
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HS= Hardware set
bit 7 CPON: Charge Pump On Control bit

1 = Charge Pump On when requested by the ADC
0 = Charge Pump Off
bit 0 CPRDY: Charge Pump Ready Status bit
1 = Charge Pump is ready
0 = Charge Pump is not ready (or never started)
TABLE 36-6: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ADC

Register
on Page
ADCON0 ON CONT — CS — FM — GO 619

ADCON1 PPOL IPEN GPOL — — — — DSEN 620
ADCON2 PSIS CRS[2:0] ACLR MD[2:0] 621
ADCON3 — CALC[2:0] SOI TMD[2:0] 622
ADSTAT ADAOV UTHR LTHR MATH STAT[3:0] 623
ADCLK — — CS[5:0] 624
ADREF — — — NREF — — PREF[1:0] 624
ADPCH — — PCH[5:0] 625
ADPREL PRE[7:0] 626
ADPREH — — — PRE[12:8] 626
ADACQL ACQ[7:0] 627
ADACQH — — — ACQ[12:8] 624
ADCAP — — — CAP[4:0] 628
ADRPT RPT[7:0] 628
ADCNT CNT[7:0] 629
ADFLTRL FLTR[7:0] 629
ADFLTRH FLTR[15:8] 629
ADRESL RESL[7:0] 630, 631
ADRESH RESH[7:0] 630, 631
ADPREVH PREV[15:8] 632
ADPREVL PREV[7:0] 632
ADACCH ACC[15:8] 633
ADACCL ACC[7:0] 634
ADACCU (sign) (sign) (sign) (sign) (sign) (sign) ACC[17:16] 633
ADSTPTL STPT[7:0] 634
ADSTPTH STPT[15:8] 634

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 36-6: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ADC (CONTINUED)
Register
on Page
ADERRL ERR[7:0] 635
ADERRH ERR[15:8] 635
ADLTHH LTH[15:8] 635
ADLTHL LTH[7:0] 636
ADUTHH UTH[15:8] 636
ADUTHL UTH[7:0] 636
ADERRL ERR[15:8] 635
ADACT — — — ACT[5:0] 637
ADCP CPON — — — — — — CPRDY 638
Legend: — = unimplemented read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for the ADC module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
37.0 5-BIT DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG The output of the DAC (DAC1_output) can be selected
as a reference voltage to the following:
CONVERTER (DAC) MODULE
• Comparator positive input
The Digital-to-Analog Converter supplies a variable
• ADC input channel
voltage reference, ratiometric with the input source,
with 32 selectable output levels. • DAC1OUT1 pin
• DAC1OUT2 pin
The positive input source (VSOURCE+) of the DAC can
be connected to: The Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) can be enabled
by setting the EN bit of the DAC1CON0 register.
• FVR Buffer
• External VREF+ pin
• VDD supply voltage
The negative input source (VSOURCE-) of the DAC can
be connected to:
• External VREF- pin
• Vss
FIGURE 37-1: DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER BLOCK DIAGRAM

Rev. 10-000026H
10/12/2016
Reserved 11
VSOURCE+ DATA<4:0>
FVR Buffer 10 5
VREF+ 01 R
AVDD 00
R
PSS
R
32-to-1 MUX
32 DACx_output
To Peripherals
Steps
EN
R DACxOUT1(1)
OE1
R
DACxOUT2(1)
VREF- 1 VSOURCE- OE2

AVSS 0
NSS
Note 1: The unbuffered DACx_output is provided on the DACxOUT pin(s).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
37.1 Output Voltage Selection Reading the DAC1OUTn pin when it has been
configured for DAC reference voltage output will
The DAC has 32 voltage level ranges. The 32 levels always return a ‘0’.
are set with the DATA[4:0] bits of the DAC1CON1
register. Note: The unbuffered DAC output (DAC1OUTn)
is not intended to drive an external load.
The DAC output voltage can be determined by using
Equation 37-1.
37.2 Ratiometric Output Level When the device wakes up from Sleep through an
The DAC output value is derived using a resistor ladder interrupt or a Windowed Watchdog Timer Time-out, the
with each end of the ladder tied to a positive and contents of the DAC1CON0 register are not affected.
negative voltage reference input source. If the voltage To minimize current consumption in Sleep mode, the
of either input source fluctuates, a similar fluctuation voltage reference should be disabled.
will result in the DAC output value.
The value of the individual resistors within the ladder
can be found in Table 44-17. A device Reset affects the following:
• DAC1 is disabled.
37.3 DAC Voltage Reference Output • DAC1 output voltage is removed from the
The unbuffered DAC voltage can be output to the DAC1OUTn pin(s).
DAC1OUTn pin(s) by setting the respective DACOEn • The DAC1R[4:0] range select bits are cleared.
bit(s) of the DAC1CON0 register. Selecting the DAC
reference voltage for output on either DAC1OUTn pin
automatically overrides the digital output buffer, the
weak pull-up and digital input threshold detector
functions of that pin.
EQUATION 37-1: DAC OUTPUT VOLTAGE

IF DACEN = 1
DATA  4:0 -

DACx_output =   VREF+ – VREF-   ---------------------------- + VREF-
 5 
2
Note: See the DAC1CON0 register for the available VSOURCE+ and VSOURCE- selections.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
37.6 Register Definitions: DAC Control
Long bit name prefixes for the DAC peripheral is shown
below. Refer to Section 1.3.2.2 “Long Bit Names” for
more information.

DAC1 DAC1
l
REGISTER 37-1: DAC1CON0: DAC CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0
EN — OE1 OE2 PSS[1:0] — NSS
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: DAC Enable bit

1 = DAC is enabled
0 = DAC is disabled(1)
bit 5 OE1: DAC Voltage Output Enable bit
1 = DAC voltage level is output on the DAC1OUT1 pin
0 = DAC voltage level is disconnected from the DAC1OUT1 pin
bit 4 OE2: DAC Voltage Output Enable bit
1 = DAC voltage level is output on the DAC1OUT2 pin
0 = DAC voltage level is disconnected from the DAC1OUT2 pin
bit 3-2 PSS[1:0]: DAC Positive Source Select bit
11 = Reserved
10 = FVR buffer 2
01 = VREF+
00 = VDD
bit 0 NSS: DAC Negative Source Select bit
1 = VREF-
0 = VSS
Note 1: DAC1OUTx output pins are still active.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 37-2: DAC1CON1: DAC DATA REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — DATA[4:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 DATA[4:0]: Data Input Register for DAC bits
TABLE 37-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE DAC MODULE

Register
on page
DAC1CON0 EN — OE1 OE2 PSS[1:0] — NSS 642
DAC1CON1 — — — DATA[4:0] 643
Legend: — = Unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used with the DAC module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
38.0 COMPARATOR MODULE 38.1 Comparator Overview
Note: The PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ A single comparator is shown in Figure 38-1 along with
57K42 devices have two comparators. the relationship between the analog input levels and
Therefore, all information in this section the digital output. When the analog voltage at VIN+ is
refers to both C1 and C2. less than the analog voltage at VIN-, the output of the
comparator is a digital low level. When the analog
Comparators are used to interface analog circuits to a voltage at VIN+ is greater than the analog voltage at
digital circuit by comparing two analog voltages and VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital high level.
providing a digital indication of their relative magnitudes.
Comparators are very useful mixed signal building FIGURE 38-1: SINGLE COMPARATOR
blocks because they provide analog functionality
independent of program execution.
VIN+ +
The analog comparator module includes the following
Output
features: VIN- –
• Programmable input selection
• Programmable output polarity
• Rising/falling output edge interrupts
VIN-
VIN+
Output
Note: The black areas of the output of the

comparator represents the uncertainty
due to input offsets and response time.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 38-2: COMPARATOR MODULE SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 10-000027N
10/12/2016
3 (1)
NCH<2:0> EN
Interrupt INTP
Rising
Edge set bit
CxIN0- 000 CxIF
Interrupt INTN
CxIN1- 001
Falling
CxIN2- 010 EN(1) Edge
CxIN3- 011 CxVP

- D Q CxOUT
Reserved 100
Cx
Reserved 101 CxVN
FVR_buffer2 110
+ Q1
111
SP HYS POL
CxOUT_sync To Other
Peripherals
SYNC
CxIN0+ 000
TRIS bit
CxIN1+ 001 0
Reserved 010 PPS CxOUT

D Q 1
Reserved 011
Reserved 100 RxyPPS
(From Timer1 Module) T1CLK
DAC_output 101
FVR_buffer2 110
111
PCH<2:0> EN(1)
3
Note 1: When CxON = 0, all multiplexer inputs are disconnected and the Comparator will produce a ‘0’ at the output.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
38.2 Comparator Control 38.2.3 COMPARATOR OUTPUT POLARITY
Each comparator has two control registers: CMxCON0 Inverting the output of the comparator is functionally
and CMxCON1. equivalent to swapping the comparator inputs. The
polarity of the comparator output can be inverted by
The CMxCON0 register (see Register 38-1) contains setting the POL bit of the CMxCON0 register. Clearing
Control and Status bits for the following: the POL bit results in a noninverted output.
• Enable Table 38-1 shows the output state versus input
• Output conditions, including polarity control.
• Output polarity
• Hysteresis enable
TABLE 38-1: COMPARATOR OUTPUT
• Timer1 output synchronization STATE VS. INPUT
The CMxCON1 register (see Register 38-2) contains CONDITIONS
Control bits for the following:
Input Condition POL CxOUT
• Interrupt on positive/negative edge enables
CxVN > CxVP 0 0
The CMxPCH and CMxNCH registers are used to
CxVN < CxVP 0 1
select the positive and negative input channels,
respectively. CxVN > CxVP 1 1
CxVN < CxVP 1 0
38.2.1 COMPARATOR ENABLE
Setting the EN bit of the CMxCON0 register enables
the comparator for operation. Clearing the EN bit
disables the comparator resulting in minimum current
consumption.
38.2.2 COMPARATOR OUTPUT

The output of the comparator can be monitored by
reading either the CxOUT bit of the CMxCON0 register
or the CxOUT bit of the CMOUT register.
The comparator output can also be routed to an
external pin through the RxyPPS register (Register 17-2).
The corresponding TRIS bit must be clear to enable the
pin as an output.
Note 1: The internal output of the comparator is
latched with each instruction cycle.
Unless otherwise specified, external
outputs are not latched.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
38.3 Comparator Hysteresis 38.5 Comparator Positive Input
A selectable amount of separation voltage can be
Selection
added to the input pins of each comparator to provide a Configuring the PCH[2:0] bits of the CMxPCH register
hysteresis function to the overall operation. Hysteresis directs an internal voltage reference or an analog pin to
is enabled by setting the HYS bit of the CMxCON0 the non-inverting input of the comparator:
register.
• CxIN0+, CxIN1+ analog pin
See Comparator Specifications in Table 44-16 for more • DAC output
information.
• FVR (Fixed Voltage Reference)
38.3.1 COMPARATOR OUTPUT • VSS (Ground)
SYNCHRONIZATION See Section 34.0 “Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)”
The output from a comparator can be synchronized for more information on the Fixed Voltage Reference
with Timer1 by setting the SYNC bit of the CMxCON0 module.
register. See Section 37.0 “5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter
Once enabled, the comparator output is latched on the (DAC) Module” for more information on the DAC input
falling edge of the Timer1 source clock. If a prescaler is signal.
used, the CxOUT bit is synchronized with the timer, so Any time the comparator is disabled (EN = 0), all
that the software sees no ambiguity due to timing. See comparator inputs are disabled.
the Comparator Block Diagram (Figure 38-2) and the
Timer1 Block Diagram (Figure 21-1) for more 38.6 Comparator Negative Input
information.
Selection
38.4 Comparator Interrupt The NCH[2:0] bits of the CMxNCH register direct an
analog input pin and internal reference voltage or
An interrupt can be generated for every rising or falling analog ground to the inverting input of the comparator:
edge of the comparator output.
• CxIN0-, CxIN1-, CxIN2-, CxIN3- analog pin
When either edge detector is triggered and its
• FVR (Fixed Voltage Reference)
associated enable bit is set (INTP and/or INTN bits of
the CMxCON1 register), the Corresponding Interrupt • Analog Ground
Flag bit (CxIF bit of the respective PIR register) will be
set.
Note: To use CxINy+ and CxINy- pins as analog
To enable the interrupt, you must set the following bits: input, the appropriate bits must be set in
• EN bit of the CMxCON0 register the ANSEL register and the
corresponding TRIS bits must also be set
• CxIE bit of the respective PIE register
to disable the output drivers.
• INTP bit of the CMxCON1 register (for a rising
edge detection)
• INTN bit of the CMxCON1 register (for a falling
edge detection)
• GIE bit of the INTCON0 register
The associated interrupt flag bit, CxIF bit of the
respective PIR register, must be cleared in software. If
another edge is detected while this flag is being
cleared, the flag will still be set at the end of the
sequence.
Note: Although a comparator is disabled, an
interrupt can be generated by changing
the output polarity with the POL bit of the
CMxCON0 register, or by switching the
comparator on or off with the EN bit of the
CMxCON0 register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
38.7 Comparator Response Time 38.8 Analog Input Connection
The comparator output is indeterminate for a period of
Considerations
time after the change of an input source or the selection A simplified circuit for an analog input is shown in
of a new reference voltage. This period is referred to as Figure 38-3. Since the analog input pins share their
the response time. The response time of the comparator connection with a digital input, they have reverse
differs from the settling time of the voltage reference. biased ESD protection diodes to VDD and VSS. The
Therefore, both of these times must be considered when analog input, therefore, must be between VSS and VDD.
determining the total response time to a comparator If the input voltage deviates from this range by more
input change. See the Comparator and Voltage than 0.6V in either direction, one of the diodes is
Reference Specifications in Table 44-16 and Table 44- forward biased and a latch-up may occur.
18 for more details.
The maximum source impedance for analog sources is
mentioned in Parameter AD08 in Table 44-14. Also, any
external component connected to an analog input pin,
such as a capacitor or a Zener diode, should have very
little leakage current to minimize inaccuracies introduced.
Note 1: When reading a PORT register, all pins
configured as analog inputs will read as a
‘0’. Pins configured as digital inputs will
convert as an analog input, according to
the input specification.
2: Analog levels on any pin defined as a
digital input, may cause the input buffer to
consume more current than is specified.
FIGURE 38-3: ANALOG INPUT MODEL

Rev. 10-000071C
9/27/2017
VDD
Analog
VT ≈ 0.6V
RS Input pin RIC
To Comparator
(1)
ILEA KAGE
VA CPIN VT ≈ 0.6V
5pF
VSS
Legend: CPIN = Input Capacitance

ILEAKAGE = Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions
RIC = Interconnect Resistance
RS = Source Impedance
VA = Analog Voltage
VT = Threshold Voltage
Note 1: See Section 44.0 “Electrical Specifications”.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
38.9 CWG1 Auto-Shutdown Source
The output of the comparator module can be used as
an auto-shutdown source for the CWG1 module. When
the output of the comparator is active and the
corresponding WGASxE is enabled, the CWG
operation will be suspended immediately (see Section
26.10.1.2 “External Input Source”).
38.10 ADC Auto-Trigger Source

The output of the comparator module can be used to
trigger an ADC conversion. When the ADACT register
is set to trigger on a comparator output, an ADC
conversion will trigger when the Comparator output
goes high.
38.11 TMR2/4/6 Reset

The output of the comparator module can be used to
reset Timer2. When the TxRST register is appropriately
set, the timer will reset when the Comparator output
goes high.
38.12 Operation in Sleep Mode

The comparator module can operate during Sleep. The
comparator clock source is based on the Timer1 clock
source. If the Timer1 clock source is either the system
clock (FOSC) or the instruction clock (FOSC/4), Timer1
will not operate during Sleep, and synchronized
comparator outputs will not operate.
A comparator interrupt will wake the device from
Sleep. The CxIE bits of the respective PIE register
must be set to enable comparator interrupts.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
38.13 Register Definitions: Comparator Control
Long bit name prefixes for the Comparators are shown
in Table 38-2. Refer to Section 1.3.2.2 “Long Bit
TABLE 38-2:
C1 C1
C2 C2
REGISTER 38-1: CMxCON0: COMPARATOR x CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 R-0/0 U-0 R/W-0/0 U-0 U-1 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN OUT — POL — — HYS SYNC
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: Comparator Enable bit

1 = Comparator is enabled
0 = Comparator is disabled and consumes no active power
bit 6 OUT: Comparator Output bit
If POL = 0 (noninverted polarity):
1 = CxVP > CxVN
0 = CxVP < CxVN
If POL = 1 (inverted polarity):
1 = CxVP < CxVN
0 = CxVP > CxVN
bit 4 POL: Comparator Output Polarity Select bit
1 = Comparator output is inverted
0 = Comparator output is not inverted
bit 1 HYS: Comparator Hysteresis Enable bit
1 = Comparator hysteresis enabled
0 = Comparator hysteresis disabled
bit 0 SYNC: Comparator Output Synchronous Mode bit
1 = Comparator output to Timer1 and I/O pin is synchronous to changes on Timer1 clock source.
Output updated on the falling edge of Timer1 clock source.
0 = Comparator output to Timer1 and I/O pin is asynchronous

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 38-2: CMxCON1: COMPARATOR x CONTROL REGISTER 1

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — — INTP INTN
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 1 INTP: Comparator Interrupt on Positive-Going Edge Enable bit
1 = The CxIF interrupt flag will be set upon a positive-going edge of the CxOUT bit
0 = No interrupt flag will be set on a positive-going edge of the CxOUT bit
bit 0 INTN: Comparator Interrupt on Negative-Going Edge Enable bit
1 = The CxIF interrupt flag will be set upon a negative-going edge of the CxOUT bit
0 = No interrupt flag will be set on a negative-going edge of the CxOUT bit
REGISTER 38-3: CMxNCH: COMPARATOR x INVERTING CHANNEL SELECT REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — NCH[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 NCH[2:0]: Comparator Inverting Input Channel Select bits
111 = VSS
110 = FVR_Buffer2
101 = NCH not connected
100 = NCH not connected
011 = CxIN3-
010 = CxIN2-
001 = CxIN1-
000 = CxIN0-

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 38-4: CMxPCH: COMPARATOR x NON-INVERTING CHANNEL SELECT REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — — PCH[2:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 PCH[2:0]: Comparator Non-Inverting Input Channel Select bits
111 = VSS
110 = FVR_Buffer2
101 = DAC_Output
100 = PCH not connected
001 = CxIN1+
000 = CxIN0+
REGISTER 38-5: CMOUT: COMPARATOR OUTPUT REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0/0 R-0/0
— — — — — — C2OUT C1OUT
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 1 C2OUT: Mirror copy of C2OUT bit
bit 0 C1OUT: Mirror copy of C1OUT bit
TABLE 38-3: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR MODULE

Reset
Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Values
on page
CMxCON0 EN OUT — POL — — HYS SYNC 650

CMxCON1 — — — — — — INTP INTN 651
CMxNCH — — — — — NCH[2:0] 651
CMxPCH — — — — — PCH[2:0] 652
CMOUT — — — — — — C2OUT C1OUT 652
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the comparator module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
39.0 HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT
(HLVD)
The PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 family of
devices has a High/Low-Voltage Detect module (HLVD).
This is a programmable circuit that sets both a device
voltage trip point and the direction of change from that
point (positive going, negative going or both). If the
device experiences an excursion past the trip point in
that direction, an interrupt flag is set. If the interrupt is
enabled, the program execution branches to the
interrupt vector address and the software responds to
the interrupt.
Complete control of the HLVD module is provided
through the HLVDCON0 and HLVDCON1 register. This
allows the circuitry to be “turned off” by the user under
software control, which minimizes the current
consumption for the device.
The module’s block diagram is shown in Figure 39-1.
Since the HLVD can be software enabled through the
EN bit, setting and clearing the enable bit does not
produce a false HLVD event glitch. Each time the HLVD
module is enabled, the circuitry requires some time to
stabilize. The RDY bit (HLVDCON0[4]) is a read-only
bit used to indicate when the band gap reference
voltages are stable.
The module can only generate an interrupt after the
module is turned ON and the band gap reference
voltages are ready.
The INTH and INTL bits determine the overall
operation of the module. When INTH is set, the module
monitors for rises in VDD above the trip point set by the
HLVDCON1 register. When INTL is set, the module
monitors for drops in VDD below the trip point set by the
HLVDCON1 register. When both the INTH and INTL
bits are set, any changes above or below the trip point
set by the HLVDCON1 register can be monitored.
The OUT bit can be read to determine if the voltage is
greater than or less than the voltage level selected by
the HLVDCON1 register.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
39.1 Operation When the supply voltage is equal to the trip point, the
voltage tapped off of the resistor array is equal to the
When the HLVD module is enabled, a comparator uses internal reference voltage generated by the voltage
an internally generated voltage reference as the set reference module. The comparator then generates an
point. The set point is compared with the trip point, interrupt signal by setting the HLVDIF bit.
where each node in the resistor divider represents a
trip point voltage. The “trip point” voltage is the voltage The trip point voltage is software programmable to any of
level at which the device detects a high or low-voltage SEL[3:0] bits (HLVDCON1[3:0]).
event, depending on the configuration of the module.
FIGURE 39-1: HLVD MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
VDD
4 SEL<3:0>
Rev. 10-000256B
10/13/2016
EN
16-to-1 MUX
OUT
- Trigger/
Interrupt HLVDIF
+ Generation
RDY INTH INTL
Bandgap
Reference
EN Volatge

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
39.2 HLVD Setup 39.3 Current Consumption
To set up the HLVD module: When the module is enabled, the HLVD comparator
1. Select the desired HLVD trip point by writing the and voltage divider are enabled and consume static
value to the SEL[3:0] bits of the HLVDCON1 current. The total current consumption, when enabled,
register. is specified in electrical specification Parameter D206
(Table 44-4).
2. Depending on the application to detect
high-voltage peaks or low-voltage drops or both, Depending on the application, the HLVD module does
set the INTH or INTL bit appropriately. not need to operate constantly. To reduce current
3. Enable the HLVD module by setting the EN bit. requirements, the HLVD circuitry may only need to be
enabled for short periods where the voltage is checked.
4. Clear the HLVD interrupt flag (PIR2 register),
After such a check, the module could be disabled.
which may have been set from a previous
interrupt.
39.4 HLVD Start-up Time
5. If interrupts are desired, enable the HLVD
interrupt by setting the HLVDIE in the PIE2 The internal reference voltage of the HLVD module,
register and GIE bits. specified in electrical specification (Table 44-18), may
An interrupt will not be generated until the RDY be used by other internal circuitry, such as the
bit is set. programmable Brown-out Reset. If the HLVD or other
circuits using the voltage reference are disabled to
Note: Before changing any module settings lower the device’s current consumption, the reference
(INTH, INTL, SEL[3:0]), first disable the voltage circuit will require time to become stable before
module (EN = 0), make the changes and a low or high-voltage condition can be reliably
re-enable the module. This prevents the detected. This start-up time, TFVRST, is an interval that
generation of false HLVD events. is independent of device clock speed. It is specified in
electrical specification (Table 44-18).
The HLVD interrupt flag is not enabled until TFVRST has
expired and a stable reference voltage is reached. For
this reason, brief excursions beyond the set point may
not be detected during this interval (see Figure 39-2 or
Figure 39-3).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 39-2: LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT OPERATION (INTL = 1)
CASE 1: HLVDIF may not be Set
VDD
VHLVD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
TFVRST
RDY
HLVDIF Cleared in Software
Band Gap Reference Voltage is Stable
CASE 2:
VDD
VHLVD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
TFVRST
RDY
HLVDIF Cleared in Software,

HLVDIF Remains Set since HLVD Condition still Exists

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 39-3: HIGH-VOLTAGE DETECT OPERATION (INTH = 1)
CASE 1:
HLVDIF may not be Set
VHLVD
VDD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
RDY TIRVST

CASE 2:
VHLVD
VDD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
RDY TIRVST

HLVDIF Cleared in Software,

HLVDIF Remains Set since HLVD Condition still Exists
39.5 Applications FIGURE 39-4: TYPICAL LOW-VOLTAGE

DETECT APPLICATION
In many applications, it is desirable to detect a drop
below, or rise above, a particular voltage threshold. For
example, the HLVD module could be periodically
enabled to detect Universal Serial Bus (USB) attach or
detach. This assumes the device is powered by a lower
voltage source than the USB when detached. An attach VA
would indicate a High-Voltage Detect from, for example, VB
3.3V to 5V (the voltage on USB) and vice versa for a
Voltage
detach. This feature could save a design a few extra

components and an attach signal (input pin).
For general battery applications, Figure 39-4 shows a
possible voltage curve. Over time, the device voltage
decreases. When the device voltage reaches voltage,
VA, the HLVD logic generates an interrupt at time, TA.
The interrupt could cause the execution of an Interrupt TA TB
Time
Service Routine (ISR), which would allow the applica-
tion to perform “housekeeping tasks” and a controlled Legend: VA = HLVD trip point
shutdown before the device voltage exits the valid VB = Minimum valid device
operating range at TB. This would give the application operating voltage
a time window, represented by the difference between
TA and TB, to safely exit.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
When enabled, the HLVD circuitry continues to operate
during Sleep. If the device voltage crosses the trip
point, the HLVDIF bit will be set and the device will
wake up from Sleep. Device execution will continue
from the interrupt vector address if interrupts have
been globally enabled.
39.7 Operation During Idle and Doze

Modes
In both Idle and Doze modes, the module is active and
events are generated if peripheral is enabled.
39.8 Operation During Freeze

When debugging in Freeze mode, no new event or
interrupt can be generated. The state of the RDY bit is
frozen.
Register reads and writes through the CPU interface
are allowed.

A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state.
This forces the HLVD module to be turned off.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
39.10 Register Definitions: HLVD Control
Long bit name prefixes for the HLVD peripheral is
shown in Table 39-1. Refer to Section 1.3.2.2 “Long
Bit Names” for more information.
TABLE 39-1:
HLVD HLVD
REGISTER 39-1: HLVDCON0: HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0/0 U-0 R-x R-x U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
EN — OUT RDY — — INTH INTL
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EN: High/Low-voltage Detect Power Enable bit

1 = Enables HLVD, powers up HLVD circuit and supporting reference circuitry
0 = Disables HLVD, powers down HLVD and supporting circuitry
bit 5 OUT: HLVD Comparator Output bit
1 = Voltage  selected detection limit (HLVDL[3:0])
0 = Voltage  selected detection limit (HLVDL[3:0])
bit 4 RDY: Band Gap Reference Voltages Stable Status Flag bit
1 = Indicates HLVD Module is ready and output is stable
0 = Indicates HLVD Module is not ready
bit 1 INTH: HLVD Positive going (High Voltage) Interrupt Enable
1 = HLVDIF will be set when voltage  selected detection limit (SEL[3:0])
0 = HLVDIF will not be set
bit 0 INTL: HLVD Negative going (Low Voltage) Interrupt Enable
1 = HLVDIF will be set when voltage  selected detection limit (SEL[3:0])
0 = HLVDIF will not be set

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
REGISTER 39-2: HLVDCON1: LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CONTROL REGISTER 1

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0
— — — — SEL[3:0]
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
-n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared u = Bit is unchanged

bit 3-0 SEL[3:0]: High/Low Voltage Detection Limit Selection bits
Refer to Table 44-13 for voltage detection limits.
TABLE 39-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT

MODULE
Register
on Page
HLVDCON0 EN — OUT RDY — — INTH INTL 659
HLVDCON1 — — — — SEL[3:0] 660
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the HLVD module.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
40.0 IN-CIRCUIT SERIAL 40.3 Common Programming Interfaces
PROGRAMMING™ (ICSP™) Connection to a target device is typically done through
ICSP™ programming allows customers to manufacture an ICSP™ header. A commonly found connector on
circuit boards with unprogrammed devices. Programming development tools is the RJ-11 in the 6P6C (6-pin, 6-
can be done after the assembly process, allowing the connector) configuration. See Figure 40-1.
device to be programmed with the most recent firmware
or a custom firmware. Five pins are needed for ICSP™ FIGURE 40-1: ICD RJ-11 STYLE
programming: CONNECTOR INTERFACE
• ICSPCLK
• ICSPDAT
• MCLR/VPP
• VDD
ICSPDAT
• VSS
2 4 6 NC
VDD
In Program/Verify mode the program memory, User IDs ICSPCLK
and the Configuration Words are programmed through 1 3 5
Target
serial communications. The ICSPDAT pin is a VPP/MCLR PC Board
VSS
bidirectional I/O used for transferring the serial data Bottom Side
and the ICSPCLK pin is the clock input. For more
information on ICSP™ refer to the “PIC18F26/27/45/
46/47/55/56/57K42 Memory Programming Pin Description*
Specification” (DS40001886).
1 = VPP/MCLR
2 = VDD Target
40.1 High-Voltage Programming Entry 3 = VSS (ground)
Mode 4 = ICSPDAT
The device is placed into High-Voltage Programming 5 = ICSPCLK

Entry mode by holding the ICSPCLK and ICSPDAT 6 = No Connect
pins low then raising the voltage on MCLR/VPP to VIHH.
Another connector often found in use with the PICkit™
40.2 Low-Voltage Programming Entry programmers is a standard 6-pin header with 0.1 inch
Mode spacing. Refer to Figure 40-2.
The Low-Voltage Programming Entry mode allows the For additional interface recommendations, refer to your
PIC® Flash MCUs to be programmed using VDD only, specific device programmer manual prior to PCB
without high voltage. When the LVP bit of Configuration design.
Words is set to ‘1’, the low-voltage ICSP™ It is recommended that isolation devices be used to
programming entry is enabled. To disable the Low- separate the programming pins from other circuitry.
Voltage ICSP mode, the LVP bit must be programmed The type of isolation is highly dependent on the specific
to ‘0’. application and may include devices such as resistors,
Entry into the Low-Voltage Programming Entry mode diodes, or even jumpers. See Figure 40-3 for more
requires the following steps: information.
1. MCLR is brought to VIL.
2. A 32-bit key sequence is presented on
ICSPDAT, while clocking ICSPCLK.
Once the key sequence is complete, MCLR must be
held at VIL for as long as Program/Verify mode is to be
maintained.
If low-voltage programming is enabled (LVP = 1), the
MCLR Reset function is automatically enabled and
cannot be disabled. See Section 6.5 “MCLR” for more
information.
The LVP bit can only be reprogrammed to ‘0’ by using
the High-Voltage Programming mode.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 40-2: PICkit™ PROGRAMMER STYLE CONNECTOR INTERFACE
Pin 1 Indicator
Pin Description*
1 1 = VPP/MCLR
2
2 = VDD Target
3
4 3 = VSS (ground)
5
6 4 = ICSPDAT
5 = ICSPCLK
6 = No Connect
* The 6-pin header (0.100" spacing) accepts 0.025" square pins.
FIGURE 40-3: TYPICAL CONNECTION FOR ICSP™ PROGRAMMING
External
Programming VDD Device to be
Signals Programmed
VDD VDD
VPP MCLR/VPP
VSS VSS
Data ICSPDAT
Clock ICSPCLK
* * *
To Normal Connections
* Isolation devices (as required).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
41.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY The literal instructions may use some of the following
operands:
PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 devices incor-
• A literal value to be loaded into a file register
porate the standard set of PIC18 core instructions, as
(specified by ‘k’)
well as an extended set of instructions, for the optimi-
zation of code that is recursive or that utilizes a soft- • The desired FSR register to load the literal value
ware stack. The extended set is discussed later in this into (specified by ‘f’)
section. • No operand required
(specified by ‘—’)
41.1 Standard Instruction Set The control instructions may use some of the following
operands:
The standard PIC18 instruction set adds many
enhancements to the previous PIC® MCU instruction • A program memory address (specified by ‘n’)
sets, while maintaining an easy migration from these • The mode of the CALL or RETURN instructions
PIC® MCU instruction sets. Most instructions are a (specified by ‘s’)
single program memory word (16 bits), but there are • The mode of the table read and table write
few instructions that require two- or three-program instructions (specified by ‘m’)
memory locations and two that require three-program • No operand required
memory locations. (specified by ‘—’)
Each single-word instruction is a 16-bit word divided All instructions are a single word, except for few two or
into an opcode, which specifies the instruction type and three word instructions. These instructions were made
one or more operands, which further specify the two- or three-word to contain the required information
operation of the instruction. in 32 or 48 bits. In the second word and third words, the
four MSbs are ‘1’s. If this second or third word is
The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped
executed as an instruction (by itself), it will execute as
into four basic categories:
a NOP.
• Byte-oriented operations
All single-word instructions are executed in a single
• Bit-oriented operations instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the
• Literal operations program counter is changed as a result of the
• Control operations instruction. In these cases, the execution takes two
The PIC18 instruction set summary in Table 41-3 lists instruction cycles, with the additional instruction
byte-oriented, bit-oriented, literal and control cycle(s) executed as a NOP.
operations. Table 41-1 shows the opcode field The two-word instructions execute in two instruction
descriptions. cycles and three-word instructions execute in three
Most byte-oriented instructions have three operands: instruction cycles.
1. The file register (specified by ‘f’) One instruction cycle consists of four oscillator periods.
Thus, for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, the normal
2. The destination of the result (specified by ‘d’)
instruction execution time is 1 s. If a conditional test is
3. The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’)
true, or the program counter is changed as a result of
The file register designator ‘f’ specifies which file an instruction, the instruction execution time is 2 s.
register is to be used by the instruction. The destination Two-word branch instructions (if true) would take 3 s.
designator ‘d’ specifies where the result of the
Figure 41-1 shows the general formats that the
operation is to be placed. If ‘d’ is zero, the result is
instructions can have. All examples use the convention
placed in the WREG register. If ‘d’ is one, the result is
‘nnh’ to represent a hexadecimal number.
placed in the file register specified in the instruction.
The Instruction Set Summary, shown in Table 41-3,
All bit-oriented instructions have three operands:
lists the standard instructions recognized by the
1. The file register (specified by ‘f’) Microchip Assembler (MPASMTM).
2. The bit in the file register (specified by ‘b’) Section 41.1.1 “Standard Instruction Set” provides
3. The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) a description of each instruction.
The bit field designator ‘b’ selects the number of the bit
affected by the operation, while the file register
designator ‘f’ represents the number of the file in which
the bit is located.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 41-1: OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS

Field Description
a RAM access bit

a = 0: RAM location in Access RAM (BSR register is ignored)
a = 1: RAM bank is specified by BSR register
ACCESS ACCESS = 0: RAM access bit symbol
BANKED BANKED = 1: RAM access bit symbol
bbb Bit address within an 8-bit file register (0 to 7)
BSR Bank Select Register. Used to select the current RAM bank.
d Destination select bit;
d = 0: store result in WREG,
d = 1: store result in file register f.
dest Destination either the WREG register or the specified register file location
f 8-bit Register file address (00h to FFh)
fn FSR Number (0 to 2)
fs 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh) or 14-bit Register file address (0000h to 3FFFh). This is the source address.
fd 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh) or 14-bit Register file address (0000h to 3FFFh). This is the destination address.
zs 7-bit literal offset for FSR2 to used as register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the source address.
zd 7-bit literal offset for FSR2 to used as register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the destination address.
k Literal field, constant data or label (may be a 6-bit, 8-bit, 12-bit or a 20-bit value)
label Label name
mm The mode of the TBLPTR register for the Table Read and Table Write instructions
Only used with Table Read and Table Write instructions:
* No Change to register (such as TBLPTR with Table reads and writes)
*+ Post-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with Table reads and writes)
*- Post-Decrement register (such as TBLPTR with Table reads and writes)
+* Pre-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with Table reads and writes)
n The relative address (2’s complement number) for relative branch instructions, or the direct address for Call/Branch and
Return instructions
PRODH Product of Multiply high byte
PRODL Product of Multiply low byte
s Fast Call / Return mode select bit.
s = 0: do not update into/from shadow registers
s = 1: certain registers loaded into/from shadow registers (Fast mode)
u Unused or Unchanged
W W = 0: Destination select bit symbol
WREG Working register (accumulator)
x Don't care (0 or 1)
The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for compatibility with all Microchip software
tools.
TBLPTR 21-bit Table Pointer (points to a Program Memory location)
TABLAT 8-bit Table Latch
TOS Top of Stack
PC Program Counter
PCL Program Counter Low Byte
PCH Program Counter High Byte
PCLATH Program Counter High Byte Latch
PCLATU Program Counter Upper Byte Latch
GIE Global Interrupt Enable bit
WDT Watchdog Timer
TO Time-out bit
PD Power-down bit
C, DC, Z, OV, N ALU status bits Carry, Digit Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative
[ ] Indexed address
( ) Contents
 Assigned to

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 41-1: OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Field Description
 Optional argument

[expr]<n> Specifies bit n of the register indicated by the pointer expr
< > Register bit field
 In the set of
italics User defined term (font is courier)
FIGURE 41-1: General Format for Instructions (1/2)
Byte-oriented file register operations Example Instruction
15 10 9 8 7 0
OPCODE d a f (FILE #) ADDWF MYREG, W, B
d = 0 for result destination to be WREG register

d = 1 for result destination to be file register (f)
a = 0 to force Access Bank
a = 1 for BSR to select bank
f = 8-bit file register address
Byte to Byte move operations (2-word)
15 12 11 0
OPCODE f (Source FILE #) MOVFF MYREG1, MYREG2
15 12 11 0
1111 f (Destination FILE #)
Byte to Byte move operations (3-word)
15 4 3 0
OPCODE FILE # MOVFFL MYREG1, MYREG2
15 12 11 0
1111 FILE #
15 12 11 0
1111 FILE #
Bit-oriented file register operations
15 12 11 9 8 7 0
OPCODE b (BIT #) a f (FILE #) BSF MYREG, bit, B
b = 3-bit position of bit in file register (f)

a = 0 to force Access Bank
a = 1 for BSR to select bank
Literal operations
15 8 7 0
OPCODE k (literal) MOVLW 7Fh
k = 8-bit immediate value

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 41-2: General Format for Instructions (2/2)
Control operations
CALL, GOTO and Branch operations

15 8 7 0
OPCODE n[7:0] (literal) GOTO Label
15 12 11 0
1111 n[19:8] (literal)
n = 20-bit immediate value
15 8 7 0
OPCODE S n[7:0] (literal) CALL MYFUNC
15 12 11 0
1111 n[19:8] (literal)
S = Fast bit
15 11 10 0
OPCODE n[10:0] (literal) BRA MYFUNC
15 8 7 0
OPCODE n[7:0] (literal) BC MYFUNC

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 41-2: INSTRUCTION SET
Mnemonic, 16-Bit Instruction Word Status
Description Cycles Notes
Operands MSb LSb Affected
BYTE-ORIENTED FILE REGISTER INSTRUCTIONS

ADDWF f, d ,a Add WREG and f 1 0010 01da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
ADDWFC f, d, a Add WREG and Carry bit to f 1 0010 00da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
ANDWF f, d, a AND WREG with f 1 0001 01da ffff ffff Z, N
CLRF f, a Clear f 1 0110 101a ffff ffff Z
COMF f, d, a Complement f 1 0001 11da ffff ffff Z, N
DECF f, d, a Decrement f 1 0000 01da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
INCF f, d, a Increment f 1 0010 10da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
IORWF f, d, a Inclusive OR WREG with f 1 0001 00da ffff ffff Z, N
MOVF f, d, a Move f to WREG or f 1 0101 00da ffff ffff Z, N
MOVFF fs, fd Move fs (source) to 1st word 2 1100 ffff ffff ffff None 2, 3
fd (destination) 2nd word 1111 ffff ffff ffff
MOVFFL fs, fd Move fs (source) to 3 0000 0000 0110 ffff None 2
g (full destination) 1111 ffff ffff ffgg
fd (full destination)3rd word 1111 gggg gggg gggg
MOVWF f, a Move WREG to f 1 0110 111a ffff ffff None
MULWF f, a Multiply WREG with f 1 0000 001a ffff ffff None
NEGF f, a Negate f 1 0110 110a ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
RLCF f, d, a Rotate Left f through Carry 1 0011 01da ffff ffff C, Z, N
RLNCF f, d, a Rotate Left f (No Carry) 1 0100 01da ffff ffff Z, N
RRCF f, d, a Rotate Right f through Carry 1 0011 00da ffff ffff C, Z, N
RRNCF f, d, a Rotate Right f (No Carry) 1 0100 00da ffff ffff Z, N
SETF f, a Set f 1 0110 100a ffff ffff None
SUBFWB f, d, a Subtract f from WREG with 1 0101 01da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
borrow
SUBWF f, d, a Subtract WREG from f 1 0101 11da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
SUBWFB f, d, a Subtract WREG from f with 1 0101 10da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
borrow
SWAPF f, d, a Swap nibbles in f 1 0011 10da ffff ffff None
XORWF f, d, a Exclusive OR WREG with f 1 0001 10da ffff ffff Z, N
BYTE-ORIENTED SKIP INSTRUCTIONS
CPFSEQ f, a Compare f with WREG, skip = 1-4 0110 001a ffff ffff None 1
CPFSGT f, a Compare f with WREG, skip > 1-4 0110 010a ffff ffff None 1
CPFSLT f, a Compare f with WREG, skip < 1-4 0110 000a ffff ffff None 1
DECFSZ f, d, a Decrement f, Skip if 0 1-4 0010 11da ffff ffff None 1
DCFSNZ f, d, a Decrement f, Skip if Not 0 1-4 0100 11da ffff ffff None 1
INCFSZ f, d, a Increment f, Skip if 0 1-4 0011 11da ffff ffff None 1
INFSNZ f, d, a Increment f, Skip if Not 0 1-4 0100 10da ffff ffff None 1
TSTFSZ f, a Test f, skip if 0 1-4 0110 011a ffff ffff None 1
BIT-ORIENTED FILE REGISTER INSTRUCTIONS
BCF f, b, a Bit Clear f 1 1001 bbba ffff ffff None
BSF f, b, a Bit Set f 1 1000 bbba ffff ffff None
BTG f, b, a Bit Toggle f 1 0111 bbba ffff ffff None
BIT-ORIENTED SKIP INSTRUCTIONS
BTFSC f, b, a Bit Test f, Skip if Clear 1-4 1011 bbba ffff ffff None 1
BTFSS f, b, a Bit Test f, Skip if Set 1-4 1010 bbba ffff ffff None 1
Note 1: If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires an additional cycle. The extra cycle is
executed as a NOP.
2: Some instructions are multi word instructions. The second/third words of these instructions will be decoded as a NOP, unless the
first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16-bits. This ensures that all program memory locations
have a valid instruction.
3: fs and fd do not cover the full memory range. 2 MSBs of bank selection are forced to ‘b00 to limit the range of these instructions to
lower 4k addressing space.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 41-2: INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED)
CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
BC n Branch if Carry 1 (2) 1110 0010 nnnn nnnn None 1
BN n Branch if Negative 1 (2) 1110 0110 nnnn nnnn None 1
BNC n Branch if Not Carry 1 (2) 1110 0011 nnnn nnnn None 1
BNN n Branch if Not Negative 1 (2) 1110 0111 nnnn nnnn None 1
BNOV n Branch if Not Overflow 1 (2) 1110 0101 nnnn nnnn None 1
BNZ n Branch if Not Zero 1 (2) 1110 0001 nnnn nnnn None 1
BOV n Branch if Overflow 1 (2) 1110 0100 nnnn nnnn None 1
BRA n Branch Unconditionally 2 1101 0nnn nnnn nnnn None
BZ n Branch if Zero 1 (2) 1110 0000 nnnn nnnn None 1
CALL k, s Call subroutine 1st word 2 1110 110s kkkk kkkk None 2
2nd word 1111 kkkk kkkk kkkk
CALLW — Call subroutine using WREG 2 0000 0000 0001 0100 None 1
GOTO k Go to address 1st word 2 1110 1111 kkkk kkkk None 2
— 2nd word 1111 kkkk kkkk kkkk
RCALL n Relative Call 2 1101 1nnn nnnn nnnn None 1
RETFIE s Return from interrupt enable 2 0000 0000 0001 000s None 1
RETLW k Return with literal in WREG 2 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk None 1
RETURN s Return from Subroutine 2 0000 0000 0001 001s None 1
INHERENT INSTRUCTIONS
CLRWDT — Clear Watchdog Timer 1 0000 0000 0000 0100 None
DAW — Decimal Adjust WREG 1 0000 0000 0000 0111 C
NOP — No Operation 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 None
NOP — No Operation 1 1111 xxxx xxxx xxxx None 2
POP — Pop top of return stack (TOS) 1 0000 0000 0000 0110 None
PUSH — Push top of return stack (TOS) 1 0000 0000 0000 0101 None
RESET Software device Reset 1 0000 0000 1111 1111 All
SLEEP — Go into Standby mode 1 0000 0000 0000 0011 None
executed as a NOP.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 41-2: INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED)
LITERAL INSTRUCTIONS
ADDLW k Add literal and WREG 1 0000 1111 kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z, OV, N
ANDLW k AND literal with WREG 1 0000 1011 kkkk kkkk Z, N
IORLW k Inclusive OR literal with WREG 1 0000 1001 kkkk kkkk Z, N
LFSR f n, k Load FSR(fn) with a 14-bit 2 1110 1110 00ff kkkk None
literal (k) 1111 00kk kkkk kkkk
ADDFSR f n, k Add FSR(fn) with (k) 1 1110 1000 ffkk kkkk None
SUBFSR f n, k Subtract (k) from FSR(fn) 1 1110 1001 ffkk kkkk None
MOVLB k Move literal to BSR[5:0] 1 0000 0001 00kk kkkk None
MOVLW k Move literal to WREG 1 0000 1110 kkkk kkkk None
MULLW k Multiply literal with WREG 1 0000 1101 kkkk kkkk None
RETLW k Return with literal in WREG 2 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk None
SUBLW k Subtract WREG from literal 1 0000 1000 kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z, OV, N
XORLW k Exclusive OR literal with WREG 1 0000 1010 kkkk kkkk Z, N
DATA MEMORY  PROGRAM MEMORY INSTRUCTIONS
TBLRD* Table Read 2-5 0000 0000 0000 1000 None
TBLRD*+ Table Read with post-increment 0000 0000 0000 1001 None
TBLRD*- Table Read with post-decrement 0000 0000 0000 1010 None
TBLRD+* Table Read with pre-increment 0000 0000 0000 1011 None
TBLWT* Table Write 2-5 0000 0000 0000 1100 None
TBLWT*+ Table Write with post-increment 0000 0000 0000 1101 None
TBLWT*- Table Write with post-decrement 0000 0000 0000 1110 None
TBLWT+* Table Write with pre-increment 0000 0000 0000 1111 None
executed as a NOP.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
41.1.1 STANDARD INSTRUCTION SET
Example: ADDLW 15h
Before Instruction
W = 10h
ADDFSR Add Literal to FSR
After Instruction
Syntax: ADDFSR f, k
W = 25h
Operands: 0  k  63
f  [ 0, 1, 2 ]
Operation: FSR(f) + k  FSR(f)
Status Affected: None ADDWF ADD W to f
Encoding: 1110 1000 ffkk kkkk Syntax: ADDWF f {,d {,a}}
Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the
Operands: 0  f  255
contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’.
d  [0,1]
Words: 1 a  [0,1]
Cycles: 1
Operation: (W) + (f)  dest
Q Cycle Activity:
Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Encoding: 0010 01da ffff ffff
Decode Read Pro- Write to
literal ‘k’ cess FSR Description: Add W to register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the
Data result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the
result is stored back in register ‘f’
(default).
Example: ADDFSR 2, 23h If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
Before Instruction
GPR bank.
FSR2 = 03FFh
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
After Instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates
FSR2 = 0422h in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec-
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-
ADDLW ADD literal to W Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
eral Offset Mode” for details.
Syntax: ADDLW k
Words: 1
Operands: 0  k  255 Cycles: 1
Operation: (W) + k  W
Encoding: 0000 1111 kkkk kkkk Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Description: The contents of W are added to the
8-bit literal ‘k’ and the result is placed in Decode Read Process Write to
W. register ‘f’ Data destination
Words: 1
Cycles: 1 Example: ADDWF REG, 0, 0
Q Cycle Activity: Before Instruction

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 W = 17h
REG = 0C2h
Decode Read Process Write to W
After Instruction
literal ‘k’ Data
W = 0D9h
REG = 0C2h
Note: All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in
symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
ADDWFC ADD W and CARRY bit to f ANDLW AND literal with W

Syntax: ADDWFC f {,d {,a}} Syntax: ANDLW k
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: 0  k  255
d [0,1] Operation: (W) .AND. k  W
a [0,1]
Status Affected: N, Z
Operation: (W) + (f) + (C)  dest
Encoding: 0000 1011 kkkk kkkk
Status Affected: N,OV, C, DC, Z
Description: The contents of W are AND’ed with the
8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W.
Description: Add W, the CARRY flag and data mem- Words: 1
ory location ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is Cycles: 1
placed in data memory location ‘f’. Q Cycle Activity:
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
GPR bank. Decode Read literal Process Write to W
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction ‘k’ Data
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing Example: ANDLW 05Fh
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- Before Instruction
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- W = A3h
eral Offset Mode” for details. After Instruction
Words: 1 W = 03h
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write to
register ‘f’ Data destination
Example: ADDWFC REG, 0, 1

Before Instruction
CARRY bit = 1
REG = 02h
W = 4Dh
After Instruction
CARRY bit = 0
REG = 02h
W = 50h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
ANDWF AND W with f BC Branch if Carry

Syntax: ANDWF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: BC n
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: -128  n  127
d [0,1] Operation: if CARRY bit is ‘1’
a [0,1]
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Operation: (W) .AND. (f)  dest Status Affected: None
Encoding: 1110 0010 nnnn nnnn
Description: If the CARRY bit is ‘1’, then the program
Description: The contents of W are AND’ed with will branch.
register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back added to the PC. Since the PC will have
in register ‘f’ (default). incremented to fetch the next
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. instruction, the new address will be
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
GPR bank. 2-cycle instruction.
Words: 1
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing Cycles: 1(2)
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec- Q Cycle Activity:
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- If Jump:
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
Words: 1 ‘n’ Data
Cycles: 1 No No No No
operation operation operation operation
Q Cycle Activity:
If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process No
‘n’ Data operation
Example: ANDWF REG, 0, 0

Example: HERE BC 5
Before Instruction
Before Instruction
W = 17h PC = address (HERE)
REG = C2h
After Instruction
After Instruction
If CARRY = 1;
W = 02h PC = address (HERE + 12)
REG = C2h If CARRY = 0;
PC = address (HERE + 2)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
BCF Bit Clear f BN Branch if Negative

Syntax: BCF f, b {,a} Syntax: BN n
0b7 Operation: if NEGATIVE bit is ‘1’
a [0,1]
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Operation: 0  f Status Affected: None
Status Affected: None
Encoding: 1001 bbba ffff ffff
Description: If the NEGATIVE bit is ‘1’, then the
Description: Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is cleared. program will branch.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the added to the PC. Since the PC will have
GPR bank. incremented to fetch the next
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction instruction, the new address will be
set is enabled, this instruction operates PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing 2-cycle instruction.
Words: 1
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- Cycles: 1(2)
eral Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity:
Words: 1 If Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Cycles: 1
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
Q Cycle Activity: ‘n’ Data
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No No No No
Decode Read Process Write operation operation operation operation
register ‘f’ Data register ‘f’ If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: BCF FLAG_REG, 7, 0 Decode Read literal Process No
Before Instruction ‘n’ Data operation
FLAG_REG = C7h
After Instruction Example: HERE BN Jump
FLAG_REG = 47h
Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE)
After Instruction
If NEGATIVE = 1;
PC = address (Jump)
If NEGATIVE = 0;

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
BNC Branch if Not Carry BNN Branch if Not Negative

Syntax: BNC n Syntax: BNN n
Operands: -128  n  127 Operands: -128  n  127
Operation: if CARRY bit is ‘0’ Operation: if NEGATIVE bit is ‘0’
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Status Affected: None Status Affected: None
Encoding: 1110 0011 nnnn nnnn Encoding: 1110 0111 nnnn nnnn
Description: If the CARRY bit is ‘0’, then the program Description: If the NEGATIVE bit is ‘0’, then the
will branch. program will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
2-cycle instruction. 2-cycle instruction.
Words: 1 Words: 1
Cycles: 1(2) Cycles: 1(2)
Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump: If Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
‘n’ Data ‘n’ Data
No No No No No No No No
operation operation operation operation operation operation operation operation
If No Jump: If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process No Decode Read literal Process No
‘n’ Data operation ‘n’ Data operation
Example: HERE BNC Jump Example: HERE BNN Jump

Before Instruction Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE) PC = address (HERE)
After Instruction After Instruction
If CARRY = 0; If NEGATIVE = 0;
PC = address (Jump) PC = address (Jump)
If CARRY = 1; If NEGATIVE = 1;
PC = address (HERE + 2) PC = address (HERE + 2)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
BNOV Branch if Not Overflow BNZ Branch if Not Zero

Syntax: BNOV n Syntax: BNZ n
Operands: -128  n  127 Operands: -128  n  127
Operation: if OVERFLOW bit is ‘0’ Operation: if ZERO bit is ‘0’
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Encoding: 1110 0101 nnnn nnnn Encoding: 1110 0001 nnnn nnnn
Description: If the OVERFLOW bit is ‘0’, then the Description: If the ZERO bit is ‘0’, then the program
program will branch. will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
2-cycle instruction. 2-cycle instruction.
Words: 1 Words: 1
If Jump: If Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
‘n’ Data ‘n’ Data
If No Jump: If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process No Decode Read literal Process No
‘n’ Data operation ‘n’ Data operation
Example: HERE BNOV Jump Example: HERE BNZ Jump

If OVERFLOW = 0; If ZERO = 0;
PC = address (Jump) PC = address (Jump)
If OVERFLOW = 1; If ZERO = 1;
PC = address (HERE + 2) PC = address (HERE + 2)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
BRA Unconditional Branch BSF Bit Set f

Syntax: BRA n Syntax: BSF f, b {,a}
Operands: -1024  n  1023 Operands: 0  f  255
Operation: (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC 0b7
a [0,1]
Operation: 1  f[b>
Encoding: 1101 0nnn nnnn nnnn
Description: Add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to
the PC. Since the PC will have incre-
mented to fetch the next instruction, the Description: Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is set.
new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
instruction is a 2-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
Words: 1 GPR bank.
Cycles: 2 set is enabled, this instruction operates
Q Cycle Activity: in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
‘n’ Data eral Offset Mode” for details.
No No No No
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Example: HERE BRA Jump
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Before Instruction Decode Read Process Write
PC = address (HERE)
register ‘f’ Data register ‘f’
After Instruction
PC = address (Jump)
Example: BSF FLAG_REG, 7, 1
Before Instruction
FLAG_REG = 0Ah
After Instruction
FLAG_REG = 8Ah

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
BTFSC Bit Test File, Skip if Clear BTFSS Bit Test File, Skip if Set
Syntax: BTFSC f, b {,a} Syntax: BTFSS f, b {,a}
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: 0  f  255
0b7 0b<7
a [0,1] a [0,1]
Operation: skip if (f) = 0 Operation: skip if (f) = 1
Encoding: 1011 bbba ffff ffff Encoding: 1010 bbba ffff ffff
Description: If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘0’, then the next Description: If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘1’, then the next
instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘0’, then instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘1’, then
the next instruction fetched during the the next instruction fetched during the
current instruction execution is discarded current instruction execution is discarded
and a NOP is executed instead, making and a NOP is executed instead, making
this a 2-cycle instruction. this a 2-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If
‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank. GPR bank.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates in set is enabled, this instruction operates
Indexed Literal Offset Addressing in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). mode whenever f 95 (5Fh).
See Section 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and See Section 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words: 1 Words: 1
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction. 4 cycles if by a 2-word instruction. 4 cycles if
skip and followed by a 3-word skip and followed by a 3-word
instruction. instruction.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process No Decode Read Process No
register ‘f’ Data operation register ‘f’ Data operation
If skip: If skip:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: HERE BTFSC FLAG, 1, 0 Example: HERE BTFSS FLAG, 1, 0

FALSE : FALSE :
TRUE : TRUE :
If FLAG<1> = 0; If FLAG<1> = 0;
PC = address (TRUE) PC = address (FALSE)
If FLAG<1> = 1; If FLAG<1> = 1;
PC = address (FALSE) PC = address (TRUE)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
BTG Bit Toggle f BOV Branch if Overflow

Syntax: BTG f, b {,a} Syntax: BOV n
0b7 Operation: if OVERFLOW bit is ‘1’
a [0,1]
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Operation: (f)  f Status Affected: None
Description: If the OVERFLOW bit is ‘1’, then the
Description: Bit ‘b’ in data memory location ‘f’ is program will branch.
inverted. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. added to the PC. Since the PC will have
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the incremented to fetch the next
GPR bank. instruction, the new address will be
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
set is enabled, this instruction operates 2-cycle instruction.
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Words: 1
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- Cycles: 1(2)
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- Q Cycle Activity:
eral Offset Mode” for details. If Jump:
Words: 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Cycles: 1 Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
‘n’ Data
Q Cycle Activity:
No No No No
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 operation operation operation operation
Decode Read Process Write If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process No
Example: BTG PORTC, 4, 0 ‘n’ Data operation
Before Instruction:
PORTC = 0111 0101 [75h]
Example: HERE BOV Jump
After Instruction:
PORTC = 0110 0101 [65h] Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE)
After Instruction
If OVERFLOW = 1;
PC = address (Jump)
If OVERFLOW = 0;

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
BZ Branch if Zero CALL Subroutine Call

Syntax: BZ n Syntax: CALL k {,s}
Operands: -128  n  127 Operands: 0  k  1048575
Operation: if ZERO bit is ‘1’ s [0,1]
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Operation: (PC) + 4  TOS,
Status Affected: None k  PC<20:1>,
if s = 1
Encoding: 1110 0000 nnnn nnnn (W)  WREG_CSHAD,
Description: If the ZERO bit is ‘1’, then the program (Status)  STATUS_CSHAD,
will branch. (BSR)  BSR_CSHAD
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is Status Affected: None
added to the PC. Since the PC will
Encoding:
have incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be 1st word (k<7:0>) 1110 110s k7kkk kkkk0
2nd word(k<19:8>) 1111 k19kkk kkkk kkkk8
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
2-cycle instruction. Description: Subroutine call of entire 2-Mbyte
memory range. First, return address
Words: 1
(PC + 4) is pushed onto the return
Cycles: 1(2) stack. If ‘s’ = 1, the W, Status and BSR
Q Cycle Activity: registers are also pushed into their
If Jump: respective shadow registers,
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 WREG_CSHAD, STATUS_CSHAD and
BSR_CSHAD. If ‘s’ = 0, no update
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC occurs (default). Then, the
‘n’ Data
20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>.
No No No No CALL is a 2-cycle instruction.
Words: 2
If No Jump:
Cycles: 2
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process No Q Cycle Activity:
‘n’ Data operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal PUSH PC to Read literal
Example: HERE BZ Jump ‘k’<7:0>, stack ‘k’<19:8>,
Write to PC
Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE) No No No No
After Instruction
If ZERO = 1;
PC = address (Jump)
If ZERO = 0; Example: HERE CALL THERE, 1
Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE)
After Instruction
PC = address (THERE)
TOS = address (HERE + 4)
WREG_CSHAD = W
BSR_CSHAD = BSR
STATUS_CSHAD = Status

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
CLRF Clear f
CALLW Subroutine Call Using WREG
Syntax: CLRF f {,a}
Syntax: CALLW
Operands: None a [0,1]
Operation: (PC + 2)  TOS, Operation: 000h  f
(W)  PCL, 1Z
(PCLATH)  PCH,
Status Affected: Z
(PCLATU)  PCU
Encoding: 0110 101a ffff ffff
Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 0100 Description: Clears the contents of the specified
register.
Description First, the return address (PC + 2) is If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
pushed onto the return stack. Next, the If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
contents of W are written to PCL; the GPR bank.
existing value is discarded. Then, the If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are set is enabled, this instruction operates
latched into PCH and PCU, in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
respectively. The second cycle is mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec-
executed as a NOP instruction while the tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-
new next instruction is fetched. Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
Unlike CALL, there is no option to eral Offset Mode” for details.
update W, Status or BSR.
Words: 1
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read Process Write
Decode Read PUSH PC No register ‘f’ Data register ‘f’
WREG to stack operation
No No No No Example: CLRF FLAG_REG, 1
operation opera- operation operation Before Instruction
tion FLAG_REG = 5Ah
After Instruction
FLAG_REG = 00h
Example: HERE CALLW
Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE)
PCLATH = 10h
PCLATU = 00h
W = 06h
After Instruction
PC = 001006h
TOS = address (HERE + 2)
PCLATH = 10h
PCLATU = 00h
W = 06h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
CLRWDT Clear Watchdog Timer COMF Complement f

Syntax: CLRWDT Syntax: COMF f {,d {,a}}
Operands: None Operands: 0  f  255
Operation: 000h  WDT, d  [0,1]
a  [0,1]
000h  WDT postscaler,
1  TO, Operation: (f)  dest
1  PD
Status Affected: TO, PD Encoding: 0001 11da ffff ffff
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0100
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are
Description: CLRWDT instruction resets the complemented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
Watchdog Timer. It also resets the post- stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
scaler of the WDT. Status bits, TO and stored back in register ‘f’ (default).
PD, are set. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
Words: 1
GPR bank.
Cycles: 1 If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
Q Cycle Activity: set is enabled, this instruction operates
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No Process No tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-
operation Data operation Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
Example: CLRWDT Words: 1
Before Instruction Cycles: 1
WDT Counter = ?
After Instruction Q Cycle Activity:
WDT Counter = 00h Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
WDT Postscaler = 0 Decode Read Process Write to
TO = 1 register ‘f’ Data destination
PD = 1
Example: COMF REG, 0, 0

Before Instruction
REG = 13h
After Instruction
REG = 13h
W = ECh

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
CPFSEQ Compare f with W, skip if f = W CPFSGT Compare f with W, skip if f > W

Syntax: CPFSEQ f {,a} Syntax: CPFSGT f {,a}
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) – (W), Operation: (f) –W),
skip if (f) = (W) skip if (f) > (W)
(unsigned comparison) (unsigned comparison)
Encoding: 0110 001a ffff ffff Encoding: 0110 010a ffff ffff
Description: Compares the contents of data memory Description: Compares the contents of data memory
location ‘f’ to the contents of W by location ‘f’ to the contents of the W by
performing an unsigned subtraction. performing an unsigned subtraction.
If ‘f’ = W, then the fetched instruction is If the contents of ‘f’ are greater than the
discarded and a NOP is executed contents of WREG, then the fetched
instead, making this a 2-cycle instruction is discarded and a NOP is
instruction. executed instead, making this a
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. 2-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction GPR bank.
set is enabled, this instruction operates If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing set is enabled, this instruction operates
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec- in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec-
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-
eral Offset Mode” for details. Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
Words: 1 eral Offset Mode” for details.
Cycles: 1(2) Words: 1
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed Cycles: 1(2)
by a 2-word instruction. 4 Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
cycles if skip and followed by a by a 2-word instruction.
3-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity:
Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read Process No
Decode Read Process No register ‘f’ Data operation
register ‘f’ Data operation If skip:
If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No operation operation operation operation
operation operation operation operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
operation operation operation operation No No No No
Example: HERE CPFSGT REG, 0
Example: HERE CPFSEQ REG, 0
NGREATER :
NEQUAL :
GREATER :
EQUAL :
Before Instruction
Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
PC Address = Address (HERE)
W = ?
W = ?
After Instruction
REG = ?
After Instruction If REG  W;
PC = Address (GREATER)
If REG = W;
PC = Address (EQUAL) If REG  W;
PC = Address (NGREATER)
If REG  W;
PC = Address (NEQUAL)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
CPFSLT Compare f with W, skip if f < W DAW Decimal Adjust W Register

Syntax: CPFSLT f {,a} Syntax: DAW
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: None
a  [0,1] Operation: If (W<3:0>) > 9] or [DC = 1] then
Operation: (f) –W), (W<3:0>) + 6  W<3:0>;
skip if (f) < (W) else
(unsigned comparison) (W<3:0>)  W[3:0>;
If [(W<7:4>) + DC > 9] or [C = 1] then
Encoding: 0110 000a ffff ffff (W<7:4>) + 6 + DC  W<7:4>;
Description: Compares the contents of data memory else
location ‘f’ to the contents of W by (W<7:4>) + DC  W<7:4>
performing an unsigned subtraction. Status Affected: C
If the contents of ‘f’ are less than the
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0111
contents of W, then the fetched
instruction is discarded and a NOP is Description: DAW adjusts the 8-bit value in W, result-
executed instead, making this a ing from the earlier addition of two vari-
2-cycle instruction. ables (each in packed BCD format) and
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. produces a correct packed BCD result.
Words: 1
GPR bank.
Cycles: 1
Words: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Cycles: 1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
by a 2-word instruction. 4 Decode Read Process Write
cycles if skip and followed by a register W Data W
3-word instruction. Example1:
Q Cycle Activity: DAW
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Before Instruction
Decode Read Process No W = A5h
register ‘f’ Data operation C = 0
If skip: DC = 0
After Instruction
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
W = 05h
No No No No C = 1
operation operation operation operation DC = 0
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Example 2:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Before Instruction
No No No No W = CEh
operation operation operation operation C = 0
DC = 0
No No No No After Instruction
W = 34h
C = 1
Example: HERE CPFSLT REG, 1 DC = 0
NLESS :
LESS :
Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
W = ?
After Instruction
If REG < W;
PC = Address (LESS)
If REG  W;
PC = Address (NLESS)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
DECF Decrement f DECFSZ Decrement f, skip if 0

Syntax: DECF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: DECFSZ f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1] d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) – 1  dest Operation: (f) – 1  dest,
skip if result = 0
Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z
Encoding: 0000 01da ffff ffff Status Affected: None
Description: Decrement register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the
result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are
result is stored back in register ‘f’ decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
(default). placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction,
GPR bank. which is already fetched, is discarded
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction and a NOP is executed instead, making
set is enabled, this instruction operates it a 2-cycle instruction.
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec- If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- GPR bank.
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
eral Offset Mode” for details. set is enabled, this instruction operates
Words: 1
Cycles: 1 tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-
Q Cycle Activity: Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write to Words: 1
register ‘f’ Data destination Cycles: 1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction. 4
Example: DECF CNT, 1, 0
cycles if skip and followed by a
Before Instruction 3-word instruction.
CNT = 01h
Z = 0 Q Cycle Activity:
After Instruction Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
CNT = 00h Decode Read Process Write to
Z = 1
If skip:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
No No No No
Example: HERE DECFSZ CNT, 1, 1

GOTO LOOP
CONTINUE
Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
After Instruction
CNT = CNT - 1
If CNT = 0;
PC = Address (CONTINUE)
If CNT  0;
PC = Address (HERE + 2)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
DCFSNZ Decrement f, skip if not 0 GOTO Unconditional Branch

Syntax: DCFSNZ f {,d {,a}}
Syntax: GOTO k
Operands: 0  k  1048575
d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] Operation: k  PC<20:1>
Operation: (f) – 1  dest, Status Affected: None
skip if result  0
Encoding:
1st word (k[7:0>) 1110 1111 k7kkk kkkk0
Encoding: 0100 11da ffff ffff 2nd word(k[19:8>) 1111 k19kkk kkkk kkkk8
Description: GOTO allows an unconditional branch
decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is anywhere within entire
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
2-Mbyte memory range. The 20-bit
placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>.
If the result is not ‘0’, the next GOTO is always a 2-cycle
instruction, which is already fetched, is
instruction.
discarded and a NOP is executed
instead, making it a 2-cycle Words: 2
instruction. Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity:
GPR bank. Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction Decode Read literal No Read literal
set is enabled, this instruction operates ‘k’<7:0>, operation ‘k’<19:8>,
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing Write to PC
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec- No No No No
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- operation operation operation operation
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
Words: 1 Example: GOTO THERE
Cycles: 1(2) After Instruction

Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed PC = Address (THERE)
3-word instruction.
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
If skip:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
No No No No
Example: HERE DCFSNZ TEMP, 1, 0

ZERO :
NZERO :
Before Instruction
TEMP = ?
After Instruction
TEMP = TEMP – 1,
If TEMP = 0;
PC = Address (ZERO)
If TEMP  0;
PC = Address (NZERO)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
INCF Increment f INCFSZ Increment f, skip if 0

Syntax: INCF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: INCFSZ f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1] d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) + 1  dest Operation: (f) + 1  dest,
skip if result = 0
Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z
Encoding: 0010 10da ffff ffff Status Affected: None
incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’ (default). placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction,
GPR bank. which is already fetched, is discarded
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction and a NOP is executed instead, making
set is enabled, this instruction operates it a 2-cycle instruction.
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec- If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- GPR bank.
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
eral Offset Mode” for details. set is enabled, this instruction operates
Words: 1
Cycles: 1 tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-
Q Cycle Activity: Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write to Words: 1
register ‘f’ Data destination Cycles: 1(2)
Example: INCF CNT, 1, 0
Before Instruction 3-word instruction.
CNT = FFh
Z = 0 Q Cycle Activity:
C = ? Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
DC = ?
After Instruction Decode Read Process Write to
CNT = 00h register ‘f’ Data destination
Z = 1 If skip:
C = 1
DC = 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
No No No No
Example: HERE INCFSZ CNT, 1, 0

NZERO :
ZERO :
Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
After Instruction
CNT = CNT + 1
If CNT = 0;
PC = Address (ZERO)
If CNT  0;

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
INFSNZ Increment f, skip if not 0 IORLW Inclusive OR literal with W

Syntax: INFSNZ f {,d {,a}} Syntax: IORLW k
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: 0  k  255
d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] Operation: (W) .OR. k  W
Operation: (f) + 1  dest, Status Affected: N, Z
skip if result  0 Encoding: 0000 1001 kkkk kkkk
Status Affected: None Description: The contents of W are ORed with the 8-
Encoding: 0100 10da ffff ffff bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W.
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are Words: 1
incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
Cycles: 1
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’ (default). Q Cycle Activity:
If the result is not ‘0’, the next Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
instruction, which is already fetched, is
Decode Read Process Write to W
discarded and a NOP is executed literal ‘k’ Data
instead, making it a 2-cycle
instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. Example: IORLW 35h
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the Before Instruction
GPR bank.
W = 9Ah
set is enabled, this instruction operates After Instruction
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing W = BFh
Words: 1
Cycles: 1(2)
3-word instruction.
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
If skip:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
No No No No
Example: HERE INFSNZ REG, 1, 0

ZERO
NZERO
Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
After Instruction
REG = REG + 1
If REG  0;
If REG = 0;
PC = Address (ZERO)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
IORWF Inclusive OR W with f LFSR Load FSR

Syntax: IORWF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: LFSR f, k
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: 0f2
d  [0,1] 0  k  16383
a  [0,1]
Operation: k  FSRf
Operation: (W) .OR. (f)  dest Status Affected: None
Encoding: 1110 1110 00ff k13kkk
Encoding: 0001 00da ffff ffff 1111 00k9k8 kkkk kkkk
Description: Inclusive OR W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is Description: The 14-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the
‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, File Select Register pointed to by ‘f’.
the result is placed back in register ‘f’
Words: 2
(default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. Cycles: 2
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the Q Cycle Activity:
GPR bank.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
set is enabled, this instruction operates Decode Read literal Process Write
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing ‘k’ MSB Data literal ‘k’
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec- MSB to
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- FSRfH
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- Decode Read literal Process Write literal
eral Offset Mode” for details. ‘k’ LSB Data ‘k’ to FSRfL
Words: 1
Cycles: 1 Example: LFSR 2, 3ABh
After Instruction
Q Cycle Activity:
FSR2H = 03h
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 FSR2L = ABh
Example: IORWF RESULT, 0, 1

Before Instruction
RESULT = 13h
W = 91h
After Instruction
RESULT = 13h
W = 93h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
MOVF Move f MOVFF Move f to f

Syntax: MOVF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: MOVFF fs,fd
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: 0  fs  4095
d  [0,1] 0  fd  4095
a  [0,1]
Operation: (fs)  fd
Operation: (f)  dest Status Affected: None
Encoding:
Encoding: 0101 00da ffff ffff 1st word (source) 1100 ffff ffff ffffs
2nd word (destin.) 1111 ffff ffff ffffd
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are moved to
a destination dependent upon the Description: The contents of source register ‘fs’ are
status of ‘d’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is moved to destination register ‘fd’.
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is Location of source ‘fs’ can be anywhere
placed back in register ‘f’ (default). in the 4096-byte data space (000h to
Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the FFFh) and location of destination ‘fd’
256-byte bank. can also be anywhere from 000h to
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. FFFh.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the MOVFF has curtailed the
GPR bank. source and destination range to the
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction lower 4 Kbyte space of memory (Banks
set is enabled, this instruction operates 1 through 15). For everything else, use
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing MOVFFL.
Words: 2
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- Cycles: 2 (3)
eral Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity:
Cycles: 1 Decode Read Process No
register ‘f’ Data operation
Q Cycle Activity:
(src)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No No Write
Decode Read Process Write to operation operation register ‘f’
register ‘f’ Data destination (dest)
No dummy
read
Example: MOVF REG, 0, 0
Before Instruction Example: MOVFF REG1, REG2
REG = 22h Before Instruction
W = FFh REG1 = 33h
After Instruction REG2 = 11h
REG = 22h After Instruction
W = 22h REG1 = 33h
REG2 = 33h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
MOVLB Move literal to BSR

MOVFFL Move f to f (Long Range)
Syntax: MOVLB k
Syntax: MOVFFL fs,fd
Operands: 0  fs  16383
Operation: k  BSR
0  fd  16383
Operation: (fs)  fd Status Affected: None
Encoding: 0000 0001 00kk kkkk
Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the
Encoding:
Bank Select Register (BSR<5:0>). The
1st word 0000 0000 0110 fsfsfsfs
2nd word 1111 fsfsfsfs fsfsfsfs fsfsfdfd value of BSR<7:6> always remains ‘0’.
3rd word 1111 fdfdfdfd fdfdfdfd fdfdfdfd Words: 1
Description: The contents of source register ‘fs’ are Cycles: 1
moved to destination register ‘fd’.
Q Cycle Activity:
Location of source ‘fs’ and destination ‘fd’
can be anywhere in the 16 Kbyte data Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
space (0000h to 3FFFh). Decode Read Process Write literal
Either source or destination can be W literal ‘k’ Data ‘k’ to BSR
(a useful special situation).
MOVFFL is particularly useful for
Example: MOVLB 5
transferring a data memory location to a
peripheral register (such as the transmit Before Instruction
buffer or an I/O port). BSR Register = 02h
The MOVFFL instruction cannot use the After Instruction
PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the BSR Register = 05h
destination register.
Words: 3
Cycles: 3
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No No No
operation operation operation
Decode Read reg- Process No
ister ‘fs’ data operation
(src)
Decode No No Write
operation operation register ‘fd’
No dummy (dest)
read
Example: MOVFFL 2000h, 200Ah

Before Instruction
Contents of 2000h = 33h
Contents of 200Ah = 11h
After Instruction
Contents of 200Ah = 33h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
MOVLW Move literal to W MOVWF Move W to f

Syntax: MOVLW k Syntax: MOVWF f {,a}
Operands: 0  k  255 Operands: 0  f  255
Operation: kW a  [0,1]
Operation: (W)  f
Description: The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into W. Encoding: 0110 111a ffff ffff
Description: Move data from W to register ‘f’.
Words: 1
Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the
Cycles: 1 256-byte bank.
Q Cycle Activity: If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
GPR bank.
Decode Read Process Write to W If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
literal ‘k’ Data set is enabled, this instruction operates
Example: MOVLW 5Ah mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec-
After Instruction Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
W = 5Ah eral Offset Mode” for details.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read W Process Write
Data register ‘f’
Example: MOVWF REG, 0

Before Instruction
W = 4Fh
REG = FFh
After Instruction
W = 4Fh
REG = 4Fh

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
MULLW Multiply literal with W MULWF Multiply W with f

Syntax: MULLW k Syntax: MULWF f {,a}
Operands: 0  k  255 Operands: 0  f  255
Operation: (W) x k  PRODH:PRODL a  [0,1]
Operation: (W) x (f)  PRODH:PRODL
Description: An unsigned multiplication is carried Encoding: 0000 001a ffff ffff
out between the contents of W and the Description: An unsigned multiplication is carried
8-bit literal ‘k’. The 16-bit result is out between the contents of W and the
placed in the PRODH:PRODL register register file location ‘f’. The 16-bit
pair. PRODH contains the high byte. result is stored in the PRODH:PRODL
W is unchanged. register pair. PRODH contains the
None of the Status flags are affected. high byte. Both W and ‘f’ are
Note that neither overflow nor carry is unchanged.
possible in this operation. A zero result None of the Status flags are affected.
is possible but not detected. Note that neither overflow nor carry is
possible in this operation. A zero
Words: 1
result is possible but not detected.
Cycles: 1 If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
Q Cycle Activity: selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used
to select the GPR bank.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write set is enabled, this instruction
literal ‘k’ Data registers operates in Indexed Literal Offset
PRODH: Addressing mode whenever
PRODL f 95 (5Fh). See Section
41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Ori-
Example: MULLW 0C4h ented Instructions in Indexed Literal
Offset Mode” for details.
Before Instruction
Words: 1
W = E2h
PRODH = ? Cycles: 1
PRODL = ?
Q Cycle Activity:
After Instruction
W = E2h Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
PRODH = ADh Decode Read Process Write
PRODL = 08h register ‘f’ Data registers
PRODH:
PRODL
Example: MULWF REG, 1

Before Instruction
W = C4h
REG = B5h
PRODH = ?
PRODL = ?
After Instruction
W = C4h
REG = B5h
PRODH = 8Ah
PRODL = 94h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
NEGF Negate f NOP No Operation

Syntax: NEGF f {,a} Syntax: NOP
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: None
a  [0,1] Operation: No operation
Operation: (f)+1f
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Encoding: 0110 110a ffff ffff 1111 xxxx xxxx xxxx
Description: Location ‘f’ is negated using two’s Description: No operation.
complement. The result is placed in the Words: 1
data memory location ‘f’.
GPR bank.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
set is enabled, this instruction operates Decode No No No
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing operation operation operation
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- Example:
None.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write
Example: NEGF REG, 1

Before Instruction
REG = 0011 1010 [3Ah]
After Instruction
REG = 1100 0110 [C6h]

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
POP Pop Top of Return Stack PUSH Push Top of Return Stack
Syntax: POP Syntax: PUSH
Operands: None Operands: None
Operation: (TOS)  bit bucket Operation: (PC) + 2  TOS
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0110 Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0101
Description: The TOS value is pulled off the return Description: The PC + 2 is pushed onto the top of
stack and is discarded. The TOS value the return stack. The previous TOS
then becomes the previous value that value is pushed down on the stack.
was pushed onto the return stack. This instruction allows implementing a
This instruction is provided to enable software stack by modifying TOS and
the user to properly manage the return then pushing it onto the return stack.
stack to incorporate a software stack.
Words: 1
Words: 1 Cycles: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode PUSH No No
Decode No POP TOS No PC + 2 onto operation operation
operation value operation return stack
Example: POP Example: PUSH

GOTO NEW
Before Instruction
Before Instruction TOS = 345Ah
TOS = 0031A2h PC = 0124h
Stack (1 level down) = 014332h
After Instruction
After Instruction PC = 0126h
TOS = 014332h TOS = 0126h
PC = NEW Stack (1 level down) = 345Ah

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
RCALL Relative Call RESET Reset

Syntax: RCALL n Syntax: RESET
Operands: -1024  n  1023 Operands: None
Operation: (PC) + 2  TOS, Operation: Reset all registers and flags that are
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC affected by a MCLR Reset.
Status Affected: None Status Affected: All
Encoding: 1101 1nnn nnnn nnnn Encoding: 0000 0000 1111 1111
Description: Subroutine call with a jump up to 1K Description: This instruction provides a way to
from the current location. First, return execute a MCLR Reset by software.
address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the
Words: 1
stack. Then, add the 2’s complement
number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will Cycles: 1
have incremented to fetch the next Q Cycle Activity:
instruction, the new address will be
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a
2-cycle instruction. Decode Start No No
Reset operation operation
Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Example: RESET
Q Cycle Activity:
After Instruction
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Registers = Reset Value
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC Flags* = Reset Value
‘n’ Data
PUSH PC to
stack
No No No No
Example: HERE RCALL Jump

Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
After Instruction
PC = Address (Jump)
TOS = Address (HERE + 2)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
RETFIE Return from Interrupt RETLW Return literal to W

Syntax: RETFIE {s} Syntax: RETLW k
Operands: s  [0,1] Operands: 0  k  255
Operation: (TOS)  PC, Operation: k  W,
if s = 1, context is restored into WREG, (TOS)  PC,
STATUS, BSR, FSR0H, FSR0L, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged
FSR1H, FSR1L, FSR2H, FSR2L,
PRODH, PRODL, PCLATH and
PCLATU registers from the Encoding: 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk
corresponding shadow registers. Description: W is loaded with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The
program counter is loaded from the top
if s = 0, there is no change in status of of the stack (the return address). The
any register. upper and high address latches
Status Affected: STAT<1:0> in INTCON1 register (PCLATU/H) remains unchanged.
Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 000s Words: 1
Description: Return from interrupt. Stack is popped Cycles: 2
and Top-of-Stack (TOS) is loaded into Q Cycle Activity:
the PC. Interrupts are enabled by
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
setting either the high or low priority
global interrupt enable bit. If 's' = 1, the Decode Read Process POP PC
contents of the shadow registers, literal ‘k’ Data from stack,
WREG, STATUS, BSR, FSR0H, Write to W
FSR0L, FSR1H, FSR1L, FSR2H, No No No No
FSR2L, PRODH, PRODL, PCLATH and operation operation operation operation
PCLATU, are loaded into corresponding
registers. There are two sets of shadow
Example:
registers, main context and low context.
The set retrieved on RETFIE instruction
CALL TABLE ; W contains table
execution depends on what the state of
; offset value
operation of the CPU was when RET-
; W now has
FIE was executed. If ‘s’ = 0, no update
; table value
of these registers occurs (default).
:
Words: 1 TABLE
Cycles: 2 ADDWF PCL ; W = offset
RETLW k0 ; Begin table
Q Cycle Activity: RETLW k1 ;
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 :
Decode No No POP PC from :
operation operation stack RETLW kn ; End of table
Set INT-
CONx.STAT bits Before Instruction
and restore W = 07h
context After Instruction
No No No No W = value of kn
Example: RETFIE 1
After Interrupt
PC = TOS
WREG = WREG_SHAD
BSR = BSR_SHAD
STATUS = STATUS_SHAD
FSR0L/H = FSR0L/H_SHAD
PRODL/H = PRODL/H_SHAD
PCLATH/U = PCLATH/U_SHAD

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
RETURN Return from Subroutine RLCF Rotate Left f through Carry

Syntax: RETURN {s} Syntax: RLCF f {,d {,a}}
Operands: s  [0,1] Operands: 0  f  255
Operation: (TOS)  PC, d  [0,1]
a  [0,1]
if s = 1
(WREG_CSHAD)  W, Operation: (f<n>)  dest<n + 1>,
(STATUS_CSHAD)  Status, (f<7>)  C,
(BSR_CSHAD)  BSR, (C)  dest<0>
PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged Status Affected: C, N, Z
Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 001s
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated
Description: Return from subroutine. The stack is one bit to the left through the CARRY
popped and the top of the stack (TOS) flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in
is loaded into the program counter. If W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back
‘s’= 1, the contents of the shadow in register ‘f’ (default).
registers, WREG_CSHAD, If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
STATUS_CSHAD and BSR_CSHAD, selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to
are loaded into their corresponding select the GPR bank.
registers, W, Status and BSR. If If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers set is enabled, this instruction
occurs (default). operates in Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode whenever
Words: 1
f 95 (5Fh). See Section
Cycles: 2 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Ori-
Q Cycle Activity: ented Instructions in Indexed Literal
Offset Mode” for details.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No Process POP PC C register f
operation Data from stack
No No No No Words: 1
operation operation operation operation Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: RETURN
After Instruction: register ‘f’ Data destination
PC = TOS
Example: RLCF REG, 0, 0
Before Instruction
REG = 1110 0110
C = 0
After Instruction
REG = 1110 0110
W = 1100 1100
C = 1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
RLNCF Rotate Left f (No Carry) RRCF Rotate Right f through Carry
Syntax: RLNCF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: RRCF f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1] d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f<n>)  dest<n + 1>, Operation: (f<n>)  dest<n – 1>,
(f<7>)  dest<0> (f<0>)  C,
(C)  dest<7>
Status Affected: C, N, Z
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated Encoding: 0011 00da ffff ffff
one bit to the left. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated
is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is one bit to the right through the CARRY
stored back in register ‘f’ (default). flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the register ‘f’ (default).
GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
set is enabled, this instruction operates GPR bank.
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec- set is enabled, this instruction operates
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec-
eral Offset Mode” for details. tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-
register f
Words: 1 C register f
Cycles: 1
Words: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Cycles: 1
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write to Q Cycle Activity:
register ‘f’ Data destination Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: RLNCF REG, 1, 0 register ‘f’ Data destination
Before Instruction
REG = 1010 1011 Example: RRCF REG, 0, 0
After Instruction Before Instruction
REG = 0101 0111 REG = 1110 0110
C = 0
After Instruction
REG = 1110 0110
W = 0111 0011
C = 0

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
RRNCF Rotate Right f (No Carry) SETF Set f

Syntax: RRNCF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: SETF f {,a}
d  [0,1] a [0,1]
a  [0,1]
Operation: FFh  f
Operation: (f<n>)  dest<n – 1>, Status Affected: None
(f<0>)  dest<7>
Encoding: 0110 100a ffff ffff
Description: The contents of the specified register
are set to FFh.
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
one bit to the right. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is GPR bank.
placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank will be set is enabled, this instruction operates
selected (default), overriding the BSR in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
value. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, then the bank will be mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec-
selected as per the BSR value. tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
set is enabled, this instruction operates eral Offset Mode” for details.
Words: 1
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- Cycles: 1
Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit- Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
register f Decode Read Process Write
Words: 1
Cycles: 1 Example: SETF REG, 1
Q Cycle Activity: Before Instruction
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 REG = 5Ah
After Instruction
REG = FFh
Example 1: RRNCF REG, 1, 0

Before Instruction
REG = 1101 0111
After Instruction
REG = 1110 1011
Example 2: RRNCF REG, 0, 0

Before Instruction
W = ?
REG = 1101 0111
After Instruction
W = 1110 1011
REG = 1101 0111

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SLEEP Enter Sleep mode SUBFSR Subtract Literal from FSR

Syntax: SLEEP Syntax: SUBFSR f, k
Operands: None
f  [ 0, 1, 2 ]
Operation: 00h  WDT,
Operation: (FSRf) – k  FSRf
0  WDT postscaler,
1  TO, Status Affected: None
0  PD Encoding: 1110 1001 ffkk kkkk
Status Affected: TO, PD Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from
the contents of the FSR specified by
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0011
‘f’.
Description: The Power-down Status bit (PD) is Words: 1
cleared. The Time-out Status bit (TO)
Cycles: 1
is set. Watchdog Timer and its
postscaler are cleared. Q Cycle Activity:
The processor is put into Sleep mode Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
with the oscillator stopped. Decode Read Process Write to
Words: 1 register ‘f’ Data destination
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Example: SUBFSR 2, 23h
Decode No Process Go to Before Instruction

FSR2 = 03FFh
operation Data Sleep
After Instruction
FSR2 = 03DCh
Example: SLEEP
Before Instruction
TO = ?
PD = ?
After Instruction
TO = 1†
PD = 0
† If WWDT causes wake-up, this bit is cleared.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SUBFWB Subtract f from W with borrow SUBLW Subtract W from literal

Syntax: SUBFWB f {,d {,a}} Syntax: SUBLW k
Operands: 0 f 255 Operands: 0 k 255
d  [0,1] Operation: k – (W) W
a  [0,1]
Operation: (W) – (f) – (C) dest
Description W is subtracted from the 8-bit
literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W.
Description: Subtract register ‘f’ and CARRY flag Words: 1
(borrow) from W (2’s complement
method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored Cycles: 1
in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored in Q Cycle Activity:
register ‘f’ (default).
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used Decode Read Process Write to W
to select the GPR bank. literal ‘k’ Data
Example 1: SUBLW 02h
set is enabled, this instruction
operates in Indexed Literal Offset Before Instruction
Addressing mode whenever W = 01h
C = ?
f 95 (5Fh). See Section
After Instruction
41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Ori- W = 01h
ented Instructions in Indexed Literal C = 1 ; result is positive
Offset Mode” for details. Z = 0
N = 0
Words: 1
Example 2: SUBLW 02h
Cycles: 1
Before Instruction
Q Cycle Activity: W = 02h
C = ?
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
After Instruction
Decode Read Process Write to W = 00h
register ‘f’ Data destination C = 1 ; result is zero
Z = 1
Example 1: SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 N = 0
Before Instruction Example 3: SUBLW 02h
REG = 03h
W = 02h Before Instruction
C = 1 W = 03h
After Instruction C = ?
REG = FFh After Instruction
W = 02h W = FFh ; (2’s complement)
C = 0 C = 0 ; result is negative
Z = 0 Z = 0
N = 1 ; result is negative N = 1
Example 2: SUBFWB REG, 0, 0
Before Instruction
REG = 02h
W = 05h
C = 1
After Instruction
REG = 02h
W = 03h
C = 1
Z = 0
N = 0 ; result is positive
Example 3: SUBFWB REG, 1, 0
Before Instruction
REG = 01h
W = 02h
C = 0
After Instruction
REG = 00h
W = 02h
C = 1
Z = 1 ; result is zero
N = 0

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SUBWF Subtract W from f SUBWFB Subtract W from f with Borrow

Syntax: SUBWF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: SUBWFB f {,d {,a}}
Operands: 0 f 255 Operands: 0  f  255
d  [0,1] d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) – (W) dest Operation: (f) – (W) – (C) dest

Description: Subtract W and the CARRY flag
Description: Subtract W from register ‘f’ (2’s (borrow) from register ‘f’ (2’s comple-
complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the ment method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
result is stored back in register ‘f’ stored back in register ‘f’ (default).
(default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used GPR bank.
to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates
set is enabled, this instruction in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
operates in Indexed Literal Offset mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Sec-
Addressing mode whenever tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-
f 95 (5Fh). See Section Oriented Instructions in Indexed Lit-
41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Ori- eral Offset Mode” for details.
ented Instructions in Indexed Literal
Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Words: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Cycles: 1
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q Cycle Activity: Decode Read Process Write to
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 register ‘f’ Data destination
Decode Read Process Write to Example 1: SUBWFB REG, 1, 0
Before Instruction
Example 1: SUBWF REG, 1, 0 REG = 19h (0001 1001)
W = 0Dh (0000 1101)
Before Instruction C = 1
W = 02h REG = 0Ch (0000 1100)
C = ? W = 0Dh (0000 1101)
After Instruction C = 1
REG = 01h Z = 0
W = 02h N = 0 ; result is positive
C = 1 ; result is positive
Z = 0 Example 2: SUBWFB REG, 0, 0
N = 0 Before Instruction
Example 2: SUBWF REG, 0, 0 REG = 1Bh (0001 1011)
W = 1Ah (0001 1010)
W = 02h REG = 1Bh (0001 1011)
C = ? W = 00h
After Instruction C = 1
REG = 02h Z = 1 ; result is zero
W = 00h N = 0
C = 1 ; result is zero
Z = 1 Example 3: SUBWFB REG, 1, 0
N = 0 Before Instruction
Example 3: SUBWF REG, 1, 0 REG = 03h (0000 0011)
W = 0Eh (0000 1110)
W = 02h REG = F5h (1111 0101)
C = ? ; [2’s comp]
After Instruction W = 0Eh (0000 1110)
REG = FFh ;(2’s complement) C = 0
W = 02h Z = 0
C = 0 ; result is negative N = 1 ; result is negative
Z = 0
N = 1

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SWAPF Swap f
Syntax: SWAPF f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1]
a  [0,1]
Operation: (f[3:0])  dest[7:4],
(f[7:4])  dest[3:0]
Description: The upper and lower nibbles of register
‘f’ are exchanged. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result
is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed in register ‘f’ (default).
GPR bank.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: SWAPF REG, 1, 0

Before Instruction
REG = 53h
After Instruction
REG = 35h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TBLRD Table Read TBLRD Table Read (Continued)

Syntax: TBLRD ( *; *+; *-; +*) Example1: TBLRD *+ ;
Operands: None Before Instruction
Operation: if TBLRD *, TABLAT = 55h
TBLPTR = 00A356h
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; MEMORY (00A356h) = 34h
TBLPTR – No Change; After Instruction
if TBLRD *+, TABLAT = 34h
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; TBLPTR = 00A357h
(TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; Example2: TBLRD +* ;
if TBLRD *-,
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; Before Instruction
(TBLPTR) – 1  TBLPTR; TABLAT = AAh
if TBLRD +*, TBLPTR = 01A357h
MEMORY (01A357h) = 12h
(TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; MEMORY (01A358h) = 34h
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; After Instruction
Status Affected: None TABLAT = 34h
TBLPTR = 01A358h
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 10nn
nn=0 *
=1 *+
=2 *-
=3 +*
Description: This instruction is used to read the contents
of Program Memory (P.M.). To address the
program memory, a pointer called Table
Pointer (TBLPTR) is used.
The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to
each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR
has a 2-Mbyte address range.
TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte
of Program Memory
Word
TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte
of Program Memory
Word
The TBLRD instruction can modify the value
of TBLPTR as follows:
• no change
• post-increment
• post-decrement
• pre-increment
Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No No No
No No operation No No operation
operation (Read Program operation (Write TABLAT)
Memory)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TBLWT Table Write TBLWT Table Write (Continued)

Syntax: TBLWT ( *; *+; *-; +*) Example1: TBLWT *+;
Operands: None
Before Instruction
Operation: if TBLWT*, TABLAT = 55h
(TABLAT)  Holding Register; TBLPTR = 00A356h
TBLPTR – No Change; HOLDING REGISTER
(00A356h) = FFh
if TBLWT*+,
After Instructions (table write completion)
(TABLAT)  Holding Register;
TABLAT = 55h
(TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; TBLPTR = 00A357h
if TBLWT*-, HOLDING REGISTER
(TABLAT)  Holding Register; (00A356h) = 55h
(TBLPTR) – 1  TBLPTR; Example 2: TBLWT +*;
if TBLWT+*,
(TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; Before Instruction
(TABLAT)  Holding Register; TABLAT = 34h
TBLPTR = 01389Ah
Status Affected: None HOLDING REGISTER
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 11nn (01389Ah) = FFh
HOLDING REGISTER
nn=0 * (01389Bh) = FFh
=1 *+ After Instruction (table write completion)
=2 *- TABLAT = 34h
=3 +* TBLPTR = 01389Bh
HOLDING REGISTER
Description: This instruction uses the LSBs of TBLPTR (01389Ah) = FFh
to determine which of the holding registers HOLDING REGISTER
the TABLAT is written to. The holding reg- (01389Bh) = 34h
isters are used to program the contents of
Program Memory. (Refer to Section
13.1 “Program Flash Memory” for addi-
tional details on programming Flash mem-
ory.)
The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to
each byte in the program memory.
TBLPTR has a 2-MByte address range.
The LSb of the TBLPTR selects which
byte of the program memory location to
access.
TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant
Byte of Program
Memory Word
TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant
Byte of Program
Memory Word
The TBLWT instruction can modify the
value of TBLPTR as follows:
• no change
• post-increment
• post-decrement
• pre-increment
Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No No No
No No No No
(Read (Write to
TABLAT) Holding
Register)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TSTFSZ Test f, skip if 0 XORLW Exclusive OR literal with W

Syntax: TSTFSZ f {,a} Syntax: XORLW k
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: 0 k 255
a  [0,1] Operation: (W) .XOR. k W
Operation: skip if f = 0
Encoding: 0110 011a ffff ffff Description: The contents of W are XORed with
Description: If ‘f’ = 0, the next instruction fetched the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed
during the current instruction execution in W.
is discarded and a NOP is executed,
Words: 1
making this a 2-cycle instruction.
GPR bank.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
set is enabled, this instruction operates Decode Read Process Write to W
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing literal ‘k’ Data
tion 41.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit- Example: XORLW 0AFh
eral Offset Mode” for details. Before Instruction
W = B5h
Words: 1
After Instruction
Cycles: 1(2)
W = 1Ah
by a 2-word instruction. 4 cycles
if skip and followed by a 3-word
instruction.
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process No
register ‘f’ Data operation
If skip:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
No No No No
Example: HERE TSTFSZ CNT, 1

NZERO :
ZERO :
Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
After Instruction
If CNT = 00h,
PC = Address (ZERO)
If CNT  00h,

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
XORWF Exclusive OR W with f

Syntax: XORWF f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1]
a  [0,1]
Operation: (W) .XOR. (f) dest
Description: Exclusive OR the contents of W with
register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored
in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back
in the register ‘f’ (default).
GPR bank.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: XORWF REG, 1, 0

Before Instruction
REG = AFh
W = B5h
After Instruction
REG = 1Ah
W = B5h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
41.2 Extended Instruction Set A summary of the instructions in the extended instruc-
tion set is provided in Table 41-3. Detailed descriptions
In addition to the standard instructions of the PIC18 are provided in Section 41.2.2 “Extended Instruction
instruction set, PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Set”. The opcode field descriptions in Table 41-1 apply
devices also provide an optional extension to the core to both the standard and extended PIC18 instruction
CPU functionality. The added features include sets.
additional instructions that augment indirect and
indexed addressing operations and the implementation Note: The instruction set extension and the
of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode for many of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode
the standard PIC18 instructions. were designed for optimizing applications
written in C; the user may likely never use
The additional features of the extended instruction set
these instructions directly in assembler.
are disabled by default. To enable them, users must set
The syntax for these commands is pro-
the XINST Configuration bit.
vided as a reference for users who may be
The instructions in the extended set can all be reviewing code that has been generated
classified as literal operations, which either manipulate by a compiler.
the File Select Registers, or use them for indexed
addressing. Two of the standard instructions, ADDFSR 41.2.1 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SYNTAX
and SUBFSR, each have an additional special
Most of the extended instructions use indexed
instantiation for using FSR2 as extended instructions.
arguments, using one of the File Select Registers and
These versions (ADDULNK and SUBULNK) allow for
some offset to specify a source or destination register.
automatic return after execution.
When an argument for an instruction serves as part of
The extended instructions are specifically implemented indexed addressing, it is enclosed in square brackets
to optimize re-entrant program code (that is, code that (“[ ]”). This is done to indicate that the argument is used
is recursive or that uses a software stack) written in as an index or offset. MPASM™ Assembler will flag an
high-level languages, particularly C. Among other error if it determines that an index or offset value is not
things, they allow users working in high-level bracketed.
languages to perform certain operations on data
When the extended instruction set is enabled, brackets
structures more efficiently. These include:
are also used to indicate index arguments in byte-
• dynamic allocation and deallocation of software oriented and bit-oriented instructions. This is in addition
stack space when entering and leaving to other changes in their syntax. For more details, see
subroutines Section 41.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with
• function pointer invocation Standard PIC18 Commands”.
• software Stack Pointer manipulation Note: In the past, square brackets have been
• manipulation of variables located in a software used to denote optional arguments in the
stack PIC18 and earlier instruction sets. In this
text and going forward, optional
arguments are denoted by braces (“{ }”).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 41-3: EXTENSIONS TO THE PIC18 INSTRUCTION SET
Description Cycles
ADDULNK k Add FSR2 with (k) & return 2 1110 1000 11kk kkkk None
MOVSF zs, fd Move zs (source) to 1st word 2 1110 1011 0zzz zzzz None
fd (destination) 2nd word 2 1111 ffff ffff ffff
MOVSFL zs, fd Opcode 1st word 0000 0000 0000 0010 None
Move zs (source) to 2nd word 3 1111 xxxz zzzz zzff
fd (full destination) 3rd word 1111 ffff ffff ffff
MOVSS zs, zd Move zs (source) to 1st word 1110 1011 1zzz zzzz None
zd (destination) 2nd word 2 1111 xxxx xzzz zzzz
PUSHL k Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement 1 1110 1010 kkkk kkkk None
FSR2
SUBULNK k Subtract (k) from FSR2 & return 2 1110 1001 11kk kkkk None
Note 1: If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires an additional cycle. The extra
cycle is executed as a NOP.
2: Some instructions are multi word instructions. The second/third words of these instructions will be decoded as a NOP,
unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16-bits. This ensures that all program
memory locations have a valid instruction.
3: Only available when extended instruction set is enabled.
4: fs and fd do not cover the full memory range. 2 MSBs of bank selection are forced to ‘b00 to limit the range of these
instructions to lower 4k addressing space.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
41.2.2 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET
ADDULNK Add Literal to FSR2 and Return

Syntax: ADDULNK k
Operation: FSR2 + k  FSR2,
(TOS) PC
Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the
contents of FSR2. A RETURN is then
executed by loading the PC with the
TOS.
The instruction takes two cycles to
execute; a NOP is performed during
the second cycle.
This may be thought of as a special
case of the ADDFSR instruction,
where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates
only on FSR2.
Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
literal ‘k’ Data FSR
No No No No
Operation Operation Operation Operation
Example: ADDULNK 23h

Before Instruction
FSR2 = 03FFh
PC = 0100h
After Instruction
FSR2 = 0422h
PC = (TOS)
Note: All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in
symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction syntax then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
MOVSF Move Indexed to f

Syntax: MOVSF [zs], fd MOVSFL Move Indexed to f (Long Range)
Operands: 0  zs  127 Syntax: MOVSFL [zs], fd
0  fd  4095 Operands: 0  zs  127
Operation: ((FSR2) + zs)  fd 0  fd  16383
Status Affected: None Operation: ((FSR2) + zs)  fd
Encoding: Status Affected: None
1st word (source) 1110 1011 0zzz zzzzs Encoding:
2nd word (destin.) 1111 ffff ffff ffffd 1st word (opcode) 0000 0000 0110 0010
Description: The contents of the source register are 2nd word (source) 1111 xxxz zzzz zzsff
moved to destination register ‘fd’. The 3rd word (full destin.) 1111 ffff ffff ffffd
actual address of the source register is Description: The contents of the source register are
determined by adding the 7-bit literal moved to destination register ‘fd’. The
offset ‘zs’ in the first word to the value of actual address of the source register is
FSR2. The address of the destination determined by adding the 7-bit literal
register is specified by the 12-bit literal offset ‘zs’ in the first word to the value of
‘fd’ in the second word. Both addresses FSR2 (14 bits). The address of the
can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data destination register is specified by the
space (000h to FFFh). 14-bit literal ‘fd’ in the second word.
MOVSF has curtailed the destination Both addresses can be anywhere in the
range to the lower 4 Kbyte space in 16 Kbyte data space (0000h to 3FFFh).
memory (Banks 1 through 15). For The MOVSFL instruction cannot use the
everything else, use MOVSFL. PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the
Words: 2 destination register. If the resultant
source address points to an indirect
Cycles: 2
addressing register, the value returned
Q Cycle Activity: will be 00h.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Words: 3
Decode Determine Determine Read
Cycles: 3
source addr source addr source reg
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode No No Write
operation operation register ‘f’ Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No dummy (dest)
Decode No No No
read opera- operation operation
tion
Decode Read Process No
Example: MOVSF [05h], REG2 register data operation
Before Instruction “z” (src.)
FSR2 = 80h Decode No No Write
Contents opera- operation register
of 85h = 33h
REG2 = 11h tion “f” (dest.)
After Instruction No
FSR2 = 80h dummy
Contents read
of 85h = 33h
REG2 = 33h
Example: MOVSFL [05h], REG2

Before Instruction
FSR2 = 80h
REG2 = 11h
After Instruction
FSR2 = 80h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
MOVSS Move Indexed to Indexed PUSHL Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2
Syntax: MOVSS [zs], [zd] Syntax: PUSHL k
Operands: 0  zs  127 Operands: 0k  255
0  zd  127
Operation: k  (FSR2),
Operation: ((FSR2) + zs)  ((FSR2) + zd) FSR2 – 1  FSR2
Encoding:
1st word (source) 1110 1011 1zzz zzzzs
2nd word (dest.) 1111 xxxx xzzz zzzzd Description: The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is written to the data
Description The contents of the source register are memory address specified by FSR2. FSR2
is decremented by 1 after the operation.
moved to the destination register. The
This instruction allows users to push values
addresses of the source and destination
registers are determined by adding the onto a software stack.
7-bit literal offsets ‘zs’ or ‘zd’, Words: 1
respectively, to the value of FSR2. Both Cycles: 1
registers can be located anywhere in
the 16 Kbyte data space (0000h to Q Cycle Activity:
3FFFh). Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
The MOVSS instruction cannot use the Decode Read ‘k’ Process Write to
PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the data destination
destination register.
If the resultant source address points to
an indirect addressing register, the Example: PUSHL 08h
value returned will be 00h. If the
resultant destination address points to Before Instruction
an indirect addressing register, the FSR2H:FSR2L = 01ECh
Memory (01ECh) = 00h
instruction will execute as a NOP.
Words: 2 After Instruction
Cycles: 2 FSR2H:FSR2L = 01EBh
Memory (01ECh) = 08h
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Determine Determine Read
source addr source addr source reg
Decode Determine Determine Write
dest addr dest addr to dest reg
Example: MOVSS [05h], [06h]

Before Instruction
FSR2 = 80h
Contents
of 85h = 33h
Contents
of 86h = 11h
After Instruction
FSR2 = 80h
Contents
of 85h = 33h
Contents
of 86h = 33h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
SUBULNK Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return

Syntax: SUBULNK k
Operation: FSR2 – k  FSR2
(TOS) PC
Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the
contents of the FSR2. A RETURN is then
executed by loading the PC with the TOS.
The instruction takes two cycles to
execute; a NOP is performed during the
second cycle.
This may be thought of as a special case of
the SUBFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary
‘11’); it operates only on FSR2.
Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
literal ‘k’ Data destination
No No No No
Operation Operation Operation Operation
Example: SUBULNK 23h

Before Instruction
FSR2 = 03FFh
PC = 0100h
After Instruction
FSR2 = 03DCh
PC = (TOS)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
41.2.3 BYTE-ORIENTED AND 41.2.3.1 Extended Instruction Syntax with
BIT-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS IN Standard PIC18 Commands
INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE When the extended instruction set is enabled, the file
Note: Enabling the PIC18 instruction set register argument, ‘f’, in the standard byte-oriented and
extension may cause legacy applications bit-oriented commands is replaced with the literal offset
to behave erratically or fail entirely. value, ‘k’. As already noted, this occurs only when ‘f’ is
less than or equal to 5Fh. When an offset value is used,
In addition to eight new commands in the extended set, it must be indicated by square brackets (“[ ]”). As with
enabling the extended instruction set also enables the extended instructions, the use of brackets indicates
Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode (Section to the compiler that the value is to be interpreted as an
4.8.1 “Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”). index or an offset. Omitting the brackets, or using a
This has a significant impact on the way that many value greater than 5Fh within brackets, will generate an
commands of the standard PIC18 instruction set are error in the MPASM assembler.
interpreted.
If the index argument is properly bracketed for Indexed
When the extended set is disabled, addresses Literal Offset Addressing, the Access RAM argument is
embedded in opcodes are treated as literal memory never specified; it will automatically be assumed to be
locations: either as a location in the Access Bank (‘a’ = ‘0’. This is in contrast to standard operation (extended
0), or in a GPR bank designated by the BSR (‘a’ = 1). instruction set disabled) when ‘a’ is set on the basis of
When the extended instruction set is enabled and ‘a’ = the target address. Declaring the Access RAM bit in
0, however, a file register argument of 5Fh or less is this mode will also generate an error in the MPASM
interpreted as an offset from the pointer value in FSR2 assembler.
and not as a literal address. For practical purposes, this
The destination argument, ‘d’, functions as before.
means that all instructions that use the Access RAM bit
as an argument – that is, all byte-oriented and bit- In the latest versions of the MPASM™ assembler,
oriented instructions, or almost half of the core PIC18 language support for the extended instruction set must
instructions – may behave differently when the be explicitly invoked. This is done with either the
extended instruction set is enabled. command line option, /y, or the PE directive in the
source listing.
When the content of FSR2 is 00h, the boundaries of the
Access RAM are essentially remapped to their original
41.2.4 CONSIDERATIONS WHEN
values. This may be useful in creating backward
ENABLING THE EXTENDED
compatible code. If this technique is used, it may be
necessary to save the value of FSR2 and restore it INSTRUCTION SET
when moving back and forth between C and assembly It is important to note that the extensions to the
routines in order to preserve the Stack Pointer. Users instruction set may not be beneficial to all users. In
must also keep in mind the syntax requirements of the particular, users who are not writing code that uses a
extended instruction set (see Section software stack may not benefit from using the
41.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with extensions to the instruction set.
Standard PIC18 Commands”). Additionally, the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Although the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode mode may create issues with legacy applications
can be very useful for dynamic stack and pointer written to the PIC18 assembler. This is because
manipulation, it can also be very annoying if a simple instructions in the legacy code may attempt to address
arithmetic operation is carried out on the wrong registers in the Access Bank below 5Fh. Since these
register. Users who are accustomed to the PIC18 addresses are interpreted as literal offsets to FSR2
programming must keep in mind that, when the when the instruction set extension is enabled, the
extended instruction set is enabled, register addresses application may read or write to the wrong data
of 5Fh or less are used for Indexed Literal Offset addresses.
Addressing. When porting an application to the PIC18(L)F2x/
Representative examples of typical byte-oriented and 4xK42, it is very important to consider the type of code.
bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset A large, re-entrant application that is written in ‘C’ and
Addressing mode are provided on the following page to would benefit from efficient compilation will do well
show how execution is affected. The operand when using the instruction set extensions. Legacy
conditions shown in the examples are applicable to all applications that heavily use the Access Bank will most
instructions of these types. likely not benefit from using the extended instruction
set.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
ADD W to Indexed Bit Set Indexed

ADDWF BSF
(Indexed Literal Offset mode) (Indexed Literal Offset mode)
Syntax: ADDWF [k] {,d} Syntax: BSF [k], b
Operands: 0  k  95 Operands: 0  k  95
d  [0,1] 0b7
Operation: (W) + ((FSR2) + k)  dest Operation: 1  ((FSR2) + k)
Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Status Affected: None
Encoding: 0010 01d0 kkkk kkkk Encoding: 1000 bbb0 kkkk kkkk
Description: The contents of W are added to the Description: Bit ‘b’ of the register indicated by FSR2,
contents of the register indicated by offset by the value ‘k’, is set.
FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’. Words: 1
If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’
is ‘1’, the result is stored back in Cycles: 1
register ‘f’ (default). Q Cycle Activity:
Cycles: 1 Decode Read Process Write to
literal ‘k’ Data destination
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Example: BSF [FLAG_OFST], 7
Decode Read ‘k’ Process Write to
Before Instruction
Data destination
FLAG_OFST = 0Ah
FSR2 = 0A00h
Example: ADDWF [OFST] , 0 Contents
of 0A0Ah = 55h
Before Instruction
After Instruction
W = 17h Contents
OFST = 2Ch of 0A0Ah = D5h
FSR2 = 0A00h
Contents
of 0A2Ch = 20h
After Instruction
W = 37h
Contents
Set Indexed
SETF
of 0A2Ch = 20h (Indexed Literal Offset mode)
Syntax: SETF [k]
Operation: FFh  ((FSR2) + k)
Description: The contents of the register indicated by
FSR2, offset by ‘k’, are set to FFh.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read ‘k’ Process Write
Data register
Example: SETF [OFST]

Before Instruction
OFST = 2Ch
FSR2 = 0A00h
Contents
of 0A2Ch = 00h
After Instruction
Contents
of 0A2Ch = FFh

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
41.2.5 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS WITH
MICROCHIP MPLAB® IDE TOOLS
The latest versions of Microchip’s software tools have
been designed to fully support the extended instruction
set of the PIC18(L)F2x/4xK42 family of devices. This
includes the MPLAB XC8 C compiler, MPASM
assembler and MPLAB X Integrated Development
Environment (IDE).
When selecting a target device for software
development, MPLAB X IDE will automatically set
default Configuration bits for that device. The default
setting for the XINST Configuration bit is ‘0’, disabling
the extended instruction set and Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode. For proper execution of applications
developed to take advantage of the extended
instruction set, XINST must be set during
programming.
To develop software for the extended instruction set,
the user must enable support for the instructions and
the Indexed Addressing mode in their language tool(s).
Depending on the environment being used, this may be
done in several ways:
• A menu option, or dialog box within the
environment, that allows the user to configure the
language tool and its settings for the project
• A command line option
• A directive in the source code
These options vary between different compilers,
assemblers and development environments. Users are
encouraged to review the documentation accompanying
their development systems for the appropriate
information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
42.0 REGISTER SUMMARY
TABLE 42-1: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY FOR PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 DEVICES
Register
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
on page
3FFFh TOSU — — — Top of Stack Upper byte 38

3FFEh TOSH Top of Stack High byte 38
3FFDh TOSL Top of Stack Low byte 38
3FFCh STKPTR — — — Stack Pointer 39
3FFBh PCLATU — — — Holding Register for PC Upper byte 36
3FFAh PCLATH Holding Register for PC High byte 36
3FF9h PCL PC Low byte 36
3FF8h TBLPTRU — — Program Memory Table Pointer Upper byte 192
3FF7h TBLPTRH Program Memory Table Pointer High byte 192
3FF6h TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low byte 192
3FF5h TABLAT Table Latch 192
3FF4h PRODH Product Register High byte 187
3FF3h PRODL Product Register Low byte 187
3FF2h — Unimplemented
3FF1h PCON1 — — — — — — MEMV — 91
3FF0h PCON0 STKOVF STKUNF WDTWV RWDT RMCLR RI POR BOR 90
3FEFh INDF0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 not changed 60
3FEEh POSTINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-incremented 61
3FEDh POSTDEC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-decremented 61
3FECh PREINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented 61
3FEBh PLUSW0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented – value of FSR0 offset by W 61
3FEAh FSR0H — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 High 61
3FE9h FSR0L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 Low 61
3FE8h WREG Working Register
3FE7h INDF1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 not changed 61
3FE6h POSTINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-incremented 61
3FE5h POSTDEC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-decremented 61
3FE4h PREINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented 61
3FE3h PLUSW1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented – value of FSR1 offset by W 61
3FE2h FSR1H — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 High 61
3FE1h FSR1L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 Low 61
3FE0h BSR — — Bank Select Register 44
3FDFh INDF2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 not changed 61
3FDEh POSTINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-incremented 61
3FDDh POSTDEC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-decremented 61
3FDCh PREINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented 61
3FDBh PLUSW2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented – value of FSR2 offset by W 61
3FDAh FSR2H — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 High 61
3FD9h FSR2L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 Low 61
3FD8h STATUS — TO PD N OV Z DC C 58
3FD7h IVTBASEU — — — BASE20 BASE19 BASE18 BASE17 BASE16 166
3FD6h IVTBASEH BASE15 BASE14 BASE13 BASE12 BASE11 BASE10 BASE9 BASE8 166
3FD5h IVTBASEL BASE7 BASE6 BASE5 BASE4 BASE3 BASE2 BASE1 BASE0 166
3FD4h IVTLOCK — — — — — — — IVTLOCKED 168
3FD3h INTCON1 STAT — — — — — — 136
3FD2h INTCON0 GIE GIEL IPEN — — INT2EDG INT1EDG INT0EDG 135
Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition
2: Unimplemented in PIC18(L)F26K42.
3: Unimplemented on PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47K42 devices.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3FD1h - — Unimplemented
3FD0h
3FCFh PORTF(3) RF7 RF6 RF5 RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1 RF0 264
3FCEh PORTE — — — — RE0 RE2(2) RE1(2) RE1(2) 264
3FCDh PORTD(2) RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 RD0 264
3FCCh PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 264
3FCBh PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 264
3FCAh PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 264
3FC9h - — Unimplemented
3FC8h
3FB7h TRISF(3) TRISF7 TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 TRISF1 TRISF0 265
3FB6h TRISE(2) TRISE7 TRISE6 TRISE5 TRISE4 TRISE3 TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 265
3FB5h TRISD(2) TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 265
3FC4h TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 265
3FC3h TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 265
3FC2h TRISA TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 265
3FC1h - — Unimplemented
3FC0h
3FBFh LATF(3) LATF7 LATF6 LATF5 LATF4 LATF3 LATF2 LATF1 LATF0 266
3FBEh LATE(2) LATE7 LATE7 LATE7 LATE7 LATE7 LATE7 LATE7 LATE7 266
3FBDh LATD(2) LATD7 LATD6 LATD5 LATD4 LATD3 LATD2 LATD1 LATD0 266
3FBCh LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 266
3FBBh LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 266
3FBAh LATA LATA7 LATA6 LATA5 LATA4 LATA3 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0 266
3FB9h T0CON1 CS[2:0] ASYNC CKPS[3:0] 303
3FB8h T0CON0 EN — OUT MD16 OUTPS 302
3FB7h TMR0H TMR0H 304
3FB6h TMR0L TMR0L 304
3FB5h T1CLK CS 316
3FB4h T1GATE GSS 317
3FB3h T1GCON GE GPOL GTM GSPM GGO GVAL — — 315
3FB2h T1CON — — CKPS[1:0] — SYNC RD16 ON 339
3FB1h TMR1H TMR1H 318
3FB0h TMR1L TMR1L 318
3FAFh T2RST — — — RSEL 337
3FAEh T2CLK — — — — CS 316
3FADh T2HLT PSYNC CKPOL CKSYNC MODE 340
3FACh T2CON ON CKPS OUTPS 314
3FABh T2PR PR2 338
3FAAh T2TMR TMR2 338
3FA9h T3CLK CS 316
3FA8h T3GATE GSS 317
3FA7h T3GCON GE GPOL GTM GSPM GGO GVAL — — 315
3FA6h T3CON — — CKPS — NOT_SYNC RD16 ON 339
3FA5h TMR3H TMR3H 318
3FA4h TMR3L TMR3L 318
3FA3h T4RST — — — RSEL 337
3FA2h T4CLK — — — — CS 336

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3FA1h T4HLT PSYNC CKPOL CKSYNC MODE 340

3FA0h T4CON ON CKPS OUTPS 339
3F9Fh T4PR PR4 338
3F9Eh T4TMR TMR4 338
3F9Dh T5CLK CS 336
3F9Ch T5GATE GSS 317
3F9Bh T5GCON GE GPOL GTM GSPM GGO GVAL — — 315
3F9Ah T5CON — — CKPS — NOT_SYNC RD16 ON 339
3F99h TMR5H TMR5H 318
3F98h TMR5L TMR5L 318
3F97h T6RST — — — RSEL 337
3F96h T6CLK — — — — CS 316
3F95h T6HLT PSYNC CKPOL CKSYNC MODE 340
3F94h T6CON ON CKPS OUTPS 339
3F93h T6PR PR6 338
3F92h T6TMR TMR6 338
3F91h - — Unimplemented
3F80h
3F7Fh CCP1CAP CTS 353
3F7Eh CCP1CON EN — OUT FMT MODE 351
3F7Dh CCPR1H RH 354
3F7Ch CCPR1L RL 353
3F7Bh CCP2CAP CTS 353
3F7Ah CCP2CON EN — OUT FMT MODE 351
3F79h CCPR2H RH 354
3F78h CCPR2L RL 353
3F77h CCP3CAP CTS 353
3F76h CCP3CON EN — OUT FMT MODE 351
3F75h CCPR3H RH 354
3F74h CCPR3L RL 353
3F73h CCP4CAP CTS 353
3F72h CCP4CON EN — OUT FMT MODE 351
3F71h CCPR4H RH 354
3F70h CCPR4L RL 353
3F6Fh — Unimplemented
3F6Eh PWM5CON EN — OUT POL — — — — 359
3F6Dh PWM5DCH DC9 DC8 DC7 DC6 DC5 DC4 DC3 DC2 361
3F6Dh PWM5DCH DC8 361
3F6Ch PWM5DCL DC1 DC0 — — — — — — 361
3F6Ch PWM5DCL DC — — — — — — 361
3F6Bh — Unimplemented
3F6Ah PWM6CON EN — OUT POL — — — — 359
3F69h PWM6DCH DC9 DC7 DC6 DC5 DC4 DC3 DC2 361
3F69h PWM6DCH DC 361
3F68h PWM6DCL DC1 DC0 — — — — — — 361
3F68h PWM6DCL DC — — — — — — 361
3F67h — Unimplemented
3F66h PWM7CON EN — OUT POL — — — — 359

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3F65h PWM7DCH DC9 DC8 DC7 DC6 DC5 DC4 DC3 DC2 361
3F64h PWM7DCL DC1 DC0 — — — — — — 361
3F64h PWM7DCL DC — — — — — — 361
3F62h PWM8CON EN — OUT POL — — — — 359
3F61h PWM8DCH DC9 DC8 DC7 DC6 DC5 DC4 DC3 DC2 361
3F60h PWM8DCL DC1 DC0 — — — — — — 361
3F60h PWM8DCL DC — — — — — — 361
3F5Fh CCPTMRS1 P8TSEL P7TSEL P6TSEL P5TSEL 360
3F5Eh CCPTMRS0 C4TSEL C3TSEL C2TSEL C1TSEL 360
3F5Dh - — Unimplemented
3F5Bh
3F5Ah CWG1STR OVRD OVRC OVRB OVRA STRD STRC STRB STRA 429
3F59h CWG1AS1 — AS6E AS5E AS4E AS3E AS2E AS1E AS0E 431
3F58h CWG1AS0 SHUTDOWN REN LSBD LSAC — — 430
3F57h CWG1CON1 — — IN — POLD POLC POLB POLA 426
3F56h CWG1CON0 EN LD — — — MODE 425
3F55h CWG1DBF — — DBF 432
3F54h CWG1DBR — — DBR 432
3F53h CWG1ISM — — — — IS 428
3F52h CWG1CLK — — — — — — — CS 427
3F51h CWG2STR OVRD OVRC OVRB OVRA STRD STRC STRB STRA 429
3F4Fh CWG2AS0 SHUTDOWN REN LSBD LSAC — — 430
3F4Eh CWG2CON1 — — IN — POLD POLC POLB POLA 426
3F4Dh CWG2CON0 EN LD — — — MODE 425
3F4Ch CWG2DBF — — DBF 432
3F4Bh CWG2DBR — — DBR 432
3F4Ah CWG2ISM — — — — IS 428
3F49h CWG2CLK — — — — — — — CS 427
3F48h CWG3STR OVRD OVRC OVRB OVRA STRD STRC STRB STRA 429
3F46h CWG3AS0 SHUTDOWN REN LSBD LSAC — — 430
3F45h CWG3CON1 — — IN — POLD POLC POLB POLA 426
3F44h CWG3CON0 EN LD — — — MODE 425
3F43h CWG3DBF — — DBF 432
3F42h CWG3DBR — — DBR 432
3F41h CWG3ISM — — — — IS 428
3F40h CWG3CLK — — — — — — — CS 427
3F3Fh NCO1CLK PWS — CKS 455
3F3Eh NCO1CON EN — OUT POL — — — PFM 454
3F3Dh NCO1INCU INC 458
3F3Ch NCO1INCH INC 457
3F3Bh NCO1INCL INC 457
3F3Ah NCO1ACCU ACC 457
3F39h NCO1ACCH ACC 456

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3F38h NCO1ACCL ACC 456

3F24h
3F23h SMT1WIN — — — WSEL 399
3F22h SMT1SIG — — — SSEL 400
3F21h SMT1CLK — — — — — CSEL 398
3F20h SMT1STAT CPRUP CPWUP RST — — TS WS AS 397
3F1Fh SMT1CON1 GO REPEAT — — MODE 396
3F1Eh SMT1CON0 EN — STP WPOL SPOL CPOL PS 395
3F1Dh SMT1PRU PR 404
3F1Ch SMT1PRH PR 404
3F1Bh SMT1PRL PR 404
3F1Ah SMT1CPWU CPW 403
3F19h SMT1CPWH CPW 403
3F18h SMT1CPWL CPW 403
3F17h SMT1CPRU CPR 402
3F16h SMT1CPRH CPR 402
3F15h SMT1CPRL CPR 402
3F14h SMT1TMRU TMR 401
3F13h SMT1TMRH TMR 401
3F12h SMT1TMRL TMR 401
3F00h
3EFFh ADCLK — — CS 624
3EFEh ADACT — — — ACT 637
3EFDh ADREF NREF PREF 624
3EFCh ADSTAT ADAOV UTHR LTHR MATH — STAT 623
3EFBh ADCON3 — CALC SOI TMD 622
3EFAh ADCON2 PSIS CRS ACLR MODE 621
3EF9h ADCON1 PPOL IPEN GPOL — — — — DSEN 620
3EF8h ADCON0 ON CONT — CS FM — GO 619
3EF7h ADPREH — — — PRE 626
3EF6h ADPREL PRE 626
3EF5h ADCAP — — — CAP 628
3EF4h ADACQH — — — ACQ 627
3EF3h ADACQL ACQ 627
3EF2h — Unimplemented
3EF1h ADPCH — — PCH 625
3EF0h ADRESH RES 630
3EEFh ADRESL RES 630
3EEEh ADPREVH PREV 632
3EEDh ADPREVL PREV 632
3EECh ADRPT RPT 628
3EEBh ADCNT CNT 629
3EEAh ADACCU (sign) (sign) (sign) (sign) (sign) (sign) ACC 633
3EE9h ADACCH ACC 633
3EE8h ADACCL ACC 634
3EE7h ADFLTRH FLTR 629

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3EE6h ADFLTRL FLTR 629

3EE5h ADSTPTH STPT 634
3EE4h ADSTPTL STPT 634
3EE3h ADERRH ERR 635
3EE2h ADERRL ERR 635
3EE1h ADUTHH UTH 636
3EE0h ADUTHL UTH 636
3EDFh ADLTHH LTH 635
3EDEh ADLTHL LTH 636
3EDDh - — Unimplemented
3ED8h
3ED7h ADCP ON — — — — — — CPRDY 638
3ED6h - — Unimplemented
3ECBh
3ECAh HLVDCON1 — — — — SEL 660
3EC9h HLVDCON0 EN — OUT RDY — — INTH INTL 659
3EC8h - — Unimplemented
3EC4h
3EC3h ZCDCON SEN — OUT POL — — INTP INTN 463
3EC2h — Unimplemented
3EC1h FVRCON EN RDY TSEN TSRNG CDAFVR ADFVR 599
3EC0h CMOUT — — — — — — C2OUT C1OUT 652
3EBFh CM1PCH — — — — — PCH 652
3EBEh CM1NCH — — — — — NCH 651
3EBDh CM1CON1 — — — — — — INTP INTN 651
3EBCh CM1CON0 EN OUT — POL — — HYS SYNC 650
3EBBh CM2PCH — — — — — PCH 652
3EBAh CM2NCH — — — — — NCH 651
3EB9h CM2CON1 — — — — — — INTP INTN 651
3EB8h CM2CON0 EN OUT — POL — — HYS SYNC 650
3EB7h - — Unimplemented
3E9Fh
3E9Eh DAC1CON0 EN — OE1 OE2 PSS — NSS 642
3E9Dh — Unimplemented
3E9Ch DAC1CON1 — — — DATA 643
3E9Bh - — Unimplemented
3DFBh
3DFAh U1ERRIE TXMTIE PERIE ABDOVE CERIE FERIE RXBKIE RXFOIE TXCIE 503
3DF9h U1ERRIR TXMTIF PERIF ABDOVF CERIF FERIF RXBKIF RXFOIF TXCIF 502
3DF8h U1UIR WUIF ABDIF — — — ABDIE — — 504
3DF7h U1FIFO TXWRE STPMD TXBE TXBF RXIDL XON RXBE RXBF 505
3DF6h U1BRGH BRGH 506
3DF5h U1BRGL BRGL 506
3DF4h U1CON2 RUNOVF RXPOL STP C0EN TXPOL FLO 501
3DF3h U1CON1 ON — — WUE RXBIMD — BRKOVR SENDB 500
3DF2h U1CON0 BRGS ABDEN TXEN RXEN MODE 499
3DF1h U1P3H — — — — — — — P3H 510
3DF0h U1P3L P3L 510
3DEFh U1P2H — — — — — — — P2H 509

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3DEEh U1P2L P2L 509

3DEDh U1P1H — — — — — — — P1H 508
3DECh U1P1L P1L 508
3DEBh U1TXCHK TXCHK 511
3DEAh U1TXB TXB 507
3DE9h U1RXCHK RXCHK 511
3DE8h U1RXB RXB 507
3DE7h - — Unimplemented
3DE3h
3DE2h U2ERRIE TXMTIE PERIE ABDOVE CERIE FERIE RXBKIE RXFOIE TXCIE 503
3DE1h U2ERRIR TXMTIF PERIF ABDOVF CERIF FERIF RXBKIF RXFOIF TXCIF 502
3DE0h U2UIR WUIF ABDIF — — — ABDIE — — 504
3DDFh U2FIFO TXWRE STPMD TXBE TXBF RXIDL XON RXBE RXBF 505
3DDEh U2BRGH BRGH 506
3DDDh U2BRGL BRGL 506
3DDCh U2CON2 RUNOVF RXPOL STP — TXPOL FLO 501
3DDBh U2CON1 ON — — WUE RXBIMD — BRKOVR SENDB 500
3DDAh U2CON0 BRGS ABDEN TXEN RXEN MODE 499
3DD9h — Unimplemented
3DD8h U2P3L P3L 509
3DD6h U2P2L P2L 509
3DD4h U2P1L P1L 508
3DD2h U2TXB TXB 507
3DD0h U2RXB RXB 507
3DCFh - — Unimplemented
3D7Dh
3D7Ch I2C1BTO BTO 584
3D7Bh I2C1CLK CLK 583
3D7Ah I2C1PIE CNTIE ACKTIE — WRIE ADRIE PCIE RSCIE SCIE 590
3D79h I2C1PIR CNTIF ACKTIF — WRIF ADRIF PCIF RSCIF SCIF 589
3D78h I2C1STAT1 TXWE — TXBE — RXRE CLRBF — RXBF 586
3D77h I2C1STAT0 BFRE SMA MMA R D — — — 585
3D76h I2C1ERR — BTOIF BCLIF NACKIF — BTOIE BCLIE NACKIE 587
3D75h I2C1CON2 ACNT GCEN FME ABD SDAHT BFRET 582
3D74h I2C1CON1 ACKCNT ACKDT ACKSTAT ACKT — RXO TXU CSD 581
3D73h I2C1CON0 EN RSEN S CSTR MDR MODE 579
3D72h I2C1ADR3 ADR — 594
3D71h I2C1ADR2 ADR 593
3D70h I2C1ADR1 ADR — 592
3D6Fh I2C1ADR0 ADR 591
3D6Eh I2C1ADB1 ADB 596
3D6Dh I2C1ADB0 ADB 595
3D6Ch I2C1CNT CNT 588
3D6Bh I2C1TXB TXB

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3D6Ah I2C1RXB RXB

3D69h - — Unimplemented
3D67h
3D66h I2C2BTO BTO 584
3D65h I2C2CLK CLK 583
3D64h I2C2PIE CNTIE ACKTIE — WRIE ADRIE PCIE RSCIE SCIE 590
3D63h I2C2PIR CNTIF ACKTIF — WRIF ADRIF PCIF RSCIF SCIF 589
3D62h I2C2STAT1 TXWE — — — RXRE CLRBF — RXBF 586
3D61h I2C2STAT0 BFRE — MMA — D — — — 585
3D60h I2C2ERR — BTOIF BCLIF NACKIF — BTOIE BCLIE NACKIE 587
3D5Fh I2C2CON2 ACNT GCEN FME ABD SDAHT BFRET 582
3D5Eh I2C2CON1 ACKCNT ACKDT ACKSTAT ACKT — RXO TXU CSD 581
3D5Dh I2C2CON0 EN RSEN S CSTR MDR MODE 579
3D5Ch I2C2ADR3 ADR — 594
3D5Bh I2C2ADR2 ADR 593
3D5Ah I2C2ADR1 ADR — 592
3D59h I2C2ADR0 ADR 591
3D58h I2C2ADB1 ADB 596
3D57h I2C2ADB0 ADB 595
3D56h I2C2CNT CNT 588
3D55h I2C2TXB TXB
3D54h I2C2RXB RXB
3D1Dh
3D1Ch SPI1CLK CLKSEL 543
3D1Bh SPI1INTE SRMTIE TCZIE SOSIE EOSIE — RXOIE TXUIE — 537
3D1Ah SPI1INTF SRMTIF TCZIF SOSIF EOSIF — RXOIF TXUIF — 536
3D19h SPI1BAUD BAUD 539
3D18h SPI1TWIDTH — — — — — TWIDTH 538
3D17h SPI1STATUS TXWE — TXBE — RXRE CLRBF — RXBF 542
3D16h SPI1CON2 BUSY SSFLT — — — SSET TXR RXR 541
3D15h SPI1CON1 SMP CKE CKP FST — SSP SDIP SDOP 540
3D14h SPI1CON0 EN — — — — LSBF MST BMODE 539
3D13h SPI1TCNTH — — — — — TCNTH 538
3D12h SPI1TCNTL TCNTL 537
3D11h SPI1TXB TXB 543
3D10h SPI1RXB RXB 542
3D0Fh - — Unimplemented
3CFFh
3CFEh MD1CARH — — — CH 472
3CFDh MD1CARL — — — CL 472
3CFCh MD1SRC — — — MS 473
3CFBh MD1CON1 — — CHPOL CHSYNC — — CLPOL CLSYNC 471
3CFAh MD1CON0 EN — OUT OPOL — — — BIT 470
3CF9h - — Unimplemented
3CE7h
3CE6h CLKRCON EN — — DC DIV 113
3CE5h CLKRCLK — — — — CLK 114

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3CE4h - — Unimplemented
3C7Fh
3C7Eh CLCDATA0 — — — — CLC4OUT CLC3OUT CLC2OUT CLC1OUT 448
3C7Dh CLC1GLS3 G4D4T G4D4N G4D3T G4D3N G4D2T G4D2N G4D1T G4D1N 447
3C7Ch CLC1GLS2 G3D4T G3D4N G3D3T G3D3N G3D2T G3D2N G3D1T G3D1N 446
3C7Bh CLC1GLS1 G2D4T G2D4N G2D3T G2D3N G2D2T G2D2N G2D1T G2D1N 445
3C7Ah CLC1GLS0 G1D4T G1D4N G1D3T G1D3N G1D2T G1D2N G1D1T G1D1N 444
3C79h CLC1SEL3 D4S 443
3C75h CLC1POL POL — — — G4POL G3POL G2POL G1POL 442
3C74h CLC1CON EN OE OUT INTP INTN MODE 441
3C73h CLC2GLS3 G4D4T G4D4N G4D3T G4D3N G4D2T G4D2N G4D1T G4D1N 447
3C6Fh CLC2SEL3 D4S 443
3C6Eh CLC2SEL2 D3S 443
3C6Dh CLC2SEL1 D2S 443
3C6Ch CLC2SEL0 D1S 443
3C6Bh CLC2POL POL — — — G4POL G3POL G2POL G1POL 442
3C6Ah CLC2CON EN OE OUT INTP INTN MODE 441
3C5Fh CLC4GLS3 G4D4T G4D4N G4D3T G4D3N G4D2T G4D2N G4D1T G4D1N 447
3C5Eh CLC4GLS2 G3D4T G3D4N G3D3T G3D3N G3D2T G3D2N G3D1T G3D1N 446
3C5Dh CLC4GLS1 G2D4T G2D4N G2D3T G2D3N G2D2T G2D2N G2D1T G2D1N 445
3C5Ch CLC4GLS0 G1D4T G1D4N G1D3T G1D3N G1D2T G1D2N G1D1T G1D1N 444
3C5Bh CLC4SEL3 D4S 443
3C5Ah CLC4SEL2 D3S 443
3C55h - — Unimplemented
3C00h
3BFFh DMA1SIRQ — SIRQ 257
3BFEh DMA1AIRQ — AIRQ 257
3BFDh DMA1CON1 EN SIRQEN DGO — — AIRQEN — XIP 250

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3BFCh DMA1CON0 DMODE DSTP SMR SMODE SSTP 249

3BFBh DMA1SSAU — — SSA 252
3BFAh DMA1SSAH SSA 251
3BF9h DMA1SSAL SSA 251
3BF8h DMA1SSZH — — — — SSZ 253
3BF7h DMA1SSZL SSZ 253
3BF6h DMA1SPTRU — — SPTR 253
3BF5h DMA1SPTRH SPTR 252
3BF4h DMA1SPTRL SPTR 252
3BF3h DMA1SCNTH — — — — SCNT 254
3BF2h DMA1SCNTL SCNT 254
3BF1h DMA1DSAH DSA 255
3BF0h DMA1DSAL SSA 254
3BEFh DMA1DSZH — — — — DSZ 256
3BEEh DMA1DSZL DSZ 256
3BEDh DMA1DPTRH DPTR 255
3BECh DMA1DPTRL DPTR 255
3BEBh DMA1DCNTH — — — — DCNT 257
3BEAh DMA1DCNTL DCNT 256
3BE9h DMA1BUF BUF 251
3BE8h - — Unimplemented
3BE0h
3BDFh DMA2SIRQ — SIRQ 257
3BDEh DMA2AIRQ — AIRQ 257
3BDDh DMA2CON1 EN SIRQEN DGO — — AIRQEN — XIP 250
3BDCh DMA2CON0 DMODE DSTP SMR SMODE SSTP 249
3BDBh DMA2SSAU — — SSA 252
3BDAh DMA2SSAH SSA 251
3BD9h DMA2SSAL SSA 251
3BD8h DMA2SSZH — — — — SSZ 253
3BD7h DMA2SSZL SSZ 253
3BD6h DMA2SPTRU — — SPTR 253
3BD5h DMA2SPTRH SPTR 252
3BD4h DMA2SPTRL SPTR 252
3BD3h DMA2SCNTH — — — — SCNT 254
3BD2h DMA2SCNTL SCNT 254
3BD1h DMA2DSAH DSA 255
3BD0h DMA2DSAL SSA 254
3BCFh DMA2DSZH — — — — DSZ 256
3BCEh DMA2DSZL DSZ 256
3BCDh DMA2DPTRH DPTR 255
3BCCh DMA2DPTRL DPTR 255
3BCBh DMA2DCNTH — — — — DCNT 257
3BCAh DMA2DCNTL DCNT 256
3BC9h DMA2BUF BUF 251
3BC8h - — Unimplemented
3AEBh
3AEAh U2CTSPPS — — U2CTSPPS 278

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3AE8h U2RXPPS — — U2RXPPS 278

3AE7h U1CTSPPS — — U1CTSPPS 278
3AE5h U1RXPPS — — U1RXPPS 278
3AE4h I2C2SDAPPS — — I2C2SDAPPS 278
3AE3h I2C2SCLPPS — — I2C2SCLPPS 278
3AE2h I2C1SDAPPS — — I2C1SDAPPS 278
3AE1h I2C1SCLPPS — — I2C1SCLPPS 278
3AE0h SPI1SSPPS — — SPI1SSPPS 278
3ADFh SPI1SDIPPS — — SPI1SDIPPS 278
3ADEh SPI1SCKPPS — — SPI1SCKPPS 278
3ADDh ADACTPPS — — ADACTPPS 278
3ADCh CLCIN3PPS — — CLCIN3PPS 278
3ADBh CLCIN2PPS — — CLCIN2PPS 278
3ADAh CLCIN1PPS — — CLCIN1PPS 278
3AD9h CLCIN0PPS — — CLCIN0PPS 278
3AD8h MD1SRCPPS — — MD1SRCPPS 278
3AD7h MD1CARHPPS — — MD1CARHPPS 278
3AD6h MD1CARLPPS — — MD1CARLPPS 278
3AD5h CWG3INPPS — — CWG3INPPS 278
3AD2h SMT1SIGPPS — — SMT1SIGPPS 278
3AD1h SMT1WINPPS — — SMT1WINPPS 278
3AD0h CCP4PPS — — CCP4PPS 278
3ACFh CCP3PPS — — CCP3PPS 278
3ACEh CCP2PPS — — CCP2PPS 278
3ACDh CCP1PPS — — CCP1PPS 278
3ACCh T6INPPS — — T6INPPS 278
3ACBh T4INPPS — — T4INPPS 278
3ACAh T2INPPS — — T2INPPS 278
3AC9h T5GPPS — — T5GPPS 278
3AC8h T5CLKIPPS — — T5CLKIPPS 278
3AC2h INT2PPS — — INT2PPS 278
3ABFh PPSLOCK — — — — — — — PPSLOCKED 284
3ABEh- — Unimplemented
3A95h
3A94h INLVLF(3) INLVLF7 INLVLF6 INLVLF5 INLVLF4 INLVLF3 INLVLF2 INLVLF1 INLVLF0 271
3A93h SLRCONF(3) SLRCONF7 SLRCONF6 SLRCONF5 SLRCONF4 SLRCONF3 SLRCONF2 SLRCONF1 SLRCONF0 270
3A92h ODCONF(3) ODCONF7 ODCONF6 ODCONF5 ODCONF4 ODCONF3 ODCONF2 ODCONF1 ODCONF0 269
3A91h WPUF(3) WPUF7 WPUF6 WPUF5 WPUF4 WPUF3 WPUF2 WPUF1 WPUF0 268
3A90h ANSELF(3) ANSELF7 ANSELF6 ANSELF5 ANSELF4 ANSELF3 ANSELF2 ANSELF1 ANSELF0 267

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3A8Fh- — Unimplemented
3A88h
3A87h IOCEF — — — — IOCEF3 — — — 288
3A86h IOCEN — — — — IOCEN3 — — — 288
3A85h IOCEP — — — — IOCEP3 — — — 288
3A84h INLVLE — — — — INLVLE3 INLVLE2(2) INLVLE1(2) INLVLE0(2) 271
3A83h SLRCONE(2) — — — — — SRLE2(2) SRLE1(2) SRLE0(2) 270
3A82h ODCONE(2) — — — — — ODCE2(2) ODCE1(2) ODCE0(2) 269
3A81h WPUE — — — — WPUE3 WPUE2(2) WPUE1(2) WPUE0(2) 268
3A80h ANSELE(2) ANSELE7 ANSELE6 ANSELE5 ANSELE4 ANSELE3 ANSELE2 ANSELE1 ANSELE0 267
3A7CH
3A7Bh RD1I2C(2) — IOCEN3 PU — — TH 264
3A7Ah RD0I2C(2) — IOCEN3 PU — — TH 264
3A79h- — Unimplemented
3A75h
3A74h INLVLD(2) INLVLD7 INLVLD6 INLVLD5 INLVLD4 INLVLD3 INLVLD2 INLVLD1 INLVLD0 271
3A73h SLRCOND(2) SRLD7 SRLD6 SRLD5 SRLD4 SRLD3 SRLD2 SRLD1 SRLD0 270
3A72h ODCOND(2) ODCD7 ODCD6 ODCD5 ODCD4 ODCD3 ODCD2 ODCD1 ODCD0 269
3A71h WPUD(2) WPUD7 WPUD6 WPUD5 WPUD4 WPUD3 WPUD2 WPUD1 WPUD0 268
3A70h ANSELD(2) ANSELD7 ANSELD6 ANSELD5 ANSELD4 ANSELD3 ANSELD2 ANSELD1 ANSELD0 267
3A6Ch
3A6Bh RC4I2C — SLEW PU — — TH 264
3A6Ah RC3I2C — SLEW PU — — TH 264
3A69h — Unimplemented
3A67h IOCCF IOCCF7 IOCCF6 IOCCF5 IOCCF4 IOCCF3 IOCCF2 IOCCF1 IOCCF0 288
3A66h IOCCN IOCCN7 IOCCN6 IOCCN5 IOCCN4 IOCCN3 IOCCN2 IOCCN1 IOCCN0 288
3A65h IOCCP IOCCP7 IOCCP6 IOCCP5 IOCCP4 IOCCP3 IOCCP2 IOCCP1 IOCCP0 288
3A64h INLVLC INLVLC7 INLVLC6 INLVLC5 INLVLC4 INLVLC3 INLVLC2 INLVLC1 INLVLC0 271
3A63h SLRCONC SLRC7 SLRC6 SLRC5 SLRC4 SLRC3 SLRC2 SLRC1 SLRC0 270
3A62h ODCONC ODCC7 ODCC6 ODCC5 ODCC4 ODCC3 ODCC2 ODCC1 ODCC0 269
3A61h WPUC WPUC7 WPUC6 WPUC5 WPUC4 WPUC3 WPUC2 WPUC1 WPUC0 268
3A60h ANSELC ANSELC7 ANSELC6 ANSELC5 ANSELC4 ANSELC3 ANSELC2 ANSELC1 ANSELC0 267
3A5Fh - — Unimplemented
3A5Ch
3A5Bh RB2I2C — SLEW PU — — TH 264
3A5Ah RB1I2C — SLEW PU — — TH 264
3A57h IOCBF IOCBF7 IOCBF6 IOCBF5 IOCBF4 IOCBF3 IOCBF2 IOCBF1 IOCBF0 288
3A56h IOCBN IOCBN7 IOCBN6 IOCBN5 IOCBN4 IOCBN3 IOCBN2 IOCBN1 IOCBN0 288
3A55h IOCBP IOCBP7 IOCBP6 IOCBP5 IOCBP4 IOCBP3 IOCBP2 IOCBP1 IOCBP0 288
3A54h INLVLB INLVLB7 INLVLB6 INLVLB5 INLVLB4 INLVLB3 INLVLB2 INLVLB1 INLVLB0 271
3A53h SLRCONB SLRB7 SLRB6 SLRB5 SLRB4 SLRB3 SLRB2 SLRB1 SLRB0 270
3A52h ODCONB ODCB7 ODCB6 ODCB5 ODCB4 ODCB3 ODCB2 ODCB1 ODCB0 269
3A51h WPUB WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0 268
3A50h ANSELB ANSELB7 ANSELB6 ANSELB5 ANSELB4 ANSELB3 ANSELB2 ANSELB1 ANSELB0 267

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3A48h
3A47h IOCAF IOCAF7 IOCAF6 IOCAF5 IOCAF4 IOCAF3 IOCAF2 IOCAF1 IOCAF0 288
3A46h IOCAN IOCAN7 IOCAN6 IOCAN5 IOCAN4 IOCAN3 IOCAN2 IOCAN1 IOCAN0 288
3A45h IOCAP IOCAP7 IOCAP6 IOCAP5 IOCAP4 IOCAP3 IOCAP2 IOCAP1 IOCAP0 288
3A44h INLVLA INLVLA7 INLVLA6 INLVLA5 INLVLA4 INLVLA3 INLVLA2 INLVLA1 INLVLA0 271
3A43h SLRCONA SLRA7 SLRA6 SLRA5 SLRA4 SLRA3 SLRA2 SLRA1 SLRA0 270
3A42h ODCONA ODCA7 ODCA6 ODCA5 ODCA4 ODCA3 ODCA2 ODCA1 ODCA0 269
3A41h WPUA WPUA7 WPUA6 WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3 WPUA2 WPUA1 WPUA0 268
3A40h ANSELA ANSELA7 ANSELA6 ANSELA5 ANSELA4 ANSELA3 ANSELA2 ANSELA1 ANSELA0 267
3A30h
3A2Fh RF7PPS(3) — — RF7PPS5 RF7PPS4 RF7PPS3 RF7PPS2 RF7PPS1 RF7PPS0 281
3A2Eh RF6PPS(3) — — RF6PPS5 RF6PPS4 RF6PPS3 RF6PPS2 RF6PPS1 RF6PPS0 281
3A2Dh RF5PPS(3) — — RF5PPS5 RF5PPS4 RF5PPS3 RF5PPS2 RF5PPS1 RF5PPS0 281
3A2Ch RF4PPS(3) — — RF4PPS5 RF4PPS4 RF4PPS3 RF4PPS2 RF4PPS1 RF4PPS0 281
3A2Bh RF3PPS(3) — — RF3PPS5 RF3PPS4 RF3PPS3 RF3PPS2 RF3PPS1 RF3PPS0 281
3A2Ah RF2PPS(3) — — RF2PPS5 RF2PPS4 RF2PPS3 RF2PPS2 RF2PPS1 RF2PPS0 281
3A29h RF1PPS(3) — — RF1PPS5 RF1PPS4 RF1PPS3 RF1PPS2 RF1PPS1 RF1PPS0 281
3A28h RF0PPS(3) — — RF0PPS5 RF0PPS4 RF0PPS3 RF0PPS2 RF0PPS1 RF0PPS0 281
3A27h- — Unimplemented
3A23h
3A22h RE2PPS(2) — — RE2PPS5 RE2PPS4 RE2PPS3 RE2PPS2 RE2PPS1 RE2PPS0 281
3A1Fh RD7PPS(2) — — RD7PPS5 RD7PPS4 RD7PPS3 RD7PPS2 RD7PPS1 RD7PPS0 281
3A1Eh RD6PPS(2) — — RD6PPS5 RD6PPS4 RD6PPS3 RD6PPS2 RD6PPS1 RD6PPS0 281
3A1Dh RD5PPS(2) — — RD5PPS5 RD5PPS4 RD5PPS3 RD5PPS2 RD5PPS1 RD5PPS0 281
3A1Ch RD4PPS(2) — — RD4PPS5 RD4PPS4 RD4PPS3 RD4PPS2 RD4PPS1 RD4PPS0 281
3A1Bh RD3PPS(2) — — RD3PPS5 RD3PPS4 RD3PPS3 RD3PPS2 RD3PPS1 RD3PPS0 281
3A1Ah RD2PPS(2) — — RD2PPS5 RD2PPS4 RD2PPS3 RD2PPS2 RD2PPS1 RD2PPS0 281
3A19h RD1PPS(2) — — RD1PPS5 RD1PPS4 RD1PPS3 RD1PPS2 RD1PPS1 RD1PPS0 281
3A18h RD0PPS(2) — — RD0PPS5 RD0PPS4 RD0PPS3 RD0PPS2 RD0PPS1 RD0PPS0 281
3A17h RC7PPS — — RC7PPS5 RC7PPS4 RC7PPS3 RC7PPS2 RC7PPS1 RC7PPS0 281
3A0Fh RB7PPS — — RB7PPS5 RB7PPS4 RB7PPS3 RB7PPS2 RB7PPS1 RB7PPS0 281
3A0Eh RB6PPS — — RB6PPS5 RB6PPS4 RB6PPS3 RB6PPS2 RB6PPS1 RB6PPS0 281
3A0Dh RB5PPS — — RB5PPS5 RB5PPS4 RB5PPS3 RB5PPS2 RB5PPS1 RB5PPS0 281
3A0Ch RB4PPS — — RB4PPS5 RB4PPS4 RB4PPS3 RB4PPS2 RB4PPS1 RB4PPS0 281
3A0Bh RB3PPS — — RB3PPS5 RB3PPS4 RB3PPS3 RB3PPS2 RB3PPS1 RB3PPS0 281
3A0Ah RB2PPS — — RB2PPS5 RB2PPS4 RB2PPS3 RB2PPS2 RB2PPS1 RB2PPS0 281
3A09h RB1PPS — — RB1PPS5 RB1PPS4 RB1PPS3 RB1PPS2 RB1PPS1 RB1PPS0 281

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3A08h RB0PPS — — RB0PPS5 RB0PPS4 RB0PPS3 RB0PPS2 RB0PPS1 RB0PPS0 281

3A07h RA7PPS — — RA7PPS5 RA7PPS4 RA7PPS3 RA7PPS2 RA7PPS1 RA7PPS0 281
39FFh - — Unimplemented
39F8h
39F7h SCANPR — — — — — PR 31
39F5h
39F4h DMA2PR — — — — — PR 31
39F3h DMA1PR — — — — — PR 30
39F2h MAINPR — — — — — PR 30
39F1h ISRPR — — — — — PR 30
39EFh PRLOCK — — — — — — — PRLOCKED 31
39EEh - — Unimplemented
39E7h
39E6h NVMCON2 NVMCON2 211
39E5h NVMCON1 REG — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD 210
39E4h — Unimplemented
39E3h NVMDAT DAT 212
39E2h — Unimplemented
39E1h NVMADRH(4) — — — — — — ADR 211
39E0h NVMADRL ADR 211
39DFh OSCFRQ — — — — FRQ 107
39DEh OSCTUNE — — TUN 108
39DDh OSCEN EXTOEN HFOEN MFOEN LFOEN SOSCEN ADOEN — — 109
39DCh OSCSTAT EXTOR HFOR MFOR LFOR SOR ADOR — PLLR 106
39DBh OSCCON3 CSWHOLD SOSCPWR — ORDY NOSCR — — — 105
39DAh OSCCON2 — COSC CDIV 105
39D9h OSCCON1 — NOSC NDIV 104
39D8h CPUDOZE IDLEN DOZEN ROI DOE — DOZE 177
39D2h
39D1h VREGCON(1) — — — — — — VREGPM — 176
39D0h BORCON SBOREN — — — — — — BORRDY 85
39CFh - — Unimplemented
39C8h
39C7h PMD7 — — — — — — DMA2MD DMA1MD 298
39C6h PMD6 — — SMT1MD CLC4MD CLC3MD CLC2MD CLC1MD DSMMD 297
39C5h PMD5 — — U2MD U1MD — SPI1MD I2C2MD I2C1MD 296
39C4h PMD4 CWG3MD CWG2MD CWG1MD — — — — — 295
39C3h PMD3 PWM8MD PWM7MD PWM6MD PWM5MD CCP4MD CCP3MD CCP2MD CCP1MD 294
39C2h PMD2 — DACMD ADCMD — — CMP2MD CMP1MD ZCDMD 293

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
39C1h PMD1 NCO1MD TMR6MD TMR5MD TMR4MD TMR3MD TMR2MD TMR1MD TMR0MD 292
39C0h PMD0 SYSCMD FVRMD HLVDMD CRCMD SCANMD NVMMD CLKRMD IOCMD 291
39BFh - — Unimplemented
39ABh
39AAh PIR10 — — — — — — CLC4IF CCP4IF 146
39A9h PIR9 — — — — CLC3IF CWG3IF CCP3IF TMR6IF 145
39A8h PIR8 TMR5GIF TMR5IF — — — — — — 145
39A7h PIR7 — — INT2IF CLC2IF CWG2IF — CCP2IF TMR4IF 144
39A6h PIR6 TMR3GIF TMR3IF U2IF U2EIF U2TXIF U2RXIF I2C2EIF I2C2IF 143
39A5h PIR5 I2C2TXIF I2C2RXIF DMA2AIF DMA2ORIF DMA2DCN- DMA2SCN- C2IF INT1IF 142
TIF TIF
39A4h PIR4 CLC1IF CWG1IF NCO1IF — CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1GIF TMR1IF 141
39A3h PIR3 TMR0IF U1IF U1EIF U1TXIF U1RXIF I2C1EIF I2C1IF I2C1TXIF 140
39A2h PIR2 I2C1RXIF SPI1IF SPI1TXIF SPI1RXIF DMA1AIF DMA1ORIF DMA1DCN- DMA1SCNTIF 138
TIF
39A1h PIR1 SMT1PWAIF SMT1PRAIF SMT1IF C1IF ADTIF ADIF ZCDIF INT0IF 138
39A0h PIR0 IOCIF CRCIF SCANIF NVMIF CSWIF OSFIF HLVDIF SWIF 137
399Fh - — Unimplemented
399Bh
399Ah PIE10 — — — — — — CLC4IE CCP4IE 156
3999h PIE9 — — — — CLC3IE CWG3IE CCP3IE TMR6IE 155
3998h PIE8 TMR5GIE TMR5IE — — — — — — 155
3997h PIE7 — — INT2IE CLC2IE CWG2IE — CCP2IE TMR4IE 154
3996h PIE6 TMR3GIE TMR3IE U2IE U2EIE U2TXIE U2RXIE I2C2EIE I2C2IE 153
3995h PIE5 I2C2TXIE I2C2RXIE DMA2AIE DMA2ORIE DMA2DCN- DMA2SCN- C2IE INT1IE 152
TIE TIE
3994h PIE4 CLC1IE CWG1IE NCO1IE — CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1GIE TMR1IE 151
3993h PIE3 TMR0IE U1IE U1EIE U1TXIE U1RXIE I2C1EIE I2C1IE I2C1TXIE 150
3992h PIE2 I2C1RXIE SPI1IE SPI1TXIE SPI1RXIE DMA1AIE DMA1ORIE DMA1DCN- DMA1SCNTIE 149
TIE
3991h PIE1 SMT1PWAIE SMT1PRAIE SMT1IE C1IE ADTIE ADIE ZCDIE INT0IE 148
3990h PIE0 IOCIE CRCIE SCANIE NVMIE CSWIE OSFIE HLVDIE SWIE 147
398Bh
398Ah IPR10 — — — — — — CLC4IP CCP4IP 165
3989h IPR9 — — — — CLC3IP CWG3IP CCP3IP TMR6IP 165
3988h IPR8 TMR5GIP TMR5IP — — — — — — 164
3987h IPR7 — — INT2IP CLC2IP CWG2IP - CCP2IP TMR4IP 164
3986h IPR6 TMR3GIP TMR3IP U2IP U2EIP U2TXIP U2RXIP I2C2EIP I2C2IP 163
3985h IPR5 I2C2TXIP I2C2RXIP DMA2AIP DMA2ORIP DMA2DCN- DMA2SCN- C2IP INT1IP 162
TIP TIP
3984h IPR4 CLC1IP CWG1IP NCO1IP — CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1GIP TMR1IP 161
3983h IPR3 TMR0IP U1IP U1EIP U1TXIP U1RXIP I2C1EIP I2C1IP I2C1TXIP 160
3982h IPR2 I2C1RXIP SPI1IP SPI1TXIP SPI1RXIP DMA1AIP DMA1ORIP DMA1DCN- DMA1SCNTIP 159
TIP
3981h IPR1 SMT1PWAIP SMT1PRAIP SMT1IP C1IP ADTIP ADIP ZCDIP INT0IP 158
3980h IPR0 IOCIP CRCIP SCANIP NVMIP CSWIP OSFIP HLVDIP SWIP 157
397Eh
397Dh SCANTRIG — — — — TSEL 226
397Ch SCANCON0 EN TRIGEN SGO — — MREG BURSTMD BUSY 222

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
397Bh SCANHADRU — — HADR 224

397Ah SCANHADRH HADR 225
3979h SCANHADRL HADR 225
3978h SCANLADRU — — LADR 223
3977h SCANLADRH LADR 223
3976h SCANLADRL LADR 224
3975h - — Unimplemented
396Ah
3969h CRCCON1 DLEN PLEN 218
3968h CRCCON0 EN CRCGO BUSY ACCM — — SHIFTM FULL 218
3967h CRCXORH X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9 X8 221
3966h CRCXORL X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 — 221
3965h CRCSHIFTH SHFT15 SHFT14 SHFT13 SHFT12 SHFT11 SHFT10 SHFT9 SHFT8 220
3964h CRCSHIFTL SHFT7 SHFT6 SHFT5 SHFT4 SHFT3 SHFT2 SHFT1 SHFT0 220
3963h CRCACCH ACC15 ACC14 ACC13 ACC12 ACC11 ACC10 ACC9 ACC8 219
3962h CRCACCL ACC7 ACC6 ACC5 ACC4 ACC3 ACC2 ACC1 ACC0 220
3961h CRCDATH DATA15 DATA14 DATA13 DATA12 DATA11 DATA10 DATA9 DATA8 219
3960h CRCDATL DATA7 DATA6 DATA5 DATA4 DATA3 DATA2 DATA1 DATA0 219
395Fh WDTTMR WDTTMR STATE PSCNT 185
395Eh WDTPSH PSCNT 184
395Dh WDTPSL PSCNT 184
395Ch WDTCON1 — CS — WINDOW 183
395Bh WDTCON0 — — PS SEN 182
395Ah - — Unimplemented
38A0h
389Fh IVTADU AD 167
389Eh IVTADH AD 167
389Dh IVTADL AD 167
389Ch - — Unimplemented
3891h
3890h PRODH_SHAD PRODH 125
388Fh PRODL_SHAD PRODL 125
388Eh FSR2H_SHAD — — FSR2H 125
388Dh FSR2L_SHAD FSR2L 125
388Ch FSR1H_SHAD — — FSR1H 125
388Bh FSR1L_SHAD FSR1L 125
388Ah FSR0H_SHAD — — FSR0H 125
3889h FSR0L_SHAD FSR0L 125
3888h PCLATU_SHAD — — — PCU 125
3887h PCLATH_SHAD PCH 125
3886h BSR_SHAD — — BSR 125
3885h WREG_SHAD WREG 125
3884h STATUS_SHAD — TO PD N OV Z DC C 125
3883h SHADCON — — — — — — — SHADLO 168
3882h BSR_CSHAD — — BSR 57
3881h WREG_CSHAD WREG 57
3880h STATUS_C- — TO PD N OV Z DC C 57
SHAD

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Register
on page
3800h

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
43.0 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT 43.1 MPLAB X Integrated Development
Environment Software
The PIC® microcontrollers (MCU) and dsPIC® digital
signal controllers (DSC) are supported with a full range The MPLAB X IDE is a single, unified graphical user
of software and hardware development tools: interface for Microchip and third-party software, and
• Integrated Development Environment hardware development tool that runs on Windows®,
Linux and Mac OS® X. Based on the NetBeans IDE,
- MPLAB® X IDE Software
MPLAB X IDE is an entirely new IDE with a host of free
• Compilers/Assemblers/Linkers software components and plug-ins for high-
- MPLAB XC Compiler performance application development and debugging.
- MPASMTM Assembler Moving between tools and upgrading from software
- MPLINKTM Object Linker/ simulators to hardware debugging and programming
MPLIBTM Object Librarian tools is simple with the seamless user interface.
- MPLAB Assembler/Linker/Librarian for With complete project management, visual call graphs,
Various Device Families a configurable watch window and a feature-rich editor
• Simulators that includes code completion and context menus,
- MPLAB X SIM Software Simulator MPLAB X IDE is flexible and friendly enough for new
users. With the ability to support multiple tools on
• Emulators
multiple projects with simultaneous debugging, MPLAB
- MPLAB REAL ICE™ In-Circuit Emulator X IDE is also suitable for the needs of experienced
• In-Circuit Debuggers/Programmers users.
- MPLAB ICD 3 Feature-Rich Editor:
- PICkit™ 3
• Color syntax highlighting
• Device Programmers
• Smart code completion makes suggestions and
- MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer provides hints as you type
• Low-Cost Demonstration/Development Boards, • Automatic code formatting based on user-defined
Evaluation Kits and Starter Kits rules
• Third-party development tools • Live parsing
User-Friendly, Customizable Interface:
• Fully customizable interface: toolbars, toolbar
buttons, windows, window placement, etc.
• Call graph window
Project-Based Workspaces:
• Multiple projects
• Multiple tools
• Multiple configurations
• Simultaneous debugging sessions
File History and Bug Tracking:
• Local file history feature
• Built-in support for Bugzilla issue tracker

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
43.2 MPLAB XC Compilers 43.4 MPLINK Object Linker/
The MPLAB XC Compilers are complete ANSI C
MPLIB Object Librarian
compilers for all of Microchip’s 8, 16, and 32-bit MCU The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable
and DSC devices. These compilers provide powerful objects created by the MPASM Assembler. It can link
integration capabilities, superior code optimization and relocatable objects from precompiled libraries, using
ease of use. MPLAB XC Compilers run on Windows, directives from a linker script.
Linux or MAC OS X.
The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and
For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide modification of library files of precompiled code. When
debug information that is optimized to the MPLAB X a routine from a library is called from a source file, only
IDE. the modules that contain that routine will be linked in
The free MPLAB XC Compiler editions support all with the application. This allows large libraries to be
devices and commands, with no time or memory used efficiently in many different applications.
restrictions, and offer sufficient code optimization for The object linker/library features include:
most applications.
• Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many
MPLAB XC Compilers include an assembler, linker and smaller files
utilities. The assembler generates relocatable object • Enhanced code maintainability by grouping
files that can then be archived or linked with other related modules together
relocatable object files and archives to create an
• Flexible creation of libraries with easy module
executable file. MPLAB XC Compiler uses the
listing, replacement, deletion and extraction
assembler to produce its object file. Notable features of
the assembler include:
43.5 MPLAB Assembler, Linker and
• Support for the entire device instruction set
Librarian for Various Device
• Support for fixed-point and floating-point data
Families
• Command-line interface
• Rich directive set MPLAB Assembler produces relocatable machine
• Flexible macro language code from symbolic assembly language for PIC24,
PIC32 and dsPIC DSC devices. MPLAB XC Compiler
• MPLAB X IDE compatibility
uses the assembler to produce its object file. The
assembler generates relocatable object files that can
43.3 MPASM Assembler then be archived or linked with other relocatable object
The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal files and archives to create an executable file. Notable
macro assembler for PIC10/12/16/18 MCUs. features of the assembler include:
The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object • Support for the entire device instruction set
files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel® standard HEX • Support for fixed-point and floating-point data
files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol • Command-line interface
reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines • Rich directive set
and generated machine code, and COFF files for • Flexible macro language
debugging.
• MPLAB X IDE compatibility
The MPASM Assembler features include:
• Integration into MPLAB X IDE projects
• User-defined macros to streamline
assembly code
• Conditional assembly for multipurpose
source files
• Directives that allow complete control over the
assembly process

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
43.6 MPLAB X SIM Software Simulator 43.8 MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger
The MPLAB X SIM Software Simulator allows code
System
development in a PC-hosted environment by The MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger System is
simulating the PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs on an Microchip’s most cost-effective, high-speed hardware
instruction level. On any given instruction, the data debugger/programmer for Microchip Flash DSC and
areas can be examined or modified and stimuli can be MCU devices. It debugs and programs PIC Flash
applied from a comprehensive stimulus controller. microcontrollers and dsPIC DSCs with the powerful,
Registers can be logged to files for further run-time yet easy-to-use graphical user interface of the MPLAB
analysis. The trace buffer and logic analyzer display IDE.
extend the power of the simulator to record and track
The MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger probe is
program execution, actions on I/O, most peripherals
connected to the design engineer’s PC using a high-
and internal registers.
speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target
The MPLAB X SIM Software Simulator fully supports with a connector compatible with the MPLAB ICD 2 or
symbolic debugging using the MPLAB XC Compilers, MPLAB REAL ICE systems (RJ-11). MPLAB ICD 3
and the MPASM and MPLAB Assemblers. The supports all MPLAB ICD 2 headers.
software simulator offers the flexibility to develop and
debug code outside of the hardware laboratory 43.9 PICkit 3 In-Circuit Debugger/
environment, making it an excellent, economical
software development tool.
Programmer
The MPLAB PICkit 3 allows debugging and
43.7 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit programming of PIC and dsPIC Flash microcontrollers
Emulator System at a most affordable price point using the powerful
graphical user interface of the MPLAB IDE. The
The MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System is MPLAB PICkit 3 is connected to the design engineer’s
Microchip’s next generation high-speed emulator for PC using a full-speed USB interface and can be
Microchip Flash DSC and MCU devices. It debugs and connected to the target via a Microchip debug (RJ-11)
programs all 8, 16 and 32-bit MCU, and DSC devices connector (compatible with MPLAB ICD 3 and MPLAB
with the easy-to-use, powerful graphical user interface of REAL ICE). The connector uses two device I/O pins
the MPLAB X IDE. and the Reset line to implement in-circuit debugging
The emulator is connected to the design engineer’s and In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™).
PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is
connected to the target with either a connector 43.10 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer
compatible with in-circuit debugger systems (RJ-11)
or with the new high-speed, noise tolerant, Low- The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal,
Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interconnection CE compliant device programmer with programmable
(CAT5). voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for
maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display
The emulator is field upgradable through future firmware (128 x 64) for menus and error messages, and a mod-
downloads in MPLAB X IDE. MPLAB REAL ICE offers ular, detachable socket assembly to support various
significant advantages over competitive emulators package types. The ICSP cable assembly is included
including full-speed emulation, run-time variable as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB
watches, trace analysis, complex breakpoints, logic PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program
probes, a ruggedized probe interface and long (up to PIC devices without a PC connection. It can also set
three meters) interconnection cables. code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3
connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable.
The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and
optimized algorithms for quick programming of large
memory devices, and incorporates an MMC card for file
storage and data applications.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
43.11 Demonstration/Development 43.12 Third-Party Development Tools
Boards, Evaluation Kits, and Microchip also offers a great collection of tools from
Starter Kits third-party vendors. These tools are carefully selected
A wide variety of demonstration, development and to offer good value and unique functionality.
evaluation boards for various PIC MCUs and dsPIC • Device Programmers and Gang Programmers
DSCs allows quick application development on fully from companies, such as SoftLog and CCS
functional systems. Most boards include prototyping • Software Tools from companies, such as Gimpel
areas for adding custom circuitry and provide and Trace Systems
application firmware and source code for examination • Protocol Analyzers from companies, such as
and modification. Saleae and Total Phase
The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs, • Demonstration Boards from companies, such as
temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232 MikroElektronika, Digilent® and Olimex
interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional • Embedded Ethernet Solutions from companies,
EEPROM memory. such as EZ Web Lynx, WIZnet and IPLogika®
The demonstration and development boards can be
used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom
circuits and for learning about various microcontroller
applications.
In addition to the PICDEM™ and dsPICDEM™
demonstration/development board series of circuits,
Microchip has a line of evaluation kits and
demonstration software for analog filter design,
KEELOQ® security ICs, CAN, IrDA®, PowerSmart
battery management, SEEVAL® evaluation system,
Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate sensing, plus many more.
Also available are starter kits that contain everything
needed to experience the specified device. This usually
includes a single application and debug capability, all
on one board.
Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com)
for the complete list of demonstration, development
and evaluation kits.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
44.0 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
44.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings(†)
Ambient temperature under bias...................................................................................................... -40°C to +125°C
Storage temperature ........................................................................................................................ -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on pins with respect to VSS
on VDD pin
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 ........................................................................ -0.3V to +6.5V
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 ...................................................................... -0.3V to +4.0V
on MCLR pin ........................................................................................................................... -0.3V to +9.0V
on all other pins ............................................................................................................ -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V)
Maximum current
on VSS pin(1)
-40°C  TA  +85°C .............................................................................................................. 350 mA
85°C  TA  +125°C ............................................................................................................. 120 mA
on VDD pin for 28-Pin devices(1)
-40°C  TA  +85°C .............................................................................................................. 250 mA
85°C  TA  +125°C ............................................................................................................... 85 mA
on VDD pin for 40-Pin devices(1)
-40°C  TA  +85°C .............................................................................................................. 350 mA
85°C  TA  +125°C ............................................................................................................. 120 mA
on any standard I/O pin ...................................................................................................................... 50 mA
Clamp current, IK (VPIN < 0 or VPIN > VDD) ................................................................................................... 20 mA
Total power dissipation(2)................................................................................................................................ 800 mW
Note 1: Maximum current rating requires even load distribution across I/O pins. Maximum current rating may be
limited by the device package power dissipation characterizations, see Table 44-7 to calculate device
specifications.
2: Power dissipation is calculated as follows:
PDIS = VDD x {IDD - IOH} + VDD - VOH) x IOH} + VOI x IOL
† NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the
device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those
indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure above maximum rating conditions for
extended periods may affect device reliability.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
44.2 Standard Operating Conditions
The standard operating conditions for any device are defined as:
Operating Voltage: VDDMIN VDD VDDMAX
Operating Temperature: TA_MIN TA TA_MAX
VDD — Operating Supply Voltage(1)
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
VDDMIN (Fosc  16 MHz) ......................................................................................................... +1.8V
VDDMIN (Fosc  32 MHz) ......................................................................................................... +2.5V
VDDMIN (Fosc  64 MHz) ......................................................................................................... +2.7V
VDDMAX .................................................................................................................................... +3.6V
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
VDDMIN (Fosc  16 MHz) ......................................................................................................... +2.3V
VDDMIN (Fosc  32 MHz) ......................................................................................................... +2.5V
VDDMIN (Fosc  64 MHz) ......................................................................................................... +2.7V
VDDMAX .................................................................................................................................... +5.5V
TA — Operating Ambient Temperature Range
Industrial Temperature
TA_MIN ...................................................................................................................................... -40°C
TA_MAX .................................................................................................................................... +85°C
Extended Temperature
TA_MIN ...................................................................................................................................... -40°C
TA_MAX .................................................................................................................................. +125°C
Note 1: See Parameter Supply Voltage, DS Characteristics: Supply Voltage.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-1: VOLTAGE FREQUENCY GRAPH, -40°C  TA +125°C, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/
56/57K42 ONLY
5.5
2.7
VDD (V)
2.5
2.3
0 4 10 16 32 64
Frequency (MHz)
Note 1: The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency.
2: Refer to Table 44-8 for each Oscillator mode’s supported frequencies.
FIGURE 44-2: VOLTAGE FREQUENCY GRAPH, -40°C  TA +125°C, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/

56/57K42 ONLY
3.6
VDD (V)
2.7
2.5
1.8
0 4 10 16 32 64
Frequency (MHz)
Note 1: The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency.
2: Refer to Table 44-8 for each Oscillator mode’s supported frequencies.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
44.3 DC Characteristics
TABLE 44-1: SUPPLY VOLTAGE
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Param.
Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ.† Max. Units Conditions
No.
Supply Voltage
D002 VDD 1.8 — 3.6 V FOSC  16 MHz
2.5 — 3.6 V FOSC  16 MHz
2.7 — 3.6 V FOSC  32 MHz
D002 VDD 2.3 — 5.5 V FOSC  16 MHz
2.5 — 5.5 V FOSC  MHz
2.7 — 5.5 V FOSC  32 MHz
RAM Data Retention(1)
D003 VDR 1.5 — — V Device in Sleep mode
D003 VDR 1.7 — — V Device in Sleep mode
Power-on Reset Release Voltage(2)
D004 VPOR — 1.6 — V BOR or LPBOR disabled(3)
D004 VPOR — 1.6 — V BOR or LPBOR disabled(3)
Power-on Reset Rearm Voltage(2)
D005 VPORR — 0.8 — V BOR or LPBOR disabled(3)
D005 VPORR — 1.5 — V BOR or LPBOR disabled(3)
VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal(2)
D006 SVDD 0.05 — — V/ms BOR or LPBOR disabled(3)
D006 SVDD 0.05 — — V/ms BOR or LPBOR disabled(3)
†
Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance
only and are not tested.
Note 1: This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered in Sleep mode without losing RAM data.
2: See Figure 44-3, POR and POR REARM with Slow Rising VDD.
3: See Table 44-12 for BOR and LPBOR trip point information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-3: POR AND POR REARM WITH SLOW RISING VDD
VDD
VPOR
VPORR
SVDD
VSS
NPOR(1)
POR REARM
VSS
TVLOW(3) TPOR(2)
Note 1: When NPOR is low, the device is held in Reset.

2: TPOR 1 s typical.
3: TVLOW 2.7 s typical.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-2: SUPPLY CURRENT (IDD)(1,2,4)

PIC18LF26/45/46/55/56K42 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
PIC18F26/45/46/55/56K42
Param. Conditions
Symbol Device Characteristics Min. Typ.† Max. Units
No. VDD Note
D100 IDDXT4 XT = 4 MHz — 620 1000 A 3.0V
D100 IDDXT4 XT = 4 MHz — 680 1100 A 3.0V
D100A IDDXT4 XT = 4 MHz — 400 — A 3.0V PMD’s all 1’s
D101 IDDHFO16 HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 2.9 4.1 mA 3.0V
D101 IDDHFO16 HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 3 4.2 mA 3.0V
D101A IDDHFO16 HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 2 — mA 3.0V PMD’s all 1’s
D101A IDDHFO16 HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 2.1 — mA 3.0V PMD’s all 1’s
D102 IDDHFOPLL HFINTOSC = 64 MHz — 11.5 13.9 mA 3.0V
D102 IDDHFOPLL HFINTOSC = 64 MHz — 11.6 14 mA 3.0V
D102A IDDHFOPLL HFINTOSC = 64 MHz — 7.5 — mA 3.0V PMD’s all 1’s
D103 IDDHSPLL64 HS+PLL = 64 MHz — 9.8 12.9 mA 3.0V
D103 IDDHSPLL64 HS+PLL = 64 MHz — 9.9 13 mA 3.0V
D103A IDDHSPLL64 HS+PLL = 64 MHz — 6.3 — mA 3.0V PMD’s all 1’s
D104 IDDIDLE Idle mode, HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 1.8 2.8 mA 3.0V
D105 IDDDOZE(3) Doze mode, HFINTOSC = 16 MHz, Doze Ratio = 16 — 1.8 — mA 3.0V
† Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested.
Note 1: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from
rail-to-rail; all I/O pins are outputs driven low; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled.
2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and
switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption.
3: IDDDOZE = [IDDIDLE*(N-1)/N] + IDDHFO16/N where N = Doze Ratio (Register 10-2).
4: PMD bits are all in the default state, no modules are disabled.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-3: SUPPLY CURRENT (IDD)(1,2,4,5)

PIC18LF27/47/57K42 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
PIC18F27/47/57K42
Param. Conditions
Symbol Device Characteristics Min. Typ.† Max. Units
No. VDD Note
D100 IDDXT4 XT = 4 MHz — 750 1300 A 3.0V
D100 IDDXT4 XT = 4 MHz — 810 1400 A 3.0V
† Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested.
Note 1: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from
rail-to-rail; all I/O pins are outputs driven low; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled.
2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and
switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption.
3: IDDDOZE = [IDDIDLE*(N-1)/N] + IDDHFO16/N where N = Doze Ratio (Register 10-2).
4: PMD bits are all in the default state, no modules are disabled.
5: Data in this table is Preliminary data.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-4: POWER-DOWN CURRENT (IPD)(1,2)

PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)

PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
VREGPM = 1
Param. Max. Max. Conditions

Symbol Device Characteristics Min. Typ.† Units
No. +85°C +125°C VDD Note
D200 IPD IPD Base — 0.04 2.6 9.7 A 3.0V
D200 IPD IPD Base — 0.4 4 14 A 3.0V

D200A — 20 32 42 A 3.0V VREGPM = 0
D201 IPD_WDT Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator/ — 0.8 3.6 12 A 3.0V
WDT
D201 IPD_WDT Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator/ — 1 4.8 14 A 3.0V
WDT
D202 IPD_SOSC Secondary Oscillator (SOSC) — 0.9 5.6 18 A 3.0V LP mode
D202 IPD_SOSC Secondary Oscillator (SOSC) — 1 6 19 A 3.0V LP mode
D203 IPD_FVR FVR — 39 81 85 A 3.0V FVRCON = 0x81 or 0x84
D203 IPD_FVR FVR — 33 76 81 A 3.0V FVRCON = 0x81 or 0x84
D204 IPD_BOR Brown-out Reset (BOR) — 9.4 15 20.6 A 3.0V
D204 IPD_BOR Brown-out Reset (BOR) — 9.8 16 21.2 A 3.0V
D205 IPD_LPBOR Low-Power Brown-out Reset (LPBOR) — 0.1 3 10.8 A 3.0V
D206 IPD_HLVD High/Low Voltage Detect (HLVD) — 9.3 13.4 21.4 A 3.0V
D206 IPD_HLVD High/Low Voltage Detect (HLVD) — 9.5 14 22 A 3.0V
D207 IPD_ADCA ADC - Non-Converting — 0.3 2.6 9.7 A 3.0V ADC not converting (4)
D207 IPD_ADCA ADC - Non-Converting — 0.4 4 14 A 3.0V ADC not converting (4)
D208 IPD_CMP Comparator — 25 48 56 A 3.0V
D208 IPD_CMP Comparator — 26 49 57 A 3.0V
† Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not
tested.
Note 1: The peripheral current is the sum of the base IDD and the additional current consumed when this peripheral is enabled. The
peripheral ∆ current can be determined by subtracting the base IDD or IPD current from this limit. Max. values should be used
when calculating total current consumption.
2: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part
in Sleep mode with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VSS.
3: All peripheral currents listed are on a per-peripheral basis if more than one instance of a peripheral is available.
4: ADC clock source is ADCRC.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-5: I/O PORTS

Param
Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ† Max. Units Conditions
No.
VIL Input Low Voltage

I/O PORT:
D300 with TTL buffer — — 0.8 V 4.5V  VDD  5.5V
D301 — — 0.15 VDD V 1.8V  VDD < 4.5V
D302 with Schmitt Trigger buffer — — 0.2 VDD V 2.0V  VDD  5.5V
D303 with I2C levels — — 0.3 VDD V 2.0V  VDD  5.5V
D304 with SMBus 2.0 — — 0.8 V 2.7V  VDD  5.5V
D305 with SMBus 3.0 — — 0.8 V 1.8V  VDD  5.5V
D306 MCLR — — 0.2 VDD V
VIH Input High Voltage
I/O PORT:
D320 with TTL buffer 2.0 — — V 4.5V  VDD 5.5V
D321 0.25 VDD + — — V 1.8V  VDD < 4.5V
0.8
D322 with Schmitt Trigger buffer 0.8 VDD — — V 2.0V  VDD  5.5V
D323 with I2C levels 0.7 VDD — — V
D324 with SMBus 2.0 2.1 — — V 2.7V  VDD  5.5V
D325 with SMBus 3.0 1.35 — — V 1.8V  VDD  5.5V
D326 MCLR 0.7 VDD — — V
IIL Input Leakage Current(1)
D340 I/O Ports — ±5 ± 125 nA VSS  VPIN  VDD,
Pin at high-impedance, 85°C
D341 — ±5 ± 1000 nA VSS  VPIN  VDD,
D342 MCLR(2) — ± 50 ± 200 nA VSS  VPIN  VDD,
IPUR Weak Pull-up Current
D350 25 120 200 A VDD = 3.0V, VPIN = VSS
VOL Output Low Voltage
D360 I/O ports — — 0.6 V IOL = 10.0mA, VDD = 3.0V
VOH Output High Voltage
D370 I/O ports VDD - 0.7 — — V IOH = 6.0 mA, VDD = 3.0V
D380 CIO All I/O pins — 5 50 pF
†Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are
not tested.
Note 1: Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin.
2: The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified levels represent
normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input voltages.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-6: MEMORY PROGRAMMING SPECIFICATIONS

Param
No.
Data EEPROM Memory Specifications
MEM20 ED DataEE Byte Endurance 100k — — E/W -40C  TA  +85C
MEM21 TD_RET Characteristic Retention — 40 — Year Provided no other
specifications are violated
MEM22 ND_REF Total Erase/Write Cycles before 1M 10M — E/W -40C  TA  +60C
Refresh 500k — — -40C  TA  +85C
MEM23 VD_RW VDD for Read or Erase/Write VDDMIN — VDDMAX V
operation
MEM24 TD_BEW Byte Erase and Write Cycle Time — 4.0 5.0 ms
Program Flash Memory Specifications
MEM30 EP Memory Cell Endurance 10k — — E/W -40C  TA  +85C
(Note 1)
MEM32 TP_RET Characteristic Retention — 40 — Year Provided no other
specifications are violated
MEM33 VP_RD VDD for Read operation VDDMIN — VDDMAX V

MEM34 VP_REW VDD for Row Erase or Write VDDMIN — VDDMAX V
operation
MEM35 TP_REW Self-Timed Row Erase or Self-Timed — 2.0 2.5 ms
Write
† Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are
not tested.
Note 1: Memory Cell Endurance for the Program memory is defined as: One Row Erase operation and one Self-Timed Write.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-7: THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Sym. Characteristic Typ. Units Conditions
No.
TH01 JA Thermal Resistance Junction to Ambient 60 C/W 28-pin SPDIP package
80 C/W 28-pin SOIC package
90 C/W 28-pin SSOP package
27.5 C/W 28-pin UQFN 4x4 mm package
27.5 C/W 28-pin QFN 6x6mm package
47.2 C/W 40-pin PDIP package
46 C/W 44-pin TQFP package
24.4 C/W 44-pin QFN 8x8mm package
TH02 JC Thermal Resistance Junction to Case 31.4 C/W 28-pin SPDIP package
24 C/W 28-pin SOIC package
24 C/W 28-pin SSOP package
24 C/W 28-pin UQFN 4x4mm package
24 C/W 28-pin QFN 6x6mm package
24.7 C/W 40-pin PDIP package
14.5 C/W 44-pin TQFP package
20 C/W 44-pin QFN 8x8mm package
TH03 TJMAX Maximum Junction Temperature 150 C
TH04 PD Power Dissipation — W PD = PINTERNAL + PI/O(3)
TH05 PINTERNAL Internal Power Dissipation — W PINTERNAL = IDD x VDD(1)
TH06 PI/O I/O Power Dissipation — W PI/O =  (IOL * VOL) +  (IOH * (VDD - VOH))
TH07 PDER Derated Power — W PDER = PDMAX (TJ - TA)/JA(2)
Note 1: IDD is current to run the chip alone without driving any load on the output pins.
2: TA = Ambient Temperature, TJ = Junction Temperature
3: See absolute maximum ratings for total power dissipation.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
44.4 AC Characteristics
FIGURE 44-4: LOAD CONDITIONS
Rev. 10-000133A
8/1/2013
Load Condition
Pin
CL
VSS
Legend: CL=50 pF for all pins

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-5: CLOCK TIMING
Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
CLKIN
OS1 OS2 OS2
OS20
CLKOUT
(CLKOUT Mode)
Note 1: See Table 44-8.
TABLE 44-8: EXTERNAL CLOCK/OSCILLATOR TIMING REQUIREMENTS

Param
No.
ECL Clock
OS1 FECL Clock Frequency — — 500 kHz
OS2 TECL_DC Clock Duty Cycle 40 — 60 %
ECM Clock
OS3 FECM Clock Frequency — — 8 MHz
OS4 TECM_DC Clock Duty Cycle 40 — 60 %
ECH Clock
OS5 FECH Clock Frequency — — 64 MHz
OS6 TECH_DC Clock Duty Cycle 40 — 60 %
LP Oscillator
OS7 FLP Clock Frequency — — 100 kHz Note 4
XT Oscillator
OS8 FXT Clock Frequency — — 4 MHz Note 4
HS Oscillator
OS9 FHS Clock Frequency — — 20 MHz Note 4
Secondary Oscillator
OS10 FSEC Clock Frequency 32.4 32.768 33.1 kHz
System Oscillator
OS20 FOSC System Clock Frequency — — 64 MHz (Note 2, Note 3)
* These parameters are characterized but not tested.
not tested.
Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on
characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing
code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected
current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “min” values with an external clock applied to OSC1 pin.
When an external clock input is used, the “max” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices.
2: The system clock frequency (FOSC) is selected by the “main clock switch controls” as described in Section 10.0
“Power-Saving Operation Modes”.
3: The system clock frequency (FOSC) must meet the voltage requirements defined in the Section 44.2 “Standard
Operating Conditions”.
4: LP, XT and HS oscillator modes require an appropriate crystal or resonator to be connected to the device. For clocking
the device with the external square wave, one of the EC mode selections must be used.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-8: EXTERNAL CLOCK/OSCILLATOR TIMING REQUIREMENTS (CONTINUED)
Param
No.
OS21 FCY Instruction Frequency — FOSC/4 — MHz
OS22 TCY Instruction Period 62.5 1/FCY — ns
not tested.
Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on
characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing
code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected
current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “min” values with an external clock applied to OSC1 pin.
When an external clock input is used, the “max” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices.
2: The system clock frequency (FOSC) is selected by the “main clock switch controls” as described in Section 10.0
“Power-Saving Operation Modes”.
3: The system clock frequency (FOSC) must meet the voltage requirements defined in the Section 44.2 “Standard
Operating Conditions”.
4: LP, XT and HS oscillator modes require an appropriate crystal or resonator to be connected to the device. For clocking
the device with the external square wave, one of the EC mode selections must be used.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-9: INTERNAL OSCILLATOR PARAMETERS(1)
Param
No.
OS50 FHFOSC Precision Calibrated HFINTOSC — 4 — MHz (Note 2)
Frequency 8
12
16
48
64
OS51 FHFOSCLP Low-Power Optimized HFINTOSC 0.92 1 1.08 MHz -40°C to 85°C
Frequency 1.84 2 2.16 MHz -40°C to 85°C
0.88 1 1.12 MHz -40°C to 125°C
1.76 2 2.24 MHz -40°C to 125°C
OS53* FLFOSC Internal LFINTOSC Frequency 24.80 31 37.2 kHz
OS54* THFOSCST HFINTOSC — 11 20 s VREGPM = 0
Wake-up from Sleep Start-up — 50 — s VREGPM = 1
Time
OS56 TLFOSCST LFINTOSC — 0.2 — ms
Wake-up from Sleep Start-up Time
*These parameters are characterized but not tested.
†Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance
Note 1: To ensure these oscillator frequency tolerances, VDD and VSS must be capacitively decoupled as close to
the device as possible. 0.1 F and 0.01 F values in parallel are recommended.
2: See Figure 44-6: Precision Calibrated HFINTOSC and MFINTOSC Frequency Accuracy Over Device VDD
and Temperature.
FIGURE 44-6: PRECISION CALIBRATED HFINTOSC AND MFINTOSC FREQUENCY

ACCURACY OVER DEVICE VDD AND TEMPERATURE
125
± 5%
85
± 3%
Temperature (°C)
60
± 2%
0
± 5%
-40
1.8 2.0 2.3 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V)

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-10: PLL SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) VDD 2.5V
Param
No.
PLL01 FPLLIN PLL Input Frequency Range 4 — 16 MHz
PLL02 FPLLOUT PLL Output Frequency Range 16 — 64 MHz Note 1
PLL03 TPLLST PLL Lock Time from Start-up — 200 — s
PLL04 FPLLJIT PLL Output Frequency Stability (Jitter) -0.25 — 0.25 %
† Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance
Note 1: The output frequency of the PLL must meet the FOSC requirements listed in Parameter D002.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-7: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING
Cycle Write Fetch Read Execute

Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3
FOSC
IO1 IO2
IO10
CLKOUT
IO8 IO4 IO7
IO5
I/O pin
(Input)
IO3
I/O pin Old Value New Value
(Output)
IO7, IO8
TABLE 44-11: I/O AND CLKOUT TIMING SPECIFICATIONS

Param
No.
IO1* TCLKOUTH CLKOUT rising edge delay (rising edge — — 70 ns
Fosc (Q1 cycle) to falling edge CLKOUT
IO2* TCLKOUTL CLKOUT falling edge delay (rising edge — — 72 ns
Fosc (Q3 cycle) to rising edge CLKOUT
IO3* TIO_VALID Port output valid time (rising edge Fosc — 50 70 ns
(Q1 cycle) to port valid)
IO4* TIO_SETUP Port input setup time (Setup time before 20 — — ns
rising edge Fosc – Q2 cycle)
IO5* TIO_HOLD Port input hold time (Hold time after rising 50 — — ns
edge Fosc – Q2 cycle)
IO6* TIOR_SLREN Port I/O rise time, slew rate enabled — 25 — ns VDD = 3.0V
IO7* TIOR_SLRDIS Port I/O rise time, slew rate disabled — 5 — ns VDD = 3.0V
IO8* TIOF_SLREN Port I/O fall time, slew rate enabled — 25 — ns VDD = 3.0V
IO9* TIOF_SLRDIS Port I/O fall time, slew rate disabled — 5 — ns VDD = 3.0V
IO10* TINT INT pin high or low time to trigger an 25 — — ns
interrupt
IO11* TIOC Interrupt-on-Change minimum high or low 25 — — ns

time to trigger interrupt

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-8: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND POWER-UP
TIMER TIMING
VDD
MCLR
RST01
Internal
POR
RST04
PWRT
Time-out RST05
OSC
Start-up Time
Internal Reset(1)
Watchdog Timer
Reset(1)
RST03
RST02
RST02
I/O pins
Note 1: Asserted low.
FIGURE 44-9: BROWN-OUT RESET TIMING AND CHARACTERISTICS
VDD
VBOR and VHYST
VBOR
(Device in Brown-out Reset) (Device not in Brown-out Reset)
RST08
Reset
RST04(1)
(due to BOR)
Note 1: Delay depends on PWRTS[1:0] Configuration bits.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-12: RESET, WDT, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER, BROWN-OUT
RESET AND LOW-POWER BROWN-OUT RESET SPECIFICATIONS
Param
No.
RST01* TMCLR MCLR Pulse Width Low to ensure Reset 2 — — s

RST02* TIOZ I/O high-impedance from Reset detection — — 2 s
RST03 TWDT Watchdog Timer Time-out Period — 16 — ms 1:512 Prescaler
RST04* TPWRT Power-up Timer Period — 1 — ms PWRTS = 00
16 ms PWRTS = 01
64 ms PWRTS = 10
RST05 TOST Oscillator Start-up Timer Period(1,2) — 1024 — TOSC
RST06 VBOR Brown-out Reset Voltage(4) 2.7 2.85 3.0 V BORV = 00
2.55 2.7 2.85 V BORV = 01
2.3 2.45 2.6 V BORV = 10
2.3 2.45 2.6 V BORV = 11 (PIC18Fxxx)
1.8 1.9 2.1 V BORV = 11 (PIC18LFxxx)
RST07 VBORHYS Brown-out Reset Hysteresis — 40 — mV
RST08 TBORDC Brown-out Reset Response Time — 3 — s
RST09 VLPBOR Low-Power Brown-out Reset Voltage 1.8 2 2.5 V PIC18LFXXX only
†Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not
tested.
Note 1: By design, the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) counts the first 1024 cycles, independent of frequency.
2: To ensure these voltage tolerances, VDD and VSS must be capacitively decoupled as close to the device as possible.
0.1 F and 0.01 F values in parallel are recommended.
TABLE 44-13: HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CHARACTERISTICS

Param. No. Symbol Characteristic Min. Typ† Max. Units Conditions
HLVD01 VDET Voltage Detection 1.73(1) 1.90 2.07 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=0000
1.91 2.10 2.29 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=0001
2.05 2.25 2.45 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=0010
2.28 2.50 2.73 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=0011
2.37 2.60 2.83 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=0100
2.50 2.75 3.00 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=0101
2.64 2.90 3.16 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=0110
2.87 3.15 3.43 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=0111
3.05 3.35 3.65 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=1000
3.28 3.60 3.92 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=1001
3.41 3.75 4.09 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=1010
3.64 4.00 4.36 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=1011
3.82 4.20 4.58 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=1100
3.96 4.35 4.74 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=1101
4.23 4.65 5.07 V HLVDSEL[3:0]=1110
not tested.
Note 1: Device operation below VDD = 1.8 V is not recommended.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-14: ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) ACCURACY SPECIFICATIONS(1,2):
Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C, TAD = 1s
Param
No.
AD01 NR Resolution — — 12 bit
AD02 EIL Integral Error — ±0.1 ±2.0 LSb ADCREF+ = 3.0V, ADCREF-= 0V
AD03 EDL Differential Error — ±0.1 ±1.0 LSb ADCREF+ = 3.0V, ADCREF-= 0V
AD04 EOFF Offset Error — 0.5 6.0 LSb ADCREF+ = 3.0V, ADCREF-= 0V
AD05 EGN Gain Error — ±0.2 ±6.0 LSb ADCREF+ = 3.0V, ADCREF-= 0V
AD06 VADREF ADC Reference Voltage 1.8 — VDD V
(ADREF+ - ADREF-)
AD07 VAIN Full-Scale Range ADREF- — ADREF+ V
AD08 ZAIN Recommended Impedance of — 1 — k
Analog Voltage Source
AD09 RVREF ADC Voltage Reference Ladder — 50 — k Note 3
Impedance
†Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not
tested.
Note 1: Total Absolute Error is the sum of the offset, gain and integral non-linearity (INL) errors.
2: The ADC conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input and has no missing codes.
3: This is the impedance seen by the VREF pads when the external reference pads are selected.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-15: ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) CONVERSION TIMING SPECIFICATIONS
Param
No.
Using FOSC as the ADC clock
AD20 1 — 9 s
source ADCS = 1
TAD ADC Clock Period
Using ADCRC as the ADC clock
AD21 — 2 — s
source ADCS = 0
— 14 TAD + 2 TCY — —
source ADCS = 1
AD22 TCNV Conversion Time
Using ADCRC as the ADC clock
— 16 TAD + 2 TCY — —
source ADCS = 0
— 2 TAD + 1 TCY — —
source ADCS = 1
Sample and Hold Capacitor
AD24 THCD Using ADCRC as the ADC clock
Disconnect Time
— 3 TAD + 2 TCY — — source ADCS = 0

† Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not
tested.
FIGURE 44-10: ADC CONVERSION TIMING (ADC CLOCK FOSC-BASED)

Rev. 10-000321B
6/1/2017
BSF ADCON0, GO
1 TCY
AD22
AD24 1 TCY
1 TCY AD20
ADC_clk
ADRES OLD DATA NEW DATA
ADIF
GO DONE
Sample Sampling Stopped

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-11: ADC CONVERSION TIMING (ADC CLOCK FROM ADCRC)
Rev. 10-000328B
6/1/2017
BSF ADCON0, GO
1 TCY
AD22
AD24
2 TCY(1) AD21
ADC_clk
ADRES OLD DATA NEW DATA
ADIF
GO DONE
Sample Sampling Stopped
Note 1: If the ADC clock source is selected as ADCRC, a time of TCY is added before the ADC clock starts. This
allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-16: COMPARATOR SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C
Param
Sym. Characteristics Min. Typ. Max. Units Comments
No.
CM01 VIOFF Input Offset Voltage — — ±60 mV VICM = VDD/2
CM02 VICM Input Common Mode Range GND — VDD V
CM03 CMRR Common Mode Input Rejection Ratio — 50 — dB
CM04 VHYST Comparator Hysteresis 10 25 40 mV
CM05 TRESP(1) Response Time, Rising Edge — 300 900 ns
Response Time, Falling Edge — 220 500 ns
Note 1: Response time measured with one comparator input at VDD/2, while the other input transitions from VSS to VDD.
2: A mode change includes changing any of the control register values, including module enable.
TABLE 44-17: 5-BIT DAC SPECIFICATIONS

VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C
Param
Sym. Characteristics Min. Typ. Max. Units Comments
No.
DSB01 VLSB Step Size — (VDACREF+ -VDACREF-) / — V

32
DSB01 VACC Absolute Accuracy — —  0.5 LSb
DSB03* RUNIT Unit Resistor Value — 5000 — 
DSB04* TST Settling Time(1) — — 10 s
† Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested.
Note 1: Settling time measured while DACR[4:0] transitions from ‘00000’ to ‘01111’.
TABLE 44-18: FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE (FVR) SPECIFICATIONS

Param.
Symbol Characteristic Min. Typ. Max. Units Conditions
No.
FVR01 VFVR1 1x Gain (1.024V) -4 — +4 % VDD  2.5V, -40°C to 85°C
FVR04 TFVRST FVR Start-up Time — 25 — us
TABLE 44-19: ZERO-CROSS DETECT (ZCD) SPECIFICATIONS

VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C
Param.
Sym. Characteristics Min Typ† Max Units Comments
No.
ZC01 VPINZC Voltage on Zero Cross Pin — 0.75 — V
ZC02 IZCD_MAX Maximum source or sink current — — 600 A
ZC03 TRESPH Response Time, Rising Edge — 1 — s
TRESPL Response Time, Falling Edge — 1 — s
† Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-12: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMINGS
T0CKI
40 41
42
T1CKI
45 46
47 49
TMR0 or
TMR1
TABLE 44-20: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK REQUIREMENTS

Operating Temperature -40°C TA +125°C
Param
No.
40* TT0H T0CKI High Pulse Width No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns
With Prescaler 10 — — ns
41* TT0L T0CKI Low Pulse Width No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns
42* TT0P T0CKI Period Greater of: — — ns N = prescale value
20 or TCY + 40
N
45* TT1H T1CKI High Synchronous, No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns
Time Synchronous, with Prescaler 15 — — ns
Asynchronous 30 — — ns
46* TT1L T1CKI Low Synchronous, No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns
Time Synchronous, with Prescaler 15 — — ns
47* TT1P T1CKI Input Synchronous Greater of: — — ns N = prescale value
Period 30 or TCY + 40
N
49* TCKEZTMR1 Delay from External Clock Edge to Timer 2 TOSC — 7 TOSC — Timers in Sync
Increment mode
tested.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-13: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM TIMINGS (CCP)
CCPx
(Capture mode)
CC01 CC02
CC03
Note: Refer to Figure 44-4 for load conditions.
TABLE 44-21: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM REQUIREMENTS (CCP)

Operating Temperature -40°C  TA  +125°C
Param
No.
CC01* TccL CCPx Input Low Time No Prescaler 0.5TCY + 20 — — ns
CC02* TccH CCPx Input High Time No Prescaler 0.5TCY + 20 — — ns
CC03* TccP CCPx Input Period 3TCY + 40 — — ns N = prescale value
N
tested.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-14: SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 0, SMP = 0)
SS
SP81
SCK
(CKP = 0)
SP71 SP72
SP78 SP79
SCK
(CKP = 1)
SP79 SP78
SP80
SDO MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 LSb
SP75, SP76
SDI MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In
SP74
SP73
FIGURE 44-15: SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 1, SMP = 1)
SS
SP81
SCK
(CKP = 0)
SP71 SP72
SP79
SP73
SCK
(CKP = 1)
SP80
SP78
SP75, SP76
SP74

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-16: SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 0)
SS
SP70
SCK SP83
(CKP = 0)
SP71 SP72
SP78 SP79
SCK
(CKP = 1)
SP79 SP78
SP80
SP75, SP76 SP77
SP74
SP73
FIGURE 44-17: SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 1)
SP82
SS
SP70
SCK SP83
(CKP = 0)
SP71 SP72
SCK
(CKP = 1)
SP80
SP77
SP75, SP76
SDI
MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In
SP74

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-22: SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE)
Param
Symbol Characteristic Min. Typ† Max. Units Conditions
No.
61 — — ns Transmit only mode

— 16(1) — MHz
TSCK SCK Cycle Time (2x Prescaled)
95 — — ns Full duplex mode
— 10(1) — MHz
SP70* TSSL2SCH, SDO to SCK or SCK input TSCK — — ns FST = 0
TSSL2SCL
0 — — ns FST = 1
SP71* TSCH SCK output high time 0.5 TSCK - 12 — 0.5 TSCK + 12 ns
SP72* TSCL SCK output low time 0.5 TSCK - 12 — 0.5 TSCK + 12 ns
SP73* TDIV2SCH, Setup time of SDI data input to SCK 85 — — ns
TDIV2SCL edge
SP74* TSCH2DIL, Hold time of SDI data input to SCK edge 0 — — ns
TSCL2DIL Hold time of SDI data input to final SCK 0.5 TSCK — — ns CKE = 0, SMP = 1
SP75* TDOR SDO data output rise time — 10 25 ns CL = 50 pF
SP76* TDOF SDO data output fall time — 10 25 ns CL = 50 pF
SP78* TSCR SCK output rise time — 10 25 ns CL = 50 pF
SP79* TSCF SCK output fall time — 10 25 ns CL = 50 pF
SP80* TSCH2DOV, SDO data output valid after SCK edge - 15 — 15 ns CL = 20 pF
TSCL2DOV
SP81* TDOV2SCH, SDO data output valid to first SCK edge TSCK - 10 — — ns CL = 20 pF
TDOV2SCL CKE = 1
SP82* TSSL2DOV SDO data output valid after SS edge — — 50 ns CL = 20 pF
SP83* TSCH2SSH, SS after last SCK edge 0.5 TSCK - 10 — — ns
TSCL2SSH
SP84* TSSH2SSL SStoSSedge 0.5 TSCK - 10 — — ns

† Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance
Note 1: SPIxCON1.SMP bit must be set and the slew rate control must be disabled on the clock and data pins
(clear the corresponding bits in SLRCONx register) for SPI to operate over 4 MHz.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-23: SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE)
Param
No.
47 — — ns Receive only mode

— 20(1) — MHz
TSCK SCK Total Cycle Time
95 — — ns Full duplex mode
— 10(1) — MHz
SP70* TSSL2SCH, SS to SCK or SCK input 0 — — ns CKE = 0
TSSL2SCL
25 — — ns CKE = 1
SP71* TSCH SCK input high time 20 — — ns
SP72* TSCL SCK input low time 20 — — ns
SP73* TDIV2SCH, Setup time of SDI data input to SCK 10 — — ns
TDIV2SCL edge
SP74* TSCH2DIL, Hold time of SDI data input to SCK edge 0 — — ns
TSCL2DIL
SP75* TDOR SDO data output rise time — 10 25 ns CL = 50 pF
SP76* TDOF SDO data output fall time — 10 25 ns CL = 50 pF
SP77* TSSH2DOZ SS to SDO output high-impedance — — 85 ns
SP80* TSCH2DOV, SDO data output valid after SCK edge — — 85 ns
TSCL2DOV
SP82* TSSL2DOV SDO data output valid after SS edge — — 85 ns
SP83* TSCH2SSH, SS after SCK edge 20 — — ns
TSCL2SSH
SP84* TSSH2SSL SStoSSedge 47 — — ns
Note 1: SPIxCON1.SMP bit must be set and the slew rate control must be disabled on the clock and data pins
(clear the corresponding bits in SLRCONx register) for SPI to operate over 4 MHz.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
FIGURE 44-18: I2C BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING
SCL
SP91 SP93
SP90 SP92
SDA
Start Stop
Condition Condition
TABLE 44-24: I2C BUS START/STOP BITS REQUIREMENTS

Param
Symbol Characteristic Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions
No.
SP90* TSU:STA Start condition 100 kHz mode 4700 — — ns Only relevant for Repeated Start
Setup time 400 kHz mode 600 — — condition
1 MHz mode 260 — —
SP91* THD:STA Start condition 100 kHz mode 4000 — — ns After this period, the first clock
Hold time 400 kHz mode 600 — — pulse is generated
1 MHz 260 — —
SP92* TSU:STO Stop condition 100 kHz mode 4000 — — ns
Setup time 400 kHz mode 600 — —
1 MHz 260 — —
SP93 THD:STO Stop condition 100 kHz mode 4700 — — ns
Hold time 400 kHz mode 1300 — —
1 MHz 500 — —
FIGURE 44-19: I2C BUS DATA TIMING
SP103 SP100 SP102

SP101
SCL
SP90
SP106
SP107
SP91 SP92
SDA
In
SP110
SP109
SP109
SDA
Out

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-25: I2C BUS DATA REQUIREMENTS
Param.
Symbol Characteristic Min. Max. Units Conditions
No.
SP100* THIGH Clock high time 100 kHz mode 4000 — ns Device must operate at a
minimum of 1.5 MHz
400 kHz mode 600 — ns Device must operate at a
minimum of 10 MHz
1 MHz module 260 — ns Device must operate at a
minimum of 10 MHz
SP101* TLOW Clock low time 100 kHz mode 4700 — ns Device must operate at a
minimum of 1.5 MHz
400 kHz mode 1300 — ns Device must operate at a
minimum of 10 MHz
1 MHz module 500 — — Device must operate at a
minimum of 10 MHz
SP102* TR SDA and SCL rise 100 kHz mode — 1000 ns
time 400 kHz mode 20 300 ns CB is specified to be from
10-400 pF
1 MHz module — 120 ns
SP103* TF SDA and SCL fall time 100 kHz mode — 250 ns
400 kHz mode 20 X (VDD/ 250 ns CB is specified to be from
5.5V) 10-400 pF
1 MHz module 20 X (VDD/ 120 ns
5.5V)
SP106* THD:DAT Data input hold time 100 kHz mode 0 — ns
400 kHz mode 0 — ns
1 MHz module 0 — ns
(2)
SP107* TSU:DAT Data input setup time 100 kHz mode 250 — ns
400 kHz mode 100 — ns
SP109* TAA (1)
Output valid from 100 kHz mode — 3450 ns
clock 400 kHz mode — 900 ns
1 MHz module — 450 ns
SP110* TBUF Bus free time 100 kHz mode 4700 — ns Time the bus must be free
400 kHz mode 1300 — ns before a new transmission
can start
SP111 CB Bus capacitive loading — 400 pF
Note 1: As a transmitter, the device must provide this internal minimum delay time to bridge the undefined region (min. 300 ns)
of the falling edge of SCL to avoid unintended generation of Start or Stop conditions.
2: A Fast mode (400 kHz) I2C bus device can be used in a Standard mode (100 kHz) I2C bus system, but the requirement
TSU:DAT 250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the low period of
the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the low period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA
line TR max. + TSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard mode I2C bus specification), before the SCL
line is released.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
TABLE 44-26: TEMPERATURE INDICATOR REQUIREMENTS
Param
No.
TS01* TACQMIN Minimum ADC Acquisition Time Delay — 25 — µs
TS02* MV Voltage Sensitivity High Range — -3.684 — mV/°C TSRNG = 1
Low Range — -2.456 — mV/°C TSRNG = 0

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
45.0 DC AND AC
CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHS
AND CHARTS
The graphs and tables provided in this section are for design guidance and are not tested.
In some graphs or tables, the data presented are outside specified operating range (i.e., outside specified VDD
range). This is for information only and devices are ensured to operate properly only within the specified range.
Unless otherwise noted, all graphs apply to both the L and LF devices.
Note: The graphs and tables provided following this note are a statistical summary based on a limited number of
samples and are provided for informational purposes only. The performance characteristics listed herein
are not tested or guaranteed. In some graphs or tables, the data presented may be outside the specified
operating range (e.g., outside specified power supply range) and therefore, outside the warranted range.
“Typical” represents the mean of the distribution at 25C. “Maximum”, “Max.”, “Minimum” or “Min.”
represents (mean + 3) or (mean - 3) respectively, where  is a standard deviation, over each
temperature range.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1,000 800
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
Typical: 25°C Typical: 25°C
900
700
800 Max
600
700
Max
IDD (µA)
Typical
IDD (µA)
600 500
500 Typical
400
400
300
300
200
200
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-1: IDD, XT Oscillator, 4 MHz, FIGURE 45-4: IDD, XT Oscillator, 4 MHz,
PIC18LF26/45/46/55/56K42 Only. PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18F26/45/46/55/56K42 Only.
1,000 15.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
Typical: 25°C 14.0 Typical: 25°C
900 Max
13.0
12.0
800
Typical
11.0
IDD (µA)
IDD (mA)
700 10.0
Max
9.0
600
8.0
Typical
7.0
500
6.0
400 5.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-2: IDD, XT Oscillator, 4 MHz, FIGURE 45-5: IDD, HS+PLL Oscillator,
PIC18F26/45/46/55/56K42 Only. 64 MHz, PIC18LF26/45/46/55/56K42 Only.
700 15.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
14.0
600
13.0
Max
12.0
500
11.0
Max
IDD (µA)
IDD (mA)
Typical
400 10.0
9.0
Typical
300
8.0
7.0
200
6.0
100 5.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-3: IDD, XT Oscillator, 4 MHz, FIGURE 45-6: IDD, HS+PLL Oscillator,
PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18LF26/45/46/55/56K42 Only. 64 MHz, PIC18F26/45/46/55/56K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
10.0 16.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
9.0
14.0
Max
8.0 13.0
12.0
7.0
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
Max 11.0 Typical
6.0 10.0
9.0
5.0
Typical
8.0
4.0
7.0
6.0
3.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-7: IDD, HS+PLL Oscillator, FIGURE 45-10: IDD, HFINTOSC Mode,
64 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18LF26/45/46/55/ Fosc = 64 MHz, PIC18F26/45/46/55/56K42
56K42 Only. Only.
10.0 12.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
11.0
9.0
Max 10.0
8.0
9.0
7.0 8.0
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
Max
Typical
7.0
6.0
Typical
6.0
5.0
5.0
4.0
4.0
3.0 3.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (V)
64 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18F26/45/46/55/ Fosc = 64 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18LF26/45/
56K42 Only. 46/55/56K42 Only.
16.0 12.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
15.0 Typical: 25°C Typical: 25°C
11.0
14.0
10.0
13.0
Max
9.0
12.0
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
11.0 Max 8.0

Typical
10.0
7.0
9.0
Typical
6.0
8.0
5.0
7.0
6.0 4.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-9: IDD, HFINTOSC Mode, FIGURE 45-12: IDD, HFINTOSC Mode,
Fosc = 64 MHz, PIC18LF26/45/46/55/56K42 Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18F26/45/46/55/56K42
Only. Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
5.0 3.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
4.5 Max
2.5
4.0
Typical
3.5
2.0
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
3.0 Max
2.5 1.5
Typical
2.0
1.0
1.5
1.0 0.5
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18LF26/45/46/55/56K42 Fosc = 16 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18F26/45/46/
Only. 55/56K42 Only.
5.0 3.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
4.5
2.5
4.0
Max
3.5 2.0
IDD (mA) Max
IDD (mA)
3.0
Typical
1.5 Typical
2.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
1.0 0.5
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-14: IDD, HFINTOSC Mode, FIGURE 45-17: IDD, HFINTOSC Idle Mode,
Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18F26/45/46/55/56K42 Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18LF26/45/46/55/56K42
Only. Only.
3.0 3.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
2.5 2.5
Max
Max
2.0 2.0
Typical
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
1.5 Typical
1.5
1.0 1.0
0.5 0.5
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-15: IDD, HFINTOSC Mode, FIGURE 45-18: IDD, HFINTOSC Idle Mode,
Fosc = 16 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18LF26/45/ Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18F26/45/46/55/56K42
46/55/56K42 Only. Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1,000
6 Max: 85°C + 3ı
Max: 85°C + 3ı
Typical: 25°C
Typical: 25°C
Max
900
5
Max
800 Typical
4
IDD (µA)
IDD (mA)
700
3
600
2
Typical
500
1
400
0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-19: IDD, HFINTOSC Doze FIGURE 45-22: IDD, XT Oscillator 4 MHz,
Mode, Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18LF26/45/46/55/ PIC18F27/47/57K42 Only
56K42 Only.
6 700
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
5 Max 600
Max
4 500
IDD (mA)
IDD (µA)
Typical
3 400
2 300
Typical
1 200
0 100
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-20: IDD, HFINTOSC Doze FIGURE 45-23: IDD, XT Oscillator 4 MHz,
Mode, Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18F26/45/46/55/ PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18LF27/47/57K42 Only
56K42 Only.
1,000 800
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
Typical: 25°C Typical: 25°C Max
900
700
Typical
800
Max
600
700
IDD (µA)
IDD (µA)
600 Typical
500
500
400
400
300
300
200
200
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-21: IDD, XT Oscillator 4 MHz, FIGURE 45-24: IDD, XT Oscillator 4 MHz,
PIC18LF27/47/57K42 Only PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18F27/47/57K42 Only

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
18.0 15.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
16.0
13.0
12.0
14.0
11.0
Max
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
12.0 10.0
Max
9.0
10.0 Typical
8.0
Typical
7.0
8.0
6.0
6.0 5.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-25: IDD, HS+PLL Oscillator, FIGURE 45-28: IDD, HS+PLL Oscillator,
64 MHz, PIC18LF27/47/57K42 Only. 64 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18F27/47/57K42
Only.
18.0
18.0 Max: 85°C + 3ı
Max: 85°C + 3ı
17.0 Typical: 25°C
Typical: 25°C
16.0 16.0
Max 15.0
14.0
14.0
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
Typical 13.0
12.0
Max
12.0
10.0 11.0
Typical
10.0
8.0
9.0
8.0
6.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
64 MHz, PIC18F27/47/57K42 Only. FOSC = 64 MHz, PIC18LF27/47/57K42 Only.
12.0 16.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
11.0 15.0
Max
10.0 14.0
Typical
9.0 13.0
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
Max 12.0
8.0
7.0 11.0
6.0 Typical 10.0
9.0
5.0
8.0
4.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
64 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18LF27/47/57K42 FOSC = 64 MHz, PIC18F27/47/57K42 Only.
Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
12.0 5.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
11.0 4.5
Max
10.0 4.0
Max Typical
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
9.0 3.5
Typical
8.0 3.0
7.0 2.5
6.0 2.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
Fosc = 64 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, FOSC = 16 MHz, PIC18F27/47/57K42 Only.
PIC18LF27/47/57K42 Only.
12.0
4.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
11.0
3.5
Max
10.0
3.0
Typical
Max
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
9.0
2.5
Typical
8.0
2.0
7.0
1.5
6.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 1.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
Fosc = 64 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, Fosc = 16 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s,
PIC18F27/47/57K42 Only. PIC18LF27/47/57K42 Only.
5.0 4.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
4.5
3.5
4.0
Max
Max
3.5 3.0
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
Typical
3.0 Typical
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
FOSC = 16 MHz, PIC18LF27/47/57K42 Only. FOSC = 16 MHz, PMD’s All ‘1’s, PIC18F27/47/
57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
3.0 6
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
5
2.5
Max
4
2.0
IDD (mA)
IDD (mA)
Max
3
1.5 Typical
2
Typical
1.0
1
0.5 0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-37: IDD, HFINTOSC Idle Mode, FIGURE 45-40: IDD, HFINTOSC Doze
Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18LF27/47/57K42 Only. Mode, Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18F27/47/57K42
Only.
3.0 600
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
500
2.5 Max.
Max
400
Typical
2.0 IPD (nA)
IDD (mA)
300
1.5
200
1.0 100
Typical
0
0.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-38: IDD, HFINTOSC Idle Mode, FIGURE 45-41: IPD, Base, LP Sleep Mode,
Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18F27/47/57K42 Only. PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
6 2.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
5
1.6
Max 1.4
4
1.2
IPD (µA)
Max.
IDD (mA)
3 1.0
0.8 Typical
2 0.6
0.4
Typical
1
0.2
0.0
0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-39: IDD, HFINTOSC Doze FIGURE 45-42: IPD, Watchdog Timer
Mode, Fosc = 16 MHz, PIC18LF27/47/57K42 (WDT), PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Only. Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
2.0 12.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
1.8 11.5
1.6
11.0
1.4 Max.
10.5
IPD (µA)
1.2
IPD (µA)
Typical
1.0 10.0 Max.
0.8 9.5
Typical
0.6
9.0
0.4
8.5
0.2
0.0 8.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-43: IPD, Watchdog Timer FIGURE 45-46: IPD, Brown-Out Reset
(WDT), PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 (BOR), PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Only. Only.
60 14.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
55
13.0
50
12.0
IPD (µA)
45 Max.
IPD (µA)
40 11.0
Max.
35
10.0 Typical
Typical
30
9.0
25
20 8.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-44: IPD, Fixed Voltage FIGURE 45-47: IPD, Brown-Out Reset
Reference (FVR), PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/ (BOR), PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
56/57K42 Only. Only.
1
60 Max: 85°C + 3ı
Max: 85°C + 3ı Typical: 25°C
Typical: 25°C 0.9
55
0.8
50
0.7
Max.
45 0.6
IPD (µA)
0.5 Max.
40
IPD (µA)
0.4
35 Typical
0.3
30
0.2
Typical
25 0.1
0
20 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-45: IPD, Fixed Voltage FIGURE 45-48: IPD, Low-Power Brown-Out
Reference (FVR), PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ Reset (LPBOR), PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/
57K42 Only. 57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1.0 70
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
0.9 Typical: 25°C Typical: 25°C Max.
60
0.8
Max.
Typical
0.7 50
0.6
IPD (µA)
IPD (µA)
40
0.5
Typical 30
0.4
0.3 20
0.2
10
0.1
0.0 0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-49: IPD, Low-Power Brown-Out FIGURE 45-52: IPD Base, NP Sleep Mode,
Reset (LPBOR), PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
57K42 Only.
40 1000
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
38 Typical: 25°C Typical: 25°C
900
36 800
34 700
Max. Max.
32 600
IPD (nA)
IPD (µA)
30 500
28 400
Typical
26 300
Typical
24 200
22 100
20 0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-50: IPD, Comparator, FIGURE 45-53: IPD Base, LP Sleep Mode,
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only. PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only
36 14.0
Max: 85°C + 3ı Max: 85°C + 3ı
34
12.0
Max.
32
10.0 Max.
30
Typical
IPD (µA)
8.0
IPD (µA)
28
6.0
26 Typical
4.0
24
22 2.0
20 0.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-51: IPD, Comparator, FIGURE 45-54: IPD, High/Low Voltage

PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only. detect (HLVD), PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/
57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
14 5.0%
Max: 85°C + 3ı
Typical: 25°C
12
Max. 3.0%
10
Typical
1.0%
Error (%)
8
IPD (µA)
-1.0%
6
4 -3.0%
2
-5.0%
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
0 VDD (V)
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V) Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-55: IPD, High/Low Voltage FIGURE 45-58: Calibrated HFINTOSC,

detect (HLVD), PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ Typical Frequency Error, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/
57K42 Only. 47/55/56/57K42 only.
5.0 4.0%
Max: 85°C + 3ı
Typical: 25°C
3.0%
4.0
2.0%
1.0%
Error (%)
3.0
IPD (µA)
Max. 0.0%
-1.0%
2.0
-2.0%
-3.0%
1.0 Typical
-4.0%
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
0.0 VDD (V)
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-56: IPD, Secondary Oscillator FIGURE 45-59: Calibrated HFINTOSC,

(SOSC), PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Typical Frequency Error, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/
Only. 55/56/57K42 only.
5 2.5%
Max: 85°C + 3ı
Typical: 25°C 2.0%
4.5
1.5%
4
1.0%
3.5 Max. 0.5%
Error (%)
3 0.0%
IPD (µA)
2.5 -0.5%
-1.0%
2
-1.5%
1.5
Typical -2.0%
1 -2.5%
0.5 -3.0%
-50 0 50 100 150
0
Temperature (°C)
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V) Typical +3 Sigma -3 Sigma
FIGURE 45-57: IPD, Secondary Oscillator FIGURE 45-60: HFINTOSC Frequency

(SOSC), PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Error, VDD = 3.0V.
Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
5.0% 6.0%
4.0%
3.0%
2.0%
1.0%
Error (%)
Error (%)
0.0%
-1.0%
-2.0%
-3.0% -4.0%
-6.0%
-5.0%
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (V)
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C) Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-61: LFINTOSC Typical FIGURE 45-64: Low-Power Optimized

Frequency Error, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ HFINTOSC Typical Frequency Error,
57K42 Only. PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
4.0% 2.0%
3.0% 1.0%
0.0%
2.0%
-1.0%
1.0%
Error (%)
Error (%)
-2.0%
0.0%
-3.0%
-1.0%
-4.0%
-2.0%
-5.0%
-3.0%
-6.0%
-4.0% -7.0%
2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5 5.2 5.4 5.6 -50 0 50 100 150
VDD (V) Temperature (°C)
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C) Typical +3 Sigma -3 Sigma
FIGURE 45-62: LFINTOSC Typical FIGURE 45-65: Low-Power Optimized

Frequency Error, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ HFINTOSC Frequency Error, VDD = 3.0V.
57K42 Only.
350.0
6.0%
300.0
4.0%
Pull-Up Current (µA)
250.0
2.0%
200.0
Error (%)
0.0%
150.0
-2.0%
100.0
-4.0%
50.0
-6.0% 0.0
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C) Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) - ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-63: Low-Power Optimized FIGURE 45-66: Weak Pull-Up Current,

HFINTOSC Typical Frequency Error, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
200.0 3.5
Graph represents 3ı Limits
180.0
3.0
160.0
Pull-Up Current (µA)
140.0
2.5
120.0
2.0
VOH (V)
100.0
80.0
1.5
60.0 -40°C
40.0
1.0
Typical
20.0
0.5
0.0 125°C
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
0.0
VDD (V) -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) - ı-40°C to +125°C) IOH (mA)
FIGURE 45-67: Weak Pull-Up Current, FIGURE 45-70: VOH vs. IOH Over
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only. Temperature, VDD = 3.0V.
6 3.0
Graph represents 3ı Limits Graph represents 3ı Limits 125°C
5 2.5
-40°C
Typical
4 2.0
Typical
VOL (V)
VOH (V)
3 1.5
125°C
2 1.0
-40°C
1 0.5
0 0.0
-45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
IOH (mA) IOL (mA)
FIGURE 45-68: VOH vs. IOH Over FIGURE 45-71: VOL vs. IOL Over
Temperature, VDD = 5.5V, PIC18F26/27/45/46/ Temperature, VDD = 3.0V.
47/55/56/57K42 Only.
2.0
3 Graph represents 3ı Limits
1.8
1.6
1.4
2 -40°C
1.2
Typical
VOH (V)
VOL (V)
125°C
1.0
0.8
125°C
1 0.6
Typical
0.4
-40°C
0.2
0.0
0
-8 -7.5 -7 -6.5 -6 -5.5 -5 -4.5 -4 -3.5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
IOL (mA)
IOH (mA)
FIGURE 45-69: VOL vs. IOL Over FIGURE 45-72: VOH vs. IOH Over
Temperature, VDD = 5.5V, PIC18F26/27/45/46/ Temperature, VDD = 1.8V, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/
47/55/56/57K42 Only. 47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1.8 2.80
1.6
2.75
1.4
1.2
125°C Typical -40°C 2.70
Voltage (V)
VOL (V)
2.65
0.8
0.6
2.60
0.4
0.2 2.55
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Temperature (°C)
IOL (mA) +3 Sigma -3 Sigma Typical
FIGURE 45-73: VOL vs. IOL Over FIGURE 45-76: Brown-Out Reset Voltage,
Temperature, VDD = 1.8V, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/ Trip Point (BORV = 01).
47/55/56/57K42 Only
2.95 60.0
50.0
2.90
40.0
2.85
Voltage (V)
Voltage (mV)
30.0
2.80
20.0
2.75
10.0
2.70 0.0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature (°C) Temperature (°C)
+3 Sigma -3 Sigma Typical Typical +3 Sigma -3 Sigma
FIGURE 45-74: Brown-Out Reset Voltage, FIGURE 45-77: Brown-Out Reset

Trip Point (BORV = 00). Hysteresis, Trip Point (BORV = 01).
2.55
60.0
50.0
2.50
40.0
Voltage (V)
Voltage (mV)
2.45
30.0
20.0
2.40
10.0
2.35
0.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature (°C)
Temperature (°C)
+3 Sigma -3 Sigma Typical
Typical +3 Sigma -3 Sigma
FIGURE 45-78: Brown-Out Reset Voltage,

FIGURE 45-75: Brown-Out Reset,
Trip Point (BORV = 10).
Hysteresis, Trip Point (BORV = 00).

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
50.0 2.30
45.0
2.20
40.0
35.0 2.10
Voltage (V)
Voltage (mV)
30.0
2.00
25.0
20.0
1.90
15.0
1.80
10.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature (°C)
Temperature (°C)
Typical +3 Sigma -3 Sigma +3 Sigma Typical -3 Sigma
FIGURE 45-79: Brown-Out Reset FIGURE 45-82: LPBOR Reset Voltage.

Hysteresis, Trip Point (BORV = 10).
2.00
60
50
1.95
40
Voltage (V)
Voltage (mV)
1.90 30
20
1.85
10
1.80 0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature (°C)
Temperature (°C)
+3 Sigma -3 Sigma Typical

FIGURE 45-80: Brown-Out Reset Voltage, FIGURE 45-83: LPBOR Reset Hysteresis.
Trip Point (BORV = 11), PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/
55/56/57K42 Only.
50.0
45.0
40.0 HLVDSEL=0000
4.50
HLVDSEL=0001
35.0 HLVDSEL=0010
HLVDSEL=0011
30.0
Voltage (mV)
HLVDSEL=0100
HLVDSEL=0101
25.0
Voltage (V)
3.50 HLVDSEL=0110
HLVDSEL=0111
20.0
HLVDSEL=1000
HLVDSEL=1001
15.0
HLVDSEL=1010
10.0 2.50 HLVDSEL=1011

HLVDSEL=1100
5.0 HLVDSEL=1101
HLVDSEL=1110
0.0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
1.50
Temperature (°C) -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Typical +3 Sigma -3 Sigma Temperature (°C)
FIGURE 45-81: Brown-Out Reset FIGURE 45-84: High/Low-Voltage Detect Trip

Hysteresis, Trip Point (BORV = 11), Voltage.
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
50.0 5.0
45.0 4.5
40.0 4.0
35.0 3.5
30.0 3.0
Time (µs)
Voltage (mV)
25.0 2.5
20.0 2.0
15.0 1.5
10.0 1.0
5.0 0.5
0.0
0.0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7
Temperature (°C) VDD (V)
Typical +3 Sigma -3 Sigma Typical 25°C +3 Sigma 125°C
FIGURE 45-85: High/Low-Voltage Detect FIGURE 45-88: BOR Response Time,

Hysteresis. PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
6.0% 7
4.0% 6
5
2.0%
Time (µs)
Error (%)
4
0.0%
3
-2.0%
2
-4.0%
1
-6.0%
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 0
2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5 5.2 5.4 5.6
Temperature (°C)
VDD (V)
Typical ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C) Typical 25°C +3 Sigma 125°C
FIGURE 45-86: High/Low-Voltage Detect Trip FIGURE 45-89: BOR Response Time,
Voltage, Typical Error (HLVDSEL[3:0] = 0001). PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
6.0% 1.0
4.0%
2.0% 0.5
0.0%
DNL (LSb)
Error (%)
-2.0%
0.0
-4.0%
-6.0%
-0.5
-8.0%
-10.0%
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 -1.0
0 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584
Temperature (°C)
Output Code
Typical ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-90: ADC 12-bit Mode, Single-
FIGURE 45-87: High/Low-Voltage Detect Trip Ended DNL, VDD = 3.0V, VREF = 3.0V, TAD = 1 S,
Voltage, Typical Error (HLVDSEL[3:0] = 0000). CP OFF, 25°C.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1.0 2.0
1.0
1.5
1.0
0.5 0.5
0.5
DNL (LSb)
0.0
DNL (LSb)
INL (LSb)
-0.5
0.0 0.0
-1.0
-1.5
-0.5 -2.0
-0.5
0 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584 4096
Output Code
-1.0 -1.0
0 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584 0 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584
Output Code Output Code
FIGURE 45-91: ADC 12-bit Mode, Single- FIGURE 45-94: ADC 12-bit Mode, Single-
Ended DNL, VDD = 3.0V, VREF = 3.0V, TAD = 1 S, Ended INL, VDD = 3.0V, VREF = 3.0V, TAD = 1 S,
CP ON, 25°C. CP ON, 25°C.
1.0 2.0
1.0
1.5
1.0
0.5 0.5
0.5
DNL (LSb)
DNL (LSb)
0.0
INL (LSb)
-0.5
0.0 0.0
-1.0
-1.5
-0.5 -2.0
-0.5
0 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584 4096
Output Code
-1.0 -1.0
0 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584 0 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584
Output Code Output Code
Ended DNL, VDD = 2.3V, VREF = 2.3V, Ended INL, VDD = 2.3V, VREF = 2.3V, TAD = 1 S,
TAD = 1 S, CP ON, 25°C. CP ON, 25°C.
1
1.0
Max 85°C
0.5
0.5 Max 25°C
DNL(LSB)
INL (LSb)
Max -40°C
0
0.0 Min 85°C
Min 25°C
-0.5
-0.5 Min -40°C
-1.0 -1
0 512 1024 1536 2048 2560 3072 3584 1.8 2.3 2.5 3
VREF
Output Code
Ended INL, VDD = 3.0V, VREF = 3.0V, TAD = 1 S, Ended Typical DNL, VDD = 3.0V, TAD = 1 S,
CP OFF, 25°C. CP ON

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1 0.025
0.02
Max 85°C
0.015
0.5
Max 25°C 0.01
INL(LSB)
DNL (LSb)
Max -40°C 0.005
-40°C
0
25°C
Min 85°C 0
85°C
-0.005 125°C
Min 25°C
-0.5
-0.01
Min -40°C
-0.015
-1 -0.02
1.8 2.3 2.5 3 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
VREF Output Code
FIGURE 45-97: ADC 12-bit Mode, Single- FIGURE 45-100: Typical DAC DNL Error,
Ended Typical INL, VDD = 3.0V, TAD = 1 S, VDD = 3.0V, VREF = External 3.0V.
CP ON.
5.0
0.00
4.5
-0.05
4.0
-0.10
3.5
3.0 -0.15
Time (µs)
2.5
INL (LSb)
-0.20
-40°C
2.0 25°C
-0.25
1.5 85°C
-0.30 125°C
1.0
0.5 -0.35
0.0 -0.40
1.7 1.9 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7
VDD (V)
-0.45
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C) 0 14 28 42 56 70 84 98 112 126 140 154 168 182 196 210 224 238 252
Output Code
FIGURE 45-98: ADC RC Oscillator Period, FIGURE 45-101: Typical DAC INL Error,
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only. VDD = 3.0V, VREF = External 3.0V.
0.020
4.0
3.5 0.015
3.0 0.010
2.5
Time (µs)
DNL (LSb)
0.005
-40°C
2.0
25°C
0.000
1.5 85°C
125°C
1.0 -0.005
0.5
-0.010
0.0
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5 5.2 5.4 5.6 -0.015
VDD (V) 0 14 28 42 56 70 84 98 112126140154168182196210224238252
Output Code
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-99: ADC RC Oscillator Period, FIGURE 45-102: Typical DAC DNL Error,
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only. VDD = 5.0V, VREF = External 5.0V,
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
0.00 0.90
-2.1
-0.05
-2.3
0.88
INL (LSb)INL (LSb)

-0.10 -2.5 Vref = Int. Vdd
-2.7
0.86 Vref = Ext. 1.8V -40
-0.15
AbsoluteAbsolute
Vref = Ext. 2.0V 25
-2.9
INL (LSb)
-0.20 85
-40°C Vref = Ext. 3.0V
0.84 125
25°C -3.1
-0.25
85°C -3.3
-0.30 125°C 0.82
-3.5
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
-0.35
Temperature (°C)
0.80
-0.40
-0.45 0.78
0 14 28 42 56 70 84 98 112 126 140 154 168 182 196 210 224 238 252 -60.0 -40.0 -20.0 0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.0 140.0
Output Code Temperature (°C)
FIGURE 45-103: Typical DAC INL Error, FIGURE 45-106: Absolute Value of DAC INL
VDD = 5.0V, VREF = External 5.0V Error, VDD = 3.0V, VREF = VDD.
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
0.30
0.3
24
0.25
22 Vref = Int. Vdd
DNL (LSb)
Max. 0.26
0.2 Vref = Ext. 1.8V
20
Vref = Ext. 2.0V -40
DNL (LSb)
0.15
25
AbsoluteAbsolute
0.22
DNL (LSb)
Vref = Ext. 3.0V

18
85
0.1 Vref = Ext. 5.0V
Typical 125
16
0.05
0.18
14 0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Min. Max: Typical + 3ı (-40°C to 0.14 Temperature (°C)
12 +125°C)
Typical; statistical mean @ 25°C
Min: Typical - 3ı (-40°C to +125°C)
10
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 0.10
-60.0 -40.0 -20.0 0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.0 140.0
Output Code Temperature (°C)
FIGURE 45-104: DAC INL Error, FIGURE 45-107: Absolute Value of DAC DNL
VDD = 3.0V, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ Error, VDD = 5.0V, VREF = VDD, PIC18F26/27/45/
57K42 Only. 46/47/55/56/57K42 Only
0.4
0.45 0.9
-2.1
0.4
-2.3
0.35 Vref = Int. Vdd 0.88 Vref = Int. Vdd
INL (LSb)INL (LSb)
DNL (LSb)
0.3 Vref = Ext. 1.8V -2.5 Vref = Ext. 1.8V

0.3
Vref = Ext. 2.0V Vref = Ext. 2.0V -40
0.25 Vref = Int. Vdd -2.7
0.86
DNL (LSb)
Vref = Ext. 3.0V

AbsoluteAbsolute
Vref = Ext. 3.0V Vref = Ext. 1.8V 25

AbsoluteAbsolute
0.2
-2.9 Vref = Ext. 5.0V
Vref = Ext. 2.0V 85
0.15 0.84
0.2 Vref = Ext. 3.0V -3.1 125
0.1
-3.3
0.05
0.82
0 -3.5
0.1 -50 0 50 100 150 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
0.8
0.0 0.78
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 -60.0 -40.0 -20.0 0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.0 140.0
FIGURE 45-105: Absolute Value of DAC DNL FIGURE 45-108: Absolute Value of DAC INL
Error, VDD = 3.0V, VREF = VDD. Error, VDD = 5.0V, VREF = VDD, PIC18F26/27/45/
46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
45 50
43
45
41
39
40
Hysteresis (mV)
Hysteresis (mV)
37
35 35
33
30
31
29 25
27
25 20
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Common Mode Voltage (V) Common Mode Voltage (V)
-40°C 25°C 125°C 85°C -40°C 25°C 125°C 85°C
FIGURE 45-109: Comparator Hysteresis, FIGURE 45-112: Comparator Hysteresis,

NP Mode (CxSP = 1), VDD = 3.0V, Typical NP Mode (CxSP = 1), VDD = 5.5V, Typical
Measured Values. Measured Values,PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/
57K42 Only.
30 30
25 25
20 20
15 15
Hysteresis (mV)
Offset Voltage (mV)
10 10
MAX
MAX
5 5
0 0
-5 -5
MIN MIN
-10 -10
-15 -15
-20 -20
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Common Mode Voltage (V)

FIGURE 45-110: Comparator Offset, FIGURE 45-113: Comparator Offset,

NP Mode (CxSP = 1), VDD = 3.0V, Typical NP Mode (CxSP = 1), VDD = 5.0V, Typical
Measured Values at 25°C. Measured Values at 25°C, PIC18F26/27/45/46/
47/55/56/57K42 Only
40
30
25 30
20
Offset Voltage (mV)
20
15
Offset Voltage (mV)
10
MAX 10
MAX
5
0 0
-5
MIN MIN
-10
-10
-15
-20
-20 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
FIGURE 45-114: Comparator Offset,

FIGURE 45-111: Comparator Offset,
NP Mode (CxSP = 1), VDD = 5.5V, Typical
NP Mode (CxSP = 1), VDD = 3.0V, Typical
Measured Values from -40°C to 125°C,
Measured Values from -40°C to 125°C.
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
140 800
Max: Typical + 3ı (-40°C to +125°C) Max: Typical + 3ı (-40°C to +125°C)
Typical; statistical mean @ 25°C Typical; statistical mean @ 25°C
Min: Typical - 3ı (-40°C to +125°C) 700 Min: Typical - 3ı (-40°C to +125°C)
120
600
100
125°C 500
Time (ns)
Time (ns)
80
125°C
400
25°C
60
300
25°C
40
200
-40°C
20 100
-40°C
0 0
1.7 2.0 2.3 2.6 2.9 3.2 3.5 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.1 3.4 3.7 4 4.3 4.6 4.9 5.2 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-115: Comparator Response Time FIGURE 45-118: Comparator Output Filter
Over Voltage, NP Mode (CxSP = 1), Typical Delay Time Over Temp., NP Mode (CxSP = 1),
Measured Values, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ Typical Measured Values, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/
57K42 Only. 55/56/57K42 Only.
90 300
Max: Typical + 3ı (-40°C to +125°C)
80 Min: Typical - 3ı (-40°C to +125°C)
250
70
125°C
60 200
Time (ns)
Time (ns)
50
25°C 150
40
100
30
-40°C
20 50
10
0
0 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7
2.2 2.5 2.8 3.1 3.4 3.7 4.0 4.3 4.6 4.9 5.2 5.5 VDD (V)
VDD (V) Typical 25°C +3 Sigma 125°C
FIGURE 45-116: Comparator Response Time FIGURE 45-119: Comparator Response Time
Over Voltage, NP Mode (CxSP = 1), Typical Falling Edge, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/
Measured Values, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ 57K42 Only.
57K42 Only
1,400 250
Min: Typical - 3ı (-40°C to +125°C)
1,200
200
1,000
Time (ns)
150
Time (ns)
800
125°C
600
100
400 25°C
50
200
-40°C
0 0
1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
Typical 25°C +3 Sigma 125°C
FIGURE 45-117: Comparator Output Filter FIGURE 45-120: Comparator Response Time
Delay Time Over Temp., NP Mode (CxSP = 1), Falling Edge, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Typical Measured Values, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/ Only.
47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
700 70
600 60
500 50
40
Time (µs)
Time (ns)
400
300 30
200 20
100 10 Note:
The FVR Stabiliztion Period applies when coming out of
RESET or exiting sleep mode.
0 0
1.7 1.9 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (mV)
Typical 25°C +3 Sigma 125°C Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-121: Comparator Response Time FIGURE 45-124: FVR Stabilization Period,
Rising Edge, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
Only.
900
1.1%
800
1.0%
700
0.9%
600 0.8%
0.7%
Time (ns)
500
400 Error (%) 0.6%
0.5%
300
0.4%
200
0.3%
100 0.2%
0 0.1%
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6
0.0%
VDD (V) 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7
VDD (V)
Typical 25°C +3 Sigma 125°C
Typical -40°C Typical 25°C Typical 85°C Typical 125°C
FIGURE 45-122: Comparator Response Time FIGURE 45-125: Typical FVR Voltage 1x,
Rising Edge, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
Only.
1.2%
70
1.0%
60
0.8%
50
Error (%)
Time (µs)
0.6%
40
30 0.4%
20 0.2%
10 0.0%
1.6 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6
VDD (V) VDD (V)
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) Typical -40°C Typical 25°C Typical 85°C Typical 125°C
FIGURE 45-126: FVR Voltage Error 1x,

FIGURE 45-123: Band Gap Ready Time,
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1.0% 4
3.5
0.8%
3
0.6%
2.5
Voltage (V)
Error (%)
0.4%
2
0.2% 1.5
0.0% 1
0.5
-0.2%
0
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
-0.4%
2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
Typical -40°C Typical 25°C Typical 85°C Typical 125°C Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-127: FVR Voltage Error 2x, FIGURE 45-130: Schmitt Trigger High Values.
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
1.0%
2.5
0.8%
2
0.6%
Voltage (V)
1.5
Error (%)
0.4%
1
0.2%
0.5
0.0%
-0.2% 0
2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
Typical -40°C Typical 25°C Typical 85°C Typical 125°C Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)

FIGURE 45-131: Schmitt Trigger Low Values.
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
p
1.8
1.0%
1.6
0.8% 1.4
Voltage (V)
1.2
0.6%
1
Error (%)
0.4% 0.8
0.6
0.2%
0.4
0.0% 0.2
0
-0.2% 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VDD (V)
-0.4%
4.7 4.8 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)
VDD (V)
FIGURE 45-132: Input Level TTL.

Typical -40°C Typical 25°C Typical 85°C Typical 125°C

PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
50 20
45 18
40 16
35 14
30 12
Time (ns)
Time (ns)
25 10
20 8
15 6
10 4
5 2
0 0
1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5
VDD (V) VDD (V)
Typical 25°C +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) Typical 25°C +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C)
FIGURE 45-133: Rise Time, Slew Rate FIGURE 45-136: Fall Time, Slew Rate Control
Control Enabled. Disabled.
60 4.00%
50 3.00% Min: Typical - 3ı (-40°C to +125°C)
2.00%
40
Time (ns)
1.00%
30
Error (%)
Max
0.00%
Min
20
-1.00% Average
10
-2.00%
0
-3.00%
1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5
VDD (V)
-4.00%
-32 -24 -16 -8 0 8 16 24 32
Min Center Max
Typical 25°C +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) OSCTUNE Setting
FIGURE 45-134: Fall Time, Slew Rate Control FIGURE 45-137: OSCTUNE Center
Enabled. Frequency, PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Only.
30 1.6
1.55
25
1.5 +3 Sigma
20 1.45
Time (ns)
Typical
Voltage (V)
1.4
15
1.35
10 1.3 -3 Sigma
1.25
5
1.2
0
1.15
1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5
VDD (V) 1.1
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Typical 25°C +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) Temperature (°C)
FIGURE 45-135: Rise Time, Slew Rate FIGURE 45-138: POR Release Voltage.
Control Disabled.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Title POR REARM VOLTAGE, NORMAL POWER MODE
18
1.8
1.75
17
1.6 Max: Typical + 3ı
Typical: 25°C
1.4 Min: Typical - 3ı
16
1.2
1.7
Time (µs)
(V) (V)
1
15
Voltage
+3 Sigma
0.8
Voltage
0.6
1.65 14
Typical
0.4
0.2 -3 Sigma 13
0
1.6
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
12
Temperature (°C) 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V)
1.55 Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C)
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
FIGURE 45-139: POR Rearm Voltage, NP FIGURE 45-142: Wake from Sleep,
Mode, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only. VREGPM = 0, HFINTOSC = 4 MHz,
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
120
74.0 110
72.0 100
90
70.0
80
Time (µs)
Time (ms)
68.0 70
60
66.0
50
64.0
40
62.0 30
20
60.0
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) - ı-40°C to +125°C) Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-140: PWRT Period, PIC18F26/27/ FIGURE 45-143: Wake from Sleep,
45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only. VREGPM = 1, HFINTOSC = 4 MHz,
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
28
75.0
27
73.0
26
71.0
25
69.0
Time (µs)
Time (ms)
67.0 24
65.0 23
63.0
22
61.0
21
59.0
20
57.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V)
VDD (V)
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C)
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) - ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-144: Wake from Sleep,

FIGURE 45-141: PWRT Period, PIC18LF26/ VREGPM = 0, HFINTOSC = 16 MHz,
27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only. PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
120 4.2
110
100 4.1
90
Time (µs)
Time (ms)
80 4.0
70
60 3.9
50
40 3.8
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
VDD (V) VDD (V)
Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-145: Wake from Sleep, FIGURE 45-148: WDT Time-Out Period,
VREGPM = 1, HFINTOSC = 16 MHz, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
700
4.2
650
600 4.1
550
Time (µs)
Time (ms)
500 4.0
450
400 3.9
350
300 3.8
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
VDD (V) VDD (V)

Typical 25°C ı-40°C to +125°C) -ı-40°C to +125°C)
FIGURE 45-146: Wake from Sleep, FIGURE 45-149: WDT Time-Out Period,
VREGPM = 1, PIC18F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/ PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
57K42 Only.
700
-3.450
650
-3.500
600
-3.550
550
-3.600
Time (µs)
Slope (mV/C)
500 -3.650
450 -3.700
-3.750
400
-3.800
350
-3.850
300
-3.900
1.7 2.2 2.7 3.2 3.7
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
VDD (V)
Temperature (oC)
FIGURE 45-147: Wake from Sleep,

FIGURE 45-150: High Range Temperature
PIC18LF26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42 Only.
Indicator Voltage Sensitivity Across
Temperature.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
-2.300
-2.350
-2.400
Slope (mV/C)
-2.450
-2.500
-2.550
-2.600
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature (oC)
FIGURE 45-151: Low Range Temperature

Indicator Voltage Sensitivity Across Temperature
20
15
10
5
Error (°C)
0
-40
-34
-28
-22
-16
-10
-4
2
8
14
20
26
32
38
44
50
56
62
68
74
80
86
92
98
104
110
116
122
128
134
140
146
-5
-10
-15
-20
Temperature (°C)
FIGURE 45-152: Temperature Indicator

Performance Over Temperature

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
46.0 PACKAGING INFORMATION
Package Marking Information
28-Lead SPDIP (.300”) Example
PIC18F26K42
/SP e3
1526017
28-Lead SOIC (7.50 mm) Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PIC18F26K42
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX /SO e3
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN 1526017
28-Lead SSOP (5.30 mm) Example
PIC18F26K42
/SS e3
1526017
Legend: XX...X Customer-specific information or Microchip part number

Y Year code (last digit of calendar year)
YY Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year)
WW Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’)
NNN Alphanumeric traceability code
e3 Pb-free JEDEC® designator for Matte Tin (Sn)
* This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 )
can be found on the outer packaging for this package.
Note: In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will
be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available
characters for customer-specific information.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Package Marking Information (Continued)
28-Lead QFN (6x6 mm) Example
PIN 1 PIN 1
XXXXXXXX 18F26K42
XXXXXXXX /ML e3
YYWWNNN 1526017
28-Lead UQFN (6x6x0.5 mm) Example
PIN 1 PIN 1 PIC18

F26K42
/MX e 3
526017
40-Lead PDIP (600 mil) Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PIC18F45K42
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX /P e3
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN 1526017


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
PIN 1 PIN 1
PIC18
F45K42
/MV e 3
1526017
44-Lead QFN (8x8x0.9 mm) Example
PIN 1 PIN 1
XXXXXXXXXXX
18F45K42
XXXXXXXXXXX /ML e3
XXXXXXXXXXX 1526017
YYWWNNN
44-Lead TQFP (10x10x1 mm) Example
XXXXXXXXXX 18F45K42
XXXXXXXXXX /PT e3
XXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN 1526017


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
PIN 1 PIN 1
XXXXXXXX 18F56K42
XXXXXXXX /MV e3
1526017
YYWWNNN
48-Lead TQFP (7x7x1 mm) Example
XXXXXXXXXX 18F56K42
XXXXXXXXXX /PT e3
XXXXXXXXXX 1526017
YYWWNNN


PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
46.1 Package Details
The following sections give the technical details of the packages.

!" 5
()#( $
( 6%
,#* ##(
! 6 ' ( (%(
(( 477,,,)
)7 6
NOTE 1
E1
1 2 3
A A2
L c
A1 b1
b e eB
8(# 9.:0
)#;)(# 9 9< =
9$)+
'!# 9 >
!( 3.
((! ? ?
%%! 6 6## /
3#((! ? ?
$%
($%
@%( 0 / //
%%! 6@%( 0 >
<"
;( / /A
((! ; /
;% 6## >
8
;%@%( +
;,
;%@%( + >
<"
, - 3 ? ? /
!"
!"#$%&'($
)"
*+$()$#(+ (%,((( %

-' (.
(
#(
/ )##%0%( $%)%'#

(
$##%'#

(
$###(& %1
#%
)#%(

02
3.4 3# )#
( & ("$#,,($((
#

, .3

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at
http://www.microchip.com/packaging

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

#$
%
&'
%
!" 5
()#( $
( 6%
,#* ##(
! 6 ' ( (%(
(( 477,,,)
)7 6
D
N
E
E1
1 2
b
NOTE 1
e
c
A A2
φ
A1
L1 L
8(# ;;00
)#;)(# 9 9< =
9$)+
'!# 9 >
!( A3.
<"
:( ? ?
%%! 6 6## A >
(%'' ? ?
<"
@%( 0 > >
%%! 6@%( 0 / A
<"
;(
5(;( ;
5(
( ; 05
;% 6## ?
5( B B >B
;%@%( + ? />
!"
!"#$%&'($
)"
*+$()$#(+ (%,((( %

)##%0%( $%)%'#

(
$##%'#

(
$###(& %))
#%
/ )#%(

02
3.4 3# )#
( & ("$#,,($((
#
054 '
)#*$#$,($((
*'
'
)( $
##

, ./3

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
( )* ! + , -.- ()!
/# '&& 0 +#
!" 5
()#( $
( 6%
,#* ##(
! 6 ' ( (%(
(( 477,,,)
)7 6

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
28-Lead Plastic Quad Flat, No Lead Package (MX) - 6x6x0.5mm Body [UQFN]
Ultra-Thin with 0.40 x 0.60 mm Terminal Width/Length and Corner Anchors
D A
B
N
NOTE 1
1
2
(DATUM A)
E
(DATUM B)
2X
0.15 C
2X
0.15 C
TOP VIEW
A
C 0.10 C
SEATING
PLANE
(A3) A1
NOTE 4
0.08 C
SIDE VIEW
4x b1
4x b2
0.10 C A B
D2 4x b1
0.10 C A B
4x b2
E2
K
2
1
N
L b 0.10 C A B
NOTE 4
e 0.05 C
BOTTOM VIEW
Microchip Technology Drawing C04-0209 Rev C Sheet 1 of 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
28-Lead Plastic Quad Flat, No Lead Package (MX) - 6x6x0.5mm Body [UQFN]
Ultra-Thin with 0.40 x 0.60 mm Terminal Width/Length and Corner Anchors
Units MILLIMETERS
Dimension Limits MIN NOM MAX
Number of Pins N 28
Pitch e 0.65 BSC
Overall Height A 0.40 0.50 0.60
Standoff A1 0.00 0.02 0.05
Terminal Thickness (A3) 0.127 REF
Overall Width E 6.00 BSC
Exposed Pad Width E2 4.00
Overall Length D 6.00 BSC
Exposed Pad Length D2 4.00
Terminal Width b 0.35 0.40 0.45
Corner Pad b1 0.55 0.60 0.65
Corner Pad, Metal Free Zone b2 0.15 0.20 0.25
Terminal Length L 0.55 0.60 0.65
Terminal-to-Exposed Pad K 0.20 - -
Notes:
1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area.
2. Package is saw singulated
3. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ASME Y14.5M
BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances.
REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only.
4. Outermost portions of corner structures may vary slightly.
Microchip Technology Drawing C04-0209 Rev C Sheet 2 of 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
28-Lead Plastic Quad Flat, No Lead Package (MX) - 6x6 mm Body [UQFN]
With 0.60mm Contact Length And Corner Anchors
C1
X2
W1
Y2
E
G
C2 T2
Y1
X1
SILK SCREEN
RECOMMENDED LAND PATTERN
Units MILLIMETERS
Contact Pitch E 0.65 BSC
Optional Center Pad Width W1 4.05
Optional Center Pad Length T2 4.05
Contact Pad Spacing C1 5.70
Contact Pad Width (X28) X1 0.45
Contact Pad Length (X28) Y1 1.00
Corner Pad Width (X4) X2 0.90
Corner Pad Length (X4) Y2 0.90
Distance Between Pads G 0.20
Notes:
Microchip Technology Drawing No. C04-2209B

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
1 -

!" 5
()#( $
( 6%
,#* ##(
! 6 ' ( (%(
(( 477,,,)
)7 6
NOTE 1
E1
1 2 3
A A2
L c
b1
A1
b e eB
8(# 9.:0
)#;)(# 9 9< =
9$)+
'!# 9
!( 3.
((! ? ?
%%! 6 6## ?
3#((! ? ?
$%
($%
@%( 0 ? A
%%! 6@%( 0 > ? >
<"
;( > ?
((! ; ?
;% 6## > ?
8
;%@%( + / ?
;,
;%@%( + ? /
<"
, - 3 ? ?
!"
!"#$%&'($
)"
*+$()$#(+ (%,((( %

-' (.
(
#(
/ )##%0%( $%)%'#

(
$##%'#

(
$###(& %1
#%
)#%(

02
3.4 3# )#
( & ("$#,,($((
#

, .A3

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
44-Lead Plastic Quad Flat, No Lead Package (ML) - 8x8 mm Body [QFN or VQFN]
D A B
N
NOTE 1
1
2
E
(DATUM B)
(DATUM A)
2X
0.20 C
2X
0.20 C TOP VIEW
0.10 C A1
C
SEATING A
PLANE 44X
A3 0.08 C
SIDE VIEW
L
0.10 C A B
D2
0.10 C A B
E2
K
2
1
NOTE 1 N
44X b
e 0.07 C A B
0.05 C
BOTTOM VIEW
Microchip Technology Drawing C04-103D Sheet 1 of 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
Units MILLIMETERS
Number of Pins N 44
Pitch e 0.65 BSC
Overall Height A 0.80 0.90 1.00
Standoff A1 0.00 0.02 0.05
Terminal Thickness A3 0.20 REF
Exposed Pad Width E2 6.25 6.45 6.60
Exposed Pad Length D2 6.25 6.45 6.60
Terminal Width b 0.20 0.30 0.35
Terminal Length L 0.30 0.40 0.50
Terminal-to-Exposed-Pad K 0.20 - -
Notes:
2. Package is saw singulated
Microchip Technology Drawing C04-103D Sheet 2 of 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
C1
X2
EV
44
G2
1
2
ØV
EV
C2 Y2
G1
Y1
E SILK SCREEN
X1

Units MILLIMETERS
Optional Center Pad Width X2 6.60
Optional Center Pad Length Y2 6.60
Contact Pad to Contact Pad (X40) G1 0.30
Contact Pad to Center Pad (X44) G2 0.28
Thermal Via Diameter V 0.33
Thermal Via Pitch EV 1.20
Notes:
2. For best soldering results, thermal vias, if used, should be filled or tented to avoid solder loss during
reflow process
Microchip Technology Drawing No. C04-2103C

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
44-Lead Plastic Thin Quad Flatpack (PT) - 10x10x1.0 mm Body [TQFP]
D A
D1 B
NOTE 2
(DATUM A)
(DATUM B)
E1 E
NOTE 1 A A
2X
N
0.20 H A B
2X 1 2 3
0.20 H A B 4X 11 TIPS
TOP VIEW
0.20 C A B
A A2
C
SEATING PLANE
0.10 C A1
SIDE VIEW
1 2 3
NOTE 1
44 X b
e 0.20 C A B
BOTTOM VIEW
Microchip Technology Drawing C04-076C Sheet 1 of 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
44-Lead Plastic Thin Quad Flatpack (PT) - 10x10x1.0 mm Body [TQFP]
L θ
(L1)
SECTION A-A
Units MILLIMETERS
Number of Leads N 44
Lead Pitch e 0.80 BSC
Overall Height A - - 1.20
Standoff A1 0.05 - 0.15
Molded Package Thickness A2 0.95 1.00 1.05
Molded Package Width E1 10.00 BSC
Molded Package Length D1 10.00 BSC
Lead Width b 0.30 0.37 0.45
Lead Thickness c 0.09 - 0.20
Lead Length L 0.45 0.60 0.75
Footprint L1 1.00 REF
Foot Angle θ 0° 3.5° 7°
Notes:
2. Exact shape of each corner is optional.
Microchip Technology Drawing C04-076C Sheet 2 of 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
44-Lead Plastic Thin Quad Flatpack (PT) - 10X10X1 mm Body, 2.00 mm Footprint [TQFP]
C1
44
1
2
G
C2
Y1
X1 E
SILK SCREEN
Units MILLIMETERS
Notes:
Microchip Technology Drawing No. C04-2076B

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
48-Lead Thin Quad Flatpack (Y8) - 7x7x1.0 mm Body [TQFP]
48X TIPS
0.20 C A-B D
D
D1
D1
2
A B
E1 E
E1
A A 2
E1
4 N
NOTE 1 1 2 4X
D1 0.20 H A-B D
4
48x b
e 0.08 C A-B D
TOP VIEW
0.10 C H
C A2
A
SEATING
PLANE 0.08 C
A1 SIDE VIEW
Microchip Technology Drawing C04-300-Y8 Rev A Sheet 1 of 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
E T
L
(L1)
SECTION A-A
Units MILLIMETERS
Number of Leads N 48
Lead Pitch e 0.50 BSC
Overall Height A - - 1.20
Standoff A1 0.05 - 0.15
Molded Package Thickness A2 0.95 1.00 1.05
Foot Length L 0.45 0.60 0.75
Footprint L1 1.00 REF
Foot Angle I 0° 3.5° 7°
Molded Package Width E1 7.00 BSC
Molded Package Length D1 7.00 BSC
Lead Thickness c 0.09 - 0.16
Lead Width b 0.17 0.22 0.27
Mold Draft Angle Top D 11° 12° 13°
Mold Draft Angle Bottom E 11° 12° 13°
Notes:
2. Chamfers at corners are optional; size may vary.
3. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or
protrusions shall not exceed 0.25mm per side.
5. Datums A-B and D to be determined at center line between leads where leads exit
plastic body at datum plane H
Microchip Technology Drawing C04-300-Y8 Rev A Sheet 2 of 2

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
C1
C2 G
SILK SCREEN
48
Y1
1 2
X1
E
Units MILLIMETERS
Notes:
2. For best soldering results, thermal vias, if used, should be filled or tented to avoid solder loss during
reflow process
Microchip Technology Drawing C04-2300-Y8 Rev A

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
APPENDIX A: REVISION HISTORY
Revision E (5/2019)
Removed Preliminary from page 744.
Updated Figures 45-20 and 45-21 and Table 44-3,
Added Figures 45-21 though 45-40 to Characterization
Data chapter.
Revision D (4/2019)
Updated Examples 13-3, 13-4 and 15-1; Figures 3-1,
3-2, 3-11, 3-18, 3-19, 3-20, 30-1, 30-3, 33-5, 33-6,
33-7, 33-8, 33-9, 33-10, 33-21, 33-22, 36-1, and 44-6:
Registers 33-1, 33-2, 33-3, 33-6, 33-7, 33-8, 33-10,
33-11, 33-12, 33-13, 33-14, 33-15, 33-17, 33-21, 36-2,
36-3, 36-5, 36-7,36-22, 36-23, 36-27, 36-31, 36-32,
35-33,36-34, and 36-35; Sections 4.5.6, 7.1, 7.2.1.2,
7.2.1.3, 7.2.2, 7.2.2.3, 7.2.2.4, 11.0, 15.6.1, 15.6.2,
16.2.6, 17.2, 17.5, 23.1.2, 24.2, 27.0, 27.1.1, 33.1,
33.2, 33.3.7, 33.3.8, 33.3.9, 33.3.10.1, 33.3.10.2,
33.3.10.3, 33.3.12, 33.3.12.1, 33.3.12.2, 33.3.13,
33.4.2, 33.4.3, 33.4.3.1, 33.4.3.2, 33.4.3.3, 33.4.3.4,
33.4.3.5, 33.5, 33.5.1.1, 33.5.1.2, 33.5.9, 33.5.10,
33.5.11, 33.5.12, 33.6, 36.1.4, 36.1.5, 36.1.6, 36.2.2,
36.2.3, 36.2.4,36.5.4, 36.6, 36.6.1, 36.6.2, 36.6.3,
36.6.4, 36.6.5, 36.6.6, 36.6.7, 36.6.8, 36.6.9, 39.8,
41.1, 41.1.1, 41.2, and 41.2.5; Tables 7-1, 15-2, 33-1,
36-1, 36-2, 36-4, 36-5, 36-6, 33-18, 41-1, 41-2, 41-3,
44-2, 44-3, 44-4, 44-9, 44-11, 44-12, 44-13, 44-15 and
44-16.
Removed Table 44-5.
Revision C (9/2018)
Added Figure 3-2.
Updated Examples 9-3 and 13-2; Figures 15-2, 36-6,
45-1, 45-2, and 45-3; Registers 17-1, 25-3, 31-4, 31-5,
32-9, 34-1, and 36-5; Sections 4.5.6, 7.2.1.2, 9.1, 15.9,
15.12, 25.6.8, 31.6, 31.6.1, 31.6.2, 31.13.2, 32.2,
32.3.1, 32.3.2, 32.3.5, 32.4, 32.4.1, 32.4.2, 32.5.1,
32.5.2, 32.8.3.1, 32.8.3.2, and 36.6.1; and Tables 4-3,
5-1, 17-3, 22-1, 36-6, 42-1, 44-1, 44-2, 44-4, 44-5 and
44-9.
Updated Instruction Set: LFSR. Updated 48-pin TQFP
Packaging information from (PT) to (Y8).
Revision B (12/2017)
Standard operating conditions updated in Section 44.0,
Electrical Specifications. Other minor corrections.
Revision A (6/2017)
Initial release of the document.

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
THE MICROCHIP WEBSITE CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at Users of Microchip products can receive assistance
www.microchip.com. This website is used as a means through several channels:
to make files and information easily available to • Distributor or Representative
customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet
• Local Sales Office
browser, the website contains the following information:
• Field Application Engineer (FAE)
• Product Support – Data sheets and errata,
• Technical Support
application notes and sample programs, design
resources, user’s guides and hardware support Customers should contact their distributor,
documents, latest software releases and archived representative or Field Application Engineer (FAE) for
software support. Local sales offices are also available to help
• General Technical Support – Frequently Asked customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is
Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, included in the back of this document.
online discussion groups, Microchip consultant Technical support is available through the website
program member listing at: http://microchip.com/support
• Business of Microchip – Product selector and
ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases,
listing of seminars and events, listings of
Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory
representatives
CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION

SERVICE
Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep
customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers
will receive e-mail notification whenever there are
changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a
specified product family or development tool of interest.
To register, access the Microchip website at
www.microchip.com. Under “Support”, click on
“Customer Change Notification” and follow the
registration instructions.
 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc. DS40001919D-page 830

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office.
PART NO. [X](2) - X /XX XXX

Examples:
Device Tape and Reel Temperature Package Pattern a) PIC18F26K42-E/P 301 = Extended temp.,
Option Range PDIP package, QTP pattern #301.
b) PIC18F45K42-E/SO = Extended temp., SOIC
package.
c) PIC18F46K42T-I/ML = Tape and reel, Industrial
Device: PIC18F26K42,
temp., QFN package.
PIC18LF26K42,
PIC18F27K42, PIC18LF27K42
PIC18F45K42,
PIC18LF45K42
Note 1: Tape and Reel option is available for ML,

Tape and Reel Blank = standard packaging (tube or tray) MV, PT, SO and SS packages with industrial
Option: T = Tape and Reel(1), (2) Temperature Range only.
2: Tape and Reel identifier only appears in
catalog part number description. This
Temperature E = -40C to +125C (Extended) identifier is used for ordering purposes and
Range: I = -40C to +85C (Industrial) is not printed on the device package.
Package: ML = 28-lead QFN 6x6mm

ML = 44-lead QFN 8x8x0.9mm
MX = 28-lead UQFN 6x6x0.5mm
MV = 40-lead UQFN 5x5x0.5mm
MV = 48-lead UQFN
P = 40-lead PDIP
PT = 48-lead TQFP
SO = 28-lead SOIC
SP = 28-lead Skinny Plastic DIP
SS = 28-lead SSOP
Y8 = 44-lead TQFP 7x7x1.0mm (Thin Quad Flatpack)
Pattern: QTP, SQTP, Code or Special Requirements

(blank otherwise)

Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices:
• Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet.
• Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the
intended manner and under normal conditions.
• There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our
knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data
Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property.
• Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code.
• Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not
mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”
Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our
products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts
allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act.
Information contained in this publication regarding device Trademarks

applications and the like is provided only for your convenience The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, AnyRate, AVR,
and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to AVR logo, AVR Freaks, BitCloud, chipKIT, chipKIT logo,
ensure that your application meets with your specifications. CryptoMemory, CryptoRF, dsPIC, FlashFlex, flexPWR, Heldo,
MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR JukeBlox, KeeLoq, Kleer, LANCheck, LINK MD, maXStylus,
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR maXTouch, MediaLB, megaAVR, MOST, MOST logo, MPLAB,
IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OptoLyzer, PIC, picoPower, PICSTART, PIC32 logo, Prochip
OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, Designer, QTouch, SAM-BA, SpyNIC, SST, SST Logo,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, SuperFlash, tinyAVR, UNI/O, and XMEGA are registered
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A.
FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability and other countries.
arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip ClockWorks, The Embedded Control Solutions Company,
devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at EtherSynch, Hyper Speed Control, HyperLight Load, IntelliMOS,
the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and mTouch, Precision Edge, and Quiet-Wire are registered
hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A.
suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are Adjacent Key Suppression, AKS, Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Any
conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip Capacitor, AnyIn, AnyOut, BodyCom, CodeGuard,
intellectual property rights unless otherwise stated. CryptoAuthentication, CryptoAutomotive, CryptoCompanion,
CryptoController, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, Dynamic Average
Matching, DAM, ECAN, EtherGREEN, In-Circuit Serial
Programming, ICSP, INICnet, Inter-Chip Connectivity,
JitterBlocker, KleerNet, KleerNet logo, memBrain, Mindi, MiWi,
motorBench, MPASM, MPF, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB,
MPLINK, MultiTRAK, NetDetach, Omniscient Code Generation,
PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, PowerSmart, PureSilicon,
QMatrix, REAL ICE, Ripple Blocker, SAM-ICE, Serial Quad I/O,
SMART-I.S., SQI, SuperSwitcher, SuperSwitcher II, Total
Endurance, TSHARC, USBCheck, VariSense, ViewSpan,
WiperLock, Wireless DNA, and ZENA are trademarks of
Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2009 certification for its worldwide SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in
headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and the U.S.A.
Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California
and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures Silicon Storage Technology is a registered trademark of Microchip
are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping Technology Inc. in other countries.
devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and
GestIC is a registered trademark of Microchip Technology
analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design
and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. Germany II GmbH & Co. KG, a subsidiary of Microchip
Technology Inc., in other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM respective companies.
© 2019, Microchip Technology Incorporated, All Rights Reserved.
CERTIFIED BY DNV ISBN: 978-1-5224-4572-2
== ISO/TS 16949 ==

Worldwide Sales and Service
AMERICAS ASIA/PACIFIC ASIA/PACIFIC EUROPE
Corporate Office Australia - Sydney India - Bangalore Austria - Wels
2355 West Chandler Blvd. Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Tel: 91-80-3090-4444 Tel: 43-7242-2244-39
Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 China - Beijing India - New Delhi Fax: 43-7242-2244-393
Tel: 480-792-7200 Tel: 86-10-8569-7000 Tel: 91-11-4160-8631 Denmark - Copenhagen
Fax: 480-792-7277 Tel: 45-4450-2828
China - Chengdu India - Pune
Technical Support: Fax: 45-4485-2829
Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 Tel: 91-20-4121-0141
http://www.microchip.com/
China - Chongqing Japan - Osaka Finland - Espoo
support
Tel: 86-23-8980-9588 Tel: 81-6-6152-7160 Tel: 358-9-4520-820
Web Address:
www.microchip.com China - Dongguan Japan - Tokyo France - Paris
Tel: 86-769-8702-9880 Tel: 81-3-6880- 3770 Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20
Atlanta Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79
Duluth, GA China - Guangzhou Korea - Daegu
Tel: 678-957-9614 Tel: 86-20-8755-8029 Tel: 82-53-744-4301 Germany - Garching
Tel: 49-8931-9700
Fax: 678-957-1455 China - Hangzhou Korea - Seoul
Austin, TX Tel: 86-571-8792-8115 Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Germany - Haan
Tel: 512-257-3370 Tel: 49-2129-3766400
China - Hong Kong SAR Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur
Tel: 852-2943-5100 Tel: 60-3-7651-7906 Germany - Heilbronn
Boston
Tel: 49-7131-72400
Westborough, MA China - Nanjing Malaysia - Penang
Tel: 774-760-0087 Tel: 86-25-8473-2460 Tel: 60-4-227-8870 Germany - Karlsruhe
Fax: 774-760-0088 Tel: 49-721-625370
China - Qingdao Philippines - Manila
Chicago Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Germany - Munich
Itasca, IL Tel: 49-89-627-144-0
China - Shanghai Singapore
Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44
Tel: 86-21-3326-8000 Tel: 65-6334-8870
Fax: 630-285-0075 Germany - Rosenheim
China - Shenyang Taiwan - Hsin Chu
Dallas Tel: 49-8031-354-560
Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Tel: 886-3-577-8366
Addison, TX Israel - Ra’anana
China - Shenzhen Taiwan - Kaohsiung
Tel: 972-818-7423 Tel: 86-755-8864-2200 Tel: 886-7-213-7830 Tel: 972-9-744-7705
Fax: 972-818-2924 Italy - Milan
China - Suzhou Taiwan - Taipei
Detroit Tel: 39-0331-742611
Tel: 86-186-6233-1526 Tel: 886-2-2508-8600
Novi, MI Fax: 39-0331-466781
Tel: 248-848-4000 China - Wuhan Thailand - Bangkok
Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Italy - Padova
Houston, TX Tel: 39-049-7625286
Tel: 281-894-5983 China - Xian Vietnam - Ho Chi Minh
Tel: 86-29-8833-7252 Tel: 84-28-5448-2100 Netherlands - Drunen
Indianapolis Tel: 31-416-690399
Noblesville, IN China - Xiamen Fax: 31-416-690340
Tel: 86-592-2388138
Tel: 317-773-8323 Norway - Trondheim
Fax: 317-773-5453 China - Zhuhai Tel: 47-7288-4388
Tel: 317-536-2380 Tel: 86-756-3210040
Poland - Warsaw
Los Angeles Tel: 48-22-3325737
Mission Viejo, CA
Romania - Bucharest
Tel: 949-462-9523 Tel: 40-21-407-87-50
Fax: 949-462-9608
Tel: 951-273-7800 Spain - Madrid
Tel: 34-91-708-08-90
Raleigh, NC Fax: 34-91-708-08-91
Tel: 919-844-7510
Sweden - Gothenberg
New York, NY Tel: 46-31-704-60-40
Tel: 631-435-6000
Sweden - Stockholm
San Jose, CA Tel: 46-8-5090-4654
Tel: 408-735-9110
Tel: 408-436-4270 UK - Wokingham
Tel: 44-118-921-5800
Canada - Toronto Fax: 44-118-921-5820
Tel: 905-695-1980
Fax: 905-695-2078

05/14/19

PIC18LF26 27 45 46 47 55 56 57K42 Data Sheet 40001919E PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

PIC18LF26 27 45 46 47 55 56 57K42 Data Sheet 40001919E PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PIC18LF26 27 45 46 47 55 56 57K42 Data Sheet 40001919E PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PIC18(L)F26/27/45/46/47/55/56/57K42

28/40/44/48-Pin, Low-Power High-Performance

Core Features Memory

 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc. DS40001919E-page 1

 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc. DS40001919E-page 2

 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc. DS40001919E-page 3

8-bit/ (with HLT) /16-bit Timer

Direct Memory Access (DMA)

Peripheral Module Disable

Memory Access Partition

Peripheral Pin Select

28-pin SPDIP, SOIC, SSOP

Note: See Table 1 for location of all peripheral functions.

28-pin QFN (6x6x0.9mm), UQFN (6x6x0.5mm)

Note 1: See Table 1 for location of all peripheral functions.

 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc. DS40001919E-page 5

Note: See Table 2 for location of all peripheral functions.

40-pin UQFN (5x5x0.5mm)

Note 1: See Table 2 for location of all peripheral functions.

 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc. DS40001919E-page 6

44-pin QFN (8x8x0.9mm)

44-pin TQFP (10x10x1mm)

Note: See Table 2 for location of all peripheral functions.

 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc. DS40001919E-page 7

48-pin TQFP (7x7x1mm)/

Note: See Table 3 for location of all peripheral functions.

 2017-2019 Microchip Technology Inc. DS40001919E-page 8

TABLE 1: 28-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE (PIC18(L)F2XK42)

Clock Reference (CLKR)

Zero Cross Detect

CCP and PWM

RA0 2 27 ANA0 — — C1IN0- — — — — — — — — CLCIN0(1) — — IOCA0 —

RB7 28 25 ANB7 — DAC1OUT2 — — — — RX2(1) — T6IN(1) — — CLCIN3(1) — — IOCB7 ICSPDAT

Clock Reference (CLKR)

Zero Cross Detect

CCP and PWM

2: All output signals shown in this row are PPS remappable.

Clock Reference (CLKR)

Zero Cross Detect

CCP and PWM

Clock Reference (CLKR)

Zero Cross Detect

CCP and PWM

Clock Reference (CLKR)

Zero Cross Detect

CCP and PWM

TABLE 3: 48-PIN ALLOCATION TABLE FOR PIC18(L)F5XK42

Clock Reference (CLKR)

Zero Cross Detect

CCP and PWM

RC0 34 34 ANC0 — — — — — — — — T1CKI(1) — — — — — IOCC0 SOSCO

Clock Reference (CLKR)

Zero Cross Detect

CCP and PWM

Clock Reference (CLKR)

Zero Cross Detect

CCP and PWM